JP2024026796A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine that can suppress occurrence of defects compared to the prior arts.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a game board in which a game using game balls is performed on the front side; a frame main body to which the game board is detachably attached from the front; and a game ball supply unit provided on the rear side of the frame main body for receiving the game balls from the outside of the game machine to guide them to the downstream side. The game ball supply unit includes: a ball storage unit for receiving the game balls from the outside of the game machine; and a ball guiding unit for guiding the game balls stored in the ball storage unit to the downstream side and having a discharge hole that allows foreign matters to fall. A plurality of boards are provided on the rear side of the game machine, and a specific board out of the plurality of boards is arranged on the rear side of the game machine, so as to be positioned in the front side with respect to the ball guiding unit.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 18

COPYRIGHT: (C)2024,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been proposed that include a board such as a power supply board that can generate various power supplies necessary for the gaming machine based on external power supplied from outside the gaming machine (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2014-008221A (Figure 2)

By the way, even if you instruct staff such as clerks of game halls to check whether the fuse wire of the fuse provided on the circuit board is blown or not over the phone, it is not easy to check whether the fuse wire is blown or not. It was difficult to confirm.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which it is possible to easily check whether or not a fuse wire is disconnected.

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are presented below. In addition, the effects, etc. will be explained as necessary. Further, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention will be shown as appropriate, but the invention is not limited in any way.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention
In a gaming machine equipped with a board on which multiple electronic components including fuses are mounted,
On the mounting surface of the board,
A dark resist film of green or black color is formed over substantially the entire area, and position specifying information for specifying the mounting area of the fuse is printed on the resist film,
The position specifying information is a bright color compared to the color of the resist film,
A specific mounting area facing the glass tube of the fuse among the mounting areas of the fuse specified by the position specifying information is configured such that the resist film is formed and the specific mounting area is visually recognized in the dark color;
Wired so that AC power is input to a first terminal part of the fuse, and AC power is output from a second terminal part of the fuse,
The signal wiring pattern of the board is formed without passing through the specific mounting area,
Furthermore, the gaming machine is equipped with a special electronic component that is activated when the voltage of the power supply input to the gaming machine exceeds a preset voltage, and the fuse is connected to the power supply input to the gaming machine and the electric power. connected to
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of the present invention, visibility of the fuse wire can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a cross-sectional view of the door frame cut at the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above. It is a cross-sectional view of the door frame lower unit cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. (a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the first movable part of the door frame presentation device has been moved to the rising end, and (b) is a perspective view showing a state in which the presentation operation section has been moved from the state in (a) to the rising end. FIG. (a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing the lower front speaker grille, the grill decoration frame, and the lattice decoration part in (a) removed. (a) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing a state in which the grille decoration frame and the lattice decoration part are removed in (a). It is a top view of the door frame lower unit showing a state where game balls are stored in the upper tray of the door frame. It is an explanatory view showing a peripheral light area in a door frame. (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the door frame effect display device and the effect operation section in the door frame effect display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the decoration of the effect operation section by the effect image of the door frame effect display device. It is an explanatory view showing an example, and (c) is an explanatory view showing an example of a collaboration effect by the effect image of the door frame effect display device and the movable effect of the effect operation part. It is a front view of the main body frame with the game board removed. It is a perspective view of the main body frame with the game board removed from the right front. It is a perspective view of the main body frame with the game board removed from the front left. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is a back view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotational position of the dispensing blade. It is a back view of the dispensing device for explaining prevention of ball clogging and ball falling out. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the back. (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front bottom. It is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 42(a) as seen from the front. It is an explanatory view showing an area where game balls overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side. 40(a) is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 40(a), and is a schematic diagram of the configuration as a countermeasure against metal powder. It is a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to a second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to a second embodiment. It is a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to a third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to a third embodiment. It is a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to a fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to a fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the configuration of measures against metal powder with the game board removed. It is a front view of the main body frame with the game board attached. It is a front view of the main body frame with the game board removed. (A) is a perspective view of the main body frame with the game board removed, viewed from the lower right front, and (B) is a perspective view of the main body frame of a modified example with the game board removed, viewed from the lower right front. (A) The area where the upper decorative part of the door frame is located corresponds to the area where the tank rail hangs down and faces the opening of the game board mounting part when viewed from the front when the game board is removed from the main body frame. (B) is a diagram schematically showing a side view of the pachinko machine seen from the left side. (A) is a plan view schematically showing the tank rail seen from above, and (B) is a front view schematically showing the tank rail seen from the front of the pachinko machine. (A) is a plan view schematically showing the tank rail seen from above, and (B) is a front view schematically showing the tank rail seen from the front of the pachinko machine. (A) It is a front view of the inside of the second rail cover seen from the front, and (B) The inside of the second rail cover in a state where the pachinko machine is tilted so that the side where the ball guiding unit is provided is the bottom surface. FIG. It is a front view of the back side of the pachinko machine for explaining areas A and B. It is a split perspective view of a pachinko machine when a drawer connector is provided. FIG. 3 is a side view of the main body frame for explaining the position of the drawer connector when (A) the game board is not installed and (B) when the game board is installed. It is a front view of the back side of the pachinko machine when an external terminal board is provided below the tank rail. It is a side view of the main body frame for explaining the position of the external terminal board when the game board is attached. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame when a protrusion is provided, viewed from the front left. FIG. 3 is a side view of the main body frame for explaining the position of the protrusion when (A) the game board is not installed and (B) when the game board is installed. It is a front view of a game board in which a game panel etc. are made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 67 viewed from the front right. FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 67 viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind. FIG. 3 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from a function display unit on the main control board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board with the game panel etc. made transparent. (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the game panel is made opaque and the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. 78 is an enlarged front view of the distribution passage group in the upper right corner of FIG. 77. FIG. 78 is an enlarged front view of the lower right corner attacker unit in FIG. 77. FIG. (a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group for center accessories that is different from FIG. It is an enlarged view of the main part showing. (a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group for a center accessory that is further different from FIG. 80, and (b) is an enlarged view of a main part showing a further different embodiment of a distribution passage group for a center accessory It is a diagram. 80 and 81 is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a center accessory, which is further different from FIGS. 80 and 81. FIG. It is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the back first production unit of the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back first production unit of the back unit seen from the back. It is a front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative board in the back first presentation unit. It is a perspective view of the back second production unit of the back unit seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the back second production unit of the back unit seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back second production unit, mainly disassembled into each configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back second production unit, mainly disassembled into each configuration and viewed from the back. It is a front view showing the drive mechanism in the back second production unit. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing the movement of a plurality of rotating decorations in the back second presentation unit. (e) to (g) are explanatory diagrams showing the movement of a plurality of rotating decorations in the back second presentation unit continuing from FIG. 94. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of LED in a back second production unit. It is a perspective view of the back third production unit of the back unit seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the back third production unit of the back unit seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back third production unit disassembled into each main component and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back third production unit disassembled into each main component and seen from the back. It is a front view showing the drive mechanism and the decoration board in the back third production unit in a state where the left lateral ring decoration and the right lateral ring decoration have been moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which a plurality of rotating decorations in the back second production unit are rotated clockwise from the normal state and revolved 15 degrees. It is an enlarged front view showing the lower part of the game board in a state where the special rotary decorative body in the back second performance unit is moved to a specific position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper vertical ring decorative body and the lower vertical ring decorative body in the back third performance unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the left lateral ring decoration and the right lateral ring decoration in the back third performance unit have been moved to their appearance positions. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper vertical ring decoration, the lower vertical ring decoration, the left horizontal ring decoration, and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third production unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper vertical ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third production unit are moved halfway to their appearance positions. It is a front view of the game board showing an example of a performance image on the performance display device when a malfunction occurs in the third performance unit on the back. It is a front view of the game board showing an example of a shadow effect executed during a light emission effect in the back unit. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in a state where the game board is facing from the door window of the door frame. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. (a) is an enlarged view of a part of the area where SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and (b) is a view of this enlarged view from the right side of the main control board. This is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board in which SMD type electronic components, which are substitutes for lead type electronic components, are concentrated in a predetermined area. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram (b) showing the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of a board that has been miniaturized. 113 is a diagram showing the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board in the enlarged view of FIG. 112. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a main control board box of the main control unit. It is a figure (a) showing the front side (mounting side) of the setting change board, and a figure (b) showing the back side (soldering side) of the setting change board, and a game with the main control board box attached to the game board. It is a figure (c) which shows a part of the lower part of the left side view of a board. Modified example 1(a) showing the lower part of the left side view of the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board, and the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board. It is modification 2 (b) which shows a part of the lower part of the left side view of. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side power-on processing. 120 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 118. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting value confirmation display processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of error display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 125 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit power is turned on in FIG. 124. 125 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is powered on after FIG. 125. FIG. It is a flowchart showing an example of payout control unit timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first starting port passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the preliminary determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the second starting port passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing regarding jackpots, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for lottery processing regarding types of jackpots. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot control process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big prize opening opening/closing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the second reception opening/closing process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the main control side power-on processing. It is a time chart showing a modification example of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine while changing the setting values. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine during confirmation display of setting values. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during confirmation display of set values. 7 is a time chart illustrating a monitoring state for fraudulent acts during a setting change of setting values. 7 is a time chart showing a monitoring state for fraudulent acts during confirmation display of setting values. It is a time chart showing the transmission timing of commands when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the main control side power-on processing. It is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. 12 is a time chart illustrating a case where a warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends. It is a time chart showing a case where the initial operation of the production member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. 12 is a time chart illustrating a modified example of a monitoring state for fraudulent activities while changing setting values or displaying setting values for confirmation. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the first fluctuation pattern setting process. This is a table showing the transition of the fluctuation pattern table after the pachinko machine is powered on, It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various performances based on the fluctuation pattern, This is a variation pattern table C used when the number of variations of special symbols after the pachinko machine is powered on is 500 times, This is a specific example of a roulette performance as a suggestion performance A2. It is a table showing a modification example of the change of the fluctuation pattern table after the pachinko machine is powered on. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram illustrating an outline of the circuit configuration of a power supply board. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board. 172 is a view taken along arrow B in FIG. 172. FIG. This is silkscreen printing (Part 1) of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board. This is silk-screen printing (Part 2) of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a placement method of a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components having the same shape. Examples (a) and (b) where it is difficult to use the fusing confirmation area, examples (1), (c), and (d) where the fusing confirmation area can be used, and examples (part 1) where it is difficult to use the fusing confirmation area. 2) (e) and (f). Examples (1) (a) and (b) in which the fusing confirmation area can be used, and examples (2) (c) and (d) in which the fusing confirmation area can be used. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the placement method of the fuse that is most likely to blow out among the three fuses. FIG. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven is provided. In addition, what is composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is referred to as a front frame.

As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is an outer frame that connects a left outer frame part 10 and a right outer frame part 20 that are separated from each other left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the left outer frame part 10 and the right outer frame part 20. The upper part 30, the lower outer frame 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame 10 and the right outer frame 20, the upper outer frame hinge part 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame 30, The outer frame lower hinge part 60 is attached to the lower right side surface of the left frame part 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower part 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is connected to the main body frame upper hinge part 510 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge part 50 and the outer frame lower hinge part 60. The lower hinge portion 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side in front view.

The door frame 3 includes a game window 201 that closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven so as to be visible from the front side, and an upper plate 130 that stores the game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a. It also includes a lower tray 140 and a handle 111 operated by the player to drive the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that its front surface can be opened and closed by a main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and a main body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape that is open to the front. The main body frame 4 includes a game board mounting part 301 that removably holds the game board 5 from the front, a main body frame upper hinge part 510 provided at the upper end on the left side when viewed from the front, and a main body frame provided at the lower end on the left side. A lower frame hinge portion 520, a ball firing device 540 provided on the right side below the game board mounting portion 301 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an upper tray 130 and a lower tray. 140, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 has a main frame upper hinge part 510 and a main body frame lower hinge part 520 attached to the outer frame 2 by an outer frame upper hinge part 50 and an outer frame lower hinge part 60 so as to be openable and closable, and also has a door (not shown). A door frame 3 is attached to a main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable via a frame upper hinge portion and a door frame lower hinge portion.

The game board 5 is removably attached to the game board attachment part 301 of the main body frame 4. Although not shown, the game board 5 includes a general prize opening and a first start opening that grant a predetermined benefit to the player (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) by accepting or passing the game balls B. , a gate part, a second starting opening, a big prize opening, and an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 4 and the like. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects a left outer frame part 10 and a right outer frame part 20, which are separated from each other left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the left outer frame part 10 and the right outer frame part 20. the outer frame upper part 30, the outer frame lower part 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20, and the outer frame upper hinge attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper part 30. portion 50, and an outer frame lower hinge portion 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left portion 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower portion 40.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge part 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge part 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge part 510 and the main body frame lower hinge part 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge part 50 and the outer frame lower hinge part 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

[3. door frame]
The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame cut at the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above.

The door frame 3 is approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed into a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front via the main body frame 4. It is being The door frame 3 includes a game window 201 that closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven so as to be visible from the front side, and a window that stores the game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a. It includes a tray 130 and a handle 111 operated by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper tray 130 into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1, and includes various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative parts have no decorative plating applied at all, while others have decorative plating applied to the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating, such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity, so electromagnetic noise may penetrate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, among the various decorative parts, those whose entire front and back surfaces are decorated with decorative plating are connected to the metal door frame in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, which will be described later, via wiring (not shown). electrically connected to the reinforcing unit (some decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit via wiring (not shown); (Some are attached to the door frame reinforcement unit and electrically connected.) This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the various decorative sections from entering the board ground of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative sections by transmitting it to the metal door frame reinforcing unit.

Among the various decorative parts, if the electromagnetic noise that penetrates into the decorative parts that are coated with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), it will be connected to the door frame metal ground (described later). It is transmitted to the frame ground board 559 via the line, and from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, and is removed from the pachinko machine 1. That is, in this embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side.

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit (not shown) which is rectangular in shape and has a frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a portion extending from the lower end to approximately 1/4 of the total height and located on the front side of the door frame base unit. The lower door frame unit 100 provided, the upper door frame unit 200 provided on the upper side of the lower door frame unit 100 and in front of the door frame base unit, the upper hinge part 510 of the main body frame 4, and The door frame upper hinge part and the door frame lower hinge part (not shown) are rotatably and detachably supported by the main body frame lower hinge part 520.

The door frame base unit includes a door frame base (not shown), which has a square (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and has a game window 201 penetrating from front to back, and a door frame base (not shown) on the rear side of the door frame base. A door frame main relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the lower part when viewed from the rear, a door frame sub relay board (not shown) attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board when viewed from the rear, and a door frame sub relay board (not shown) attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board when viewed from the rear. A handle rear relay board (not shown) attached to the left side in rear view, a door frame relay board cover (not shown) that covers a part of the door frame main relay board and a part of the door frame sub relay board from the rear side, and a handle rear relay board. It includes a handle rear relay board cover (not shown) that covers the board from the rear side, and a cable cover (not shown) that covers the wiring cable (not shown).

The door frame base unit also includes a metal frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) attached to the rear side of the door frame base, and a metal door frame top hinge assembly attached to the door frame reinforcement unit. It includes a solid body 120, a door frame lower hinge member 125, and a metal opening/closing cylinder lock 127 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit.

The door frame reinforcing unit is attached to the rear side of the door frame base to reinforce the door frame base and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 127 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

In addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to provide rigidity, the door frame reinforcing unit also functions as a door frame metal ground, and connects the frame ground board 559 with electricity via a door frame metal ground wire (not shown). connected. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via an island equipment ground wire (not shown).

The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a handle 111 that can be operated by the player to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, a bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, and a bulging portion 120. an upper tray 130 provided on the upper surface for storing game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a; a lower tray 140 provided below the upper tray 130 for storing game balls B; A door frame presentation device 150 is provided on the top surface of the bulge portion and is used to present a predetermined presentation to the player; an upper plate ball removal button 124 that releases the ball to the player; a ball lending button 125 and a return button 126 provided on the top surface of the bulging portion 120; and a door frame sub provided behind the ball lending button 125 and return button 126. It includes a display section 185 and a lower front speaker 191 provided on the front surface of the bulge section 120.

The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 includes a game window 201 with an inverted U-shaped inner periphery that allows the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 to be viewed from the front, and a transparent closing glass that closes the game window 201. 205, a door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 provided along the inner circumference of the game window 201, a door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 provided on the outside of the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, and a door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 provided along the inner circumference of the game window 201. The door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 covers the upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 220, and the upper speaker unit 240 is provided on the upper front surface of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230. There is.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a ball feeding unit (not shown) for feeding the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The ball feeding unit includes a ball feeding solenoid 105 (see FIG. 67) controlled by the firing control section 372 of the paying out control board 370.

[3-1. Door frame lower unit]
Next, the door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 13 and the like. FIG. 11 is a sectional view of the door frame lower unit cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. FIG. 12(a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the first movable part of the door frame presentation device has been moved to the rising end, and FIG. 12(b) is a perspective view showing the state in which the presentation operation section has been moved from the state of (a) to the rising end. It is a perspective view showing a state. FIG. 13(a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and FIG. 13(b) is an enlarged front view showing the lower front speaker grille, grill decoration frame, and lattice decoration part in FIG. 13(a) with removed. .

The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 is arranged below the game window 201 that closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 held on the main body frame 4 so as to be visible from the front. The lower door frame unit 100 includes a handle unit 110 that is provided at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and that can be operated by the player to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, and a handle unit 110 that is provided above and to the left of the handle unit 110. It includes a bulging portion 120 that bulges forward with respect to a surface that closes the front surface of the main body frame 4.

Further, the door frame lower unit 100 is provided so as to surround the device placement part 123 on the upper surface of the bulging part 120, and includes an upper tray 130 for storing game balls B, and a lower part of the upper tray 130 at the center in the left-right direction. A lower tray 140 is provided on the left side for storing game balls B, and a door frame presentation device is provided on the device placement portion 123 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and is capable of presenting a predetermined presentation to the player. 150, a door frame sub-display section 185 provided at the upper right corner when viewed from the front, and a lower front speaker unit 190 provided at the front surface of the bulge section 120.

[3-1a. Handle unit]
The handle unit 110 of the door frame lower unit 100 includes a handle 111 that can be grasped and rotated by the player, a handle cover 112 provided on the front side of the handle 111, and a handle unit 110 that rotatably supports the handle 111. and a handle base 113. The handle unit 110 is provided within the handle base 113, and includes a handle rotation detection sensor 114 (see FIG. 67) that detects the rotation angle of the handle 111, and a handle rotation detection sensor 114 (see FIG. 67) that detects whether the player is touching the handle 111. It includes a handle touch sensor 115 for sensing, a handle return spring (not shown) that biases the handle 111 counterclockwise, and a single button 116 that can be pressed by the player.

The handle unit 110 is inclined so that the rotation axis of the handle 111 moves to the right as it goes forward. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 111 of the handle unit 110 and can perform rotational operations without feeling uncomfortable. Further, the handle unit 110 is configured such that the handle base 113 is extendable and retractable in the direction in which the rotation axis of the handle 111 extends, and can be held at a desired extendable and retractable position. Thereby, the position of the handle 111 in the front and back direction can be adjusted, so that the handle 111 can be operated at a position that is easy for the player to operate.

The handle 111 is supported by a handle base 113 so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angular range. The handle 111 has a plurality of (four in this case) protrusions that are spaced apart in the circumferential direction and protrude from the outer peripheral surface. The handle cover 112 has translucency, and can be decorated with light in various colors using a plurality of full-color LEDs arranged at the rear.

The handle rotation detection sensor 114 of the handle unit 110 is a variable resistor whose internal resistance changes depending on the rotation angle of the handle 111. The driving force of a firing solenoid 331 in a ball firing device 540 (described later) changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 114, which changes with the rotational operation of the handle 111, and the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 111. B can be driven into the game area 5a.

The handle touch sensor of the handle unit 110 detects the electrostatic capacitance of the handle 111 and the like. When a player touches the handle 111, etc., the electrostatic capacitance of the handle 111, etc. changes. Therefore, by detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the handle 111, etc. with a handle touch sensor, it can be determined whether or not the player is touching the handle 111. Detect. In this embodiment, when the handle 111 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 115 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection by the handle rotation detection sensor 114 is accepted, and the strength is determined according to the rotation angle of the handle 111. The driving of the firing solenoid 331 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

In other words, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the gaming area 5a by rotating the handle 111 in some way without touching the handle 111, the handle touch sensor 115 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 331 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from playing a game by rotating the handle 111 in a way different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

When the player presses the single button 116 of the handle unit 110 while rotating the handle 111, the firing control section 372 of the payout control board 370 stops the firing solenoid 331. Thereby, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 111. Then, by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 116, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single-shot button 116.

[3-1b. bulging part]
The bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 has a T-shape with a short axis extending vertically when viewed from the front, and has a rear end side that extends in the left-right direction of the door frame 3. It is formed into an isosceles trapezoid shape that has a full width and becomes narrower toward the front (see FIG. 10, etc.). The bulging portion 120 bulges forward for a length slightly longer than half of the total width in the left-right direction. The upper surface of the bulging portion 120 is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so as to be located downward as it goes forward.

In the bulging portion 120, in the left-right direction, the center portion of the door frame 3 divided into three equal parts bulges forward over the entire height from the bottom end of the door frame 3 to the top surface, and the remaining portion (left and right sides) (a portion of the door frame 3) bulges forward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height from the bottom end to the top surface of the door frame 3. As a result, the shape of the bulging portion 120 when viewed from the front is T-shaped. The bulging portion 120 has a speaker mounting port 120a that is square and opens at the lower part of the center of the front surface. A lower front speaker unit 190 is attached to this speaker attachment port 120a.

Further, the bulging portion 120 has a sound emitting slit 120b and a heat dissipating slit extending vertically on both left and right sides of a portion (a portion where the speaker mounting port 120a is open) extending vertically in a T-shape when viewed from the front. 120c is provided. The sound emitting slit 120b is for emitting sound from a lower front speaker 191, which will be described later, to the outside. Further, the heat radiation slit 120c is for releasing heat from a first lifting drive motor 175b, a second lifting drive motor 182, a lower front speaker 191, etc. in the door frame presentation device 150, which will be described later, to the outside.

The bulging portion 120 includes an upper bulging decorative portion 121 provided at the upper edge of the front surface, a lower bulging decorative portion 122 provided at the lower edge of the front surface, and a rear end at the center in the left-right direction of the upper surface. A device placement part 123 that is provided so as to protrude forward from the side, an upper tray ball removal button 124 that is provided on the upper surface and releases the game ball B in the upper tray 130 to the lower tray 140, and an upper tray ball removal button 124 A ball rental button 125 and a return button 126 are provided behind the withdrawal button 124.

The upper bulge decoration part 121 and the lower bulge decoration part 122 are translucent, milky white, and are formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The bulging part upper decorative part 121 extends along the upper edge of the front surface of the bulging part 120, and is provided so as to decorate the front upper edge of the upper plate 130 described above. The bulge upper decoration part 121 has a plurality of LEDs 121a inside (see FIG. 16). The plurality of LEDs 121a are arranged in a line in the direction in which the upper decorative portion 121 of the bulge portion extends. These plurality of LEDs 121a are full color LEDs.

The bulging upper decorative portion 121 has two rear ends spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction. This corresponds to the interval between the lower ends of the decorative parts 212. This bulging upper decorative part 121 is formed to match the upper internal decorative part 212 when assembled to the door frame 3, and forms one continuous decoration with the upper internal decorative part 212. There is. This bulge upper decorative portion 121 and the upper inner decorative portion 212 constitute a first surrounding light area LA1 that emits light and decorates the surroundings of the game window 201.

Further, the bulge upper decorative portion 121 decorates the upper side of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper plate 130 above the upper end thereof, and also raises the front wall (front peripheral wall 134) of the upper plate 130. This bulging upper decorative part 121 is configured so that a part of the light from the LED 121a is irradiated into the upper tray 130 (inside the storage area 131), and the game stored in the storage area 131 The sphere B can be illuminated with light and decorated with light.

The bulging lower decorative portion 122 extends along the lower edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120 . The bulging lower decoration part 122 has a plurality of LEDs 122a inside (see FIG. 16). The plurality of LEDs 122a are arranged in a line in the direction in which the lower bulging decorative portion 122 extends. These plurality of LEDs 122a are full color LEDs.

The device placement portion 123 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a horizontally long rectangle and an isosceles trapezoid whose base is the front side of the rectangle. The width of the device placement portion 123 in the left-right direction on the rear end side is approximately 1/2 of the full width of the door frame 3. The device placement portion 123 is open from above on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and is formed in a container shape extending into the bulging portion 120 from above.

The upper plate ball release button 124 is provided at the right corner of the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 on the right side of the upper plate 130. By pressing the upper tray ball removal button 124 downward, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be discharged from the outlet 136 to the lower tray 140. This upper tray ball removal button 124 releases the game ball B in the upper tray 130 to the lower tray 140 only while being pressed, and when the press is released, it moves upward and returns to its original state. Discharge to the lower tray 140 is stopped.

The upper plate ball release button 124 has a square outer shape. The upper plate bulb removal button 124 has a light emitting decoration part 124a that emits light from an LED arranged below. The light emitting decoration part 124a is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the upper plate bulb removal button 124. By causing the light-emitting decorative portion 124a to emit light, the upper plate bulb removal button 124 can be decorated with light.

The ball lending button 125 is arranged behind the upper plate ball removal button 124 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The ball rental button 125 has a circular outer shape. The return button 126 is arranged on the upper surface of the bulge 120 to the right of the ball rental button 125. The return button 126 has an equilateral triangular outer shape.

The ball lending button 125 is used to release a predetermined number of game balls B by inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing the button 125. The game balls B are supplied into the tray 130 and lent to players. When the return button 126 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is returned after deducting the amount of the game balls B lent out. Note that the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine is displayed on the door frame sub-display section 185.

[3-1c. Upper plate]
The upper plate 130 of the door frame 3 is recessed downward on the upper surface of the bulge 120, and has a storage area 131 in which game balls B are stored. The storage area 131 is connected to a front area 131a on the front side of the device placement section 123 (the area surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 15) and side areas 131b on both left and right outer sides of the device placement section 123, which are connected to each other by the front area 131a. (The part surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 15).

The front region 131a has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. The left side region 131b extends in the front-rear direction so that the width in the left-right direction becomes narrower from the rear end toward the front front region 131a. The right side region 131b extends halfway from the front region 131a side on the front end side so that the width in the left-right direction becomes wider as it goes toward the rear, and then extends in the front-rear direction so that the width becomes narrower toward the rear end side. It is extending. The upper tray 130 (storage area 131) is formed to surround the front side and both left and right outer sides of the device placement section 123.

The upper plate 130 includes a bottom wall 132 forming a bottom surface, a rear peripheral wall 133 rising upward from the rear end of the bottom wall 132, and a front peripheral wall rising upward from the front end of the bottom wall 132. 134, a supply port 135 that opens toward the front at the rear end of the left side region 131b, a delivery port 136 that opens toward the front at the rear end of the right side region 131b, and a delivery port 136. It is provided with an alignment part 137 that is provided in the vicinity of and aligns the game balls B toward the delivery port 136.

The bottom wall 132 of the upper plate 130 is inclined to become lower from the supply port 135 side toward the delivery port 136. The front peripheral wall 134 and the rear peripheral wall 133 stand up substantially vertically. The surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 are mirror-like. The upper plate 130 forms a storage area 131 by a bottom wall 132, a rear peripheral wall 133, and a front peripheral wall 134. The depth of the upper tray 130 (height from the bottom wall 132 to the upper ends of the rear peripheral wall 133 and the front peripheral wall 134) is formed deeper than the diameter of the game ball B even at the shallowest part (near the supply port 135).

The supply port 135 is for supplying the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the main body frame 4 into the storage area 131. The delivery port 136 is for delivering the game balls B stored in the storage area 131 from the storage area 131 to the ball launcher 540 and the lower tray 140. The alignment part 137 is bent downward so that the bottom wall 132 becomes lower toward the outlet 136 near the boundary between the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in the device placement part 123, which is a combination of a rectangle and an isosceles trapezoid in a plan view. ing.

Further, the upper plate 130 includes a storage light emitting decoration part 138 having a plurality of LEDs 138a that can emit light into the storage area 131. The plurality of LEDs 138a of the storage light emitting decoration part 138 are provided on the rear peripheral wall 133, and are arranged at a height above the bottom wall 132 above half the outer diameter of the game ball B and approximately parallel to the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133. It is provided. These LEDs 138a are full color LEDs. By causing the LED 138a of the storage light emitting decoration section 138 to emit light, the storage area 131 and the game balls B stored in the storage area 131 can be decorated with light emission.

The upper plate 130 is provided with a bulge upper decoration part 121 of the bulge part 120 at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134, and the front end side of the storage area 131 is raised by the bulge part upper decoration part 121, so that more Game balls B can be stored. Further, the upper plate 130 is configured such that a part of the light from the LED 121a of the upper decorative part 121 of the bulged part is irradiated into the storage area 131, and the light from the upper decorative part 121 of the bulged part is also emitted. The game balls B in the storage area 131 are decorated with light emission.

The upper plate 130 has a front area 131a on the front side of the device placement part 123 where the door frame effect device 150 is arranged, and side areas 131b on both left and right outer sides, and the front area 131a allows the door frame effect device 150 to be Since the game balls B can be stored in the front side, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be easily seen by the player. In addition, in the upper tray 130, the two side areas 131b connected by the front area 131a are areas that extend back and forth, so in addition to the front area 131a, the game balls B stored in the side area 131b are also , it can be made easier to see from the player's side.

Therefore, by making it easier to see the game balls B in the upper tray 130, it is possible to make the player aware of the amount of stored game balls B, so that as the game progresses, the game balls B in the upper tray 130 can be easily seen. Even if the stored amount decreases due to consumption, the game ball B can be refilled into the upper tray 130 by making it easier for the player to recognize the decrease in the stored amount, without the player noticing. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from disappearing from the upper tray 130, thereby preventing sudden interruption of the game, preventing the player from being disappointed due to the interruption of the game, and reducing the player's interest in the game. It can be suppressed.

In addition, in the upper tray 130, the game balls B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, so the player can direct his/her line of sight from the game area 5a to the door frame display below. By simply dropping it into the device 150, it is possible to instantly recognize whether there is a game ball B in the front area 131a, and there is no need for the player to carefully check whether there is a game ball B in the upper tray 130. , it becomes possible to make it easier for the player to concentrate on the game, and it is possible to enjoy the game and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, in the upper tray 130, the game balls B supplied into the storage area 131 from the supply port 135 pass through the front area 131a and are sent out from the delivery port 136 to the outside of the storage area 131. When the game balls B in the tray 130 are consumed, the game balls B flow in front of the player's eyes (front area 131a), making it easier for the player to recognize the consumption speed and amount of the game balls B. This makes it possible to easily achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, the upper tray 130 is provided with a storage light emitting decoration part 138 that irradiates light into the storage area 131, and since the light from the storage light emission decoration part 138 (LED 138a) is reflected upward by the game ball B, the storage area 131 is The game ball B stored in the upper tray 130 can be illuminated and decorated with light by the light from the light emitting decoration part 138, and the player can enjoy the light emitting decoration of the game ball B. , the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130, and the amount of stored game balls B in the upper tray 130 can be confirmed, and the same effect as described above can be achieved. can.

In addition, in the upper tray 130, the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, the front peripheral wall 134, etc. are formed into mirror-like surfaces, so that the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 are 130, it can give the player the illusion that game balls B are stored on the other side of the peripheral wall, making it appear as if many game balls B are stored on the upper tray 130. be able to.

Furthermore, since the upper tray 130 is provided with an alignment part 137 near the outlet 136 to align the game balls B, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the vicinity of the outlet 136, The game balls B stored in the tray 130 can be smoothly delivered from the delivery port 136 to the ball launcher 540 and the lower tray 140. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the game ball B being jammed, and it is possible to let the player enjoy the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, in the upper tray 130, the outlet 136 disposed in the right side area 131b is visible from the front, so the game balls B are ejected from the outlet 136, which could not be seen in conventional pachinko machines. The player can be seen being sent out, which can surprise the player, and can also strongly attract the player's interest, producing the same effects as described above.

[3-1d. Lower plate]
The lower plate 140 is provided below the upper plate 130 and on the left side of the central portion of the bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, and is formed into a shallow plate shape that is open upward. A space is provided between the lower plate 140 and the upper plate 130 (the lower surface of the left side portion of the bulging portion 120) such that a player's hand can be inserted. The front surface of the lower plate 140 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the front surface of the bulging portion 120 when viewed from above.

The lower plate 140 is formed at the lowest part of the bottom wall, and has a lower plate ball extraction hole 141 (see FIG. 9) that can be opened and closed. It has a lower tray ball removal button 142 for discharging the game balls B downward, and a full tank detection sensor 143 (see FIG. 67) that detects that the lower tray 140 is full of game balls B. are doing.

The game balls B in the upper tray 130 are supplied to the lower tray 140 by operating the upper tray ball removal button 124. Further, the lower tray 140 is supplied with the game balls B put out from the payout device 580 while the upper tray 130 is full of game balls B. Note that when the lower tray 140 is full of game balls B, the full tank detection sensor 143 detects that the lower tray 140 is full, and when the lower tray 140 is detected to be full, the payout device 580 releases the game balls B. Payouts will be temporarily suspended. Thereafter, when the lower tray 140 is no longer full (the full tank detection sensor 143 is not detected), the temporary suspension of dispensing is canceled.

The lower plate ball release button 142 is provided on the front surface of the lower plate 140, and has a rectangular outer shape. When the lower plate ball removal button 142 is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal hole 141 opens and the lower plate ball removal button 142 is kept pressed. If the lower plate ball eject button 142 is further pressed rearward in this state, the lower plate ball eject hole 141 closes and the lower plate ball eject button 142 moves forward to return to its original state.

The lower plate bulb release button 142 has a light-emitting decoration part 142a that emits light from an LED (not shown). The light emitting decoration part 142a is arranged so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the lower plate bulb removal button 142. By making the light-emitting decorative portion 142a emit light, the lower plate bulb removal button 142 can be decorated with light. For example, during a "jackpot" game in which many game balls B are paid out, the player's attention can be drawn to the lower tray 140 by making the lower tray ball withdrawal button 142 illuminated by the light emitting decoration section 142a. By operating the lower tray ball removal button 142, the game balls B in the lower tray 140 can be ejected into a dollar box or the like below, and the lower tray 140 becomes full and the payout of the game balls B is temporarily stopped. This can be avoided.

[3-1e. Overall configuration of door frame production device]
The door frame presentation device 150 is placed in a device placement portion 123 provided on the top surface of the bulging portion 120. The door frame presentation device 150 includes a transparent device cover 151 that closes the device placement section 123 that is open upward, and a door frame presentation display device 152 that is provided so as to be visible from the front through the device cover 151. a lower speaker unit 153 provided in front of the door frame effect display device 152; a first movable portion 155 provided in front of the lower speaker unit 153 so that its upper surface can be raised and lowered above the device cover 151; A production operation section 160 that is provided in the movable section 155 so that it can be raised and lowered and that can be pressed and operated by the player, a first elevating mechanism 170 that raises and lowers the first movable section 155, and a second elevating mechanism that raises and lowers the production operation section 160. A mechanism 180 is provided.

[3-1e-1. Device cover]
The device cover 151 has a shape in plan view that is the same as the device placement portion 123, which is a combination of a horizontally long rectangle and an isosceles trapezoid whose base is the front side of the rectangle. The device cover 151 has an isosceles trapezoid-shaped opening 151a having a large opening 151a in an isosceles trapezoidal portion, and a rectangular portion that is bent and inclined near the center in the front-rear direction so that the rear end side is upward. It has a surface portion 151b and a plurality of grill holes 151c penetrating in a hexagonal shape near the front end of the quadrangular portion. The entire device cover 151 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The first movable part 155 is inserted into the opening 151a of the device cover 151.

The upper end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151 matches the lower end of the door frame upper cover 232 of the door frame upper unit 200. Furthermore, the device cover 151 is inclined such that the front side of the inclined surface portion 151b becomes lower toward the front. Thereby, even if the game ball B is placed on the upper surface of the device cover 151, it can be rolled forward and released into the upper tray 130.

[3-1e-2. Door frame production display device]
In the door frame effect display device 152, the display screen for displaying the effect image is formed in a rectangular shape long in the left and right directions, and the length in the left and right direction is slightly shorter than 1/2 of the full width of the door frame 3. The door frame effect display device 152 is provided in an inclined state so that the lower side is located forward with respect to the upper side. In other words, the door frame effect display device 152 is directed toward the vicinity of the head of the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1. The upper side of the door frame effect display device 152 is located at a height near the upper end of the lower door frame unit 100, and the lower side is located at a height lower than the bottom surface of the front area 131a of the upper plate 130. Furthermore, the upper side of the door frame effect display device 152 is located near the rear end of the lower door frame unit 100 (device cover 151), and the lower side is located near the front end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151. The door frame effect display device 152 is a liquid crystal display device with a screen ratio of 16:9.

[3-1e-3. Lower speaker unit]
The lower speaker unit 153 includes a pair of lower speakers 153a that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, a lower speaker base 153b to which the pair of lower speakers 153a are attached, and a lower speaker base 153b that is attached to the lower speaker base 153b. It has a lower speaker decoration part 153c that decorates the outer periphery or between the lower speakers 153a. The pair of lower speakers 153a are tweeters that output high-frequency sound.

The lower speaker base 153b has a front surface that is inclined so that the rear side is located above the front side, and a rear surface that extends downward from the rear side of the front surface perpendicularly to the front surface. It is shaped like a container that is open from side to side and long from side to side. Further, the lower speaker base 153b has circular mounting holes formed on the front surface thereof and spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides. The front surface of the lower speaker base 153b is inclined at an inclination angle from the horizontal that is smaller than the inclination angle from the horizontal of the door frame effect display device 152 (see FIG. 11, etc.).

The lower speaker decoration part 153c is attached to the front surface of the lower speaker base 153b, and includes an annular part arranged around the outer periphery of the lower speaker 153a and a plurality of parts arranged between the pair of lower speakers 153a. It consists of an arc-shaped part. The lower speaker decoration part 153c has translucency, and can be decorated with light by emitting light from an LED (not shown) mounted on the lower speaker decoration board.

The lower speaker unit 153 is installed inside the lower speaker base 153b such that the pair of lower speakers 153a face forward through the attachment holes of the lower speaker base 153b. As a result, the pair of lower speakers 153a are directed toward the vicinity of the head of the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1. The lower speaker unit 153 has an upper end located at a height slightly lower than the vertical center of the door frame effect display device 152, and a lower end located at a height slightly lower than the lower end of the door frame effect display device 152. There is.

Further, the lower speaker unit 153 has a front end located forward from the rear end of the opening 151a of the device cover 151 (slightly rearward from the production operation section 160), and a rear end located at the front end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151. Located nearby. The lower speaker unit 153 is visible through the transparent device cover 151. Furthermore, the sound output from the pair of lower speakers 153a can be effectively radiated to the outside (outside the Pachinko machine 1) through the grill hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grill hole 156b of the first movable part main body 156.

The lower speaker unit 153 also has a lower speaker 153a and a speaker grill of the lower speaker 153a (device cover 151 and first movable body 156 (top wall), and the players can see the light-emitting decoration inside the speaker, which has not been seen in previous pachinko machines.

[3-1e-4. First movable part]
The first movable part 155 includes a first movable part main body 156 that is transparent and has a container shape that is open at the rear and the bottom, a first movable part base 157 attached to the lower side of the first movable part main body 156, and a first movable part base 157 that is attached to the lower side of the first movable part main body 156. The first movable part cover 158 is attached to the upper surface of the first movable part main body 156, and the first movable part decorative board 159 is attached to the inner side surface of the first movable part main body 156 (FIG. 11). and FIG. 12). The first movable part 155 is arranged in the opening 151a of the device cover 151. The first movable part 155 is supported by a first elevating mechanism 170 so as to be movable up and down, and is also moved up and down by the first elevating mechanism 170.

The first movable part main body 156 has a shape in a plan view similar to the shape of the opening 151a of the device cover 151, and is like a combination of a horizontally long rectangle and an isosceles trapezoid whose base is the front side of the rectangle. formed into a shape. The first movable part main body 156 has an upper wall shaped like a combination of a quadrangle and an isosceles trapezoid, and a side wall extending downward from the side of the upper wall excluding the rear side, and is open at the rear and bottom. It is shaped like a container. The upper wall (upper surface) of the first movable part main body 156 is inclined so that the front side is lower, and is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is higher.

The first movable part main body 156 includes an opening 156a extending horizontally in the vicinity of the front end of the upper wall in a rectangular shape, and a plurality of grilles extending in a hexagonal shape in a portion of the upper wall other than the opening 156a. It has a hole 156b and a plurality of through holes 156c arranged circumferentially in the side wall and penetrating in a square shape. The lower end of the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 is inserted into the opening portion 156a. The through hole 156c is formed in such a size that the LED 159a mounted on the first movable part decorative board 159 faces outward.

The first movable portion base 157 is formed into a flat plate shape that is long from side to side. The first movable part base 157 has a width in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the width in the front-rear direction at the opening 156a of the first movable part main body 156. The first movable portion base 157 is attached to the first movable portion main body 156 such that its front end is located at approximately the same position in the front-rear direction as the front end of the opening 156a of the first movable portion main body 156. The first movable part base 157 is attached to the first movable part main body 156 in a horizontal state. The first movable portion base 157 has a pair of elevating sliders 172 of the first elevating mechanism 170 attached to its lower surface, and a second elevating base 181 of the second elevating mechanism 180 to its upper surface.

The first movable part cover 158 has the same outer shape and the same size as the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156. The first movable part cover 158 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening frame part 158a corresponding to the opening part 156a of the first movable part main body 156, and a plurality of louver parts 158b extending left and right and spaced apart in the front and back direction. ,have. The first movable part cover 158 is provided with a plating layer having a silvery metallic luster on its surface. The opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 has a lower end protruding below the lower end of the louver portion 158b, and is inserted into the opening portion 156a of the first movable portion main body 156. A production operation section 160 is inserted within the frame of the opening frame section 158a.

The louver part 158b of the first movable part cover 158 extends with a constant width except for both ends in the left and right direction, and is formed in a triangular shape such that both ends in the left and right direction spread diagonally forward. . A plurality of (five in this case) louver portions 158b are provided at intervals slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B in the front-rear direction. Thereby, game balls B can be stored between the louver portions 158b. Incidentally, one game ball B is placed between the first louver part 158b from the front, two game balls B are placed between the second louver part 158b, and between the third louver part 158b. Three game balls B can be stored between them (see FIG. 15).

A plurality of LEDs 159a are mounted on the front surface of the first movable part decorative board 159. The plurality of LEDs 159a are arranged at positions corresponding to the through holes 156c of the first movable part main body 156. The first movable part decorative board 159 is attached to the inside of the side wall of the first movable part main body 156, so that the plurality of LEDs 159a mounted therein face outward from the through hole 156c of the side wall. The LED 159a of the first movable part decorative board 159 is a full color LED.

When the first movable part 155 is lowered (normal state) and the LED 159a is emitted, the first movable part decorative board 159 is connected to the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 and the side wall of the first movable part main body 156. Through the space, the upper part of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 can be decorated with light. Furthermore, when the first movable part 155 is raised and the LED 159a emits light, the first movable part decoration board 159 can decorate the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 with light, and the inside of the storage area 131 and the like can be decorated with light. Light can be radiated forward (to the player's side).

[3-1e-5. Performance operation section]
The performance operation section 160 is provided so as to be movable up and down with respect to the first movable section 155, and is a so-called push button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The performance operation unit 160 is supported by a second elevating mechanism 180 so as to be movable up and down, and is also moved up and down by the second elevating mechanism 180 (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

The production operation section 160 includes a push operation section 161 having translucency with the word "PUSH" formed on the top surface, and an operation section arranged below the push operation section 161 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface. an operating unit movable base 163 to which the pressing operation unit 161 and the operating unit decorative board 162 are attached, and a second elevating mechanism 180 that supports the operating unit movable base 163 so as to be movable up and down; The operating unit base 164 attached to the first movable unit 155 via the (second elevating base 181), the operating unit spring that biases the operating unit movable base 163 upward, and the urging force of the operating unit spring A press detection sensor 165 (see FIG. 67) that detects the press operation section 161 that has moved downward against the pressure is provided.

The push operation unit 161 is a rectangular shape that is elongated from side to side, and has the letters "PUSH" formed in relief on its upper surface. The pressing operation portion 161 has an outer peripheral shape that is slightly smaller than the inside of the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158.

The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the operation unit decorative board 162 are full-color LEDs. The operation section decorative board 162 has a first LED that emits light upward, and a second LED that emits light outward along the upper surface of the operation section decorative board 162, which are mounted on the top surface. The operation unit decoration board 162 can decorate the push operation unit 161 (characters “PUSH”) with light emission by causing the first LED to emit light. In addition, by lighting the second LED, the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 can be decorated with light, and when the production operation unit 160 is at the lower end, the opening frame 158a of the first movable unit cover 158 can be illuminated. Can be decorated with light.

The operating unit movable base 163 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open bottom. The operating unit movable base 163 is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer circumference of the pressing operating unit 161. A pressing operation section 161 is attached to the upper surface of the operation section movable base 163 so as to sandwich the operation section decorative board 162 therebetween. An operating unit base 164 is inserted into the operating unit movable base 163 from below.

The operating unit base 164 has a box-shaped portion that is large enough to be inserted into the interior of the operating unit movable base 163 and is open at the top and is long from the left to the right, and a box-shaped portion extending from the box-shaped portion to the same position as the outer periphery of the operating unit movable base 163. It consists of a flange-shaped part that protrudes outward. The operation unit base 164 supports the operation unit movable base 163 so as to be movable up and down within a predetermined range. A second elevating mechanism 180 is attached to the lower surface of the operating unit base 164.

The upper end of the operating spring is in contact with the lower surface of the upper wall of the operating unit movable base 163, and the lower end is in contact with the upper surface of the lower wall of the operating unit base 164. The pressure detection sensor 165 is installed inside the operation unit base 164 and detects a detection piece (not shown) of the operation unit movable base 163 to detect a pressing operation of the press operation unit 161 via the operation unit movable base 163. Detect.

[3-1e-6. First lifting mechanism]
As shown in FIG. 11, the first elevating mechanism 170 is attached inside the bulging portion 120 and is for elevating the first movable portion 155. The first elevating mechanism 170 includes a pair of elevating rails 171 that are attached to the interior of the bulge 120 at a distance from each other in the left and right directions and extend vertically, and a pair of elevating and lowering rails 171 that are each guided in the vertical direction by the pair of elevating rails 171. A slider 172, a connecting portion 173 connecting the pair of elevating sliders 172, and a rod whose one end is rotatably attached to the elevating slider 172 and the other end is rotatably attached to the bulge 120. a pair of lifting arms 174 having a shape, a first lifting drive mechanism 175 that rotates the pair of lifting arms 174, and a first lifting detection sensor 176 that detects the lifting position of the lifting slider 172 (first movable portion 155); It is equipped with

The pair of elevating rails 171 are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions at an interval longer than the length of the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161) in the left and right direction. A pair of elevating rails 171 are attached inside the bulge 120 so as to extend vertically. The pair of elevating sliders 172 have their respective upper ends attached to the lower surface of the first movable part base 157 of the first movable part 155 , and their respective lower ends attached to the connecting part 173 .

The pair of elevating arms 174 are attached to the corresponding elevating slider 172 so that their respective front ends can rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and are also attached so as to be slidable in the longitudinal direction of the elevating arms 174. . Further, the rear ends of the pair of lifting arms 174 are rotatably attached to the bulging portion 120 around an axis extending in the left-right direction. The pair of lifting arms 174 each have a slit 174a extending in the longitudinal direction at a position closer to the front end with respect to the center in the longitudinal direction.

The first elevating and lowering drive mechanism 175 is provided for each of the pair of elevating and lowering arms 174. That is, a pair of first elevating drive mechanisms 175 are provided. The first elevating mechanism 170 rotates the pair of elevating arms 174 in a direction in which the front end sides of the pair of elevating arms 174 move upward, respectively, by means of the first elevating drive mechanism 175. The first movable part 155 (performance operation part 160) can be raised and lowered via a pair of raising and lowering sliders 172 to which are respectively attached.

To explain the first elevating drive mechanism 175 in detail, the first elevating drive mechanism 175 is slidably inserted into the slit 174a of the elevating arm 174, and the first elevating and lowering mechanism 175 revolves around an axis extending in the left and right direction. It has a pin 175a and a first elevating drive motor 175b that revolves the first elevating pin 175a. More specifically, the first elevating drive mechanism 175 includes a flat drive base 175c that is attached inside the bulge 120 and extends in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction, and a drive base 175c that extends in the left-right direction on the drive base 175c. A spur gear-shaped lifting gear 175d is attached to be rotatable around the axis and has a first lifting pin 175a attached at an eccentric position with respect to the rotating shaft. The driving gear 175e is attached to the rotating shaft of the lifting drive motor 175b.

In this embodiment, two first elevating drive motors 175b are attached to the drive base 175c, and a drive gear 175e attached to the rotating shaft of each first elevating drive motor 175b is connected to the elevating gear 175d. They mesh with each other. In other words, one elevating gear 175d is rotated by two first elevating drive motors 175b.

In this first elevating drive mechanism 175, when the drive gears 175e attached to the rotating shafts of the two first elevating drive motors 175b are rotated in the same direction, the elevating gears with which the respective drive gears 175e are meshed are activated. 175d rotates, and the first elevating pin 175a revolves around the axis of the elevating gear 175d. As this first elevating pin 175a revolves, the first elevating pin 175a slides within the slit 174a of the elevating arm 174 and presses the inside of the slit 174a in the vertical direction, causing the elevating arm 174 to move toward the rear end side. It will rotate (rotate) around . As a result, the front end of the lift arm 174 moves in the vertical direction, so the first movable portion 155 can be moved up and down via the lift slider 172 to which the front end of the lift arm 174 is attached.

The first elevation detection sensor 176 enters a detection state when the pair of elevation sliders 172 is located at the downward movement end (lowering end). That is, the first elevation detection sensor 176 detects, via the elevation slider 172, that the first movable portion 155 is located at the lower end.

[3-1e-7. Second lifting mechanism]
The second elevating mechanism 180 includes a second elevating base 181 that is attached to the upper surface of the first movable part base 157 in the first movable part 155 and supports the operating part base 164 of the production operating part 160 so as to be able to rise and fall; A second elevating drive motor 182 is attached to the second elevating base 181, and a second elevating pin 183 is attached to the rotating shaft of the second elevating drive motor 182 and revolves at an eccentric position with respect to the rotating shaft. , a lift transmission piece 184 having a slit 184a extending in the front-rear direction into which a second lift pin 183 is slidably inserted and whose upper part is attached to the operation unit base 164, and a second lift base 181 (performance operation unit 160). A second elevation detection sensor 180a that detects the elevation of the vehicle is provided.

The second elevating base 181 of the second elevating mechanism 180 moves the operating part base 164 in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the pressing operating part 161 (in the direction in which the inclined axis extends toward the front as it goes upward). ) is supported so that it can be raised and lowered.

In the second elevating mechanism 180, when the second elevating pin 183 is revolved by the second elevating drive motor 182, the second elevating pin 183 slides within the slit 184a of the elevating transmission piece 184 and moves up and down the inner surface of the slit 184a. direction, and the vertical transmission piece 184 moves in the vertical direction. Since the operation unit base 164 of the production operation unit 160 is attached to this elevation transmission piece 184, the production operation unit 160 can be raised and lowered via the elevation transmission piece 184.

In the second elevating mechanism 180, when the elevating transmitting piece 184 (acting operation section 160) is positioned at the lower end, the second elevating pin 183 is located near the rear end of the slit 184a extending in the front-rear direction. There is. In other words, the second lifting pin 183 is located at the bottom dead center. When raising the elevation transmission piece 184 from this state, the second elevation drive motor 182 causes the second elevation pin 183 to revolve so as to have a forward movement vector. As a result, the second elevating pin 183 slides forward within the slit 184a, and the second elevating pin 183 presses the inner surface of the slit 184a upward, causing the elevating transmission piece 184 to move upward. Become.

As the second elevating pin 183 further revolves, when the line connecting the center of the second elevating pin 183 and the center of revolution passes the central axis of the slit 184a, the second elevating pin 183 moves upward on the inner surface of the slit 184a. While pressing it, it slides backward inside the slit 184a. When the second elevating pin 183 reaches the vicinity of the rear end of the slit 184a, the driving of the second elevating drive motor 182 is stopped, and the revolution of the second elevating pin 183 is stopped. In this state, the second elevating pin 183 is located at the top dead center, and the elevating and lowering transmission piece 184 is located at the rising end.

When a force is applied to move the elevation transmission piece 184 downward, such as by pressing the production operation unit 160 while the elevation transmission piece 184 (production operation unit 160) is positioned at the rising end, Since the second elevating pin 183 is located at the top dead center, no force in the longitudinal direction acts on the second elevating pin 183. Therefore, since the second elevating pin 183 does not revolve, the elevating and lowering transmission piece 184 does not move downward.

Furthermore, when the production operation section 160 is pressed with the elevation transmission piece 184 positioned at the rising end, the production operation section 160 is operated by a player located in front of the production operation section 160. In addition to the downward movement vector, the backward movement vector acts on the object. On the other hand, in the rising end state, the second elevating pin 183 is located at the rear end of the slit 184a, so even if a backward movement vector acts on the second elevating pin 183 through the slit 184a, The second elevating pin 183 comes into contact with the rear end of the slit 184a, and the second elevating pin 183 is prevented from rotating, the elevating and lowering transmission piece 184 does not move downward, and the production operation unit 160 is moved to the rising end position. can be maintained.

The second lift detection sensor 180a is in a detection state when the second lift base 181 is located at the downward movement end (lowering end). That is, the second lift detection sensor 180a detects, via the second lift base 181, that the production operation section 160 is located at the lower end.

[3-1f. Door frame sub display]
The door frame sub-display section 185 is arranged on the right side of the door frame effect display device 152 in the door frame effect device 150, behind the upper plate ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126. The door frame sub-display section 185 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs arranged on the left and right. The door frame sub-display section 185 is provided in an inclined state so that the lower end side is located forward with respect to the upper end side. The door frame sub-display section 185 has a lower end arranged at the same height as the upper surface of the bulge section 120 from which the upper plate ball removal button 124, ball lending button 125, and return button 126 protrude.

The door frame sub-display section 185 includes a frame-shaped sub-display section decoration frame 186 that emits light and decorates the outer periphery of the three square 7-segment LEDs, and a door frame presentation device 150 that covers the three 7-segment LEDs and the sub-display section decoration frame 186. A transparent sub-display section cover 187 that is inclined at the same angle as the inclined surface section 151b of the device cover 151 is provided.

[3-1g. Lower front speaker unit]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 13, the lower front speaker unit 190 includes a lower front speaker 191 attached to the rear of the speaker attachment opening 120a of the bulging portion 120, and a plurality of grill holes passing through the speaker attachment opening 120a. a lower front speaker grille 192 that closes the lower front speaker grille 192; a horizontal lattice-shaped grille decorative frame 193 disposed in front of the lower front speaker grille 192 and attached to the front surface of the bulging portion 120; and each lattice in the grille decorative frame 193. The bar-shaped lattice decoration parts 194 are arranged on the rear side of each section, and the lattice decoration LEDs 195 are provided at both ends of each lattice decoration part 194 and decorate the lattice decoration parts 194 with light.

The lower front speaker 191 is a woofer that outputs low-frequency sound. The lower front speaker grill 192 is attached to the inside of the bulge 120. The lower front speaker grill 192 is made of punched metal.

The grille decorative frame 193 has a plating layer with a silvery metallic luster on its surface. The grille decorative frame 193 includes a rectangular frame along the inner periphery of the speaker attachment port 120a of the bulging portion 120, and a plurality of grille decorative frames arranged vertically apart from each other, connecting two vertically extending sides of the frame. It is composed of a lattice part and a lattice part. The lattice portion extending left and right of the grill decorative frame 193 extends with a constant width except for both ends in the left and right direction (general part), and both ends in the left and right direction extend diagonally downward toward the end. It is formed into a trapezoid shape that widens to a certain width and then extends.

The lattice decoration part 194 has translucency and is formed in a cylindrical shape that is elongated from side to side. Both ends of the lattice decoration part 194 in the left and right direction are located behind the trapezoidal part of the lattice part in the grill decoration frame 193, and the remaining part is located below the general part of the lattice part. Thereby, the portion of the lattice decoration portion 194 excluding both ends can be visually recognized from the front. A plurality of lattice decoration parts 194 are provided in front of the lower front speaker grille 192. The grid decoration LED 195 is a full color LED.

The lower front speaker unit 190 can output sounds in the bass range (low frequency) among the sounds to be outputted by the lower front speakers 191 . Since this lower front speaker unit 190 faces forward from the front side of the bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, it applies sound pressure to the player seated on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. can be done. In addition, the lower front speaker unit 190 can decorate the lattice decoration section 194 with light by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 195, and also allows the lattice decoration section 194 to be illuminated within the grill decoration frame 193 (lower front speaker The front side of the grill 192) can be decorated with light.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
Next, the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame base unit will be briefly explained. The cylinder lock 127 is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown), and cooperates with the locking unit 650 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is used to open and close the lock with 4. The cylinder lock 127 includes a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending back and forth, a metal keyhole 128 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and a keyhole 128 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body. A rotation transmitting member made of metal (not shown) is inserted into the key and rotates when a regular metal key is rotated.

The cylinder body of the cylinder lock 127 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed into a cylindrical shape with an open rear end (more specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a metal transmission cylinder 654 of a metal locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, By inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 128) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated. When the rotation transmission member of the cylinder lock 127 in the door frame 3 and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 are in contact with each other when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the cylinder lock 127 and the locking unit 650 are now electrically connected.

In addition, when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, or when opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3, the cylinder lock 127 should be used by an official such as a clerk at the game hall using a regular metal lock. The key is inserted into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and rotated in a predetermined direction (clockwise or counterclockwise, respectively). When an employee such as a clerk at an amusement hall inserts a regular metal key into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127, he or she will be charged with electricity and will receive electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge through the regular metal key. This will be transmitted to the cylinder lock 127. Therefore, in this embodiment, various boards (for example, a board having a power supply line and a board ground line) are not arranged in the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127 in order to prevent intrusion of electromagnetic noise.

[3-2. Door frame upper unit]
Next, the door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 5 to 10 and FIG. 14. FIG. 14(a) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the door frame, and FIG. 14(b) is an enlarged front view showing the grille decoration frame and the lattice decoration part removed in FIG. 14(a). The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 has a game window 201 that allows the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 held on the body frame 4 to be viewed from the front when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. and a door frame upper unit base 202 which is formed into an inverted U-shape with a vertically long outer circumference and a downwardly open inner circumference that forms the game window 201 when viewed from the front; A transparent closing glass 205 closes the inverted U-shaped inner periphery (gaming window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202.

Further, the door frame upper unit 200 includes a door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 provided in a band shape along the inner periphery of the inverted U-shape of the game window 201 on the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, and a door frame upper unit A door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 provided on the front side of the base 202 outside the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, a door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, and a door frame covering the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220. It includes an upper outer edge decoration unit 230 and an upper speaker unit 240 provided on the upper front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202.

[3-2a. Door frame upper unit base]
The door frame upper unit base 202 forms the rear surface of the door frame upper unit 200 (see FIG. 10). The door frame upper unit base 202 has a flat plate shape and is formed in the shape of a gate that is open downward. When viewed from the front, the door frame upper unit base 202 has an outer periphery formed in a rectangular shape that is vertically elongated, and an inner periphery formed in an inverted U-shape that is open downward. The size of the inner periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 is formed to be larger than the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged at the rear.

[3-2b. Closed glass]
The closing glass 205 is removably provided at the rear end of the door frame upper unit base 202 so as to close the inner periphery (gaming window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202 (see FIG. 10). . This closing glass 205 is designed to prevent the game ball B from falling forward from within the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. This is for closing the front side of the Closing glass 205 is transparent tempered glass.

[3-2c. Door frame upper interior decoration unit]
The door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 includes a wall-shaped upper inner base 211 that extends along the inner periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 with a constant width and projects forward, and A semi-cylindrical upper inner decoration part 212 that extends and is provided at the front end of the upper inner base 211, and an upper inner decoration part 212 that is provided behind the upper inner decoration part 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 213a mounted on the front surface. A decorative board 213 is provided.

The upper inner base 211 has an inverted U-shape when viewed from the front. At the front end of the upper inner base 211, a pair of linearly extending portions in an inverted U shape extend vertically in the up-down direction, and a semicircular arc extending portion in the inverted U shape extends upwardly. It is curved so that it protrudes forward. This upper inner base 211 is formed to be non-transparent. The distance in the left-right direction at the lower end of the upper inner base 211 matches the distance between the rear ends of the bulge upper decorative portion 121 of the bulge 120 of the lower door frame unit 100 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions.

The upper inner decoration part 212 is translucent, milky white, and formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The upper inner decoration board 213 is attached to the upper inner base 211, and a plurality of LEDs 213a mounted on the front surface are arranged in a row along the upper inner decoration part 212. The plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper inner decorative board 213 are full-color LEDs. By appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper inner decorative board 213 to emit light, the upper inner decorative portion 212 can be decorated with light.

The door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 is formed so that the lower end of the upper interior decoration part 212 coincides with the rear end of the bulge upper decoration part 121 of the bulge part 120 when assembled to the door frame 3. The upper inner decoration part 212 and the bulge upper decoration part 121 form one continuous decoration.

The upper interior decoration part 212 of this door frame upper interior decoration unit 210, together with the bulge part upper decoration part 121, is a first surrounding light area LA1 (surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. (parts that are connected). In addition, since the upper inner decoration part 212 is formed in a milky white color, the light from the plurality of LEDs 213a can be reduced and radiated outward, so that the game window surrounded by the upper inner decoration part 212 can be It is possible to prevent the inside of the game window 201 from becoming difficult to see due to glare, and the game area 5a can be viewed from the front through the game window 201 in good condition.

[3-2d. Upper door frame exterior decoration unit]
The door frame upper exterior decoration unit 220 has a rear end attached to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, projects forward, and has a plurality of protruding bases 221 arranged at intervals in the vertical direction. , an upper outer top decoration part 222 provided at the front end of the protruding base 221, an upper outer valley decoration part 223 arranged between the protrusion bases 221, and a rear part of the upper outer top decoration part 222, respectively. The upper outer valley LED 224 is arranged at the rear of the upper outer valley decoration part 223.

The protruding base 221 has an isosceles triangular shape when viewed from the side. The protruding base 221 extends in the left-right direction from the outer peripheral surface of the upper inner base 211 to near the left and right side pieces of the door frame upper unit base 202, and is formed to extend outward from the upper inner base 211. The protruding base 221 has a front end protruding forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the portion in contact with the upper inner base 211 .

The plurality of upper outer top decoration parts 222 are formed in a columnar shape extending in the left-right direction, and both left and right ends are formed in a hemispherical shape. The outer diameter of the column of the upper outer top decorative portion 222 is approximately ⅓ of the outer diameter of the upper inner decorative portion 212 . The upper outer top decorative portions 222 are each formed to have a length corresponding to the length in the left-right direction of the protruding base 221 provided thereon. These upper outer top decoration parts 222 have translucency.

The upper outer valley decoration part 223 includes a part (vertical surface part) extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 between the protruding bases 221, and a lower face and upper face of the protruding base 221 from the upper and lower sides of the part. and a portion (slope portion) extending diagonally along the protruding base 221 to near the front end of the protruding base 221. The upper outer valley decoration part 223 has a mirror-like plating layer on its surface (front surface). In addition, the upper outer valley decoration part 223 has a square opening formed in a portion extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 so that the upper outer valley LED 225 arranged at the rear faces forward. ing.

The upper outer apex LED 224 is a full color LED. The upper outer valley LED 225 is a high brightness full color LED.

The door frame upper exterior decoration unit 220 can decorate the upper exterior top decoration portion 222 with light by causing the upper exterior top LED 224 to emit light as appropriate. Further, the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 can decorate the upper outer valley decoration part 223 with light by appropriately emitting light from the upper outer valley LED 225, and the upper outer peak decoration part 223 which is spaced apart in the vertical direction You can make the space between you shine brighter.

The upper outer top decoration part 222 and the upper outer valley decoration part 223 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 are used to decorate the outside of the first surrounding light area LA1 around the game window 201 with light emitting light. (the part surrounded by the two-dot chain line). Further, the front ends of the upper outer top decoration part 222 and the upper outer valley decoration part 223 of the upper door frame outer decoration unit 220 are located rearward than the front end of the upper inner decoration part 212 of the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210. Therefore, the light emitted from the upper outer apex LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 to the gaming window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decorative part 212, and the upper outer peak decorative part 222 and the upper outer Even if the valley decoration part 223 is decorated with light, the inside of the game window 201 is prevented from becoming difficult to see due to glare, and the game area 5a can be viewed from the front through the game window 201 in a good condition.

[3-2e. Door frame upper outer edge decoration unit]
The door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 includes a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged in a row along the outer circumferential edge (both left and right sides and the upper side) of the door frame upper unit base 202 and the outer periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202. The door frame upper cover 232 is attached to the edge and covers the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220, and the opaque decoration parts 233 are provided on the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. ing. The plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are full color LEDs.

The door frame upper cover 232 has a pair of side walls that extend forward from areas near both left and right ends of the door frame upper unit base 202, and connects the upper sides of the pair of side walls to cover the area near the upper end of the door frame upper unit base 202. It consists of an upper wall that extends forward from the part, and a front wall that connects the front sides of a pair of side walls and the front side of the upper wall, and is shaped like a box with an open rear and lower part. has been done. The door frame upper cover 232 is entirely transparent.

The door frame upper cover 232 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shape of the upper interior decoration part 212 so that the front end of the side wall is located slightly forward of the front end of the upper interior decoration part 212. Specifically, the front end of the side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 extends vertically from the lower end to a height near the upper end of the inverted U-shaped linearly extending portion of the game window 201, and from there the front end of the side wall of the door frame upper unit base 202 It extends in an arcuate manner so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward to approximately the same height as the state. In addition, the front ends of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232 are curved upward in an arc shape, and are curved in a direction that approaches each other as they move upward.

The door frame upper cover 232 has a pair of speaker attachment openings 232a formed at both left and right corners of the upper part of the front wall, into which the grill decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 and the like are attached.

The opaque decorative portion 233 is provided on the outer surface of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. In the opaque decoration part 233, a slit 233a extending back and forth is formed at the same height as the protrusion base 221 in the door frame upper exterior decoration unit 220. A part of the transparent side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 faces outward through the slit 233a of the opaque decoration part 233.

The door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 covers the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 220 with a door frame upper cover 232 so as to be visible from the front. In addition, the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 appropriately illuminates the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 to decorate the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202 and the outer edge of the front wall (side wall and upper wall, respectively) of the door frame upper cover 232. (front end) can be decorated with luminescence.

In addition, since the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 has opaque decoration parts 233 on both left and right outer sides, the light from the upper outer apex LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 is transmitted to the pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent other players seated in front of other pachinko machines arranged adjacent to machine 1 from being irradiated with the radiation.

The plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 (front end outer edge of the door frame upper cover 232) of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 are connected to a third surrounding light area LA3 (which emits light and decorates the outside of the second surrounding light area LA2 around the game window 201). 16). Further, the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 of the upper outer edge decoration unit 230 of the door frame are arranged in front of the upper unit base 202 of the door frame, that is, behind the front end of the upper inner decoration part 212 of the upper inner decoration unit 210 of the door frame. Therefore, the light emitted from the upper outer edge LED 231 toward the game window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decoration part 212, and even if the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are made to emit light, the inside of the game window 201 is blocked. It is prevented from becoming difficult to see due to glare, and the gaming area 5a can be viewed from the front through the gaming window 201 in a good condition.

[3-2f. Upper speaker unit]
The upper speaker unit 240 has upper speakers 241 installed near both left and right corners of the upper front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, and closes the speaker mounting opening 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 in front of each upper speaker 241. An upper speaker grill (not shown), a horizontal lattice-shaped grill decoration frame 243 arranged in front of the upper speaker grill and attached to the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232, and each lattice part in the grill decoration frame 243 are approximately the same. A bar-shaped lattice decoration part 244 is arranged at intervals behind the upper speaker grille, a lattice decoration LED 245 is provided at the outer end of each lattice decoration part 244 in the left and right direction and emits light to decorate the lattice decoration part (Fig. 14).

The upper speakers 241 are each mounted diagonally at the center of the door frame upper unit 200 in the left-right direction so as to face slightly downward. The upper speaker 241 is attached to the rear of the adjacent upper outer top decoration part 222 in the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220. The upper speaker 241 is a full-range speaker that outputs sound in the entire range from bass to treble. The upper speaker grill is attached to the inside of the door frame upper cover 232 (on the rear surface of the front wall). The upper speaker grill is perforated metal.

The grille decorative frame 243 has a plating layer with a silvery metallic luster on its surface. The grill decoration frame 243 is arranged by connecting a frame portion shaped along the inner periphery of the speaker attachment port 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 and two vertically extending sides of the frame portion, and spaced apart from each other vertically. It is composed of a plurality of lattice parts. The lattice portion extending left and right of the grill decorative frame 243 extends with a constant width at a portion (general portion) excluding the end portion which is the outer side in the left and right direction of the door frame 3, and the portion which is the outer side in the left and right direction of the door frame 3 extends with a constant width. It is formed into a trapezoidal shape that extends diagonally downward toward the end and then extends with a constant width.

The lattice decoration part 244 has translucency and is formed in a cylindrical shape that is elongated from side to side. The grid decoration part 244 can be visually recognized from the front through the upper speaker grille. The grid decoration LED 245 is a full color LED.

The upper speaker unit 240 is close to the head of the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1, and can output high-quality stereo sound to the player. In addition, the upper speaker unit 240 can decorate the lattice decoration section 244 with light by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 245, and the inside of the grill decoration frame 243 (in the upper speaker grille) through the lattice decoration section 244. The rear side) can be decorated with light emitting light.

Further, in the upper speaker unit 240, when viewed from the front, the upper outer top decoration portion 222 disposed within the upper speaker grill (grill decoration frame 243) is located further forward than the upper speaker 241. That is, the lattice decoration part 244 and the upper outer top decoration part 222, which can be decorated with light, are arranged between the upper speaker 241 and the upper speaker grille. As a result, when the upper outer apex decoration part 222 and the lattice decoration part 244 are decorated with light, the player can see an effect in which the inside of the speaker grill is decorated with light, which has not been seen in previous pachinko machines. .

[3-3. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the overall structure of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 to 16. FIG. 15 is a plan view of the door frame lower unit showing a state in which game balls are stored in the upper tray of the door frame. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing the surrounding light area in the door frame. The door frame 3 allows most of the front surface including the game area 5a of the game board 5 held on the main body frame 4 to be visible from the front through the game window 201 while the front side of the main body frame 4 is closed. be able to. Further, the front side of the game board 5 (game area 5a) can be closed by the closing glass 205 of the game window 201.

In the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 16 etc., a bulging upper decoration part 121 and an upper inner decoration part 212 are connected in an annular shape, and an upper plate 130, a door frame presentation device 150, and an upper plate 130 are arranged in the ring. A game window 201 and the like are arranged. In other words, the upper plate 130, the door frame production device 150, the game window 201, etc. are surrounded by the bulge upper decoration part 121 and the upper inner decoration part 212 (first surrounding light area LA1). Furthermore, the outside of the upper inner decoration part 212 is surrounded by the upper outer top decoration part 222, the upper outer valley decoration part 223 (second surrounding light area LA2), and the upper outer edge LED 231 (third surrounding light area LA3). There is. That is, the game window 201 is triple surrounded by three surrounding areas: the first surrounding area LA1, the second surrounding area LA2, and the third surrounding area LA3.

The door frame 3 is formed such that the storage area 131 of the upper tray 130 surrounds the front side and both left and right sides of the door frame production device 150, and the game balls B supplied from the supply port 135 are stored in the bulge part 120. It flows along the front edge and is sent out from the delivery port 136 to the outside (lower tray 140 or ball launcher 540).

In the normal state of the door frame 3, the first movable part 155 and the production operation part 160 of the door frame presentation device 150 are located at the downward movement ends (lowering ends), respectively. In this state, the top surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156) is located slightly above the top surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151a of the device cover 151. Further, in the production operation section 160, the pressing operation section 161 is located slightly above the upper surface of the first movable section main body 156 through the opening 156a of the first movable section main body 156.

In the door frame 3, a bulging upper decorative part 121 is provided at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper plate 130 over the entire length. The upper end of the wall for storing the game balls B in the upper tray 130 is raised by this bulge upper decorative part 121. The upper end of the front side (front area 131a side) of the bulge upper decorative part 121 is higher than the front end of the upper surface of the door frame production device 150 (first movable part 155) in a normal state. As a result, when the upper tray 130 is full of game balls B, the game balls B will overflow to the door frame production device 150 side, and the player will be informed that the upper tray 130 is full of game balls B. It is possible to make it easier to recognize the game balls B, and to prevent the game balls B from spilling forward from the upper tray 130.

In the door frame 3, an upper plate ball removal button 124, a ball lending button 125, and a return button 126 are grouped together at the right corner of the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 on the right side of the upper plate 130. The surface on which the upper plate ball removal button 124, ball lending button 125, and return button 126 are provided is located higher than the upper plate 130 and lower than the bulge upper decoration part 121, and is located forward. It is sloped downwards. As a result, when the game ball B is placed on the surface where the upper plate ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are provided, the game ball B is can roll toward the upper tray 130 and be discharged into the upper tray 130.

Furthermore, in the door frame 3, the surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear circumferential wall 133, and the front circumferential wall 134 that constitute the upper plate 130 (that is, the inner surface of the upper plate 130) are formed in a mirror-like shape. Since the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 are transferred to the inner surface of the upper tray 130, the reflected game balls B can be seen, creating the illusion that many game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130. At the same time, the volume of the upper plate 130 can be made to appear larger.

In the door frame 3, in the upper tray 130, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 first rolls forward within the left side area 131b, and then enters the front area 131a and enters the front area 131a. Roll inside to the right. Then, the game ball B enters the right side area 131b from the right end of the front area 131a, rolls backward within the right side area 131b, and then is sent out from the outlet 136 by the player. (See Figure 15). At this time, since the game balls B circulate through the front area 131a which is closer to the player on the front side than the door frame production device 150, the game balls B in the front area 131a can be clearly seen, and the game balls B in the upper tray 130 can be clearly seen. The amount of game balls B stored can be easily confirmed.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the outlet 136 is provided at the rear end of the right side area 131b where the game ball B rolls backward in the upper tray 130, so the outlet 136 cannot be visually recognized from the player side. can. This allows the player to see how the game balls B are sent from the delivery port 136 (upper tray 130) to the ball firing device 540, which has not been possible in conventional pachinko machines.

In the door frame 3, the pair of lower speakers 153a can be visually recognized through the transparent device cover 151 and the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156, and the door frame effect display device 152 can be visually recognized behind the lower speakers 153a. be able to. In the door frame 3, the upper end of the door frame effect display device 152 is close to the upper end of the lower door frame unit 100, that is, the lower end of the game window 201. As a result, the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 become close to each other, so that the effect image such that the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 constitute one screen. can be displayed.

In the door frame production display device 152 disposed behind the production operation unit 160, the door frame 3 has its lower side positioned below the upper front end of the production operation unit 160, and its upper side is positioned below the upper front end of the production operation unit 160. The upper part of the door frame effect display device 152 is made higher than the effect operation section 160. As a result, compared to the case where the entire door frame effect display device 152 is lower than the effect operation section 160, even if the door frame effect display device 152 is brought closer to the effect operation section 160, the door frame effect display device can be viewed from the player side. 152 can be made more visible. Furthermore, since the depth in the front-rear direction applied to the door frame effect display device 152 can be reduced, the amount of forward expansion of the bulging portion 120 can be suppressed, so that the bulging portion 120 puts pressure on the player. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to allow the player to enjoy the game in a comfortable state, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Further, the door frame 3 is a door that is arranged diagonally behind the performance operation unit 160 so that the vertical projection range VP of the display screen (the range between the two dashed lines in FIG. 11) is near the performance operation unit 160. Since the frame effect display device 152 is provided, when the door frame effect display device 152 is viewed from the player side, the effect operation section 160 can be seen near the lower outer edge of the door frame effect display device 152. By displaying a performance image that decorates the performance operation unit 160 on the door frame performance display device 152, the performance operation unit 160 can be decorated with the performance image, and by changing the performance image, the performance operation unit 160 can be decorated with the performance image. 160 can be varied in various ways, making it difficult for players to get bored.

Furthermore, since the display screen of the door frame effect display device 152 is visible in the vicinity of the effect operation unit 160 of the door frame 3, the effect operation unit can be displayed even if the image of the effect operation unit 160 is not displayed on the door frame effect display device 152. 160 can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the production operation section 160, it is possible to immediately direct the player's line of sight to the production operation section 160. The operation timing of the performance operation section 160 can be made less likely to be delayed, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance in which the performance operation section 160 is operated, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower front speaker grill 192 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and an upper speaker grill of the upper speaker unit 240, so that in a normal state, the lower front speaker 191 and the upper speaker 241 are connected to the front (on the player's side). ) is becoming difficult to see.

[3-4. Door frame electromagnetic noise countermeasures]
Next, noise countermeasures for the door frame 3 will be briefly explained. As described above, the door frame 3 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit (not shown), etc., which has a vertically extending rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. As described above, this door frame base unit has a square (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and has a game window 201 penetrating the front and rear sides of the door frame base (not shown). A metal frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) attached to the door frame reinforcing unit, a metal opening/closing cylinder lock 127 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit, etc. are provided. As mentioned above, in addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to provide rigidity, the door frame reinforcement unit also functions as a door frame metal ground, and connects the main body frame to the door frame via a door frame metal ground wire (not shown). It is electrically connected to a frame grounding board 559 provided in No. 4. That is, in this embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. The frame grounding board 559 is capable of concentrating electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places and grounding it to the island equipment of the game hall. electrically connected to ground.

As described above, some of the various decorative parts provided on the door frame 3 are not plated at all, while others are plated on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity. Among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating applied to the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown) or metal conductive plates (not shown). There is. For this reason, for example, when a player touches a decorative part with decorative plating, the static electricity charged on the player is electrostatically discharged and transmitted from the player to the door frame reinforcement unit via the decorative part as electromagnetic noise. It is led from the door frame reinforcing unit to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the door frame metal ground wire (not shown), the frame ground board 559, and the island equipment ground wire (not shown), and is removed.

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, as described above, the rotation transmission member of the cylinder lock 127 in the door frame 3 and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 come into contact and generate electricity. Therefore, when an attendant such as a clerk at a game hall opens the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 while keeping the door frame 3 closed to the main body frame 4, for example, , staff such as clerks at game halls, and people who have a setting key (described later) (a limited number of people who can check the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values) can use the main frame. When the locking unit 650 in 4 is touched, the static electricity charged on the person in possession of the setting key, such as a clerk in the game hall, or the person in possession of the setting key, which will be described later, is discharged as electromagnetic noise. It is transmitted from the person in possession to the door frame reinforcement unit via this locking unit 650, and from the door frame reinforcement unit to the door frame metal ground wire (not shown), the frame ground board 559, and the island of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire (not shown). It is designed to be guided to the equipment ground and removed.

[3-5. Light-emitting effect on door frame]
Next, the light emitting effect by the door frame 3 will be explained. The door frame 3 includes an upper plate 130, a door frame production device 150, a game window 201, etc., and a bulge upper decoration part 121 and an upper inner decoration part 212 (first circumferential light) which are milky white and formed in a cylindrical shape. It is surrounded by area LA1). The plurality of LEDs 121a of the upper bulge decoration part 121 and the plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper inner decoration part 212 are arranged in a line in the direction in which they extend. Thereby, by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 121a and LEDs 213a, the surroundings of the game window 201 and the like can be decorated with light. At this time, by making the plurality of LEDs 121a and LEDs 213a emit light in order, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which light circulates around the game window 201.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 includes an upper outer apex decoration part 222 and an upper outer valley decoration part 223 (second circumferential light area LA2) which are arranged outside the upper inner decoration part 212, the upper outer apex LED 224 By lighting the upper outer top decoration part 222 and the upper outer valley decoration part 223 with the upper outer valley LED 225, the outer side of the first circumferential light area LA1 can be decorated with light emission, and the outer side of the game window 201 can be decorated with light. It is possible to show a player a light-emitting effect in which a light-emitting decoration is displayed.

Since a plurality of upper outer apex decoration parts 222 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, by sequentially emitting light from one side in the vertical direction, a light emitting effect like a level meter can be shown to the player. . For example, when a chance arrives, the expected value for a game can be shown to the player as a level meter, or as a sound meter that matches the music being output.

Moreover, since the upper outer valley decoration part 223 is formed in a mirror-like shape, by emitting light from the upper outer valley LED 225, the space between the upper outer peak decoration parts 222 is made to shine more strongly than the upper inner decoration part 212. This allows the player to see a light-emitting effect that can strongly attract the player's interest.

This door frame 3 is equipped with a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged in rows on the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202, so by making these upper outer edge LEDs 231 emit light, it is possible to emit light that cannot be seen in the conventional pachinko machine 1. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the outer edge of the door frame 3 (third surrounding light area LA3), which was not present, emits light.

The door frame 3 has three surrounding light areas, the first surrounding light area LA1, the second surrounding light area LA2, and the third surrounding light area LA3, on the outside of the game window 201. By appropriately emitting light from the surrounding light area, various effects such as a light emitting effect that goes around the game window 201, a light emitting effect that goes from the outside to the game window 201, a light emitting effect that goes from the game window 201 to the outside, etc. can be created. It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect.

In addition, in the door frame 3, by appropriately lighting the grid decoration LED 195 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the grid decoration LED 245 of the upper speaker unit 240, the grid part (grid decoration part 194) of the grill decoration frame 193 and the grill The lattice part (lattice decoration part 244) of the decorative frame 243 can be decorated with light, and the player can create a light-emitting effect that makes the grill decoration frame 193 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the grill decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 stand out. can be shown.

Further, in the door frame 3, the lower speaker decoration part 153c of the lower speaker unit 153, the lattice decoration part 244 of the upper speaker unit 240, the grill decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 in the plurality of upper outer peak LEDs 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 ( By emitting light from the upper outer apex LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 located at the rear of the upper speaker grille, the upper speaker 241 and The space between the speaker and the speaker grill can be decorated with light, and the player can see a light-emitting effect that could not be seen in conventional pachinko machines in which the space between the speaker and the speaker grill is decorated with light.

In addition, in the door frame 3, since the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 is equipped with a plurality of LEDs 138a of the storage light emitting decoration part 138, by causing the plurality of LEDs 138a to emit light, the storage in the upper plate 130 and the upper plate 130 is The game ball B that is displayed can be decorated with light emission. For example, since the plurality of LEDs 138a are made to emit light when no game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130, and because the inner surface of the upper tray 130 is formed into a mirror surface, the entire interior of the upper tray 130 becomes dazzling. The player can see the light-emitting effect that is decorated with light, and the upper plate 130 of the pachinko machine 1 shines brightly, increasing the interest in the pachinko machine 1 for the player who is selecting the pachinko machine to play. can be strongly attracted to

Since this storage light emitting decoration part 138 is provided above the bottom wall 132 of the upper tray 130 than half the outer diameter of the game balls B, a plurality of game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130. By causing the LED 138a to emit light, the light is irradiated onto the upper half of the game ball B and is reflected upward, so that the game ball B stored in the upper tray 130 sparkles in the game. can be shown to others.

Note that when the bulge upper decoration part 121 is decorated with light, a part of the light is also irradiated into the upper plate 130, so the bulge upper decoration part 121 also illuminates the inside of the upper plate 130 and the upper plate 130. It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the stored game balls B are decorated with light.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 includes a light-emitting decorative portion 124a surrounding the upper plate bulb removal button 124 and a light-emitting decoration portion 142a surrounding the lower plate bulb removal button 142, By emitting light from the light-emitting decorative portion 124a of the ball-release button 124 and the light-emitting decoration portion 142a of the lower ball-release button 142, the upper ball-release button 124 and the lower ball-release button 142 can be decorated with light. Therefore, when many game balls B are paid out, such as in a "jackpot" game, by decorating the upper plate ball removal button 124 and the lower plate ball removal button 142 with light emission, the upper plate 130 and the lower plate 140 In order to avoid filling up the tank, a light-emitting effect can be shown that prompts the player to operate the upper tray ball extraction button 124 and the lower tray ball extraction button 142.

In this way, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment can present various light emitting effects to the player, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present a more diverse range of effects to the player. It is possible to entertain the players, and at the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the players to get bored.

[3-6. Production of door frame production device]
Next, the presentation of the door frame 3 by the door frame presentation device 150 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 17 and the like. FIG. 17(a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the door frame effect display device and the effect operation section in the door frame effect display device, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing an example of decoration, and (c) is an explanatory view showing an example of a collaboration effect by the effect image of the door frame effect display device and the movable effect of the effect operation part.

In the normal state of the door frame presentation device 150, the first movable portion 155 and the presentation operation portion 160 are each located at a lower moving end (lowering end). In this state, the top surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156) is located slightly above the top surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151a of the device cover 151. Further, in the production operation section 160, the pressing operation section 161 is located slightly above the upper surface of the first movable section main body 156 through the opening 156a of the first movable section main body 156. Even in this normal state, the pressing operation section 161 in the production operation section 160 can be pressed.

When the first LED of the operation section decorative board 162 is made to emit light in a normal state, the player can see a light emitting effect in which the upper surface of the press operation section 161 is decorated with light. In addition, when the second LED of the operation section decoration board 162 is made to emit light in a normal state, the opening frame 158a of the first movable section cover 158 surrounding the outside of the press operation section 161 emits light to create a light-emitting effect. can be shown to others. These light-emitting effects can direct the player's attention to the press operation section 161, prompting the player to press the press operation section 161, and provide a player participation type effect in which the player operates the press operation section 161. can make it easier for people to participate.

Moreover, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable part decorative board 159 are made to emit light in a normal state, the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 and the first movable part main body 156 are connected via the side wall of the first movable part main body 156. You can decorate the space with luminous lights. In other words, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which the vicinity of the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper tray 130 is decorated with light.

In this normal state, when a predetermined sound is output from the pair of lower speakers 153a, the sound is radiated to the player side through the grill hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grill hole 156b of the first movable part main body 156. , it is possible for the player to listen to an acoustic performance in which sound can be heard from the direction of the performance operation section 160 (press operation section 161). As a result, the sound from the lower speaker 153a can attract the player's attention to the pressing operation section 161, prompting the player to press the pressing operation section 161, and operating the pressing operation section 161. It is possible to make it easier for players to participate in a participatory performance.

In addition, in the normal state, the door frame effect display device 150 can be viewed from the player side in good condition through the device cover 151, and the door frame effect display device 152 is displayed on the door frame effect display device 152. Players can be entertained by the effect images (see FIG. 17(a), etc.).

In the normal state, the door frame production device 150 rotates the first elevating pin 175a by the four first elevating drive motors 175b of the first elevating mechanism 170. , a movable performance in which the first movable section 155 moves to the upward movement end (rising end) together with the performance operation section 160 can be shown to the player. As a result, the first movable section 155 pops out upward together with the performance operation section 160, which can surprise the player and strongly urge the player to press the press operation section 161. At the same time, by raising the first movable portion 155, it is possible to make the player think that something good is going to happen, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the game.

When the first movable portion 155 is moved to the rising end, the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 becomes visible from the player side, as shown in FIG. 12(a). In this state, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable part decorative board 159 are made to emit light, the player can see a light emitting effect in which the side wall of the first movable part body 156 is decorated with light. Therefore, if the first movable part 155 is moved from the lower end to the upper end while the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 is decorated with light, a game effect in which the first movable part 155 appears to rise from the light can be created. This can be shown to a large number of players, and can give a strong impact to the players.

Further, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable part decorative board 159 are made to emit light while the first movable part 155 is moved to the rising end, a part of the light is emitted to the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130. Since the LEDs 159a are irradiated, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 sparkle, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, since the first movable part 155 can be raised and lowered by the four first lifting drive motors 175b, the first moving part 155 is vibrated by repeatedly rotating the first lifting drive motors 175b forward and backward in small increments. can be done. Thereby, when a player touches the first movable part 155 or the effect operation part 160 while the first movable part 155 is vibrating, the player can be surprised by the vibration. Furthermore, if the first movable section 155 is vibrated at the timing when the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161) is pressed, the feeling of the press operation can be changed by making it heavier or lighter. can be entertained.

Furthermore, when the first movable part 155 is moved from the lower end to the upper end, the plurality of grill holes 156b formed in the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156 move upward. The volume of the space between this and the pair of lower speakers 153a increases. As a result, as the volume between the lower speaker 153a and the grill hole 156b changes, the natural vibration of the part changes, and the resonance frequency of the sound output from the lower speaker 153a changes. The player can listen to a sound effect in which the timbre of the sound radiated to the player side through the grill hole 156b changes.

Furthermore, from the perspective of a player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1, when the first movable part 155 is moved from the lower end to the upper end, the upper part of the first movable part 155 appears on the door frame effect display device 152. It appears to cover the bottom of the display screen. As a result, when the first movable part 155 is moved to the rising end, a part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the first movable part 155, so that the first movable part 155 is It is possible to make the user aware of the rise of the movable portion 155, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

At this time, the door frame effect display device 152 displays, for example, an effect image in which a predetermined character lifts up the first movable part 155, an effect image in which a predetermined character is lifted up as the first movable part 155 rises, etc. By displaying this, it is possible to show the player a collaboration effect by the movable effect of the first movable part 155 and the effect image, and it is possible to greatly entertain the player.

Furthermore, in the normal state, when the second elevating pin 183 is revolved by the second elevating drive motor 182 of the second elevating mechanism 180, the effect operating section 160 is moved upward via the elevating transmission piece 184. A movable effect that moves to the moving end (rising end) can be shown to the player. As a result, the upper surface of the pressing operation section 161 of the production operation section 160 is in a state of protruding upward more than the upper surface of the first movable section 155, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the pressing operation section 161. This makes it possible to strongly urge the player to press the press operation section 161, and also makes the player think that something good will happen by raising the press operation section 161. This can increase the player's expectations for the game.

When the production operation section 160 is moved to the upper end, the peripheral wall of the operation section movable base 163 below the pressing operation section 161 is exposed to the outside, as shown in FIG. 12(b). In this state, when the second LED of the operation section decorative board 162 is made to emit light, the player can see a light emitting effect in which the peripheral wall of the operation section movable base 163 emits light. Therefore, when the performance operation unit 160 is moved from the lower end to the upper end while the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 of the performance operation unit 160 is decorated with light, a performance is created in which the performance operation unit 160 appears to be rising from the light. can be shown to the players, giving a strong impact to the players.

Furthermore, since the production operation unit 160 can be raised and lowered by the second elevation drive motor 182, the production operation unit 160 can be vibrated by repeatedly rotating the second elevation drive motor 182 forward and reverse in small increments. . Thereby, when a player touches the performance operation section 160 while the performance operation section 160 is vibrating, the player can be surprised by the vibration. Furthermore, by vibrating the performance operation unit 160 at the timing when the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is pressed, it is possible to change the operational feel of the press operation by making it heavier or lighter. Can be entertained.

In addition, from the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1, when the production operation section 160 is moved from the lower end to the upper end, the upper part of the production operation section 160 will be displayed on the display screen of the door frame production display device 152. It appears to cover the bottom of the. As a result, when the effect operation section 160 is moved to the upper end, a part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the effect operation section 160, so that the effect operation section 160 The user can be made aware of the increase in , and the same effects as above can be achieved.

At this time, the door frame effect display device 152 displays, for example, an effect image that decorates the area around the effect operation section 160 (see FIG. 17(b)), an effect that lifts up the effect operation section 160 with a predetermined character, etc. By displaying an image, a performance image in which a predetermined character is lifted up by raising the performance operation unit 160 (see FIG. 17(c)), etc., a collaborative performance can be created using the movable performance of the performance operation unit 160 and the performance image. can be shown to the players, and the players can be greatly entertained.

This performance operation section 160 can be moved to the rising end when the first movable section 155 is at the descending end, and can also be raised when the first movable section 155 is at the rising end (FIG. 12(b) condition). For example, by moving the first movable part 155 from the lower end to the upper end and then moving the performance operation part 160 from the lower end to the upper end, the player can perform a movable performance in which the performance operation part 160 rises to two levels. can be shown. As a result, the performance operation section 160 rises in two stages, making the player strongly believe that when the performance operation section 160 is operated, a "jackpot" game will start (the special lottery result is a "jackpot"). This makes it possible to increase the player's expectations for the game, and also allows the player to operate the performance operation section 160 and enjoy the player participation type performance.

In this way, the door frame performance device 150 can present various performances to the player, such as the above-mentioned light emission performance, movable performance, image performance, player participation type performance, sound performance, etc. By appropriately combining them, it is possible to present a more diverse range of performances to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and making it possible to entertain the player.

[3-7. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame presentation device 150 is arranged on the upper surface of the bulge portion 120 of the door frame 3 provided in front and below the game area 5a where the game is played. The front area 131a on the front side of the device placement section 123 and the side areas 131b on both left and right sides provide an upper tray 130 having a storage area 131 for game balls B surrounding the device placement section 123. The game balls B are stored in the front side of the door frame production device 150 by the area 131a, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be easily seen by the player. In addition, since the two side areas 131b connected by the front area 131a are areas that extend back and forth, the game balls B stored in the side area 131b in addition to the front area 131a can also be viewed from the player's side. It can be made easier to visually recognize.

Therefore, by making it easier to see the game balls B in the upper tray 130, it is possible to make the player aware of the amount of stored game balls B, so that as the game progresses, the game balls B in the upper tray 130 can be easily seen. Even if the stored amount decreases due to consumption, the game ball B can be refilled into the upper tray 130 by making it easier for the player to recognize the decrease in the stored amount, without the player noticing. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from disappearing from the upper tray 130, thereby preventing sudden interruption of the game, preventing the player from being disappointed due to the interruption of the game, and reducing the player's interest in the game. It can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, since the game balls B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, the player can direct his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the lower door frame effect. By simply dropping it into the device 150, it is possible to instantly recognize whether there is a game ball B in the front area 131a, and there is no need for the player to carefully check whether there is a game ball B in the upper tray 130. , it becomes possible to make it easier for the player to concentrate on the game, and it is possible to enjoy the game and suppress a drop in interest.

Further, since the supply port 135 is arranged on the left side of the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a, and the delivery port 136 is arranged on the opposite right side, the front region 131a is It will be provided on the way to the exit 136, and the game balls B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 will be sent out from the delivery port 136 to the outside of the storage area 131 through the front area 131a. When the game balls B in the upper tray 130 are consumed by playing a game, the game balls B flow in front of the player's eyes (front area 131a), and the consumption speed and amount of the game balls B are displayed to the player. can be made easier to recognize, and the above-mentioned effects can be made easier to achieve.

Furthermore, since the supply port 135 is arranged on the left side of the side area 131b on both the right and left sides of the device placement section 123, and the outlet port 136 is arranged on the right side, the space between the supply port 135 and the outlet port 136 in the left-right direction is Since it is possible to increase the storage area 131, the horizontal direction of the storage area 131 is also increased, so that the amount of game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be increased. Therefore, since a large number of game balls B can be stored in the upper tray 130, the player can play the game without worrying about the amount of game balls B stored, and the player can concentrate on the game. In addition to making the game more enjoyable, the player can immediately recognize whether or not there is a game ball B in the front area 131a by simply dropping his/her line of sight from the game area 5a to the door frame presentation device 150 below. This eliminates the need for the player to carefully check the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper tray 130, making it easier for the player to concentrate on the game, allowing the player to enjoy the game, and reducing interest in the game. It can be suppressed.

In addition, a storage light emitting decoration part 138 is provided above the bottom surface (bottom wall 132) of the upper tray 130 above half of the outer diameter of the game ball B to emit light into the storage area 131 of the upper tray 130. Since the light from the LED 138a of the storage light emitting decoration part 138 is irradiated onto the upper half of the game ball B stored in the game ball B 131, the light from the storage light emitting decoration part 138 is irradiated by the game ball B. can be reflected upward. Therefore, the game ball B stored in the upper tray 130 can be made to shine and decorated with light by the light from the storage light emitting decoration part 138, and the player can enjoy the light emitting decoration of the game ball B. In addition, it is possible to strongly attract the player's attention to the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130, and to check the amount of game balls B stored in the upper tray 130, thereby achieving the same effect as described above. can play.

In addition, since the storage light emitting decoration part 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, by making the LED 138a of the storage light emission decoration part 138 emit light, the rear peripheral wall 133 facing the front of the upper plate 130 emits light. It is possible to show the player a luminous decoration that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines, which can surprise the player, and also direct the player's attention to the upper tray 130 (storage area 131). By having the player check the stored amount of game balls B, it is possible to reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects. At this time, since the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is formed into a mirror surface, the light from the storage light emitting decoration part 138 or the light from the storage light emitting decoration part 138 reflected on the game ball B is reflected on the upper plate 130. By reflecting on the inner surface, it is possible to further increase the sparkling feeling in the storage area 131 due to the storage light emitting decoration part 138, and it is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the alignment part 137 is provided near the outlet 136 to align the game balls B, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the vicinity of the outlet 136, and the balls B are stored in the upper tray 130. The game balls B can be smoothly delivered from the delivery port 136 to the ball launcher 540 and the lower tray 140. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the game ball B being jammed, and it is possible to let the player enjoy the game and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, since the outlet 136 arranged in the side area 131b of the upper tray 130 is visible from the front, the game ball B is sent out from the outlet 136, which could not be seen in conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to watch the situation, surprise the player, and strongly attract the interest of the player, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

In addition, since a front area 131a in the storage area 131 where game balls B are stored is provided on the front side of the device placement section 123, the game balls B are placed on the door frame production device 150 provided in the device placement section 123. Even if the game ball B is placed on the ball and rolls forward, it will fall into the front area 131a, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from falling forward from the bulge part 120.

In addition, since the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, the front peripheral wall 134, etc. of the upper tray 130 are formed into mirror-like surfaces, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 are Since it is transmitted to the surrounding wall of the player, it is possible to give the player the illusion that game balls B are stored on the other side of the peripheral wall, and it is possible to make it appear that many game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130. I can do it.

In addition, since the storage area 131 is provided with the storage light emitting decoration part 138 that irradiates light, the light from the storage light emission decoration part 138 or the light from the storage light emission decoration part 138 reflected on the game ball B is By reflecting on the inner surface of the plate 130, it is possible to further increase the sparkle in the storage area 131 due to the storage light emitting decoration part 138, and it is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the door frame presentation device 150 is arranged in the device placement portion 123 of the bulging portion 120, the player can be entertained by the presentation provided by the door frame presentation device 150, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game. can be done.

In the above embodiment, the storage area 131 in which the game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130 is the front area 131a in front of the device placement section 123 (door frame production device 150) and the left and right sides of the device placement section 123. Although shown as being composed of two side areas 131b, the present invention is not limited to this; a front area in front of the device placement part 123, one side area to the left of the device placement part 123, It may also be configured with a back area behind the device placement section 123. Alternatively, a front area 131a in front of the device placement part 123, two side areas 131b on both left and right sides of the device placement part 123, and a back area behind the device placement part 123 (the device placement part 123 is It may be provided in the form of an island within the upper plate 130. Note that the back area of the storage area 131 may be shaped like a tunnel so that the game ball B cannot be seen from the player side. Further, the back area of the storage area 131 may pass between the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect operation section 160 in the door frame effect device 150.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the upper plate 130 has a mirror-like inner surface, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the inner surface of the upper plate 130 may have a non-mirror-like surface.

Further, in the above embodiment, the storage light emitting decoration part 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, but the invention is not limited to this. You can also do it.

In the above embodiment, in the first movable part 155 of the door frame production device 150, a certain number of game balls B are placed on the upper surface of the first movable part 155 by the plurality of louver parts 158b of the first movable part cover 158. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the top surface of the door frame presentation device 150 is tilted downward toward the upper tray 130, and the top surface of the door frame presentation device 150 is The game balls B placed on the door may be rolled onto the upper tray 130 so that the game balls B are not stored (continued to be placed) on the upper surface of the door frame production device 150.

[4. Body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 4 and FIGS. 18 to 39. The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side (upper tray 130 of the door frame 3). This is for discharging the game balls B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall).

[4-1. Overall configuration of main body frame]
As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall so that it can be opened and closed at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. A main body frame upper hinge part 510 is attached to the upper end and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge part 50 of the outer frame 2, and a main body frame upper hinge part 510 is rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge part of the door frame 3, and a main body frame base unit 500. A main body frame lower hinge part 520 is attached to the lower end of the left side in front view, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge part 60 of the outer frame 2, and to which the door frame lower hinge part of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. We are prepared.

The body frame 4 also includes a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 that is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front and that reinforces the body frame base unit 500, and a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 that is attached to the front lower part of the body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 is attached to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an inverted L is attached along the upper and left sides of the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. A letter-shaped payout base unit 550, a payout unit 560 that is attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 550 and is for paying out game balls B to the player side (upper tray 130 and lower tray 140), and a main body frame base. A board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633 that are attached to the lower side of the unit 500 when viewed from the rear and are equipped with a power switch 630a that can power on the pachinko machine 1, and a main body frame base to be described later. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base unit 501 and has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein extending vertically and passing through the front and back, and a back cover 640 that is attached to the right side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It includes a cage outer frame 2, a main body frame 4, and a metal locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a part on the rear side extending rightward from the front end to prevent the game board 5 inserted into the game board mounting part 301 of the main body frame base 501, which will be described later, from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically apart from each other.

The body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the body frame base 501 (described later) of the body frame base unit 500, and also strengthens the body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4. This prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the inside (gaming board 5).

The main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 is recessed backward from the upper end downwardly within a height range of approximately 3/4 of the total height when viewed from the front, and is a game board into which the game board 5 is removably inserted from the front side. It has a mounting part 301. The ball firing device 540 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500 at a position below the game board attachment portion 301.

Further, the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 is provided with a door frame opening for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. A switch 4a is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 4a is released from its pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame release switch 4a is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 has a main body frame release switch 4b for detecting the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface below the position where the door frame release switch 4a is attached. installed. When the main body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 4b is released from being pressed and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. The detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

The door frame release switch 4a and the main body frame release switch 4b open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and open the door frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 due to the input of an electrical signal due to the opening/closing operation by the locking unit 650. It does not detect each opening of the main body frame 4, but detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 separately and independently from the opening/closing operation by the locking unit 650. ing. Further, the door frame release switch 4a and the main body frame release switch 4b are not placed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127, and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is not placed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127, so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is not affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the cylinder lock 127. The door frame release switch 4a is arranged at a position below the cylinder insertion port to be inserted, and on the rear surface below the position where the door frame release switch 4a is installed, and below the position where the door frame release switch 4a is installed. A main body frame release switch 4b is arranged on the rear surface of the main body frame release switch 4b. In this way, even if electromagnetic noise enters the cylinder lock 127, the signal transmission lines from the door frame release switch 4a and the main body frame release switch 4b will not be affected by this electromagnetic noise.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5, and the main body frame base 501 is formed with a game board mounting portion 301 into which the game board 5 is removably inserted from the front side. has been done.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a spherical tank that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape extending from side to side and is open upward. 552, a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the spherical tank 552 when viewed from the front and extends to the left when viewed from the front in the shape of an upwardly opened groove, and a first rail cover that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. 554, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and an external member disposed above the tank rail 553 and attached to the dispensing base 551. It includes a terminal board 558 and a frame ground board 559 accommodated in a board accommodating portion 551aa formed in the payout base 551 corresponding to the front of the external terminal board 558 (the front of the pachinko machine 1). Note that the external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side, and can transmit various information to the hall computer. The frame grounding board 559 can temporarily collect electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places and ground it to the island equipment of the game hall.

The dispensing base 551 is molded from transparent synthetic resin, and includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a top plate portion having a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. The left side plate part 551b has approximately the same width and extends downward for a long time, and the right side plate part 551c has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the top plate part 551a from the right side of the top plate part 551a when viewed from the front and extends shortly downward. , a back plate upper part 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate part 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate part 551c; The left side of the back plate 551e extends in width to near the lower end, the inner side plate 551f extends backward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the left side of the left side plate 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extends from the front of the lower side to the right to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connects the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. It is equipped with. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open toward the front and inward of the L shape. Note that, on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, an eaves portion 551da that protrudes rearward is formed in the left-right direction at a portion spaced apart by a predetermined length from the lower side thereof.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a that extends left and right with approximately the same length as the horizontal width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b that extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate part 551a, the left side plate part 551b, and the right side plate part 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 includes a shallow concave portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically by a left side plate portion 551b, a left back plate portion 551e, and an inner side plate portion 551f. Unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout unit 560 is guided by a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that puts out game balls B one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward. It includes a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game balls B passing through the ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the right side of the power supply unit 620c when viewed from the front, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the left side of the power supply unit 620c when viewed from the front. and an attached interface unit 620e.

The base unit 620b includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a rear base 626 attached to the rear side of the front base 625 and to the rear surface of which the power supply unit 620c is attached.

The power supply unit 620c includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 (not shown) of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. , is equipped with.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the right side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c when viewed from the front, and a payout control board box 632 that is housed in the payout control board box 632. A substrate 633 is provided. The payout control board box 632 is composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body. Note that the payout control board 633 is housed in a payout control board box 632, and is configured as a crimped case. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a press operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5, etc. This is for dispensing the designated number of game balls B to the player (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202).

The payout control board box 632 is composed of a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The dispensing control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. In this way, since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, it is possible to check the state of the front side and back side of the dispensing control board 633 (whether or not it has been tampered with or not). It is possible to check from the outside of the payout control board box 632 whether the IC is mounted or not. Moreover, the payout control board box 632 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively, and when the payout control board box 632 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the next In order to open the control board box 632, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and traces of opening and closing of the payout control board box 632 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the payout control board box 632, and the deterrence against fraudulent acts against the payout control board box 632 is enhanced.

Further, the payout control board 633 includes, in addition to an error LED display (not shown) that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an RWM clear button 633z having a press operation unit that serves multiple functions. In this embodiment, a lead type is used as the RWM clear button 633z, and each lead of the RWM clear button 633z is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633. The press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is exposed from an opening formed in the transparent cover body, and the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is exposed when the payout control board 633 is housed in the payout control board box 632. can be operated by pressing.

The RWM clear button 633z is connected to the RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the main control board that controls the game content (progress of the game). It functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase the information stored in each built-in RAM, functions as a setting switch button to select and switch setting values, and displays on the error LED indicator. It also functions as an error clearing switch to clear any errors that may occur. In other words, in this embodiment, the setting change function related to game specifications (function as a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values) is provided separately from the main control board that controls the game content (game progress). It is mounted on a payout control board 633 which is a board. Further, the separate board does not have to be the payout control board 633, and may include a board that is not housed in the board case, a board that is housed in the board case, and a board that is housed in the board case that is configured as a caulking case. is possible. However, since the setting change function (function as a setting switch button to select and switch setting values) is an important function for a gaming machine, it is desirable to have higher security, and it is better to have a board that is not stored in a board case than a board that is not stored in a board case. A board that is housed has higher security, and a board that has even higher security is a board that is housed in a board case that is configured as a caulking case. Since the payout control board 633 is a board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case, it can be said that security is high. In addition, the main control board 1310 that controls the game content (progress of the game) is attached to a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 as described later, while the payout control board 633 is attached to the main body. Being attached to the frame 4 also contributes to improved security.

The interface unit 620e covers a board base 634 attached to the left side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c when viewed from the front, an interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The interface board 635 is connected to one end of a connection cable from the main body frame 4 side. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board that controls the game content (progress of the game), a peripheral control board that controls the progress of the performance, etc., and also controls the pachinko machine 1. It is connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the interface board 635 so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front and attached to the game board mounting portion 301 of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the right end of the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 when viewed from the front, and the left side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is attached to the back cover mounting portion of the dispensing base 551. 551i and the back cover attachment part 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600, and is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable. A locking screw 642 is provided on the left side of the back cover 640 and in a portion corresponding to the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600. The left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attachment part 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attachment part 601a of the upper full-ball path unit 600, and the locking screw 642 is screwed to the back cover attachment part 601a. Cover 640 is fixed. The back cover 640 can be rotated approximately 180 degrees from a closed state that covers the back side of the game board 5 to an open state that opens the back side of the game board 5.

The back cover 640 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally, with the right side in front view bent forward, and when assembled on the main body frame 4, its rear surface is approximately the same as the rear surface of the dispensing base 551. It is formed to be located on the surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of heat dissipation slits 641 passing through it from front to back and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and allows the inside of the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the slit 641 is not formed at all in a region corresponding to a main control board box, which will be described later, which is attached to the rear side of the game board 5.

By the way, the game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 fall as the metal powder is peeled off from the game balls B due to wear such as colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. For this reason, if the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B becomes attached to the tank rail 553 on which the game ball B rolls in the downstream direction, the downstream flow of the game ball B will be obstructed. This makes it difficult to smoothly supply the game balls B toward the downstream side, and the payout of the game balls B by the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 stops.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of notches 553aa are formed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 (lower rear surface of the tank rail 553 when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front), and metal powder generated due to wear of the game balls B is formed. is configured such that it can be removed from the tank rail 553. Thereby, for example, metal powder generated due to wear of the game ball B naturally falls from the tank rail 553 to the outside through the notch 553aa, so that the metal powder can be removed from the tank rail 553, and the metal powder can be removed from the tank rail 553. Due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling in the tank rail 553, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B adhering to the tank rail 553 falls from the tank rail 553 to the outside through the notch 553aa, causing metal powder to The powder can be removed from inside the tank rail 553, and a cotton swab can be inserted into the notch 553aa by an attendant such as a clerk at the game hall to remove the metal powder caused by the wear of the game ball B attached inside the tank rail 553. The metal powder can be removed from inside the tank rail 553 by removing the metal powder.

In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are installed in multiple rows facing the island equipment of the game hall, and the game balls B ejected from the pachinko machine 1 are polished by a ball polishing device and returned to the pachinko machine 1 by a ball lifting device. Since the ball is supplied to the ball tank 552, the temperature inside the island equipment of the game hall is extremely high compared to the indoor temperature of the game hall. For this reason, the back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 includes various boards included in the game board 5, electrical drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs, and various lamps. In order to release the heat emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of heat dissipation slits 641 are formed which pass through the front and rear and extend vertically, as described above. In addition, since the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B that falls through the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 enters the back side of the game board 5. Although it is difficult to completely prevent this, it is possible to prevent this metal powder from entering the back side of the game board 5.

In addition, inside the island equipment of the game hall, multiple types of wires are suspended from the top for electrical connection with various connection terminals on the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. Depending on the wiring, there are wirings that are electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wirings that are not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes an unconnected wiring and is suspended from the upper part of the inside of the island equipment of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows facing away from the island equipment of the game hall, these unconnected wires are connected to the various boards provided in the game board 5, electrical drive sources such as various motors and solenoids, various LEDs, and various lamps. If you touch the light emitting means such as the above, a short circuit may occur and damage the device (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of them are bent at or near the ends of unconnected wires, and the ends of the unconnected wires get caught in the slits 641 and the game board 5 is Since it is difficult to penetrate toward the back side, short circuits can be prevented.

Of the various boards included in the game board 5, the boards near the back cover 640 (excluding relay boards such as the panel relay board 1410 described later) are molded from a non-conductive resin that constitutes the board box. Since it is covered by the cover body, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 and comes into contact with the cover body, it will not have any effect on the board covered by the cover body. . A relay board such as a panel relay board 1410, which will be described later, is a board that relays one board and another board, so it is an assembly of various connectors, and has a wiring pattern for electrically connecting the various connectors. It is formed not on the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board on which various connectors are mounted, which is the surface facing the back cover 640, but on the back surface (solder surface) of the relay board, which is the opposite side to the surface facing the back cover 640. , the front side (mounting side) and back side (soldering side) of the relay board are colored in a specified color (e.g. green, yellow, red, blue, black), except for the through holes through which pin terminals of various connectors can be inserted and soldered etc.), and the wiring pattern is covered with a resist of a predetermined color and is not exposed. That is, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring were to enter the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 and come into contact with the relay board, the relay board would not be affected at all.

In this way, the back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 includes a protective cover that can protect the rear side of the game board 5 by covering the rear side of the game board 5. By covering the rear side of the game board 5, it absorbs heat emitted from various boards included in the game board 5, electrical drive sources such as various motors and solenoids, and light emitting means such as various LEDs and various lamps. The heat dissipation function allows the heat to be released to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the slit 641 of the tank rail 553, and the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B that falls through the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is dissipated from the back surface of the game board 5. It has a metal powder intrusion prevention function that can prevent metal powder from entering the side, and unconnected wiring suspended from the inside of the island equipment of the game hall. It also has a protective wall function that can prevent people from touching light emitting means such as a driving source, various LEDs, and various lamps.

The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 39(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 650 includes a metal unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of metal door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3, and a unit. A plurality of metal outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the base 651 and can be locked with the outer frame 2, and a metal transmission cylinder that moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction. 654, a metal lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a metal lock spring 655 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward. An unlock lever 656 for the outer frame is provided.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape when viewed from above in a U-shape with an open right side when viewed from the front, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the transmission cylinder 654 controls the rotation of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. It engages with the transmission member 133 and rotates as the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted. Further, in the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are latched to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The outer frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and a corresponding key is inserted into the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotated in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are sloped so as to become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are attached to the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

The metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 not only has the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 500 to provide rigidity, but also functions as a body frame metal ground. It is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559 described above. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via an island equipment ground wire (not shown). The point that the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 not only has the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 500 to provide rigidity but also functions as a body frame metal ground will be described later.

[4-3. Measures against electromagnetic noise on the main body frame]
Next, noise countermeasures for the main body frame 4 will be briefly explained. As described above, the main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. An inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 is installed along the upper and left sides in front view on the rear side, and the game balls B received by the payout base unit 550 are transferred to the player side (upper tray 130 and lower tray 140). It includes a payout unit 560 for payout, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 including a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 633, and the like.

As described above, the main body frame base unit 500 is formed of an extruded metal material, and includes the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 when viewed from the front. As described above, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 not only has the function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500 to provide rigidity, but also functions as a main body frame metal ground, and is connected to the main body frame metal ground wire (not shown). It is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame ground board 559 provided in the main body frame 4. That is, in this embodiment, the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 serves as a frame ground on the main body frame side. Further, a metal plate (not shown) disposed on the entire bottom of the ball tank 552 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame ground board 559 via a ball tank ground wire (not shown). Furthermore, a ground connection terminal (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559 described above via an interface ground wire (not shown). Further, a ground connection terminal (not shown) provided on the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559 described above via a power supply ground wire (not shown). This frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via an island equipment ground wire (not shown).

As described above, as a noise countermeasure for the main body frame 4, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the ball tank 552, the interface board 635 in the board unit 620, and the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 is removed from the main body frame reinforcing frame 530. , the ball tank 552, the interface board 635 in the board unit 620, and the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 to the island equipment of the game hall via various corresponding ground wires (not shown), the frame ground board 559, and the island equipment ground wire (not shown). It is designed to be guided to earth and removed.

[4-4. Frame ground board]
Next, the frame ground board 559 will be briefly described. As described above, the frame grounding board 559 is capable of once concentrating electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding it to the island equipment of the game hall, and is provided with a plurality of grounding terminals. The first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) serves as an interface ground and is electrically connected to a ground connection terminal provided on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 via an interface ground wire (not shown). , the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal in the island equipment of the game hall via an island equipment ground wire (not shown) as the island equipment ground, and is the third ground terminal. The terminal (ball tank ground terminal) serves as a ball tank ground by attaching one end of a ball tank ground wire (not shown) to a metal plate (not shown) placed over the entire bottom of the ball tank 552 with a metal screw (not shown). The other end of the tank ground wire is electrically connected, and the fourth ground terminal (body frame metal ground terminal) is connected to the metal body of the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4 as the body frame metal ground. One end of the body frame metal ground wire (not shown) is attached to the frame reinforcing frame 530 with a metal screw (not shown), and the other end of this body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected to the fifth ground terminal (power supply The sixth ground terminal (earth terminal) is electrically connected as a power ground to a ground connection terminal provided on the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 via a power supply ground wire (not shown). The door frame metal ground (door frame metal ground) is one end of a door frame metal ground wire (not shown) attached to a metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3 with a metal screw (not shown). , the other end of this door frame metal ground wire is electrically connected.

In the circuit of the frame ground board 559, the third ground terminal (ball tank ground terminal) as a ball tank ground is electrically connected to one end of a first resistor (not shown), and the other end of this first resistor is connected as a power ground. The main body The fourth ground terminal (body frame metal ground terminal) serving as the frame metal ground and the sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) serving as the door frame metal ground are electrically connected to one end of a second resistor (not shown). At the same time, the other end of this second resistor is a fifth ground terminal (power ground terminal) as a power ground, a second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as an island equipment ground, and a first ground terminal (as an interface ground). interface ground terminal) and are electrically connected to each other. That is, the other end of the first resistor and the other end of the second resistor are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are used as the first resistor and the second resistor.

Electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) as an interface ground is connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire. The electromagnetic wave noise that is guided to and removed and flows to the third ground terminal (ball tank ground terminal) as the ball tank ground is passed through the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire. The electromagnetic wave noise that is guided to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall and removed, and flows to the fourth ground terminal (main body frame metal ground terminal) as the main body frame metal ground, is removed from the second ground terminal (island equipment ground) as the island equipment ground. The electromagnetic wave noise that is led to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the island equipment ground wire (equipment ground terminal) and the island equipment ground wire and is removed, and flows to the fifth ground terminal (power ground terminal), which serves as the power supply ground, is used as the island equipment ground. The second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) is led to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the island equipment ground wire and is removed, and the sixth earth terminal (door frame metal ground) serves as the door frame metal ground. The electromagnetic wave noise flowing through the island equipment is led to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed via the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) serving as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire.

By the way, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, etc. are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with game balls B from the island equipment of the game hall, and the game balls B are supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game balls B are polished in the island equipment of the game hall, or rubbed against each other during circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and are charged and discharged with electrostatic electricity, thereby emitting electromagnetic noise. For this reason, static electricity is likely to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which can hold the game balls B, are attached.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the frame ground board 559 is arranged near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560, where static electricity tends to accumulate, and the ball tank 552 and dispensing unit 560, which are easily affected by electromagnetic noise as a result of which static electricity tends to accumulate, are arranged. A third ground terminal as a ball tank ground (ball tank ground terminal) and the fourth ground terminal (main body frame metal ground terminal) as the main body frame metal ground, through the first resistor and second resistor, respectively, to gradually flow and attenuate electromagnetic noise to generate a high voltage instantaneous. The second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) serving as the island facility ground can be led to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire. In other words, electromagnetic noise that enters from the ball tank 552 and dispensing unit 560, where static electricity tends to accumulate, is transmitted from the frame ground board 559 via the ball tank 552 and the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 as a frame ground called frame ground. By leading to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and payout unit 560 can be removed by flowing it to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall. In this way, in this embodiment, the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 not only has the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 500 to provide rigidity, but also functions as a body frame metal ground.

Furthermore, as described above, some of the various decorative parts provided on the door frame 3 are plated on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity. The decorative part with this decorative plating is electrically connected to the door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3 via wiring (not shown) or a metal conductive plate (not shown). has been done. Therefore, for example, when a player touches a decorative part with decorative plating, the static electricity charged on the player is electrostatically discharged and transmitted as electromagnetic noise from the player to the door frame reinforcing unit via the decorative part. In addition, personnel such as clerks in game halls, and persons in possession of the setting key (to be described later) (a limited number of persons who can confirm the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values) When the locking unit 650 in the frame 4 is touched, as described above, the static electricity charged on the staff such as the clerk of the game hall or the person in possession of the setting key described later is discharged as electromagnetic noise. The information is transmitted to the door frame reinforcing unit via this locking unit 650 from a person in possession of a setting key, which will be described later.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for the door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3, the sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as the door frame metal ground is connected to the frame ground board 559. Through the second resistor, electromagnetic wave noise is gradually flowed and attenuated to suppress instantaneous discharge of high voltage, and is connected from the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as the island equipment ground via the island equipment ground wire. This makes it possible to lead to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall. In other words, the decorative part with decorative plating, the player, the person in charge such as a clerk at the game hall, and the person in possession of the setting key described below (in addition to changing the setting value, checking the current setting value) Electromagnetic wave noise from a limited number of people who can carry out the above-mentioned activities is conducted as a frame ground called a frame ground, via the door frame reinforcement unit, from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall. Plated decorative parts, players, staff such as staff at the game hall, and people in possession of the setting keys described below (in addition to changing setting values, checking the current setting values, etc.) The electromagnetic noise from the limited number of people who can do this can be removed by flowing it to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall.

[4-5. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed structure of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 40 to 47. FIG. 40(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 40(b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 40(a). FIG. 41 is an enlarged view of the upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 42(a) is a perspective view of the ball tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and FIG. 42(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 42(a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 43 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 42(a). FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 47 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 is capable of being inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and is also attachable to and detachable from the outer frame 2 through the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520, and can be rotated by the hinge. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that can be attached to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped payout that is attached along the upper and left sides of the rear side of the body frame base 501 when viewed from the front. A base 551, a ball tank 552 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) extending left and right and is open upward, and a groove that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and is open upward. a tank rail 553 extending leftward in a shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail 553 spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; A ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end, and a dispensing device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the dispensing base 551 for dispensing game balls B to the player side. We are prepared.

The spherical tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a that is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, and a bottom wall 552a that extends from the front and rear sides of the bottom wall 552a. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed into a container shape with an open upper side. has been done. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Moreover, the spherical tank 552 has an overflow part 552f cut out from above in the front wall 552b and formed lower than the remaining upper edge of the outer periphery. This overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the opposite end (right side wall 552e side), and has a length of approximately 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. It is formed over a period of time.

When viewed from the front, the right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the spherical tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to move away from the spherical tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed in a width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B so that only one game ball B can flow therethrough. have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left when viewed from the front. In addition, in plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left and right direction parallel to the axis extending in the left and right direction from the right end side, and then extends to the left. It is formed in the shape of a crank, extending diagonally from the right end to a position approximately 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as the direction advances, and from there extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction to the left end. .

In the tank rail 553, in the main guide portion 553a, a portion extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width, and a first rail is attached to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the channel through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) in the part where the upper side is closed, and the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end). The ball is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one ball to pass through.

Furthermore, in the portion where the upper side is closed, the tank rail 553 extends a predetermined length in the left-right direction (in this embodiment, approximately Three rectangular notches 553aa having a diameter of 30 mm are formed at a predetermined interval (in this embodiment, approximately 10 mm). Due to the rectangular cutout portion 553aa, the bottom surface of the main guide portion 553a has a thickness of approximately 7 mm, which is the thickness of the rear wall (approximately 2.5 mm in this embodiment) from the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a toward the front. A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed in the rear wall of the main guide part 553a, and the thickness of the bottom plate (in this embodiment) extends upward from the bottom of the main guide part 553a. , about 2.5 mm), a height of about 7 mm, and a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction.These rectangular holes are formed in communication.

The game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 fall as metal powder is peeled off from the game balls B due to wear such as colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. Therefore, when the metal powder generated due to the wear of the game ball B becomes attached to the main guide portion 553a, the downstream flow of the game ball B is obstructed, and the game ball B is smoothly moved downstream. As a result, it becomes difficult to supply the game balls B, and the payout device 580 stops paying out the game balls B.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of notches 553aa are formed in the main guide part 553a, so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide part 553a. Thereby, for example, metal powder generated due to wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide part 553a by naturally falling from the main guide part 553a to the outside via the notch 553aa, Due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide part 553a, metal powder produced by wear of the game ball B adhering to the main guide part 553a falls from the main guide part 553a to the outside via the notch 553aa. This allows the metal powder to be removed from the main guiding part 553a, and a cotton swab can be inserted into the notch 553aa by an attendant such as a clerk at the game hall to remove metal powder caused by wear of the game ball B attached to the main guiding part 553a. The metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a by performing an operation to remove the metal powder.

Further, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end above the main guide portion 553a to the part where the upper side is closed, and is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are lined up in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging part 553b which bulges out wider than the width of the guide part 553a and which becomes narrower in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide part 553a. There is. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B, which are spread out in the width direction on the upstream side, can be aligned so that the width in the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as you go downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so as to become narrower in the width direction from the upper end toward the lower main guide portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b in a line in the width direction toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature located on the inside, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, there is a slight curve at the border between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge 553b is applied depends on the position of the bulge 553b that comes into contact with it. This results in changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumping within the bulged portion 553b. To be more specific, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force is always applied from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction to the game ball B circulating inside the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game balls B inside are always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game balls B to escape, and ball jamming (ball jamming) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging part 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging part 553b differs depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside can be circulated. By distributing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make ball jamming (ball jamming) less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is molded from a transparent material (such as polycarbonate resin), and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if balls become jammed inside the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B inside the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the balls are jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the ball jam in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, so the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball jam can be shortened as much as possible, and the interruption of the game can reduce the player's interest in the game. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the status of the drive motor, gears, belts, and other transmission mechanisms can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the above-mentioned components can be checked. It is possible to achieve the same effects as those obtained by using this method.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the spherical tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction outside the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, it is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b whose upper side is open in the tank rail 553, and the rear end side is low. The part of the game balls B that overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m is inclined so that the side (left side) that is farther from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower. A detour passage 552g for guiding.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outside sides of the detour passage 552g, and the interval in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the bottom A discharge part 551j whose height is lower than the upper open part of the tank rail 553, and a discharge part 551j located at a position lower than the overflow surface part 501m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552g with the discharge part 551j in between. It covers an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface part. A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is shaped like a flat plate extending rearward from a position 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It has extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and its left end when viewed from the front is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter of the game ball B. A gap approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m, and has a flat left step section 501n and a right step section 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface section 501m; The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both sides in the left and right direction, and extend in the front and rear direction like a strip, so that the outer side of the game ball B in the left and right direction is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o. It has a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its length in the left-right direction is shorter than its length in the front-back direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than in the front-back direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 The gap between them is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m matches the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the right step portion 501o matches the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o matches the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In addition, below, the container-shaped area|region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply called the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that its front end is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and its rear end is lower. and a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (weir portion 552i side) when viewed from the front; It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes towards the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined horizontally in the left-right direction.

When the detour passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the tank rail 553 extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape, so that the detour passage 552g runs along the front end side of a portion extending diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour path 552g changes from the oblique rear end so that its distribution direction becomes perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction of flow of game balls B within the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, so that the wide part of the tank rail 553 is used as the detour passage 552g. You can receive the game ball B from. In addition, since the game balls B are supplied from the detour path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the game balls B from the detour path 552g are fed into the tank rail 553. It is possible to make it difficult for balls to become clogged in the 553.

The detour path 552g extends obliquely to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves backward as it goes downstream of the tank rail 553, so the game ball B moves from the detour path 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By discharging to a wide area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumps inside the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour path 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left side of the rear wall 552c in the front view in the tank rail 553. The game balls B that have passed from inside the ball tank 552 through the lower side of the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flow into this part. For this reason, in the part of the tank rail 553 that is behind the detour passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). (height) cannot be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the detour passage 552g The game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B will not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending lower to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow part 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, when viewed from the front, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j extends from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction, and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction. After extending diagonally rearward from the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends parallel to the left wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in a shape extending parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position approximately ⅓ of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, there is a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape, and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The enclosed area has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending outward in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b, respectively, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir part 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a section 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow part 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange parts 552l is the same as the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o) is formed higher than the upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

When the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located rearward (protruding) from the spherical tank 552. )are doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The ejecting section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When the discharge part 551j is assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge part 551j is installed in the spherical tank 552 so that it becomes lower in a stepwise manner toward the rear from a height lower than the detour passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552. It extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, and then moves leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends towards the rear.

The external terminal board 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface thereof arranged in the left-right direction. This electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose grip part opens by operating a lever and can grip the tip of the electric wire. The external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effects of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n is inclined so that the rear right corner thereof is lower, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the rear left corner thereof is lower. Furthermore, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are each inclined such that the left end side thereof is lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

When the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, they first cross the overflow part 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be allowed to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B can be caused to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m. The game balls B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the slope of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 45). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the number of game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing against each other (increase in ball pressure) within the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball jamming) caused by the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

Moreover, since the detour passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 46, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to avoid a strong backward pressing force being applied to the game balls B in the ball tank 552 due to the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are prevented from clogging. can be prevented. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m are prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in which the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) due to the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from being strongly pressed against each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from becoming jammed.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer circumference of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow part 552f is made higher than the overflow part 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is The upper end edge of the left wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the rear end of the overflow portion 552f, that is, the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 over the overflow part 552f to the overflow surface part 501m and are flowing from the overflow surface part 501m to the detour passage 552g are on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour path 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball It is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the ball is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game balls B in the detour passage 552g is controlled from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear. The flow can be made in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and jammed together due to the pressure applied to the game balls B being dispersed, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. It can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guiding part 553a that extends to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding part 553a and are aligned in the left and right direction. Since they are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulge 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in the part where the upper side is open, the game balls released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is made to extend from the upstream end to the part where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they move toward the downstream side within the bulge portion 553b. In addition, since the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the channel through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) By circulating the plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction downstream through the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and the game balls B are stacked in multiple stages in the height direction. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (toward the payout device 580 side) in a state where they are aligned in a line.

Furthermore, since it is provided with an overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, on the opposite side of the bulb tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge part 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 equipped with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558), the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment bounce or are supplied with force in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, they can be made difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminals 558a, etc. , problems such as short circuits or electrical wiring coming off due to contact with the game ball B will not occur.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface 501m, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 are transferred to the ball tank 552. Even if the ball B bounces on the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. The occurrence of such problems can be easily avoided.

Furthermore, the game balls B returned from the overflow surface section 501m to the guide surface section 552j of the ball tank 552 are sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 45) due to the inclination of the guide surface section 552j. This can prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, thereby preventing the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

In addition, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounce on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface section 501m, and ride on the left step section 501n and right step section 501o on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 45, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface 501m and the detour passage 552g due to their inclinations, and problems can occur due to the game balls B spilling outside the main body frame 4. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, so the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 due to the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , the game ball B guided by the detour path 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the The game ball B is not received in the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

In addition, while the ball tank 552 is made of an electrical conductor (in this example, it is molded from conductive synthetic resin), the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box of the peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described later, are insulated. (In this example, it is molded from non-conductive synthetic resin). In this embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity, so if the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 falls from the notch 553aa It is attached to the peripheral control board box with the same polarity as the tank rail 553. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B does not adhere to the ball tank 552, but moves to the tank rail 553, adheres to the tank rail 553, and stays in the tank rail 553, and further adheres to the tank rail 553. When the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the notch 553aa is attached to the peripheral control board box having the same polarity as the tank rail 553 (for example, the top surface of the peripheral board box).

[4-6. Structure of measures against metal powder]
Next, electrical trouble (short circuit ) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is an enlarged schematic diagram showing a part of a cross section taken along the line CC in FIG. 40(a), and shows an outline of the structure for preventing metal powder.

As described above, the peripheral control unit in which the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the plurality of notches 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide part 553a of the tank rail 553 is placed below the tank rail 553. If it adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500, electrical problems may occur, causing the peripheral control unit 1500 to malfunction or malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is equipped with ICs such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM, which will be described later, and the peripheral data ROM board, which will be described later, is equipped with ICs such as peripheral data ROM. As the pin spacing of these ICs has become smaller, the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has become narrower, and as the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 has increased, the spacing between the various connectors has become narrower. Since the distance between the connector and the special connector is also narrower, it is necessary to take measures to prevent electrical problems caused by foreign objects falling from the tank rail.

First, as shown in FIG. 48, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are located on the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the back side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the production display device 1600 attached to the rear side is displaced toward the rear (in this embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). They are placed with a difference of the distance dimension).

As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side (from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side). It is formed into a step-like shape with multiple bends downward according to the direction of the building. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 48, a first eaves portion 551da is configured to extend to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 so that the lower end of this top plate portion is substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. . Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end portion of the back cover 640 is in surface contact with the rear surface of the first eaves portion 551da.

As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa can be received and attached to the first eaves part 551da of the top plate part 551a. There is. That is, the first eaves section 551da of the top plate section 551a causes the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide section 553a to the outside through the notch section 553aa to be transferred to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the base body 1502. The metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa is suppressed from entering into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the game This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by metal powder from the ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the contact portion with the first eaves portion 551da is further arranged such that the back cover 640 covers at least a portion of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 when assembled to the main body frame 4. Since the metal powder of the game ball B falls from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa and adheres to the first eaves part 551da of the top plate part 551a, When the metal powder falls from the first eave part 551da of 551a, the metal powder falls on the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the first eave part 551da of the top plate part 551a fall toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the base body 1502. By suppressing the metal powder from entering the body 1501, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the top plate part 551a of the payout base 551 and the back cover 640 are designed to prevent metal powder from the game balls B falling from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the plurality of notches 553aa formed in the main guide part 553a. to prevent the game board 5 from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000). It functions as a canopy or cover. Therefore, electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first eaves portion 551da is provided below the notch portion 553aa, the main eave portion 551da is provided through the notch portion 553aa not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. The metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the guiding part 553a can be received and attached to the first eaves part 551da, and the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding part 553a through the notch part 553aa. The metal powder falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa falls on the peripheral control unit. By suppressing entry into the cover body 1501 of the game ball B, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In the example described above, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eave part 551da, but the upper end of the back cover 640 and the first eave part The portion 551da may be arranged apart from the portion 551da. That is, the back cover 640 and the first eaves part 551da cooperate to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The arrangement of the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da does not matter as long as it suppresses the intrusion.

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of notches 553aa are formed in the gutter-shaped main guide part 553a of the tank rail 553, and a plurality of notches 553aa are formed on the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached production display device 1600 (on the rear side) is misaligned in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (in this embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). Due to the arrangement where the peripheral control unit 1500 is not placed directly under the notch 553aa), the game ball B from the tank rail 553 is It is effective as a countermeasure against metal powder that can prevent electrical troubles caused by metal powder.

Further, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later), while the upper side, left side, Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, it is assumed that metal powder from the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). This makes it difficult for the user to enter the inside of the cover body 1501 even when the user is using the cover body 1501.

Note that among the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, any one or a combination of ventilation holes is provided. A plurality of 1501az may be formed. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder caused by wear of the game ball B) does not fall into the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. This makes it possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign objects falling onto various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, electrical troubles caused by foreign objects falling from the tank rail 553 can be prevented. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 will be connected to the peripheral control board box 1505 through this ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder caused by wear of the game ball B) falls and enters into the interior of the peripheral control board box 1505, causing electrical damage caused by the foreign matter falling to various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability of trouble occurring increases.

In addition, when the ventilation holes 1501 are not provided on the top surface of the cover body 1501, the heat dissipation function is supplemented by increasing the number of ventilation holes 1501 provided on other surfaces or expanding the area of the ventilation holes 1501. It's okay. This can contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505, and can suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles such as thermal runaway.

Further, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 when attached to the pachinko machine 1 is in a substantially horizontal state. Therefore, when the metal powder of the game ball B falls from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa and adheres to the top surface of the cover body 1501, it is possible to keep this metal powder on the top surface of the cover body 1501. can. This can prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inside of the cover body 1501. Note that part or all of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 may be tilted as long as it does not cause the metal powder of the game ball B to fall toward the ventilation hole 1501az formed in the cover body 1501.

Further, the first eave member 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 may be attached to the top plate portion 551a as a separate member (another structural component).

In addition, when the first eave section 551da of the top plate section 551a and/or the back cover 640 covers the upper part or rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, or when the gutter-shaped main guide section 553a of the tank rail 553 For example, when the plurality of notches 553aa formed in the main guiding part 553a and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged to be shifted in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of notches 553aa formed in the main guiding part 553a are If there is a low probability that the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside will go to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, a portion of the top surface of the cover body 1501 when attached to the pachinko machine 1 is Ventilation holes 1501az may be provided at the corners of the cover body 1501 (for example, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 is mostly closed, but the ventilation holes 1501az are formed in a part thereof, etc.).

Further, the present technical idea is not limited to completely preventing the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Compared to conventional pachinko machines, the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa is suppressed from entering into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, when the cover body 1501 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 (for example, a corner of the cover body 1501, most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 is closed, but a part of the upper surface has ventilation holes 1501az). A device in which a ventilation hole 1501az is provided in the air conditioner (such as a vent hole 1501az) also falls under the present technical idea.

Further, a plurality of slit holes are formed in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The cover body 1501 also has seven connector holes along its lower side at positions corresponding to seven connectors and a volume adjustment switch, which will be described later, provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501. A volume adjustment hole is formed, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output board, which will be described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached inside the cover body 1501, gaps are formed between the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole formed in the cover body 1501, A volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from this volume adjustment hole. Furthermore, when a liquid crystal output board (described later) is attached inside the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed from these two connector holes.

The cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 allows air to flow from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501, and a shield plate accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. 1540 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az, and the above-mentioned gaps (the gaps formed between the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, A gap formed between the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole formed on the cover body 1501, and the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and the two connectors formed on the cover body 1501. It will be taken in through the hole (the gap formed in the hole).

Incidentally, when the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in air from outside the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy metal powder of the game ball B is influenced by the air flow and moves toward the inner space of the cover body 1501. There is a high probability that the metal powder will be sucked in, and electrical troubles (short circuits) caused by the sucked metal powder may cause damage to various electronic components installed on various boards such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501. This will cause problems (failures) to occur.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in order to prevent such electrical troubles (short circuits), a first eaves portion 551da is formed along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, so that the game ball It can be configured to have a function as an eaves that prevents heavy powder such as metal powder B from being sucked into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 from the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501. Note that a detailed description of the configuration of peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a plurality of notches 553aa are formed in the main guide part 553a of the tank rail 553, so that metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide part 553a. However, a cutout, hole, or groove similar to the cutout 553aa may be formed in the ball path in which the game ball B rolls. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 shown in FIG. 33, which has a single guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, the metal of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a is A notch, hole, or groove that allows powder to be removed from the guide passage 570a to the outside may be formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the guide unit 570 shown in FIG. 28. As shown in FIG. 33, below the ball guiding unit 570, a dispensing device 580, a substrate unit 620, etc. are arranged, and the dispensing device 580 has a substrate etc. on which a blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. The board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, an interface board 635, etc. shown in FIG. 34, and various boards are arranged therein. Therefore, if a notch, hole, or groove is formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, the game ball will fall through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the metal powder B from adhering to various substrates arranged below the guiding unit 570. Therefore, an eave-like member may be formed to protrude rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear lid 582 of the dispensing device 580 shown in FIG. The position of the cutout, hole, or groove in the dispensing device 580 and the position of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted can be shifted, and both can be adopted. It can also be configured as In addition, an eave-like member is moved rearward along the upper sides of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, etc. shown in FIG. The positions of the notches, holes, or grooves formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571, the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be configured to protrude. It can be constructed by shifting the positions of and , or it can be constructed by employing both.

Next, other configurations of the present invention that take measures against metal powder that can avoid electrical troubles caused by metal powder in game ball B (hereinafter referred to as "measures against metal powder according to the second to fifth embodiments"). 49 to 51. FIG. 49 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 shows a configuration for countermeasures against metal powder according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration for countermeasures against metal powder according to the third embodiment. FIG. 51 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 49 to 51, members having the same functions as those in the embodiment shown in FIG. 48 (hereinafter referred to as "metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment") are given the same reference numerals. At the same time, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the portions of the game board 5 necessary for explanation are shown as cross-sectional views.

[Comparison between the configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the first embodiment and the configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the second embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is, as described above, from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a ( The top plate part 551a is formed into a plurality of steps bent downward as the top plate part 551a goes from the front to the rear. It constitutes a first eave portion 551da extending rearward.

On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is formed in the shape of multiple steps bent downward from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate part 551a), and the lower end of the top plate part 551a extends to the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Although the first eaves portion 551da is configured, the first eaves portion 551da is not extended so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553, and is not extended to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (as shown in FIG. 48). In the example shown, the guide section 553 is provided only up to just below the notch 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide section 553a of the tank rail 553.

On the other hand, the upper end of the back cover 640 is bent toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (in the direction of the game board 5) when assembled to the main body frame 4, and is formed into a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. A second eaves section 640a extends to just below the notch section 553aa, and the second eaves section 640a is in contact with the first eaves section 551da of the top plate section 551a. Further, the rear end surface of the back cover 640 is arranged further to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 than the rear surface of the tank rail 553.

As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the first eave portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion alone, whereas in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment. The structure is different in that the first eaves section 551da and the second eaves section 640a are connected and jointly constitute an eaves section.

In addition, if the first eaves part 551da and the second eaves part 640a are connected and jointly constitute an eaves part, the length of the first eaves part 551da and the second eaves part 640a, that is, the length of the eaves part The respective proportions and the positions where the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are brought into contact are not limited to those described above. For example, the first eaves section 640a is extended to the vicinity of the front surface of the tank rail 553, and the second eave section 640a is extended to the vicinity of the front surface of the tank rail 553 and abuts on the first eaves section 640a (tank rail 553 ), the metal powder from the game ball B falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa is mainly received and attached to the second eave part 640a. It's okay.

The configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment can also provide the same effects as the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment. In other words, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the plurality of notches 553aa formed in the main guide part 553a is transferred to the first eaves part 551da arranged below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached, or it can be received and attached at the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640. Furthermore, since the rear surface of the back cover 640 extends to cover at least a portion of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 when assembled to the main body frame 4, the main body can be The metal powder of the game ball B that fell from the guiding part 553a to the outside and adhered to the first eave part 551da of the top plate part 551a and the second eave part 640a of the back cover 640 is deposited on the first eave part 551da of the top plate part 551a. When the metal powder falls from the second eaves part 640a of the back cover 640, the metal powder falls on the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). To prevent the game balls B from falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the side), and further to prevent the game balls B from falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa. By suppressing metal powder from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by metal powder from the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510. There is.

[Comparison between the configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the first embodiment and the configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the third embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is, as described above, from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a ( The top plate part 551a is formed into a plurality of steps bent downward as the top plate part 551a goes from the front to the rear. A back cover 640 is provided at the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 without the top plate portion 551a, which constitutes a first eave portion 551da extending rearward.

On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the rear end portion of the top plate portion 551a is bent downward to form an extended back plate upper portion 551d. The lower end of this upper back plate 551d is in contact with the upper end of the back cover 640. Note that the length of the upper part of the back plate 551d is not limited to the example shown in FIG. As shown, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 may not be extended to a position directly behind it, but may be extended above it.

As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the back cover 640 alone covers at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, whereas the In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, the back plate upper part 551d and the back cover 640 are connected and jointly cover at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. There is a difference.

The configuration for preventing metal powder according to the third embodiment can also provide the same effects as the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment. In other words, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the plurality of notches 553aa formed in the main guide part 553a is transferred to the first eaves part 551da arranged below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached, or it can be received and attached at the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640. Furthermore, when assembled on the main body frame 4, the upper back plate 551d and the rear surface of the back cover 640 are connected and jointly cover at least a portion of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. , the metal powder of the game ball B that fell to the outside from the main guiding part 553a through the notch part 553aa and adhered to the first eave part 551da of the top plate part 551a and the second eave part 640a of the back cover 640 is removed from the top plate. If the metal powder falls from the first eaves section 551da of the section 551a or the second eaves section 640a of the back cover 640, the metal powder will be removed from the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (attached to the back side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). To prevent the peripheral control unit 1500 from falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 attached to the effect display device 1600 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600), and to prevent the main guide portion 553a from falling toward the base body 1502 through the notch portion 553aa. The metal powder from the game ball B that has fallen to the outside is suppressed from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby preventing electrical troubles caused by the metal powder from the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510. It is now possible to suppress the occurrence of

[Comparison between the configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the first embodiment and the configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the fourth embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is, as described above, from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a ( The top plate part 551a is formed into a plurality of steps bent downward as the top plate part 551a goes from the front to the rear. It constitutes a first eave portion 551da extending rearward.

On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although it is formed in a step shape with multiple bends downward as it goes from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate part 551a), the bent rear side of the top plate part 551a is formed as the top plate part 551a. Parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide section 553a, and a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension of about half the diameter of the game ball B) downward from the bottom of the main guide section 553a. ). In other words, the bent end surface of the top plate portion 551a is arranged to protrude downward compared to the bottom of the main guide portion 553a.

In addition, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fourth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the second eaves portion 640a is formed by bending the upper side of the back cover 640 largely toward the front. The front surface is arranged parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide section 553a, and is in surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate section 551a, which is arranged to protrude downward compared to the bottom of the main guide section 553a. It is in a state. Further, the portion where the front surface of the second eaves section 640a and the rear surface of the top plate section 551a come into contact is arranged to be largely shifted forward from the plurality of notches 553aa formed in the main guide section 553a.

As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the first eave portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion alone, whereas in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. The configuration is different in that the first eaves section 551da is not provided and the second eaves section 640a constitutes the eaves section by itself.

The configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment can also provide the same effects as the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment. In other words, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the plurality of notches 553aa formed in the main guide part 553a is removed from the upper side of the back cover 640 disposed below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached to the upper surface of the second eave part 640a, which is formed by bending the side largely toward the front. Furthermore, since the rear surface of the back cover 640 extends to cover at least a portion of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 when assembled to the main body frame 4, the main body can be When the metal powder of the game ball B that falls from the guiding part 553a to the outside and adheres to the second eave part 640a of the back cover 640 falls from the second eave part 640a of the back cover 640, this metal powder falls onto the game board 5. falling toward the cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000). The metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa is suppressed from entering into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby preventing the metal powder from entering the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by metal powder from the ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

Note that in the first to fourth embodiments described above, the first eaves portion 551da is configured by the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. However, it is not limited to this, and any of the members attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 such as the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, or the members attached to the main body frame base unit 500. The first eaves portion 551da may be configured by any one of them.

[4-7-1. Checking for dust when installing and removing the game board 1]
As mentioned above, conventionally, it is possible to make the flow of game balls smoothly down on the tank rail by dropping foreign objects such as metal powder and dust from the discharge hole 553aa provided in the tank rail. When foreign matter adheres to the control board and the like disposed below, problems arise with the game parts, causing problems such as malfunctions and malfunctions of the game machine. Specifically, metal powder generated by falling game balls on the tank rail falls from the discharge hole 553aa of the tank rail and adheres to a predetermined part (connector part, etc.) of the control board arranged below. This may cause electrical problems with the control board, which may interfere with the progress of gaming on the gaming machine. In addition, there are also problems caused by foreign objects falling downward from the discharge hole 553aa of the tank rail, which is not subject to replacement, due to vibrations generated during the work of replacing the game board with a new one (installing and removing the game board, etc.). If foreign objects in the tank rail fall downward due to the vibrations that occur when the new game board is installed, there is a risk that the operation of the game machine with the new game board will be hindered. In order to deal with such problems, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game board 5 is attached or detached, the presence of foreign matter such as metal powder or dust on the game ball B in the tank rail 553 (the presence of foreign matter such as metal powder or dust on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553) is checked. This makes it possible to easily check the accumulation of foreign matter, the adhesion of foreign matter on the side of the tank rail 553, etc., and to take countermeasures (such as removal of foreign matter) before a malfunction occurs. This example will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, FIG. 35, and FIGS. 19 to 22, FIG. 35, and FIGS. 52 to 56 in addition to the above-mentioned drawings. FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram showing the outline of the structure for preventing metal powder with the game board 5 of this example removed, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example attached. 54 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example removed, and FIG. 55(A) is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example removed, viewed from the lower right front. FIG. 56(A) is a perspective view showing that when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the tank rail 553 hangs down inside the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 when viewed from the front. 56(B) is a diagram schematically showing a side view of the pachinko machine 1 seen from the left side. It is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached to the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 are provided with permeable parts. Specifically, the entire delivery base 551 and tank rail 553 are made of transparent synthetic resin (colorless and transparent synthetic resin in this embodiment), and are constructed so that the entire delivery base 551 and tank rail 553 are transparent. ing. In addition, the ball guiding unit 570, which is provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 and has a single guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, is also made entirely (or partially) transparent. The guide passage 570a is made of synthetic resin (colorless and transparent synthetic resin in this embodiment), and is configured so that the entire guide passage 570a (or only a part of it) is transparent. In addition, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the entire ball tank 552 are made of an opaque synthetic resin (black in this example). (synthetic resin), and is constructed so that these materials do not pass through.

In addition, in the tank rail 553 of this example, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the payout base 551, a portion overlaps with the payout base 551 in the front-back direction from the side where the payout base 551 is located (the front side of the pachinko machine 1). (a directly supported part), and a part that does not overlap with the payout base 551 in the front-rear direction from the side where the payout base 551 is located (the front side of the pachinko machine 1) (a part that is not directly supported and has a hollow shape). (see FIG. 54). In this example, these parts of the tank rail 553 are made visible through the opening of the game board mounting part 301 that is formed when the game board 5, which is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, is removed. , it is possible to check the presence of metal powder and dust in the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent problems in the game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one.

In the following, metal powder in the tank rail 553 will be explained by looking up from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 to the upper inner side of the opening of the game board mounting part 301 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side removed. The details of checking the presence of foreign matter such as dirt and dust will be explained below.

As mentioned above, FIG. 53 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example attached, and FIG. 54 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example removed. be. As is clear from the comparison with FIG. 53, FIG. 55(A) shows the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 that is formed when the game board 5, which is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, is removed. The tank rail 553 is arranged such that at least a portion of the tank rail 553 is located within the opening (above the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 when viewed from the front. That is, in this example, the tank rail 553 is arranged so that the tank rail 553 hangs down and faces into the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 when viewed from the front. However, if the entire tank rail 553 faces into the opening of the game board mounting part 301, the area of the tank rail 553 that can be seen through the opening becomes large, allowing the checker to see parts that are unnecessary for checking the presence of foreign objects. Therefore, in this example, in order to speed up the confirmation of the presence of foreign objects, we focused on checking the presence of foreign objects in the tank rail 553 rather than the entire tank rail 553. Only the specific parts that need to be confirmed (in this example, the bottom and side surfaces of the tank rail 553 near the part where the discharge hole 553aa for dropping foreign matter is formed) are the parts of the game board mounting part 301 that are visible from the front. It is placed so that it hangs down and faces the top of the opening.

The right side portion of the tank rail 553 hanging down and facing into the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in FIGS. 54 and 55(A) is a portion that does not overlap with the above-mentioned payout base 551 in the front-back direction. (a part that is not directly supported and is arranged in a hollow shape), and when the opening of the game board mounting part 301 is viewed from the front, the tank rail 553 made of transparent synthetic resin can be seen directly. It is visible and the inner side (inner side of the bottom and side surfaces) of the tank rail 553 can be confirmed. In addition, the left side portion is a portion where the tank rail 553 and the payout base 551 overlap in the front-rear direction (directly supported portion), and when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is visually recognized from the front, The tank rail 553 made of transparent synthetic resin can be seen through the dispensing base 551 made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inner side (inner side of the bottom and sides) of the tank rail 553 can be confirmed. ing. In this way, in this example, not only the tank rail 553 but also the part to which the tank rail 553 is attached is made of transparent synthetic resin, so that the area where the presence of foreign objects in the tank rail 553 can be checked is not restricted. I have to.

Furthermore, in this example, when the game board 5 is attached as shown in FIG. It is impossible to confirm the presence of foreign matter within the rail 553. However, by forming the entire payout base 551 and tank rail 553 from transparent synthetic resin, even when the game board 5 is attached, it is possible to access the main body frame 4 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to check the presence of foreign matter in the tank rail 553 from the side when the tank rail 553 is opened and closed forward centering on the left side in front view.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 (vertically above the tank rail 553), a first rail cover 554, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball tank 552. Since the detour passage 552g is formed of opaque synthetic resin, if you look up inside the opening of the game board mounting part 301, you will see that the second rail cover 555 located on the back of the tank rail 553 and the first rail The cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the detour passage 552g are visible through the dispensing base 551 and tank rail 553 formed of transparent resin. In this way, the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the detour passage 552g are located at the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 at a position where they are visible on the back of the tank rail 553. By looking upward and inside, the presence of foreign matter accumulated in the tank rail 553 becomes clear due to the member formed of opaque resin, and the presence of foreign matter can be easily confirmed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 and removed. Since it is possible to judge the necessity of the game board 5, it is possible to prevent problems in the game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new game board 5.

In the above example, the entire dispensing base 551 and tank rail 553 are made of transparent synthetic resin, but other forms may be used as long as the inside of the tank rail 553 can be confirmed. good. For example, while the dispensing base 551 is formed of an opaque resin, the entire tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent resin, an opening is provided in a part of the dispensing base 551 formed of an opaque resin, and the tank rail 553 is formed of an opaque resin. A configuration may be adopted in which the inside of the rail 553 can be checked.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball tank 552 is made of transparent resin, but in this example, the ball tank 552 is also made of an "electrical conductor". has been done. Specifically, in this example, the entire bulb tank 552 is molded from a synthetic resin having conductivity. On the other hand, the tank rail 553 made of transparent resin is made of a non-conductive insulator (in this example, it is molded from non-conductive synthetic resin). Further, the ball tank 552 is electrically connected to a frame ground board 559, so that electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the ball tank 552 is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. As a result, the static electricity on the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is removed (neutralized), foreign matter such as metal powder attached to the game ball B can be removed, and the metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B can be removed. This makes it difficult for foreign matter such as metal powder to adhere to the ball tank 552, so that foreign matter such as metal powder can be moved from the inside of the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 as the game balls B flow down.

Further, as described above, a plurality of notches 553aa are formed in the tank rail 553, so that foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B can be dropped to the outside. However, since the tank rail 553 is made of an insulator, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B adheres to the tank rail 553 and remains within the tank rail 553. In this way, since the tank rail 553 is made of an insulator, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B can be stuck to the inside of the tank rail 553, and as described above, metal powder and dust can be trapped. In addition to making it easier to confirm the presence of the game ball B, foreign objects such as metal powder that have fallen from the game ball B can fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and can also fall from the game ball B. This prevents foreign matter such as metal powder from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby preventing electrical troubles caused by foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510. It is now possible to suppress the occurrence of

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to the tank rail 553, the eaves section (first eaves section 551da and/or second eaves section 640a) and back cover 640 provided below the tank rail 553 are also made of insulators ( Polycarbonate resin, etc.). That is, when the tank rail 553, the eaves section (the first eaves section 551da and/or the second eaves section 640a), and the back cover 640 are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, if foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B falls from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves) with the same polarity as the tank rail 553 640a) and the back cover 640 due to electrostatic force, foreign matter such as metal powder is attached to the back cover 640.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the tank rail 553 is made of an insulator (in this example, it is molded from non-conductive synthetic resin), so that the ball tank 552 and the game balls B on the tank rail 553 can be prevented from falling. In addition to attaching and fixing foreign matter such as metal powder to the tank rail 553 by electrostatic force, if foreign matter such as metal powder adhering to the tank rail 553 falls from the notch 553aa, Even if there is a foreign object such as a fallen metal powder, the eaves section (first eaves section 551da and/or second eaves section 640a) made of an insulator (molded from non-conductive synthetic resin in this example) The foreign matter can be attached and fixed to the top surface of the back cover 640 or the like by electrostatic force, and scattering of foreign matter to the outside can be suppressed. As a result, in addition to making it easier to confirm the presence of metal powder and dust as described above, foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the game ball B fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. This makes it possible to doubly prevent foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and further prevent metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by foreign substances such as those attached to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, in this example, the tank rail 553 is made of an insulator (molded with non-conductive resin in this example), but as another example, a transparent insulating sheet may be provided inside the tank rail 553. , foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 may be attached to and fixed on the tank rail 553 by electrostatic force.

Further, in the above example, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the detour passage 552g in the ball tank 552 are formed of opaque resin. However, although the second rail cover 555 made of opaque resin, the first rail cover 554, and the ball rectifying member 556 are visible through the tank rail 553 made of transparent resin, At least one of the members visible through the tank rail 553 formed of transparent resin may be formed of opaque resin or metal, or an opaque sticker may be pasted on the surface, or paint may be applied to the surface. It may also be possible to make the back part difficult to see (including making it unclear). That is, since most of the foreign substances such as metal powder and dust accumulate on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, when checking the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board mounting part 301, Opaque resin or the like is placed at a position visible through the transparent bottom surface of the tank rail 553, for example, on the outside of the left side wall of the tank rail 553 in FIG. A member formed of metal or the like may be provided, or the left side wall portion of the tank rail 553 in FIG. It may be configured as a separate member such as.

In addition, when the above eaves parts (first eaves part 551da and/or second eaves part 640a) are provided below the tank rail 553, these eaves parts (first eaves part 551da and/or second eaves part 640a) are provided below the tank rail 553. ) may be formed partially or entirely from a transparent synthetic resin. As a result, when the game board 5 is removed, metal powder and dust inside the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized through the eaves section (first eaves section 551da and/or second eaves section 640a) formed of transparent synthetic resin. become. Further, the entire back cover 640 may be formed of a transparent synthetic resin, or only a part of the back cover 640, including the portion constituting the second eaves portion 640a, may be formed of a transparent synthetic resin. It's okay.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 53, the game board 5 can be removed from the front side of the main body frame 4 with the back cover 640 closed. be. Furthermore, in the state where the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 shown in FIGS. Even in the removed state, the eaves section (in the example shown in FIG. 52, the first eaves section 551da; however, in the other embodiments described above, the second eaves section 640a or the first eaves section 551da and the second eaves section 640a correspond) is attached to the tank. Metal powder and dust that remain below the rail 553 and fall from inside the tank rail 553 are caught by the eaves section (first eaves section 551da and/or second eaves section 640a) and are transferred to game devices such as connectors located below. It is possible to suppress raining and adhesion, and to prevent problems in the game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 52, when checking the tank rail 553 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board mounting part 301 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side removed, , metal powder and dust adhering to the eaves section (first eaves section 551da and/or second eaves section 640a) formed of transparent synthetic resin, and inside the tank rail 553 formed of transparent synthetic resin. Since both metal powder and dust can be visually recognized, the existence status of these metal powder and dust can be confirmed at once. Furthermore, the eaves section (the first eaves section 551da and/or the second eaves section 640a) formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the tank rail 553 formed of a transparent synthetic resin are made of an opaque synthetic resin. Since it is possible to visually recognize members such as the second rail cover 555, first rail cover 554, and ball rectifying member 556, the second rail cover 555 formed of opaque synthetic resin and the first rail cover 554 and the ball rectifying member 556, metal powder and dust attached to the eaves part (first eave part 551da and/or second eave part 640a) and metal powder and dust accumulated inside the tank rail 553. The existence of metal powder and dust becomes clear, the presence of metal powder and dust can be easily confirmed, and it is possible to prevent problems in the game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one.

Note that the tank rail 553 made of transparent synthetic resin and the member made of opaque synthetic resin are attached to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side. It is sufficient that the tank rail 553 has a positional relationship such that at least a portion thereof overlaps with the tank rail 553 and is visible when the tank rail 553 is checked through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301. This varies depending on the person checking the presence of metal powder and dust, such as a store clerk. That is, if a clerk at a game parlor sticks his head into the opening of the game board mounting part 301 and looks up from a position directly below the tank rail 553, the The second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, and the ball rectifying member 556 are members that overlap the tank rail 553, and when the tank rail 553 is looked up from outside the opening of the game board mounting part 301, the tank rail 553 A member provided directly behind (behind the pachinko machine 1) or at the upper part of the rear side (behind the pachinko machine 1) is a member that overlaps with the tank rail 553. In this way, the person checking the presence of metal powder and dust can see the opaque member overlapped with the tank rail 553 by changing the viewing position as appropriate, and can clearly see the presence of metal powder and dust. This makes it easy to confirm the presence of metal powder and dust.

Further, as described above, if you look up inside the opening of the game board mounting part 301 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side removed, you will see that the first rail located at the back of the tank rail 553 The cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are visible through the dispensing base 551 and tank rail 553 formed of transparent resin. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, a locking portion 555a having a locking hole is formed in each of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, and the tank rail 553 The tank rail 553 is removably attached to the tank rail 553 by press-fitting a locking protrusion 553c formed on the outside of the side wall of the tank rail 553 into a locking hole formed in the locking portion 555a.

If you look up inside the opening of the game board mounting part 301 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side removed, you will see a payout base 551 and a tank rail 553 formed of transparent resin. The locking portions 555a formed on each of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 (all the locking portions 555a may be visible or a plurality of Some of the locking parts 555a may be visible) and locking protrusions 553c formed on the tank rail 553 (all of the locking protrusions 553c may be visible, or a plurality of locking protrusions 553c may be visible). Some of the locking projections 553c may be visible (some of the locking projections 553c may be visible). In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, The installation status of the tank rail 553, that is, the locking state of the locking portion 555a and the locking protrusion 553c can be checked, and abnormalities in the ball flow path within the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

Note that when the game ball B exists inside the tank rail 553, the rear visibility of the game ball B is hindered, but a locking protrusion 553c is formed on the outside of the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 so that the first The rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are attached to the tank rail 553 with their respective locking portions 555a sandwiching the passage of the tank rail 553. In other words, when the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are attached to the tank rail 553, the game balls B located inside the tank rail 553 are placed in a position where visibility is not obstructed. , at least a portion of the locking portion 555a formed on the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, and at least a portion of the locking protrusion 553c formed on the tank rail 553 are provided. There is. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are attached to the tank rail 553, they are provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 rather than the tank rail 553. The locking portion 555a (may be all or a part of the locking portion 555a provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 than the tank rail 553) and the outside of the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. The locking protrusion 553c (which may be all or a part of the locking protrusion 553c provided on the outside of the front side wall of the pachinko machine 1 in the tank rail 553) refers to the game ball B located within the tank rail 553. so that visibility is not obstructed.

In addition, when the game ball B does not exist in the tank rail 553, the insides (lower surfaces in the vertical direction) of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are transparent. It is visible through the dispensing base 551 and tank rail 553 formed of resin, and the inner surfaces (lower side in the vertical direction) of the first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and ball rectifying member 556 It is possible to check the adhesion of foreign substances such as metal powder and dust to the surface. As a result, when replacing the game board 5 with a new one, the conditions of the first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and ball rectifying member 556 can be easily checked from the front of the pachinko machine 1 and removed. It is possible to judge the necessity of this, and it is possible to prevent abnormalities from occurring in the ball flow path within the tank rail 553.

Further, as described above, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the tank rail 553 is arranged so as to hang down and face the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 when viewed from the front. Then, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 under conditions other than confirming the presence of metal powder or dust, the tank rail 553 can be seen within the opening (at the top of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301. Therefore, if there is an occasion where only the main body frame 4 is displayed before the game board 5 is changed or when a model is announced, there is a risk that the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 will be lost. In order to avoid this, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the tank rail 553 is arranged so as to hang down and face the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, the door frame 3 may cover the area where the tank rail 553 hangs down.

Specifically, the upper decorative part By providing the front end side of the upper decorative part X to hang down more than the rear end side of the upper decorative part For example, the tank rail 553 may hang down (at the top of the opening) to cover all or part of the area facing the tank rail 553 . FIG. 56(A) corresponds to the location where the tank rail 553 hangs down into the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 when viewed from the front when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4. It is a diagram showing the location of the upper decoration part X of the door frame 3 with diagonal lines. As a result, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 under conditions other than checking the presence of metal powder or dust, closing the door frame 3 allows the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 when viewed from the front. It is possible to make it difficult for the tank rail 553 to be visually recognized inside (the upper part of the opening), and to improve the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 on occasions when only the main body frame 4 is displayed, such as before changing the game board 5 or when announcing a model. Loss can be suppressed.

Moreover, although the upper decorative part The rear end side of the X is provided so that the lower end thereof is located outside the game window 201 and has a predetermined width dimension in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, and the upper decorative part The front end of the upper decorative part When the game window 201 is seated, a player who faces the game window 201 can see the entire game area 5a of the game board 5 from between the upper decoration part X and the game window 201. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting part 301 and played as the original pachinko machine 1, the hanging part on the front end side allows the player to play the game of the upper decorative part X while seated in the game window 201. The pachinko machine is constructed such that all or part of the tank rail 553 is covered by the hanging part on the front end side of the upper decorative part It is possible to suppress the loss of decorativeness of item 1.

[4-7-2. Checking for dust when installing and removing the game board 2]
In the above example, the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and are configured so that the presence of metal powder and dust inside the tank rail 553 can be confirmed. A configuration that allows focused confirmation of the presence of metal powder or dust that has fallen from the tank rail 553 and adhered to the upper surface of the eave part (first eave part 551da and/or second eave part 640a) instead of inside the tank rail 553. exemplify.

That is, in this example, while the tank rail 553 shown in FIGS. 52, 54, and 55(B) is formed of an opaque synthetic resin (black resin in this example), the eaves portion located below it (as shown in FIG. 52) is made of an opaque synthetic resin (black resin in this example). In the illustrated example, the first eaves section 551da (however, in the other embodiments described above, the second eaves section 640a or the first eaves section 551da and the second eaves section 640a correspond) is made of transparent synthetic resin. . Note that the back cover 640 may be formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin, or only a portion of the back cover 640, including a portion constituting the second eaves portion 640a, may be formed of a transparent synthetic resin. It may be formed of synthetic resin. Furthermore, in order to make the tank rail 553 opaque, the tank rail 553 is not limited to being made of opaque synthetic resin, but the tank rail 553 may be made of opaque metal, etc., or the surface or inner surface of the tank rail 553 may be opaque. Other configurations may be adopted as long as they are made non-transparent (including those that are rendered indistinct) by pasting a sticker or applying paint.

In this example, the eaves section (in the example shown in FIG. 52, the first eaves section 551da; however, in the other embodiments described above, the second eaves section 640a or the first eaves section 551da and the second eaves section 640a correspond). The part located below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized through the opening of the game board mounting part 301 that is formed when the game board 5, which is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, is removed. By doing so, it is possible to check the presence of metal powder and dust that have fallen and adhered to the eaves part (first eaves part 551da and/or second eaves part 640a) from the tank rail 553, and to prevent new game boards 5. It is possible to prevent problems in the game operation after replacing.

In the following, by looking up from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 to the upper inner side of the opening of the game board mounting part 301 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side removed, the eaves part ( The details of checking the presence of foreign objects such as metal powder and dust that have fallen and adhered to the first eave part 551da and/or the second eave part 640a will be explained.

FIG. 55(B) is a perspective view of another example of the main body frame with the game board removed, viewed from the lower right front. As described above, in this example, the tank rail 553 is made of opaque synthetic resin, and is arranged so as to hang down and face the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 when viewed from the front. In addition, the payout base 551 to which the tank rail 553 is attached is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and like the tank rail 553, a portion of the payout base 551, particularly the lower end of the payout base 551 that constitutes the first eaves portion 551da, is visible from the front when viewed from the game board. It is arranged so as to hang down and face the inside of the opening (upper part of the opening) of the attachment part 301.

In addition, a plurality of notches 553aa are formed in the tank rail 553, and metal powder, dust, etc. in the tank rail 553 are removed from the dispensing base 551 made of transparent synthetic resin provided below the tank rail 553. It is designed to be dropped onto one eave part 551da. When the opening of the game board mounting part 301 is viewed from the front, the upper surface of the payout base 551 made of transparent synthetic resin can be seen, and the lower part of the cutout part 553aa of the first eaves part 551da is visible. It is now possible to check the presence of metal powder, dust, etc. attached to the parts.

Furthermore, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the tank rail 553 can be seen through the payout base 551 made of transparent synthetic resin. Since the tank rail 553 is made of opaque synthetic resin, if you look up inside the opening of the game board mounting part 301, you will see that the tank rail 553 made of opaque synthetic resin is located behind the payout base 551. This makes the presence of metal powder and dust attached to the first eaves portion 551da clearer, making it easier to confirm the presence of foreign objects, and preventing problems in game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one. can be prevented from occurring.

In the above example, all of the tank rails 553 are formed so that their backs are difficult to see (including those that are unclear), but the invention is not limited to this, and at least the first eaves portion 551da located below The part facing the first eave part 551da is made of opaque synthetic resin or metal, or an opaque sticker is pasted on the surface of the part facing the first eave part 551da, or paint is applied to make the back part difficult to see. (including blurring). For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, the left side wall portion of the tank rail 553 in FIG. Applying an opaque sticker or applying paint to the bottom surface of the rail 553 or the left side wall of the tank rail 553 in FIG. 52 (the side wall on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the tank rail 553), etc. This may make the back part difficult to see (including making it unclear).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 53, it is possible to remove the game board 5 from the front side of the main body frame 4 while keeping the back cover 640 closed. be. In addition, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 shown in FIGS. 52 and 54, the first eaves portion 551da remains below the tank rail 553, so metal powder and dust falling from inside the tank rail 553 are prevented. The first eaves part 551da can catch the rain and prevent it from adhering to game devices such as connectors located below, and can prevent problems in the game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are formed of opaque resin, but in this example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are also made of "conductive material". It is composed of "an electrical conductor having a

Specifically, in this example, the entire ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are molded from a conductive resin. In addition, the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are electrically connected to the frame ground board 559, and electromagnetic noise that has entered the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. It is supposed to be done. As a result, in addition to making it easy to confirm the presence of metal powder and dust as described above, the static electricity of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 is removed (discharged), and the game ball B Foreign matter such as metal powder adhering to the game ball B can be dropped from the game ball B, and the foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B is made difficult to adhere to the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553. Foreign matter such as metal powder moves from the tank 552 to the tank rail 553 as the game ball B flows down, and foreign matter such as metal powder in the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 is actively dropped from the cutout 553aa. I can do it.

On the other hand, in this example, the eaves section (first eaves section 551da and/or second eaves section 640a) provided below the tank rail 553 and the back cover 640 are made of an insulator made of transparent synthetic resin. As a result, in addition to making it easier to confirm the presence of metal powder and dust, foreign matter such as metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is removed from the eaves by electrostatic force. It can be attached and fixed to (the first eave part 551da and/or the second eave part 640a), the upper surface of the back cover 640, etc., and it is possible to suppress foreign substances from being scattered outside.

That is, while actively removing foreign objects such as metal powder from the game ball B from the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553, foreign objects such as metal powder from the game ball B that have fallen from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 are removed. Because it is attached to and fastened to the eaves section (first eaves section 551da and/or second eaves section 640a), the top surface of the back cover 640, etc., foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B can be attached to the cover body of the peripheral control unit 1500. 1501 and from falling toward the base body 1502, preventing foreign matter such as metal powder from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and further preventing foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the peripheral control board 1510. The occurrence of electrical troubles caused by this can be suppressed.

In addition, in the above example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are molded from a synthetic resin having conductivity, but the material is not limited to synthetic resin as long as it is made of an electrical conductor. Metal, conductive rubber, etc. may also be used. In addition, when metal is used for part or all of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 can be neutralized in an extremely short time. On the other hand, if a part or all of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are made of conductive synthetic resin or conductive rubber, it will take a longer time than if metal is used. and the tank rail 553 are gradually neutralized. In this way, if conductive synthetic resin or conductive rubber is used for part or all of the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553, it is possible to gradually eliminate static electricity from the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553. As a result, discharge is less likely to occur, and electronic components mounted on various substrates and the like can be prevented from being affected.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the tank rail 553 is formed with a notch 553aa, whereas the ball tank 552 is not formed with a notch. Further, although details will be described later, a board housed in a board case is arranged below the tank rail 553 where the notch 553aa is formed, and furthermore, no ventilation hole is formed on the top surface of this board case. It looks like this. On the other hand, below the ball tank 552 in which the notch is not formed, not only the substrates accommodated in the substrate case but also the substrates not accommodated in the substrate case are arranged. That is, by placing the board that is not housed in the board case below the ball tank 552 where no notch is formed, the metal powder of the game ball B will fall and adhere to this board, and the board will be damaged. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the board not housed in the case. Note that the board case that accommodates the board disposed below the ball tank 552 in which a notch is not formed may have a ventilation hole formed on the top surface of the board case, or The upper surface may not have ventilation holes.

Further, in this example, an eaves section (first eaves section 551da and/or second eaves section 640a) and a back cover 640 are provided below the ball tank 552 in which no notch is formed, and are housed in the board case. The other substrates are placed inside the space formed by the eaves section (the first eaves section 551da and/or the second eaves section 640a) and the back cover 640. Therefore, even if a small amount of metal powder falls downward from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the bottom of the spherical tank 552, the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or the first eaves 551da and/or Since it can be attached and fastened to the second eaves part 640a) and the back cover 640, it is possible to suppress the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering to the board that is not housed in the board case, thereby suppressing the occurrence of electrical troubles. can.

Further, an eaves section (first eaves section 551da and/or second eaves section 640a) and a back cover 640 are provided below the tank rail 553 where the notch section 553aa is formed, and the board accommodated in the board case. is arranged inside the space formed by the eaves part (the first eaves part 551da and/or the second eaves part 640a) and the back cover 640. Metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 adheres to and stays on the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) made of an insulator and the back cover 640. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by the metal powder from the game ball B entering the board case and by extension from the metal powder from the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, since a ventilation hole is not formed on the upper surface of the board case that accommodates the board placed below the tank rail 553 where the notch 553aa is formed, if a game ball falls from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, The metal powder B falls below the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) without adhering to the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a). Also, the metal powder of the game ball B can be received on the upper surface of the board case, and adhesion to the board can be suppressed. Note that the board case that accommodates the board placed below the tank rail 553 where the notch 553aa is formed may be made of an insulator, and in this case, the board case is filled with metal powder of the game ball B. can be attached and fastened to the top surface of the board case, preventing the metal powder from game ball B from entering the board case, and preventing electrical troubles caused by metal powder from game ball B adhering to the board. It can be suppressed.

In this way, the tank rail 553 is configured to actively drop the metal powder of the game ball B from the notch 553aa, and the board below the tank rail 553 is placed in a state housed in the board case, Furthermore, since the upper part and the rear of this board case (the rear of the pachinko machine 1) are covered by the eaves part (the first eaves part 551da and/or the second eaves part 640a) and the back cover 640 made of an insulator, the game ball B It is now possible to double prevent the metal powder from entering the board case of the board placed below the tank rail 553, and the electrical damage caused by the metal powder from the game ball B adhering to the board. The occurrence of such troubles can be suppressed.

Note that although the third embodiment shown in FIG. 50 has been described in the above example, the first embodiment in which the eaves section is composed of only the first eaves section 551da can also have similar operations and effects as in the third embodiment. . Further, similar effects can be achieved in the second embodiment in which the eaves section is configured with the first eaves section 551da and the second eaves section 640a, and in the fourth embodiment in which the eaves section is configured only in the second eaves section 640. .

Specifically, in the second embodiment in which the eaves section is composed of a first eaves section 551da and a second eaves section 640a, as shown in FIG. Configure. In this example, the dispensing base 551 that constitutes the first eaves section 551da and the back cover 640 that constitutes the second eaves section 640a are made of transparent synthetic resin. In addition, metal powder, dust, etc. inside the tank rail 553 are removed from a notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 to a first eave portion 551da and a second eave portion 551da formed of transparent synthetic resin provided below the tank rail 553. It is made to fall onto the eaves section composed of the eaves section 640a.

When the opening of the game board mounting section 301 is viewed from the front, the upper surface of the eaves section consisting of the first eaves section 551da and the second eaves section 640a formed of transparent synthetic resin can be seen. , it is possible to check the presence of metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the lower part of the notch part 553aa of the first eave part 551da and the second eave part 640a.

Also, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the tank rail 553 can be seen through the payout base 551 made of transparent synthetic resin or the back cover 640 made of transparent synthetic resin. It is visible. Since the tank rail 553 is made of opaque synthetic resin, if you look up inside the opening of the game board mounting part 301, you will see that it is made of opaque synthetic resin located behind the payout base 551 and the back cover 640. The tank rail 553 makes it clear that there is metal powder or dust attached to the top surface of the first eave part 551da or the second eave part 640a, making it easier to confirm the presence of foreign objects, and also to prevent the new game board 5 from being removed. It is possible to prevent problems in the game operation after replacement.

In the above example, all of the tank rails 553 are formed so that their backs are difficult to see (including those that are unclear), but the invention is not limited to this, and at least the first eaves portion 551da located below And/or the portion facing the second eaves portion 640a may be made of opaque synthetic resin, metal, etc., or an opaque sticker may be pasted on the surface of the portion facing the first eaves portion 551da and/or the second eaves portion 640a. Any material that makes the back part difficult to see (including making it indistinct) by wearing clothes or applying paint may be used. For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, the left side wall portion of the tank rail 553 in FIG. Applying an opaque sticker or applying paint to the bottom surface of the rail 553 or the left side wall of the tank rail 553 in FIG. 49 (the side wall on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the tank rail 553), etc. This may make the back part difficult to see (including making it unclear).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 49, it is possible to remove the game board 5 from the front side of the main body frame 4 while keeping the back cover 640 closed. be. Furthermore, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 shown in FIGS. 49 and 54, the first eaves part 551da and the second eaves part 640a remain below the tank rail 553, so that they fall from inside the tank rail 553. The first eaves section 551da and/or the second eaves section 640 catch metal powder and dust, which prevents them from falling onto and adhering to gaming devices such as connectors located below, and after replacing the gaming board 5 with a new one. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the game operation.

Furthermore, in the example described above, the first eaves section 551da and the second eaves section 640a constituting the eaves section are all made of transparent synthetic resin, but if the eaves fall from inside the tank rail 553 onto the eaves section. If it is possible to check the presence of metal powder or dust adhering to the upper surface of the eaves, one of the first eaves part 551da and the second eaves part 640a may be made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the other may be made of an opaque material. It may be made of synthetic resin, or a part of the first eave part 551da and a part of the second eave part 640a may be made of transparent synthetic resin, and the rest may be made of opaque synthetic resin. Good too. For example, the dispensing base 551 that constitutes the first eaves section 551da provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 rather than the tank rail 553 (all or part of the dispensing base 551 and at least the first eaves section 551da is made of transparent synthetic resin The back cover 640 that constitutes the second eaves section 640a (all or part of the back cover 640 and at least the second eaves section 640a is formed of an opaque synthetic resin) (object) may be made of opaque synthetic resin; in this case, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the player can see through the payout base 551 made of transparent synthetic resin. It is possible to check the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the upper surfaces of the first eave part 551da and the second eave part 640a.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment in which the eaves section is composed of only the second eaves section 640a, as shown in FIG. 51, the eaves section is composed only of the second eaves section 640a. In this example, the dispensing base 551 and the back cover 640 that constitutes the second eave part 640a are made of transparent synthetic resin. In addition, a second eaves portion 640a formed of transparent synthetic resin is provided below the tank rail 553 to remove metal powder, dust, etc. inside the tank rail 553 from a notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553. drop it onto the eaves.

When the opening of the game board mounting section 301 is viewed from the front, the upper surface of the eaves section consisting of the second eaves section 640a made of transparent synthetic resin can be seen. It is possible to check the presence of metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the area below the notch 553aa.

Also, when viewing the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 from the front, the tank rail 553 can be seen through the payout base 551 made of transparent synthetic resin or the back cover 640 made of transparent synthetic resin. It is visible. Since the tank rail 553 is made of opaque synthetic resin, if you look up inside the opening of the game board mounting section 301, you will see that the tank rail 553 made of opaque synthetic resin is located behind the back cover 640. This makes the existence of metal powder and dust adhering to the second eaves part 640a clearer, making it easier to confirm the presence of foreign objects, and preventing problems in the game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one. can be prevented from occurring.

In the above example, all of the tank rails 553 are formed so that their backs are difficult to see (including those that are unclear), but this is not limited to at least the second eaves section 640a located below. The part facing the second eave part 640a may be made of opaque synthetic resin or metal, or an opaque sticker or paint may be applied to the surface of the part facing the second eave part 640a to make the back part difficult to see. (including blurring). For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, the left side wall of the tank rail 553 in FIG. Applying an opaque sticker or applying paint to the bottom surface of the rail 553 or the left side wall of the tank rail 553 in FIG. 51 (the side wall on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the tank rail 553), etc. This may make the back part difficult to see (including making it unclear).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 51, it is possible to remove the game board 5 from the front side of the main body frame 4 while keeping the back cover 640 closed. be. Furthermore, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, the second eaves portion 640a remains below the tank rail 553, so metal powder and dust falling from inside the tank rail 553 are prevented. The second eaves part 640 catches it and prevents it from raining down and adhering to game devices such as connectors located below, and it is possible to prevent problems in the game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one.

Further, in the above example, the dispensing base 551 and the second eaves section 640a constituting the eaves section are all made of transparent synthetic resin, but the eaves may fall from inside the tank rail 553 onto the eaves section. If it is possible to confirm the presence of metal powder or dust adhering to the upper surface of the part, one of the dispensing base 551 and the second eave part 640a is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the other is made of opaque synthetic resin. Alternatively, a part of the dispensing base 551 and a part of the second eaves part 640a may be formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the rest may be formed of opaque synthetic resin. For example, a portion of the payout base 551 that is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 than the tank rail 553 and a portion of the back cover 640 that constitutes the second eaves portion 640a that faces the open cutout portion 553aa are made transparent. In this case, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the transparent synthetic resin of the payout base 551 can be seen. It is possible to check the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the upper surface of the second eave portion 640a through the portion formed by the second eave portion 640a.

[4-8-1. Acceleration of falling metal powder 1]
The pachinko machine 1 of this example has features in the shape of the tank rail 553 and the position where the notch 553aa is formed so that metal powder, dust, etc. from the game ball B can be actively dropped from the notch 553aa. It is designed to have. A detailed explanation will be given below with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45 and FIG. 57. 57(A) is a plan view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from above, and FIG. 57(B) is a front view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 57(A), the tank rail 553 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a first bent portion 553da and a second bent portion 553db. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57, the tank rail 553 has an axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side (upstream side, the right end side in FIG. 57(A)) to the left when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. A first bent portion 553da is formed that extends from the right end in parallel to about 1/10 of the total length in the left and right direction, and then moves rearward toward the left. A second bent portion 553db is formed which extends obliquely to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the direction, and then moves toward the left, that is, in a direction parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. It is formed to extend from 553db to the left end in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. Thereby, the game ball guided from the ball tank 552 comes to roll in the tank rail 553 in a crank shape.

Furthermore, as described above, the tank rail 553 is provided with a plurality of notches 553aa. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, there are six rectangular notches 553aa each having a predetermined length in the left-right direction (approximately 30 mm in this embodiment) at predetermined intervals (approximately 10 mm in this embodiment). It is formed.

Specifically, at the first bending part 553da, the rear side of the main guide part 553a in front view (in this example, the bottom surface and rear wall of the main guide part 553a), and at the second bend part 553db, the front side of the main guide part 553a. The rear side in front view (in this example, the bottom surface and rear wall of the main guide section 553a), the front side in front view (in this example, the bottom surface and front wall of the main guide section 553a), and the rear side in front view of the main guide section 553a (in this example, the rear side in front view) In the example, a cutout portion 553aa is formed on the bottom surface and rear wall of the main guide portion 553a. Furthermore, in the first bent portion 553da, the cutout portion 553aa is formed only on the inner side of the curved passage, whereas in the second bent portion 553db, the cutout portion 553aa is formed only on the inner side and the outer side of the curved passage. Notches 553aa are formed at two locations.

As described above, the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 enter the tank rail 553 from the opening 552k formed on the downstream side. Further, the opening 552k is largely opened on the rear side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front. That is, the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 flow down toward the tank rail 553 toward the left rear side in front view. Further, as the game balls B flow down, foreign substances such as metal powder in the ball tank 552 also move toward the left rear direction in front view, that is, near the first bent portion 553da. In this way, metal powder, dust, etc. are collected near the first bent portion 553da, and in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the foreign matter such as metal powder collected near the first bent portion 553da is removed from the first bent portion 553da. It is made to fall through a notch 553aa formed at 553da and removed to the outside of the tank rail 553.

Further, foreign matter such as metal powder that did not fall from the notch 553aa formed in the first bent portion 553da or foreign matter such as metal powder generated within the tank rail 553 is removed from the inside of the tank rail 553 by the first bent portion 553da. It moves to the left and rear direction when viewed from the front along with the game ball B flowing downstream. Moreover, the game ball B flowing down inside the tank rail 553 contacts the inner wall of the tank rail 553 at the second bending portion 553da, and changes the direction of rolling along the inner wall of the tank rail 553. In addition, since the game ball B rolling within the tank rail 553 moves straight until it contacts the inner wall of the tank rail 553 at the second bending portion 553da, the game ball B rolls away from the inner wall of the tank rail 553 by contacting the inner wall of the tank rail 553. The acting reaction force increases.

Then, the game ball B contacts the inner wall of the tank rail 553 at the second bent portion 553da and rolls along the inner wall of the tank rail 553 while receiving a large reaction force from the inner wall of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B By rubbing against the inner wall of the tank rail 553, metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off.

In this way, at the second bent portion 553da of the tank rail 553, the game ball B rubs against the inner wall of the tank rail 553, and metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off. . In addition, metal powder, dust, etc. that are not attached to the game ball B in the tank rail 553 move in the direction of the second bending part 553da along with the game ball B rolling in the direction of the second bending part 553da. . That is, metal powder, dust, etc. are collected near the second bent portion 553da of the tank rail 553.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to forming the tank rail 553 into a bent shape so that metal powder, dust, etc. collect at the second bending part 553da, the bottom surface of the main guiding part 553a at the second bending part 553da is By forming the notch portion 553aa in a sandwiching manner, metal powder, dust, etc. that have gathered at the second bent portion 553da are allowed to fall to the outside of the tank rail 553. Therefore, metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the game ball B rolling within the tank rail 553, and metal powder, dust, etc. existing within the tank rail 553 without adhering to the game ball B are actively removed from the tank. It can be dropped outside the rail 553 and removed from inside the tank rail 553. The second bent portion 553da may have a cutout portion 553aa at least on the outer side of the passage (rear side in front view), and the second bent portion 553da may have a cutout portion 553aa formed on the inner wall of the tank rail 553 on the rear side in front view. Foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that collects in the cutout portion 553aa may be discharged from the cutout portion 553aa.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the cutout portion 553aa is formed in the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db, but the cutout portion 553aa is formed in at least one of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db. A notch 553aa may be formed. Furthermore, even if the cutout portion 553aa is not formed in either the first bending portion 553da or the second bending portion 553db, the cutout portion 553aa is provided on the downstream side of the first bending portion 553da and the second bending portion 553db. By forming this, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust may be collected at the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db and then discharged from the cutout portion 553aa formed on the downstream side thereof. That is, by forming the cutout portion 553aa on the downstream side of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db, the metal peeled off from the surface of the game ball B at the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db is removed. Any device that allows foreign matter such as powder or dust to fall to the outside of the tank rail 553 from the notch 553aa formed downstream of the first bent portion 553da or the second bent portion 553db may be used; Entry of metal powder, dust, etc. into the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the rail 553 is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of trouble in the game operation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the tank rail 553 is made of an insulator, but the tank rail 553 may be made of an electrically conductive material such as a conductive synthetic resin so that it is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559. By connecting to the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, electromagnetic noise that has entered the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 may be guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. In this case, since the metal powder adhering to the surface of the game ball B can be easily peeled off, the metal powder adhering to the surface of the game ball B can be removed at the first bent part 553da and the second bent part 553db of the tank rail 553. The powder can be reliably peeled off and dropped from the notch 553aa to the outside of the tank rail 553, and metal powder, dust, etc. can be prevented from entering the guide path 570a, and the game operation can be prevented from being hindered.

Further, as described above, below the tank rail 553, there are provided an eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) and a back cover 640 molded from a transparent material. When the tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as a conductive synthetic resin, the tank rail 553 becomes opaque. In the removed state, from the front of the pachinko machine 1, check the presence of metal powder or dust adhering to the eaves section (first eaves section 551da and/or second eaves section 640a) through the opening of the game board mounting section 301. In such cases, the presence of metal powder and dust can be clearly seen, making it easier to confirm the presence of metal powder and dust.

Further, as described above, since the eaves section (first eaves section 551da and/or second eaves section 640a) and the back cover 640 are made of an insulator (polycarbonate resin, etc.), the notch section 553aa of the tank rail 553 The metal powder of the fallen game ball B can be attached and fixed to the eaves part (the first eaves part 551da and/or the second eaves part 640a), the upper surface of the back cover 640, etc. This makes it possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B to the peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by metal powder from the game ball B entering the cover body 1501 and by adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, in the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 shown in FIG. It may also be molded using polycarbonate resin, etc.). In this case, metal powder, dust, etc. that have not been discharged from the notch 553d of the tank rail 553 and have entered the guide passage 570a can be confirmed. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 to which the payout unit 560 (ball guiding unit 570) is attached is molded from transparent synthetic resin, so the front side is attached to the main body frame 4. Metal powder, dust, etc. that have entered the guide passage 570a through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed with the game board 5 detachably attached to the player removed.

It should be noted that a member made of opaque synthetic resin may be arranged in part or all of the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, or a part of the guide passage 570a on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 may be disposed. Alternatively, it may be possible to make the back part difficult to see (including making it unclear) by pasting an opaque sticker or applying paint to the entire body frame 4. When checking for metal powder, dust, etc. that have entered the guide passage 570a from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board mounting part 301 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the Since the presence of metal powder and dust that has entered is clearly visible, it is easy to confirm that metal powder and dust have entered the guide path 570a, and this prevents any problems in the game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one. can be prevented.

In addition, a member made of opaque synthetic resin may be disposed in a part or all of the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, or a part of the guide passage 570a on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 may be disposed. Alternatively, the dispensing unit 560 (ball guiding unit 570) can be attached without making the back part difficult to see (including making it unclear) by pasting an opaque sticker or applying paint to the entire part. The back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 may be made of opaque synthetic resin, and in this case, when the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is visually recognized from the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the guide passage 570a is visible. Since the presence of metal powder and dust present in the guide path 570a becomes clear, it becomes easy to confirm that the metal powder and dust have entered the guide passage 570a, and it is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the game operation.

[4-8-2. Acceleration of falling metal powder 2]
Next, a first modification of the mode in which metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B is actively dropped from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 will be described. A detailed explanation will be given below with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45 and FIGS. 58(A) and 58(B). 58(A) is a plan view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from above, and FIG. 58(B) is a front view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the first modification described below is a combination with the mode of actively dropping metal powder, dust, etc. from the game ball B due to the shape of the tank rail 553, the position where the notch portion 553aa is formed, etc. It may be carried out separately, or it may be carried out independently.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a first rail cover 554, a ball rectifying member 556, and a second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in order from the upstream side. ing. In addition, as shown in FIG. 58(B), the tank rail 553 has a flow path through which the game balls B circulate in a portion where the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the second rail cover 555 are attached. The height of the ball is formed so that it decreases toward the downstream end (left end), and at the downstream end, the height is such that only one game ball B can flow (the height is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B). is formed.

Note that the ball rectifying member 556 is formed with a ball pressing portion 556a that projects downward (toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553). The ball holding part 556a protrudes to a position where the distance from the bottom surface of the tank rail 556 is slightly shorter than the outer dimensions of two game balls B, and the ball holding part 556a protrudes to a position where the distance from the bottom surface of the tank rail 556 is slightly shorter than the outer shape of two game balls B, and the ball holding part 556a protrudes to a position where the distance from the bottom surface of the tank rail 556 is slightly shorter than the outer shape of two game balls B. B always comes into contact with the ball holding portion 556a. Further, when the upper layer of the game balls B of the two layers of game balls B comes into contact with the ball holding part 556a, the upper layer of the game balls B cannot flow down to the downstream side.

On the other hand, the lower layer game ball B of the two layered game balls B can flow downstream even when the upper layer game ball B is in contact with the ball holding part 556a. With the game balls B in contact with the ball holding part 556a, the lower game balls B flow down to the downstream side, so that the upper game balls B fall toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off due to the impact when it falls. That is, the upper game ball B of the game balls B passing through the tank rail 553 in a two-layered state comes into contact with the ball holding part 556a of the ball rectifying member 556 and falls toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. This removes metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface. Further, at this time, foreign substances such as metal powder and dust that have come off from the game ball B fall onto the bottom surface of the tank rail 553.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58(B), a notch 553aa is formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball rectifying member 556, so that the game ball B passing below the ball rectifying member 556 is held down by the ball. By contacting the portion 556a and falling toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, foreign objects such as metal powder and dust that have peeled off from the game ball B can be dropped from the cutout portion 553aa. Further, the game ball B that has come into contact with the ball holding portion 556a falls to the upstream side of the tank rail 553 as shown in FIG. 58(B). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the notch 553aa on the upstream side of the ball holding part 556a is formed larger than the notch 553aa provided on the downstream side of the ball holding part 556a. Thereby, foreign objects such as metal powder and dust that have come off from the game ball B that comes into contact with the ball holding part 556a and falls can be dropped from the cutout part 553aa on the upstream side of the holding part 556a. .

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game ball B passes below the ball rectifying member 556, the game ball B is brought into contact with the ball holding part 556a and dropped toward the bottom of the tank rail 553. Foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the surface of the ball B is peeled off, and the metal powder and dust are allowed to fall from the notch 553aa formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball rectifying member 556. It has become. That is, metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game ball B passing below the ball rectifying member 556 are peeled off from the notch 553aa formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball rectifying member 556. By dropping it immediately, metal powder, dust, etc. can be actively removed from the tank rail 553. This prevents metal powder, dust, etc. from entering the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553, and prevents any hindrance to the game operation.

Further, after removing metal powder, dust, etc. from the game balls B passing below the ball rectifying member 556, the peeled metal powder, dust, etc. are formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball rectifying member 556. Since the ball can be immediately dropped from the notch 553aa, it is possible to suppress re-adhesion of metal powder, dust, etc. to the game ball B.

Moreover, the game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 are stacked in a plurality of layers. The game balls B stacked in three or more layers come into contact with a first rail cover 554 provided on the upstream side of the ball rectifying member 556, and by contacting the first rail cover 554, the game balls B overlap in three or more layers. The game balls B fall and become in a state where they overlap in two layers. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. When foreign matter such as metal powder or dust is peeled off from the game ball B which has changed to a two-layered state, the metal powder or dust is allowed to fall from the cutout portion 553aa.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game balls B, which are stacked in a plurality of layers, are gradually broken down and changed into a single layer. In addition, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that has come off when breaking the game balls B stacked in multiple layers to make the layers thinner can be removed from the tank rail 553 by dropping them from the notch 553aa. Foreign matters such as metal powder and dust are prevented from entering the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 553, thereby suppressing any hindrance to the game operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, recesses 554a, 555b, and 556b are formed on the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, as shown in FIG. 58(A). . Then, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are moved from the game ball B that is in contact with the upstream end of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. If foreign matter such as metal powder or dust moves to the upper surface of the housing, the recessed portions 554a, 555b, and 556b receive and stop the foreign matter. As a result, when foreign objects such as metal powder or dust move from inside the tank rail 553 to the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and ball rectifying member 556 outside the tank rail 553, these foreign objects are removed. can be secured to the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and ball rectifying member 556 to prevent them from falling. In other words, foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has moved from inside the tank rail 553 to the top surface of the first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and ball rectifying member 556 outside the tank rail 553 may be transferred to the cover body of the peripheral control unit 1500. 1501 and the base body 1502, and furthermore, from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, electricity caused by foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 is suppressed. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of problems.

In addition, by constructing the tank rail 553 from an electrically conductive material such as a conductive synthetic resin and electrically connecting it to the frame grounding board 559, electromagnetic noise that has entered the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 can be removed from the game hall. It may also be removed by guiding it to the ground of the island equipment. In this case, the metal powder adhering to the surface of the game ball B can be easily peeled off, so the metal powder adhering to the surface of the game ball B passing below the ball rectifying member 556 can be surely peeled off and cut. It can be dropped to the outside of the tank rail 553 through the notch 553aa, and it is possible to suppress the entry of metal powder, dust, etc. into the guide path 570a, and also to prevent any hindrance to the game operation. Furthermore, since the static electricity on the game ball B that is in contact with the tank rail 553 can be removed, it is possible to suppress the metal powder that has peeled off from the surface of the game ball B from re-adhering to the game ball B.

In addition, when the tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as an opaque synthetic resin having electrical conductivity, the front of the pachinko machine 1 can be When checking the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the eaves section (first eaves section 551da and/or second eaves section 640a) through the opening of the game board mounting section 301, the presence of metal powder and dust is confirmed. This makes it easier to confirm the presence of metal powder and dust.

In addition, the ball rectifying member 556 (all or a part (at least the ball holding part 556a) may be made of an electrically conductive material such as an opaque synthetic resin having electrical conductivity, so that it is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559. By connecting, the electromagnetic wave noise of the ball rectifying member 556 (may be all or part (at least the ball holding part 556a)) may be guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. In this case, metal powder, dust, etc. peeled off from the game ball B can be prevented from adhering to the ball holding portion 556a.

Further, as described above, since the eaves section (the first eaves section 551da and/or the second eaves section 640a) and the back cover 640 are made of an insulator (transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin), the ball rectifying member 556 Metal powder, dust, etc. that have peeled off from the game ball B passing below and fallen from the notch 553aa are deposited on the eaves section (first eaves section 551da and/or second eaves section 640a), the upper surface of the back cover 640, etc. It can be attached and fixed. This makes it possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B to the peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by metal powder from the game ball B entering the cover body 1501 and by adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, in the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 shown in FIG. It may also be possible to check metal powder, dust, etc. that have entered the guide passage 570a without being discharged from the notch 553d of the tank rail 553 by molding with a polycarbonate resin or the like. In this case, with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side removed, the payout base 551 molded from transparent synthetic resin is inserted from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board mounting part 301. Metal powder, dust, etc. that have entered the guide path 570a can be confirmed, and can also be confirmed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-8-3. Acceleration of falling metal powder 3]
Next, a second modification of the mode in which metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B is actively dropped from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 will be described. A detailed explanation will be given below with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45 and FIGS. 57(A) and 57(B). As described above, FIG. 57(A) is a plan view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from above, and FIG. 57(B) is a front view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is a diagram. In addition, the second modification described below is based on the shape of the tank rail 553 described above, the position where the notch 553aa is formed, etc., and a mode in which metal powder, dust, etc. from the game ball B is actively dropped. It may be performed in combination with one or both of the modified examples, or may be performed alone.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a tank inner step part 552m is formed in the ball tank 552, and a tank rail inner step part 553m is formed in the tank rail 553. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 57(A) and 57(B), an internal tank step portion 552m is formed along the edge of the opening 552k of the spherical tank 552, and a first bent portion of the tank rail 553 is formed. A tank rail internal step portion 553m is formed at the upstream side of the tank rail 553da. The tank inner step portion 552m and the tank rail inner step portion 553m are inclined at a larger angle than the inclination angle of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Specifically, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined at an angle X, the tank rail inner step 553m is inclined at an angle Y, the tank inner step 552m is inclined at an angle Z, and the tank rail inner step 553m is inclined at an angle Z. The inclination angle Y and the inclination angle Z of the tank internal step portion 552m are larger than the inclination angle X of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the inclination angle Z of the tank inner step part 552m is larger than the inclination angle Y of the tank rail inner step part 553m. Note that the inclination angle Y of the tank rail inner step part 553m may be configured to be larger than the inclination angle Z of the tank inner step part 552m, or the inclination angle Y of the tank rail inner step part 553m and the tank inner step part 552m may be configured to be larger. The inclination angle Z of the stepped portion 552m may be configured to be the same angle.

When the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 into the tank rail 553, the flowing speed is increased by the tank internal step portion 552, and the game ball B falls to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Further, due to the impact at this time, foreign substances such as metal powder and dust adhering to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off and fall to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has fallen onto the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 at the tank internal step portion 552 moves downstream within the tank rail 553 as the game ball B flows down.

Furthermore, a tank rail inner step portion 553m is formed on the downstream side of the tank inner step portion 552. Then, the game ball B flowing down inside the tank rail 553 increases its rolling speed at the step part, and the impact when it falls to the bottom of the tank rail 553 causes metal powder and dust attached to the surface of the game ball B to be removed. peels off and falls to the bottom of the tank rail 553. As described above, the tank rail inner step portion 553m is formed on the upstream side of the first bent portion 553da. The notch 553aa is formed in the first bent portion 553da as described above.

That is, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that fell onto the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 at the tank internal step portion 552 and collected at the first bent portion 553da, and metal that fell onto the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 at the tank rail internal step portion 553m. Foreign matter such as powder and dust falls from the notch 553aa formed in the first bent portion 553da.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the ball tank 552 is provided with the tank internal step part 552m, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the tank rail internal step part 553m, so that the game ball B is prevented by the impact when passing through the step part. Foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the surface of the game ball B is peeled off and dropped onto the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, and the fallen foreign matter such as metal powder and dust is collected on the first bent portion 553da and It can be dropped from a notch 553aa formed in one bent part 553da. That is, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are formed so that when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, it always passes through the tank internal step part 552m and the tank rail internal step part 553m, Metal powder, dust, etc. are actively removed from the tank rail 553 by peeling off foreign objects such as metal powder and dust attached to the ball B and letting them fall through the notch 553aa formed on the bottom of the tank rail 553. do. This prevents metal powder, dust, etc. from entering the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553, and prevents any hindrance to the game operation.

In addition, in the above example, since the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 is configured to fall at two step parts, the tank internal step part 552m and the tank rail internal step part 553m, the game ball B It is possible to remove a high percentage of foreign substances such as metal powder and dust attached to the surface.

Note that in the above example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are each provided with a stepped portion, but a plurality of step portions may be provided only on one of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. Alternatively, only one step may be provided on one of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as a conductive synthetic resin, and is electrically connected to the frame grounding board 559 to prevent electromagnetic noise that has entered the tank rail 553 from being grounded in the island equipment of the game hall. It may be removed by guiding the game ball B, and by configuring it in this way, the effect of peeling off metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the game ball B described above can be enhanced. That is, by flowing into the tank rail 553, the game ball B has static electricity removed, weakening the adhesion of metal powder, dust, etc., and in this state passes through the tank rail internal step 553m. Metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game ball B are likely to peel off due to the impact when passing through the ball B. This increases the probability that metal powder, dust, etc. will come off from the game ball B, allowing it to fall from the notch 553aa to the outside of the tank rail 553, and suppressing metal powder, dust, etc. from entering the guide path 570a. At the same time, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the game operation. Furthermore, since the static electricity on the game ball B that is in contact with the tank rail 553 can be removed, it is possible to suppress the metal powder that has peeled off from the surface of the game ball B from re-adhering to the game ball B.

Also in this example, by constructing the tank rail 553 from an electrically conductive material such as an opaque synthetic resin having electrical conductivity, it is possible to operate the pachinko machine with the gaming board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side. When checking the presence of metal powder and dust attached to the eaves section (first eaves section 551da and/or second eaves section 640a) from the front of the game board mounting section 301, metal powder and It is possible to make the presence of dust clear and to easily confirm the presence of metal powder and dust.

In addition, metal powder, dust, etc. that have fallen to the outside of the tank rail 553 from the notch 553aa formed in the first bent portion 553da are removed from the eaves portion (first Since it can be attached and fixed to the first eave part 551da and/or the second eave part 640a) and the upper surface of the back cover 640, the metal powder of the game ball B is transferred to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the base body 1502. This makes it possible to prevent the metal powder from the game ball B from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and further prevent the metal powder from the game ball B from falling into the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by adhesion.

Further, the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 may be made of a transparent material (polycarbonate resin, etc.). You can check for metal powder, dust, etc. that have entered. Note that to check for metal powder, dust, etc. that have entered the guide passage 570a, remove the game board 5, which is removably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front, and open the game board mounting part 301 from the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is also possible to check through the payout base 551 molded from transparent synthetic resin, and it is also possible to check from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-9. Suppression of metal powder movement when gaming machines are tilted]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, movement of metal powder is suppressed when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted. This will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 35, 42 to 45, and 59. FIG. 59(A) is a front view of the inside of the second rail cover 555, and FIG. 59(B) is a front view of the inside of the second rail cover 555, and FIG. 59(B) shows the pachinko machine 1 tilted so that the side where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided is the bottom surface. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing the inside of the second rail cover 555 in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 (lower right end in FIG. 35) is connected to the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570, and the ball passes through the tank rail 553. The game ball is guided to a ball guiding unit 570.

In addition, the tank rail 553 has a groove shape that is open upward, and forms a flow path that slopes downward to the right in the figure toward the most downstream part, and near the most downstream part, the flow path is changed from left to right to up and down. It is designed to change the direction.

The second rail cover 555 provided at the upper end of the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 has an inner wall on the downstream side (bottom right in the figure) having a curved shape. and an inner wall on the downstream side (right end in the figure) of the tank rail 553 are arranged so as to be continuous, thereby forming a wall part on the downstream side (right end in the figure) of the tank rail 553. In other words, the curved upstream part of the second rail cover 555 serves as the ceiling of the tank rail 553, and the curved downstream part serves as the side wall of the vertical passage, which is the most downstream part of the tank rail 553. It has become.

As described above, the second rail cover 555 is removably attached to the tank rail 553. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a locking portion 555a having a locking hole is formed in the second rail cover 555 so as to face the side wall of the second rail cover 555. Locking projections 553c are formed on the outside of the portion so as to correspond to the locking portions 555a of the second rail cover 555, respectively. Then, as shown in FIG. 44, the second rail cover 555 is placed over the tank rail 553 so that the tank rail 553 is inserted between the side walls of the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553 is locked. The second rail cover 555 is locked to the tank rail 553 by press-fitting the protrusion 553c into a locking hole formed in the locking portion 555a of the second rail cover 555.

When the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 are in a locked state, if a load of more than a predetermined value acts on the side wall of the second rail cover 555 in a direction away from the groove of the tank rail 553, The side wall portion of the second rail cover 555 is deformed, and the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 is released. Note that the manner in which the second rail cover 555 is locked to the tank rail 553 described above is an example, and is limited to this as long as the second rail cover 555 can be detachably attached to the tank rail 553. Instead, for example, the second rail cover 555 may be screwed onto the tank rail 553.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the second rail cover 555 covers the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35) is downward. It constitutes a wall part that is an extension of the bottom surface. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side part (the right side in FIG. 35) where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided faces downward, metal powder accumulated on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 Foreign matter such as dirt and dust move toward the most downstream side of the tank rail 553 and come into contact with the inner wall side of a second rail cover 555 provided at the most downstream side of the tank rail 553.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the removable second rail cover 555 is provided at the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 to constitute the wall part of the tank rail 553, and the side part where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided ( By tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the right side in FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side where the guidance unit 570 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35) is downward, the direction from inside the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 Moving metal powder and dust can be received by the second rail cover 555 and can be prevented from entering the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570.

Furthermore, a recess 555c is formed in the inner wall of the second rail cover 555. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(A), a bottomed portion is provided at the end of the second rail cover 555 (the right end in the figure) that serves as the side wall of the vertical passage and in the portion that serves as the ceiling of the tank rail 553. A recessed portion 555c is formed. When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side part of the pachinko machine 1 where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35) is downward, the vertical direction of the second rail cover 555 as shown in FIG. The portion of the second rail cover 555 that serves as the side wall of the passage becomes the lower surface, and foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that moves toward the most downstream side within the tank rail 553 is formed on the inner wall of the portion of the second rail cover 555 that serves as the side wall of the vertical passage. It enters into the recessed portion 555c. That is, by tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the side where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35) is downward, metal powder and dust moving inside the tank rail 553 toward the downstream side can be removed. Such foreign objects are received and fixed in a recess 555c formed in a portion of the second rail cover 555 that serves as a side wall of the vertical passage. Thereby, metal powder and dust moving from inside the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 can be suppressed from entering the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570.

In this example, the second rail cover 555 is formed with a bottomed recess 555c, but the same effect can be obtained even if the second rail cover 555 is formed with a through hole. That is, through-holes are formed at the end of the second rail cover 555 (the right end in the figure) in a portion that serves as the side wall of the vertical passage and in a portion that serves as the ceiling of the tank rail 553, and the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side (the right side in FIG. 35) facing downwards, foreign objects such as metal powder and dust that have moved inside the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream side are The metal may be discharged to the outside of the tank rail 553 from a through hole formed in the inner wall of the rail cover 555, whereby metal moving from inside the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 It is possible to prevent powder and dust from entering the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570.

Furthermore, since the second rail cover 555 is removably attached to the tank rail 553, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35) is facing downward. By releasing the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 and separating the second rail cover 555, the metal attached to the second rail cover 555 is removed by the second rail cover 555. Powder and dust can be removed from inside the tank rail 553, and metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 when the pachinko machine 1 is normally erected enters the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570. can be suppressed.

Note that the second rail cover 555 can be reused by discarding attached metal powder and dust and cleaning it. In this way, metal powder, dust, etc. inside the tank rail 553 can be easily removed from inside the tank rail 553 by removing the second rail cover 555.

That is, when removing the pachinko machine 1 from the island equipment of the game parlor, the locking state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 is released, the second rail cover 555 is detached, and the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 is removed. By tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the wall part (the side part where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is installed (the right part in FIG. 35)) is facing downward, the ball can be Metal powder and dust moving from inside the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 can be released from the portion of the second rail cover 555 where the wall portion is missing.

In addition, when removing the pachinko machine 1 from the island equipment of the game parlor and moving it, the wall of the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 where the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided) By tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the part (the right side in FIG. 35) is facing downward, metal powder and dust moving from inside the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 can be removed. , can be received by the second rail cover 555, and in this state, by releasing the locking state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 and detaching the second rail cover 555, the second rail cover 555 can be received by the second rail cover 555. Accordingly, metal powder and dust adhering to the second rail cover 555 can be removed from inside the tank rail 553.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 can be installed by releasing the locking state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 and separating the second rail cover 555. Metal powder, dust, etc. inside the tank rail 553 that has moved can be easily removed by tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the side (the right side in FIG. 35) facing downwards. . Further, metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 when the pachinko machine 1 is normally stood up can be prevented from entering the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570.

Note that in the above example, the second rail cover 555 is provided so that the downstream inner wall of the second rail cover 555 and the downstream inner wall of the tank rail are continuous, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a step may be provided between the downstream inner wall of the second rail cover 555 and the downstream inner wall of the tank rail 553. In particular, the inner wall of the second rail cover 555 may be located outside the inner wall of the tank rail 553. If a step is provided such that the second rail cover 555 is installed on the wall of the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 (the side where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is installed (the right side in FIG. 35) )) When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that The inner wall of the second rail cover 555 can receive and stop metal powder and dust moving from the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553, thereby releasing the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553. By detaching the second rail cover 555, metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 and attached to the second rail cover 555 can be removed from inside the tank rail 553.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 35, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the wall portion of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 where the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side portion where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (see FIG. 35) When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the right side)) is downward, various boards, connectors, etc. are not located below the second rail cover 555. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an external terminal plate 558 is provided above the tank rail 553 and the second rail cover 555 at a predetermined distance apart, and A payout control board box 632 for accommodating a payout control board 633, an interface board 635, etc. are provided at a predetermined distance below.

In this way, the wall part of the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 where the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side part where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35)) is positioned downward. In order to prevent various boards, connectors, etc. from being located below the second rail cover 555 when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted, the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 is released. With the second rail cover 555 removed, the pachinko machine is played so that the wall of the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 (the side where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is installed (the right side in FIG. 35)) is facing downward. When the machine 1 is tilted, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the wall of the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 (the side where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is installed (the right side in FIG. 35)) is facing downward. When the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 are released from the locking state with the tank rail 553 tilted and the second rail cover 555 is removed, the top of the tank rail 553 is removed from inside the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. Prevents metal powder and dust moving downstream from falling toward and adhering to various boards and connectors, thereby avoiding electrical troubles (short circuits) caused by metal powder. can do. In particular, if metal powder or dust falls toward the interface board 635 that is not housed in the board case, the metal powder or dust may adhere to the interface board 635 and cause electrical trouble (short circuit). is effective in avoiding electrical troubles (short circuits).

[4-10. Positional relationship between tank rail notch and various boards]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a plurality of notches 553aa are formed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 (lower rear surface of the tank rail 553 when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front), so that the metal formed by the wear of the game ball B is Although the configuration is such that foreign substances such as powder can be removed from the tank rail 553, some of the boards of the plurality of boards arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are removed from the back side of the game board 5. In order to make it less susceptible to foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the tank rail 553, the board installation mode on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 has a unique configuration. This will be explained below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the pachinko machine 1 of this example is viewed from the front from the back side, a tank rail 553 is provided so as to be located on the upper right side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 (the upper right side of the back surface of the main body frame 4). There is. A plurality of notches 553aa are formed on the lower side of this tank rail 553 (the lower rear surface of the tank rail 553 when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front), so that metal powder etc. generated by the wear of the game balls B can be removed. It is configured so that foreign matter is removed from the tank rail 553 and the game ball B can smoothly flow down on the tank rail 553.

FIG. 60 is a diagram of the pachinko machine 1 of this example viewed from the front from the back side. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front from the back side, the leftmost end of the notch 553aa provided in the tank rail 553 is shown in FIG. An imaginary line is drawn in the vertical direction so as to pass to the left of the notch 553aa, and the imaginary line divides the back side of the pachinko machine 1 in the left and right direction, and the area on the right side of the imaginary line is defined as area A. It is a diagram showing a region to the left of the virtual line as region B. In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, there is a tank rail 553 having a notch 553aa above the area A. This area is susceptible to foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the ground (area with a high possibility of foreign objects falling). On the other hand, above area B, there is no tank rail 553 having the notch 553aa, and there is only a ball tank 552 not having the notch 553aa. This is a region that is not easily affected by foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the rail 553 (region with low possibility of foreign matter falling). Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the opening/closing shaft of the main body frame 4 (the main body frame upper hinge part 510 and the main body frame lower hinge part 520) is provided at the right end of the area A. As a result, the area B that is farther from the opening/closing axis of the main body frame 4 than the area A (the area B that is closer to the open end side than the area A) is protected from the outside more than the area A when the main body frame 4 is in the open state. The area is easily accessible. Furthermore, an area A that is closer to the opening/closing axis of the body frame 4 than area B (area A that is farther from the open end side than area B) is more accessible from the outside than area B when the body frame 4 is in the open state. This has become a difficult area.

In each of the areas A and B, a plurality of boards are arranged on the back side of the game board 5 (the back side of the game panel 1100) in such a manner that the mounting surface of the electronic components is visible from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. There is. Of these, the panel relay board 1700A is arranged in area A, while the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control unit 1300 are arranged in the area B. A main control board 1310 is arranged. As will be described in detail later, the panel relay board 1700A is mounted in such a way that each of the connectors is exposed to the outside, so it is susceptible to foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. There is a need to provide it in area B where it is difficult to use. The panel relay board 1700A also includes a peripheral control board 1510 and various sensor bodies and movable bodies controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, various sensors provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5, drive motors, speakers, etc.). The main purpose is to electrically connect the parts, and each component is connected by wiring (harness, etc.), but by providing it in area B that is easily accessible from the outside, it is easy to connect and disconnect the wiring. The advantage is that it can be done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 prioritize that the panel relay board 1700A is provided in area B. It is provided in a region A that is susceptible to foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. However, although area A is susceptible to foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, it is difficult to access from the outside, so the peripheral control unit 1500 controls the area A. By providing the board 1510, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in area A, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against these boards.

First, on the back side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100), from the top, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board of the main control unit 1300. 1310 is provided so that the mounting surface of the electronic components is visible from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. These substrates arranged in area A are each housed in a substrate box (a box-shaped box consisting of a box body and a cover body molded from non-conductive resin that constitute the substrate box). For this reason, in area A, while maintaining the difficulty of access from the outside, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is removed from the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, etc. using a board box. This prevents direct adhesion to the board, reducing the risk of board failure, which is important for game control. Note that a plurality of minute ventilation holes are formed in each board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are housed. However, these ventilation holes are not provided on the top surface of each board box when it is attached to the pachinko machine 1, and this also prevents foreign substances such as metal powder from entering through the ventilation holes. ing.

In addition, in area A, among the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 provided on the back side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100), the main control board 1310 is connected to the cutout of the tank rail 553. It is provided at the farthest position from the notch 553aa. Furthermore, between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310, there are a peripheral control unit 1500 having the peripheral control board 1510 and a drive board unit 1700 having the panel drive board 1720. It is provided. Therefore, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is less likely to adhere to the main control board 1310 than to other boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, which makes it difficult to control the game. The risk of failure of the main control board 1310, which is the most important, can be reduced.

Note that the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 described above are arranged so that not only the area A but also a part thereof is located in the area B, taking into consideration the ease of confirmation from the outside. However, even if the board is provided across from area A to area B, the most important electronic components (for example, main control MPU, peripheral control MPU, etc.) mounted on the board are It is desirable to arrange it on the area B side to improve safety. Furthermore, as long as even a part of the board is located in area A, the entire board should be stored in the board box to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 from adhering to it. It is preferable to prevent In this embodiment, the main control board 1310 is checked more frequently than other boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, so the area spanning from region A to region B is larger than that of the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, as described above, although the main control board 1310 is arranged so as to straddle the areas A and B, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on this main control board 1310 is protected against unauthorized setting changes. In order to make it difficult, the main body frame 4 is arranged on the side of the area A that is difficult to access from the outside when it is in the open state. However, as mentioned above, since region A is more susceptible to foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553 than region B, in this embodiment, the main board box is In addition to accommodating the control board 1310, the setting key cylinder is arranged on the main control board 1310 so that the setting key cylinder in area A is located at a location avoiding directly under the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. It is preferable to do so. Specifically, the tank rail 553 of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of cutout portions 553aa spaced apart (separated) at a predetermined interval in the left-right direction, and the distance between the cutout portions 553aa is set by the key cylinder. The setting key cylinder is arranged on the main control board 1310 so that the diameter of the setting key cylinder is larger than the diameter of the tank rail 553, and the setting key cylinder is located directly below the part of the tank rail 553 where the notch 553aa is not provided. is preferred. This makes it difficult to commit unauthorized acts against the setting key cylinder, while also avoiding the risk of foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553 onto the setting key cylinder and causing an abnormality.

Furthermore, if the setting key is left inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a located in area A due to a mistake on the part of the hall manager, foreign matter such as falling metal powder may adhere to the setting key. , there is a risk of some kind of abnormality occurring. In order to suppress such risks, in this embodiment, in addition to the above-described arrangement of the setting key cylinder, the insertion/removal operation (insertion/removal operation) of the setting key with respect to the setting key cylinder is performed by holding the setting key with respect to the main control board 1310. The configuration is such that it is possible only in a posture in which both sides of the portion (a portion other than the insertion portion inserted into the setting key cylinder) face in the left-right direction (a posture parallel to the vertical direction of the Pachinko machine 1). As a result, at least at the end of the work related to setting changes or setting confirmation, both sides of the grip part of the setting key will be in a posture facing left and right, and in the unlikely event that the setting key cylinder is attached to the setting key due to a mistake on the part of the hall manager Even if the key is left inserted, the possibility of foreign matter such as falling metal powder accumulating on the setting key can be reduced.

In region B, a panel relay board 1710A is provided on the back side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100) so that the mounting surface of the electronic components can be seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. ing. The panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment is not equipped with a CPU like the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, but is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main purpose of this panel relay board is to electrically connect various sensor bodies and movable bodies (for example, various sensors installed on the door frame 3 and game board 5, drive motors, speakers, etc.). By consolidating the electrical connections of the effects to the 1710A, it is possible to improve productivity during the manufacturing of gaming machines, and also to identify the cause of any abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 and to disconnect electrical connections. This makes it easy to manufacture and inspect the pachinko machine 1, thereby increasing convenience. In addition, since the panel relay board 1710A is connected to each member by wiring (harness, etc.), a plurality of connectors, which are connection terminals for connecting these wirings, are mounted in correspondence to the number of wirings connected to each board. has been done. Each of these connectors is preferably mounted in a form that is exposed to the outside in consideration of the convenience described above. From this point of view, the panel relay board 1710A is designed to have a box-like shape like the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. This board is not housed in a board box, and has a higher exposed portion (degree of exposure) to the outside than other boards.

Furthermore, as described above, the panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment is preferably mounted in a manner that is exposed to the outside for convenience. In consideration of the high cost caused by changing the number of electronic components, etc., the mounting surface of the electronic components is covered with the back cover 640 instead of being housed in a box-shaped board box like the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That's what I do. That is, when the back cover 640 is opened, the entire mounting surface of the electronic components is exposed at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, if you do not take into account the increased cost due to changes in the connection mode (changes in the number of connectors mounted, etc.) when designing the game machine, a simple cover with openings for each connector part can be used with only the above convenience in mind. The panel relay board 1710A may be covered with the body, and only each connector portion may be exposed.

As described above, region B is a region that is less susceptible to foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 than region A. In this embodiment, a panel relay board 1710A is provided in such area B. Specifically, boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are located across areas A and B, but the panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment is entirely located on the area B side. It is arranged to fit in. By doing this, even if the panel relay board 1710A has a higher exposed portion (degree of exposure) to the outside than other boards, foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 will adhere. This can reduce the risk of failure of the panel relay board 1710A.

Furthermore, as described above, the panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment is arranged so that its entirety fits within the area B side, but the side end of the panel relay board 1710A is further placed as far away from the area A as possible. I try to do that. That is, the panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment has a substantially rectangular panel relay board 1710A with longitudinal sides (longitudinal sides) so that the entire panel relay board 1710A is reliably accommodated in the region B side and is spaced a predetermined distance from the region A. It is arranged with the sides (sides) facing up and down. As a result, the panel relay board 1710A is separated from the area A by a predetermined distance, and foreign matter such as metal powder is surely prevented from falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and adhering to the exposed portion of the panel relay board 1710A. That's what I do.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to preferentially remove foreign substances from the tank rail 553, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front from the back side, a portion slightly to the left of approximately the center in the left-right direction on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A virtual line was set at the shifted location, and the area of area A was configured to be larger than the area of area B. If an imaginary line is drawn in the vertical direction so as to pass to the left of the notch 553aa located at the leftmost end of the notches 553aa, the area of area A will be smaller than the area of area B. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which virtual lines are set such that the area of area A and area B are approximately the same, and areas A and B are set by setting virtual lines. In addition, in the case where not only the tank rail 553 but also the ball tank 522 is provided with a notch that plays the same role as the notch 553aa, the ball tank 522 is provided with a notch that plays the same role as the notch 553aa. The regions A and B may be set in such a manner that an imaginary line is drawn in the vertical direction so as to pass through the left side of the notch located at the leftmost end of the notches.

Further, in this embodiment, the plurality of wirings connected to the panel relay board 1710A are kept as close to the region B side as possible (so that the bent portions do not invade the region A). Specifically, more wiring fixing parts (members such as hooks) for fixing various types of wiring connected to the panel relay board 1710A are provided on the area B side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 than on the area A side. I try to keep as many wires close to the area B side as possible. This makes it difficult for the plurality of wirings connected to the panel relay board 1710A to be affected by foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553.

Furthermore, as described in detail above, the first eaves section 551da is provided below the notch section 553aa of the tank rail 553, but the first eaves section 551da is located on the back side of the game board 5 (game It extends toward the left side of the rear side of the panel 1100 and below the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553. That is, in area A, the first eaves part 551da is located between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and a board such as the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510, whereas in the area B In this example, a first eave portion 551da is located between the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553 and the panel relay board 1710A. In this way, in region A, the first eaves section 551da is located between the notch section 553aa of the tank rail 553 and boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, so that the back cover 640 Not only when the back cover 640 is closed, but also when the back cover 640 is opened, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide section 553a through the cutout section 553aa can be received and attached to the first eaves section 551da. To suppress foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa from falling toward boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 located below. I can do it. As a result, the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, and other boards provided in area A are not only protected from the board box housing them, but also by the first eaves section 551da, which prevents foreign substances such as metal powder from being collected. It is possible to prevent adhesion from occurring.

On the other hand, in region B, the first eaves portion 551da provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 extends below the ball tank 552 and is located above the panel relay board 1710A. Not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened, foreign matter such as metal powder that falls to the outside from the main guide part 553a through the notch 553aa is received and attached to the first eaves part 551da. Therefore, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa can be suppressed from falling towards the panel relay board 1710A located on the lower left side thereof. As a result, although the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B is not housed in the board box, the first eaves portion 551da prevents foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the panel relay board 1710A. I can do it.

In addition, although the case where the first eave part 551da constitutes an eaves part was described above as a structure for preventing foreign substances such as metal powder according to the first embodiment, the structure for preventing foreign substances such as metal powder according to the second embodiment has been described. When the first eaves section 551da and the second eaves section 640a are connected to jointly constitute an eaves section, as in the configuration shown in FIG. In the case where the first eave part 551da constitutes an eave part, the first eave part 551da is not provided and the second eave part 640a serves as the eave part alone, as in the configuration for preventing foreign substances such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. This may be the case in either of the following cases. That is, in region B, the eaves section provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 extends below the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553, and extends above the panel relay board 1710A. At least when the back cover 640 is closed, foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa can be received and attached to the eaves part. It is possible to suppress foreign matter such as metal powder, which has fallen from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa, from falling towards the panel relay board 1710A located on the lower left side thereof. As a result, although the panel relay board 1710A provided in area B is not housed in the board box, the eaves portion can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the panel relay board 1710A.

Further, in the above description, the eaves of the area A provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 are configured to extend below the ball tank 552 of the area B. An eaves section is not provided below the ball tank 552 to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder that falls from the main guide section 553a to the eaves section of area A through the cutout section 553aa from moving to the area B side. A configuration may also be provided in which a movement prevention section is provided to prevent the movement. For example, the eaves portion of region A provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be configured to be bent upward at the boundary between region A and region B. Even in such a configuration, foreign matter such as metal powder that falls from the main guide section 553a to the eaves section of area A via the notch section 553aa does not move to the area B side. It is possible to suppress the panel relay board 1710A from falling toward the located panel relay board 1710A. As a result, although the panel relay board 1710A provided in area B is not housed in the board box, it is protected by the eaves of area A and the movement prevention part that prevents it from moving to area B. It is possible to prevent the adhesion of foreign substances such as metal powder.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, on the back side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100), the board color on the mounting surface side of the panel relay board 1710A provided in area B is different from that provided in area A. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are painted in a color different from the board color on the mounting surface side. Specifically, the color of the resist or silk printing applied to the board surface of the panel relay board 1710A is changed from the color of the resist or silk printing applied to the board surface of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. It makes a difference. As a result, the panel relay board 1710A provided in area B is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and various sensor bodies and movable bodies (for example, various sensors provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. The board should consolidate wiring for electrically connecting sensors, drive motors, speakers, etc.), and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main induction part 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa should be attached. It is possible to easily determine from the outside that the object is located in region B, which is difficult to access. Note that regarding the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 provided in area A, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding part 553a through the notch part 553aa tends to adhere to the area A. Therefore, it is preferable to use a color that makes it easy to determine whether foreign matter such as metal powder has adhered, for example, a deep color (such as green or black). However, the panel relay board 1710A provided in area B is also located in area B, where foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa is difficult to adhere to, but in area A. Similarly to the substrate provided thereon, it may be configured to be painted in a color (such as green or black) that makes it easy to determine whether or not foreign matter such as metal powder has adhered.

Furthermore, as a method for easily determining from the outside the existence of the region B to which foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the notch portion 553aa is difficult to adhere, The presence of areas A and B can be determined from the outside by applying some kind of marking to a part of the back cover 640 in the closed state that covers area A and a part that covers area B. You can make it easier. Specifically, the specific marking B may be provided in a portion of the back cover 640 that covers the area B, and such specific marking B may not be provided in the area A. As specific marking B, for example, a sticker or print with specific information indicating that it is in area B (such as text or symbol information such as "high safety" or "relay board side") may be attached. Alternatively, it is possible to form specific information indicating that the area is B (such as text information or symbol information such as "high safety level" or "relay board side") on the back cover 640 itself. Alternatively, a specific marking A may be provided in a portion of the back cover 640 that covers area A, and such specific marking A may not be provided in area B. In this case, the specific marking A may be, for example, a sticker or print with specific information indicating that it is in area A (such as text or symbol information such as "low safety level" or "main control board side"). or specific information indicating that it is in area A (such as textual information or symbol information such as ``low safety level'' or ``main control board side''). For example, it may be formed on the back cover 640 itself. Further, specific markings A and B may be provided on a portion of the back cover 640 that covers area A and a portion that covers area B, respectively.

In addition, regarding the panel relay board 1710A provided in area B on the back side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100), when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the side, it is provided directly below the tank rail 553. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be provided at a position separated from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 by a predetermined distance toward the front side of the Pachinko machine 1 when the Pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side. In other words, the panel relay board 1710A is located in an area B that is away from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, and also in the area B that is away from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1. The configuration may be such that it is provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance from. In such a case, since the panel relay board 1710A is located a predetermined distance away from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, the panel relay board 1710A may fall from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the panel relay board 1710A, and reduce the risk of failure of the panel relay board 1710A.

Furthermore, when the panel relay board 1710A is provided at a position separated from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 by a predetermined distance toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, the notch The panel relay board 1710A may be arranged in the area B so that the ball tank 522 itself, which is not provided with the ball tank 553aa, is located directly above it like an eaves part. This prevents foreign objects from adhering to the panel relay board 1710A even if foreign objects fall from above the pachinko machine 1, etc., including island equipment, etc., instead of from the notch 553aa, and the panel The risk of failure of the relay board 1710A can be reduced.

Further, the panel relay board 1710A may be provided not as a single board but as a plurality of boards. When providing the panel relay board 1710A in a plurality of parts, all the boards may be provided in area B, or may be arranged separately in areas A and B. For example, if a plurality of panel relay boards 1710A are provided, each with a panel relay board 1710A1 and a panel relay board 1710A2 with different board areas, a board with a large board area and a high possibility of foreign matter adhesion (for example, a panel relay board 1710A1) For a board with a small board area and a low possibility of foreign matter adhesion (for example, panel relay board 1710A2), place it in region B, which has high safety, and place it in a place ( For example, it may be placed at the lower right end of the rear side of the game panel 1100).

[4-11. Positional relationship between tank rail notch and drawer connector]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are electrically connected via a predetermined relay board, and the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 as such a relay board. A drawer connector DCN may be provided that allows direct electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 without requiring any additional wiring work. This will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62.

As shown in FIG. 61, when the main body frame 4 is viewed from the front, each terminal is located on the lower right side of the front surface of the main body frame 4 (the lower left side when the main body frame 4 is viewed from the back side). A main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is provided so as to face. When the game board 5 is viewed from the front, the lower right side of the rear surface of the game board 5 (the lower left side when the game board 5 is viewed from the back side) is provided with terminals facing the back side of the game board 5. A panel side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 is provided. Then, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, and the game board Each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 and each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 are electrically connected.

Two sets of drawer connectors are provided, including a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and a game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2. Depending on one drawer connector DCN, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4. A control signal line is formed for transmitting various control signals by the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4. In addition, depending on the other drawer connector DCN, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, so that the game board 5 A control signal line is formed to transmit various control signals and detection signals by the peripheral control board 1510 provided, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, various sensors, various speakers, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 60, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are connected to the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. Similarly to the panel relay board 1710A described above, it is provided in area B, which is the area on the left side of the tank rail 553 where the ball tank 552 is provided. In other words, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 allow foreign matter such as metal powder to fall from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. It is provided not in region A, which is easily affected, but in region B, which is not easily affected by foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of tank rail 553. More specifically, regarding the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, It is provided within the frame 4 at a position in region B that is farthest from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. In this way, by providing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 in the area B instead of the area A, the tank rail 553 This prevents foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the notch 553aa from adhering to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5. , it is possible to reduce the risk of failure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 62(A), when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the game board mounting portion 301, which is the part of the main body frame 4 where the game board 5 should be attached, is opened. In this state, no member is provided between the tank rail 553 and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4. Furthermore, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder accumulated in the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 tends to fall due to the impact of the removal. In this regard, by providing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 in area B instead of area A, each terminal is exposed when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4. This prevents foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 from adhering to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4. The risk of failure of the side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 62(B), when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the side, the effect display device 1600, peripheral control unit 1500, drive board unit 1700, and main control unit 1300 provided on the game board 5 are connected to the tank rail 553. In contrast, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are provided directly under the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. The pachinko machine 1 is provided at a position spaced apart by a predetermined interval P1 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided at the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are separated from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to being in area B, it is provided at a position away from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 by a predetermined distance P1 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are connected to the notch part of the tank rail 553 in the front and back direction of the pachinko machine 1. 553aa, metal powder etc. that have fallen from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 can be removed not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached. This prevents foreign matter from adhering to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, and It is possible to reduce the risk of failure of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5.

In this example, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are connected from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 to the pachinko machine 1. The tank rail 553 is provided at a predetermined distance P1 apart from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 (for example, at a predetermined distance P1' from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553). The drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 may be provided in a position where the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are not present directly above the drawer connector (concave type) DCN2. Even in such a configuration, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are connected to the cut of the tank rail 553 in the front and back direction of the pachinko machine 1. Since it is located apart from the notch 553aa by the predetermined distance P1', the same effect as described above can be achieved. Also, connect the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. If the tank is provided at a position separated by a predetermined interval P1', the ball tank 552 will not exist directly above the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2. Not only foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the rail 553, but also game balls B, etc. that overflow from the ball tank 552 and fall, are connected to the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 on the main body frame side and the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side. type), and the risk of failure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 can be further reduced. Furthermore, a new risk (from outside In order to prevent foreign objects from falling from the outside, a means (back cover 640, etc.) is required to prevent foreign objects from falling from the outside by covering directly above the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 on the main frame side and the drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 on the game board side. ) is preferably provided separately from the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553.

Further, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is provided in a box-like main body having a rectangular opening so that the opening of the box-like main body faces the front side of the main body frame 4. However, more specifically, when the main body frame 4 is viewed from the back side, the opening of the box-shaped main body is provided so as to face slightly to the left. In other words, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is arranged such that in area B, the opening of the box-shaped main body does not face the area A side, but faces the opposite side from area A. It is provided. In this way, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is made so that it does not face the area A, which is susceptible to foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Since the opening of the box-shaped main body is provided in the main body frame 4, foreign objects such as metal powder that fall from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 can be prevented not only when the game board 5 is installed on the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not installed. However, it becomes difficult for the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 on the body frame side of the body frame 4 to enter through the opening of the box-like body, thereby reducing the risk of failure of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 on the body frame side of the body frame 4. I can do it.

Further, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is provided so that the box-like main body having a rectangular opening has a vertically elongated shape (the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction). In other words, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 has a box-like main body in a vertically elongated shape (vertically Since the direction is the longitudinal direction, the area of the upper surface of the box-like main body can be reduced. In this way, for the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, the top surface of the box-shaped main body, which is susceptible to foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, is reduced. Since the box-shaped main body is provided as shown in FIG. It becomes difficult to adhere to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, and the risk of failure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 can be reduced.

In addition, in region B, the first eaves portion 551da provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 extends below the spherical tank 552, and the main body frame side drawer connector (recessed) of the main body frame 4 type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, so that the main Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the guiding portion 553a can be received and attached to the first eaves portion 551da, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the notch 553aa can be received and attached to the first eaves portion 551da. However, it is possible to prevent the main body frame 4 from falling toward the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 located at the lower left thereof. In addition, since the first eaves portion 551da is provided on the main body frame 4, it is possible to use the main guide through the notch portion 553aa not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the part 553a can be received and attached to the first eave part 551da, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide part 553a through the notch 553aa can be received and attached to the first eave part 551da. , it is possible to prevent the main body frame 4 from falling toward the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 located on the lower left side thereof. As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 provided in area B and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are not housed in the board box. However, the first eaves portion 551da can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the first eave portion 551da.

In addition, although the case where the first eave part 551da constitutes an eaves part was described above as a structure for preventing foreign substances such as metal powder according to the first embodiment, the structure for preventing foreign substances such as metal powder according to the second embodiment has been described. When the first eaves section 551da and the second eaves section 640a are connected to jointly constitute an eaves section, as in the configuration shown in FIG. In the case where the first eave part 551da constitutes an eave part, the first eave part 551da is not provided and the second eave part 640a serves as the eave part alone, as in the configuration for preventing foreign substances such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. This may be the case in either of the following cases. That is, in region B, the eaves provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 extend below the spherical tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553, and It suffices to configure the side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 to be located above it, and at least when the back cover 640 is closed, the main Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the guiding part 553a can be received and attached to the eaves part, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding part 553a through the notch 553aa can be It is possible to prevent the main body frame 4 from falling toward the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 located at the lower left. As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 provided in area B and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are not housed in the board box. However, the eaves can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the eaves.

Furthermore, in the above description, the eaves of the area A provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 are configured to extend below the ball tank 552 of the area B. An eaves section is not provided below the ball tank 552 to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide section 553a to the eaves section of area A through the cutout section 553aa from moving to the area B side. A configuration may also be provided in which a movement prevention section is provided to prevent the movement. For example, the eaves portion of region A provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be configured to be bent upward at the boundary between region A and region B. Even in such a configuration, foreign matter such as metal powder that falls from the main guide section 553a to the eaves section of area A via the notch section 553aa does not move to the area B side. It is possible to prevent the main body frame 4 from falling toward the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5. As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 provided in area B and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are not housed in the board box. However, the eaves section of area A and the movement prevention section that prevents movement toward area B side can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the area.

In addition, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the game board mounting part 301, which is the part of the main body frame 4 where the game board 5 should be attached, is in an open state, and the main body frame side of the main body frame 4 is in an open state. Although the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is visible, a predetermined area around the installation of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 on the main body frame side is painted black. As a result, before installing the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, it is possible to clearly visually check whether there is any foreign matter such as metal powder attached around the installation area of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1. If foreign matter such as metal powder is attached, remove it from the surrounding area to prevent it from adhering to the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 on the main body frame side when installing the game board 5 on the main body frame 4. The risk of failure of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 on the main body frame side can be reduced.

In addition, the main body frame 4 is provided with a game board mounting portion 501c that forms the lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and on which the game board 5 is placed.The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is located behind the game board mounting portion 501c, but there is a gap between the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board mounting portion 501c as shown in FIG. 62(A). A protruding part 501z is provided as a step so that the installation location of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is higher than the game board mounting part 501c. Furthermore, when mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, the bottom surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 should be mounted so that it moves from the front side to the rear side of the top surface of the game board mounting section 501c. It will be done. Therefore, if there is a foreign object such as metal powder on the top surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is not mounted on the main body frame 4, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, , the foreign object is pushed out from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the game board mounting section 501c, but the pushed out foreign object is located at the main frame side drawer connector ( concave type) can be suppressed from moving toward DCN1. As a result, although the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 on the main body frame side is located at the rear of the game board mounting section 501c, it is possible to prevent foreign matter from adhering to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) due to the difference in level from the game board mounting section 501c. I can do it.

[4-12. Positional relationship between tank rail notch and external terminal board]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an external terminal board 558 is provided above the tank rail 553 to be electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side, but the position where the external terminal board 558 is provided is may be provided below the tank rail 553. This will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

As shown in FIG. 63, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, an external terminal board 558 is provided below the tank rail 553 so that each terminal faces the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side by connecting with wiring from the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the games of the players by ascertaining the number of game balls B put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

Further, the external terminal board 558 is located on the side where the tank rail 553 is provided, similar to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. It is provided in area A, which is an area. In other words, the external terminal board 558 is not in the region B where foreign matter such as metal powder falls from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, but rather in the region B where foreign matter such as metal powder falls from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. It is provided in area A, which is susceptible to the effects of Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 provided in area A, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are each housed in a board box. Since the external terminal board 558 needs to be connected to the wiring from the game hall side, it is not housed in the board box, and the connection terminals of the wiring are exposed.

In this regard, in area A, on the back side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100), from top to bottom, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the external terminal board 558, and the panel drive of the drive board unit 1700 are shown. A board 1720 and a main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are provided. That is, a peripheral control unit 1500 having a peripheral control board 1510 is provided between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558. The external terminal board 558 is formed to have a width smaller than that of the board box that houses the peripheral control board 1510, and is designed so that it does not protrude in the horizontal direction with respect to the width of the board box that stores the peripheral control board 1510. It is provided below the peripheral control unit 1500. In this way, for boards such as the external terminal board 558 that requires wiring connection work and is difficult to store in the board box, although the wiring connection terminals are exposed, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control board 1510. By being provided directly under the unit 1500, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is prevented from adhering to the external terminal board 558, and the risk of failure of the external terminal board 558 is reduced. I can do it.

As described above, since the peripheral control unit 1500 having the peripheral control board 1510 is provided between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558, The control board 1510 is located closer to the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Therefore, for example, if foreign matter such as metal powder continues to fall from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, there is a possibility that the foreign matter such as metal powder will adhere to the peripheral control board 1510 rather than the external terminal board 558. is high, and there is a high possibility that an electrical trouble will occur in the peripheral control board 1510 before an electrical trouble occurs in the external terminal board 558.

Note that the board provided between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558 may be different from the peripheral control board 1510 if it is other than the main control board 1310 that affects the progress of the game itself. Other substrates may also be used. For example, a dummy movable body that performs a predetermined operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, after a certain period of time has passed) is provided in the door frame 3, and driving force is applied to the dummy movable body between the peripheral control board 1510 and the dummy movable body. A dummy board is provided between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558, and the dummy board is connected to the dummy board before any electrical trouble occurs to the external terminal board 558. The configuration may be such that there is a high possibility that trouble will occur. If an electrical trouble occurs in such a dummy board, the dummy movable body will stop moving, and it is necessary to communicate to the outside that there is a high possibility that an electrical trouble will occur in the external terminal board 558 afterwards. I can do it. Further, the substrate provided between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558 is not limited to one substrate, but may be a plurality of substrates.

Here, the external terminal board 558 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side, and the hall computer provides information such as the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1. However, if an electrical problem occurs with the external terminal board 558, it becomes impossible for the hall computer to monitor the player's play, and the pachinko machine 1 Even if a fraudulent act is committed, a problem arises in which the hall manager cannot be aware of it at the gaming hall side. By exploiting these characteristics, a fraudster may apply a shock to the pachinko machine 1, for example, intentionally cause foreign matter such as metal powder to fall from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, and There are concerns that some sort of fraudulent activity could be committed by causing electrical trouble in the 558, allowing the hall computer to monitor the game. On the other hand, since the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, etc., electrical troubles may occur in the peripheral control board 1510. When this occurs, although it is possible to proceed with the game on the main control board 1310, various effects such as light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects using various decorative boards, and display effects using the effect display device 1600 cannot be performed. A problem will occur where it is not possible to do so. In this regard, for example, if foreign objects such as metal powder continue to fall from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, first, an electrical trouble occurs in the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 The fact that a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 is notified to the outside by putting various performances into a non-execution state. In other words, during a period when an electrical trouble occurs in the peripheral control board 1510, various performances by the peripheral control board 1510 are not executed, making it difficult for fraudulent acts to be carried out against the pachinko machine 1. . In this way, when an electrical trouble occurs, by first causing the electrical trouble to occur in the peripheral control board 1510, while preventing electrical trouble from occurring in the external terminal board 558, Measures can be taken to prevent a situation in which fraudulent acts are performed on the pachinko machine 1 during a period when an electrical trouble occurs in the external terminal board 558.

Note that the external terminal board 558 is provided in a region A on the side where the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. As described above in detail, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front from the back side, the opening/closing shaft of the main body frame 4 (the main body frame upper hinge part 510 and the main body frame lower hinge part 520) is located at the right end of the area A. I am trying to set it up in In other words, the area A that is closer to the opening/closing axis of the main body frame 4 than the area B (area A that is further from the open end side than the area B) is more accessible from the outside than the area B when the main body frame 4 is in the open state. This has become a difficult area. In this regard, the external terminal board 558 is provided in the area A that is difficult to access from the outside, making it difficult for unauthorized persons to access the external terminal board 558. This allows a fraudster to monitor the game using the hall computer, and it is possible to prevent any fraudulent activity from occurring. Note that the external terminal board 558 will be connected to the wiring provided on the island equipment in order to electrically connect with the hall computer, but the wiring provided on the island equipment will be connected at the time of installation of the pachinko machine 1. , hangs down from above toward area A on the side where the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided, and an external terminal board 558 is provided in area A in consideration of connection with such wiring. There is.

As shown in FIG. 64, when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the side, the effect display device 1600, peripheral control unit 1500, drive board unit 1700, and main control unit 1300 provided on the game board 5 are located below the tank rail 553. On the other hand, the external terminal board 558 provided on the game board 5 is provided at a position away from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 by a predetermined distance P2 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1. There is. Note that the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided at the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. That is, although the external terminal board 558 is located in the area A on the side where the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, the external terminal board 558 It is provided at a position separated by a predetermined interval P2 from. As described above, since the external terminal board 558 is located a predetermined distance P2 away from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the external terminal board 558 from falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Foreign matter such as metal powder can be prevented from adhering to the external terminal board 558, and the risk of failure of the external terminal board 558 can be reduced.

Further, a terminal cover 551k whose upper surface extends horizontally is provided above the external terminal plate 558 provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the upper side of the external terminal plate 558. ing. Since this terminal cover 551k is located above the external terminal board 558, it may fall from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. Foreign matter such as metal powder can be received and attached to the terminal cover 551k, and the foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide part 553a via the notch 553aa can be received by the terminal cover 551k located below. It is possible to prevent the object from falling toward the object. As a result, although the terminal cover 551k is not housed in the board box and is provided in the area A that is susceptible to foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, the terminal The cover 551k can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the cover 551k. Note that the terminal cover 551k may be provided integrally with the external terminal board 558, or may be provided on the board holder 1200 to which the external terminal board 558 is attached.

In addition, in this example, an external terminal board 558 is provided below the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 below the tank rail 553, but the above-mentioned location where the external terminal board 558 is provided is Like the panel relay board 1710A, a board with exposed wiring connection terminals, that is, a board that requires wiring connection work and is difficult to store in a board box, may be configured. Even in this case, the same effect as when the external terminal board 558 is provided can be achieved.

Furthermore, in region A, the first eaves portion 551da provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is located above the external terminal plate 558. That is, in region A, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558. In this way, in region A, the first eaves section 551da is located between the notch section 553aa of the tank rail 553 and boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, so that the back cover 640 Not only when the back cover 640 is closed, but also when the back cover 640 is opened, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide section 553a through the cutout section 553aa can be received and attached to the first eaves section 551da. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide section 553a to the outside via the cutout section 553aa can be suppressed from falling toward the external terminal board 558 located below. As a result, although the external terminal board 558 is not housed in the board box and is provided in the area A where it is susceptible to foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, The first eaves portion 551da can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the first eave portion 551da.

In addition, although the case where the first eave part 551da constitutes an eaves part was described above as a structure for preventing foreign substances such as metal powder according to the first embodiment, the structure for preventing foreign substances such as metal powder according to the second embodiment has been described. When the first eaves section 551da and the second eaves section 640a are connected to jointly constitute an eaves section, as in the configuration shown in FIG. In the case where the first eave part 551da constitutes an eave part, the first eave part 551da is not provided and the second eave part 640a serves as the eave part alone, as in the configuration for preventing foreign substances such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. This may be the case in either of the following cases. That is, in region A, the eaves section provided below the notch section 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be configured to be located above the external terminal board 558, and at least when the back cover 640 is closed, the eaves section provided below the notch section 553aa may be configured to Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide part 553a through the cutout part 553aa can be received and attached to the eaves part, and metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide part 553a through the cutout part 553aa can be received and attached to the eaves part. It is possible to prevent foreign objects such as the above from falling toward the external terminal board 558 located below the external terminal board 558. As a result, although the external terminal board 558 is not housed in the board box and is provided in the area A where it is susceptible to foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, The eaves can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering.

[4-13. Suppression of metal powder movement when installing a game board]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a protrusion 501z is provided in front of the ejected ball receiving part 628 of the base unit 620b in the base unit 620 of the main body frame 4, so that when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, The movement of foreign substances such as metal powder may be suppressed. This will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

As shown in FIG. 65, the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 has a base main body 501a formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a base main body 501a which is formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape when viewed from the front. A game board insertion slot 501b that penetrates from the bottom position in a range of about 3/4 of the total height from the front and into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b are formed. A game board mounting portion 501c on which the game board 5 is placed, and a game board that protrudes upward from the center in the left and right direction of the game board mounting portion 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 from side to side and rearward. A regulating portion 501d is provided. Note that a cutout is formed on the game board 5 side (game panel 1100) in a shape corresponding to the game board regulating portion 501d, so that the game board 5 can be inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b at the correct position. However, if the game board 5 is inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b at an incorrect position (shifted from side to side), the game board restriction section 501d does not restrict the game board. This prevents the game board 5 from being inserted.

Further, the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is provided with a discharge ball receiving portion 628 that can discharge the game balls B to the outside. As shown in FIG. 66(B), the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is located directly below the discharge portion 1201 of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. As a result, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received, and the bottom It can be discharged to the outside from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower part through the discharge ball receiving part 628.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66(A), in the main body frame 4, the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is located behind the game board mounting portion 501c, but the ejected ball receiving portion 628 and the game A planar plate-shaped protrusion 501z that protrudes upward from the rear end of the game board holder 501c is provided between the game board holder 501c and the board holder 501c. That is, the protruding portion 501z is located in front of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 and protrudes to a higher position than the ejected ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c. Thereby, the protruding part 501z can restrict the rearward movement of the lower end of the game board 5 together with the game board regulating part 501d. Further, as shown in FIG. 66(B), when mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, the bottom surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is It is attached so that it moves toward the rear. Therefore, when the game board 5 is not mounted on the main body frame 4, if there is foreign matter such as dust or metal powder on the top surface of the game board mounting portion 501c, the game board 5 is not mounted on the main body frame 4. At this time, such foreign matter is pushed out from the front side to the rear side of the upper surface of the game board mounting section 501c, but the pushed out foreign matter is ejected from the discharge ball located behind the game board mounting section 501c. Movement toward the receiving portion 628 can be suppressed. Thereby, although the ejected ball receiving part 628 is located at the rear of the game board mounting part 501c, the protruding part 501z can prevent foreign substances such as dust and metal powder from entering.

The protruding portion 501z described above extends in the left-right direction by the same length as the longitudinal direction of the game board placement portion 501c while maintaining the same height with respect to the rear end of the game board placement portion 501c. ing. Further, the protruding portion 501z is configured to be higher than the height of the game board regulating portion 501d. For example, the height of the protruding portion 501z may be equal to or more than one game ball B, and in such a case, even if there is a game ball B on the top surface of the game board mounting portion 501c, When mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, the game ball B enters the side of the ejected ball receiving part 628 (the back side of the pachinko machine 1) located behind the game board mounting part 501c. This can be prevented.

Further, the protruding portion 501z is formed of a resin member of a single color such as black or white. As a result, before the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, it is possible to clearly visually check whether foreign matter such as metal powder is attached to the protrusion 501z, and to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the protrusion 501z. If so, by removing it from the protruding part 501z, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ejected ball receiving part 628 located behind the protruding part 501z when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4. . Furthermore, the protruding portion 501z is formed of a resin member that is an insulator. As a result, foreign matter such as metal powder, which is a conductor, can easily adhere to the protruding portion 501z, and when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, such foreign matter can be easily attached to the protrusion 501z. Even if it is pushed out from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the part 501c, it will not scatter and will be placed on the side of the ejected ball receiving part 628 (the back side of the pachinko machine 1) located behind the game board mounting part 501c. can be prevented from entering.

Note that the protruding portion 501z of this example projects upward from the rear end of the game board mounting portion 501c between the ejected ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c, and also extends between the ejected ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c. Although it is provided so as to protrude to a higher position than the game board mounting part 501c, the game board mounting part is not limited to this. Any configuration may be used as long as a step is provided that is higher than 501c by a predetermined height. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is provided at a position above the step. Due to such a step, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder pushed out from the front side to the rear side on the top surface of the game board mounting portion 501c can be prevented from collapsing into the game board. It is possible to suppress the ball from moving toward the discharge ball receiving part 628 located behind the mounting part 501c, and it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from entering the discharge ball receiving part 628. .

Note that although the game board mounting portion 501c is located forward of the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, it is located below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Therefore, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, there is no blocking member like the game board 5 between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the game board mounting part 501c. There is a possibility that foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 may adhere to the upper surface of the game board mounting section 501c. In this regard, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the top surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c may Since the protruding part 501z is provided between the projecting part 501z and the main body frame 4, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder attached to the upper surface of the game board mounting part 501c is removed from the ejected ball receiver. It is possible to suppress movement toward the part 628 and prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from entering the discharge ball receiving part 628.

Further, an outlet sensor 3032 for detecting the game ball B collected from the outlet 1008 is provided on the game board 5 side in a passage from the outlet 1008 until the game ball B reaches the ejection part 1201 of the board holder 1200. However, after the game ball B is ejected from the ejection part 1201, it may be provided in a passage on the main body frame 4 side until the game ball B is ejected from the ejected ball receiving part 628 to the outside. In such a case, if foreign matter such as metal powder enters from the discharge ball receiving part 628, the foreign matter such as metal powder will adhere to the out port sensor 3032, and the game balls B collected from the out port 1008 cannot be counted normally. there is a possibility. In addition, the number of game balls B detected by the out port sensor 3032 is displayed on the base monitor 1310h, but if the out port sensor 3032 is not operating normally, the number of game balls B collected from the out port 1008 is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. It becomes difficult to display the number of pitches correctly. In this regard, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the top surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c may Since the protruding part 501z is provided between the projecting part 501z and the main body frame 4, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder attached to the upper surface of the game board mounting part 501c is removed from the ejected ball receiver. It is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the portion 628 and adhering to the outlet sensor 3032, and to prevent electrical troubles such as incorrect counting of game balls B by the outlet sensor 3032 from occurring.

In addition, in the main body frame 4, a power supply unit 620c having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board having a payout control board 633 are located behind the game board mounting part 501c and further behind the ejection ball receiving part 628. A unit 620d and an interface unit 620e having an interface board 635 are provided. In this respect, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the power supply unit 620c, payout control unit 620d, and interface unit Since the protruding part 501z is provided between the game board 620e and the game board mounting part 501c, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, metal powder attached to the top surface of the game board mounting part 501c is removed. It is possible to prevent foreign objects such as the above from moving toward the power supply unit 620c, the dispensing control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e. As a result, although the power supply unit 620c, payout control unit 620d, and interface unit 620e are located at the rear of the game board mounting section 501c, metal powder etc. pushed out from the game board mounting section 501c by the protruding section 501z It is possible to prevent foreign matter from adhering to the power supply board 620, payout control board 633, and interface board 635, and reduce the risk of failure of these boards.

[4-14. Measures against metal powder on power supply boards]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the power supply board 630 is located below the tank rail 553, and the protrusion 630h is provided to cover the upper side of the power supply board 630, and the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided. It may also be configured to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the surface from adhering to it. This will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

As described above, the board unit 620 includes the base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, and the power supply unit 620c. It includes a payout control unit 620d attached to the right side when viewed from the front, and an interface unit 620e attached to the left side when viewed from the front of the power supply unit 620c. The power supply unit 620c also includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 (not shown) of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66(B), in the main body frame 4, a power supply unit 620c having a power supply board 630, a dispensing control unit 620d having a dispensing control board 633, and an interface are located below the tank rail 553. An interface unit 620e having an interface board 635 is provided. When looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the side, these units are located directly under the tank rail 553, whereas the payout control unit 620d having the payout control board 633 and the interface unit 620e having the interface board 635 are located directly under the tank rail 553. The power supply unit 620c having 630 is located slightly forward of the tank rail 553.

The base unit 620b attached to the power supply unit 620c also has a top surface that protrudes upward from near its rear end, bends backward from a predetermined height, and extends horizontally so as to cover the upper side of the power supply unit 620c. A protruding portion 630h is provided. The protruding portion 630h is formed such that the rear end of its upper surface is rearward than the rear end of the power supply unit 620c, and the left and right ends of the upper surface are longer than the length in the longitudinal direction of the power supply unit 620c. It is formed like this. Further, the rear end of the upper surface of the protrusion 630h is formed to a position that is rearward of the rear end of the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Note that the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided at the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, since the upper side of the power supply unit 620c is covered by the protruding part 620h, the external part is removed from the main guide part 553a via the notch part 553aa not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the upper surface of the protrusion 630h can be received and attached to the upper surface of the protrusion 630h, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide part 553a via the notch 553aa can be received and attached to the upper surface of the protrusion 630h. This can prevent the power supply unit 620c from falling toward the power supply unit 620c located below the top surface. Note that the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c is provided with a plurality of holes in order to radiate heat generated from the power supply board 630. As described above, although a plurality of holes are provided in the power supply board cover 631 for the power supply unit 620c, since the protrusion 630h is located so as to cover the upper side of the power supply unit 620c, the notch of the tank rail 553 It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the power supply board 630 from adhering to the power supply board 630, and reduce the risk of failure of the power supply board 630.

The protruding portion 630h described above is formed of a resin member of a single color such as black or white. As a result, before and after mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, it is possible to clearly visually check whether foreign matter such as metal powder is attached to the protrusion 630h, and whether foreign matter such as metal powder is attached. In this case, by removing it from the protrusion 630h, it is possible to prevent it from adhering to the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c located below the protrusion 630h. Further, the protruding portion 630h is formed of a resin member that is an insulator. As a result, foreign matter such as metal powder, which is a conductor, can easily adhere to the protruding portion 630h, and such foreign matter can be scattered toward the power supply unit 620c located below the protruding portion 630h. It is possible to prevent the adhesive from adhering to the power supply board 630.

Further, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the protruding portion 630h is provided on the main body frame 4 side instead of on the game board 5 side, similarly to the power supply unit 620c. In other words, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, there is no game board 5 between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c, but the upper side of the power supply unit 620c Since the protruding portion 630h is positioned so as to cover the main guide portion 553a, not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached, the protruding portion 630h is positioned so as to cover the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa. Foreign matter such as metal powder can be received and attached to the upper surface of the protrusion 630h, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch 553aa can be received and attached to the upper surface of the protrusion 630h. It is possible to prevent the power supply unit 620c from falling toward the power supply unit 620c located below. As a result, although the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c is provided with a plurality of holes, the protrusion 630h can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the power supply board 630. .

Note that the protrusion 630h is formed so as to cover not only the upper side of the power supply unit 620c but also a part of the upper side of the dispensing control unit 620d and the interface unit 620e located rearward of the power supply unit 620c. It may be formed to cover the entire upper side of the unit 620d and the interface unit 620e. In such a case, foreign matter such as metal powder may adhere to the dispensing control board 633 and the interface board 635 due to the protrusion 630h formed to cover the top of the dispensing control unit 620d and the interface unit 620e. This can be prevented. Note that the protrusion 630h may be formed to cover only the upper side of the power supply unit 620c, or may be formed to cover only the upper side of the power supply unit 620c, as well as the upper side of the dispensing control unit 620d and the interface unit 620e. It may be formed to cover only the

Furthermore, a first eaves portion 551da provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is located above the power supply unit 620c. That is, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c. In this way, since the first eaves section 551da is located between the notch section 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c, it can be used not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa can be received and attached to the first eaves part 551da, and can be dropped from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa. It is possible to suppress foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the power supply unit 620c from falling toward the power supply unit 620c located below. As a result, although the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c is provided with a plurality of holes, the first eaves portion 551da prevents foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the power supply board 630. I can do it.

In addition, although the case where the first eave part 551da constitutes an eaves part was described above as a structure for preventing foreign substances such as metal powder according to the first embodiment, the structure for preventing foreign substances such as metal powder according to the second embodiment has been described. When the first eaves section 551da and the second eaves section 640a are connected to jointly constitute an eaves section, as in the configuration shown in FIG. In the case where the first eave part 551da constitutes an eave part, the first eave part 551da is not provided and the second eave part 640a serves as the eave part alone, as in the configuration for preventing foreign substances such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. This may be the case in either of the following cases. That is, it is sufficient that the eaves section provided below the cutout section 553aa of the tank rail 553 is located above the power supply unit 620c, and at least when the back cover 640 is closed, the Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding part 553a can be received and attached to the eaves, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding part 553a through the notch 553aa can be It is possible to prevent the power supply unit 620c from falling toward the power supply unit 620c located below. Thus, although the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c is provided with a plurality of holes, the eaves can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the power supply board 630.

Furthermore, when the back cover 640 is closed, the back cover 640 and the power supply unit 620c are separated by a predetermined distance in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, but the upper end of the power supply unit 620c is higher than the lower end of the back cover 640. It is located at the top. From this point of view, when the back cover 640 is closed, foreign objects such as metal powder that have fallen to the outside from the main guide section 553a through the notch 553aa are positioned so that the upper end of the back cover 640 is higher than the lower end. It is possible to suppress the power supply unit 620c from falling toward the power supply unit 620c. As a result, although the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c has a plurality of holes, this prevents foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 from adhering to the power supply board 630. However, the risk of failure of the power supply board 630 can be reduced.

Further, the protruding portion 630h is formed to protrude upward from near the rear end of the base unit 620b and have a vertical surface. That is, in the main body frame 4, the power supply unit has the power supply board 630 at a position behind the protrusion 501z protruding from the rear end of the game board mounting part 501c and further behind the vertical surface of the protrusion 630h. 620c, a payout control unit 620d having a payout control board 633, and an interface unit 620e having an interface board 635. As mentioned above in detail, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the back of the game board mounting portion 501c By providing the protruding part 501z protruding from the end, when installing the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, such foreign matter can be removed from the ejected ball receiving part 628 side (power source) located behind the protruding part 501z. unit 620c, etc.). At this time, even if foreign matter such as metal powder enters behind the protrusion 501z, the vertical surface of the protrusion 630h, which is a separate member, is provided at a position behind the protrusion 501z. By doing so, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, such foreign objects can be prevented from moving to the side of the power supply unit 620c etc. located behind the vertical surface of the protrusion 630h. . In other words, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, foreign substances such as metal powder pushed out from the game board mounting part 501c are not only on the protruding part 501z but also on the vertical surface of the protruding part 630h, which is a separate member. , functions as a member that suppresses movement toward the power supply unit 620c and the like. This double prevents foreign matter such as metal powder pushed out from the game board mounting section 501c from adhering to the power supply board 620, payout control board 633, and interface board 635, and reduces the risk of failure of these boards. can be reduced. In addition, although the protrusion part 501z is provided in front of the ejection ball receiving part 628 in the above, the protrusion part 630h is provided in front of the power supply unit 620c, the dispensing control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e without providing the protrusion part 501z. It may be configured such that only vertical surfaces are provided.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 67 to 74. FIG. 67 is a front view of a game board in which the game panel and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 68 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 67 as seen from the front right, FIG. 69 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 67 as seen from the front left, and FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the back. , FIG. 71 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 72 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board with the game panel etc. made transparent.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven when a player operates a handle 111 of a handle unit 180. The gaming area 5a includes a general prize opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate section that provide a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the player upon acceptance or passage of the gaming balls B. 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 allows the game ball B to be received or passed through the general prize opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate section 2003, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. This is for playing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 111 and the distribution of game balls B within the game area 5a are enjoyed.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 77, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100. The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is played by driving a game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 156, FIG. 111, etc.) for controlling the contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 placed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a performance display device 1600 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100.

A production display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the production display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery formed to be slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and includes a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. It includes a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 75, etc.) attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached.

The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit in response to commands from the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510. It includes a panel drive board 1720 that drives a decorative board and a drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 that accommodates a panel relay board 1710 and a panel drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 has its left side in rear view rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 in the rear unit 3000, and its right side in rear view removably attached to the rear surface of the performance display device 1600.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning holes 2001 that are always open to accept game balls B hit in the gaming area 5a, and the plurality of general winning holes 2001 are the gaming area. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions within the game area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 that can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, and a second starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. It is provided with a grand prize opening 2005 that can accept the game balls B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls B.

The table unit 2000 also includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and one general prize winning port 2001. , a side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has two general winning openings 2001, and a starting unit located at the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. From the attacker unit 2400, which is attached to the right side of the opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005, the starting opening unit 2100, and the side unit 2200. Also provided is a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached slightly above the approximate center of the game area 5a in the front view and has a gate portion 2003.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a first starting port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning hole sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 provided in itself, and a second sensor that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. It includes a starting hole sensor 2402 and a big winning hole sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005. Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003, and a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetic field that acts illegally.

The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A locking mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600 is provided. In addition, the back unit 3000 is equipped with a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 provided in the starting hole unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 and the side unit 2200 (Fig. 111 ).

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back first production unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a back second production unit 3200 installed inside the back box 3010 behind the back first production unit 3100. , the back third production unit 3300 which is installed in the back box 3010 behind the back second production unit 3200, and the general part of the starting port unit 2100 and side unit 2200 which are attached to the front of the back second production unit 3200. A back left ball ejection unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning hole 2001 and discharges it downward, and a game that is accepted in the general winning hole 2001, the second starting hole 2004, and the big winning hole 2005 of the attacker unit 2400. A back right ball discharge unit 3040 that receives the ball B and discharges it downward is provided.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 75. FIG. 75(a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 75(b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is urged by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center of the frame in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the vicinity of the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 matches the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path passes through the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a function display unit attachment part 1011 formed at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp pasting part 1012 formed at the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, and the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can sufficiently hold the obstacle nails N in the front or attach the front unit 2000. It is said that Note that in this embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the gaming area 5a and corresponding to the out opening 1008 of the front component 1000. Furthermore, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

Although not shown in the drawings, the panel board 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in round holes and short elongated holes passing through the front and back, and the upper and lower edges thereof are spaced apart in the left-right direction. A plurality of engagement step portions formed with a thin plate thickness are provided. The positioning hole is for positioning the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement stepped portion is configured to be removably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. be.

As shown in FIG. 75, the panel board 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500, which is offset to the upper right from the center when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is such that the left side and bottom side of the center have a plurality of game balls. It has a wide width that allows the balls B to line up, and the upper and right sides have a narrow width that makes it impossible for a plurality of game balls B to line up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel board 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (eg, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is approximately the same size as the panel board 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step that is approximately the same size as the gaming area 5a. It is provided with a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch to the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full bulb path unit 610 face forward.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 also includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are each inserted into a plurality of positioning holes in the panel plate 1110, and a plurality of protruding pins arranged outside the holding step. The panel plate 1110 has three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging steps on the upper side and the lower left side of the panel plate 1110, and protrudes upward from the lower outside of the holding step. A pair of engagement pieces that engage with two engagement steps on the lower side, respectively. The panel holder 1120 is assembled by engaging the engagement step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece from diagonally above the front, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper and lower left sides. The panel board 1110 can be removably attached while being housed in the holding step by elastically engaging the engagement step with the engagement claw. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

[5-3. Board holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with the upper and front sides open, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200, when assembled to the game board 5, covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 from below and from the rear side, and also covers the main control unit 1300 on the back side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the ejecting section 1201 is located directly above the ejecting ball receiving section 628 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received, and the bottom It can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower part to the discharge bulb receiving part 628.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 73 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses a main control board 1310 that controls game content and payout of game balls B, etc., a setting change board 1311 that can set gaming performance, and a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. and a main control board box 1320 attached to the board holder 1200.

When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when looking at the game board 5 from behind, the rectangular main control board 1310 long in the left and right direction is on the left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. It is formed and arranged in a size that occupies about four-fifths of the area from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the top side, right side, and bottom side, and the remaining one-fifth area. A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in a corner region where the upper and right sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

As described above, the outer frame 2 rotates the main body frame upper hinge part 510 and the main body frame lower hinge part 520 of the main body frame 4 on the same axis by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward centering on the left side in front view, the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame 4 are arranged. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front is the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the opposite right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front is the open side of the main body frame 4. Become. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the closed side).

In addition, the back cover 640 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, as described above. It is something. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640. Further, as described above, the right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the right end of the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 when viewed from the front, and the left side when viewed from the front is attached to the rear right end of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically. Since it is designed to be attached to the back cover attachment part 551i of the base 551 and the back cover attachment part 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600, the right side in front view becomes the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640. The left side in front view, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640, while the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the main control board 1310 are painted solidly with green resist except for various land patterns. In contrast, the setting change board 1311's resist is white, which is a different color from the main control board 1310's resist, and the entire front (mounting surface) and back (soldering surface) of the setting board 1311 is white. It is painted solid with resist except for various land patterns.

Here, the point that a color different from that used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311 will be explained. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are both boards housed in the main control board box 1320. The main control board 1310 is a board of high importance for crime prevention because it controls the progress of the game (controls the game content and payout of game balls B, etc.) for game hall managers, game hall clerks, and other staff. There is a very high level of awareness about this. Therefore, there is no need to draw attention to the fact that this board is the main control board 1310, distinguishing it from other boards. On the other hand, the setting change board 1311 is a board that has a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1, that is, it can set the game performance, so although it is housed in the main control board box 1320, it is not important for crime prevention. There is extremely little awareness of the fact that it is an expensive board. Therefore, it is necessary to draw attention to the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311, distinguishing it from other boards.

Therefore, in this embodiment, green, which is generally used as a resist for boards, is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and a white color, which is different from the color used as the resist for the main control board 1310, is used as the resist for the setting change board 1311. Adopted. As a result, among the boards housed in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 stands out compared to the main control board 1310, and in addition to the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311 also has high importance for crime prevention. This can contribute to raising awareness of the fact that it is a substrate.

Note that in the present embodiment described above, a white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but it is not possible to distinguish between the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311. If possible, yellow, red, blue, transparent, etc. may be used.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, a white color different from the green used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but instead of the resist of the setting change board 1311, It may be printed in white to cover almost the entire front surface (mounting surface) and/or back surface (solder surface), or it may be printed in one of black, blue, yellow, and red as silk printing. May be printed.

Next, the main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, it is possible to check the state of the front and back sides of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not any unauthorized modification has been made). or whether an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be confirmed from outside the main control board box 1320. Moreover, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening/closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311. Note that the cover body is formed with a plurality of vent holes for heat dissipation that can release the air inside the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to an interface board 635, a peripheral control board 1510, and a setting change board 1311. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting hole sensor 2101, a gate sensor 2506, a second starting hole sensor 2402, a big winning hole sensor 2403, a starting hole solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, and a general winning hole sensor. 2401, a general winning a prize opening sensor 3001, a magnetic sensor 2470, a vibration sensor 3005, and an out opening sensor 3032.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a that can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and confirm the setting values. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection). (electrical wiring).The harness (electrical wiring) absorbs (reduces) the force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a, and connects the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1311. ). By making this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. Note that connector connections, which are inter-board connections, include connections that use normal connectors that do not have a floating mechanism, and connections that use special connectors that have a floating mechanism. A normal connector without a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug, and the socket and plug fit together by inserting the plug into the socket and pushing it in. When the socket and plug fit together, The structure is such that there is no movement in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed (for example, in the vertical direction). On the other hand, special connectors with a floating mechanism consist of a socket and a plug, and the socket and plug fit together by inserting and pushing the socket into the plug. When fitting, it is possible to absorb errors that occur during fitting (mating axis misalignment) by moving within a predetermined distance range in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the socket is inserted and pushed (e.g., up and down). It has a structure. In this embodiment, a normal connector without a floating mechanism is used as a connector connection between boards, but a special connector with a floating mechanism may be used.

The setting change board 1311 is formed into a square shape with the distance of one side being approximately one-fifth of the distance in the horizontal direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and the upper side of the board 1311 is shaped like a square. The main control board 1310 is disposed on the same straight line as the upper side thereof, and its lower side is disposed above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the vertical distance dimension, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311. It is located on the right side of , and at a position corresponding to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged at the center point where the vertical and horizontal center lines of the square setting change board 1311 intersect. On the main control board 1310, a setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is arranged above the center line in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 and closer to the connector MSCN. A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN. Further below, a base monitor 1310h is arranged, which is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a row from the center toward the right side.

In this embodiment, the setting key is set at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port is along the vertical direction). position), the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and the setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 has been removed from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot when inserted into the outer frame 2. On the other hand, even if the main body frame 4 is closed, the setting keys will not interfere with the members of other pachinko machines (or the members of the island equipment of the game hall) installed in a row opposite to the island equipment of the game hall. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted to prevent damage.

By turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and this setting key ON signal is sent to the setting change board 1311. is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the setting key cylinder is moved so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a corresponds to the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, although it is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. A wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for this opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed between the opening and modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. The structure is as follows.

The setting key switch 1311a has a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing that houses a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated. The surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. The front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing is arranged approximately on the same plane as the front surface of the setting key cylinder in which the insertion port for inserting the setting key is provided, and the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) The surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the casing (or rectangular shape) is disposed substantially on the same plane as the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. When the setting key cylinder is housed in the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) case, the setting key cylinder is electrically connected to the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) case. It becomes.

The setting key switch 1311a is provided with a circuit in the setting key cylinder that can take out (output) as a signal whether the setting key switch 1311a is in an ON state or an OFF state. The signal can be taken out (output) from a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the opposite surface (rear surface) of the setting key cylinder. The circuit provided inside this setting key cylinder and the pair of opposing lead terminals are electrically insulated from the setting key cylinder and also electrically connected to the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a. is insulated.

From the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a, a pair of opposing lead terminals protrude from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder and extend a predetermined length at a rotation angle of 90 degrees. A pair of opposing mounting plate pieces are formed that protrude. The pair of opposing mounting plate pieces pass through the long mounting holes formed in the setting change board 1311 and are soldered to the back side (solder side) of the setting change board 1311, thereby attaching the setting key switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311. It can be fixed to.

Further, as described above, an insertion port for inserting a setting key is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on the same plane as the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 when the setting change board 1311 is housed in the main control board box 1320. In other words, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a does not protrude outward from the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320.

As a result, when an operator attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the operator first temporarily places it on the front of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. Therefore, if the temporarily placed game board 5 accidentally hits the game board 5 with the foot of the worker and causes it to fall, the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented from colliding with the floor and being damaged. Also, when removing the game board 5 from the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed on the front of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, so the temporarily placed game board 5 is If the worker's leg accidentally hits the game board 5 during work and causes it to fall, the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented from colliding with the floor and being damaged.

Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is molded transparent as described above. Through the cover body, it is possible to visually confirm the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of pitches displayed by the base monitor 1310h.

Note that in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is changed. They are formed so as not to be close to each other on the change board 1311 (separated from each other), and the connections to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) are also formed separately. The main control board 1310 also has a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (that is, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a). The wiring patterns (to which signals are transmitted) are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the wiring patterns (to which signals from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are transmitted) are formed so as not to be close to each other. The leads are also formed so that they cannot be brought close to each other (separated from each other).

Here, the procedure up to operating the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 will be briefly explained. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the main control board 1310 is placed on the open side of the main body frame 4, as described above. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the support side (closed side). Further, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640, as described above. In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640, while the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side. In other words, when opening the back cover 640, the back cover open side of the back cover 640 is the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, so the main body frame 4 is larger than the outer frame 2 (approximately If the opening side of the back cover 640 is not opened (approximately 90 degrees), the opening side of the back cover 640 will interfere with the outer frame 2 and the back cover 640 will not be able to open the state in which it covers the rear side of the game board 5. In other words, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a in order to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 simply opens the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 by a gap large enough to insert his/her arm. Even if an attempt is made to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the back cover 640 cannot be opened. In other words, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 must first move the outer frame 2 to secure a space in which the back cover 640 can open the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 widely (nearly 90 degrees).

In this way, since the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4. If an unauthorized person attempting to illegally access the setting key switch 1311a uses an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or wire, it may be necessary to Even if an incorrect tool is inserted and fed, the path from the open side of the main body frame 4 to the setting key switch 1311a becomes long, making it necessary to feed the incorrect tool deeply. As a result, the operation time during which the unauthorized tool is sent to the setting key switch 1311a becomes longer, so that such fraudulent activity can be easily detected by a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall.

Furthermore, since the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640, the insertion port for the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is covered by the back cover 640. There is. As a result, an unauthorized person attempting to illegally access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 may use an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or wire to remove the wire between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted and fed in from the open side of the setting key switch 1311a, the back cover 640 will prevent the unauthorized tool from reaching the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a. It is possible to prevent the setting key of the switch 1311a from being inserted into the insertion port of the cylinder.

Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion port for inserting a setting key, and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder is covered by the back cover 640. In order to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to open the back cover 640. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 by a wide angle (approximately 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2. By performing such a plurality of operations, it is possible to improve the security of access to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraudulent acts using an unauthorized tool.

Note that, as described above, the back cover 640 is attached so that its left side in front view is pivotally supported by the back cover attachment portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600 so as to be freely openable and closable. The locking screw 642 is screwed into the back cover attachment part 601a to fix the back cover 640, and the locking screw 642 is also arranged on the open side of the back cover 640, so that the main body frame 4 It is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, which is the side opposite to the open side. Therefore, an unauthorized person attempting to illegally access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 may insert an unauthorized tool between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the open side of the main body frame 4. Even if the tool is fed in, the path from the open side of the main body frame 4 to the locking screw 642 of the back cover 640 becomes long, making it necessary to feed the illegal tool deeply. In this respect as well, since the operation time for feeding the illegal tool into the locking screw 642 becomes longer, it is possible to make it easier for personnel such as game hall clerks to detect such fraudulent activities, and the setting change board By increasing the security of access to the setting key switch 1311a of 1311, it is possible to increase deterrence against fraudulent acts using unauthorized tools.

The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged is housed in a main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310, and this main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. ing. On the other hand, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged is housed in the payout control board box 632, and the payout control board box 632 is located behind the power board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. attached to the side. In this way, by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z on separate boards, and by making the boards attached to different objects, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z can be separated from each other. I can do it. In the case where the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on one board, unauthorized modification only needs to be made to one board, which is not preferable in terms of crime prevention. Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate boards, and the boards are attached to different objects. Security against the clear button 633z is improved.

The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) controls the game preparation and the game (following the game preparation control, the game is controlled). Game preparation control is performed in the first step (step S14 in the main control side power-on processing to be described later) in which the setting value can be changed based on the signal from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. determination, processing of step S16A), and following this first step, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (here, functions as a setting switching button for selecting and switching setting values). A second step (determination in step S216 and processing in step S218 in the setting change process described later) in which setting values can be selected and switched based on the following. Following the game preparation control, the game control consists of a main control side main process in a main control side power-on process, which will be described later, a main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Although such security can be improved, by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z on separate boards, and by adopting a configuration in which the boards are attached to different objects, the setting key Since the switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, there is no need to tell where the setting key switch 1311a is located. It may be difficult for the game hall manager, game hall clerk, or other personnel to know where the game hall is located because they may be unfamiliar with the game hall.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a notation is attached to the main control board box 1320 that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Specifically, a sticker is affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 that can tell the location of the RWM clear button 633z. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and on this rectangular sheet, for example, "The RWM clear button (setting switch button) is located on the payout control board" is printed in red translucent letters (height: 7 mm). ing. As a result, the placement location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switch button) can be communicated to the game hall manager, game hall clerk, and other personnel. When operating the RWM clear button 633z, it is possible to easily find the RWM clear button 633z, thereby avoiding dizziness. Therefore, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Note that even if this sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320, it does not hinder the visibility of the main control board 1310. Also, instead of the characters printed on the rectangular sheet of this sticker, symbols such as arrows may be used.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When molding the cover body of the board box 1320, concave characters or convex characters may be molded together (that is, the cover body and the characters may be integrally molded). . Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location where the RWM clear button 633z is placed. The text (height: 7 mm) "The RWM clear button (setting switch button) is located on the payout control board" may be printed in white on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1311, or the text may be printed on the payout control board 633. The text (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (setting switch button)" may be printed in white as a silk screen on the surface (mounting surface). Note that the color of silk printing may be the same color or may be different colors. Further, symbols such as arrows may be used instead of silk-printed characters. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location where the RWM clear button 633z is placed. The text part may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1311 and cutout text (height: 7 mm) such as "RWM clear button (setting switch button) is on the payout control board" may be formed using a resist, or the text may be formed using a resist. The text portion may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 633 and cut out (height: 7 mm) to form a "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" using a resist. Note that although the resists may be of the same color, it is preferable that the resists be of different colors so that the substrates can be distinguished. Further, instead of a blank character, a blank symbol with a symbol such as an arrow masked may be used. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. A similar seal is placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1310 or the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 (this seal is a transparent rectangular sheet, and this rectangular sheet includes, for example, red translucent letters (high 7mm) with the words "RWM clear button (settings switching button) is located on the payout control board" printed on it, or you can paste a red translucent mark on the surface (mounting side) of the payout control board 633. You may also attach a transparent rectangular sheet with the words "RWM clear button (setting switch button)" written on it (height: 7 mm). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. An announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the button 633z is placed, or an announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, with the power of the pachinko machine 1 turned on, a staff member such as a game hall manager or a clerk at the game hall operates the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 to display the performance display device 1600. Various setting screens are displayed, and an item regarding the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button) is selected. As a result, an announcement voice telling where the RWM clear button 633z is located, "The RWM clear button is located on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switch button," is played from various speakers, and An announcement image (which may be taken as a photograph) that conveys the location of the RWM clear button 633z is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After understanding the location of the RWM clear button 633z from the announcement voice and announcement image, the game hall manager, game hall clerk, and other personnel shut off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and change the setting values. It can be done smoothly. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was pasted on the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z, but instead of this, a sticker is attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320. When changing the settings, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to let you know where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting switch button, is located. Specifically, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The RWM clear button that tells where the RWM clear button 633z is placed under the control of the control board 1510 is located on the payout control board.The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switch button.Set by operating the RWM clear button. Please change the value.'' announcement repeatedly plays from various speakers. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, it sends a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, which causes the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the announcement voice and proceed with various processes based on the received predetermined command. I will do it. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known. In addition, following such an announcement sound, an announcement sound that tells how to operate the setting keys may be played from various speakers after the setting value is determined. Furthermore, while the announcement voice is being played, an image "setting in progress" may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When changing the settings, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to let you know where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting switch button, is located. Specifically, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The RWM clear button that tells where the RWM clear button 633z is placed under the control of the control board 1510 is located on the payout control board.The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switch button.Set by operating the RWM clear button. Please change the value.'' announcement repeatedly plays from various speakers. This eliminates the need to search for the sticker affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Although such announcement voices are repeatedly played from various speakers, in case the content of the announcement voice is missed, a sticker affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 is placed before the next announcement voice starts playing. By visually observing the RWM clear button 633z, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be known. In addition to the announcement voice, "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switch button. Please operate the RWM clear button to change the setting value." It may also be possible to provide information that indicates where a sticker indicating the location of the button is affixed. When the RWM clear button is operated, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement sound. Even if the person who changes the setting value has become accustomed to changing the setting value due to the work and it is annoying, it is recommended to use this as an opportunity to operate the RWM clear button immediately after starting the work. , the announcement voice can be stopped immediately, and even if it is necessary to carry out the work after the game hall has started operating, the work can be started so as not to cause inconvenience to the players. If the RWM clear button is operated immediately, the announcement voice can be immediately stopped using this as a trigger. Incidentally, following such an announcement sound, an announcement sound that informs how to operate the setting keys may be played from various speakers after the setting value is determined. Further, while the announcement voice is being played, an image indicating "setting in progress" may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate boards, and the boards are attached to different objects. However, if security can be improved, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button (in this case, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button (in this case, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 to the setting switch button functions can be removed) can be aggregated and arranged. For example, the vertical distance between the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 is almost the same as the vertical distance between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance between the main control board 1310 A center line that is shorter than the distance dimension in the left and right direction of , have matching shapes. In other words, the setting change board 1311 has a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of its vertical distance dimension is located on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311. Along the right side of the control board 1310, the center of the vertical distance is located on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a is disposed below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and has a setting key cylinder in which a setting key is inserted and rotated near the lower side of the setting change board 1311. A setting switching button having a press operation part is arranged above the center line and near the upper side of the setting change board 1311. That is, on the same board called the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a is arranged near the bottom side, whereas the setting change button is arranged near the top side, and they are spaced apart from each other. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button are arranged separately and separated from each other on the same board, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button are arranged separately, although they are integrated on one board. The setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button are integrated into one board and arranged separately, since this makes it difficult to make unauthorized changes compared to the case where the keys are placed close to each other and arranged separately. In some cases, it may be possible to improve crime prevention even if the

Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, and the setting display 1310g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. First, a case in which setting values are changed will be briefly explained, and a case in which a confirmation display of the current setting values is displayed will be briefly explained. The setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values, so only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, should possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting values, when turning on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame should be 4 is opened, a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned on. A "predetermined set value change permission condition" needs to be satisfied, that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated. In other words, the person who actually changes the settings should first check that the power is not turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then change the settings to the outer frame 2. Open the main body frame 4, then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate it 60 degrees clockwise, and turn it on to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The user turns on the setting key, and then operates the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1.

A person who changes the settings should first check that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then move the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. After opening the setting key switch 1311a, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, turn the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and turn it on to open the setting key switch 1311a. Turn on the setting key. Next, while operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from off to on.

When the person who changes the setting value presses the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, a detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is transmitted from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to. Each time a person changing the settings of the set value presses the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the main control MPU 1310a increases the value by 1 from the current set value based on the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z. However, when the maximum value, set value 6, is reached, control is performed to return to the initial value, set value 1, increase the value by 1 again, and display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

When determining the setting value, the person who changes the setting value should move the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned on to the original position (in other words, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). OFF setting key Rotate the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotational position of the cylinder to turn it OFF. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set values determined by changing the settings in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and changes the setting value from being displayed to hidden on the setting display 1310g. state, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from the lit state to the off state.

The person who changes the setting value takes out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then changes the setting value. complete.

When displaying the currently set setting values, the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned on. A "predetermined setting value display permission condition" needs to be satisfied, that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated. In other words, the person who actually displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the power to Pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to Pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Open the main body frame 4 from the frame 2, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and then the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z.

A person who wants to check and display the currently set setting values must first check that the power to Pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to Pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Then, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, turn the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and turn it on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by setting the setting key switch 1311a. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1310z remains off, and even if the person who displays the currently set setting value presses the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z, this press operation does not Correspondingly, the setting value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

After completing the confirmation of the currently set values, the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set values moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key was turned on to the initial position, which is the original position. Turn off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which the setting value is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed.

The person who wishes to check and display the currently set setting values removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then sets the current setting value. Complete the confirmation display of the set values that have been set.

As mentioned above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are such that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned on. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON and the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, as mentioned above, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is When the power is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is pressed. When the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned on, the setting key is turned on, and the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. It is necessary that you do not. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions and the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are the conditions that apply when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). When the power is restored, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is turned ON when the machine is turned on and the setting key is turned ON. In contrast to the requirement that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z be operated when the power is restored after a momentary power outage (momentary power outage), it is not necessary to meet the predetermined setting value display permission conditions. The requirement is that ``the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (momentary power outage that occurs momentarily).'' They differ in that they do so.

Furthermore, there are two types of setting key switches: a lead type and a surface mount type (so-called SMD type). The setting key switch 1311a in this embodiment basically uses a lead type switch. The setting key switch 1311a has an operation in which a setting key is inserted into or removed from the insertion port. Therefore, the force associated with this operation acts on the board on which the setting key switch 1311a is provided, causing the board to bend. In the lead type, each lead of the setting key switch is placed inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board. On the other hand, in the SMD type, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged so as to protrude outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch, and is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board.

As a result, with the lead type, if the setting key gets caught in the socket when removed from the socket, each lead of the setting key switch will be placed inside the outline of the setting key switch, and the back side of the board ( Compared to the SMD type, in which the setting key switch leads protrude toward the outside and are soldered to the board surface (mounting surface), the setting key switch The load applied to the part where each lead is soldered to the back side (solder side) of the board increases, and this load acts strongly from the back side (solder side) to the front side (mounting side) of the board, causing the board itself to bend significantly. becomes. On the other hand, with the SMD type, even if the setting key gets caught in the socket when the setting key is removed from the socket, each lead of the setting key switch protrudes outward from the outside of the setting key switch. This is a lead type in which each lead of the setting key switch is placed inside the outline of the setting key switch and is soldered to the back side (soldering side) of the board. Compared to the previous version, the load applied to the part where each lead of the setting key switch is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board is smaller, and this load is transferred from the back surface (soldering surface) of the board to the front surface (mounting surface). The board itself does not bend easily even if you work towards it.

In addition, if the board itself bends significantly due to an external force being applied to the board, there is a risk that the solder parts to which SMD type electronic components are soldered may peel off due to the large peeling load of the land pattern, so lead type setting key switches are used. When using one, it is desirable to mount it on a board on which SMD type electronic components are not mounted. In addition, the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern at the solder part where each lead part of the setting key switch is soldered to the back side (solder side) of the board is smaller than that of the SMD type, and the solder part of the setting key switch is Considering the strength of the solder part, it is desirable to use a lead type setting key switch because it can be made resistant to peeling.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a lead type switch is basically used as the setting key switch 1311a. In this embodiment, a lead type electronic component is mounted on the setting change board 1311 instead of an SMD type electronic component, so a lead type one is mounted on the setting change board 1311 as the setting key switch 1311a. Even if the setting key gets caught in the insertion slot when the setting key is removed from the insertion slot and the board itself bends significantly as described above, the leads soldered to the back side (solder side) of the setting change board 1311 There is no risk that other electronic components of the type may be peeled off from the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. Note that, as described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection). may be electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a harness), so signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

The rectangular main control board 1310, which is long in the left-right direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, extends from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the left side, top side, right side, and bottom side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 is connected to the top and right sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 in the remaining one-fifth of the area. A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in a corner area. The setting change board 1311 is formed into a square shape with the distance on one side being about one-fifth of the horizontal distance of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and is a rectangle long in the left-right direction. The shape is smaller than that of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, a lead type setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the square setting change board 1311 having such a small shape, and if a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and pressed The setting change board 1311 may be formed on a small board even if the board itself bends due to the setting key switch 1311a, or if the setting key gets caught in the socket when the setting key is removed from the socket of the setting key switch 1311a and the board itself bends. By doing so, the magnitude of deflection can be suppressed to be smaller than that of the main control board 1310. As a result, the cover body and base body of the main control board box 1320 at positions corresponding to the setting change board 1311 come into contact with the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 to prevent bending. Since there is no need to provide ribs for each setting key switch 1311a, screw holes can be provided in the setting change board 1311 around the position where the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, and the setting key switch 1311a can be housed in the transparent main control board box 1320. This can contribute to the visibility of the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311.

As described above, in this embodiment, a lead type is used as the setting key switch 1311a and it is arranged on the setting change board 1311 which is separate from the main control board 1310, so that the setting value can be changed. Even if the setting change board 1311 is bent due to the operation (operation) in which the setting key is inserted into and removed from the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board 1310 is not bent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being bent due to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

On the other hand, there is a case where the setting key switch 1311a is placed on one of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, etc. instead of the setting change board 1311, and these If an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the board, use an SMD type instead of a lead type as the setting key switch 1311a, mount it on the surface of the board (mounting surface), and temporarily insert it. Even if the setting key gets caught in the insertion slot when the setting key is removed from the mouth, the board itself will not bend as described above, so other SMD type electronic components soldered to the surface (mounting side) of the board will There is no risk of it peeling off from the surface (mounting surface).

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" refers to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, as well as the probability from when the probability changes to the normal It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when moving to the next time, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (degree of advantage) of being able to increase the number of game balls that can be played is preset. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables (for example, a jackpot judgment table in which the ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, A jackpot symbol determination table that specifies the percentage of the decision value for determination, a small hit determination table that specifies the percentage of the small win decision value that indicates winning the small hit, and a percentage of the decision value for the determination of the small win symbol. (such as a small winning symbol determination table, a normal time transition determination table that defines the ratio of determination values for transition from probability change to normal time, etc.), and is used in various distribution rates that are associated with set values. Various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations that are associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. In addition, the various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used for various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other. In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to . In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but they may be in a smaller range than this, or they may be in a larger range. It may be something. For example, there may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays setting values, but also allows the main control MPU 1310a to check the contents of its own internal RAM when power is restored to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, if the power-off processing on the main control side has not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or if the (This is not possible), and an error message will be displayed to inform you of this. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h collects game balls from the game balls fired into the game area 5a through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls is displayed. Among the game balls fired into the game area 5a, the game balls collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out port sensor 3032, and this detection signal is inputted to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key was turned on to the original position (in other words, the setting The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. , this OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information conveying the setting key ON and OFF is serially output to the outside as serial information. The setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a serial output circuit that can perform this function. Thereby, security can be improved for signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether to turn the setting key ON or OFF based on the received serial information. It is possible to determine which one is being transmitted (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be referred to as "modification example (1) of setting keys").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning the setting key switch 1311a on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key was turned on to the original position (in other words, the setting The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. , this OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but it is now possible to output information informing the setting key ON and OFF to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit that can perform this may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead of this, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms when the information indicates that the setting key is ON, and the pulse width is set to 5 ms when the information indicates that the setting key is OFF. . When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a controls whether the setting key is ON or OFF based on the input pulse signal. , (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the pulse output circuit may be referred to as "modification example (2) of the setting key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning the setting key switch 1311a on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key was turned on to the original position (in other words, the setting The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. , this OFF signal was to be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal and the voltage level of the OFF signal were changed. Between the boards extending from the board 1311 to the main control board 1310, an intermediate potential (for example, a potential from 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V) is used, and a comparator circuit is provided on the main control board 1310. By inputting the comparison result to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the setting key ON signal is ON/OFF and the OFF signal is ON/OFF. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (a mode of the setting key switch using an intermediate potential may be referred to as "modified example (3) of setting key").

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311 is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotation position) and turning it OFF, and this OFF signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board. Although the setting key switch 1311a is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be provided in the main control board 1310 (the configuration of the setting key switch is described as "Modification of setting key (4)"). ).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 were housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which is composed of a cover body and a base body, but the setting change board 1311 is separately housed. The main control board box 1320 may be housed in a body setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 has a cover body and a base body which are caulked with a one-way screw or the like at the caulking portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and includes a plurality of them. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body using a one-way screw or the like in the caulking part using one sealing mechanism, and then in order to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. The structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each. It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by inserting a wire or the like through the "gaps" formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and between the pressing operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding openings. The structure is such that a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body in order to prevent wire intrusion into the opening. Note that if the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above and is configured such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, A setting change board cover body opening/closing switch may be provided that can detect opening of the cover body. In this case, the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body may be configured to be input directly to the main control board 1310, or may be input (indirectly) to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured so that Based on the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body, the case where the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above. (The mode may be described as "Modified example (5) of setting keys").

Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a mode that is appropriately selected and combined from the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (5) of the setting keys (the mode of the selection combination of the modification examples is referred to as "Modification example (6) of the setting keys"). ).

In addition, with the above-mentioned setting values, in addition to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, and the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, the setting value is also used for determining the lottery when transitioning from a variable probability time to a normal time. It is possible to change the probability of the game, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (in other words, it is possible to increase the number of game balls that the player can acquire). The probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) was set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. In some cases, there is a single preset setting value. In other words, the probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) exists in advance as a plurality of setting values, such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, and the game specifications require setting changes, and the probability of being advantageous to the player is There are game specifications in which the probability (advantage degree) has only a single preset value and does not require any setting changes. However, if the design of the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed in accordance with such game specifications, and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 Since this depends on the game specifications, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 that are not dependent on game specifications, that is, can be used in common without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which there is only a single set value in advance and there is no need to change the settings, the probability that the set value will be advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is Therefore, it is no longer necessary to use the settings as follows, so it is necessary to change the design of the software by assigning settings 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 as the following contents. I can do it.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (area excluding a specific area out of all RAM areas), multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after clearing the RAM). This can be used as a setting value (which allows variation in the startup method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable object)" for the operation of the movable object (accessory object) that is the object of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and the lighting of light emitting objects such as lamps and LEDs. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1, which specifies "movement of movable objects (objects), lighting of light emitters)," is assigned, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2, which specifies "movement of movable objects (accessory objects)," is assigned as setting value 2. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitter" is assigned as value 3, and setting value 4 is assigned as "detailed operation of the movable object (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.)". Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned, which specifies "actions such as interference check with structures and other movable bodies (accessories), operation order with other movable bodies (accessories), etc.", and setting value 5 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned that specifies "lighting of the light emitter in units of one port (lighting of the light emitter in units of predetermined output ports (that is, for each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)", and the setting value 6 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "No operation" is assigned (a mode of change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be referred to as "Modification (1) based on common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a performs the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to operate the movable body (accessories) and turn on the light emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 121) from the main control MPU 1310a, performs peripheral control according to the setting value included in the setting change command (actual machine confirmation operation pattern). The board 1510 can operate the movable body (accessory object) that is to be controlled and can light up the light emitting body. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, variations can be provided in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of times from the end of symbol variation until a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while waiting for a player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" as setting value 1 is assigned, time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" as setting value 2, and "20 seconds" as setting value 3 is assigned. ” is assigned, time setting pattern 4 is assigned which specifies “25 seconds” as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 is assigned which specifies “30 seconds” as setting value 5, Time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as setting value 6 is assigned. )”). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the time from the end of the symbol variation until the player enters the waiting state, it is possible to provide variation in the time from the end of the symbol variation until the demonstration begins.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while waiting for the player) to be performed after the end of symbol variation. In this case, the demonstration effect setting pattern 1 which specifies "comical effect" as setting value 1 is assigned, and the demonstration effect setting pattern which specifies "comical effect, movement effect of movable objects (actual objects)" as setting value 2 is assigned. 2 is assigned, and demo production setting pattern 3 is assigned which specifies "serious production" as setting value 3, and demo production setting pattern specifies "serial production, movement production of movable objects (accessory objects)" as setting value 4. 4 is assigned, demo production setting pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "historical drama style production" as setting value 5, and demo production setting pattern 5 specifies "historical drama style production, movable objects (actual objects)" as setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the manner of changing and setting the contents of the demonstration performance may be described as "modification example (3) based on common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting values included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the contents of the demonstration presentation are changed and set, variations can be given to the contents of the demonstration presentation that is performed after the variation of the symbols is completed.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" as setting value 2, and "volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned. Volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "Volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, Volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "Volume 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned, Volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" as setting value 6 is assigned (a mode of changing the default volume may be described as "modification example (4) based on common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a has a default volume set to a volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the minimum volume end by moving the volume adjustment switch in the direction of decreasing the volume (moved in the opposite direction to increasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the minimum level, the volume may be muted, or the volume may be set so that the sound can be recognized when the user stops in front of the pachinko machine. Also, the default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 is moved to the maximum volume end after the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the opposite direction to decreasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume, or the volume may be set to a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. By changing and setting the default volume, it is possible to vary the default volume that is adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of volumes of error notification sounds in error notifications such as various malfunctions, bumps, and errors. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted (that is, they are not dependent on) by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and by setting the volume to the maximum, the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound can be played in a game hall. Although it is easy for staff such as store clerks to notice this, it may be annoying to players who are playing games at other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is a need for a device that can adjust the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" as setting value 2 is assigned. , error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned, error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" as setting value 4, and " Error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" as setting value 6 is assigned (error notification volume (The mode of change setting may be described as "Modification (5) based on common hardware configuration"). The setting value ranges from setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute the sound, but at which you can recognize the error notification sound if you stop in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward a level at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of default brightness values for light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. The brightness of the light emitting body controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" as setting value 2, and " A default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" as a setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern that specifies "brightness 5" as a setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned. be). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the default brightness, and performs lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitting body, it is possible to turn on the light emitter, blink it, change the gradation point, etc. Depending on the manner in which the contents of the default brightness are changed and set, variations can be given to the default brightness of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of brightnesses of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in error notifications such as various malfunctions, bumps, and errors. Error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" as setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp that is the target of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 is assigned which specifies "error notification brightness 3" as the setting value 3, and the error notification brightness specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4. Brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, error notification brightness setting pattern 5 is assigned, which specifies "error notification brightness 5" as setting value 5, and error notification brightness specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as setting value 6. Brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (a mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in error notification may be described as "Modification (7) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, the lamp's brightness increases from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp does not turn off, but the lamp brightness is low and allows you to recognize an error notification if you stop in front of the pachinko machine) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later to change the brightness of the light emitter in error notification, and controls lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, selects the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitting body, the light emitting body can be turned on, blinked, or have different gradation points. Depending on the manner in which the brightness of the light emitting body in error notification is changed, the brightness of the light emitting body, such as a lamp or LED, in error notification can be varied.

In addition, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the common hardware configuration described above are determined when predetermined setting value display permission conditions are satisfied in the setting value confirmation display processing to be described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Although it is sometimes displayed on the setting display 1310g, it may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g from when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine 1 (the setting value display (This aspect may be referred to as "Modification (8) based on common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the above-described modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-mentioned modification of the setting key (6).

In addition, in the embodiment described above, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage that occurs momentarily). The setting key is turned ON by inserting the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and turning the setting key ON. Assuming that, when the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later and updates the main control built-in RAM. The game proceeds by clearing all areas except for a specific area, and then setting interrupt permission, etc. However, if the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is not pressed. If not, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission and the like. By adopting this aspect, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display process once the game starts to progress. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts playing the game by setting interrupt permission or the like, it never displays the current set value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5 in the ball count process of the power-on process on the main control side, which will be described later. In the port output process of the main control side power-on process to be described later, the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 is output to the base monitor 1310h and displayed on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current setting values displayed on the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h described above. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values set during the period from when the power is restored until the progress of the game is started by performing interrupt permission settings etc. In addition, when the game is started by setting interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of game balls collected through the outlet 1008 can be displayed, so the setting display 1310g can be displayed. There is no need to provide it, which can contribute to cost reduction.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 67, 70, and 71. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This functional display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

The functional display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that display the game status, and two display units that display the normal lottery results drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003. It is equipped with a normal symbol display made of an LED, and a normal reservation display made of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of game balls B to the gate section 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and A first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to the second starting port 2004, and a second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls B to the second starting port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special pending number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the pending number of game balls B to be accepted into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 has a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big prize opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" or the like. Equipped with a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

Here, as a noise countermeasure when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected, and the main control board 1310 is electrically connected. A plurality of wirings (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "wirings") that transmit control signals from the control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 will be described in detail.

The wiring FCBL, which is electrically connected via the connector 1400a provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400, runs from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear side of the back box 3010, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71. When it is routed to the upper side, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is held together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, forming a gaming panel. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the main control unit 1100, or is attached as it is to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. It is pulled downwards.

Then, when the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and the function display unit connector MFCN is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. After being routed below, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

In this way, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a long wiring length, and is particularly connected from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the back box. The wiring FCBL that is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent toward the bottom of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is bent by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. They are connected to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 which is attached to the rear lower part of the gaming panel 1100, and are routed along the right side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the main control board box 1320. When the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed is the area in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 137. It will be placed in

A decorative board 1131 on which a plurality of decorative LEDs are mounted is arranged behind the function display unit 1400. When the wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable that is electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the decorative board 1131, is bent toward the upper side of the rear surface of the game panel 1100, it is bent at the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010. When it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in a state where it is close to (or in contact with) the above-mentioned wiring FCBL, it is directed downward to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The wires are bent by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and routed to the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Ru. Then, the wiring UPCBL is separated from the path of the wiring FCBL described above, is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500, and is bent toward the left side along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. After being routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

In this way, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the decorative board 1131 and the panel drive board 1720 arranged at the rear of the function display unit 1400 has a long wiring length and is particularly difficult to connect from the upper right corner of the game board 5. The wiring FCBL that is routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is bent in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed, each of which is grouped together and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Like the wiring FCBL described above, the area where the wiring UPCBL is routed in this way is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. It will be placed in front of the dispensing unit 560.

As described above, the payout unit 560 is configured by the ball guiding unit 570 which has a single guiding passage that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the single guiding passage of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the guided game balls B one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633; an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward; It includes a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game balls B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

In addition, as described above, the game balls B are polished in the island equipment of the game hall, or rubbed against each other during circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and are charged and discharged with static electricity, thereby generating electromagnetic noise. discharge. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which can hold the game balls B, are attached.

The main control board 1310 also includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., which will be described in detail later. We are prepared. This main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The forced reset by the circuit cannot be controlled and invalidated by the user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control side power-on process described later. I will do it. In this case, since the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a will always occur, so the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a will always occur. will be completely erased (cleared). In other words, if the built-in reset circuit performs a forced reset, the RAM will be cleared when the main control MPU 1310a starts up again.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type package is adopted as the package for the main control MPU 1310a, and when the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a are connected to each other. It is in a state where it protrudes from the soldering surface (the surface opposite to the mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. In other words, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a are in a state of protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

As described above, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 are installed, so when electromagnetic noise is emitted due to electrostatic discharge, the function display unit disposed in front of the dispensing unit 560 1400 and the main control board 1310, and electrically connects the upper left panel decorative board 1131 located behind the function display unit 1400 and the peripheral control board 1510. It may invade the wiring UPCBL. As a result, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may jump out and invade the wiring UPCBL, or on the contrary, electromagnetic noise that has invaded the wiring UPCBL may jump out and invade the wiring FCBL.

For example, suppose that the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 runs through the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is routed in a straight line from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, from a predetermined position on the right side of the main control board box 1320 to the upper side of the main control board box 1320). 1/4 of the length, bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the top or bottom side of the main control board box 1320), and from the center of the bottom side of the main control board 1310 to the left side. When it passes over the function display unit connector MFCN placed close to it, it is bent toward the lower side of the main control board box 1320, and after being pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the function display unit connector MFCN When electrically connected to the wiring FCBL, if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL may be routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. Then, when passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, electromagnetic noise mainly flows through the wiring FCBL. There is a risk that the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise that enters various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the control board box 1320.

Note that if a wiring accommodation groove is formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 instead of in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the wiring FCBL is , the wiring is accommodated not in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, but along the wiring accommodation groove, and after being pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the function display Electrically connected to unit connector MFCN. In this case as well, if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is accommodated and routed along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200, the main control MPU 1310a Electromagnetic wave noise passes through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of the main control board box 1320 through the wiring FCBL. There is a possibility that the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the main control MPU 1310a.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is installed on the main control board as the positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is disposed toward the left side from the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a is disposed above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310. That is, in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, whereas the function display unit connector MFCN By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be placed apart from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, so that electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL can be removed from the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control. It is possible to prevent various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from penetrating through the space separating the main control board 1310 from the MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Furthermore, by placing the main control MPU 1310a away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, it will not affect the main control MPU 1310a. , on the main control board 1310 or in a space separating the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310, it is now possible to attenuate electromagnetic noise that enters via this wiring FCBL. ing. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged such that the right side of its package is spaced apart from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as "first wiring separation distance dimension"). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so the electromagnetic waves that have entered the wiring FCBL This is to prevent noise from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL through a space having the first wiring separation distance dimension.

Further, as described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is located in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. (or accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the circuit board holder 1200), on the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the circuit board holder 1200. When it is routed downward along the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and after being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. , the wiring FCBL is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and protrudes toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 because it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. It is possible to ensure a large distance between various pins of the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "second wiring separation distance"). This second wiring separation distance dimension is larger than the first wiring separation distance dimension. As a result, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered this wiring FCBL enters various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from this wiring FCBL through a space having the second wiring distance dimension. This can be prevented. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL, but the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to connect directly. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay board 1710 with an element that can reduce or eliminate the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL (that is, a plurality of elements that transmit control signals from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic noise for each wiring FCBL). Thereby, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise entering via the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Examples of such elements include resistors, filter circuits, and the like. From the observation results of the waveform of electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs), and as a filter circuit, it is necessary to handle signals with a waveform width larger than this. It is designed to be passed through.

In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., such elements include EMC countermeasure components (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). When using coils and beads, electrical If a capacitor is used, the capacitors are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the plurality of wirings FCBL. In addition, if a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the multiple wiring FCBLs, or a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted. It is also possible to insert circuits configured by combining the above.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 70, 71, and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 111) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. Equipped with a box. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 72, 73, and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at approximately the center. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the upper surface and a lower fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the lower surface. This effect display device 1600 has a liquid crystal screen facing forward, and two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the upper inner circumferential surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, are installed in the back box. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally rearward of 3010, move the lower fixing piece 1602 side forward and inserting the lower fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and the locking mechanism 3020 is seen from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right at .

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79 and the like. FIG. 76(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 76(b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board in which the game panel is made opaque and the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. 78 is an enlarged front view of the distribution passage group at the upper right corner in FIG. 77, and FIG. 79 is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit at the lower right corner in FIG. 77.

The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and its front end protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel board 1110, and a portion of its rear end extends through the opening 1110 of the panel board 1110. It penetrates through and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and capable of accepting game balls B that have been hit into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are used for gaming. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate part 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. , to the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. The game ball B is provided with a grand prize opening 2005 that can accept the game balls B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls B.

A plurality of (four in this case) general winning holes 2001 are arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the gaming area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. ing. The left general winning hole 2001 is located at the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the right general winning hole 2001 is located near the right end of the gaming area 5a, lower than the center in the vertical direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 located at the lowermost end at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate part 2003 is arranged above the general winning opening 2001 on the right side and approximately at the center in the vertical direction. The second starting port 2004 is located below the general winning port 2001 on the right side and at a higher position than the first starting port 2002. The big prize opening 2005 is arranged on the left side of the second starting opening 2004 at a slightly lower height than the first starting opening 2002.

The table unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 which is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and one general prize winning port 2001, and A side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has two general winning openings 2001, and a starting opening unit that is located at the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. Attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right side in front view of 2100 and has one general winning opening 2001, second starting opening 2004, and big winning opening 2005, and above the starting opening unit 2100 and side unit 2200. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 is attached slightly above the substantially center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is located in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that can accept only one game ball B, and a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that can accept only one game ball B, and a first starting port 2002 that accepts only one game ball B at the lower left of the first starting port 2002. It has one general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward with a possible width. The entire starting port unit 2100 is formed transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 74, etc.).

The starting port unit 2100 includes a first starting port sensor 2101 (see FIG. 77, etc.) that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and a panel that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. It is provided with a guide path 2102 (see FIG. 76) that is guided to the rear of the plate 1110 and then discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200).

By attaching the starting opening unit 2100 to the panel board 1110, the general prize opening 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 and is opened upward, so that the first starting opening 2002 is connected to the center which will be described later. It is located directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it will be accepted into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

When the starting port unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, the first starting port 2002 is located directly below the central discharge portion 2503a of the stage 2503 in the center accessory 2500, which will be described later. It is configured so that the game ball B released from 2503a is accepted into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has two general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept game balls B, and a first shelf 2201 that is inclined so that the right end is lower at the upper left of the two general winning openings 2001. , and a second shelf 2202 which is inclined so that the right end is lower at the upper part of the two general prize winning openings 2001. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002.

The side unit 2200 is provided with two general winning ports 2001 at a height between the first starting port 2002 and the general winning port 2001 of the starting port unit 2100. The two general winning holes 2001 are provided facing each other so as to be lined up on the left and right. The left general winning hole 2001 opens toward the upper left, and the right general winning hole 2001 opens toward the right.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the left end of the first shelf 2201 is located near the periphery of the game area 5a, and the game balls B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 are can be guided to the right. This first shelf portion 2201 is inclined so that an extension line of the upper surface passes between the first starting port 2002 and the stage 2503. The second shelf part 2202 is inclined so that the extension line of the upper surface passes through the opening of the general prize opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100.

The side unit 2200 is entirely transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 74, etc.). By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the two general prize openings 2001, the first shelf part 2201, and the second shelf part 2202 are in a state of protruding forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110. . This side unit 2200 can guide the game balls received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver them to the guide path of the back unit 3000. The game ball accepted into the general winning hole 2001 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 111).

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is located to the right of the starting port unit 2100 in the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 from the front. Attacker unit 2400 is formed substantially entirely transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 74, etc.). This attacker unit 2400 includes one of the four general winning holes 2001, a second starting hole 2004, and a big winning hole 2005 (see FIG. 79, etc.).

The outer shape of the attacker unit 2400 when viewed from the front is formed into an L-shape in which the upper end on the right side extends upward from approximately the center in the left-right direction. In this attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward at the upper right corner, the second starting opening 2004 can be opened upward at the lower left of the general winning opening 2001, and the big winning opening 2005 is able to open upward at the lower left of the second starting port 2004.

The attacker unit 2400 has a general prize opening 2001 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a second starting opening 2004 that is slightly larger than the game ball and opens upward, and a big prize opening 2005 that extends in the left and right direction from approximately three times the outer diameter of the game ball. It opens upwards and is five times as wide.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning hole sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B accepted in the general winning hole 2001, a second starting hole sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B accepted in the second starting hole 2004, and a large It is equipped with a big winning hole sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the winning hole 2005 (see FIG. 111 etc.).

The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starting port door 2411 that can open and close the second starting port 2004 and the second starting port door 2411 according to the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate section 2003. The starting hole solenoid 2412, the big winning hole door 2413 that can open and close the big winning hole 2005, and the big winning hole door 2413 are connected to the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 to be drawn by receiving a game ball B. An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is provided.

As shown in FIG. 79, etc., the attacker unit 2400 has an attacker left passage 2421 and an attacker right passage 2422, through which the game ball B can flow downward, on both the left and right sides of the general winning opening 2001 located on the upper right side, and an attacker left passage. A second starting port guide shelf 2423 that slopes downward from directly below the starting port 2421 to the left and has a second starting port 2004 open in the middle; A big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 is inclined to become lower toward the left from a position spaced leftward from the left end of the starting opening guiding shelf 2423, and a big winning opening 2005 is opened in the middle. We are prepared.

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a communication port 2425 that communicates with the attacker right passage 2422 on the right end side of the second starting port guide shelf 2423, and a lower part from the right end side of the second starting port guiding shelf 2423 than the big winning port 2005. From between the attacker right lower passage 2426 extending to the left end of the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 so as to become lower toward the left after extending to the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 and the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424. It includes an intermediate passage 2427 that extends downward from the big prize opening 2005 and communicates with the attacker lower right passage 2426.

Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 extends downward from the lower end of the general prize opening 2001 and partitions the attacker left passage 2421 and the attacker right passage 2422, and also creates a communication opening 2425 between the lower end and the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423. and an inclined part 2429 that is inclined to be positioned to the left as it goes upward from the lower end of the partition part 2428.

The second starting port door 2411 that enables the opening and closing of the second starting port 2004 opened in the second starting port guide shelf 2423 extends back and forth, and is shaped like a plate that extends left and right so that the left end is lower. The left end side is rotatable about an axis extending back and forth. This second starting port door 2411 has its right end side positioned above horizontally and slightly lower than the right end of the opening of the second starting port 2004, so that game balls can be directed to the second starting port 2004. B can be disabled and the second starting port 2004 can be closed. When the second starting port 2004 is closed, the second starting port door 2411 guides the game ball B that has passed through the second starting port guiding shelf 2423 from the upstream side (right side) to the left. be able to.

The second starting port door 2411 is rotated counterclockwise from the state where the second starting port 2004 is closed so that the right end side moves upward with the left end side as the center. The second starting port 2004 can be opened to allow the game ball B to be received into the second starting port 2004. When the second starting port 2004 is opened by raising the right end side of the second starting port door 2411, the second starting port door 2411 is raised from the second starting port guiding shelf 2423. Thus, the path of the game ball B rolling on the second starting port guide shelf 2423 is obstructed, and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is ON (when energized). Let it open.

The grand prize opening door 2413 that enables the opening and closing of the grand prize opening 2005 opened in the grand prize opening guiding shelf 2424 extends back and forth, and is formed in a plate shape that extends from side to side so that the left end is lower. By moving forward and backward, the large prize opening 2005 that opens upward can be opened and closed. The big winning opening door 2413 can close the big winning opening 2005 by moving forward, and when the big winning opening 2005 is closed, the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 is distributed from the upstream side (right side). The game ball B that has been thrown can be guided to the left. In addition, the big winning opening door 2413 opens the big winning opening 2005 by moving backward by the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414, and circulates the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 and the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 of the center accessory 2500. The winning game ball B can be accepted into the big prize opening 2005. This big winning hole door 2413 closes the big winning hole 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the big winning hole 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

Although not shown, the attacker unit 2400 has a first receiving port 2007 that can be opened upwardly inside the big prize opening 2005, and a first receiving port 2007 that can be opened upwardly on the right side of the first receiving port 2007. A second receiving port 2008 that is always open is arranged. The attacker unit 2400 also includes a first receiving port sensor 2404 that detects the game ball B received in the first receiving port 2007, and a second receiving port sensor 2404 that detects the game ball B received in the second receiving port 2008. 2405, and a sorting piece 2415 that opens and closes the first receiving port 2007 (distributes the game balls B received in the grand prize opening 2005 and circulating inside to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008). and a distribution solenoid 2416 that opens and closes the distribution piece 2415 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. , is equipped with. The sorting piece 2415 is formed into a plate shape that extends back and forth inside the big prize opening 2005 and also extends left and right with the right end being lower, and opens upward by moving back and forth. The first receiving opening 2007 (V winning opening) can be opened and closed. The sorting piece 2415 closes the first receiving port 2007 by moving forward, guides the game ball B received in the big winning port 2005 to the right, and opens the second receiving port which is always open upward. 2008 can be accepted. In addition, the sorting piece 2415 opens the first receiving port 2007 by moving backward by driving the sorting solenoid 2416, and the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 is transferred to the first receiving port 2007 with a high probability. can be accepted. This distribution piece 2415 closes the first reception port 2007 when the distribution solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the first reception port 2007 when the distribution solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). let In other words, the sorting piece 2415 can sort the game balls B accepted into the grand prize opening 2005 so that they can be accepted into either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008.

This attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, and the general prize opening 2001 is located below (directly below) the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate section 2003 in the center accessory 2500, which will be described later. The second starting port 2004 is located at a height between the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. 2005 is located below the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. Moreover, in the state attached to the panel board 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N exist between the lower end of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the upper end (general prize opening 2001).

Next, the flow of game balls B in the attacker unit 2400 will be explained. When assembled on the game board 5, since the general prize opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is released from the stage 2503. Even if released, it will not be accepted into the general prize opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flown down the right side of the center accessory 2500 (distribution passage group 2520) may be accepted into the general prize opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Downstream of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, an attacker left passage 2421, a general prize opening 2001, and an attacker right passage 2422 are opened side by side from the left, and game balls flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 are opened. B will enter one of them.

When the game ball B supplied above the general winning hole 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is accepted into the general winning hole 2001, after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 2401. , and is discharged downward (above the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B enters the attacker left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 without being accepted into the general winning opening 2001, it falls onto the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423, and falls onto the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423. It flows to the second starting port 2004 side (left side) according to the inclination. When the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411, it flows to the left over the second starting port door 2411 and is discharged to the left from the left end of the second starting port guiding shelf 2423. . If the second starting port 2004 is open when the game ball B passes through the second starting port guide shelf 2423, the game ball B will be accepted into the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability.

After the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, it is discharged downward (above the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100. When the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the second starting port 2004, it is released to the left big winning port 2005 side via the second starting port guiding shelf 2423.

Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the left side of the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423, the game ball B released from the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 to the left side is on the big winning opening 2005 side, Or it will flow down to either the intermediate passage 2427 side. When flowing down to the big winning slot 2005 side, if the big winning slot 2005 is closed by the big winning slot door 2413, it will be guided to the left by the big winning slot door 2413, and from the left end of the big winning slot guiding shelf 2424. It is emitted to the left. When the big winning opening door 2413 that closes the big winning opening 2005 is moved back and the big winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball B that has flowed down from the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 to the big winning opening 2005 side, Accepted into the grand prize opening 2005. After the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403, it is discharged downward (above the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

The game ball B that entered the intermediate passage 2427 from the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 and the gaming ball B released to the left from the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 pass through the out opening 1008 to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100. and is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200).

On the other hand, the game ball B supplied above the general winning hole 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is not accepted into the general winning hole 2001 and is placed on the right side of the general winning hole 2001. When the attacker enters the right passage 2422, it comes into contact with the step 1005a of the right rail 1005 and rebounds to the left. In this embodiment, the second starting port guiding shelf 2423 is provided so that the extension line of the second starting port guiding shelf 2423 coincides with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, so that the attacker can enter the right passage 2422. The game ball B that bounced off the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 will fall (distribute) onto the second starting port guide shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425 with a high probability.

When the game ball B that enters the attacker right passage 2422 and contacts the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 bounces upward from the communication port 2425, the partition portion 2428 forming the upper end side of the communication port 2425 Since the inclined portion 2429 is provided at the lower end, the game ball B comes into contact with the inclined portion 2429. Since this inclined part 2429 is inclined so that the upper end is located to the right with respect to the lower end, the game ball B that has come into contact with the inclined part 2429 is reflected toward the downward attacker right lower passage 2426, The attacker will enter the lower right passage 2426. Furthermore, when the game ball B that has come into contact with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 rebounds downward from the communication port 2425, it will enter the attacker's lower right passage 2426.

The game ball B that has entered the attacker's lower right passage 2426 is ejected from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without having a chance to be received by the second starting port 2004 and the big winning port 2005.

The attacker unit 2400 also includes a sub-function display section 2450 above the second starting port 2004. The sub-function display section 2450 has a plurality of (here, six) full-color LEDs. The sub-function display section 2450 is linked with the normal symbol display, the first special symbol display, and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the gate section is controlled by lighting/blinking of the LED, emitted light color, etc. Displays the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B against 2003, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. It is something to do.

Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 includes a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism (see FIG. 111). This magnetic sensor 2470 is for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet.

[5-8d. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is located above the starting port unit 2100 in the gaming area 5a, slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a frame shape, and through the frame, the effect display device 1600 placed behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front. can. Moreover, the center accessory 2500 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, excluding the lower side, protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that the game ball B hit into the game area 5a will not fall within the frame. cannot be infiltrated.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter, and a frame that allows the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 to be released. It is equipped with a warp exit 2502 opening inward, and a stage 2503 capable of releasing the game ball B released from the warp exit 2502 into the gaming area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction.

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the center accessory 2500 is placed at a position directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. 1110) is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the approximately center position in the left and right direction is slightly higher than both left and right sides. This stage 2503 has a portion that is slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the lateral direction (center emitting portion 2503a), and a portion that is the lowest on both left and right sides (side emitting portions 2503b). The game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised part (central discharge part 2503a) at the center in the left and right direction of the stage 2503 is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release part 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The center accessory 2500 includes a gate portion 2003 provided at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction and to the right of the right outer peripheral surface. The gate portion 2003 has a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through it, and is penetrated vertically, and is provided with a gate sensor 2506 that detects the passage of a game ball. The gate portion 2003 is provided with a space between the gate portion 2003 and the frame-shaped outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 such that only one game ball B can pass therethrough.

The center accessory 2500 also includes an upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 that forms part of the upper outer peripheral surface and slopes downwardly toward the right from a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction. , and a distribution passage group 2520, which is provided at the upper right corner and consists of a plurality of passages through which game balls B can circulate. The circulation passage group 2520 extends vertically from near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 to above the gate portion 2003.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the distribution passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, and is provided adjacent to the first distribution passage 2521 and the left side of the first distribution passage 2521. a second circulation passage 2522, and a second circulation passage 2522. The first circulation passage 2521 extends downward from the entrance side at the upper end in an arc shape along the periphery of the gaming area 5a (right rail 1005), and the vicinity of the lower end is bent leftward in a crank shape, and the exit is downward. It is open towards. The outlet at the lower end of the first circulation passage 2521 is located slightly to the right with respect to directly above the gate portion 2003.

The second circulation passage 2522 has an entrance at its upper end that opens to the left at a distance from the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521, and bends to the right near the upper end in a crank shape. It extends downward in an arc shape adjacent to the circulation passage 2521, bends leftward in a crank shape near the lower end, and then bends rightward in a crank shape, so that the outlet is adjacent to the outlet of the first circulation passage 2521 and extends downward. It is open towards. Thereby, the second distribution passage 2522 can attenuate the distribution velocity of the game ball B more than the first distribution passage 2521. In addition, a plurality of protrusions 2523 are provided in the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 at intervals in the distribution direction of the game ball B, so that the game ball B does not come into contact with the protrusion 2523. Therefore, the distribution speed can be suppressed.

When assembled on the game board 5, this center accessory 2500 is located between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) of the front component 1000 on the upstream side of the distribution passage group 2520. , an upstream space 2511 through which game balls B can flow is formed. In addition, in the assembled state on the game board 5, the entrance at the upper end of the first distribution passage 2521 of the distribution passage group 2520 is located directly below the blocking portion 1006, and the first distribution passage 2521 is located on the right rail 1005 (game It extends along the periphery of the region 5a. Furthermore, a gap is formed between the gate portion 2003 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005 (periphery of the gaming area 5a) through which the game ball B can pass.

[5-8e. Flow of game balls through distribution channels for center accessories]
Next, the flow of game balls B through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79 and the like. When assembled on the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N between the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate section 2003, and between the gate section 2003 and the general prize opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400. has been planted. A plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate section 2003 are arranged so that the game balls B that have circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 are on the right side of the gate section 2003 (the gate section 2003 and the right rail 1005). ) has been adjusted so that it can be distributed with high probability. In addition, the plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate section 2003 are arranged so that the game balls B that have circulated through the second distribution passage 2522 will pass through the gate section 2003 with a high probability. It has been adjusted. Furthermore, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate part 2003 have the second highest probability that the game ball B that has circulated through the second distribution passage 2522 will reach the gate part 2003. It is adjusted to flow on the left side of 2003.

On the other hand, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate part 2003 and the general prize opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 indicate that the game ball B that circulated on the right side of the gate part 2003 has a high probability of entering the attacker unit 2400. It is adjusted to enter the attacker right passage 2422. In addition, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate part 2003 and the general winning hole 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 have a high probability that the game balls B that circulated through the gate part 2003 or the left side of the gate part 2003 It is adjusted so that it enters the attacker left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, and it is adjusted so that it is accepted into the general winning opening 2001 with the next highest probability after the attacker left passage 2421.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with such force that the game ball B enters the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 (upstream space portion 2511) of the center accessory 2500, the distribution passage group 2520 Game balls B circulate through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522. To explain in detail, the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). Then, the game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper portion 1006 enters the first circulation passage 2521. Due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the downstream end of the first circulation passage 2521 and the gate part 2003, the game ball B that has entered the first circulation passage 2521 is placed on the right side of the gate part 2003 with a high probability. pass through. Then, the game ball B passing on the right side of the gate part 2003 enters the attacker right passage 2422 with a high probability due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate part 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 will flow through either the second starting port guide shelf 2423 or the attacker lower right passage 2426.

As mentioned above, the game balls B that have circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 do not pass through the gate section 2003 very often, so the normal lottery results that are carried out by the passage of the game balls B through the gate section 2003 are not often drawn. There is a low possibility that a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 is in an open state will be drawn. Therefore, even if the game ball B that has circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 flows through the second starting port guide shelf 2423 via the attacker right passage 2422, the second starting port 2004 is often closed and the second starting port Since the game balls B are not accepted into the opening 2004 very often, there are few opportunities to receive benefits such as the drawing of the second special lottery result or the payout of the game balls B when the game balls B are accepted into the second starting opening 2004. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates through the first distribution passage 2521, the benefits given to the player will be relatively small.

In addition, although the case where the game ball B is hit to the right has been described above, the game ball B is also hit with such force that it jumps over the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 that opens near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. It will enter the first circulation passage 2521, resulting in the same result as above.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upstream space 2511 enters the second circulation passage 2522 and flows through the second circulation passage 2522, there is a space between the downstream end of the second circulation passage 2522 and the gate part 2003. Due to the plurality of installed obstacle nails N, there is a high probability that the object will pass through the gate part 2003, and the normal lottery result will be drawn. The game ball B that has passed through the gate part 2003 enters the attacker left passage 2421 with a high probability due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate part 2003 and the attacker unit 2400, and exits from the attacker left passage 2421. It flows through the second starting port guide shelf 2423.

At this time, since the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003 and the normal lottery result is drawn, if the drawn normal lottery result is a "normal win", the second starting port 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern. Since it is in the open state, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls B are accepted into the second starting port 2004, a second special lottery result is drawn and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates through the second distribution passage 2522, the benefits given to the player will be relatively high (many).

For this reason, since there is a higher possibility that a bonus will be awarded in the second distribution passage 2522, the player should drive the game ball B with a driving force that causes it to enter the upstream space 2511, and The driving strength of the game ball B is adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the gaming area 5a with the driving strength at which the ball B enters the second circulation passage 2522. It is possible to give variation to the driving operation, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and also allows the player to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in playing the game.

In addition, if the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 is a "jackpot" etc. that causes an advantageous gaming state, The grand prize opening 2005 becomes in a state where it can accept the game balls B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and when the game balls B are received in the grand prize opening 2005, many game balls B are paid out. In such an advantageous gaming state (“jackpot gaming state”), if the player is required to adjust the driving force of the game ball B, some players may feel impatient or irritated, and may not be able to play the game. There is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease. However, in this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit to the right and circulates through the first distribution passage 2521, after passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003 and the attacker right passage 2422, it is communicated at the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005. By bouncing toward the opening 2425 and falling onto the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 through the communication opening 2425, the game ball B can be distributed to the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 side (big winning opening 2005 side). Therefore, the game ball B can be accepted into the big prize opening 2005 with an easy driving operation without making delicate adjustments to the driving operation, and the player can enjoy playing in an advantageous gaming state. At the same time, it is possible to add variety to the driving operation of the game ball B according to the game state, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

[5-8f. Another embodiment of distribution passage group for center accessories]
Next, the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 in an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. 80(a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group for center accessories, which is different from FIG. FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of main parts showing the embodiment. FIG. 81(a) is an enlarged view of main parts showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group for a center accessory that is further different from FIG. 80, and FIG. It is an enlarged view of the part. FIG. 82 is an enlarged view of main parts showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group for center accessories that is further different from FIGS. 80 and 81. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 80 and 81, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 80(a), compared to FIG. This is what I did. This flow passage group 2520 can also provide the same effects as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 80(b), the angle of the blocking portion 1006 in the front component 1000 is set so that the game ball B that comes into contact with it is likely to rebound toward the entrance side of the second circulation passage 2522. In addition, the area between the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 and the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is inclined so that the second circulation passage 2522 side (left side) is lower. This is what I did. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the second distribution passage 2522 side, and the adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B when the game ball B enters the second distribution passage 2522 becomes wider. It is possible to easily perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 81(a) differs from the distribution passage group 2520 in FIGS. 78 and 80 in which the entrances of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are opened upward. Then, the upstream sides of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are extended to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective entrances are aligned vertically and directed to the left. It is designed to be opened.

In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the gaming area 5a) constitutes a part of the first circulation passage 2521, and a part of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 constitutes a part of the second circulation passage 2522. It makes up the department. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space 2511 between the upper right peripheral wall 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the gaming area 5a) is from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 to the first circulation This is the length up to the respective entrances of the passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522, and is narrower than the upstream space 2511 shown in FIGS. 78 and 80.

In this embodiment, in order for the game ball B to enter the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, the driving force must be enough to contact the narrow portion of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 on the left side of the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522. Since it is necessary to drive the game ball B with a driving force such that it directly enters the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 that opens toward the left, compared to the embodiments of FIGS. 78 and 80, The adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B becomes narrower. In addition, the game ball B hit into the upstream space 2511 to the left of the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521 and the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 partitions the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522. If the game ball B comes into contact with the left end of the wall (the part between the two entrances), it may deviate from the upstream space 2511 depending on the leftward momentum and angle of the rebounding game ball B. In other words, even if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upstream space 2511, it will not deviate from the upstream space 2511 to the left and enter either the first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be distributed. For this reason, the difficulty level of the driving operation of the game ball B increases, so that the player's motivation for the driving operation of the game ball B can be increased, and the player can be encouraged to drive the game medium. It is possible to make the operation more enjoyable and suppress a decline in interest.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 81(b) is the embodiment shown in FIG. 81(a) in which a branch part 2524 is provided in the middle of the first circulation passage 2521 and communicates with the second circulation passage 2522 in a one-way manner. It is. The branch portion 2524 is provided directly above a portion of the second circulation passage 2522 that extends left and right (upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) and is bent downward from the right end. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the first distribution passage 2521, depending on the driving force (if the driving force is weak), the game ball B may be placed in the second position at the branching part 2524. Since it branches to the distribution passage 2522 side, the difficulty level of distribution of game balls B to the second distribution passage 2522 can be made lower than in the embodiment of FIG. 81(a).

In addition, in order to make the game ball B enter the second distribution passage 2522, it is necessary to hit the game ball B with a weaker driving force than that of the game ball B that enters the first distribution passage 2521, and the first distribution passage 2521 and Since the communicating branch part 2524 is provided above the downwardly bent part of the second circulation passage 2522, the game ball B that enters the second circulation passage 2522 will not be able to reach the downwardly bent part. It does not bounce upward (toward the branching part 2524 side) and does not pass through the branching part 2524 and enter the first circulation passage 2521 side. In other words, the branch portion 2524 communicates from the first circulation passage 2521 to the second circulation passage 2522 in a one-way manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when entering the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 that has a branch part 2524 in the middle and flowing through the first circulation passage 2521, at the part of the branch part 2524, the first circulation passage 2521 side Or, since it branches to either side of the second distribution passage 2522, it is possible to make the player nervous and nervous depending on which side the game ball B branches to at the branching part 2524, and the first distribution passage It is possible to enjoy the flow of game balls B in the passage 2521 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the player hits the game ball B aiming at the second distribution passage 2522, the game ball B enters the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. , at the branching part 2524 of the first distribution passage 2521, there is a possibility that the first distribution passage 2521 branches to the second distribution passage 2522 side. It is possible to make the players excited and enjoy the game, and when the branching part 2524 branches to the second distribution passage 2522 side, mistakes in the player's input operation are covered and the desired second distribution passage 2522 is The game balls B will be distributed, making the players feel like they have won, and preventing the players from losing interest in the game.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 82, the second distribution passage 2522 has a bypass portion 2525 that crosses within the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. Therefore, all the game balls B hit into the upstream space 2511 above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 will flow through the first circulation passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 and circulates through the bypass section 2525, the game ball B crosses within the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player's side Since it is possible to make the distribution of game balls B noticeable, it is possible to make the players think that something good will happen after the game balls B circulate through the bypass section 2525. To allow a person to perform a driving operation of a game ball B aiming at the entrance of a second distribution passage 2522 having a bypass part 2525, to enjoy the driving operation of a game ball B, and to suppress a decrease in interest. I can do it.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86 and the like. FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A locking mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600 is provided. In addition, the back unit 3000 is equipped with a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 provided in the starting hole unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 and the side unit 2200 (Fig. 111 ).

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back first production unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a back second production unit 3200 installed inside the back box 3010 behind the back first production unit 3100. , the back third production unit 3300 which is installed in the back box 3010 behind the back second production unit 3200, and the general part of the starting port unit 2100 and side unit 2200 which are attached to the front of the back second production unit 3200. A back left ball ejection unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning hole 2001 and discharges it downward, and a game that is accepted in the general winning hole 2001, the second starting hole 2004, and the big winning hole 2005 of the attacker unit 2400. A back right ball discharge unit 3040 that receives the ball B and discharges it downward is provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape that is open at the front, and has an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square manner, and a flat frame-like shape that projects rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting part 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the two fixing grooves 3010c of the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b. A notch 3010d is provided near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010, to which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached (see FIGS. 85, 86, etc.).

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a rear view so as to be slidable left and right.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. formed at appropriate positions for mounting each movable performance unit and the like.

Furthermore, the back box 3010 has an insertion opening 3011 that is cut out from the front end so as to be recessed rearward near the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides. The insertion opening 3011 is configured to communicate the space behind the light guide plate 3110 in the back first presentation unit 3100, which will be described later, with the outside of the back box 3010 when assembled on the game board 5. This insertion port 3011 can be formed by inserting stuffing between the rotating decorative bodies 3210 from the side surface of the back box 3010 when transporting the game board 5, so that vibrations caused by transport etc. can cause the back second production unit 3200 to The rotating decorative body 3210 can be prevented from moving. Alternatively, when a problem occurs in the movement of the rotating decorative body 3210 of the second back presentation unit 3200, the problem can be solved by inserting a finger, a tool, etc. through the insertion opening 3011.

[5-9a. Back first production unit]
Next, the back first effect unit 3100 in the back unit will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87(a) is a perspective view of the back first presentation unit of the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is a perspective view of the back first presentation unit of the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 88 is a front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative board in the back first presentation unit. The back first presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 so as to close the opening opened to the front.

The back first production unit 3100 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 3110 that closes the front end opening of the back box 3010, and a plurality of light guide plates that are arranged above the light guide plate 3110 and emit light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3110. A back first upper decorative board 3120 on which LEDs 3121 are mounted, and a back first left side on which a plurality of LEDs 3131 that are arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 3110 and emit light toward the left side of the light guide plate 3110 are mounted. A diffusion lens 3140 is provided between the decorative substrate 3130, the plurality of LEDs 3131 of the back first left decorative substrate 3130, and the left surface of the light guide plate 3110, and diffuses the light from the LEDs 3131 to illuminate the left surface of the light guide plate 3110. It is equipped with.

In addition, the back first production unit 3100 includes an upper base 3151 in the form of a transparent flat plate attached to the upper edge of the front surface of the light guide plate 3110, and an upper base 3151 attached to the rear side of the upper base 3151 to sandwich the light guide plate 3110 and the rear side. A transparent upper rear cover 3152 to which the first upper decorative board 3120 is attached, a transparent flat left base 3153 attached to the front left edge of the light guide plate 3110, and a transparent upper rear cover 3153 attached to the rear side of the left base 3153 a transparent left rear cover 3154 that sandwiches the light guide plate 3110 and has the back first left decorative substrate 3130 and the diffusion lens 3140 attached thereto; and a transparent flat plate attached to the front right edge of the light guide plate 3110. A transparent right rear cover 3156 is attached to the rear side of the right base 3155 and holds the light guide plate 3110 therebetween.

In addition, the back first production unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the upper base 3151, and is attached to the front surface of the back first upper decoration body 3161 on which a relief-like decoration is formed and the left base 3153. , a back first left decorative body 3162 on which a relief-like decoration is formed, a back first right decorative body 3163 attached to the front surface of the right base 3155 and on which a relief-like decoration is formed, and a conductor. A back first lower decorative body 3164 is attached to the left-right center of the front lower edge of the light plate 3110 and has a relief-like decoration formed thereon, and a back first lower decorative body 3164 is attached to the rear side of the back first lower decorative body 3164 and is attached to the front side. It includes a back first lower decorative substrate 3170 on which a plurality of LEDs 3171 capable of emitting light toward are mounted.

The light guide plate 3110 of the back first presentation unit 3100 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a notch 3111 cut upward in a semicircular arc shape at the center of the lower edge in the left-right direction. Although not shown, the light guide plate 3110 includes a first pattern that emits light from the top surface and a second pattern that emits light from the left surface. The first pattern and the second pattern are different patterns from each other. Further, although not shown, the first pattern is formed so that the light emission mode differs depending on which LED 3121 of the plurality of LEDs 3121 of the back first upper decorative board 3120 is emitted.

The LED 3121 and the LED 3131 mounted on the first back upper decorative board 3120 and the first back left decorative board 3130 are full-color LEDs. Further, the back first left decorative board 3130 is divided into three parts in the vertical direction. Since this back first left decorative substrate 3130 is divided into three parts, the diffusion lens 3140 is also divided into three parts in the vertical direction in a corresponding manner. By making the LED 3121 on the back first upper decorative board 3120 emit light, the first pattern on the light guide plate 3110 can be made to emit light, and by making the LED 3131 on the back first left decorative board 3130 emit light, the second pattern on the light guide plate 3110 can be made to emit light. The pattern can be made to emit light.

The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163 are provided with a plating layer having metallic luster. The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163 are formed in a band shape along the upper side, left side, and right side of the light guide plate 3110. There is.

The back first lower decorative body 3164 has a pair of parts extending in an arc in the vertical direction concentrically with the arc of the notch 3111 at the center of the lower edge of the light guide plate 3110, and is open at the upper and lower sides. It is formed approximately in an annular shape. The back first lower decoration body 3164 has a plurality of three-way decorations arranged in an arc shape on the front side. Moreover, the back first lower decorative body 3164 has protrusions extending radially through the respective three-pronged decorative parts. These radiating protrusions extend outwards from the triskelion decoration and are short towards the center. This back first lower decorative body 3164 is a transparent member provided with a vapor deposited layer having a metallic luster of a predetermined color and having translucency. In the back first lower decoration body 3164, when the LED 3171 of the back first lower decoration board 3170 is not emitting light, the decoration on the front side can be seen in good condition from the player side due to the metallic luster vapor deposited layer. .

On the back first lower decorative board 3170, an LED 3171 is mounted at a position behind the three-pronged decoration part of the back first lower decorative body 3164. When the plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decorative board 3170 are made to emit light, the entire back first lower decorative body 3164 can be decorated with light, and the three-way decoration can be decorated with brighter light. The plurality of LEDs 3171 on the back first lower decorative board 3170 are full-color LEDs.

When the back first production unit 3100 is assembled on the game board 5, the light guide plate 3110 extends behind the transparent panel board 1110 and extends substantially in front above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500, and displays the first picture. or a second pattern can be displayed by emitting light. In addition, when the back first production unit 3100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. are located near the upper edge, left edge, and right edge of the game area 5a, respectively.

Further, the back first lower decorative body 3164 is located directly above the out port 1008, and the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 substantially coincides with the position of the first starting port 2002. . This back first lower decoration body 3164 can decorate the outside of the rotary decoration body 3210 located at the lowest specific position among the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210 of the back second presentation unit 3200. Therefore, the back first lower decorative body 3164 can give a special feel (or a premium feeling) to the rotating decorative body 3210 at a specific position.

[5-9b. Back second production unit]
Next, the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 89 to 96 and the like. FIG. 89 is a perspective view of the back second production unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 90 is a perspective view of the back second production unit of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the back second production unit mainly disassembled into each configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the back second production unit mainly disassembled into each configuration and viewed from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 93 is a front view showing the drive mechanism in the back second production unit. 94(a) to 94(d) are explanatory diagrams showing the movements of a plurality of rotating decorations in the back second presentation unit, and FIGS. 95(e) to (g) are explanatory diagrams showing the movement of a plurality of rotating decorations in the back second presentation unit, and FIGS. 95(e) to (g) are illustrations in the back second presentation unit continued from FIG. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a plurality of rotating ornaments. FIG. 96 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs in the back second production unit.

The back second presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is installed in the back box 3010 between the back first presentation unit 3100 and the back third presentation unit 3300. The back second presentation unit 3200 is arranged in a row on a predetermined circumference, and includes a plurality of disc-shaped (here, 12 pieces) rotating decorations 3210 that revolve around the rotation while rotating. Each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 has a shaft portion 3210a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The plurality of rotating decorations 3210 have translucency. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are provided in front of a second back outer decorative body 3228 and a second back inner decorative body 3229, which will be described later.

The plurality of rotating decorations 3210 are composed of a plurality (here, four) of special rotating decorations 3211 and the remaining (here, eight) normal rotating decorations 3212. The special rotating decorations 3211 are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction with a fixed number (two in this case) of normal rotating decorations 3212 in between. In this embodiment, the special rotary decoration body 3211 is decorated with a three-way decoration. The special rotary decoration body 3211 has a tomoe portion in red and other portions in gold with a metallic luster, and has translucency as a whole. The normal rotating decorative body 3212 is decorated with flower petals. The normal rotating decorative body 3212 has petal parts formed in a pink color with a metallic luster, and other bordering parts formed in a white color, and the entire part has translucency.

The back second production unit 3200 includes a unit base 3220 having a rectangular outer shape and a polygonal through hole 3220a in the center, and an annular fixed gear part 3220b with a larger diameter than the through hole 3220a, and a unit base. It is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3220 and penetrates back and forth at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the same circumference, which is larger than the fixed gear part 3220b of the unit base 3220, so that the shaft part 3210a of the rotating decoration body 3210 can rotate. The drive ring 3221 includes a plurality of shaft holes 3221a inserted into the shaft holes 3221a, and a ring gear portion 3221b provided outside the shaft holes 3221a.

In addition, the back second production unit 3200 is attached to the rear surface of the upper right corner of the unit base 3220, and includes a back second drive motor 3222 whose rotating shaft penetrates the unit base 3220 and protrudes forward, and a back second A drive gear 3223 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the drive motor 3222 meshes with the drive gear 3223 and also meshes with the ring gear portion 3221b of the drive ring 3221, so that it can be rotated by the unit base 3220. A transmission gear 3224 in the form of a spur gear is attached to the rotating body gear 3225, which is fixed to the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, and meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220. , is equipped with.

In addition, the back second production unit 3200 is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 and attached to the unit base 3220, and has a through hole 3226a with a square outer shape and a diameter slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the drive ring 3221. The outer base 3226 is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 in the through hole 3226a of the outer base 3226 and is attached to the unit base 3220, and has a circular outer diameter slightly larger than the inner diameter of the drive ring 3221. The inner base 3227 has a polygonal through hole 3227a in the center, and the outer base 3226 is attached to the front surface of the inner base 3227. It is attached to the front surface of the inner base 3227 within the through hole 3228a of the back second outer decoration body 3228, which has a through hole 3228a with a smaller diameter, and the outer shape is the same as that of the inner base 3227. A back second inner decorative body 3229 is circular and has a polygonal through hole 3229a in the center, and the unit base 3220 is inserted into the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229. an annular second inner peripheral decoration body 3230 attached to the back side.

Furthermore, the back second production unit 3200 includes a rotational position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating on its own axis is located at the lowest specific position, and a special display unit that rotates and revolves on its own axis. A special rotation position detection sensor 3232 is provided for detecting that the rotation decoration body 3211 is located at the lowest specific position.

In addition, the back second production unit 3200 is attached to the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 between the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227, and the back second outer decoration 3228 and the back second inner decoration 3229. It is provided with a back second decorative board 3240 on which a plurality of LEDs 3241 are mounted on the front surface. By appropriately causing the LED 3241 of the second back decorative board 3240 to emit light, the rotary decorative body 3210, the second back outer decorative body 3228, and the second back inner decorative body 3229 can be decorated with light.

The unit base 3220 is transparent and formed into a flat plate. The drive ring 3221 has the same number of shaft holes 3221a as the rotary decorative bodies 3210. The inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 is such that trapezoidal parts protruding toward the center are lined up at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The same number of trapezoidal protruding parts as the rotary decorative bodies 3210 (12 in this case) are provided. In this embodiment, 12 trapezoidal protruding parts are provided at an angle of 30 degrees clockwise from the upper end of the circumference.

The drive ring 3221 has a plurality of detection pieces 3221c protruding toward the center from the inner periphery of a portion corresponding to the plurality of shaft holes 3221a. Further, the drive ring 3221 extends further toward the center from the plurality of detection pieces 3221c, which are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a certain number (in this case, two) of the detection pieces 3221c in between. It has a plurality (four in this case) of special detection pieces 3221d. In other words, the drive ring 3221 of this embodiment has the same number (12) of detection pieces 3221c as the rotating decoration 3210, and the same number (4) of special detection pieces 3221d as the special rotation decoration 3211. have. Although not shown, this drive ring 3221 is rotatably supported by a plurality of rollers provided on the unit base 3220.

The outer shape of the outer base 3226 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the unit base 3220. The outer base 3226 is transparent and formed into a flat plate. This outer base 3226 is divided into four parts with a vertical line passing through the center of the through hole 3226a and a horizontal line as boundaries, and each part is attached to the unit base 3220.

The inner base 3227 is formed so that the inner circumferential shape of the polygonal through hole 3227a is the same shape and the same size as the inner circumferential shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220. The inner base 3227 is transparent and formed into a flat plate. This inner base 3227 is divided into four parts along a cross line obtained by rotating a vertical line passing through the center and a horizontal line approximately 20 degrees clockwise, and each part is attached to the unit base 3220. There is. In this embodiment, the divided parts of the inner base 3227, which is divided into four parts, are different from the divided parts of the outer base 3226, so the unit base 3220 The strength and rigidity when the outer base 3226 and inner base 3227 are attached can be improved.

The second back outer decorative body 3228 has the same outer shape and size as the outer base 3226. In the back second outer decorative body 3228, the inner diameter of the through hole 3228a is slightly larger than the same circumference around which the plurality of shaft holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged in a row. The back second outer decoration body 3228 includes a red annular decoration part 3228b provided in an annular shape with a constant width outward from the through hole 3227a, and two upper corners of the four corners outside of the annular decoration part 3228b. It has a corner decoration part 3228c provided in the corner decoration part 3228c. The annular decorative portion 3228b is decorated with stylized plant leaves arranged in a certain pattern in the circumferential direction. The corner decoration portion 3228c is decorated in a manner similar to a Chinese gable. The back second outer decoration body 3228 has a relief-like decoration formed on its surface. This back second outer decoration body 3228 includes a vapor deposited layer that has metallic luster and is translucent. The back second outer decorative body 3228 is divided into four parts like the outer base 3226.

The second back inner decorative body 3229 has a circular outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the same circumference around which the plurality of shaft holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged. The second back inner decorative body 3229 is formed so that the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a is substantially the same shape and the same size as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3227a of the inner base 3227. The back second inner decoration 3229 is a red decoration in which stylized plant leaves are arranged circumferentially in a certain pattern so as to form a pair with the annular decoration part 3228b of the back second outer decoration 3228. is applied. The second back inner decorative body 3229 has a relief-like decoration formed on its surface. This back second inner decorative body 3229 includes a vapor deposited layer that has metallic luster and is translucent. The back second inner decorative body 3229 is divided into four parts like the inner base 3227.

The back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 is formed to have a length that connects the periphery of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 and the peripheral edge of the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 in the front-rear direction, and the unit The inner peripheral side between the base 3220 and the second back inner decoration body 3229 is closed. This back second inner periphery decoration body 3230 includes a vapor deposited layer that has metallic luster and is translucent.

The rotational position detection sensor 3231 is attached to the rear surface of the second back decorative board 3240. This rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the lowest detection piece 3221c among the plurality of detection pieces 3221c of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 93).

The special rotation position detection sensor 3232 is installed between the unit base 3220 and the inner base 3227, and is for detecting the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221. More specifically, the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 is moved by one clockwise direction from the lowest end of the plurality of trapezoidal protruding parts in the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 (rotated by 30 degrees). (see Figure 93).

The plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the front surface of the second back decorative board 3240 are full-color LEDs. The second back decorative substrate 3240 has a rectangular outer shape, and a polygonal through hole 3240a is formed in the center. Further, in the second back decorative substrate 3240, an annular insertion hole 3240b is formed on the outer peripheral side of the through hole 3240a. The second back decorative board 3240 has a portion outside the insertion hole 3240b attached to the outer base 3226, and a portion inside the insertion hole 3240b is attached to the inner base 3227. The second back decorative substrate 3240 is divided into eight parts, corresponding to the respective divisions of the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227, which are each divided into four parts.

Next, the movement of the plurality of rotating decorative objects 3210 in the back second presentation unit 3200 will be explained. First, in the back second presentation unit 3200, the shaft portion 3210a protruding rearward from each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 connects the inner periphery of the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 from the front. through the insertion hole 3240b of the second back decorative substrate 3240, and between the inner circumference of the outer base 3226 and the outer circumference of the inner base 3227, and into the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221. While being inserted, the rear end passes through the shaft hole 3221a and protrudes rearward from the drive ring 3221. A rotary body gear 3225 that meshes with a fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220 is fixed to the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a of the rotary decoration body 3210.

Among the plurality of rotating decorations 3210, the four special rotation decorations 3211 are moved by one position in the counterclockwise direction from the shaft hole 3221a corresponding to the special detection piece 3221d in the drive ring 3221 when viewed from the front. The shaft portion 3210a of the special rotating decorative body 3211 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a. The remaining eight ordinary rotary decorative bodies 3212 have their respective shaft portions 3210a inserted into the remaining shaft holes into which the shaft portions 3210a of the special rotary decorative body 3211 are not inserted.

In the back second production unit 3200 of this embodiment, in a normal state, as shown in FIGS. They are located at both ends in the vertical direction and at both ends in the left and right direction on the circumference. In other words, the four special rotating decorations 3211 are located at 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock, 9 o'clock, and 12 o'clock on the watch, and the remaining eight normal rotation decorations 3212 are They are located at 1 o'clock, 2 o'clock, 4 o'clock, 5 o'clock, 7 o'clock, 8 o'clock, 10 o'clock, and 11 o'clock. In this embodiment, the 6 o'clock position is the specific position of the rotary decorative body 3210.

In this normal state, the rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 detects the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (Fig. 93).

When the back second production unit 3200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. With the exception of , all rotating decorations 3210 can be visually recognized from the front in good condition. In addition, when assembled on the game board 5, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 disposed at the rear can be viewed from the front through the through hole 3229a (the second back inner decoration 3230) of the second back inner decoration 3229. It can be visually recognized in good condition.

In a normal state, the rotary decorative body 3210 located at a specific position at the 6 o'clock position, which is the lowest end, is at the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 in the back first presentation unit 3100. , and the outside is decorated with a back first lower decorative body 3164. Further, the rotary decorative body 3210 at the specific position is located behind the first starting port 2002, and can decorate the rear of the first starting port 2002.

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3223 is rotated clockwise by the second back drive motor 3222, the transmission gear 3224 that meshes with the drive gear 3223, and the ring gear portion 3221b that meshes with the transmission gear 3224. , the drive ring 3221 will rotate in the clockwise direction. When this drive ring 3221 rotates, the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 also moves in the circumferential direction, and the rotating decorative body 3210 also moves in the circumferential direction via the shaft portion 3210a inserted in the shaft hole 3221a. Become.

At this time, since the rotating body gear 3225 fixed to the shaft portion 3210a of the rotating decoration body 3210 is meshed with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, as the shaft portion 3210a moves in the circumferential direction, The rotor gear 3225 rotates about the shaft portion 3210a in the same direction as the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221 (here, clockwise). As a result, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated clockwise by the second back drive motor 3222, the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 rotate clockwise while rotating in the clockwise direction. Become.

In this embodiment, the gear ratio between the fixed gear part 3220b of the unit base 3220 and the rotating body gear 3225 is configured such that when the drive ring 3221 rotates 30 degrees, each rotating decoration body 3210 rotates once. .

As described above, when the drive ring 3221 rotates clockwise, the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 revolves while rotating, and when the normal rotation decoration 3212 is located at a specific position, the rotational decoration The detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 does not detect the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 94(a)).

Then, when the drive ring 3221 further rotates clockwise and the special rotating decoration 3211 approaches a specific position, the normal rotating decoration immediately before the special rotating decoration 3211 with respect to the rotation direction of the driving ring 3221 The special detection piece 3221d corresponding to the shaft hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the body 3212 is inserted approaches the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 (FIGS. 94(b) to (d) and FIG. 95(e) ), (f)).

When the drive ring 3221 further rotates clockwise and the special rotating decorative body 3211 reaches a specific position, the shaft portion 3210a of the special rotating decorative body 3211 corresponds to the shaft hole 3221a of the driving ring 3221 into which it is inserted. The detection piece 3221c is detected by the rotation position detection sensor 3231, and the shaft hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the normal rotation decoration 3212 immediately before the rotation direction of the special rotation decoration 3211 is inserted. The special detection piece 3221d protruding from the corresponding detection piece 3221c is detected by the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 (see FIG. 95(g)). That is, when the special detection piece 3221d is detected by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232, it is detected that the special rotation decoration body 3211 is located at a specific position.

This back second presentation unit 3200 rotates the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 in the counterclockwise direction, contrary to the above, by rotating the back second drive motor 3222 in the opposite direction to the above. It can also be rotated counterclockwise.

Next, the light emitting effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the second back decorative board 3240 in the second back effect unit 3200 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 96 and the like. Each of the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the second back decorative substrate 3240 is a high-intensity, full-color LED. These LEDs 3241 can emit the emitted color toward the player, regardless of the decorative colors of the rotating decoration body 3210, the second back outer decoration body 3228, and the second back inner decoration body 3229 arranged on the front side. can. That is, depending on the emitted light color of the LED 3241, the rotating decoration body 3210, the second back outer decoration body 3228, and the second back inner decoration body 3229 can be decorated with light emission in an appropriate color.

The plurality of LEDs 3241 of the second back decorative board 3240 are 12 LEDs provided at the rear of each rotating decorative body 3210 when the rotating decorative body 3210 is stopped at a specific position (normal state). The rotating decorative body LED group 3250, the 12 intermediate LED groups 3255 provided between each rotating decorative body LED group 3250, and the rear of the corner decorative portion 3228c of the back second outer decorative body 3228. The upper left corner LED group 3256 and the upper right corner LED group 3257 are provided at the lower left corner of the side unit 2200, the lower left corner LED group 3258 is provided at the lower left corner of the side unit 2200, and the starting port unit 2100 and the side It is composed of a winning a prize hole LED group 3259 provided at a rear part of each general winning a prize hole 2001 of the unit 2200.

The 12 rotating decorative LED groups 3250 are arranged such that the rear part of the lowermost specific position is a first rotating decorative LED group 3250a, and in a clockwise direction, a second rotating decorative LED group 3250b, a third rotating decorative LED group 3250b, and a third rotating decorative LED group 3250a. Decorative LED group 3250c, fourth rotating decorative LED group 3250d, fifth rotating decorative LED group 3250e, sixth rotating decorative LED group 3250f, seventh rotating decorative LED group 3250g, eighth rotating decorative LED group 3250h. , a ninth rotating decorative LED group 3250i, a tenth rotating decorative LED group 3250j, an eleventh rotating decorative LED group 3250k, and a twelfth rotating decorative LED group 3250l. In the 12 rotary decoration LED groups 3250, each LED 3241 is capable of emitting light independently.

The 12 rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 each have a radial line passing from the center of revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210 to the center of rotation of the rotating decorative body 3210, and a line passing from the center of revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210 to the center of rotation of the rotating decorative body 3210. It is divided into four groups: a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254. The four LED groups 3251, 2nd LED group 3252, 3rd LED group 3253, and 4th LED group 3254 constituting one rotary decorative body LED group 3250 have LEDs 3241 provided in each of them. It is said that it is possible to emit light independently

The first LED group 3251 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is located on the revolution center side (inside) of the rotation center of the rotating decorative body 3210 and on the counterclockwise revolution direction side of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotating decorative body 3210. positioned. The second LED group 3252 is located on the opposite side (outside) of the rotation center of the rotating decorative body 3210 from the revolution center side with respect to the first LED group 3251. The third LED group 3253 is located on the opposite side (clockwise side) of the radiation passing through the center of rotation of the rotating decorative body 3210 with respect to the first LED group 3251. The fourth LED group 3254 is located on the opposite side (outside) of the rotation center of the rotating decorative body 3210 from the revolution center side with respect to the third LED group 3253.

In the 12 intermediate LED groups 3255, the part adjacent to the lowermost specific position in the clockwise direction is a first intermediate LED group 3255a, and the part adjacent to the lowermost specific position in the clockwise direction is a second intermediate LED group 3255b, Third intermediate LED group 3255c, fourth intermediate LED group 3255d, fifth intermediate LED group 3255e, sixth intermediate LED group 3255f, seventh intermediate LED group 3255g, eighth intermediate LED group 3255h, ninth intermediate LED group 3255i, A tenth intermediate LED group 3255j, an eleventh intermediate LED group 3255k, and a twelfth intermediate LED group 3255l are provided.

In the normal state, the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment emits light from the LEDs 3241 of the rotary decorative body LED group 3250 among the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative board 3240. The rotating decorative body 3210 can be decorated with light. In other words, 12 circular light-emitting decorations arranged on the circumference can be shown to the player. At this time, each rotary decoration body 3210 can be decorated with light emitting light in a different color, or the special rotary decoration body 3211 can be decorated with light emission in a different color from the normal rotary decoration body 3212.

Further, by causing the 12 rotating decorative LED groups 3250 to emit light in order in the circumferential direction, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light rotates in the circumferential direction. At this time, before the next rotary decorative body LED group 3250 is made to emit light, the intermediate LED group 3255 located between the next rotary decorative body LED group 3250 may be made to emit light. As a result, the light emission between the rotating decoration LED groups 3250 is supplemented by the light emission from the intermediate LED group 3255, so that the player can see a smoother turning light emission performance.

In addition, each rotating decoration LED group 3250 is divided into four groups: a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254. After causing the LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 to emit light, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light, and then the LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 adjacent to the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light. When the intermediate LED group 3255 is made to emit light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that turns more smoothly or a light-emitting effect that turns little by little. Then, when the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 are rotating and revolving around their own axis, if the above-mentioned light emitting effect is performed in accordance with the revolving speed of the rotation decorations 3210, the LEDs are provided on the rotation decorations 3210 themselves. The player can see an effect in which the rotating decorative body 3210 appears to be revolving while emitting light.

Furthermore, in each rotating decoration LED group 3250, for example, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, a fourth LED group 3254, a first LED group 3251, etc. By emitting light in this order, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light appears to be rotating in one rotating decoration LED group 3250. As a result, when the rotating decoration body 3210 is stopped in a normal state, if the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light in order, It is possible to give the player the illusion that the rotating decorative body 3210 is rotating (rotating) without revolving.

In addition, in each of the rotary decoration LED groups 3250, for example, if the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light, then the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, the outer side from the center It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that moves and spreads out. Alternatively, if the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light after the second LED group 3252 and fourth LED group 3254 emit light, the player is shown a light emission effect that converges from the outside to the center. be able to.

Further, by simultaneously emitting light from the respective LEDs 3241 of the rotary decoration LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255, the annular light-emitting decoration can be shown to the player. At this time, by increasing the brightness of the light-emitting decoration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize (make it difficult to see) the shape of the rotating decoration 3210 and the like. As a result, for example, the rotating decoration 3210 is made to be difficult to see by increasing the brightness so that it emits light in an annular shape, and the rotating decoration 3210 is rotated and revolved to change the position of the special rotating decoration 3211, Thereafter, by lowering the brightness or turning off the light, the rotating decorative object 3210 can be made more visible, allowing the player to see an effect in which the rotating decorative object 3210 appears to be moving before he or she knows it.

As described above, according to the second back effect unit 3200 of this embodiment, various movable effects can be performed by the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, and various light emitting effects can be performed by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the second back decorative board 3240. Can perform. In addition, by appropriately combining these movable effects and light emitting effects, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the players, thereby making it difficult for the players to get bored.

[5-9c. Back third production unit]
Next, the back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101 and the like. FIG. 97 is a perspective view of the back third production unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the back third production unit of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the back third production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the back third production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 101 is a front view showing the drive mechanism and decorative board in the back third production unit in a state where the left lateral ring decoration and the right lateral ring decoration have been moved to the appearance position. The back third production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is installed inside the back box 3010 behind the back second production unit 3200.

The back third production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is installed in the back box 3010 and includes a square frame-shaped unit base 3301, an upper unit 3310 provided at the upper part of the front of the unit base 3301, and a unit base 3301. a lower unit 3330 provided at the lower front of the unit base 3301, a left unit 3350 provided at the left of the front of the unit base 3301, and a right unit 3370 provided at the right of the front of the unit base 3301. It is equipped with.

The upper unit 3310 of the back third production unit 3300 includes an upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 that is attached to the upper part of the unit base 3301 near the center in the left-right direction so that it can be opened and closed, and an upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 that is attached to the rear side of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311. an upper vertical ring decorative board 3315, a rear third upper drive motor 3320, which is attached to the upper right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301 and whose rotating shaft protrudes to the rear of the unit base 3301; A driving gear 3321 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3320, a rotating link member 3322 that rotates due to the rotation of the driving gear 3321 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotating link member 3322. A slide link member 3323 that slides in the left-right direction to open and close the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is provided.

The upper unit 3310 also includes an upper detection sensor 3324 that detects the open/closed position of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a part of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 from the front side. The front cover 3325, the gear cover 3326 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3321 from behind, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 urge the slide link member 3323 in the closing direction. An upper spring 3327 is provided.

The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 includes a first decorative body 3312, which is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end side extends back and forth, and a right side of the base end side of the first decorative body 3312. and a second decorative body 3313, which is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end side extends back and forth. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are formed symmetrically with respect to a vertical line, except for a part. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend in a short straight line from the base end side, and are approximately semicircular so that the extension line of the straight part from the tip faces inside the belly of the chord. After extending in a direction away from the proximal end, the chord is formed into a wave shape that further extends in a direction away from the proximal end in an approximately 1/2 semicircular arc shape with the antinode of the chord pointing in the same direction.

The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend with a substantially constant width from the base end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 have three large diameter decorative parts 3311a with large diameters and six small diameter decorative parts 3311b with small diameters along the extending direction.

The first decorative body 3312 has a shaft hole 3312a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3313 side around the shaft hole 3312a. A first gear portion 3312b, a link piece 3312c protruding from the base end side to the side opposite to the distal end side, and an elongated link slit 3312d passing through the link piece 3312c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. It has . A transmission pin 3323b of a slide link member 3323, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3312d.

The second decorative body 3313 has a shaft hole 3313a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3312 side around the shaft hole 3313a. It also has a second gear part 3313b that meshes with the first gear part 3312b. When the first decorative body 3312 is rotated, the second decorative body 3313 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3312 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3312b and the second gear portion 3313b. Thereby, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is movable such that the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are opened and closed on the distal end side with the base end as the center.

The upper vertical ring decorative board 3315 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313, and connects the first LED 3316 to the rear of the large-diameter decorative portion 3311a and the rear of the small-diameter decorative portion 3311b. A second LED 3317 is mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3316 is a full-color LED, and the second LED 3317 is a single-color LED.

The back third upper drive motor 3320 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotation link member 3322 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the left side of the back third upper drive motor 3320 at the same height as the rotation axis of the back third upper drive motor 3320 . The rotating link member 3322 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3322a that meshes with the drive gear 3321, and a crank pin 3322b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from an eccentric position. A crank pin 3322b of the rotating link member 3322 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3323a of a slide link member 3323, which will be described later.

The slide link member 3323 has its base end located near the rear third upper drive motor 3320, and its distal end located at the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction (a portion where the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is rotatably supported). ), and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the left and right directions. The slide link member 3323 is provided above the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322. The slide link member 3323 has a transmission slit 3323a that extends vertically on the base end side and into which the crank pin 3322b of the rotating link member 3322 is slidably inserted, and a transmission slit 3323a that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3323b that is slidably inserted into the link slit 3312d of the decorative body 3312, and a detection piece 3323c that is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324 on the base end side.

The transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 is located to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322, and its lower end is located below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322 and is directed toward the tip side. It's bent like that. Moreover, the slide link member 3323 has a hook portion 3323d to which one end side (left end side) of the upper spring 3327 is hooked. The slide link member 3323 is always biased to the right by the upper spring 3327 hooked to the hook portion 3323d.

In the upper unit 3310, in a normal state, the slide link member 3323 is located at the end of movement to the right, and the tips of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are farthest from each other, and the upper vertical ring The decorative body 3311 is in the most open standby position. When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are each located near the upper edge of the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Further, in a normal state, the crank pin 3322b of the rotation link member 3322 is located at a bent portion of the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3323c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324.

In this normal state, the respective tip ends of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 are away from the vertical line passing through the center of rotation of each, and therefore, due to the gravity applied to each, A rotational moment is acting that causes the respective tip ends to approach each other, and this rotational moment causes the slide link member 3323 to move to the left via the link slit 3312d of the first decorative body 3312 and the transmission pin 3323b of the slide link member 3323. There is a force acting to move it in that direction. This force to move the slide link member 3323 to the left causes a force to move the crank pin 3322b to the left through the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323.

In a normal state, since the crank pin 3322b is located below the center of revolution (rotation center of the rotating link member 3322), the crank pin 3322b is rotated clockwise so that it moves downward and to the left. However, since the crank pin 3322b is located at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crank pin 3322b cannot revolve any further in the clockwise direction. There isn't. In other words, in a normal state, even if a force is applied from the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 side, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 does not close (move to the appearance position side) and remains open at the standby position. The state is locked, and the load from the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 side to the back third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

In this normal state, when the third rear upper drive motor 3320 rotates the rotary link member 3322 counterclockwise via the drive gear 3321, the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 moves up inside the transmission slit 3323a. The slide link member 3323 slides to the left against the urging force of the upper spring 3327. When this slide link member 3323 moves to the left, the first decorative body 3312 is moved counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3312a through the link slit 3312d by the transmission pin 3323b at the tip so that its tip side moves downward. At the same time, the second decorative body 3313 rotates clockwise around the shaft hole 3313a due to the second gear portion 3313b meshing with the first gear portion 3312b. That is, the tips of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are rotated so that they approach each other (so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is closed).

Further, when the slide link member 3323 slides to the left, the detection piece 3323c also moves to the left, so the upper detection sensor 3324 enters a non-detection state.

Then, as the crank pin 3322b of the rotating link member 3322 revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the crank pin 3322b slides upward and then downward within the transmission slit 3323a, and the crank pin 3322b moves in the normal direction. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the state and is located near the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a (below the center of revolution), the drive of the back third upper drive motor 3320 stops. In this state, the tips of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are in an emerging position where the tips of each of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are close to each other so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is closed. This appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are each rotated by 50 degrees from the standby position.

In this appearance position, the biasing force of the upper spring 3327 acts to move the slide link member 3323 to the right, so the crank pin 3322b is transmitted through the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323. A force is acting to move it to the right. In this appearance position, since the crank pin 3322b is located below the center of revolution (rotation center of the rotating link member 3322), the crank pin 3322b is moved downward and to the right in a counterclockwise direction. However, since the crank pin 3322b is located at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crank pin 3322b cannot revolve any further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crank pin 3322b There's nothing to do. In other words, in the state of the appearance position, even if force from the upper spring 3327 etc. acts, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 does not open (move to the standby position side) and remains closed. , and the load from the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 side to the back third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

In this embodiment, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 do not rotate until their respective tips touch each other, and are rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stops at (appearance position). When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 (first decoration 3312 and second decoration 3313) is placed within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. Note that when moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third upper drive motor 3320 is operated as described above until the detection piece 3323c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324. can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

In this manner, in the upper unit 3310, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 can be opened and closed between the open standby position and the closed appearance position by the back third upper drive motor 3320.

In addition, in this embodiment, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320 using a constant current drive method, the drive gear 3321 is rotated with high torque, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is moved between the standby position and the appearance position. It can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The lower unit 3330 of the back third production unit 3300 includes a lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 that is attached to be openable and closable near the center in the left and right direction at the lower part of the unit base 3301, and a lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 that is attached to the rear side of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331. a lower vertical ring decorative board 3335, a rear third lower drive motor 3340, which is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301 and whose rotating shaft protrudes to the rear of the unit base 3301; A driving gear 3341 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3340, a rotating link member 3342 that rotates due to the rotation of the driving gear 3341 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotating link member 3342. A slide link member 3343 that slides in the left-right direction to open and close the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is provided.

The lower unit 3330 also includes a lower detection sensor 3344 that detects the open/closed position of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a part of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 from the front side. The front cover 3345, the gear cover 3346 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3341 from behind, and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 urge the slide link member 3343 in the closing direction. A lower spring 3347 is provided.

The lower vertical ring decoration 3331 includes a first decoration 3332, which is attached to the unit base 3301 so that its base end can rotate around an axis extending back and forth, and a left side of the base end of the first decoration 3332. and a second decorative body 3333 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth on the base end side. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are formed symmetrically with respect to a vertical line, except for a part. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend in a short straight line from the base end side, and are approximately semicircular so that the extension line of the straight part from the tip faces inside the belly of the chord. After extending in a direction away from the proximal end, the chord is formed into a wave shape that further extends in a direction away from the proximal end in an approximately 1/2 semicircular arc shape with the antinode of the chord pointing in the same direction.

The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend with a substantially constant width from the base end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 have three large diameter decorative parts 3331a with large diameters and six small diameter decorative parts 3331b with small diameters along the extending direction.

The first decorative body 3332 has a shaft hole 3332a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3333 side around the shaft hole 3332a. A first gear portion 3332b, a link piece 3332c protruding from the base end side to the side opposite to the distal end side, and an elongated link slit 3332d passing through the link piece 3332c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. It has . A transmission pin 3343b of a slide link member 3343, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3332d.

The second decorative body 3333 has a shaft hole 3333a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3332 side around the shaft hole 3333a. It also has a second gear part 3333b that meshes with the first gear part 3332b. When the first decorative body 3332 is rotated, the second decorative body 3333 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3332 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3332b and the second gear portion 3333b. Thereby, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is movable such that the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are opened and closed on the distal end side with the base end as the center.

The lower vertical ring decorative board 3335 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333, and is connected to the first LED 3336 at the rear of the large-diameter decorative portion 3331a and the rear of the small-diameter decorative portion 3331b. A second LED 3337 is mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3336 is a full-color LED, and the second LED 3337 is a single-color LED.

The back third lower drive motor 3340 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotation link member 3342 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the right side of the back third lower drive motor 3340 at the same height as the rotation axis of the back third lower drive motor 3340 . The rotating link member 3342 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3342a that meshes with the drive gear 3341, and a crank pin 3342b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from an eccentric position. A crank pin 3342b of the rotating link member 3342 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3343a of a slide link member 3343, which will be described later.

The slide link member 3343 has its base end located near the back third lower drive motor 3340, and its distal end located at the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction (a portion where the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is rotatably supported). ), and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the left and right directions. The slide link member 3343 is provided below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342. The slide link member 3343 has a transmission slit 3343a that extends vertically on the base end side and into which the crank pin 3342b of the rotating link member 3342 is slidably inserted, and a transmission slit 3343a that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3343b that is slidably inserted into a link slit 3332d of the decorative body 3332, and a detection piece 3343c that is detected by a lower detection sensor 3344 on the base end side.

The transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 is located to the left of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342, and its upper end is located above the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342 and extends toward the tip side. It's bent like that. Moreover, the slide link member 3343 has a hook portion 3343d to which one end side (left end side) of the lower spring 3347 is hooked. The slide link member 3343 is always biased to the left by a lower spring 3347 hooked to the hook portion 3343d.

In the lower unit 3330, in a normal state, the slide link member 3343 is located at the end of movement to the left, and the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are farthest from each other and the lower vertical ring The decorative body 3331 is in the most open standby position. When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are each located near the lower edge within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Further, in a normal state, the crank pin 3342b of the rotating link member 3342 is located at a bent portion of the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343. Furthermore, in a normal state, the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344.

In this normal state, the respective tip ends of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are away from the vertical line passing through their respective centers of rotation, and therefore, due to the gravity applied to each, A rotational moment is acting that causes the respective tip ends to approach each other, and this rotational moment causes the slide link member 3343 to move to the right via the link slit 3332d of the first decorative body 3332 and the transmission pin 3343b of the slide link member 3343. There is a force acting to move it in that direction. This force to move the slide link member 3343 to the right acts on the crank pin 3342b via the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 to move the crank pin 3342b to the right.

In a normal state, since the crank pin 3342b is located above the center of revolution (rotation center of the rotating link member 3342), the crank pin 3342b is rotated clockwise so that it moves upward and to the right. However, since the crank pin 3342b is located at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot revolve any further in the clockwise direction, and the crank pin 3342b cannot revolve in the clockwise direction. There isn't. In other words, in a normal state, even if a force is applied from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 side, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 does not open further and is locked in the standby position. The load from the ring decoration body 3331 side to the back third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3342 is rotated counterclockwise by the back third lower drive motor 3340 via the drive gear 3341, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 moves down inside the transmission slit 3343a. The slide link member 3343 slides to the right against the urging force of the lower spring 3347. When the slide link member 3343 moves to the right, the first decorative body 3332 is rotated counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3332a through the link slit 3332d by the transmission pin 3343b at the tip so that its tip side moves upward. At the same time, the second decorative body 3333 rotates clockwise around the shaft hole 3333a due to the second gear portion 3333b meshing with the first gear portion 3332b. That is, the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are rotated so that they approach each other (so that the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is closed).

Further, when the slide link member 3343 slides to the right, the detection piece 3343c also moves to the right, so the lower detection sensor 3344 enters a non-detection state.

Then, as the crank pin 3342b of the rotating link member 3342 revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the crank pin 3342b slides downward and then upward within the transmission slit 3343a, and the crank pin 3342b moves in the normal direction. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the state and is located near the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a (above the center of revolution), the drive of the back third lower drive motor 3340 stops. In this state, the respective tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are in an emerging position in which the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are close to each other so that the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is closed. This appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are each rotated by 50 degrees from the standby position.

In this appearance position, the biasing force of the lower spring 3347 acts to move the slide link member 3343 to the left, so the crank pin 3342b is applied via the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343. A force is acting to move it to the left. In this appearance position, the crank pin 3342b is located above the center of revolution (rotation center of the rotating link member 3342), so the crank pin 3342b is moved upward and to the left in a counterclockwise direction. However, since the crank pin 3342b is located at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot revolve any further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crank pin 3342b There's nothing to do. In other words, in the appearance position, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 does not open (move toward the standby position) even if a force from the lower spring 3347 etc. acts, and remains closed in the appearance position. The load from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 side to the third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

In this embodiment, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 do not rotate until their respective tips touch each other, and are rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stops at (appearance position). When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 (first decorative body 3332 and second decorative body 3333) is placed within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. Note that when moving the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third lower drive motor 3340 is operated as described above until the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344. can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

In this manner, in the lower unit 3330, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 can be opened and closed between the open standby position state and the closed appearance position state by the back third lower drive motor 3340.

In addition, in this embodiment, by driving the back third lower drive motor 3340 using a constant current drive method, the drive gear 3341 is rotated with high torque, and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is moved between the standby position and the appearance position. It can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The left unit 3350 of the back third production unit 3300 includes a left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 that is attached to the left side of the unit base 3301 so as to be openable and closable near the center in the vertical direction, and a left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 that is attached to the rear side of the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351. The attached left horizontal ring decorative board 3355, the back third left drive motor 3360 attached to the upper left corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301 and whose rotating shaft protrudes to the rear of the unit base 3301, and the back third left drive motor 3360 A drive gear 3361 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the left drive motor 3360, a rotary link member 3362 that rotates with the rotation of the drive gear 3361 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotary link member 3362. A slide link member 3363 that slides vertically to open and close the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 by rotation of the ring member 3363 is provided.

The left unit 3350 also includes a left detection sensor 3364 that detects the open/closed position of the left lateral ring decoration 3351, and a left detection sensor 3364 that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a part of the left lateral ring decoration 3351 from the front side. and a gear cover 3366 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3361 from behind.

The left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 includes a first decorative body 3352 which is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end side extends back and forth, and an upper side of the base end side of the first decorative body 3352. and a second decorative body 3353 which is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end side extends back and forth. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal line, except for a part. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend in a short straight line from the base end side, and are approximately semicircular so that the extension line of the straight part from the tip faces inside the belly of the chord. After extending in a direction away from the proximal end, the chord is formed into a wave shape that further extends in a direction away from the proximal end in an approximately 1/2 semicircular arc shape with the antinode of the chord pointing in the same direction.

The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend with a substantially constant width from the base end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 have three large diameter decorative parts 3351a with large diameters and six small diameter decorative parts 3351b with small diameters along the extending direction.

The first decorative body 3352 has a shaft hole 3352a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3353 side around the shaft hole 3352a. A first gear portion 3352b, a link piece 3352c protruding from the base end side to the side opposite to the distal end side, and an elongated link slit 3352d passing through the link piece 3352c and extending toward the shaft hole 3352a. It has . A transmission pin 3363b of a slide link member 3363, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3352d.

The second decorative body 3353 has a shaft hole 3353a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3352 side around the shaft hole 3353a. It also has a second gear part 3353b that meshes with the first gear part 3352b. When the first decorative body 3352 is rotated, the second decorative body 3353 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3352 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3352b and the second gear portion 3353b. Thereby, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is movable such that the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are opened and closed on the distal end side with the base end as the center.

The left horizontal ring decorative board 3355 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, and is connected to the first LED 3356 at the rear of the large-diameter decorative portion 3351a and to the rear of the small-diameter decorative portion 3351b. A second LED 3357 is mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3356 is a full-color LED, and the second LED 3357 is a single-color LED.

The back third left drive motor 3360 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotation link member 3362 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position below the back third left drive motor 3360 and on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the back third left drive motor 3360. The rotating link member 3362 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3362a that meshes with the drive gear 3361, and a crank pin 3362b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from an eccentric position. A crank pin 3362b of the rotating link member 3362 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3363a of a slide link member 3363, which will be described later.

The slide link member 3363 has its base end located near the back third left drive motor 3360, and its distal end located at the vertical center of the unit base 3301 (the part where the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 is rotatably supported). ), and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3363 is provided to the left of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362. The slide link member 3363 has a transmission slit 3363a extending left and right on the base end side and into which the crank pin 3362b of the rotating link member 3362 is slidably inserted, and a transmission slit 3363a that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3363b that is slidably inserted into the link slit 3352d of the decorative body 3352, and a detection piece 3363c that is detected by the left detection sensor 3364 on the base end side.

The transmission slit 3363a of the slide link member 3363 is located below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362, and its right end is located to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362, and is directed toward the tip side. It's bent like that.

In the left unit 3350, in a normal state, the slide link member 3363 is located at the end of upward movement, and the tips of the first decoration body 3352 and the second decoration body 3353 are farthest apart from each other and the left side ring The decorative body 3351 is in the most open standby position. When the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are each located near the left edge within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Further, in a normal state, the crank pin 3362b of the rotating link member 3362 is located at the right end of the transmission slit 3363a in the slide link member 3363. Furthermore, in a normal state, the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364.

In this normal state, the respective tip ends of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 are close to the vertical line passing through their respective centers of rotation, so that the center of gravity is lower than the center of rotation. It is located on the right. Therefore, on the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, a rotational moment that attempts to rotate them in the clockwise direction acts on each of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, but the first gear portion 3352b of the first decorative body 3352 and the second Since the second gear portion 3353b of the second decorative body 3353 is meshed with each other, the rotation moments applied to each are canceled out, and the state of the standby position is maintained. As a result, almost no force is applied from the left side ring decoration body 3351 side through the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b to slide the slide link member 3323 in the vertical direction, and the left side ring decoration There is almost no load applied to the back third left drive motor 3360 from the body 3351 side.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3362 is rotated counterclockwise by the back third left drive motor 3360 via the drive gear 3361, the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 moves to the left inside the transmission slit 3363a. The slide link member 3363 slides downward. When the slide link member 3363 moves downward, the first decorative body 3352 is moved in a counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3352a through the link slit 3352d by the transmission pin 3363b at the tip so that the tip side moves upward. At the same time, the second decorative body 3353 is rotated clockwise about the shaft hole 3353a by the second gear part 3353b meshing with the first gear part 3352b. That is, the tips of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are rotated so that they approach each other (so that the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 is closed).

Further, as the slide link member 3363 slides downward, the detection piece 3363c also moves downward together, so that the left detection sensor 3364 enters a non-detection state.

Then, as the crank pin 3362b of the rotating link member 3362 revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the crank pin 3362b slides to the left and then to the right in the transmission slit 3363a, and the crank pin 3362b When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the normal state and is located near the right end of the transmission slit 3363a (to the right of the center of revolution), the drive of the back third left drive motor 3360 stops. In this state, the respective tips of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are in an emerging position in which the tips of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are close to each other so that the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is closed. This appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are each rotated by 50 degrees from the standby position.

In this appearance position, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 are in a state extending rightward from their respective rotation centers, so that the first decorative body 3352 A rotational moment that attempts to rotate clockwise will act on the second decorative body 3353 and the first gear portion 3352b of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353. Since the second gear portion 3353b meshes with the second gear portion 3353b, the rotational moment applied to each portion is canceled out, and the state of the appearance position is maintained. As a result, almost no force is applied from the left side ring decoration body 3351 side through the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b to slide the slide link member 3323 in the vertical direction, and the left side ring decoration There is almost no load applied to the back third left drive motor 3360 from the body 3351 side.

In this embodiment, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 do not rotate until their respective tips touch each other, and are rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stops at (appearance position). When the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 (first decorative body 3352 and second decorative body 3353) is placed within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. Note that when moving the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third left drive motor 3360 is operated as described above until the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364. can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

In this manner, in the left unit 3350, the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 can be opened and closed between the open standby position and the closed appearance position by the back third upper drive motor 3320.

In addition, in this embodiment, by driving the back third left drive motor 3360 using a constant current drive method, the drive gear 3361 is rotated with high torque, and the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 is moved between the standby position and the appearance position. It can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The right unit 3370 of the back third production unit 3300 includes a right lateral ring decoration 3371 that is attached to be openable and closable near the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the unit base 3301, and a right lateral ring decoration 3371 on the rear side of the right lateral ring decoration 3371. The attached right horizontal ring decorative board 3375, the back third right drive motor 3380 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301 and whose rotating shaft protrudes to the rear of the unit base 3301, and the back third right drive motor 3380 A drive gear 3381 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the right drive motor 3380, a rotary link member 3382 that rotates with the rotation of the drive gear 3381 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotary link member 3382. A slide link member 3383 that slides vertically to open and close the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 when rotated is provided.

The right unit 3370 also includes a right detection sensor 3384 that detects the open/closed position of the right lateral ring decoration 3371, and a right detection sensor 3384 that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a part of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 from the front side. and a gear cover 3386 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3381 from behind.

The right lateral ring decorative body 3371 includes a first decorative body 3372 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 around an axis whose base end side extends back and forth, and an upper side of the base end side of the first decorative body 3372. and a second decorative body 3373 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth on the base end side. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal line, except for a part. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend in a short straight line from the base end side, and are approximately semicircular so that the extension line of the straight part from the tip faces inside the belly of the chord. After extending in a direction away from the proximal end, the chord is formed into a wave shape that further extends in a direction away from the proximal end in an approximately 1/2 semicircular arc shape with the antinode of the chord pointing in the same direction.

The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend with a substantially constant width from the base end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 have three large diameter decorative parts 3371a with large diameters and six small diameter decorative parts 3371b with small diameters along the extending direction.

The first decorative body 3372 has a shaft hole 3372a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3373 side around the shaft hole 3372a. A first gear portion 3372b, a link piece 3372c protruding from the base end side to the side opposite to the distal end side, and an elongated link slit 3372d passing through the link piece 3372c and extending toward the shaft hole 3372a. It has . A transmission pin 3383b of a slide link member 3383, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3372d.

The second decorative body 3373 has a shaft hole 3373a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3372 side around the shaft hole 3373a. It also has a second gear part 3373b that meshes with the first gear part 3372b. When the first decorative body 3372 is rotated, the second decorative body 3373 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3372 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3372b and the second gear portion 3373b. Thereby, the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is movable such that the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are opened and closed on the distal end side with the base end as the center.

The right horizontal ring decorative board 3375 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, and is connected to the first LED 3376 at the rear of the large-diameter decorative portion 3371a and the rear of the small-diameter decorative portion 3371b. A second LED 3377 is mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3376 is a full-color LED, and the second LED 3377 is a single-color LED.

The back third right drive motor 3380 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotation link member 3382 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position above the back third right drive motor 3380 on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the back third right drive motor 3380. The rotating link member 3382 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3382a that meshes with the drive gear 3381, and a crank pin 3382b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from an eccentric position. A crank pin 3382b of the rotating link member 3382 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3383a of a slide link member 3383, which will be described later.

The slide link member 3383 has its base end located near the rear third right drive motor 3380, and its distal end located at the vertical center of the unit base 3301 (the part where the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 is rotatably supported). ), and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3383 is provided to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382. The slide link member 3383 has a transmission slit 3383a that extends left and right on the base end side and into which the crank pin 3382b of the rotating link member 3382 is slidably inserted, and a transmission slit 3383a that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3383b that is slidably inserted into the link slit 3372d of the decorative body 3372, and a detection piece 3383c that is detected by the right detection sensor 3384 on the base end side.

The transmission slit 3383a of the slide link member 3383 is located above the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382, and its left end is located to the left of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382. It is bent towards the opposite side.

In the right unit 3370, in a normal state, the slide link member 3383 is located at the end of upward movement, and the tips of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are farthest from each other, and the right side ring The decorative body 3371 is in the most open standby position. When the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 is in the standby position, the first decoration body 3372 and the second decoration body 3373 are each located near the right edge of the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Further, in a normal state, the crank pin 3382b of the rotating link member 3382 is located at the left end of the transmission slit 3383a in the slide link member 3383. Furthermore, in a normal state, the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384.

In this normal state, the respective leading ends of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 are close to the vertical line passing through their respective centers of rotation, so that the center of gravity is lower than the center of rotation. It is located on the left. Therefore, on the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, a rotational moment that attempts to rotate them in the counterclockwise direction acts on each of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, but the first gear portion 3372b of the first decorative body 3372 Since the second gear portion 3373b of the second decoration body 3373 is meshed with the second gear portion 3373b, the rotational moments applied to each are offset, and the state of the standby position is maintained. As a result, almost no force is applied from the right side ring decoration body 3371 side through the link slit 3382d and the transmission pin 3383b to slide the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction, and the right side ring decoration There is almost no load applied to the back third right drive motor 3380 from the body 3371 side.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3382 is rotated clockwise by the back third right drive motor 3380 via the drive gear 3381, the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 moves rightward within the transmission slit 3383a. The slide link member 3383 slides downward. When this slide link member 3383 moves downward, the first decorative body 3372 is moved clockwise around the shaft hole 3372a through the link slit 3372d by the transmission pin 3383b at the tip so that the tip side moves upward. At the same time, the second decorative body 3373 is rotated counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3373a by the second gear part 3373b meshing with the first gear part 3372b. That is, the tips of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are rotated so that they approach each other (so that the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is closed).

Furthermore, as the slide link member 3383 slides downward, the detection piece 3383c also moves downward together, so the right detection sensor 3384 enters a non-detection state.

Then, as the crank pin 3382b of the rotating link member 3382 revolves in the clockwise direction, the crank pin 3382b slides to the right within the transmission slit 3383a and then to the left, and the crank pin 3382b When the motor rotates 180 degrees or more from the state shown in FIG. 3 and is located near the left end of the transmission slit 3383a (to the left of the center of revolution), the drive of the back third right drive motor 3380 stops. In this state, the respective tips of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are in an appearance position in which the tips of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are close to each other so that the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is closed. This appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are each rotated by 50 degrees from the standby position.

In this appearance position, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 extend leftward from their respective rotation centers, so that the first decorative body 3372 A rotational moment that attempts to rotate counterclockwise will act on the second decorative body 3373 and the first gear portion 3372b of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373. Since the second gear portion 3373b is in mesh with the second gear portion 3373b, the rotational moment applied to each portion is canceled out, and the state of the appearance position is maintained. As a result, almost no force is applied from the right side ring decoration body 3371 side through the link slit 3372d and the transmission pin 3383b to slide the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction, and the right side ring decoration There is almost no load applied to the back third right drive motor 3380 from the body 3371 side.

In this embodiment, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 do not rotate until their respective tips touch each other, and are rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stops at (appearance position). When the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 (first decorative body 3372 and second decorative body 3373) is placed within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. Note that when moving the right lateral ring decoration 3371 from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third right drive motor 3380 is operated as described above until the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384. can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

In this manner, in the right unit 3370, the right side ring decoration body 3371 can be opened and closed between the open standby position and the closed appearance position by the back third right drive motor 3380.

In addition, in this embodiment, by driving the back third right drive motor 3380 using a constant current drive method, the drive gear 3381 is rotated with high torque, and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 is moved between the standby position and the appearance position. It can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

In the back third production unit 3300 of this embodiment, an upper vertical ring decoration 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and a right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are formed in the same shape. The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 of the back third production unit 3300 are provided at the same position in the front and back direction. Further, the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, in the back third production unit 3300, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are provided further back than the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331.

In this embodiment, two-phase stepping motors are used as the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380. .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are attached, the output power is 200 pps (the width of one pulse is 5 ms). Furthermore, it is possible to self-start from a stopped state even if it is excited with a 200 pps pulse without slow-up processing.

Furthermore, since the movement of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position is completed in 130 steps, [130 steps x 5 ms] = 650 ms], and it is possible to make it appear or evacuate (appear/evacuate) in 650 ms.

Next, a movable presentation using the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 in the back third presentation unit 3300 will be explained. The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 of the back third production unit 3300 are each in a standby position in a normal state. ing. When the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are in the standby position, the back side of the back second production unit 3200 disposed in the front It is located outside the through hole 3229a of the second inner decorative body 3229 and is not visible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 from the standby position to the appearance position, When viewed from the front, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are close to each other at the center of the frame of the unit base 3301, creating a decoration in which three rings are arranged vertically (up and down). It can be shown to the player (see Figure 104).

Also, in a normal state, when the back third left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the left lateral ring decoration 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position. When viewed from the front, the tip of the left lateral ring decoration 3351 and the tip of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 are close to each other at the center of the frame of the unit base 3301, creating a decoration in which three rings are arranged horizontally (left and right). can be shown to the player (see FIG. 105).

Furthermore, in the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is driven by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380. , when the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration The tip of the ring decoration body 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 are close to each other, and the tip of the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are close to each other. A decoration in which rings are arranged in a horizontal and vertical cross can be shown to the player (see FIG. 106).

In addition, in the back third production unit 3300, in the normal state, for example, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are driven. When the is moved from the standby position to a position halfway from the appearance position, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 (first decoration 3312 and second decoration 3313) and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (first The tip portions of the decoration body 3372 and the second decoration body 3373) are located inside the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration body 3229 in the back second production unit 3200 when viewed from the front, and are partially located on the player side. (See Figure 107). In this state, the two tips of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners of the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decoration 3229, and the two tips of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 The two tips appear at the right upper and lower corners of the four corners of the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decorative body 3229, so it is possible to change the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decorative body 3229. can.

As described above, according to the back third presentation unit 3300 of this embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are combined as appropriate. By moving the ring to the appearance position, ring decorations arranged vertically, horizontally, or crosswise can appear, allowing the player to see a variety of movable effects.

In addition, the first LED 3316 and second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decorative board 3315, the first LED 3336 and second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decorative board 3335, the first LED 3356 and second LED 3357 of the left horizontal ring decorative board 3355, the right horizontal ring By appropriately emitting light from the first LED 3376 and second LED 3377 of the decorative board 3375, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are decorated with light. Therefore, various light emitting effects can be shown to the players.

[5-10. Performance on game board]
Next, the main performances on the game board 5 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 102 to 110 and the like. FIG. 102 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the plurality of rotating decorations in the back second production unit are rotated clockwise from the normal state and revolved 15 degrees. FIG. 103 is an enlarged front view showing the lower part of the game board in a state where the special rotating decorative body in the back second performance unit has been moved to a specific position. FIG. 104 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decorative body and the lower vertical ring decorative body in the back third performance unit moved to the appearance position. FIG. 105 is a front view of the game board showing the left lateral ring decoration and the right lateral ring decoration in the back third performance unit moved to their appearance positions. FIG. 106 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration, lower vertical ring decoration, left horizontal ring decoration, and right horizontal ring decoration in the back third performance unit moved to the appearance position. be. FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third performance unit moved halfway to their appearance positions.

Further, FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board showing an example of a performance image on the performance display device when a malfunction occurs in the third performance unit on the back. FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board showing an example of a shadow effect performed during a light emission effect in the back unit. FIG. 110 is a front view of the pachinko machine with the game board facing through the game window in the door frame.

The game board 5 includes the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 that partitions the rear end of the game area 5a, the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, etc. almost entirely. Since they are transparent, under normal conditions, as shown in FIG. A plurality of rotations in the back first upper decoration body 3161, the back first left decoration body 3162, the back first right decoration body 3163, the back first lower decoration body 3164, and the back second production unit 3200 of the back first production unit 3100 in To clearly see the decorative body 3210 (the special rotating decorative body 3211 and the normal rotating decorative body 3212), the back second outer decorative body 3228, the back second inner decorative body 3229, the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230, etc. I can do it.

In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 74 etc., four special rotating decorations 3211 among the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 in the second back presentation unit 3200 are arranged at both ends of the orbit in the vertical direction on the circumference. , located at both ends in the left and right direction. In other words, one special rotating decorative body 3211 is located at the lowest specific position on the orbit (the 6 o'clock position on the clock). The special rotating decorative body 3211 located at this specific position is located at the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 in the back first presentation unit 3100, and the outer side is the back first lower decorative body 3164. It is decorated with. Further, the special rotary decorative body 3211 (rotary decorative body 3210) at a specific position is located behind the first starting port 2002, and decorates the rear of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 103).

In addition, in the normal state, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 of the back third production unit 3300 are in the standby position, respectively. By being located on the outside of the back second inner circumferential decorative body 3230 in the back second production unit 3200 when viewed from the front, the front side is surrounded by a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, the drive ring 3221, and the back second outer peripheral decoration body 3230. It is covered with a decorative body 3228, a second back inner decorative body 3229, etc., and is not visible from the player side.

In this normal state, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed at the rear is displayed on the player's side (front side) through the inside of the back second inner circumferential decoration body 3230 of the back second effect unit 3200. It can be seen in good condition from

The game board 5 selects the back first slot of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The production unit 3100, the second back production unit 3200, and the third back production unit 3300 perform predetermined movable production.

First, the presentation using the back second presentation unit 3200 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 102, 103, and the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 102, as an effect using the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 of the second back effect unit 3200, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated clockwise by the drive of the second back drive motor 3222, as shown in FIG. A movable effect can be performed in which a plurality of (12) rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate in a clockwise direction and revolve in a clockwise direction. As a result, the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 revolve (orbit) around the effect image that can be seen through the inside of the back second inner circumference decoration 3230 while rotating, so the plurality of rotational decorations 3210 rotating in circles can spread around the game area. 5a can be made to have a lively feel and can entertain the players.

As described above, when the LED 3171 of the back first lower decorative board 3170 in the back first presentation unit 3100 is made to emit light while the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 are rotating and revolving, the rear of the rotating decorations Since the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 around which the player 3210 revolves emits light, the player's attention can be drawn to the back first lower decorative body 3164. In addition, since the back first lower decorative body 3164 is conspicuous, the desired rotating decorative body 3210 (special rotating decorative body 3211) is visible to the player within the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decorative body 3164. Depending on whether or not the revolution stops, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited, and it is possible to entertain the player.

At this time, only the first rotating decorative body LED group 3250a corresponding to the specific position among the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 may be turned on. As a result, only the rotating decorative body 3210 passing through the rear side of the ring of the back first lower decorative body 3164 can be clearly seen, and the other rotating decorative bodies 3210 are difficult to see, so that the first back lower decorative body 3164 A roulette or slot-like effect can be shown to the player using the inside of the ring as a window, and the excitement of seeing whether or not the desired rotating decorative body 3210 will stop at a specific position can be further enhanced. I can do it.

When the desired rotating decorative body 3210 (special rotating decorative body 3211) stops within the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decorative body 3164, as shown in FIG. Since the first starting port 2002 is provided, it makes the player think that if the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002, there is an extremely high possibility that a "jackpot" will be drawn. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to drive the game ball B toward the first starting hole 2002, and also to make the player enjoy the drive operation of the game ball B.

In addition, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are rotated and revolved by the drive of the second back drive motor 3222, the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the second back decorative board 3240 are adjusted as appropriate according to the movement position of each rotating decorative body 3210. It may also be made to emit light. For example, when one rotating decorative body 3210 is located at a specific position, the first LED group 3251, second LED group 3252, third LED group 3253, and fourth LED group 3254 of each rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are At the same time, each intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. Subsequently, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves approximately 7 degrees clockwise, the first LED group 3251 and the fourth LED group 3254 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 remain lit. The second LED group 3252 is turned off, and the middle LED group 3255 is turned on. Further, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves 15 degrees from the initial position, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are also turned off, the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is turned off, and only the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned on. I'll leave it alone.

Subsequently, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves approximately 22 degrees from the initial position, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are turned on, and the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group are turned on. 3254 remains off, and the intermediate LED group 3255 remains lit. Then, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves 30 degrees from the initial position (the next rotating decorative body 3210 is located at a specific position), the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are turned on, and the rotating decorative body LED While the group 3250 is turned on, the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. As a result, the LEDs 3241 where the rotating decorative body 3210 is located in front are turned on, and the LEDs 3241 where the rotating decorative body 3210 is not located in front are turned off, so that the rotating decorative body 3210 It is possible to present to the player an effect in which the rotating decorative body 3210 appears to be revolving while emitting light as if it were equipped with an LED, thereby making it possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest. .

In addition, in the back second production unit 3200, in the normal state, all the rotating decoration LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light with high brightness, and then the back second drive motor 3222 produces a plurality of rotating decorations. The body 3210 is rotated and revolved, the rotation and revolution of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 is stopped in a state different from the normal state, and the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are turned off or dimmed. It's okay. As a result, all the rotating decoration LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light with high brightness, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the plurality of rotating decorations 3210. By changing the position of the rotating decoration 3210, it is possible to show the player an effect in which the rotating decorative body 3210 moves without the player knowing, and it is possible to surprise and entertain the player.

In addition, in the back second production unit 3200, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative board 3240 can be made to emit light as appropriate, the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is separated from the first rotating decorative body LED group 3250a. , second rotating decoration LED group 3250b, third rotating decoration LED group 3250c, fourth rotating decoration LED group 3250d, fifth rotating decoration LED group 3250e, sixth rotating decoration LED group 3250f, seventh rotating decoration body LED group 3250g, eighth rotating decorative LED group 3250h, ninth rotating decorative LED group 3250i, tenth rotating decorative LED group 3250j, eleventh rotating decorative LED group 3250k, twelfth rotating decorative LED group By emitting light (lighting up) in order such as 3250l, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light appears to be rotating in a predetermined direction, thereby making it possible to entertain the player. When the rotation of the light is stopped, depending on the position at which the rotation of the light stops, it is possible to increase the expectations of the player and to entertain the player.

Note that when stopping the rotation of the light, the rotation speed of the light is gradually reduced, and in the rotating decoration LED group 3250, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth The LED group 3254 and further the intermediate LED group 3255 may be turned on in order so that the light moves little by little in the rotation direction and slowly stops. As a result, the position where the light stops becomes more precise, making it difficult for the player to predict where the rotation of the light will stop, making it possible to keep the player excited and entertained.

In addition, as mentioned above, the light can be rotated (orbited), so by turning it on and off in order in the circumferential direction, you can create a light-emitting effect that measures time like a clock, or measure the remaining time. Suggestive light-emitting effects can also be performed to entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

Furthermore, in each rotating decoration LED group 3250, for example, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, a fourth LED group 3254, a first LED group 3251, etc. The light may be emitted in a specific order. As a result, the player can see a light emitting effect in which the light appears to be rotating in the rotating decoration LED group 3250 at one location, and the player can also see that the rotating decoration 3210 is not rotating. It is possible to give the illusion of rotation (spinning), which can entertain the players.

In addition, in each of the rotary decoration LED groups 3250, for example, if the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light, then the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, the outer side from the center It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that moves and spreads out. Alternatively, if the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light after the second LED group 3252 and fourth LED group 3254 emit light, the player is shown a light emission effect that converges from the outside to the center. be able to.

Next, the effects using the back third effect unit 3300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 104 to 108. First, for example, as shown in FIG. 104, from the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331. Move from standby position to appearance position. As a result, the tips of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the tips of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 are brought close to each other at the center of the inside of the back second inner peripheral decoration body 3230 when viewed from the front, and the three rings are vertically ( Decorations lined up (top and bottom) can be shown to the player.

In addition, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. The body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, the tip of the left lateral ring decoration 3351 and the tip of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 are brought close to each other at the center of the inside of the second back inner peripheral decoration 3230 when viewed from the front, and the three rings are horizontally ( Decorations lined up (left and right) can be shown to the player.

In this embodiment, the left lateral ring decoration 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration 3371 of the back third effect unit 3300 are moved to the appearance position to form a decoration in which three rings are arranged horizontally, and the effect is The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are displayed on the inside of each of the three rings in the display device 1600. A variable display of three symbol rows can be performed for the purpose of suggestion. As a result, the top and bottom of the three symbol rows are different from the case where the three symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner without moving the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to their appearance positions. Since the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 at the appearance position are physically decorated, it is difficult for the player to see the fluctuating symbol rows in the game such as "Jackpot". The player can be made to think that there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols that will be advantageous will be stopped and displayed, and the player's expectations for the game can be increased.

Furthermore, as a performance using the back third performance unit 3300, as shown in FIG. And the back third right drive motor 3380 is driven to move the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position. move it. As a result, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 become close to each other at the center of the inside of the second inner peripheral decoration 3230, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 The tip and the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are brought close to each other, allowing the player to see a decoration in which five rings are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are all moved from the standby position to the appearance position, Since a decoration in which five rings are arranged in a cross is formed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, it is thought that an advantageous gaming state such as a "jackpot" will occur in which the player has an advantage. It is possible to increase expectations for the "jackpot" game and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, in the back third production unit 3300, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position in an appropriate order or combination order. It's okay. For example, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 may be moved to the appearance position in this order, or the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring The decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 may be moved to the appearance position in this order. As a result, after going through multiple stages, the five rings are lined up in a cross pattern, making the player excited and excited depending on whether or not to move on to the next stage at each stage. Can entertain.

By the way, in the back third production unit 3300, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive method. Since it is driven by torque, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are driven for an extremely short time of one second or less (here, 650ms). ), it can be moved from the standby position to the appearance position, or from the appearance position to the standby position. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 appear and disappear in an instant, giving a strong impact to the player. It is possible to entertain the players.

Further, in the back third production unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. And the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 is moved to a position halfway from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 (first decoration body 3312 and second decoration body 3313) and the tip portion of the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 (first decoration body 3372 and second decoration body 3373) is located inside the back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 when viewed from the front, and can be partially seen from the player side.

To be more specific, in the state shown in FIG. 107, the two tips of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners of the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration body 3229, and The two tips of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 appear at the upper and lower right corners of the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decoration 3229. As a result, the shape of the inside of the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230 facing the display screen of the performance display device 1600 changes, so that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the right horizontal ring decoration It is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the movement of 3371, and it is possible to make the player feel that something is going to happen, thereby increasing his or her expectations for the game.

Note that when moving the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position, first, only the tip portions are visible. It is also possible to move it part way, and then move it to the appearance position as the next step. This makes it possible for the player to be excited depending on whether or not the object moves completely to the appearance position, thereby making it possible to entertain the player. When moving part way to this appearance position, it may be moved back and forth between the standby position and the second inner circumferential decorative body 3230. This can make it easier to notice.

In the back third production unit 3300, the first LED 3316 and second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decorative board 3315, the first LED 3336 and second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decorative board 3335, and the first LED 3356 and the second LED 3337 of the left horizontal ring decorative board 3355. The second LED 3357, the first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the right horizontal ring decoration board 3375 are made to emit light as appropriate, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration The body 3371 can be decorated with light emission as appropriate. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, which have moved to the appearance position side, can be decorated with various light emitting modes. , can entertain players.

By the way, in this embodiment, in the back third production unit 3300, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the appearance position. Sometimes, as a performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are displayed on the part directly behind them. A decorative image 3390 similar to the above is displayed (see FIG. 108).

In addition, in this embodiment, for some reason, at least one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the back third production unit 3300 is If it becomes impossible to move to the appearance position, even if the effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is executed. , they remain in the standby position and are not moved to the appearance position side, and a decorative image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 108). As a result, even if a malfunction occurs in the back third production unit 3300, the decorative image 3390 can be seen, making it difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of the malfunction. By recognizing this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to having to interrupt the game, and it is possible to allow the player to continue enjoying the game and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, as a performance using the back unit 3000, a performance by appropriately combining the performance by the back second performance unit 3200 and the performance by the back third performance unit 3300 can also be performed. Thereby, it is possible to present a more diverse variety of performances to the players, and it is possible to make it difficult for the players to get bored. In addition, since it is possible to show the player a multi-stage production, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited at each stage, increasing the player's sense of expectation and suppressing a drop in interest. can.

Further, as a production using the back unit 3000, for example, when performing an appropriate light emission production using the back first production unit 3100, the back second production unit 3200, and the back third production unit 3300, a specific A shadow effect can be performed in which the LEDs located on the line are turned off and the line is moved in a short time (one second or less) from one side to the other in a predetermined direction across the gaming area 5a. (See Figure 109). As a result, by turning off the LED on a specific line, a dark part (shadow part 3050) appears on the line within the game area 5a, and the shadow part 3050 crosses the inside of the game area 5a in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player ``aha'' and make him/her feel that something is going to happen, making him/her concentrate on the game. Note that the shadow portion 3050 can be moved not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal and diagonal directions.

In addition, the above-mentioned shadow production is performed during movable production using the rotating decoration body 3210, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, etc. It can also be executed at the time of switching the effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600, etc. Thereby, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest in the next movable effect, effect image, etc. using the shadow effect as a break, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, when the game board 5 of this embodiment is assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the player side through the door window 101a of the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. In the door frame 3, the outer periphery of the door window 101a is shaped like a half-tube upper left plate decoration 271, upper right plate decoration 276, upper center plate decoration 312a, left side decoration 404 of the door frame, and right side decoration of the door frame. It is surrounded by a body 419 and a door frame top decoration body 453. In addition, in the door frame 3, the top left decoration 271 of the plate, the top right decoration 276, the top center decoration 312a, the left side decoration 404 of the door frame, the right side decoration 419 of the door frame, and the top decoration 453 of the door frame. To the rear, the upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, the upper center decorative board 314, the left side decorative board 402 of the door frame, the right side decorative board 418, the top center decorative board 455, and the top left door frame. Since the decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, by making the LEDs on these decorative boards emit light as appropriate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a (game area 5a) can be decorated with light. , light can be moved along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

As described above, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, various light emitting effects can be performed. By making the LED group 3252, the fourth LED group 3254, and the LEDs on each decorative board of the door frame 3 emit light in this order, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect that moves from the center to the outside and spreads out. The player's attention can be directed to the outside of the gaming area 5a. Alternatively, if the LEDs of each decorative board of the door frame 3, the second LED group 3252 and fourth LED group 3254 of the back second presentation unit 3200, the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light in this order, A light emitting effect that converges from the outside to the center can be shown to the player, and the player's attention can be drawn to the center of the game area 5a.

In addition, in the back second effect unit 3200, as described above, during the light emission effect in which light rotates (swivels) in the circumferential direction by the plurality of rotating decoration LED groups 3250 and intermediate LED group 3255, on the door frame 3 side, Alternatively, a light emitting effect may be performed in which light rotates in the circumferential direction of the door window 101a. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the entire pachinko machine 1 is made up of light spinning around the center of the gaming area 5a, which can give a strong impact to the player and also make the player enjoy the game. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the above-mentioned movable effects and light emitting effects can be combined as appropriate, and they can also be combined with effect images (display effects) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns of effects to the player by appropriately combining light-emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to make it difficult for the players to get bored. The player can be entertained and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[5-11. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 of the upper unit 3310 of the back third production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 and the lower vertical ring decoration body of the lower unit 3330 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 of the left unit 3350 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 of the right unit 3370 are attached to the central part of the gaming area 5a (here, the back second inner periphery of the back second production unit 3200). The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration The body 3371 is located behind the rotating decoration body 3210, the second back outer decoration body 3228, the second back inner decoration body 3229, and the second inner peripheral decoration body 3230 of the back second production unit 3200, and the rotation The decoration body 3210, the second back outer decoration body 3228, the second back inner decoration body 3229, and the second back inner peripheral decoration body 3230 create an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and a left horizontal ring decoration body 3351. , and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be made invisible from the player side (front), and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the presence of the right side ring decoration body 3371, and also to make it easier to see the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600 facing the center of the gaming area 5a from the player side (front). This allows the player to enjoy the effect image.

In this normal state, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are within the range of 0.5 seconds to 1.0 seconds (this embodiment The peripheral control board 1510 controls the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, and the back third lower drive motor 3320 to rotate (move) from the retreat position to the appearance position in 650 ms (0.65 seconds). The three left drive motors 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive method to drive the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring. When the decorative body 3371 is rotated, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are rotated with a high torque. A large rotational moment acts on the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, which have stopped due to the height, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, Since the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be rotated to the appearance position at extremely high speed, the upper vertical ring decoration that the player did not recognize 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can show the player an effect as if they have suddenly appeared in the center of the gaming area 5a, and the player In addition, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 suddenly appear instantly, giving a strong impact to the player. This can make the player feel strongly that something good will happen, and can heighten expectations for the game and suppress a drop in interest in the game.

Further, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by the peripheral control board 1510 using a constant current drive method. When the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 were rotated with high torque, they quickly rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position. This is because part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 will be blocked by the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. , the player can immediately recognize the movement of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position, and The movement of the vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can greatly surprise the player.

Furthermore, the parts between the base end side and the distal end side of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the retracted position to the emerging position. Since it is positioned behind the straight line connecting the proximal end and distal end when rotating, the shape extends non-linearly (in this case, an arc) between the proximal end and the distal end. shape), so when the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position, the first The tip sides of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 become visible. At this time, the portions of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 that are visible from the front (distal end side) are Since the shape between the side and the tip side is non-linear, the directions protruding inward from the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230 are the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration. The direction is different from the direction of the base end side of the body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371. Therefore, the rotation of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is stopped on the way to the appearance position, and only the tip side is visible. When the possible effect is executed (see FIG. 107), the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are displayed to the player. Since it is possible to give the illusion that another decorative object is appearing, a more diverse variety of effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are connected to the central part of the gaming area 5a (the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230), and has an elongated frame shape whose tip side extends to the center of the game area 5a when in the appearance position, so that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring When the decorative body 3331, left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are rotated to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right Since the tip side of the horizontal ring decoration 3371 is located in the center of the game area 5a, the appearance positions of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can stand out, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371.

Further, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 using a constant current drive method by the peripheral control board 1510, , the time it takes to rotate the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 from the retracted position to the emerging position with high torque is 0. Since it is within the range of 5 seconds to 1.0 seconds, there is no need to use large drive motors with higher torque than necessary. It is possible to suppress an increase in the space required for the drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380, and relatively, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, It is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 and other members, and the secured space allows the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, and the left horizontal ring decorative body to be arranged. 3351, the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, etc. can be made larger, and the large upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more enjoyable for players. Furthermore, since there is no need to use a large drive motor with unnecessarily high torque or a complicated control circuit to output high torque, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. .

In addition, an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image is provided in the center of the game area 5a, and includes an upper vertical ring decoration 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and a right horizontal ring. By temporarily darkening the display screen when rotating (moving) the decoration 3371 from the retracted position to the appearance position or from the appearance position to the retraction position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 is displayed to the player. , the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be difficult to see, so by brightening the display screen afterwards, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, The player can see an effect in which the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 suddenly appear or disappear from the center, and the game The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can amuse the players and increase their interest in the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

By the way, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 using a constant current drive method, the upper vertical ring decoration Since the body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are rotated with high torque, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, the back third right drive motor 3380, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, etc. Although there is a risk that problems may occur due to early fatigue, move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to their appearance positions. By executing the effect, the decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so a malfunction occurs in them, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration Even if the right horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved (rotated) to the appearance position, the decoration image 3390 makes the player see the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331. , the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be made to appear as if they have moved to their appearance positions, and the decoration image 3390 allows the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left It is possible to show the same effect to the player as the effect provided by the horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control section 1511 and performance display control section 1512) controls the upper unit 3310 of the back third performance unit 3300 in the back unit 3000. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 of the lower unit 3330, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the right unit 3370 are invisible to the player. Since the player has moved to the retracted position, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be clearly viewed, and the player can enjoy the effect image. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position, the appropriate At the timing when the number upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 move from the retreat position to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 displays the appearance. The decorative image 3390 is displayed at the rear of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371. A specific effect image (e.g., a plurality of images for suggesting special lottery results) is displayed in the area defined by the ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. (symbol row) is displayed, the specific effect image is clearly divided by the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, and the specific effect is displayed. The image can be made to stand out, and the performance by the specific performance image can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Then, for some reason, one of the upper vertical ring decorations 3311, the lower vertical ring decorations 3331, the left horizontal ring decorations 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorations 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position. When detected by any of the detection sensor 3324, lower detection sensor 3344, left detection sensor 3364, and right detection sensor 3384, the peripheral control board 1510 detects all the upper vertical ring decorations 3311, lower vertical ring decorations 3331, and left horizontal ring. Since only the movement control of the decoration body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is suspended, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration When the effect of moving the body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move from the retreated position. , the decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at a portion behind the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 at the appearance positions. At the same time, a specific effect image is displayed in the area divided by the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (decoration image 3390) at the appearance position. Therefore, the player is given the illusion that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 have moved to their appearance positions. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body can be It is possible to show the same effect to the player as the effect produced by the decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371. Therefore, even if the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position due to a malfunction, the upper vertical ring decorative body Decorative images 3390 similar to the decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be shown to the player, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring The decoration image 3390 can show the player the same effect as the decoration 3331, the left lateral ring decoration 3351, and the right lateral ring decoration 3371, and the decoration image 3390 can make a specific effect image stand out. Therefore, it is possible to let the player enjoy the performance using the specific performance image and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, if a problem occurs in which one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position, The movement control of all the upper vertical ring decorations 3311, the lower vertical ring decorations 3331, the left horizontal ring decorations 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorations 3371 is stopped, and the upper vertical ring decorations 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorations are moved. 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, so the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and When the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is simultaneously moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration moved to the appearance position. It is possible to avoid an effect in which any of the bodies 3371 and the decorative image 3390, which becomes visible when the player does not move to the appearance position due to a malfunction, appear to be mixed together, and to avoid giving a sense of discomfort to the player. By preventing this, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in games.

Furthermore, when an effect is executed to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to their appearance positions, a decorative image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Regardless of whether there is a problem in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to their appearance positions, the decorative image 3390, a separate image is provided for when a problem occurs with the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. This is not necessary, and the load on displaying effect images including the decorative image 3390 can be reduced.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 detect the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, When a malfunction in which the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 does not move is detected, the movement control of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is suspended. As a result, due to a malfunction, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 may stop at halfway positions, resulting in defects. In addition, only the movement control is suspended, and the decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. is displayed, the player can be entertained by the decorative image 3390, and a decline in player interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when a malfunction is detected, the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is suspended, so that the upper vertical ring decoration Back third upper drive motor 3320, back third lower drive motor 3340, back third left drive for moving the body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 No overload acts on the motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, and It is possible to prevent other members from being damaged, and it is possible to avoid the problem from expanding.

In addition, in the retracted position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are not visible, so for some reason the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved to their appearance positions, as described above, the effect display device 1600 displays the decorations. Since the image 3390 is displayed, it is possible to enjoy the effect of the decorative image 3390, and at the same time, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration in the retracted position The player notices that a problem has occurred in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move because the body 3371 is not visible. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling uneasy and reduce their interest in the game.

In addition, when the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are moved to the retracted position (normal state), Since the vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be visually recognized, the player cannot see the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 in the retracted position. , the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be made difficult to notice. When the ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the appearance position, the invisible upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration are removed. The appearance of the body 3371 can greatly surprise the player, amuse the player, and make the player think that something good is going to happen to him, thereby increasing his motivation for playing the game. It is possible to increase expectations and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 detect the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration. 3371 does not move to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 in the retracted position are Since the detection is performed by the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring. When the decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are controlled to move to the appearance position, the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 , if the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are still detected, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 are detected. , and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 has not moved, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to their appearance positions. It is possible to realize a gaming machine that can detect malfunctions and has the above-mentioned effects.

Note that the decorative image 3390 similar to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 may be larger or smaller in size. When the decorative image 3390 is made larger than the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, the decorative image displayed on the effect display device 1600 3390 has the advantage that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can be further decorated. On the other hand, when the decorative image 3390 is made smaller than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration When executing the effect of moving the ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to their appearance positions, a problem occurred and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left There is an advantage that the decorative image 3390 will not be recognized by the player unless the movement control of the horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is stopped.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back second production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 has a back second outer decoration body 3228 and a through hole 3329a penetrating back and forth. In the front of the back second inner decorative body 3229, in a normal state, there are four special rotating decorative bodies 3211 with special decorations and the remaining six special rotating decorative bodies 3211 with decorations different from the special rotating decorative bodies 3211. Twelve flat plate-shaped and translucent rotating decorative bodies 3210, which are composed of three normal rotating decorative bodies 3212, are centered on an axis extending back and forth so as to decorate the outer periphery of the through hole 3229a. The display screens of the effect display device 1600 arranged on the revolution circumference and provided at the rear face through the through hole 3229a. In this state, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated by the back second drive motor 3222, the shaft portions 3210a extending rearward from each rotating decorative body 3210 are inserted into the shaft holes 3221a of the drive ring 3221. Together with the shaft portion 3210a, the rotary decoration body 3210 and the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a are arranged on the circumference (revolution circle move (revolution) on the circumference). At this time, since the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b provided on the revolution center side of the revolution circle of the unit base 3220, the rotation When the body gear 3225 revolves, the rotary body gear 3225 rolls on the fixed gear portion 3220b and rotates in the same direction as the revolving direction of the rotary body gear 3225, and the rotary body gear 3225 rotates between the shaft portion 3210a and the rotating decorative body 3210. At the same time, the shaft portion 3210a rotates (rotates) around an axis extending back and forth. Therefore, by rotating the drive ring 3221 by the back second drive motor 3222, a plurality of (12) rotating decorations 3210 revolve in the same direction while rotating, making it possible to give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of players, and also to make players think that something good is going to happen to them, increasing their expectations for the game and suppressing a decline in interest. can be done.

Furthermore, since the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 that revolve while rotating around an axis extending back and forth are flat, the surface of the rotation decorations 3210 faces forward, and the entire rotational decoration 3210 is visible to the player. Since these rotating decorations 3210 are easily visible from the side, when these rotating decorations 3210 revolve while rotating, the player can see a plurality of rotating decorations 3210 rotating round and round, giving the player a lively effect. In addition, it is possible to give a strong impact to the players and greatly entertain them, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the players.

Further, behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, the second back outer decorative body 3228, and the second back inner decorative body 3229, a stop position (one A plurality of (12) rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 are arranged behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 that have stopped revolving at a specific position (where the rotating decorative body 3210 stops revolving at a specific position), and are divided in the direction of revolution. Since the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 3241 on the back second decorative board 3240 consisting of an intermediate LED group 3255 located between the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are at the stop position. In this state, when the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are made to emit light, the rotating decorative body 3210 can be decorated with light. When the LED 3241 emits light, the rotating decorative body 3210 can be decorated with light. Therefore, when the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 are rotating and revolving, if the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decorations LED group 3250 and the LEDs 3241 of the intermediate LED group 3255 are made to emit light as appropriate in accordance with the revolution of the rotation decorations 3210, they will emit light. Since the LED 3241 moving together with the revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210, the light from the LED 3241 is connected to the transparent back second outer decorative body 3228 and the second back inner decorative body 3229 and the rotating decoration. By being irradiated forward (to the player side) through the body 3210, the rotating decorative body 3210 can be decorated with light emitting light, just as if the rotating decorative body 3210 is provided with an LED 3241. By showing the player an effect in which the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves while rotating on its axis, it is possible to greatly entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

At this time, a plurality of LEDs 3241 constituting the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are arranged in the direction of revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210, such as a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group. 3254, the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 can be emitted finely in accordance with the revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210. Therefore, only the LEDs 3241 located behind the rotating decorative body 3210 It is possible to make it easier to emit light, and it is possible to create a strong illusion for the player that the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating, and also to make the movement of the rotating decorative body 3210 decorated with light emitting light. It is possible to make the game more enjoyable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, since a plurality of LEDs 3241 including a rotating decoration LED group 3250 and an intermediate LED group 3255 are provided within the range of the orbit of the rotating decoration 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape. , when all the LEDs 3241 except the LEDs 3241 included in the upper left corner LED group 3256, the upper right corner LED group 3257, the lower left corner LED group 3258, and the winning opening LED group 3259 are lit, a circular light emission effect is shown to the player. be able to. Further, since the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are provided alternately in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decorative body 3210, the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are arranged circumferentially. By emitting light in alternating directions, the player can see a light-emitting decoration in which the light rotates on the circumference. Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are provided within the range of the orbit of rotation of the rotating decorative body 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape with a predetermined width. By emitting light in order from the outside to the outside, the player can see a light emitting effect in which the ring of light spreads outward, and by making the plurality of LEDs 3241 emit light in order from the outside to the inside of the ring, the ring of light can be It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that converges inward. In this way, various light emitting effects can be shown to the players, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the players to get bored with the various effects, and it is possible to prevent the players from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when performing a light emitting effect in which light rotates in the direction of revolution of the rotating decoration body 3210, each of the rotating decoration LED groups 3250 is connected to the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 in the direction of revolution of the rotation decoration body 3210. Since it is divided into a third LED group 3253 and a fourth LED group 3254, it is possible to move the light in the revolution direction more finely, so the player can enjoy a light emitting effect in which the light rotates more smoothly. can be shown. In addition, since the movement of the light in the direction of revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210 becomes finer, the rotation speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction can be made slower, and the variety of light-emitting effects makes it difficult for players to get bored and keeps them entertained. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

In addition, by appropriately combining the light emitting effect using the plurality of LEDs 3241 as described above and the movable effect in which the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves while rotating, players can enjoy effects that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to make a strong impression on the players, and also to attract the players' interest, to entertain the players and to prevent them from losing interest.

In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are grouped into a plurality of rotating decorative LED groups 3250 and a plurality of intermediate LED groups 3255, each rotating decorative LED group 3250 and intermediate LED group 3255 can be controlled to emit light. By doing so, compared to the case where multiple LEDs 3241 are controlled one by one to emit light, the load on the control can be reduced, and problems may occur due to overload, which may reduce the player's interest. In addition to being able to avoid a decrease in the performance, the control circuit in the peripheral control board 1510 and the like can be simplified, and costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are provided alternately in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decorative body 3210, for example, only the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is provided at regular intervals. The speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction is different between the case where the light is emitted sequentially in the circumferential direction and the case where the rotating decoration LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are caused to emit light alternately in the circumferential direction at the same time interval. It is possible to reduce the load on controlling the light-emitting effect, and also to allow players to enjoy the light-emitting effect in which the lights rotate at different speeds, thereby suppressing a decrease in player interest. can.

Moreover, since the back second outer decoration body 3228 and the back second inner decoration body 3229 having translucency are provided between the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 and the plurality of LEDs 3241, the back second outer decoration body 3228 And since the LED 3241 of the second back decorative board 3240 is difficult to see from the front due to the second back inner decorative body 3229, it is difficult to make the player aware of the existence of the LED 3241 provided separately from the rotating decorative body 3210. Therefore, it is possible to easily create the illusion that the rotating decorative body 3210 is provided with the LED 3241, and the impact of the light-emitting decoration of the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating can be further enhanced. It is possible to make the performance by the decoration body 3210 more enjoyable, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Moreover, since the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 include a special rotating decoration 3211 with a special decoration (three-way decoration), the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 can be rotated while rotating. Depending on whether or not the special rotating decoration 3211 stops revolving at a specific position, the player can be made nervous and excited, and the player can enjoy the movable effects of the plurality of rotating decorations 3210, making it more interesting. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, a rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects that one rotating decorative body 3210 is located at a specific position on the revolution circumference including the stop position, and one special rotating decorative body 3211 is located at a specific position. Since the rotational position detection sensor 3232 is equipped with a special rotational position detection sensor 3232 that detects the rotational decoration, when the normal rotational decoration 3212 among the plurality of rotational decorations 3210 is located at a specific position, only the rotational position detection sensor 3231 When the special rotating decoration body 3211 is located at a specific position, the rotational position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 detect it, so the detection by the rotational position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation By combining the detections by the position detection sensor 3232, it is possible to detect whether the normal rotating decoration 3212 or the special rotating decoration 3211 is located at a specific position. Therefore, when one of the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 is stopped in revolution at a specific position, by using the rotational position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotational position detection sensor 3232, the normal rotational decoration that is revolving while rotating on its axis. Since either the special rotating decoration 3212 or the special rotating decoration 3211 can be stopped in revolution at a specific position, it is possible to show the player an effect indicating whether or not the special rotation decoration 3211 will stop rotating at a specific position. It is possible to keep the player excited and entertained, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Also, a detection piece 3221c for detecting the normal rotating decoration 3212 and the special rotating decoration 3211 located at a specific position, and a special detection piece 3221c for detecting the special rotating decoration 3211 located at a specific position. 3221d is provided on the drive ring 3221, the detection piece 3221c and special detection piece 3221d do not rotate compared to the case where a detection piece or special detection piece is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210. , the configuration of the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d can be made simple, and the pachinko machine 1 that has the above-mentioned effects can be easily realized.

Furthermore, since a plurality of rotating decorations 3210 can be caused to revolve while rotating on their own axis by one back second drive motor 3222, when the rotation and revolution of the rotation decorations 3210 are driven by separate drive motors. In comparison, the configuration of the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 can be simplified, the drive mechanism can be made smaller, and the control for the movable effects of the plurality of rotational decorations 3210 can be simplified. The load can be reduced. Furthermore, as described above, since the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 can be made smaller, it is possible to relatively widen the space for arranging the plurality of rotating decorations 3210. The rotating decorations 3210 can be made larger to stand out from the player's side, and the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 can strongly attract the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the shaft portion 3210a protrudes further rearward than the LED 3241, the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end is located behind the LED 3241, and naturally the fixed gear portion 3220b and the drive ring 3221 are also located behind the LED 3241. , the rotating body gear 3225, the fixed gear portion 3220b, the drive ring 3221, etc. do not block the light emitted forward from the LED 3241, and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be reliably decorated with light.

In addition, the back second drive motor 3222 that rotates the drive ring 3221 is provided on the outside of the drive ring 3221, and the inside of the fixed gear part 3220b (the inside of the through hole 3229a) can be widened, so that The display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be made easier to see, and the effect of the effect image can be more easily exhibited.

In addition, since the drive ring 3221 is provided on the outside of the fixed gear portion 3220b and the back second drive motor 3222 is provided on the outside of the drive ring 3221, the back second drive motor 3222 is provided at approximately the same position as the drive ring 3221 in the front and back direction. Since two drive motors 3222 can be provided, an increase in the thickness of the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be suppressed. Further, since the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are formed into a flat plate shape, the thickness of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. For these reasons, the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made thinner, so by relatively widening the space for arranging a plurality of rotating decorations 3210, the diameter of the rotating decorations 3210 can be made larger. It can be made to stand out from the player side, the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 can strongly attract the attention of the players, and other members can be provided in front and behind the plurality of rotating decorations 3210. By using other provided members to perform the effects, it is possible to present a more diverse range of effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a from the left side along the periphery is connected to the gate serving as the privilege granting part provided in the game area 5a. When the player passes through the section 2003 or is accepted into the general prize opening 2001, the second start opening 2004, and the big prize opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 as a bonus granting section, a predetermined privilege (for example, a regular lottery in which the player is advantageous) is awarded. results, special lottery results, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, etc.), the player is made to perform an operation to drive game balls B into a benefit awarding section such as the gate section 2003. You can play games.

In this game area 5a, an upstream space 2511 is provided above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 on the right side in the left-right direction above the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and on the downstream side of the upstream space 2511. Since there is a distribution passage group 2520 provided on the upstream side of the gate section 2003 in which game balls B circulate through different routes depending on the driving strength, the first distribution constituting the distribution passage group 2520 The probability that the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 on the downstream side differs depending on the passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522. Therefore, the player can drive the game ball B at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 with a driving force that causes the game ball B to enter the upstream space section 2511 and where the probability that the game ball B will pass through the gate section 2003 is high. The driving force of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the gaming area 5a with the driving force that causes the game ball B to enter the game ball B. It is possible to provide variety, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, it is possible to make the player enjoy the operation of driving the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the desired second distribution passage 2522. , it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in playing the game.

In addition, a blocking portion 1006 protrudes inward from the periphery of the gaming area 5a near the right end of the upstream space 2511, and an entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 is provided near the blocking portion 1006. Therefore, the game ball B is driven with such force that it contacts the stopper 1006 (for example, with a driving force above a certain level that causes the game ball B to circulate (roll) along the periphery of the game area 5a). Then, the game ball B that has come into contact with the blocking portion 1006 will enter the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521 near the blocking portion 1006 in the distribution passage group 2520 with a high probability. Therefore, when aiming at the first distribution passage 2521, the game ball B is hit with such force that it hits the abutment part 1006, and when aiming at the other second distribution passage 2522, the game ball B is hit with such force that it does not come into contact with the abutment part 1006. It is only necessary to hit the game ball B with the 0.0000 0.00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000001.

This reduces the probability that game balls B that have circulated through the first distribution passage 2521, which has an entrance near the blocking section 1006, will pass through the gate section 2003 on the downstream side, thereby increasing the chance of receiving benefits. Therefore, the player is required to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B does not enter the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. As a result, variations can be imparted to the driving operation of the game ball B, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and also encouraging the player to play the game aiming at the entrance of the remaining second distribution passage 2522. The driving operation of the ball B can be enjoyed, and a decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the distribution passage group 2520 is provided in the direction in which the game ball B is hit, the distribution passage group 2520 (the first distribution passage 2521 and the second The circulation passage 2522) can be reliably realized, and the pachinko machine 1 can have the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, since the upstream space 2511 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution passage group 2520, in order for the player to enter the game ball B into the entrance of the desired first distribution passage 2521 or second distribution passage 2522, it is necessary to It is necessary to drive the game ball B into the gaming area 5a with a driving force that allows it to enter the space 2511 and also to enter the desired first circulation passage 2521 or second circulation passage 2522. Therefore, the difficulty level of the driving operation of the game ball B can be further increased, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, their entrances are adjacent to each other. Since the entrance of the distribution passage into which the ball enters is likely to be different, it is possible to increase the difficulty level of the player's driving operation of the game ball B, and to make the player enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, thereby preventing a decrease in interest. It can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are consolidated to some extent, so that they can be placed in the gaming area 5a or in the center. The frame of the accessory 2500 can be made relatively wide, allowing players to enjoy the game within the game area 5a and the performance within the frame of the center accessory 2500, thereby suppressing a drop in interest. can.

In the above embodiment, the distribution passage group 2520 is composed of two distribution passages, the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are three distribution passages. It may also be configured with two distribution passages.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided onto the second starting port guide shelf 2423 with a high probability by contacting the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the game ball B that enters the attacker right passage 2422 may be guided to the attacker lower right passage 2426 with a high probability.

Further, in the above embodiment, the back second presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is shown to revolve in the same direction as the rotation direction of the plurality of rotating decorations 3210, but the invention is not limited to this. It may also revolve in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to their appearance positions, regardless of the presence or absence of the problem. The decoration image 3390 is displayed when executing the effect using the above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if there is no problem with them, the effect image without the decoration image 3390 may be displayed. , the decorative image 3390 may be displayed only when a problem occurs in them.

Further, in the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive method. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and since they are stepping motors, they may be driven using a 2-2 phase excitation method, and high torque can be generated.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are shown as stepping motors. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a DC motor with a large starting torque may be used.

In the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320 is used to rotate the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. , the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380, etc., are shown, but the drive motors are not limited to these, and may be a solenoid, a rotary solenoid, etc. .

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of a pachinko machine. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a door frame effect display device 152 and a door frame sub It includes a display section 185 and an effect display control section 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control section 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B, etc., and a launch control section 633b that controls the launch of the game balls B by rotating the handle 111.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that includes a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and RAM that temporarily stores data. MPU1310a, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit, a setting display 1310g for displaying set values and error display, and a display for displaying the number of game balls collected through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5. A base monitor 1310h is provided. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1310a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), etc. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in main control") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This nonvolatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code that is given a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. This ID code once assigned is stored in a non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to an incoherent content, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a as being affected by electrical noise. This is a reset circuit. The forced reset by such a built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control side power-on process described later. I will do it. In this case, since the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM will always occur as described later, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( clear). Note that even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a will not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633, so the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will remain activated.

The main control MPU 1310a also operates a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as a "main control built-in hardware It has a built-in random number circuit. This hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range from 0 as the minimum value to 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical value range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed, and the values within the predetermined numerical value range are extracted. When all the values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a jackpot determination random number. It is designed to be set as .

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from its various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that is

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and a second starting port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. Mouth sensor 2402, general winning hole sensor 2401 and general winning hole sensor 3001 that detect the game ball B accepted in the general winning hole 2001, gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate part 2003, and the big winning hole 2005. A big prize opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the first receiving port 2403, a first receiving port sensor 2404 that detects the gaming ball B that is received in the first receiving port 2007 after being detected by the special winning port sensor 2403, and a big winning port sensor 2404 that detects the gaming ball B accepted in the first receiving port 2007. A second reception port sensor 2405 that detects the game ball B received in the second reception port 2008 after being detected by the mouth sensor 2403, a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects illegal magnetism within the gaming area 5a, and a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects illegal magnetism within the gaming area 5a. Detection signals mainly come from a vibration sensor 3005 that detects illegal vibrations, an out-opening sensor 3032 that detects game balls B collected through an out-opening 1008 provided in a gaming area 5a sectioned on the game board 5, and the like. The signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the control input circuit.

Further, a detection signal from a setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. Further, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z provided on the payout control board 633 is also input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Note that the RWM clear button 633z is a RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310. It functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase the information stored in each predetermined area of It also functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching. Therefore, the signals from the RWM clear button 633z that are input to the main control board 1310 include a signal (RAM clear signal) that serves as a RAM clear switch to notify RAM clear, and a signal (RAM clear signal) that serves as an error release switch to notify that the error has been cleared. Although the main control board 1310 has a RAM clear signal and a setting value signal, which are important signals related to itself, While it monitors the input of the value setting change signal, it does not monitor the input of the error release signal, which is controlled by the payout control board 633 that is not related to itself.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame release switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (that is, via the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When input to the main control board 1310 (as is without going through a circuit), the signals are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Note that the respective detection signals from the first starting port sensor 2101 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through any other board, and are inputted directly to the main control board 1310 via the main control input circuit. and is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, general winning opening sensor 3001, general winning opening sensor 2401, big winning opening sensor 2403, first entrance sensor 2404, second entrance sensor 2405, magnetic sensor 2470, vibration sensor 3005, and out exit sensor 3032. The respective detection signals are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. ing.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the main control solenoid drive circuit to output the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid. 2414, through the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or output the respective drive signals to the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the status display, normal pattern display, or normal Send each drive signal to the reservation display, the first special symbol display, the first special reservation number display, the second special symbol display, the second special reservation number display, the round display, etc., and the other board. It can be output directly without any intervention. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (gaming information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information regarding the game (gaming information) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port. By outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power outage clear signal) can be output to the power outage monitoring circuit, and the game ball B can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a firing permission signal that conveys that the firing of the game ball B is permitted, a firing permission signal that conveys that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is outputted to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission for launch is set to launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, and launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic when the launch is not permitted. is set to Note that the logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is restored). Up to this point, the device is constructed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the firing permission logic.

In addition, in this embodiment, although non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first starting port sensor 2101, the second starting port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2506, and the big winning port sensor 2403, On the other hand, a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 2401 and the general winning hole sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and also frequently passes through the gate portion 2003. , and detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 2101, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently, so the game ball is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the big prize opening sensor 2403 as well. In addition, since a large amount of the game balls B fired into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is sectioned on the game board 5, the game ball B can also be detected by the out port sensor 3032. Occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the outlet sensor 3032 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning hole sensor 2401 and the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 2401 and the general winning hole sensor 3001. Incidentally, regardless of whether the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently or not, a proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long life may be used.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of game performance and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, although the detailed explanation will be given later, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "main control side (described as "capacitor"). This main control side capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during power cut-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is inputted to the main control MPU 1310a by a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated when the power is turned on. When this happens, it is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages become lower than the power failure warning voltage, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a launch solenoid 542 that performs launch control, and a ball feed solenoid 145 that performs ball feeding control. It includes a control section 633b, an error LED indicator that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, and an RWM clear button 633z that has a press operation section that serves multiple functions. The RWM clear button 633z is a RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM (main control built-in It functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase the information stored in each predetermined area of the RAM, and as an error release switch to release the error displayed on the error LED indicator. It also functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching values.

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch is the RAM clear determination period after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on processing described later). is limited to the period from the start of the process until the determination in step S14 in the same process is made.

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button is from the elapse of the RAM clear determination period to the setting switching effective period (the main control MPU 1310a determines the period from when the RAM clear determination period has elapsed to when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later). In the setting change process of step S37 in the process, the setting key inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is used to change the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the enter key. to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) until it is determined that the setting key cylinder has been rotated 60 degrees clockwise). There is.

The period in which the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error release switch is a valid period from the time when the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching validity period have elapsed. In addition, during the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching validity period, even if a signal indicating that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the payout control unit 633a (payout control MPU described later), the invalidation will not be performed. has been done.

Note that, as described above, the period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button is limited to the setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed. However, during this setting switching valid period, the main control MPU 1310a does not activate the setting key switch provided on the setting change board 1311 in the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed. Since the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of 1311a is used to continuously monitor the rotational position of the setting key cylinder, interrupt permission settings are required to allow the start of main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. (Step S52 in the power-on process on the main control side) cannot be performed, and the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112 in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, cannot be performed. In other words, the setting switching validity period is a period during which fraudulent activity cannot be detected.

During this setting switching valid period, that is, the period in which fraudulent activity cannot be detected, there is a risk that a fraudulent person may make some unauthorized changes to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when accessing the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the back cover 640 first covers the rear side of the game board 5, as described above. In order to secure a space that can be opened, the main body frame 4 must be opened wide (nearly 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, during the valid setting switching period, that is, the period during which fraudulent activity cannot be detected, the main body frame 4 is opened wide (approximately 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2, so the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 If any attempt is made to make any unauthorized alterations to the game hall, the fraudulent activity will become extremely conspicuous in the gaming hall, so such countermeasures against fraudulent activity can be taken. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing fraudulent acts.

[6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls regarding payouts on the payout control board 633 is a microcomputer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout control MPU as a processor. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input.

The payout control MPU includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in payout control") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, In addition to inputting a signal to the effect that the push operation part has been operated through the dispensing control I/O port, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and a signal indicating that the push operation part of Detection signals from a detection sensor 591 and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input. Note that a signal indicating that the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

Detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit. is input.

In addition, detection signals from the door frame release switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch that detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are outputted via the dispensing control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the control MPU.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 and the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit. is input. When the inside of the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B and the game balls B are no longer ejected from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower tray 202 side, this foul cover unit 150 remains in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates in this manner, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to inform the players, game hall attendants, etc. of this fact and urge them to relieve the lower tray 202 from being full.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of its predetermined output port, outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display, A command for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 is serially transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal board 558. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the games of the players by ascertaining the number of game balls B put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it will notify you that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "playing for balls" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, it notifies that the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate; When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and sent to the payout control MPU. is input. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B lent out, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal The information is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit; a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; The ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the gaming area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , generates a ball feeding reference pulse which is the firing reference pulse multiplied by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the handle unit 110, there is a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 111, and a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input as a CR connection signal to the firing control input circuit, and then to the firing timing control circuit. A firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys permission to fire the game ball B is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength with which the game ball B is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 111 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

The firing timing control circuit connects the CR unit to the CR unit connection terminal board based on the CR connection signal when firing condition 1 is established that the palm or fingers are touching the handle 111 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192. If the firing condition 2 that the game ball B is electrically connected is satisfied, and the firing condition 3 that the game ball B is allowed to fire based on the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B For example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

This firing solenoid drive circuit generates a driving current to launch the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a with a launch intensity commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 111, based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189. In response to the input, the signal is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, thereby controlling the game balls stored in the upper tray 130 of the door frame 3. One ball B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is transferred to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

Note that various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "payout control side (described as "capacitor"). With this payout control side capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The various information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM with built-in payout control is released when the power is turned on and a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the payout control MPU. Completely erased (cleared) from the control built-in RAM. A signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

Further, in the present embodiment, the firing control board 633 is provided with a firing control unit 633b that performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145, but the firing control unit 633b is provided on the power supply board 630. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. The signal may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that is not connected to the power supply board 630.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 111, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a door frame performance display based on control data from this peripheral control unit 1511. It includes an effect display control section 1512 that controls the drawing of the device 152 and the effect display device 1600.

[6-3a. Peripheral control section]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance, although detailed illustrations are omitted. The sound source IC includes a sound source IC that performs this, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects that the sound source IC refers to.

The peripheral control MPU has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the provided color LEDs, etc. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board via the panel driving board 1720 in the driving board unit 1700. The game board side drive data is transmitted to each decorative board of the game board 5, and is used to output drive signals to the drive motors that operate various presentation units provided on the game board 5. Sends data from the I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720, or drives the first lift drive motor 175b, second lift drive motor 182, etc. provided on the door frame 3. Door side drive data for outputting a signal, and door side light emitting data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. Control data (display) that indicates the screen to be transmitted to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port to the door frame display device 152 and the display device 1600 is used to transmit the configured door side drive light emission data from the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port to the door frame 3 side. In addition to sending a command) from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the production display control unit 1512, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC. do.

A plurality of rotating decorations 3210 of the back second presentation unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, an upper vertical ring decoration 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and a left horizontal ring decoration of the back third presentation unit 3300. Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting rotational positions, movement positions, etc. of the body 3351, the right lateral ring decoration body 3371, etc. are input to the peripheral control MPU via the panel drive board 1720.

Further, a detection signal from a press detection sensor 165 of a production operation section 160 in a door frame production device 150 provided in the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the production display control unit 1512 that indicates that the production display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and controls the production display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal. Monitoring operations.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and extracts sound information from the lower speaker 153a provided in the door frame 3, the lower front speaker 191, the upper speaker 241, etc. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects that match the performance are output. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191, and the upper speaker 241 of the door frame 3 are provided with an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or By sending a .1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (acoustic production) than before.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It is used in conjunction with WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

The display commands output from this peripheral control MPU to the effect display control section 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting and blinking commands, game board side lighting and blinking commands, movable body drive commands, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the panel drive board 1720 of the game board 5 have multiple serial numbers different from the display commands. This is performed using an input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

The panel drive board 1720 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting/blinking command to the LEDs (LED 121a, LED 122a, LED 138a, LED 153c, LED 159a, lattice decoration LED 195) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. , LED 213a, upper outer apex LED 224, upper outer valley LED 225, upper outer edge LED 231, lattice decoration LED 245, etc.), or the game board 5 is provided with a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting and blinking command. output to the LEDs on each decorative board.

Furthermore, the panel drive board 1720 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the first lift drive motor 175b and the second lift drive motor 182 provided in the door frame 3, and to each drive provided in the game board 5. Output to motor etc.

[6-3b. Production display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a door frame effect display device 152 and effect display. A VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that displays and controls the device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, and the image ROM that stores the data stored in the image ROM. It is equipped with an image RAM to which various data are transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the door frame effect display device 152. and controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Note that, if the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that fact. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, the display control ROM stores control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and the like. It stores a plurality of control data (display commands) and corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data. The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data is based on the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance, including the screen data drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data. stipulated.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged chronologically in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one starting from the first screen data and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and displays it on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. Further, when the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to notify that fact. Note that the VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and one line of drawing data held in this line buffer is drawn. This is a method in which data is output to the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM becomes impossible to ignore, and the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display This will affect the speed of drawing on the device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, to explain a "sprite", a "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600. For example, when various people (characters) are to be displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are arranged in the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device by setting the position where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as the "overlapping order of sprites"). 1600.

Note that the sprite is constructed by pasting together a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be expressed using one sprite character, and relatively large sprites such as people can be expressed using a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally x 3 vertically. can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using an even larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 perform main scanning, which sequentially sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels, from left to right when viewed from the front, and a main scan that sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels, and a main scan that sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels. It is driven by sub-scanning, which repeatedly performs main scanning in the direction of When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 perform main scanning to scan the front side of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. Each pixel for one line is output sequentially from left to right when viewed from above. When the output for one line is completed, the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, this next line Based on the drawing data for 1 line, pixels for one line are sequentially output as main scanning from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600.

[6-4. Mounting of SMD type electronic components]
Next, countermeasures for discontinued electronic components will be explained. First, due to the circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for boards that are treated as main boards such as the power supply board, main control board, and payout control board, lead type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface, which is the front side, and the back side is You need to solder on the solder side. However, as mentioned above, lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of gaming machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and integrated gaming machines, but other general electronics manufacturers are unable to achieve miniaturization. A surface mount type (so-called SMD type) is used. As a result, the number of lead-type electronic components produced may decrease, leading to the discontinuation of production. Therefore, it is possible to mount a lead-type electronic component, which can configure an SMD-type electronic component as a lead-type electronic component, on the mounting surface of a board that is treated as a main board.

However, when configured as a lead-type electronic component, the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component becomes larger than that of the lead-type electronic component, and a portion or plurality of the lead-type electronic components have protrusions. This may result in a distorted outer shape (shape). When a lead-type electronic component with such an external shape (shape) is mounted on the mounting surface of a board that is treated as a main board, it may be difficult to place it on the board due to the positional relationship with other electronic components. Therefore, it may be difficult to construct an SMD type electronic component as the above-mentioned lead type electronic component. Therefore, in addition to such lead-type electronic components, among the lead-type electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, there are limited cases where SMD-type electronic components are used as the main board. Mounting on the mounting surface may be permitted.

Here, an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115. Figure 112 is an enlarged view (a) of a part of the area where SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and (b) a view of this enlarged view from the right side of the main control board. FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board in which SMD-type electronic components, which replace lead-type electronic components, are concentrated in a predetermined area. FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram (b) showing the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of a miniaturized board with integrated electronic components of the same type, and FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram (b) showing the back surface ( FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the main control board box of the main control unit. Note that in FIGS. 112 and 114, various electronic components other than those necessary for explanation are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is an alternative that has the same function as a reed type Schmitt trigger inverter (DIP (Dual Inline Package) type). is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is one of the main circuits constituting the main control input circuit into which detection signals from the various sensors described above are input, and the main control board 1310 is If it is missing from the board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 always determines that the ball has not entered the game ball among the various sensors that notify the player that the game ball has entered the ball. Any information that indicates fraudulent activity, such as the following, is always determined to be fraudulent activity. Note that the main control board 1310 has a plurality of lead-type electronic components mounted thereon, such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs, and the like.

In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the main control board 1310 are painted solidly with green resist except for various land patterns. has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b), on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, there is an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as "Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30"). A lead-type high-frequency bypass capacitor MC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor MC30") capable of removing noise voltage generated by the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 itself is mounted near the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It has become so. Note that the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 and capacitor MC30 are omitted from FIG. 112(a) for ease of viewing the drawing.

In the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, six Schmitt trigger inverter circuits are integrated and housed in one SMD package. In this embodiment, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SOP (Small) having 14 pins.
(Hereinafter, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 may be referred to as "SOP14"). In the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, seven leads from two opposing sides of the SMD package body are bent toward the outside with a distance between the leads (so-called "lead pitch", in this embodiment, 1.27 mm). The surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to each lead is mounted on a rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 corresponding to each lead. (Mounting surface) A rectangular land pattern formed only on the mounting surface 1310x is soldered. The width of each lead is 0.43 mm, and the width of the rectangular land pattern is 0.76 mm, which is larger than the width of each lead (the length of the rectangular land pattern is 1.27 mm). It is. In this embodiment, the size of the SMD package body is 5.3 mm in width, 10.8 mm in length, and 1.5 mm in height. Including the length of the protruding leads, the width of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm.

Although the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in order to mount lead-type electronic components on the main control board 1310, the back surface of the main control board 1310 is used as the soldering surface. This will be described as "the back side (solder side) of the main control board 1310" (the same applies hereinafter).

The capacitor MC30 has two leads protruding from a main body having a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and protruding outward in parallel straight lines with a distance between the leads (so-called "lead pitch", in this embodiment, 5 mm). are formed on both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and rear surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310, passing through the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x and back surface (solder surface) 1310y corresponding to the two leads. Among the ring-shaped land patterns (also referred to as through holes, hereinafter the same), a ring-shaped land pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y. After the two leads are inserted toward the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the two leads and the main control board protrude from the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. A ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of 1310 is soldered. The diameter of the two leads is 0.5 mm, and the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 0.7 mm, which is larger than the diameter of the two leads (the outer diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 1.5 mm). 3mm).

Note that the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is grounded (GND) except for areas where wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various land patterns are formed. , is formed as a so-called solid earth (board ground), and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is also an area where wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various land patterns are formed. The area other than the ground (GND) is formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground). The solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are A plurality of through holes formed on both sides (front side (mounting side) and back side (solder side)) (holes (copper-plated They are electrically connected to each other through the holes (holes)), so that they are connected to the same ground (GND). The diameter of the through hole is 0.3 mm, which is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern. Note that the through hole has a solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and a solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. In addition to electrically connecting , to the same ground (GND), devices used to route various wiring patterns to both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310. There are also several.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 112(a), a white area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including direction specification) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed is silk-printed. It is printed as a solid line (or a solid black line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silkscreen in the lower left corner of the area MSLKMIC30. Specifically, in the area MSLKMIC30, the lead serving as the No. 1 terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is connected to the lower left side and the No. 7 terminal (ground) so that the longitudinal direction of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is the left-right direction in FIG. (GND) terminal) on the lower right side, the lead for terminal 8 on the upper right side, and the lead for terminal 14 (power supply terminal) on the upper left side. .

The rectangular land patterns corresponding to the leads, which are the 1st to 6th terminals and the 8th to 13th terminals of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, are electrically connected to each wiring pattern that transmits the corresponding control signals. The rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that becomes the No. 7 terminal (ground (GND) terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is connected to the solid earth (board ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. A rectangular land pattern corresponding to a lead that is electrically connected and becomes the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to a wiring pattern that supplies power.

The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols, e.g., "ABC") and product number (the number published in the catalog, e.g., "74XXYYZZ") are engraved on the surface of the package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. , or printed in a predetermined color (depending on the manufacturer). However, since the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SMD package called SOP14 and is small, the surface area of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is small.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, the main control board 1310 is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, so the main control board 1310 can be prevented from being illegally modified to obtain illegal game balls. The main control board box 1320 is sealed and housed in a main control board box 1320 consisting of a transparent cover body with a plurality of ventilation holes for heat dissipation and a transparent base body. This heat radiation vent can discharge the air inside the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

Then, when checking the product numbers (numbers published in the catalog) of various electronic components of the main control board 1310, the surface of the main control board 1310 ( The manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) and product number (number published in the catalog) are engraved or printed on the surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 package body when the mounting surface (mounting surface) side is viewed through the transparent cover body. is small and difficult to see.

Therefore, in this embodiment, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 near the area MSLKMIC30 in FIG. The part number of MIC30 (number published in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is printed on the package of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 so that it is easily visible compared to the size of the part number (number published in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body. It is printed in white (or black). Therefore, the product number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

In addition, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) together with the product number (the number published in the catalog). In this case, the silk printing is white (or black) so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Preferably, it is printed in Thereby, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a capacitor MC30 is arranged so as to be placed near a rectangular land pattern corresponding to a lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. An area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (there is no direction specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is printed as a silk screen with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30. At the upper right corner, a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen. Specifically, the area MSLKMC30 connects one lead to the upper side that is electrically connected to the wiring pattern that supplies power so that the two leads of the capacitor MC30 are in the vertical direction in FIG. 112(a). This is an instruction to insert the ring-shaped land pattern and the other lead into the lower ring-shaped land pattern that is paired with the upper ring-shaped land pattern.

The wiring pattern to which the upper ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected is also electrically connected to the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Further, the lower ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected to a solid ground (board ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Here, the advantages of mounting an SMD type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) of a board treated as a main board will be briefly explained. As mentioned above, SMD type electronic components can be made smaller than lead type electronic components, so the electronic component mounting density when SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board is can be extremely suppressed compared to the electronic component mounting density when lead-type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board. Therefore, when mounting an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the lead type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) area of the board on which the lead type electronic component is mounted, Since SMD type electronic components are small, it is possible to increase the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board on which the SMD type electronic components are mounted, and it is also possible to increase the size of the SMD type electronic components from lead type electronic components to SMD type electronic components. The area between the substituted components can also be increased (that is, the electronic component can be mounted in a manner in which there are many gaps on the surface (mounting surface) of the board between the substituted components). This allows SMD type electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board to be viewed from multiple directions, thereby preventing unauthorized tampering of the SMD type electronic components. It is possible to check the mounting state (soldering state) with electronic components, the state of various wiring patterns and various land patterns on SMD type electronic components. Therefore, the use of SMD type electronic components can contribute to ease of discovering unauthorized alteration.

In addition, it is possible to increase the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board on which SMD-type electronic components are mounted, and also to increase the area between components where lead-type electronic components are replaced with SMD-type electronic components. Therefore, for these areas (the surface of the board (mounting surface)), the part number (number published in the catalog) of the SMD type electronic component is engraved or stamped on the surface of the package body of the SMD type electronic component. It can be printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the printed product number (number published in the catalog). It is also possible to print the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) in white (or black) as well as silk screen printing. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the ease of recognition of SMD type electronic components.

Note that when an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the board, the distance between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board is extremely short (for example, Schmitt trigger In the inverter MIC30, the distance between the back surface of the main body and the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is 0.1 mm to 0.2 mm. There is a problem in that even if some kind of illegal circuit is formed in the gap with the mounting surface), it is difficult to discover such an illegal circuit.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the following configuration is adopted as a method for preventing any kind of illegal circuit from being formed in the gap between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board.

A configuration was adopted in which no wiring patterns for transmitting control signals were placed in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), the area on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30) We adopted a configuration in which no wiring patterns for transmitting control signals are placed at all in the area where the control signal passes through.

We adopted a configuration in which no wiring pattern for electrical connection to ground (GND) or wiring pattern for supplying power is placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component body. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30) A configuration was adopted in which no wiring pattern for electrically connecting to the ground (GND) or wiring pattern for supplying power is placed in the region (where the power passes through).

A configuration was adopted in which no through holes were placed in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), through holes MTH are arranged at the upper right and upper left of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and the front surface of the main control board 1310 corresponds to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. (In other words, the area passing through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30) has a configuration in which no through holes MTH are disposed at all. As described above, this through hole MTH is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 by a hole (copper plated hole) penetrating both sides (the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (soldering surface)). Therefore, it is possible to use the same ground (GND). In addition to this through hole MTH, a plurality of through holes MTH' (not shown) are also provided on the main control board 1310 in order to route various wiring patterns to both sides (the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (soldering surface)) of the main control board 1310. Although such a through hole MTH' also exists, it also passes through the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, it passes through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). A configuration was adopted in which no through-hole MTH' was placed in the area where the

A wiring pattern that electrically connects to one of the leads of the SMD type electronic component is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component. We adopted a configuration that does not allow the electronic components to be drawn out. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are connected to an area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. (In other words, it is not placed at all in the area passing through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30), but is placed from above or below the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

In order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one lead to the other among the leads of an SMD type electronic component, it is necessary to ) A configuration was adopted in which no wiring patterns for transmitting control signals were placed in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are connected to an area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. (In other words, it is not placed at all in the area passing through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30), but a configuration is adopted in which it is placed from above or below the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

Each lead of the SMD type electronic component is soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and the land pattern is electrically connected to the wiring pattern. A configuration was adopted in which the control signal cannot be extracted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. We adopted a configuration in which control signals cannot be extracted without going through each wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the controller. In other words, a configuration is adopted in which a control signal cannot be extracted from a portion different from each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

By adopting such a configuration, it is impossible to illegally create new circuits such as short circuits or disconnection circuits in the gap between the back of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. It can be difficult. In addition, since various wiring patterns to SMD type electronic components can be visually observed, fraudsters can be deterred from attempting to install fraudulent circuits on SMD type electronic components. I can do it. Therefore, unauthorized acts against SMD type electronic components can be prevented.

In addition, by not placing any wiring patterns for transmitting control signals in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to Control signals to SMD type electronic components are provided to prevent other unauthorized ICs (SMD type electronic components) from being mounted between the back surface of the body of the type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the corresponding board. It is possible to make it impossible to use a combination of the control signal and an unauthorized control signal to another IC in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component.

In addition, by not placing any wiring patterns for transmitting control signals in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to prevent other unauthorized ICs (SMD type electronic components). As for the type of electronic component, it is easy to arrange it between the back side of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back side of the main body of this SMD type electronic component, so that control signals can be easily routed. You can make it impossible to select things.

In addition, a wiring pattern electrically connected to one of the leads of the SMD type electronic component is formed in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component body. By not leading out the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to prevent unauthorized use of the control signal that transmits the wiring pattern led out to the outside.

In addition, by soldering each lead of an SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, each wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern can be connected. By not being able to extract control signals from different parts than the leads of SMD type electronic components, it is possible to prevent unauthorized use of control signals that transmit wiring patterns. can do.

In addition, in order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one lead to the other among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, the surface of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component By not placing any wiring patterns that transmit control signals in the area (mounting surface), each wiring pattern that is electrically connected to each lead of the SMD type electronic component can be easily connected from above or below the SMD type electronic component. By arranging the lead, it is possible to prevent an illegal circuit from being formed around the lead. Among the leads of SMD type electronic components, unused leads (also referred to as "vacant terminals") may be electrically connected to a wiring pattern that electrically connects to the ground (GND), or Or, when electrically connecting to a wiring pattern that supplies power, placing SMD type electronic components from above or below prevents the formation of illegal circuits around empty terminals. I can do it.

In addition, by not arranging any through holes in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to To prevent other unauthorized ICs (SMD type electronic components) from being mounted between the back surface and the corresponding board surface (mounting surface), control signals cannot be taken out through the through-holes. It is possible to prevent other ICs from being fixed (soldered) to the through-holes, and the through-holes can be used to pass control signals from the back side (soldering side) to the front side (mounting side) of the board. It can be made so that it cannot be used for removal.

In addition, by not placing any wiring pattern for electrical connection to the ground (GND) or wiring pattern for supplying power on the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, , another unauthorized IC (SMD type electronic component) is mounted between the back of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back of the SMD type electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the IC from becoming a driving source for other illegal ICs.

[6-4a. Product number visibility measures using SMD packaging]
Next, a configuration in which SMD type electronic components are collectively mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a board treated as a main board will be described. As described above, SMD type electronic components can be miniaturized, and by mounting them in a concentrated manner, the size of the board itself can also be miniaturized. Here, the main control board 1310 will be explained as the main board, and when the main control board 1310 is visually inspected while being housed in the main control board box 1320, the present invention takes measures to make the product number visible by using an SMD package. Another configuration (hereinafter referred to as "configuration for product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the second and third embodiments") will be described. Note that in FIGS. 113(a) and (b), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 112(a) and (b) (hereinafter referred to as "configuration of product number visibility measures using an SMD package according to the first embodiment") Components that perform the same functions as those shown in FIG.

[Comparison between the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the lead is attached to the surface (mounting surface) 1310x area of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmitt trigger inverter, which is a lead type electronic component, is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including direction designation) for placing the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the SMD type electronic component, is silk-printed with a solid white line (or black (solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen print in the lower left corner of the area MSLKMIC30.

In addition, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, there is information on the right side near the area MSLKMIC30. An area is provided in which the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (MSLKMIC30p) is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number published in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen to make it easier to see.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the second embodiment as a part number visibility measure, as shown in FIG. The surface of the main control board 1310' (mounting surface ) 1310x'. The external dimensions (vertical dimension, horizontal dimension, and thickness dimension) of this main control board 1310' are the same as the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the SMD package as a measure for product number visibility according to the first embodiment. .

The main control board 1310' has a center line that passes through the midpoints of its upper side and its lower side, and a surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' on the left side of this center line has various electronic components. and a component placement area 1310xa' for arranging various connectors, and the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' on the right side of this center line has a part number and a part number (published in the catalog). It is formed as a parts list area 1310xb', which is an information area written like a parts list of electronic parts, which is configured by arranging the numbers).

Specifically, the component placement area 1310xa' includes a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type main control MPU 1310a included in the lead type, various lead type connectors MCN1 to MCN4 (other connectors not shown), and a resistor MR0. ~MR4 (other multiple resistors not shown), capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 (other multiple capacitors not shown), diode D0 (other multiple diodes not shown), Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (other various types not shown) IC) is implemented. In the component placement area 1310xa', an area (not shown) indicating the positions (which may also include designation of orientation) where these various electronic components and various connectors are placed is silk-printed with solid white lines (or solid black lines). At the same time, corresponding part numbers are printed in white (or black) as silk printing near these various electronic components and various connectors. In addition, various types of connectors use lead-type connectors, but this is because when wiring is connected to the connector, the stress caused by this wiring (this stress is due to the wiring route until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is to prevent the connector from peeling off from the board due to the reaction force of the wiring acting on the connector.

In the parts list area 1310xb', a parts list of electronic components is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen print, which is configured by aligning part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog). The size of the part number and product number is larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the component placement area 1310xa'. is printed in white (or black). A delimiter ":" is placed between the part number and the product number (number published in the catalog), so that the part number and product number (number published in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . This delimiter allows the part number and the product number (number published in the catalog) to be distinguished and identified.

In addition, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (number published in the catalog). Further, in addition to describing information on such parts, precautions regarding the gaming machine may also be described. For example, a statement such as "The main control board is an important board for security purposes and should be handled with sufficient care" may be made for the purpose of calling attention to it.

In this way, the area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' can be divided into the component placement area 1310xa' and the component list area 1310xb'. It is possible to easily recognize various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the computer.

Note that instead of silk printing printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', a foil-cutting area and a foil-cutting area in the structure of the product number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment described later are used. A character may be adopted, or a resist cutout area using two coats of resist and a white resist cutout character using two coats of resist in the structure of the product number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment may be adopted. may be adopted.

[Comparison between the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the lead is attached to the surface (mounting surface) 1310x area of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmitt trigger inverter, which is a lead type electronic component, is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including direction designation) for placing the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the SMD type electronic component, is silk-printed with a solid white line (or black (solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen print in the lower left corner of the area MSLKMIC30.

In addition, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, there is information on the right side near the area MSLKMIC30. An area is provided in which the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (MSLKMIC30p) is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number published in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen to make it easier to see.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the third embodiment to improve the visibility of the part number, as shown in FIG. The surface of the main control board 1310' (mounting surface ) 1310x'. By consolidating SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced. The external dimensions (vertical dimension, horizontal dimension, and thickness dimension) of this main control board 1310' are among the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the structure of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Only the dimensions are half the length (vertical and thickness dimensions are the same).

Various electronic components and various connectors are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'. The arrangement of these various electronic components and various connectors are those arranged in the component arrangement area 1310xa' formed on the main control board 1310' in the configuration of the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above as a measure for product number visibility. (In other words, the areas (not shown) indicating the positions (which may also include specifying the orientation) of these various electronic components and various connectors are arranged in the same manner as the silk-screen printing in white (or ), and the corresponding part numbers near these various electronic components and various connectors are also printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the same arrangement. In addition, various types of connectors use lead-type connectors, but this is because when wiring is connected to the connector, the stress caused by this wiring (this stress is due to the wiring route until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is to prevent the connector from peeling off from the board due to the reaction force of the wiring acting on the connector.

On the back side (solder side) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', there is a parts list, which is an information area formed on the main control board 1310' in the structure of the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above to improve visibility of product numbers. A parts list of electronic components, which is configured by aligning part numbers printed in white (or black) as silk printing in area 1310xb' and product numbers (numbers published in catalogs), is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in area 1310xb'. , black). The size of the part number and product number (number published in the catalog) is compared to the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as a silk screen on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310'. It is printed in white (or black) as a large screen print (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger). A delimiter ":" is placed between the part number and the product number (number published in the catalog), so that the part number and product number (number published in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . This delimiter allows the part number and the product number (number published in the catalog) to be distinguished and identified. In addition, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (number published in the catalog). Further, in addition to describing information on such parts, precautions regarding the gaming machine, etc. may be described. For example, a statement such as "The main control board is an important board for security purposes and should be handled with sufficient care" may be made for the purpose of calling attention to it.

In addition, on the back side (solder side) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', each lead of the above-mentioned ZIP type main control MPU 1310a (indicated as part number "MIC1" in the figure) and lead type electronic components are installed. The leads of certain capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 and resistors MR0 to MR4 protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' and are soldered to the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310'. The main control board 1310' has a part number and part number (number published in the catalog) so as not to overlap (avoid) this part. The parts list area 1310xb' formed in the part list area 1310xb' is printed in white (or black) as silk printing.

In this way, the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' is used as an area for arranging components, and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' is used as a part number and part number (listed in the catalog). The front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' and the back surface of the main control board 1310' can be Since the role of the (solder surface) 1310y' can be differentiated, it is possible to easily recognize various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'.

In addition, by consolidating SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced. The number of ring-shaped land patterns required when mounting electronic components can be determined and reduced. As a result, various leads of lead-type electronic components protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', and the number of soldered parts is also reduced. The solder surface) 1310y' can be formed as a flat surface.

In addition, the various leads of lead-type electronic components that protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' are soldered, so if light from a fluorescent lamp or the like hits them, it will reflect and cause a glare. As mentioned above, various leads of lead-type electronic components protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', making it difficult to see the soldered parts, although this may have the disadvantage of making it difficult to visually recognize the attached parts. By reducing the number of soldered parts, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' can be formed as a flat surface. This eliminates the problem of making it difficult to visually recognize the parts list of electronic parts, which is configured by aligning the silk-printed part numbers and the part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog).

Note that instead of silk printing printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', a part number visibility measure using an SMD package according to the fifth embodiment described later is used. The foil-cut area and foil-cut letters in the structure may be adopted, or the resist-cut area and the two-coat resist in the structure of the product number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment may be adopted. White resist-cut characters using resist may also be used.

By the way, general electronics manufacturers use multilayer boards on which various wiring patterns can be formed on each layer. However, the main control boards and payout control boards used in gaming machines are two-layer boards ("double-sided boards") that have various wiring patterns formed on the front (mounting side) and back (solder side) of the board to increase security. ), and it is necessary to mount various electronic components only on the surface (mounting surface) of the board, regardless of whether they are lead type electronic components or SMD type electronic components. For example, in order to increase security, it is necessary to mount the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a included in the lead type on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and it is also necessary to mount lead type electronic components on the surface (mounting surface). For some devices, lead-type electronic components are mounted instead of SMD-type electronic components.

If SMD type electronic components and lead type electronic components are mounted together on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or dispensing control board, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or dispensing control board Compared to the case where only lead-type electronic components are mounted on the board, the number of leads of the lead-type electronic components protruding from the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board or the payout control board is reduced. As a result, it is possible to increase the area used as an area for forming various wiring patterns on the back side (solder side) of the main control board and payout control board, and also acquire the area used as an area used for other functions. I can do it.

Therefore, for example, various SMD type ICs and various SMD type connectors may be installed on the back side (solder side) of the main control board, although they will not be mounted on the main control board produced as a mass-produced machine, in the area where the area mentioned above has increased. A mounting land pattern etc. formation area 1310ya' (see FIG. 113(b)) can be provided in which various land patterns for mounting and pad patterns for extracting signals can be formed. In the main control board produced as a mass-produced machine, since SMD type electronic components are not mounted on the various land patterns and pad patterns in the mounting land pattern etc. forming area 1310ya', the various lands in the mounting land pattern etc forming area 1310ya' The pattern and pad pattern become unmounted patterns, and the mounting land pattern etc. forming area 1310ya' becomes an empty area.

When such an unmounted pattern is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, the area where the unmounted pattern is formed may cause damage to various electronic components and various connectors on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board. However, when such unmounted patterns are formed on the back side (solder side) of the main control board, the front side (solder side) of the main control board The entire area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board can be effectively used without being subject to restrictions on the arrangement of various electronic components and various connectors and the routing of various wiring patterns on the surface (mounting surface).

In addition, since such unmounted patterns are formed on the back side (solder side) of the main control board, they cannot be seen from the front side (mounting side) of the main control board, making it possible to hide the existence of the unmounted patterns. , which is preferable in terms of security.

It should be noted that a part of such unmounted patterns may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board if necessary. For example, it may be easier to connect the connector (SMD type connector) to the wiring if it is placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board.

Moreover, a part of such unmounted patterns may be formed as a lead-type electronic component or a lead-type connector according to convenience. For example, there may be cases where soldering strength is required, such as a connector that is connected and disconnected many times.

Next, when visually inspecting the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, the manufacturer name (abbreviation and symbol) is Other configurations of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as "fourth to sixth embodiments") that take measures against the visibility of product numbers using SMD packages, where product numbers (including numbers published in catalogs) are small and difficult to see. A description will be given of the configuration of measures to improve the visibility of product numbers using such SMD packages. Note that in FIGS. 114(a) to (c), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 112(a) and (b) (hereinafter referred to as "configuration of product number visibility measures using an SMD package according to the first embodiment") Components that perform the same functions as those shown in Figure 1) are designated with the same reference numerals.

[Comparison between the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the position (orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged. ) is printed as a solid white line (or a solid black line) as a silkscreen, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed on the lower left near this area MSLKMIC30. It is printed in white (or black).

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for visibility of the product number, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, there is information on the right side near the area MSLKMIC30. An area is provided in which the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (MSLKMIC30p) is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number published in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen to make it easier to see.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for the visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the No. 14 terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. ), the area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (there is no direction specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is printed as a silk screen so that the capacitor MC30 is placed near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen in the upper right corner near this area MSLKMC30. .

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment to improve the visibility of the part number, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 further includes a main control board as shown in FIG. At a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310, an area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including direction specification) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed is silk-printed with a white chain line. (or a black chain line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen print on the upper left near this region MSLKMIC30'. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because multiple electronic components of various types are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic component. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part number can be printed in a larger size.

Furthermore, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. In place of the part number MSLKMIC30p, this part number MSLKMIC30p provides an information area on the back side (solder side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 near and below the area MSLKMIC30', and in this information area, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is installed. It is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the product number stamped or printed on the surface of the package body (the number published in the catalog). Therefore, the product number (the number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be visually recognized with certainty.

The product number MSLKMIC30p may be the same size as the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for visibility of the product number, or may be larger. It's okay. This is because multiple electronic components of various types are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number MSLKMIC30p and place it near the corresponding electronic components when printing. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the product number MSLKMIC30p can be printed in a larger size.

In addition, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) together with the product number (the number published in the catalog). In this case, the silk printing is white (or black) so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Preferably, it is printed in Thereby, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

In addition, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. An area MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (no orientation is specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line) at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30. At the same time, a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen on the upper left near this area MSLKMC30'. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so the size of the part number is It is necessary to make the part number smaller and place it near the corresponding electronic component and print it, but since no electronic component is mounted on the back side (solder side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is necessary to increase the size of the part number. This is because it can be printed.

[Comparison between the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the position (orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged. ) is printed as a solid white line (or a solid black line) as a silkscreen, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed on the lower left near this area MSLKMIC30. It is printed in white (or black).

In addition, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, there is information on the right side near the area MSLKMIC30. An area is provided in which the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (MSLKMIC30p) is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number published in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it is easier to see than the original.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for the visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the No. 14 terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. ), the area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (there is no direction specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is printed as a silk screen so that the capacitor MC30 is placed near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen in the upper right corner near this area MSLKMC30. .

On the other hand, in the structure of the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment that takes part number visibility measures, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 further includes a main At a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310, an area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including direction specification) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed is indicated by a chain line as a foil-cutting area. At the same time, a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30' and on the upper left side as a foil-cut letter.

The foil removal area is a layer where various wiring patterns are formed (copper plane), except for wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various land patterns. This is the area that is formed by creating a copper foil and removing the surrounding copper foil. In the region MSLKMIC30' formed as the foil-cut region, a cutout portion 1310yMIC30 is formed in a part of the left side in FIG. 114(b). As a result, the area MSLKMIC30' becomes a katakana U-shape, and the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is connected to the U-shaped area MSLKMIC30 through the notch 1310yMIC30. ' can be electrically connected to the inner region of '. This is because the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so the ground (GND) is connected to the back surface (solder surface) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 corresponding to the mounting area. This is because by securing as much of the area as possible, it is possible to prevent the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from malfunctioning due to noise (make it resistant to noise).

Foil punched characters are formed by creating characters using a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and then punching out the surrounding copper foil. The part number formed as a foil-cut character is larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because multiple electronic components of various types are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic component. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part number can be increased in size and formed as a foil-cut character.

Furthermore, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. In place of the part number MSLKMIC30p, this part number MSLKMIC30p provides an information area on the back side (solder side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 near and below the area MSLKMIC30', and in this information area, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is installed. The letters are formed as foil-cut letters so that they are easy to see compared to the size of the product number stamped or printed on the surface of the package body (the number published in the catalog). Foil punched characters are formed by creating characters using a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and then punching out the surrounding copper foil. Therefore, the product number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

The product number MSLKMIC30p formed as a foil-cut character is the same size as the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a part number visibility measure. It can be large, or it can be large. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is It is necessary to make the product smaller and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic components, but since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the part number MSLKMIC30p must be increased. This is because it can be formed as a foil-cut character.

In addition, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as foil-cut characters along with the product number (the number published in the catalog). In this case, the size of the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 must be more easily recognized than the size of the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols). is preferred. Thereby, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

In addition, in the structure of the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment as a part number visibility measure, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. An area MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (no direction is specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is formed with a chain line as a foil-cut area at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30. A part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as foil-cut letters near the upper left corner of the figure. The foil removal area is a layer where various wiring patterns are formed (copper plane), except for wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various land patterns. This is the area that is formed by creating a copper foil and removing the surrounding copper foil. Foil punched characters are formed by creating characters using a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and then punching out the surrounding copper foil. The part number formed as a foil-cut character is larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because multiple electronic components of various types are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic component. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part number can be increased in size and formed as a foil-cut character.

Note that the wiring patterns that form the foil-cutting areas and the foil-cutting characters are electrically insulated from various electronic components, as well as wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various other electronic components. It is formed to be electrically insulated from the land pattern and the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

[Comparison between the structure of the product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the structure of the product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment]
In the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for the visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the position (orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged. ) is silk-printed as a white solid line (or black solid line), and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed near this area MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left. It is printed in white (or black).

In addition, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, there is information on the right side near the area MSLKMIC30. An area is provided in which the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (MSLKMIC30p) is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number published in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen to make it easier to see.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for the visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the No. 14 terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. ), the area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (there is no direction specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is printed as a silk screen so that the capacitor MC30 is placed near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen in the upper right corner near this area MSLKMC30. .

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for visibility of the product number, green is used as a resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are used. ) The entire area is painted solid with green resist except for various land patterns.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment as a measure for the visibility of the part number, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. At a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310, an area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including direction specification) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed is printed in two coats of white. A white resist using resist is formed by a chain line as a region to be removed, and near this region MSLKMIC30' and in the upper left corner, there is a part number corresponding to Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a white resist using double-coated white resist. It is formed as a cutout character.

Furthermore, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Instead of the product number MSLKMIC30p, this product number is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 near and below the area MSLKMIC30'. It is formed as a white resist-cut character using two coats of white resist so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the number listed in the catalog.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment as a part number visibility measure, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, there is also printed information on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The area MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) corresponds to the area MSLKMC30 where the capacitor MC30 is placed is a white resist removal area using twice-coated white resist. In addition, near this region MSLKMC30' and in the upper left corner, a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a white resist cut-out character using double-coated white resist.

Specifically, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is entirely covered with white resist as the first of two coats of white resist (that is, the second coat of white resist is coated with white resist). For the first time, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is completely coated with white resist except for various land patterns). Then, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is applied as the second coat of white resist at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. , an area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including direction designation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed is masked as a white resist removal area in the form of a chain line, and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is located near this area MSLKMIC30' and on the upper left. The corresponding part number is masked as a white resist-cut character, and an information area is provided below and near this area MSLKMIC30', and within this information area, the part number MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is masked as a white resist-cut character. An area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (no orientation is specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30. ' is masked as a white resist removed area in the form of a chain line, and a part number corresponding to capacitor MC30 is masked as white resist removed characters in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30' and on the upper left.

In this masked state, the entire back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, except for various land patterns, is covered with white resist by solid coating. In other words, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment to improve visibility of the product number, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is painted solidly with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is painted solid with green resist except for various land patterns.

As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, but the first layer of white resist covers the whole, and the second layer of white resist By covering the entire area except for the masked area with the resist, the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including direction specification) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed is white. The part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a resist cutout area by a chain line, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a white resist cutout character, and the part number is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number published in the catalog). MSLKMIC30p is formed as a white resist cutout character, an area MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (no direction is specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is formed with a chain line, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed. Formed as white resist-cut characters. Therefore, the product number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

When the part number corresponding to Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as white resist-cut characters, it is formed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic component. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part number can be increased in size and formed as white resist-cut characters.

When forming the part number MSLKMIC30p as a white resist-cut character, the size of the part number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. It may be the same or larger. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is It is necessary to make the part number MSLKMIC30p smaller and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic components, but because no electronic components are mounted on the back side (solder side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the part number MSLKMIC30p is increased. This is because the characters can be formed as white resist-cut characters.

In addition, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as white resist-cut characters along with the product number (number published in the catalog). In this case, the name is formed as white resist-cut characters so that it is easily recognizable compared to the size of the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is preferable. Thereby, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

When the part number corresponding to capacitor MC30 is formed as white resist-cut characters, it is printed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic component. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part number can be increased in size and formed as white resist-cut characters.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment as a measure for the visibility of the product number, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is painted solidly with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is painted solidly with green resist except for various land patterns, but the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is also painted with white resist with the exception of various land patterns. It may be configured so that the area is filled with solid color except for the pattern. In this case, an area indicating the position (which may also include specifying the orientation) of various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is silk-printed. The surface of the main control board 1310 is printed with dark solid lines in dark green, black, gray, etc., and the part numbers corresponding to various electronic components are silk-printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Printed as dark text. With this configuration, the front side (mounting side) and back side (soldering side) of other boards are painted solidly with green resist, except for various land patterns, making it easy to use for these other boards. The control board 1310 can be given a feature that makes it stand out. Also, among the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (in addition to this product number, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) is also written. ) may also be printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as silk printing.

In addition to configuring the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 to be solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns, the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is It may be configured to be printed as silk printing using a two-coat resist of different colors in which the first (base) and second coats are of different colors. For the first time (base), the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is silk-printed in white, excluding the various land patterns, and then the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is printed. The main control board 1310 is installed a second time while masking the area indicating the placement position (which may also include designation of orientation) of the various electronic components to be mounted and the part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components. The entire surface (mounting surface) may be silk-screen printed in any color among black, blue, yellow, and red, except for various land patterns. Even with this configuration, the front side (mounting side) and back side (soldering side) of other boards are painted solid with green resist, except for various land patterns, so it is difficult to distinguish between these other boards. The control board 1310 can be given a feature that makes it stand out. In addition, it is possible to visually recognize areas indicating positions (which may include designation of orientation) of various electronic components and part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment as a measure for product number visibility, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is painted solidly with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is painted solidly with green resist except for various land patterns, but the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is also painted with white resist with the exception of various land patterns. It may be configured so that the area is filled with solid color except for the pattern. In this case, an area indicating the position (which may also include specifying the orientation) of various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is marked on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. A solid line is formed as a white resist-cut area, and part numbers corresponding to various electronic components are formed as white resist-cut characters on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Also, among the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number (in addition to this product number, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols)) of the SMD type electronic component is also They may be formed as white resist-cut characters on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310.

[6-4b. Measures to prevent modification of SMD type electronic components]
Next, a miniaturized electronic component called an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and the fraudulent electronic component is replaced with a fraudulent electronic component to obtain fraudulent game balls. Explain the points to prevent the act.

As mentioned above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an SMD type electronic component mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, has an SMD package body size of 5.3 mm in width and 5.3 mm in length. has a width of 10.8 mm, a height of 1.5 mm, and a width of 7.8 mm, including the length of the leads protruding from the two sides of the SMD package body.

Since the main control board 1310 is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, it is necessary to prevent the main control board 1310 from being illegally modified to obtain illegal game balls. The main control board box 1320 is sealed and housed in a main control board box 1320 that includes a transparent cover body in which a plurality of pores are formed and a transparent base body. In the main control board box 1320, as shown in FIG. 115, a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302 are caulked with a one-way screw or the like of a caulking portion 1303. The caulking portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and includes a plurality of caulking portions 1303. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 using a one-way screw of the caulking part 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then the main control board box 1320 can be opened. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

However, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 was removed from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire on the main control board box 1320, and the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 was illegally removed from the main control board box 1320. If the electronic parts are replaced with other electronic parts, there is a risk that the person who makes such unauthorized changes may obtain illegal game balls.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z having an inner diameter smaller than the size of the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (2 mm in this embodiment) are formed in a transparent cover body 1301. A configuration was adopted. As a result, even if the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire attached to the main control board box 1320, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 Trigger inverter MIC30 cannot be taken out from main control board box 1320 via ventilation hole 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from being replaced with an unauthorized electronic component.

Further, as described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is one of the main circuits forming the main control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors are input, and is removed from the main control board 1310 by some unauthorized means. Then, among the various sensors, the main control MPU 1310a always determines that the ball has not entered the game ball with respect to the sensor that indicates that the game ball has entered the ball, and always determines that the sensor that indicates fraudulent activity such as the approach of a magnet or unauthorized vibration is always detected. It is now possible to determine if fraudulent activity is occurring. As a result, if the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and if the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is missing, a person who makes unauthorized changes will be given a non-entering status. By maintaining this state, illegal game balls will not be obtained, and by notifying the game card that unauthorized changes have been made, the game card (hole) can be played. You can also inform staff such as hall clerks. In addition, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that an unauthorized act is always being carried out with respect to the various sensors that notify unauthorized acts such as the approach of a magnet or unauthorized vibration, the main control MPU 1310a sends a firing permission signal as described above. The logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch disallowed logic) to control the game ball so that it cannot be launched towards the game area 5a, so if unauthorized modification is performed, the game will be stopped. It becomes impossible to do anything at all.

In the above-described embodiment, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted as an SMD type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, but as other SMD type electronic components, For example, when a resistor is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, this SMD type resistor is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and passes through the ventilation hole 1301z to the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to make the inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z smaller than the size of the SMD type resistor so that it does not protrude from the inside to the outside.

Since such an SMD type resistor is small, even if it peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it can be visually confirmed whether it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. It may be difficult to distinguish between In addition, when the SMD type resistor that has peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 jumps out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation hole 1301z, the inside lower side of the main control board box 1320 Since there is no trace of the SMD type resistor that has peeled off, it becomes increasingly difficult to visually determine whether or not it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, if, for example, a JIS standard 1/8 watt 2012 type is adopted as the SMD type resistor, the 2012 type has a length dimension of 2.0 mm and a width dimension of 1.2 mm. With such a small SMD type resistor, even if a problem occurs in which the main control board 1310 peels off from the surface (mounting surface) due to the main control board 1310 being bent, it will not be able to be removed from the inside of the main control board box 1320. To prevent it from protruding outside, the inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z is smaller than the smaller of the length and width of the small SMD type resistor (in this case, the width is 1.2 mm). (here, for example, 1.0 mm).

As a result, even if the small SMD type resistor peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is reliably prevented from jumping out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation hole 1301z. Therefore, you can get an opportunity to visually check this small SMD type resistor that has fallen off inside the main control board box 1320, and if you shake the main control board box 1320 vertically or horizontally, you can see this small SMD type resistor. When the small SMD type resistor that has fallen off collides with the inner wall of the main control board box 1320 or the main control board 1310, a sound is generated, and this sound provides an opportunity to recognize the small SMD type resistor that has fallen off. Obtainable. In addition to this small SMD type resistor, if electronic components such as lead type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are replaced with electronic components such as SMD type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, The inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z is set to be smaller than the smallest dimension among these dimensions.

In this way, even if a small SMD type electronic component peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is ensured that it will jump out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation hole 1301z. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of discovering a problem in which an SMD type electronic component peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 due to the deflection of the main control board 1310.

Note that in the above-described embodiments (including the configuration of the SMD package as a measure for visibility of product numbers according to the first to sixth embodiments), SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. As described above, SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of boards treated as main boards such as the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633.

[6-4c. Test connector]
The pachinko machine 1 is tested by a specific testing agency, and cannot be shipped to game halls unless it is approved by this specific testing agency. The main control board 1310 is provided with a test connector 1310k for taking out various signals related to the game. This test connector 1310k is an SMD type electronic component. The test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged vertically parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the main control board). , when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific test institute, is usually mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and is also mounted on a transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k. A test harness cover body side opening 1301k is formed for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k, whereas the main control board 1310 is formed when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to game halls. In addition, the test harness cover body side opening 1301k is not formed in the transparent cover body 1301. Therefore, in the main control board 1310 produced as a mass-produced machine, the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted is formed as an empty area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific test institute, the test connector 1310k is placed in the mounting land pattern etc. forming area 1310ya on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310. (See FIG. 113(b)), and a test harness base body side opening 1302k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is provided in the transparent base body 1302 facing the test connector 1310k. A configuration was adopted to form the structure. This allows the surface of the main control board 1310 to Since the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted on the (mounting surface) is not formed as an empty area, other SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. . Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 can be increased.

Furthermore, with this configuration, in preparation for starting a test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific testing institution, a test operator first removes the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5, and then Then, the test harness electrically connected to the test equipment installed at a specific test institution is connected to the main control board through the test harness base body side opening 1302k formed in the transparent base body 1302. It is electrically connected to a test connector 1310k mounted in a mounting land pattern etc. formation area 1310ya' on the back surface (solder surface) of 1310. Next, the test operator attaches the main control board box 1320 to the board holder 1200. In this state, the test harness can be held (held) between the transparent base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 and the board holder 1200, so that it can be moved toward the test connector 1310k. By applying a load in the direction in which the test harness is pushed in, the electrical connection between the test connector 1310k and the test harness becomes unstable due to vibrations caused by the movable body operated by various electrical drive sources provided in the pachinko machine 1. In addition, it is possible to prevent the test harness from which various important signals related to the game are taken out during testing of the pachinko machine 1 from being twisted and disconnected.

In this embodiment, the test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (in which each pin of the connector is arranged vertically parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the main control board. However, we mainly use right-angle SMD type connectors (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the main control board). It is mounted on the back side (solder side) of the control board near any one of the left side, bottom side, right side, and top side, and the side wall of the transparent cover body 1301 (transparent cover body 1301 A configuration in which a test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed on the left side wall, lower wall, right side wall, and upper side wall (the side wall facing the test connector 1310k). May be adopted. Even with this configuration, the main Since the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310 is not formed as an empty area, it is possible to mount other SMD type electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Can be implemented. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 can be increased. In addition, in preparation for starting a test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific test institution, the test operator can perform a specific test without first removing the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. The test harness electrically connected to the test equipment installed in the engine is attached to the back side (solder side) of the main control board through the test harness cover body side opening 1301k formed in the transparent cover body 1301. It can be electrically connected to the test connector 1310k to be mounted.

Incidentally, gaming machines have been proposed in the past in which a gaming control device (gaming control board) is provided with a test firing test terminal (testing connector) to which a cable for transmitting gaming information to a testing device at a specific testing institution is connected. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-128621 (paragraph [0054] and FIG. 6)). By the way, in the game machine described in this document, a test connector is mounted on the surface of the game control board when it is tested by a specific testing institution, whereas when it is used in a game hall, a test connector is mounted on the surface of the game control board. Since the test connector is not mounted on the surface of the game control board, leaving a vacant area, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of the game control board cannot be increased due to this vacant area.

Furthermore, gaming machines in which surface-mounted electronic components are mounted on a board have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). Incidentally, the surface mount type electronic components in the game machines described in this document may have an identifier such as a product number that corresponds to the surface mount type electronic component, but the size of the surface mount type electronic component may vary. There was a problem in that the size of the identifier was small and it was difficult to visually recognize the identifier.

Furthermore, gaming machines in which surface-mounted electronic components are mounted on a board have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface mount type electronic components in the game machine described in this document are mounted on the game control board that can control the progress of the game, the surface mount type electronic components are mounted by some illegal means. There was a fear that illegal game balls could be obtained by peeling them off from the game control board and replacing them with illegal electronic parts.

In addition, gaming machines have been proposed in the past that are equipped with a tact switch or the like on the board that allows you to operate the press operation part and feel the switch turn on or off with a click feeling when operating (for example, Publication No. 2017-023427 (paragraph [0071] and FIG. 70)). By the way, the electronic components such as tactile switches described in this document are of the lead type, in which each lead is inserted into a through hole provided in the board from the front side of the board to the back side, and is soldered on the back side of the board. It is an electronic component. When such a lead-type electronic component is mounted on a board such as a game control board that controls the progress of a game, if the board flexes due to the operation of the lead-type electronic component, this deflection causes the board to There was a risk that the soldered parts of other electronic components mounted on the device would peel off, causing electrical problems.

Furthermore, gaming machines in which various control boards are disposed at predetermined positions on the back of the gaming board have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-128621 (paragraphs [0032] to [0034], and FIG. 3)). By the way, the game control board that controls the progress of the game is an important board that determines whether or not to give a profit to the player, so it is housed in a board case with a sealed structure to prevent fraudulent activities such as unauthorized modification. Prevention measures are required.

Furthermore, gaming machines in which surface-mounted components are mounted on a board have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, in the case where the surface mount components in the game machine described in this document are mounted on a game control board that can control the progress of the game, within the area of the surface of the game control board on which the surface mount components are mounted. If the wiring pattern is routed around the surface mount type electronic component, the distance between the back side of the surface mount component and the front surface of the game control board is small, so even if this wiring pattern is modified by some illegal means, it will be difficult to see, and the surface mount type electronic component A problem arises in that it is not possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, gaming machines have been proposed in the past, in which a main control board for controlling games is housed in a case and placed on the back side (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-214975 (paragraph [0030], [0031] and FIG. 2).By the way, as in the gaming machine described in this document, the main control board is an important component that controls the game, so it is housed in a case and sealed as a security measure. It is placed on the back side, and is required to improve security for important items.

[6-5. [Measures against electromagnetic noise that enters through the metal casing of the setting key switch]
Next, countermeasures against electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the metal casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a diagram (a) showing the front surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, and a diagram (b) showing the back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311, in which the main control board box 1320 is connected to the game board 5. It is a figure (c) which shows a lower part of the left side view of the game board 5 in the state attached to it.

As described above, the setting key switch 1311a has a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing that houses a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated. As described above, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. As described above, the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is arranged approximately flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder in which the insertion port for inserting the setting key is provided. As mentioned above, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the cylindrical (or rectangular) casing made of aluminum is arranged almost flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. ing.

As described above, the setting key switch 1311a has a circuit that can output (output) as a signal whether it is in an ON state or an OFF state. The signal can be taken out (output) from a pair of opposing lead terminals that are provided inside the cylinder and protrude from the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. Further, from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a, as described above, a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder and a 90 degree rotation angle are connected. A pair of opposing mounting plate pieces are formed which have a predetermined length and project a predetermined length.

The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted has a surface (mounting surface) and a back surface (solder surface) in the vertical and horizontal directions of the setting change board 1311, as shown in FIGS. 116(a) and (b). A pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protrudes from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a so that the setting key switch 1311a is arranged at the center point where the center lines of the setting key switch 1311a intersect. A pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long elongated hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the setting change board 1311 can be inserted are formed on the center line in the left and right direction of the setting change board 1311. A pair of opposing through holes SLTH1, SLTH2 into which a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted are rotated 90 degrees with a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1, SLH2. It is formed on the vertical center line of the setting change board 1311.

The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted has connector connections (inter-board connections) with the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 71 on its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface). Three through-holes SSTH1, SSTH2, and SSTH3 are formed through which various pin terminals (first to third pin terminals) of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 can be inserted.

Among these three through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, and SSTH3, the upper through hole SSTH1, into which the first pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted, has a pair of through holes protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. A wiring pattern SPTN1 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the upper through hole SLTH1 of a pair of opposing through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 through which opposing lead terminals can be inserted. A pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted through the lower through hole SSTH3 through which the third pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted. A wiring pattern SPTN2 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the lower through hole SLTH2 of the pair of opposing through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2, and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 The middle through-hole SSTH2 into which the second pin terminal is inserted is electrically connected to solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311.

On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, a copper plane surrounds the entire long through holes SLH1, SLH2 for the setting key switch 1311a and the through holes SLTH1, SLTH2 for the setting key switch 1311a, and also includes a copper plane. A foil-cutting area SINSx is formed having a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction. With this foil removal area SINSx, the long through holes SLH1, SLH2 and the through holes SLTH1, SLTH2 are electrically connected to the solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311. It is insulated. Note that on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, there are foil holes formed by cutting out the copper foil in the copper plane, except around the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 for the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A foil removed area is also formed, and this area is electrically insulated from the solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311. It becomes.

On the back side (solder side) of the setting change board 1311, there is a long side in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 at a position corresponding to the foil cutout area SINSx formed on the front surface (mounting side) of the setting change board 1311 in the copper plane. A foil-cutting area SINSy is formed by cutting out the copper foil, which has a rectangular shape and further excludes the periphery of the above-mentioned wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2. This foil removal area SINSy is formed along the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2 to the periphery of the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 for the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. This foil removal area SINSy allows long through holes SLH1, SLH2, through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, wiring patterns SPTN1, SPTN2, and through holes SSTH1, SSTH3 to be formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311. It is electrically insulated from the solid earth (board ground) formed on the board.

Note that through holes STH are formed at the four corners of the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311, respectively. These four through holes STH connect a solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311 and a solid earth (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311. ) and are electrically connected to form the same ground (GND).

The entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311 are solidly coated with a resist of a predetermined color so as to cover the copper plane, except for the various through holes described above. On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, on the resist of the predetermined color, an area SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is placed is silk-printed in a color different from the predetermined color of the resist. In addition to being printed as a solid line, an area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is placed is silk-printed as an area SSLKSW1 in a color different from the predetermined color of the resist and indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is placed. Printed as a solid line of the same color. The size of the area SSLKSW1 is formed to be one size larger than the external shape of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is arranged in the area SSLKSW1 and mounted (soldered on the back side (solder side) of the setting change board 1311). ), the boundary line (solid line of the circular shape) of the area SSLKSW1 is arranged outside the outline of the setting key switch 1311a. In other words, even if the setting key switch 1311a is installed, the setting key switch 1311a prevents the boundaries (solid lines of circular shapes) of the area SSLKSW1 from overlapping. Regarding the area SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is placed, similarly to the area SSLKSW1, even if this connector SMCN is mounted, the boundary line (U-shaped solid line) of the area SSLKCN1 does not overlap due to the connector SMCN. It looks like this.

In the area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is placed, a reference mark SSTD indicating the rotational position (initial position) of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch of the setting key switch 1311a is in the OFF state is printed. ing. This reference mark SSTD prevents the manufacturer's worker from turning the setting key switch 1311a upside down (incorrectly) and soldering it when mounting the setting key switch 1311a on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311. I have to. If this reference mark SSTD is not printed, for example, if the setting key switch 1311a is soldered upside down (by mistake), the setting key switch 1311a will be in an ON state and OFF state. When extracting as a signal which state the setting key switch 1311a is in, the content of the signal is reversed between the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is ON and the state in which it is OFF.

Here, the reason why the foil-cut regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 are formed in the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 will be explained. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a has a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing that houses a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated. As described above, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. As described above, the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is arranged approximately flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder in which the insertion port for inserting the setting key is provided. As mentioned above, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the cylindrical (or rectangular) casing made of aluminum is arranged almost flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. ing. In addition, when the setting key cylinder is housed in the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) case, as described above, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) case and the setting key cylinder are It is electrically connected. In other words, the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or the setting key cylinder, which can serve as a member for electromagnetic noise to enter the setting change board 1311, is exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. It becomes.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by forming the foil-cut areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 in the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311, the metal of the setting key switch 1311a is A pair of opposing mounting plates having a long elongated hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 into which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of a cylindrical (or rectangular) casing made of The long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 can be electrically insulated from the solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311. There is. In other words, in this embodiment, the board ground of the setting change board 1311 (main control board 1310) is not exposed through the setting key switch 1311a. As a result, when the pair of opposing mounting plates protruding from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and soldered, Even if electromagnetic noise enters from the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or setting key cylinder, this electromagnetic noise will be transmitted to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311. By preventing the foil from entering the solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311 through the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy formed in the metal damped by the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder itself. That is, in this embodiment, electromagnetic wave noise from the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or the setting key cylinder is prevented from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311 by the foil-cut areas SINSx, SINSy. can do. As a result, in this embodiment, since it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise from entering from the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder on the setting change board 1311 side, the electromagnetic wave noise It is possible to reliably prevent the intrusion of It does not cause any fluctuation to the line. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

Note that by filling the space between the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder with non-conductive resin (insulating resin), the setting key cylinder can be replaced with a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) ), the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing and the setting key cylinder are not electrically connected and are insulated. good. Even with this configuration, even if electromagnetic noise enters from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing, this electromagnetic noise will be transmitted to the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. metal It is damped by the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself. In other words, electromagnetic noise from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing can be prevented from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311 by the foil-cut areas SINSx, SINSy. This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the setting change board 1311 from entering the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing. The main control board 1310, which is an important control board that controls the progress of the main control board 1310, can be reliably stopped from advancing to the board ground, and the ground line that transmits the board ground (ground) will not be affected. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

A state where electromagnetic wave noise may enter the setting key switch 1311a will be described. As described above, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder housed in the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values, so only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, are allowed to possess it. and is limited to 2 to 3 people. Therefore, when checking the setting values or changing the setting values, a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall must first open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then press the setting key. The person who has it will access the setting key switch 1311a. In other words, the person who opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 may be different from the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a.

Then, when an employee such as a clerk at a game hall who opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 inserts a regular metal key into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and rotates it, he or she becomes electrically charged. Electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge can be transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 via a regular metal key. As described above, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, and this metal door frame reinforcing unit is connected to the frame ground via the door frame metal ground wire. It is electrically connected to the substrate 559. This frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire. In other words, when an employee such as a clerk at an amusement hall who opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 inserts a regular metal key into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127, the person in charge charges himself and discharges static electricity. By transmitting the electromagnetic noise caused by this to the cylinder lock 127 via the regular metal key, it is transmitted from the cylinder lock 127 to the door frame reinforcement unit, the door frame metal ground wire, the frame ground board 559, the island equipment ground wire, and It is transmitted to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and can be removed from the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a can avoid electromagnetic noise caused by charging himself and discharging static electricity by not touching the cylinder lock 127, and use the regular metal key to switch the setting key switch 1311a. 1311a.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is accessed by forming foil-cut regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 in the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311. The electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge caused by charging the person who uses the setting key switch 1311a can be attenuated by the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a or the setting key cylinder. Thereby, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge caused by charging the person accessing the setting key switch 1311a from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311.

As mentioned above, the door frame 3 is equipped with various decorative parts, and when the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), the door frame metal It is transmitted to the frame ground board 559 via the ground wire, and from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, and is removed from the pachinko machine 1. The various decorative parts decorate the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1, and are arranged over almost the entire door frame 3. Therefore, a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a should be aware of the door frame 3 when accessing the setting key switch 1311a. If you touch it without touching it, you will touch the various decorative parts provided on the door frame 3, and the electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge will be transmitted to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall, and will be removed from the pachinko machine 1. It is supposed to be done.

In this embodiment, the foil-cut regions SINSx, SINSy of the setting-change board 1311 are formed in the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting-change board 1311, and the foil-cut regions SINSx, SINSy are formed within the foil-cut regions SINSx, SINSy. A long length is provided along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plates protruding from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. A pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a hole shape were formed, but one of the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 was connected to the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 via a resistor. It may be configured to be electrically connected to the solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface), or each of the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 may be connected to the setting change board via the corresponding resistor. It may be configured to be electrically connected to solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of 1311, respectively. In this way, electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge caused by charging the person accessing the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented through the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a or the setting key cylinder. By transmitting it to a resistor, it can be attenuated by this resistor. Thereby, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge caused by charging the person accessing the setting key switch 1311a from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311.

In this embodiment, an electrostatic removal pad capable of removing electromagnetic wave noise may be provided at a predetermined location on the front surface of the door frame 3, and when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, The left side of the main body frame 4 when viewed from the front in the vertical direction, on which the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520 are arranged, is the side opposite to the pivot side (closing side) of the main body frame 4. The right side in the vertical direction when viewed from the front may be provided in the open side portion of the main body frame 4. Furthermore, since a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in rows facing away from the island equipment of the game hall, when the main body frame 4 of one pachinko machine 1 is opened from the outer frame 2, An attendant such as a clerk at a game hall can reach the rear side of another pachinko machine 1 that is in the same position. If a staff member such as a clerk at a game hall releases the body frame 4 of one pachinko machine 1 from the outer frame 2 for some reason, the person behind the other pachinko machine 1 that is facing away from this one pachinko machine 1 may Sometimes you can access the side. Therefore, it is necessary to remove electromagnetic noise caused by static electricity being discharged by charging the staff such as the staff of the game hall. It may be provided on the rear side of the back cover 640, on the rear side of the interface board cover 636, on the rear side of the cover body of the payout control board box 632, or on the rear side of the payout device 580. It may be placed on the side.

Further, in this embodiment, the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 5 may be formed by molding from a resin having conductivity. Since the main body frame base unit 500 has a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface when viewed from the front, the main body frame base unit 500 and the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 are electrically connected. . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame ground board 559 via a main body frame metal ground wire (not shown). The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via an island equipment ground wire (not shown). As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall or a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a can, for example, touch the main body frame base unit 500 on the open side of the main body frame 4. You can place your left hand to support your body and extend your right hand to the back side of the main body frame 4 or the back side of the game board 5, so when your left hand is placed on the main body frame base unit 500, it will be charged with static electricity. When the electromagnetic wave noise caused by the discharge is transmitted to the main body frame base unit 500 and then to the metal door frame reinforcement unit, it is transmitted to the frame ground board 559 via the door frame metal ground wire, and then from the frame ground board 559 to the island equipment ground. It is transmitted to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the wire and removed from the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in this embodiment, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, as described above, and this metal door frame reinforcing unit is connected to the door frame metal ground. The frame ground board 559 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, but the door frame metal ground The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board 630 are electrically connected by electrically connecting the wire to the terminal of the power supply board 630 of the main body frame 4 without electrically connecting the wire to the frame ground board 559. You may also do so. Furthermore, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1, and includes various decorative parts. Among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating applied to the entire front and back are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit through wiring not shown. The frame ground board 559 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire was not electrically connected to the frame ground board 559, and the main body frame The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board 630 may be electrically connected by electrically connecting to the terminals of the power supply board 630 of No. 4. The power supply board 630 is supplied with AC 24V from the island equipment of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board 630 to which L (line) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board 630 is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) for transiently protecting against excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board 630. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and hardly allows current to flow through it, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value instantly decreases and current flows, and when the overvoltage disappears, the surge protection element (surge absorber) , which has the ability to return to its original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the N terminal of the power supply board 630 to the ground side (earth) by the surge protection element (surge absorber) from the terminal of the power supply board 630, and is removed from the pachinko machine 1. be done.

By the way, the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, as described above. As described above, the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has the drive board box 1730 attached to its rear surface. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, as shown in FIG. 116(c), the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 The rear surface is disposed closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730.

To explain this arrangement, the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is provided with an insertion port into which a setting key is inserted, as described above. The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on the same plane as the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 when the setting change board 1311 is housed in the main control board box 1320. In other words, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a does not protrude outward from the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. When an operator attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island equipment of the game hall, first, the operator first places it temporarily on the front of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. Even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed on the front of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. For this reason, while working on the temporarily placed game board 5, the worker's leg may accidentally hit the game board 5 and cause it to fall.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is A configuration is adopted in which the drive board box 1730 is disposed closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da from the rear surface of the cover body. As a result, when a worker temporarily places the game board 5 on the front of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, the worker's leg may accidentally hit the game board 5, causing the back side of the game board 5 to slide toward the floor of the game hall. Even if the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 falls over, the main control board 1320 can be easily Because the cover body of the drive board box 1730 protrudes compared to the control board box 1320, even if the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320 come into contact with the floor of the game hall, the setting key cannot be pressed. The front part of the setting key cylinder of the switch 1311a can be prevented from colliding with the floor of the game hall by reliably forming a space between it and the floor of the game hall.

Furthermore, inside the island equipment of the game hall, as mentioned above, multiple types of wiring are suspended from the top for electrical connection with various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wirings that are electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wirings that are not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes an unconnected wiring and is suspended from the upper part of the inside of the island equipment of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows facing away from the island equipment of the game hall, these unconnected wirings are connected to the various boards included in the game board 5, electrical drive sources such as various motors and solenoids, various LEDs, and various lamps. If you touch the light emitting means such as the above, a short circuit may occur and damage the device (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of the ends of the unconnected wires are bent or in the vicinity thereof, and the ends of the unconnected wires are caught in the slits 641 and the game board 5 is bent. Since it is difficult to penetrate toward the back side, short circuits can be prevented. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is attached to the cover body of the drive board box 1730. Since it is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da from the rear surface, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, the driving It is blocked by the cover body of the board box 1730 and cannot intrude toward the main control board box 1320, and the tip of the unconnected wiring comes into contact with the front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311. This can be reliably prevented.

Even if the tip of the unconnected wiring comes into contact with the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned As described above, by forming the foil-cut regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 in the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311, the metal tube of the setting key switch 1311a is A pair of opposing long through holes having a long elongated hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 into which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the shaped (or rectangular) housing can be inserted. SLH1 and SLH2 are electrically insulated from the solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311. Since the board ground of the board 1310) is not exposed through the setting key switch 1311a, there is no influence on the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board that controls the progress of the game via the setting change board 1311. , there is no fluctuation in the ground line that transmits the substrate ground (ground). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

Note that the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 are molded from non-conductive resin. In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the back cover 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

Although the setting key switch 1311a employed in the present embodiment described above has a predetermined number of tumbler pins arranged in the setting key cylinder accommodated therein, a switch having an even larger number of tumbler pins may be adopted. In this way, security can be further improved, and if the product is mass-produced and widely distributed in the market, the unit price can be lowered, contributing to cost reduction. Refer to FIG. 117 for a case where a setting key switch 1311a' that accommodates a setting key cylinder in which more tumbler pins are arranged than the setting key cylinder accommodated in the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the setting change board 1311. explain. FIG. 117 is a modified example 1(a) showing the lower part of the left side view of the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board, and the main control board box is attached to the game board. This is a modified example 2(b) showing a part of the lower side of the left side view of the game board in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 117, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as described above.

When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 described above, the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200, which is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 117(a). As shown in , the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' protrudes from the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, and the front surface of the setting key cylinder of this setting key switch 1311a' protrudes from the cover body of the drive board box 1730. It is arranged so as to protrude toward the rear of the game board 5 with a distance dimension db from the rear surface of the game board 5. In order to protect the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' that protrudes from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730, a protective cover 1304 is pivoted on the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320 and can be opened and closed. It is set in. A locking protrusion (not shown) is formed on the protective cover 1304, and a locking groove (not shown) for locking the locking protrusion is formed in the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320. When the locking protrusion of the protective cover 1304 is released from the locking groove of the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, it is pivoted and the protective cover 1304 is opened from the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320 and the setting key switch is opened. 1311a' can be accessed.

By providing such a protective cover 1304 on the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, when an operator temporarily places the game board 5 on or around the front of the pachinko machine 1, the operator may accidentally Even if the legs of the player hit the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 falls toward the floor of the game hall, the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301' of the main control board 1320 will come into contact with the floor of the game hall. A space is reliably formed between the front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' and the floor of the game hall, so that collision with the floor of the game hall can be prevented.

Furthermore, inside the island equipment of the game hall, as mentioned above, multiple types of wiring are suspended from the top for electrical connection with various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wirings that are electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wirings that are not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes an unconnected wiring and is suspended from the upper part of the inside of the island equipment of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows facing away from the island equipment of the game hall, these unconnected wirings are connected to the various boards included in the game board 5, electrical drive sources such as various motors and solenoids, various LEDs, and various lamps. If you touch a light emitting device such as a light emitting device, a short circuit may occur and cause damage (possibly causing a fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of the ends of the unconnected wires are bent or in the vicinity thereof, and the ends of the unconnected wires are caught in the slits 641 and the game board 5 is bent. Since it is difficult to penetrate toward the back side, short circuits can be prevented. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, a protective cover 1304 is provided on the cover body 1301' of the main control board 1320. Therefore, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring were to enter the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, it would be blocked by the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301' of the main control board 1320, and the tip of the unconnected wiring would be blocked. can be reliably prevented from coming into contact with the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' provided on the setting change board 1311. Note that the cover body of the drive board box 1730, the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320, and the protective cover 1304 are molded from non-conductive resin.

Note that when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the back cover 640 and the main body The cover body 1301 of the control board box 1320 is arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the protective cover 1304 provided on the back cover 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is They are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

A board holder 1200 in which the length of the board holder 1200 in the front-rear view direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 in the board holder 1200 is shorter than that of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 described above. If the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' is attached to the main control board Although it protrudes from the cover body 1301' of the box 1320, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of this setting key switch 1311a' has a distance dimension dc from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730, and the front face of the game board 5 It is placed on the side. As a result, when a worker temporarily places the game board 5 on the front of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, the worker's leg may accidentally hit the game board 5, causing the back side of the game board 5 to slide toward the floor of the game hall. Even if the main control board 1320 falls over, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is placed close to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension dc from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730. Because the cover body of the drive board box 1730 protrudes compared to the control board box 1320, even if the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320 come into contact with the floor of the game hall, the setting key cannot be pressed. The front part of the setting key cylinder of the switch 1311a' can be prevented from colliding with the floor of the game hall by reliably forming a space between it and the floor of the game hall. In other words, when a worker temporarily places the game board 5 on or around the front of the pachinko machine 1, the worker's leg may accidentally hit the game board 5, causing the back side of the game board 5 to slide toward the floor of the game hall. In order to prevent the front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' from coming into contact with the floor of the game hall even if the pachinko machine 1 falls down due to The length has been adjusted. In addition to the length of the board holder 1200' in the front-back direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view, so that the front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' does not come into contact with the floor of the game hall. A recess is formed in the rear lower part of the gaming panel 1100 to which the board holder 1200' is attached, and the depth of the recess is adjusted by adjusting the length of the pachinko machine 1 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction). Alternatively, the length of the pachinko machine 1 in the front-back direction (that is, the depth direction) between this recess and the substrate holder 1200' may be adjusted.

Furthermore, inside the island equipment of the game hall, as mentioned above, multiple types of wiring are suspended from the top for electrical connection with various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wirings that are electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wirings that are not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes an unconnected wiring and is suspended from the upper part of the inside of the island equipment of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows facing away from the island equipment of the game hall, these unconnected wirings are connected to the various boards included in the game board 5, electrical drive sources such as various motors and solenoids, various LEDs, and various lamps. If you touch the light emitting means such as the above, a short circuit may occur and damage the device (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of the ends of the unconnected wires are bent or in the vicinity thereof, and the ends of the unconnected wires are caught in the slits 641 and the game board 5 is bent. Since it is difficult to penetrate toward the back side, short circuits can be prevented. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200', the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is attached to the cover of the drive board box 1730. Since it is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension dc from the rear surface of the body, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, The front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' is prevented from entering the main control board box 1320 because it is blocked by the cover body of the drive board box 1730, and the tip of the unconnected wiring is provided on the setting change board 1311. It is possible to reliably prevent contact with Note that the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 are molded from non-conductive resin.

Note that when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the back cover 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130 of the door frame 3 by a player rotating the handle 111 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. is struck into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 111, and the more clockwise the handle 111 is rotated, the more strongly the game ball B can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Furthermore, within the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B, so that the movement can be enjoyed. Moreover, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided at a position between the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the warp entrance 2501. .

When the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall part 2510), It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500 while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the center portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, since the center release part 2503a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, there is a high probability that the first It is accepted into the starting port 2002. When game balls B are received into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are put out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 130 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the gaming area 5a may be accepted into the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 or the general winning port 2001.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it will be pulled toward the center in the left-right direction by the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200, or the first starting port 2002 and general winning port 2001 of the starting port unit 2100. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 130 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is on the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (in the upstream space above the upper right peripheral wall part 2510). 2511), it passes through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522 of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, is released above the gate portion 2003 of the center accessory 2500, and passes through the gate. After coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the section 2003, the object passes through the gate section 2003 with a certain probability.

The distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first distribution passage 2521 whose entrance opens near the blocking portion 1006, and an entrance which opens at a distance to the left from the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. and a second circulation passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with such force that it hits the stopper 1006 (so-called right-handed hit), it enters the first circulation passage 2521, enters the upstream space 2511, and hits the stopper 1006. If the game ball B is hit with a force that does not touch the ball (a force that is somewhat weaker than that of a right-hand ball), there is a high probability that the game ball B will enter the second distribution passage 2522. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2511 circulates through either the first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522 depending on the driving strength.

On the other hand, the game balls B that have circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 are guided to the right side of the gate section 2003 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the gate section 2003, and the game balls B that have passed through the first distribution passage 2521 are guided to the right side of the gate section 2003 with a high probability. It does not pass through and flows on the right side of the gate section 2003. On the other hand, the game balls B that have circulated through the second distribution passage 2522 are guided with a high probability to the left side of the gate part 2003 rather than to the right side by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the gate part 2003. It passes through the gate section 2003 with probability.

When the game ball B passes through this gate part 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the drawn normal lottery result is "normal win", the attacker unit 2400 The second starting port 2004, which has been closed, remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the time when the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0 .01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display section 2450 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 becomes open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

Note that if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result is finished. Further, the number of normal lottery results that can be held is set at the upper limit of four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, the results are discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B that has passed on the right side of the gate section 2003 has an extremely high probability of passing on the right side of the general prize opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate section 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. The attacker enters the right passage 2422. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003 or the game ball B that has passed on the left side of the gate section 2003 is prevented by the plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the gate section 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. There is an extremely high probability that the attacker will be guided to the left of the attacker right passage 2422, and will enter the attacker left passage 2421 with a high probability.

In addition, the general winning hole 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged on the left side of the attacker right passage 2422, and when the game ball B is received in this general winning hole 2001 and detected by the general winning hole sensor 2401, A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 130 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 comes into contact with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, and has a high probability of passing through the communication port 2425 and entering onto the second starting port guide shelf 2423, and enters the closed state. It flows over the second starting port door 2411. If the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 does not enter the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423, it will enter the attacker lower right passage 2426 and will not be involved in the second starting opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005. It is discharged out of the game area 5a from the out port 1008. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the attacker left passage 2421 enters onto the second starting port guide shelf 2423 and circulates on the second starting port door 2411 in the closed state.

Then, when the game ball B enters the second starting port guide shelf 2423, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate section 2003 is a "normal win", and the second starting port door 2411 is opened. When it is in the open state, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. When game balls B are received into the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 130 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B that entered the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 and was not accepted into the second starting opening 2004 was released to the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 side and rolled on the closed winning opening door 2413. Afterwards, it is released into the gaming area 5a, and is discharged out of the gaming area 5a from the outlet 1008. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 and the big prize opening guiding shelf 2424, and an intermediate passage 2427 is opened, the second starting opening guiding shelf 2424 The game ball B released from the shelf 2423 to the big prize opening guiding shelf 2424 enters the intermediate passage 2427 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the gaming area 5a without involving the big winning port 2005.

From the above, since the game ball B that has passed through the first distribution passage 2521 does not pass through the gate part 2003 very often, the second starting port 2004 is in the open state when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. It is not often that a normal lottery result is drawn, and the game balls B are not often accepted into the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, since the game ball B that has passed through the second distribution passage 2522 passes through the gate section 2003 with a high probability, the normal lottery result ( There is a high possibility that a "normal win" will be drawn, and there is also a high possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

For this reason, since the player performs the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522, the driving force with which the game ball B enters the upstream space 2511 is increased. And, the driving strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the gaming area 5a with the driving strength that allows the game ball B to enter the second distribution passage 2522. Therefore, variations can be added to the driving operation of the game ball B to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. can be done.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. ”) A special lottery result will be drawn. Then, the special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). In addition, the special lottery results that are drawn when game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "lose", "15R jackpot A", "15R jackpot B", etc. .

The special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are the special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the special variable time has elapsed, the big prize opening 2005 becomes ready to accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big prize hole 2005 while the big prize hole 2005 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 send a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13 balls) from the payout device 580. game balls B are paid out onto the upper tray 130. Therefore, by allowing the grand prize opening 2005 to accept the gaming balls B when the grand prize opening 2005 is capable of accepting the gaming balls B, it is possible to pay out many gaming balls B, thereby making it possible to entertain the players. can.

If the special lottery result is a "jackpot", a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the grand prize opening 2005 became open to accept the game ball B, or Acceptance of the number (for example, 10) of game balls B. When any of the conditions is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that puts the game balls B in a closed state where it cannot be accepted is created. Repeat a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, in the case of a "15R jackpot", 15 rounds are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "jackpot", when the jackpot 2005 is in the open state due to the jackpot game state, when the game ball accepted into the jackpot 2005 is distributed to the second receiving slot 2008 by the sorting piece 2415, the jackpot game is played. After the state ends, an ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous gaming state. This ST is a probability change that changes the probability of a special lottery result such as a "jackpot" being drawn for a specific number of predetermined fluctuations, and a time saving that changes the display time of an effect image that suggests a special lottery result. This is to maintain the state of

In this embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 receive game balls B from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested. Once the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. It will be put on hold. The maximum number of special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if game balls B were accepted in 2004, they were discarded without holding the special lottery results. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In addition, as mentioned above, when the big prize opening 2005 is in the open state according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the second distribution passage When performing the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of 2522, the driving operation must be delicately adjusted, so some players may feel impatient or irritated at the arrival of the precious opportunity. This may lead to a decrease in interest in the game. However, in this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit to the right and circulates through the first circulation passage 2521, the right side of the gate part 2003, the attacker right passage 2422, the stepped part 1005a of the right rail 1005, the communication port 2425, and the Since the game balls B can be distributed to the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 side (big winning opening 2005 side) via the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423, it is easy to do so without having to make delicate adjustments to the driving operation. The driving operation allows the game ball B to be accepted into the big prize opening 2005, allowing the player to enjoy playing in an advantageous gaming state, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be varied depending on the gaming state. It is possible to suppress the decline in player's interest.

By the way, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The function display unit 1400 and sub-function display section 2450 are directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a effect image. The performance image that suggests the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is created by displaying three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols side by side in the left and right direction, and by varying each symbol row. are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three pattern rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is completed. Advantageous gaming states (for example, 15R jackpot game A, 15R jackpot game B, etc.) occur depending on the special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time for indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 (the pattern row changes and the final image is changed) The time required for display is different from that of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display section 2450, and is set to a longer time.

In addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 also performs a pressing operation on the effect operation section 160 on the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result drawn. It is possible to perform a player participation type performance in which the player operates the section 161. In the player participation type production, the press operating section 161 can be raised to stand out by the first elevating drive motor 180a and the second elevating drive motor 182, and the player can enjoy the player participation type production by operating the production operation section 160. be able to.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, and the back first presentation unit 3100 and back second presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000. , and the back third effect unit 3300 as appropriate, it is possible to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, etc., and various effects can also entertain the players, reducing the player's interest in the game. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 also displays a performance image on the back side of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 according to the special lottery result. By appropriately using the production unit 3100, the second back production unit 3200, the third back production unit 3300, etc., it is possible to perform light emission production, movable production, display production, etc., and various productions can also attract players. It is possible to keep the player entertained and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[8. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 111 in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 118 to 123. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 118, and FIG. 120 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process, FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting value confirmation display process, and FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of an error display process. First, we will explain the various random numbers used for game control, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, and setting value confirmation. Display processing will be explained. Note that in the following description, the main control MPU 1310a may be simply referred to as "main control MPU".

[8-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number. A determined random number, a random number for reach determination used to determine whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a jackpot gaming state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern used to determine a variable display pattern of special symbols that are variably displayed on a symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game state. A symbol random number used to determine the jackpot symbol or small win symbol derived and displayed on the symbol display (determining the hit type), and a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number. etc. are available. In addition to these random numbers, there is also a random number for normal symbol hit determination, which is used to determine whether or not to open/close the movable piece that allows the second starting port 2004 to accept game balls, and this normal symbol hit determination. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination used to determine the initial value of the random number for use, and the normal symbol used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers and the like for variable display patterns are prepared.

Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware using a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and then performs a random number circuit at high speed in advance based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on a clock signal input to the MPU. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a special random number at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1, thereby counting up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated at power-on, or when the power is turned on on the main control side, which will be described later, it is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of various information as numerical values is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When clearing only a specific area out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when they do not match, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is set by the main control MPU from its built-in non-volatile RAM. The ID code is extracted from the ID code, and based on the extracted ID code, an initial value derivation process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set as the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure is that once the ID code is memorized, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, and the initial value derivation process is used when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. The second security measure is to derive the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing the ID code.A two-step security measure is taken to prevent analysis.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination will be explained. For example, a person who attempts to illegally acquire game balls that are paid out as prize balls may somehow obtain the game board 5, disassemble it, and steal the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU. Even if it is obtained illegally and it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the ID code is attached with a code, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU' provided in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', that is, other pachinko machines 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous stop is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and a game ball is allowed to pass through the gate portion 2003 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed to allow the game ball to be received into the second starting port 2004. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which

[8-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer can, for example, indicate the address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Under the control of the main control MPU, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 118 and 119. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs a power outage clearing process (step S12). In this power outage clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power outage advance notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S14). As mentioned above, the RWM clear button 633z has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), and here, the RWM clear button 633z has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch). It functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase information. In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM will not be cleared when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated is HI. When it is determined that the push operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, and the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the push operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW, the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the press operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated. Note that the period from the start of the main control side power-on process that is this routine to the determination in step S14 is extremely short, so in reality, the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

In the determination of step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU is in a state in which it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, and includes game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc., and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). This flag indicates whether or not to erase various information, including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc.), and is set to the value 1 when the various information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the various information is not erased. . Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is set by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) and turning it ON. This is performed based on the key being turned on and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18 is extremely short, so in reality, the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a After turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

In the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and also switches the setting key on the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and/or the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the setting key switch 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (setting value exclusive area in a specific area, described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. This is a flag that indicates whether or not to allow setting changes and confirmation display of the set values 1 to 6 at the time of the ON operation. The value is set to 1 when display is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when changing settings or confirmation display is not permitted. Note that the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time waiting processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls drawing on the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. Note that at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510, so the payout control board 633 ) is in a state where it can receive various commands from.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is an input of the power outage warning signal, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. Note that a detailed explanation will be given later regarding the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

In the determination in step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is no power outage warning signal input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. (Step S25). The main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied by determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. judge.

In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not the value 1, the main control MPU sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1. , and determines whether the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S26). The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, so that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied. , it is determined that various information is to be deleted in the same way as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied.

In the determination in step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 0, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0. , and determines whether the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 (step S27). The main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied by determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. judge.

In the determination in step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, so that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting value is present, a setting value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this setting value confirmation display process, which will be described in detail later, the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM are displayed on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S28 or in the determination of step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not the value 1 (RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 1). is the value 0, and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 0), a checksum is calculated (step S29). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total thereof.

Following step S29, the main control MPU compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at the time of power-off), which will be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM during main control side power-off processing, which will be described later, for game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum calculation in step S29 and the determination in step S30 are performed when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. A detailed explanation of , will be given later.

In the determination of step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, error display processing is performed (step S33) and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Note that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is moved from its initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). After turning the button 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on, turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633, and then restart this routine. A certain main control side power-on process is started. The main control MPU determines in the above-mentioned step S14 that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in the above-mentioned step S16A. At the same time, in the determination in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined based on the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key is ON and the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20A described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 in the determination of step S25 described above. 1, and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and following the setting change process of step S37, which will be described later, In the process of step S38, by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and proceed with the game (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM"). (described as ``How to clear the error'').

An alternative method to this first RAM error release method is to turn off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and leave the setting key cylinder at its initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the Pachinko machine 1 while pressing the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU determines in the above-described step S14 that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, and sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 in the above-described step S16A. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and/or the setting key is turned on due to the setting key ON signal. Since the switch 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned on and sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to the value 0 in step S20B described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in the determination in step S26 described above. is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but it is the same as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. It is determined that various information is to be erased, and in the process of step S38, which will be described later, by clearing all areas of the RAM with built-in main control except for a specific area, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can be continued. (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error release method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, an error display is performed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM is When informing that there is an abnormality in the content stored in the memory (or that it cannot be trusted), there are two methods of clearing the RAM error: the first RAM error clearing method and the second RAM error clearing method. It is now possible to do so. As a result, if there is no need to change the settings at all, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RWM clear button 633z.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when determining that the main control side power-off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU A RAM work area is set (step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from the ROM built into the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, as well as the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage. This also includes a state in which the main control MPU itself is reset by irradiating the main control board 1310 with high frequency waves from a hidden high frequency output device (hidden high frequency output device) and then returned to normal state.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed after this, so the main control side power-off process (described later) is successfully completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area will be cleared.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, that is, the predetermined setting value is changed. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, a setting change process is performed (step S37). This setting change process, which will be described in detail later, is performed based on a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. As mentioned above, the RWM clear button 633z has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), and here, the RWM clear button 633z has a function that serves three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch). Operates as a button function. Every time the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a signal to that effect (setting value selection switching signal) is input, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a is changed. When the setting key cylinder is turned from ON to OFF, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU. .

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, the predetermined If the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not met, but it is determined that various information will be deleted in the same way as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, a specific area will be deleted from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. and clear it (step S38). Here, the main control MPU performs this by writing the value 0 into a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all areas of the main control built-in RAM). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be deleted, and when the setting change process is finished, the main control built-in RAM is (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area excluding the specified area among the whole area of the main control built-in RAM)). Here, the "specific area" refers to a setting value dedicated area in which setting values are stored, and a counting of the number of game balls collected through the outlet 1008 provided in the gaming area 5a sectioned on the game board 5. It consists of an area dedicated to out pitch counting where the results (total number) are stored. The setting value exclusive area stores setting values that are changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball counting area stores the game balls collected by the out port 1008 that are counted in the ball count process described later. The counting result (total number) is stored.

Note that the main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. The main control MPU also controls the logic of a signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch. is an instruction to clear the RAM and when erasing various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is A pre-stored unique ID code is retrieved, and based on the retrieved ID code, an initial value derivation process is performed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination. A fixed value is set as the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and, for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set to the initial value of 0. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, we will use the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register (described as "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT starts, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT starts, and by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU ( If a timer clear setting value is not set in the WDT clear register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU will be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement is started again. In this way, by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until it reaches the time set by the timer setting value and starting time measurement again, the operation (system) of the main control MPU can be performed normally. It is possible to monitor whether the

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU (for example, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510, ), the transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed, parity is present, etc., and the transmission serial port control register is configured to initialize the transmitting circuit, enable transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, at a gaming machine testing institute, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs activation settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is updated by hardware, so the random number is input to the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU. Settings such as latching and acquisition are performed, and settings such as activation of the built-in hardware random number circuit for the main control are set in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and When all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical value range is quickly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract other values one after another without duplication. Note that when the main control MPU obtains a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and when this latch signal is input, the main control built-in hardware The random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the obtained random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power restoration) based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 when setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM. A status command at power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are created and sent as transmission information to the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. to be memorized. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM may read out various information from the game backup information and store various commands corresponding to this various information. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, then the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. A detailed explanation will be given later regarding the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50.

Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power outage warning. Ru. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not related to winning/losing determination (jackpot determining) are updated by software. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an input of a power outage warning signal. If the power outage warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. and repeat steps S54 to S56. Note that the processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as "main processing on the main control side."

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including gaming information and other information.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as that for starting output of the power outage clear signal in the power outage clearing process in step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU stops the drive signals being output to, for example, the various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting port solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h, etc. (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the gaming information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, and time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement starts again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot make the determination in step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power-off processing, and then executes the main control side power-on processing again. . In other words, since the main control side power off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so the previous The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power-off process is executed when the power is cut off, and the checksum value calculated in step S29 when the built-in reset circuit performs a forced reset and restarts. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM will always occur, and in the process of step S38, the check sum (sum value) of the main control built-in RAM will be It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on process is performed.

In addition, in step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S32, it is checked whether the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

Further, in the determination in step S25, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, and that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. When this happens, the setting change process of step S37 is performed, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL is - If FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. Similarly, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the process of step S38. In this way, when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, and the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated) When powering on the Pachinko machine 1 while pressing the button), the main The control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, and when the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 If the game is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a state where the probability fluctuation (probability change) is a hit), it is necessary to delete (clear) the game backup information mentioned above before the next business starts. Therefore, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, an attendant such as a clerk at the game hall needs to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z. In addition, when deciding to change the setting value, even if the current setting value is maintained as a result of the setting change process, the setting value obtained before the setting change process is It is necessary to erase (clear) gaming backup information including various information such as gaming information from the main control built-in RAM. As mentioned above, the setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values, so only a limited number of people, including game hall managers, should use the setting key. Only 2 or 3 people are allowed to possess one. In this embodiment, even if the setting value is not changed or decided, that is, even if there is no setting key that only a limited number of specific people possess, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall can erase (clear) the gaming backup information. When necessary, the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, and by turning on the power of the Pachinko machine 1 while pressing the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the game backup information can be It is possible to erase (clear) from the control built-in RAM.

Here, a description will be given of the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22. First, we will explain the problem when the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, the problem when proceeding with the processes from step S26 onwards after the wait time waiting process in step S22.

As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, receives the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2. DC +5V is applied over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power outage or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V, so that the power supply to the island of the game hall is cut off. The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power from the equipment is cut off. This is because a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, that is, while performing main processing on the main control side or timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. When the power from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, when the power is restored, in the wait time waiting process of step S22, the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (booted) is 2.5 seconds), and if a momentary power outage or power outage occurs just before the standby time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the electric charge charged in is applied as DC +5V, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side, which will be described later, Even if the timer interrupt process is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process may not be completed. Therefore, the main control side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power outage or power outage, and then, in step S29, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the checksum and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage are compared in step S30, it is found that the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated by a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall to perform a game called RAM clear. There is a problem in that the above-mentioned game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no indication of intention by an attendant such as a clerk at the hall.

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal is input, Returning again to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. This makes it impossible to proceed with the game. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, step When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the game cannot proceed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) This prevents the checksum from being updated, and thus prevents fluctuations in the checksum calculation results. As a result, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and memorized value in step S64 match when the main control board 1310 is restarted. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input (that is, in step S22) (When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game, the pachinko machine Even if the power to the main control MPU is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU. The main control board performs the main control side power-off process, which is a backup process for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can complete the calculation, when the main control MPU of the main control MPU is restarted, the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is never initialized. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started after being restored to the gaming information that existed immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, thereby updating the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power-off processing can be started again without updating the The main control side power-off processing can be reliably completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by the standard hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when power is cut off from the island equipment of the gaming hall due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power restoration, the main control The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2, the processing immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22 In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal is being input. If the power outage warning signal is being input, the process returns to step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is made. By repeatedly doing this, it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

Such software makes it impossible to proceed with the game, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, initial settings for interrupts are performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball count information output determination We have adopted a mechanism that can avoid updating various information (including information indicating the value of the counter). In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment The contents of the main controller built-in RAM (gaming information, By configuring the system by dividing it into two parts: a part covered by hardware, and a part covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball count information output judgment counter) will not be changed at all. , to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. is now possible.

Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (restored) is determined based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to convey this information, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball count information output at power-on are created and sent to the main control as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2404 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405. Here, first, we will discuss the problem when the main control return destination command upon power-on does not include information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2404 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405. A problem that occurs when the command to be sent when the power is turned on is not reserved as the main control return destination command at power-on is not set in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen in a jackpot game state (for example, a screen for a jackpot game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2405. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs while the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 controls the main control board 1310 in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred, and the attacker solenoid 2405 starts to be driven and the grand prize opening 2005 opens and closes. The state changes from being closed by the member to being open.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will control the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display which round it is at all. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403, the main control board sends a big winning hole 1 count display command that tells the number of game balls that entered the big winning hole 2005. 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the number of game balls that entered the big prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state it is.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2405 and opens the big prize opening 2005 by the opening/closing member when finishing the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state, for example. The main control board 1310 sends a grand prize opening 1 close display command that instructs the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, to start closing the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2100 between rounds) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) in the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2405 to open the jackpot 2005 from the closed state by the opening/closing member. The main control board 1310 transmits a grand prize opening display command for the fifth time instructing to shift to the current state (that is, start opening the fifth round of the grand prize opening 2005) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Also, for example, a screen may be displayed to notify the player that the game state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. While the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen that conveys to If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs while the 2004 is in a state where it is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred, and the start port solenoid 2404 is started to operate to close the movable piece. A transition will be made to a state in which the secondary start port 2004 is closed.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power outage or power outage may occur. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and time-saving state specified by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to return by displaying it in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, indicating that the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to convey the information in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, players seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised at the occurrence of a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored, game balls may be received into the second starting port 2004 just before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs. In some cases, the user may forget that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state when the power is restored. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game to be played (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the game cannot be played. There was also the problem that the player would not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage could not be returned to immediately after the power was restored. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. There was a problem.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (in addition to turning on the power, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs), the main control board 1310 uses the power-on status command. In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main control return destination command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state, When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 returns to start driving the attacker solenoid 2405, and the big prize opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening/closing member. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified of the transition to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen that indicates what round it is). cannot be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, but the screen informs that the jackpot game state is in progress and the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven and the jackpot opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, "You have won the jackpot. The grand prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the grand prize opening.") This can be displayed in the display area to instruct a player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the player who is seated at the front of the pachinko machine enters the game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after the power is restored. When the game state is such that game balls can be accepted into the secondary start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, and then when the power is restored, the main control board 1310 As a return destination, a screen informing you that the second starting port 2004 is now open by starting to drive the starting port solenoid 2404 and opening the movable piece (for example, ``The movable piece is open.'' The peripheral control board 1510 displays a message on the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the front of the pachinko machine. It is possible to instruct a player seated in a game machine to play a game by entering a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions as to where the peripheral control board 1510 should return when power is restored after a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, after the power is restored, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. This can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process which is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum in step S29 is checked when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be explained. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S29, the process is not executed in step S30. In the comparison and determination, there is no way that the checksum values match, and in step S38 all areas of the RAM with built-in main control, except for a specific area, must be cleared.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on status command categorized as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on By creating a counter notification command for output determination and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball at power-on are generated. Only three commands, namely the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands first send a power-on status command, then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on. A counter notification command for information output determination is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is used to press the RWM clear button on the payout control board 633 when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs). When the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to clear the RAM, information to that effect, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, (Including when power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs.), any of the above-mentioned low probability time saving states, high probability time saving states, low probability non time saving states, and high probability non time saving states. The machine consists of information indicating whether to return to the state (probability and time saving state) and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

When creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine is determined based on which work's copyright it corresponds to. What kind of game specifications (for example, a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs), as well as a game specification in which the number of changes of special symbols is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) )), it is possible to specify whether the game specifications (such as a so-called ST machine) are such that a probability change occurs in a state where

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may coexist. Then, workers on the production line can determine which of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) has ownership over the copyright. You may not know whether the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for a work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also a misconception or misunderstanding that it is flowing down the production line.

For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the workers on the production line It is not possible to confirm which work's copyright belongs to the manufactured main control board 1310, and even if the copyright of the same work belongs to which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm what kind of game specifications (game specifications or ST machines in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist. 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem in that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 inputs the model code of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). In order to send a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a power-on state command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 can turn on the power to the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from and sweet digital type, the series code to identify which type it is, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state will be changed. In addition to game specifications in which the state continues until the occurrence of a special symbol, a game specification code for specifying a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in the special symbol (ST machine, etc.); By visually checking detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on What type of machine is it (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) and what kind of game specifications (if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or an ST machine.

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control board inspection process of the production line By being able to visually check the inspection monitor and accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the operator can classify the copyright of the work by main control board 1310 and perform subsequent work. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[8-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 118 and 119.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU switches register banks as shown in FIG. 120 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks, each consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is changed from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, there is no need to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to a variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits Performs time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands has been input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU receives, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, and a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402. detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the out exit sensor 3032, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005, and from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. Signal (The signal from this RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt processing that is this routine, so it may be masked and reading may be omitted.), door frame release switch 4a , a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and a payout control that indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The payer ACK signal from the board 633 is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 2101 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402 are read, the corresponding starting port prize command classified into others is sent as transmission information and is sent to the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 2101, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second starting port sensor 2402. When there is a detection signal, the starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when this switch input processing is started, the state in which input is being input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those that have been processed as empty terminals) is , are each read for the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the third and second reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the fourth and third reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is the same, it will be treated as if no game ball entered or the input will be ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those that have been processed as empty terminals) is checked from the first to the third time. By performing a total of two readings, one for comparing the two readings and the second reading for comparing the second to fourth readings, it is possible to avoid false detections due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Therefore, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, A detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403, a detection signal from the out-port sensor 3032, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3005, a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (this RWM The signal from the clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt processing that is this routine, so it may be masked and reading may be omitted.), the detection signal from the door frame release switch 4a , a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and a signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The reliability of the payer ACK signal can be improved.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have undergone vacant terminal processing is checked based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as a vacant terminal process, so the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether the logic state of the input terminal to which vacant terminal processing has been performed among the input terminals of various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal that is being processed as an empty terminal is not LOW, it displays a notification indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuits of the main control MPU. The malfunction command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs win/loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-mentioned symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing to further enhance randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to winning/losing determination (hit/losing determination), each counter counts up only every time this winning/losing random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from 1 to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for hit determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small prize symbol are used as the random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning/losing random number updating process and the winning/losing random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine are updated, but each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs pitch counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the exit sensor 3032 is inputted to the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. When the out port sensor 3032 detects a game ball collected through the out port 1008 provided, the value 1 is added to the value of a collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected through the out port 1008. Perform an operation (increment). The main control MPU stores the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, into an out ball counting area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. At the same time, the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, the main control MPU creates a ball collection command that notifies you when the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls. and stores it in the output information storage area as transmission information. Note that when the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 65535), and the value of the recovered ball counter is further added (incremented) by 1, the main control MPU detects the recovered ball. The value of the counter overflows and becomes the value 0, and an operation is performed to add from this value 0.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. Therefore, in order to convey this fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If the payer ACK signal indicating that the command has been successfully received by the payout control board 633 is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command is issued to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It may be created and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. In order to convey this fact, a main prize pitch number information output command classified into others is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize pitch number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize pitch number information output determination counter. The value of this main prize ball number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read from the input information storage area mentioned above, that is, the general prize opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 provided on the game board 5. , the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided on the game board 5"). This counts the number of game balls scheduled to be put out, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process in step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter that has been read is The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of , and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. (In other words, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls), create a main prize ball number information output command to convey that fact, and send it as the transmission information. In addition to storing the value in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of pitches is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, a game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 even though the second starting port door 2411 is not in an open state, or a game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 even though the big winning port door 2413 is not in an open state. It is checked whether there is any abnormal condition regarding the prize balls, such as when the game ball B enters the big prize opening 2005. Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined in the fraud detection process that an abnormal state regarding the prize ball has occurred, the pachinko machine 1 is connected to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558. The main control MPU outputs a security signal, thereby contributing to the ability of staff such as clerks in game halls to discover abnormal conditions regarding prize balls at an early stage. In addition, the security signal that is output when it is determined that an abnormal state regarding the prize ball has occurred is the security signal that is output when it is determined that a magnet goto is being performed, which will be described later, and the vibration signal that will be output when it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred regarding the prize ball. This is the same signal as the security signal that is output when it is determined that a fraud is being carried out. In addition, the main control MPU outputs the security signal to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the payout control board 633 and the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633. However, after the main control MPU sends a command instructing the output of the security signal to the payout control board 633, the payout control MPU sends the command to the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633. The security signal may be output to a hall computer installed in the hall.

In the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input, fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is detected. ) is being performed, and the value of the magnet counter is incremented by 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that a magnet goto has been performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, it returns to the initial value. The value 0 (zero) is set as . When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display to notify that magnet goto is being performed is created, and is stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area as sending information. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that magnet fraud is being carried out in the fraud detection process, the main controller is sent to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The control MPU outputs the security signal, thereby contributing to the ability of staff such as clerks of game halls to discover magnets at an early stage.

In the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input, fraud by vibration (hereinafter referred to as "vibration goto") is detected. ) is being performed, and adds (increments) the value of the vibration goto counter by 1. The value of this vibration goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that a vibration goto has been performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, it returns to the initial value. The value 0 (zero) is set as . When the value of the vibration goto counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a vibration goto notification command classified into a notification display to notify that the vibration goto is being performed is created, and is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that vibration is occurring in the fraud detection process, the main controller is sent to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. By the control MPU outputting the security signal, it is possible to contribute to the ability of staff such as clerks of game halls to discover vibrating gotos at an early stage.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the big winning hole sensor 2403 is input when the jackpot game state is not (big winning hole When a game ball enters a game ball in 2005), a winning abnormality display command that is categorized as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. .

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a magnet goblin and/or a vibration goth are detected, a value of 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as fraud detection, while a value of 1 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG when the magnet goblin and/or the vibration goth are detected. If no fraud has been detected, a value of 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, indicating that no fraud has been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. Also, when the occurrence of abnormal winning in the big winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs firing permission signal setting processing (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines that when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, no fraud has been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Sometimes, the launch permission logic is set as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information, while when the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value is 1), that is, fraud is detected. When it is determined that the firing permission signal is detected, the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the firing permission logic, is set as the logic of the firing permission signal, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The logic of the launch permission signal is set by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the initial value (default) is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the launch permission logic. However, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after the power is restored), the launch permission logic is set.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit when the latch signal is input is The random number is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and the obtained random number is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether the special random number (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU) matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It determines whether or not to generate a gaming state (referred to as "special lottery"), and takes out the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number and stores it in the main control built-in ROM in advance according to the jackpot type or small win type. It is determined whether or not the winning type matches any of the winning type determination values (determining the winning type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are based on the first starting port sensor 2101, various commands related to the special map 1 synchronization effect are created, and the judgment results (lottery results) are sent to the second starting port sensor 2402. , create various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect and store them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is changed so that the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, jackpot opening 1 opening display command, jackpot opening 1 closing display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening command, A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is 2, the 2nd round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. A lighting signal is set to be output to the second round indicator lamp so that the round indicator lamp is lit, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area, and when there are 15 rounds, the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is The function display unit 1400 sets the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp so that the 15th round indicator lamp lights up, stores it in the output information storage area as output information, and lights it in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not time saving has occurred. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment mentioned above is extracted and used as the normal winning opening winning information built in the main control. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

This normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (4 sections), and the normal winning opening is arranged in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this normal winning slot winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the second winning opening winning information is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning slot winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the normal winning opening winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. Shifted, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, if the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first section to the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning opening winning information. The regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage is shifted to the 0th compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage, and the regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning opening winning information storage is shifted to the first compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage. The 2nd section and the 3rd section for storing the winning information of the normal winning opening are empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is held and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. In order to light up the hold display, the output of the lighting signal for the normal hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above.

Following the normal winning hole winning process, the normal winning hole winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted from the read normal winning hole winning information, and the main control It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on the result of this determination (the result of a normal lottery), it is determined whether the movable piece should be opened or closed. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the movable piece is in the opening operation state, resulting in a gaming state in which the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The fluctuating display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the fluctuating display pattern of the regular symbol mentioned above, various commands classified as related to the synchronized production of the common symbol are created, and the above-mentioned transmission information is stored as the transmission information. At the same time, the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and output information is stored in the area. is stored in the output information storage area described above.

In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit judgment matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role performance are created and sent. In addition to storing information in the transmission information storage area, the output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 is set to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while the extracted normal When the value of the random number for symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above. , creates various commands related to the common pattern synchronization performance, stores them as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and lights up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to cause the function display unit 1400 to do so, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In this example, the probability of winning the normal lottery (probability of winning normally) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the main control MPU successfully receives various commands from the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on output information, the main control MPU sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633. When in the jackpot game state, it outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2005, and outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting opening winning information Outputs various information (game information) signals related to games such as output signals to the payout control board 633, and outputs a launch permission signal set to the launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633. It also outputs a display signal to the base monitor 1310h that displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, and outputs a display signal to the base monitor 1310h that displays the result of counting the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008. It outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, and various commands classified as related to jackpot created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands (for example, a big winning hole 1 count display command that corresponds to a big winning hole count command based on the detection signal from the big winning hole sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the big winning hole 2005 is detected) , various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to general figure synchronization performance, various commands categorized as related to normal electric role production, various commands categorized as notification display, various commands categorized as status display. commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others (for example, the main control board 1310 plans to pay out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls that enter the various winning holes provided on the game board 5) A main prize ball that instructs to transmit a main prize ball number information output signal as main prize ball number information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 every time the number of game balls reaches 10 balls. (number information output command, etc.), and various commands categorized into specific history (for example, a ball collection command that notifies you every time the number of game balls collected at the out exit 1008 reaches 10 balls, a setting value is set. A setting change command that indicates that a change has been made, an error display command that indicates that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and a specific area of the main control built-in RAM A setting value confirmation display command (such as a setting value confirmation display command that informs that setting values stored in a setting value exclusive area, which will be described later) are to be confirmed, is stored. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. The main serial transmission port built in the main control MPU at least transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. is now possible. When powering on the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs after the power is turned on, the transmission is made at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 119. In order to notify that the power has been restored, a power-on state command categorized as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are set to notify that the power has been restored. Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main cycle serial data consists of the status, mode, and sum value that make up the power-on status command. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the command to return to the main control when the power is turned on, are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the gaming backup information and data is stored according to this various information. In some cases, various commands are stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, then the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted.

Furthermore, whenever the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command to inform the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 For each collection command, the number of game balls collected at the output port 1008 is counted, and the ball collection information (the counted value (that is, the number of game balls collected at the output port 1008) is stored and held in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). (information that associates the total number of game balls) with the date and time of update). Note that if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off at the end of the game hall's business hours without being able to receive the ball collection command, the last counted value (that is, the game balls collected at the exit 1008) Ball collection information that associates the total number of balls) with the updated date and time is stored and held in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when the game hall starts operating, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 transfers the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) to the pachinko machine 1 when the game hall starts operating. Since then, ball recovery information has been created again, and the ball recovery information is stored as ball recovery history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). Note that the counted value stored and held as ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the values counted so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT. Then, by restarting time measurement by the built-in main control WDT, the main control MPU does not have to be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 performs the backup function described above for storing game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and when the power is restored, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process was executed as the destination for the main control board 1310 to resume playing the game. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is output to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are electrical drive sources, by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine. It is now possible to do so. In other words, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM when setting the work area of A main control return destination command when the power is turned on and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and step S120 in this routine is performed. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main serial data is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on status command, and then the main control return destination at power-on is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510, which make up the counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored based on the main control return destination command at power-on from the main control board 1310 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can be displayed in effect. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, and the power is restored afterwards, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage can be restored after the power is restored. At the same time, it is possible to notify the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 by displaying an effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 can be kept in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from seeing something and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are necessarily cleared. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. By creating a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, and storing them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, when the power is turned on. A state in which only three commands, the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, are sent to the inspection equipment in the main control board inspection process as main serial data in the order of Then, when the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is sent to the inspection equipment of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then when the power is turned on, the main prize ball number information is output. A determination counter notification command is sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection step configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code to identify the model type among the Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in special symbols (ST Detailed machine type information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for specifying the machine (such as machine).

[8-4. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be explained. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU obtains the current installation values as shown in FIG. 121 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out, but when taking out the setting value, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is the checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the same process as calculating .

Following step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process (power off) in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. It is determined whether the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118, respectively. As mentioned above, the backup flag BK-FLG is used to store game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power-off process, which will be described later. This is a flag that indicates whether or not it has been stored in the RAM. It is set to 1 when the main control side power off processing has been completed normally, and set to 0 when the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed. be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be changed, and in this embodiment, the "normal range" is a value that can be changed. It is preset to a value up to 6. When the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is shut off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU determines that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are within the normal range. It is determined whether the set value is within the normal range, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it sets the initial value, ie, the setting value 1, to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In addition, in the determination in step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the setting values 1 to 6 that is within the normal range. However, without performing the determination in step S208, in the determination in step S204, the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match. or in the determination at step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process may proceed to step S210 and set the setting value 1, which is an initial value, to the setting value acquired in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, that the main control side power-off processing has been normally completed, or in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU When the MPU determines that the setting change permission lamp 1310z is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S216). As mentioned above, the RWM clear button 633z has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), and here, the RWM clear button 633z has a function that serves three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch). Operates as a button function. This determination is made by reading a signal (setting value selection switching signal) that indicates that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated, and checking whether the setting value is changed from the setting value setting change signal from the RWM clear button 633z. Determine whether a detection signal is input. When the setting value selection switching signal from the RWM clear button 633z is input, the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, and on the other hand, it determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z When the selection switching signal is not input, it is determined that the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated.

In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value to update it (step S218 ). At this time, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, this predetermined area The value 1 will be added (incremented) to the set value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU determines whether there is an OFF operation of the setting key. (Step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder is turned on). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by turning the switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the switch 1311a OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, while when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, the setting key is OFF. It is determined that it has not been operated.

In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been operated to turn OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S216 and determines whether or not the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. . In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU performs the processing of step S218 and step S220 again, performs the determination of step S222, and presses the setting key. When it is determined that the RWM clear button 633z has not been turned off, the process returns to step S216, and the set value is changed each time the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is operated until the setting key is turned off. The value is added and updated by 1 and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and if the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the setting value updated by the previous press operation of the RWM clear button 633z is displayed. It is displayed on the container 1310g. Note that even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or instantaneous power outage will be the main one. Since it is not stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the RAM with built-in control, it is discarded, and the setting value stored in the area dedicated to setting values in the specific area of the RAM with built-in main control is not changed.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the setting key has been turned off, it stores the updated setting value in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, this predetermined area The updated setting value is returned to the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the RAM with built-in main control. Even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is restored after the process of step S224 is completed, the updated setting value when the enter key was operated before the power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs will be stored in the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in a setting value dedicated area in a specific area of .

Following step S224, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. is hidden (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting key ON flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in the setting value exclusive area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. This is a flag that indicates whether or not to allow setting changes and confirmation displays for the currently set values 1 to 6. The value is set to 1 when permission is granted, and the value is set to 0 when setting changes and confirmation displays are not permitted. In the process of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing the setting change or confirmation display of the setting value from now on.

Following step S232, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that determined in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, the "normal range" is set to set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value. It is preset to a value up to 6. In the determination in step S233, the main control MPU confirms that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether the value is within the range of set value 1 to set value 6, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that the range is within the normal range, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236), Next, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumferential serial data (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This process is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, which is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238. This is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial serial data, but this is given priority before the command to be sent at power-on is reserved in step S50 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed using a setting change command. Note that the setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information associating the setting value with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[8-5. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be explained. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118.

When the setting value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current setting value as shown in FIG. 122 (step S350). Here, the main control MPU obtains the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S350, the main control MPU determines whether the set value acquired in step S350 is within the normal range (step S352). The "normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process in FIG. The values are set in advance to value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU determines whether the setting value acquired in step S350 (that is, the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether the set value (stored in the set value stored in do.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU determines that the setting value is within the normal range, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S350 on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S354).

On the other hand, in the determination at step S352, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S356) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Following step S354, the main control MPU determines whether there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S358). In this determination, the main control MPU moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder is turned on). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the switch 1311a OFF, and then the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by turning the setting key cylinder OFF. This is performed based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input. When there is no setting key, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination of step S358, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key is not turned OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S358 again and repeats the determination of step S358 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when determining in step S358 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU sends a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S350 on the setting display 1310g. The output is stopped and the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S360).

Following step S360, the main control MPU sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S361). As described above, this setting key ON flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in the setting value exclusive area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. This is a flag that indicates whether or not to allow setting changes and confirmation displays for the currently set values 1 to 6. The value is set to 1 when permission is granted, and the value is set to 0 when setting changes and confirmation displays are not permitted. In the process of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing the setting change or confirmation display of the setting value from now on.

Following step S361, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S362), then creates a setting value confirmation display command and sets transmission information (step S364), and then in step S364 Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the set transmission information (setting value confirmation display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data (step S366), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S362 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This process is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, the serial communication initial setting in step S362 is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44, and the transmission information (setting value confirmation display command) set in step S364 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S366 is performed. is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circuit serial data, but this is before the command to be sent at power-on is reserved in step S50 in the main-control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is to prioritize and notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value confirmation has been completed using the setting value confirmation display command. The setting value confirmation display command is used to indicate that the setting value confirmation display process of this routine has been completed (in other words, that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been confirmed). ).

[8-6. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be explained. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 118), and the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the process performed in .

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal, as shown in FIG. 123 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal is to notify the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch permission signal is activated. On the other hand, if the logic is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that launch is to be stopped (non-permitted). .

The error display process that is this routine is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 121) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 119), the main control MPU can perform the interrupt permission setting in step S52 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Therefore, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 120 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. The firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic becomes firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the firing permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process that is this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 121) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. When the process is started as the process performed in step S356 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Also, in order to reliably prevent game ball B from being fired, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launching non-permission logic), and a reset function is applied from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It is output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the attached main control output circuit.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabetical character E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets the transmission information in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 121, the serial communication initial setting in step S362 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 122, and the serial communication initial setting in FIG. This process is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Control board transmission command transmission processing, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S366 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 122, and peripheral control board transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. This is the same process as the command transmission process. The error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 122) and the process performed in step S356 of the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initial settings are performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is sent to the peripheral control board as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410. It is sending to 1510.

Note that the error display command is a command that informs that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it stores error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time of reception) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). Update.

In addition, upon receiving the error display command, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 displays a white message "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a staff member" on a blue background image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to controlling the display of a text message image, the volume is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 to announce "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." Control is performed so that the volume is forcibly set to the maximum without depending on the volume, and the sound is played from various speakers. The process of notifying a RAM error using an error display command is a process with the highest priority, and if the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command after receiving a command that conveys another error, it will notify the RAM error. Give top priority.

[9. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 161 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be explained, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be explained.

[9-1. Payout control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 124 to 126. . When this payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, that process is performed preferentially.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power outage notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds ( ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated (step S512). As mentioned above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function that serves three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), and here, the RWM clear button 633z has a function that serves three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), and here, It functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase information. This determination is made when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is HI, it is determined that the RAM is not cleared, and the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, and the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared and the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. It is determined that the press operation section is being operated.

In the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state where it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, such as various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in , and the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not to be erased. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs settings to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, it is possible to access the payout control built-in RAM, and, for example, write (storage) or read payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). For example, the stack pointer can indicate an address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or it can temporarily indicate the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded onto the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. The stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not to be erased.

In the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not to be deleted, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (at the time of power-off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value has been stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off processing described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and the value is set to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed, the payout control MPU uses the payout control built-in RAM as the power restoration. A work area is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 0, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), and when the power is restored, Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage areas, etc. (for example, the prize information stored in the prize ball information storage area, Ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the CR communication information storage area. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (inconsistency counter reset judgment time, etc.) stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state where the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state where the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the payout information is to be deleted, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU When it is determined that the power-off processing of the payout control unit has not been completed normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is for setting the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when the dispensing control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1 (step S542). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2ms, which will be described later.When 2ms has passed, the value is 1, and when 2ms has not passed, the value is 0. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the dispensing control MPU returns to step S540, and the dispensing control MPU receives the input power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not.

On the other hand, in the determination at step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that 2ms have elapsed, the payout control MPU sets the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544 ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this various information, various signals are outputted from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU. The output information storage area includes, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) have been successfully received from the main control board 1310, and drive control for the payout motor 584. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED indicator is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558). Each time the ball is put out, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558.

Specifically, a counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is provided to determine whether or not to output the prize ball number information. The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later. The information is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, a counter for outputting prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The memory is updated by adding to the value the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from this prize ball information storage area, and if the read value of the prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( In other words, when the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control described above as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter.), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals inputted to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z (for example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error release switch, it becomes an error release signal to notify that the error displayed on the error LED display has been cleared), A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal, a BRDY signal and a CR connection signal from the CR unit are transmitted in the command transmission process described later. A main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that indicates that the main control board 1310 has successfully received the various commands received is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball jamming determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball jamming state has occurred due to the dispensing blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the skip determination time is set as a determination condition when determining whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing time such as the ball outage determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls received and put out by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent payout of game balls due to the discrepancy between the number of balls detected and the number of balls detected in Performs time management of the conditions and the set mismatch counter reset judgment time. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, so each time this timer update process is performed, the ball jam determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction is the value By setting it to 0, the ball jam judgment time is accurately measured. Note that these various judgment times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, various information stored in the various information storage areas. etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc.) Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

Through this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power outage or power outage, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. to the values immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. As a result, even if a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the putting-out operation cannot be continued while the putting-out device 580 is performing the putting-out operation of game balls, the putting-out action can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, when the payout control MPU is paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and it is not possible to continue paying out game balls, the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. will be maintained when power is restored. By restoring the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage, which are stored as payout backup information, the instantaneous The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power outage can be continued from the time power is restored, and game balls can continue to be paid out. ing.

In this way, even if the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit exchange various signals, even if there is a momentary power outage or stoppage, when the power is restored, the exchange will be restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or stoppage. This prevents various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the influence of a momentary power outage or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, which was set in the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is used for payout control. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as a part of the main operation setting process, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. Based on this, it is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is an abnormal operation. It is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and in the payout ball gag operation determination setting process, As a setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit, the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal is output, which indicates that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after power restoration, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. output to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before a momentary power outage, that state will be restored when the power is restored, so it can be done very quickly after the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out rental balls is impossible can be outputted from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. It is possible to notify that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a wasteful ball lending request signal, at an extremely early stage after the power is restored.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the PRDY While the logic state of the signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logic state of the PRDY signal to LOW to convey that the payout operation for paying out rental balls is impossible. output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. The logic state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and is communicated with the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out of ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out of ball checking process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the lower tray 202 described above is stored in the game ball based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether the tank is full or not, and the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574. to determine whether or not the For example, to determine whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to determine whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls or not by using the current fullness and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 turns OFF in the previous full tank and bulb out check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the full tank sensor 154 changes from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes the value 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and out of bulb check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is full with stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the above-mentioned status information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating the fact is stored in the status information storage area.

The current full and out of ball check process also uses the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to determine whether the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. When the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch is ON, and the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch is OFF during the previous full charge and out-of-bulb check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition is made from OFF to ON, measurement of the above-mentioned ball outage determination time is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the ball outage determination time reaches the value 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball outage determination time has come, the detection signal from the ball outage detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and ball outage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than a predetermined number, and a ball cut to that effect is sent. While the information is stored in the status information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. Ball-out information that conveys this fact is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are received normally, payer ACK information that conveys the fact is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, there is a connection error that indicates that there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals). The information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize ball, rental ball, ball removal, and ball holding, etc. are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and is stored as LED display information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned ball outage information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this ball outage information, if the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, the corresponding Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command sending process, various types of information are read from the status information storage area mentioned above, and various commands classified into status displays (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) are created based on this various information. and transmits it to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, the frame state 1 It creates a command and sends it to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, value A, value B, and value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines whether or not the power outage warning signal has been input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, and when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2ms have elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, in step S546 the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, in step S548 port output processing is performed, in step S550 port input processing is performed, and in step S552 performs timer update processing in step S554, performs CR communication processing in step S556, performs full tank and bulb out check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. Note that the processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main processing".

The processing contents of the payout control section main processing vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for processing by the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. There is. Thereby, the payout control MPU secures enough processing time to perform other fluctuating processing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned payout information from being rewritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared and set because the value A, value B, and value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. Note that the processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power outage or momentary power outage, and the payout control unit performs power-on processing when the power is restored thereafter.

In addition, in step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S528, it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[9-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be explained. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 124 to 126.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to prohibit and switches (saved) the register, as shown in FIG. 127 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described main processing of the payout control unit is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control section timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2ms, and the value is 1 when 2ms have passed, and the value is 0 when 2ms have not passed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). In this return, the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is switched to a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control section main processing, the value of the auxiliary register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control section timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[10. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 161 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 132. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, we will explain the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and then we will explain the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, the priority of interrupt processing is set to the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. The order is set as V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 has the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 128. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 128, the peripheral control unit performs power-on processing. When this peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S1000). This initial setting process includes the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, the process of determining hot start/cold start, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, the process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The peripheral control MPU first performs processing to initialize itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU can be initialized in an extremely short time. can be converted into As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state where interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands related to control of game production and pachinko etc. are output from the main control board 1310. It becomes possible to receive various commands such as commands regarding the status of the machine 1.

Following step S1000, the peripheral control MPU performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. Further, after performing this current time information acquisition processing, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

Following step S1002, the peripheral control MPU sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that a V blank signal has been input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU, which indicates that the screen data (information that defines the screen configuration) from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed based on this event. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

Following step S1004, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the peripheral control MPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), it returns to step S1006 and determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, the peripheral control unit enters a standby state until the steady state processing is executed. Further, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed, the peripheral control MPU first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 1. is set (step S1008). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1008, the peripheral control MPU performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the peripheral control MPU performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process to be described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the performance operation unit 300, The rotation (rotation direction) and rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 are controlled based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300"). Various information obtained from the operation of the press operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300, and press operation Based on the RAM of the peripheral control MPU in which information such as operation history information of the rotation operation section 303 is set, the rotation direction of the rotation operation section 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation section 303 are monitored. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is to be reflected in the game performance. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the production operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the volume and brightness adjustments are reflected in real time, and the performance progresses with the adjusted volume and brightness.

The peripheral control MPU also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the production operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of an LED used as direct light, the brightness of an LED used as indirect light, and Set each. While the performance is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the performance operation section 301 (rotary operation section 302, press operation section 303), and the first When a specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is set to the specified brightness value. It is now possible to update the information.

Here, the brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value that make up the lamp palette setting table will be briefly explained. The specified brightness value can be set to one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (lights out) to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, respectively. The player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the operable performance operation unit 301 (rotary operation unit 302, press operation unit 303) to change the 31st brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. One specified brightness value can be set up to the specified value.

For example, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise, the current brightness is temporarily set to the 0th (zero) brightness, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). When the brightness is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed along a tone curve (or a spline tone curve) to increase the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. When rotating clockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear (or a spline-like tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to become lower. When a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) rotates the rotary operation section 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the press operation section 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance in which the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) can set the brightness while the performance is in progress. , etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303. In addition, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the rotary operation unit 302, a predetermined position of the display area of the performance display device 1600 while the performance is in progress is displayed with a first brightness specified value to a 31st brightness value. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate as an image the desired brightness level of the player (or the staff such as a clerk at the game hall). It is now possible to do so. Further, in this embodiment, the 14th specified brightness value is set as the initial value (default).

Normally, the palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, which are irradiated with direct light. be. Normally, the palette value is selected from 17 stages in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%) to the maximum palette value (100%), and the brightness described above is selected. The pallet value corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range from the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value is determined by a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve). , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation among the 32-level range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the brightness designation values mentioned above. (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) written in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the brightness specified value mentioned above. This is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range up to the 31st brightness designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are irradiated with direct light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and are irradiated with direct light, the palette The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in a light guide plate that is irradiated with indirect light. The special palette value differs from the normal palette value in that there is only one level, and it is one of the 32 levels from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values mentioned above. Palette values corresponding to the brightness designation are set as the above-mentioned gradation information along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value that is set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light using indirect light at the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). The lowest possible brightness is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th specified brightness value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one specified brightness value is set along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. When setting the brightness and brightness of the LED used as direct light, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) adjusts the brightness by operating the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303. While the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) can control the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section. The brightness is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specified value by the operation 303. As a result, when a player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and sets it by operating the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 in order to reduce the brightness, it is possible to use the LED as direct light. The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off), and the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level), and Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light was also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off)). However, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value almost equal to the 18th specified brightness value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The lowest brightness that allows the light guide plate to visually recognize the state in which it emits light by indirect light is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, in contrast to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if you do not set it, you can set the lighting mode that follows the flow of the performance, and the flow of the performance depending on the lighting mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After looking at this, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a particular decorative board that is too bright (or the effect would be better achieved with a slightly darker brightness), and set the other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative board, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. In other words, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the operable performance operation section 301 (rotary operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. Even if one brightness specification value that extends up to the brightness specification value is set, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one brightness specification value will be set for a specific decorative board. , For other decorative boards, one luminance specified value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set respectively, so the relationship between the mutually set luminous modes (bright or dark) The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without disturbing the relationship (

Furthermore, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate compared to direct light, special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (in other words, independent from the normal palette values) are required for LEDs used as indirect light. You can now set the brightness. As a result, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is managed by special palette values, and the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is managed by normal palette values. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the peripheral control MPU performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the peripheral control MPU and generates one screen worth of image data on the VRAM of the peripheral control MPU in the display data creation process described later. The drawing data for one frame is output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In addition, in display data output processing, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control MPU, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. This makes it possible to prevent delays in processing time, but it also causes so-called dropped frames. The system is designed to prioritize performance.

Following step S1016, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the peripheral control MPU performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, to instruct which screen data from the first screen data to output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation. , update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is used to indicate which light emitting data is to be output from the first light emitting data among the light emitting data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode. Update.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of production sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in chronological order and constitute the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated to instruct which number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control MPU.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data, which drive data is to be output from the first drive data? Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data, is a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated in motor and solenoid drive processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed every time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is performed. Updates the pointer to the data, and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so if for some reason the pointer points to the original point in the motor and solenoid drive process, Even if the drive data that is supposed to be used instructs other drive data, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that was originally supposed to be used.

Following step S1020, the peripheral control MPU performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, and the various received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the performance. Random numbers (for example, random numbers used for effects related to pending prefetching) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and in this received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Analyzes various commands. The peripheral control MPU reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. ) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

Note that the peripheral control MPU also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the received command analysis processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and set respectively. The peripheral control MPU analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) schedule data for generating light emitting modes from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp palette setting processing. Then, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the performance operation section 301 (rotary operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. When a single luminance specification value up to the 31st luminance specification value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU so that it becomes the set luminance specification value. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a command from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a starting opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning presentation, a pending number of normal symbols, etc. (0 to 4 pieces); a fluctuation pattern command for instructing the start of a fluctuating performance such as a fluctuating display of decorative symbols on the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the fluctuating display of special symbols; Analyze whether it is a symbol memory command that is output when the starting pending number changes, or a grand prize opening 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is accepted into the grand prize opening 2005, and determine which gaming state is currently in place. Recognize what is there.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU in the received command analysis processing. Analyzes various commands. Various commands include various commands related to special figure 1 synchronized production, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronized production, various commands related to jackpot, various commands classified to power on, and general commands. Various commands classified as figure synchronization performance related, various commands classified as normal electric role performance related, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, etc. There are various other types of commands. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process regarding notices etc. based on the received command, and based on the lottery results, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

Note that the peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control section 1511, the effect display control section 1511, and the like. Various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data for generating light emission modes for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating production sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging light emission mode data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU, and one of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU. , and a track number for instructing in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the peripheral control MPU performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands categorized as notification display, the abnormality display mode is set to execute various abnormality notifications. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed from the highest priority registered in advance, and will automatically transition to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing the information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. I can do it.

Following step S1024, the peripheral control MPU performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. Through this RCT acquisition information update processing, hours, minutes, and seconds, which are time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, are updated, and calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU based on this updated time information. The date will be updated.

Following step S1026, the peripheral control MPU performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is transferred to the peripheral control ROM. It is read out from (extracted from) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU.

When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads image data from the SDRAM and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 for one screen based on the input screen data. 1 frame worth of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the sound command data indicated by the pointer is selected from among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads the sound data from the SDRAM, incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and outputs the sound data. Set the output channel to use according to the channel number.

In addition, in the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is adjusted based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. has been identified. The peripheral control MPU controls the sound source of the peripheral control MPU so that the volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, outputs the sound from the output channel set in this sound data creation process. Outputs sound data to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into a value in 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the volume is set to mute, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control MPU is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from various speakers. In this way, music and sound effects are played from various speakers by adjusting the volume based on the rotational operation of the volume adjustment switch.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is installed, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU contain production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data and its volume, the sound data and volume of the notification sound that is used to notify the hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. Includes subvolume values.

Specifically, for production sound, the above-mentioned board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for notification sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the production sound is determined during a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) Until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the variable pattern command was received by the peripheral control unit and after the variable display of the decorative pattern started, or 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the peripheral control unit received the stop display command and the final display of the decorative pattern has elapsed. ) can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example operates for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral Until 0.5 seconds elapse after the control unit receives the fluctuation pattern command and the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, or after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command and 0.5 seconds after the final display of the decorative pattern. By operating the rotation operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch can be applied to the board in the sound data creation process. The volume is converted into 7 levels of values from 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the rotational operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume and setting the board volume.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU include the master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized production sound is In fact, the volume is amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume played from various speakers, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that the volume flowing from various speakers becomes the maximum allowable volume. It is set so that Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU, and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The board volume adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value to adjust the volume is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound becomes the volume actually played from the various speakers. The amplified performance sound is amplified to the master volume value, serialized, and output as audio data. The maximum volume is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually adjusted. , the amplified notification sound is amplified to a master volume value that corresponds to the volume of the sound coming from various speakers, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, I would like to briefly explain the control for playing a notification sound to notify the hall staff, etc. of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when the performance sound is being played from various speakers. Forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is installed to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for muting, and the notification sound are incorporated. The sound data of the track and the sub-volume value where the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound and the volume of the notification sound are compared to the volume actually played from various speakers. The amplified performance sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, only the maximum volume notification sound is actually played from the various speakers. At this time, although the performance sound is muted and is not played from the various speakers, the performance sound is progressing according to the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from various speakers for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after this predetermined period has elapsed, the process proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute. The volume of the effect sound that is being played is set again as the sub-volume value by the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch. If the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by the operation, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound) and is played from various speakers.

In this way, when the performance sound is played from various speakers, when the notification sound is played to notify the hall staff of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the performance sound is changed. Although the notification sound is muted and is played from various speakers, the muted performance sound is progressing according to the schedule data for sound generation, so if the notification sound stops playing from the various speakers after a predetermined period of time, the performance sound will be changed. The sound does not start playing again from the point where the notification sound started, but starts playing again from the point where the notification sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In addition, the notification sound and announcement sound are configured to flow completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch, and the peripheral control MPU can adjust the volume from mute to maximum volume by the peripheral control MPU. It is now possible to control and adjust the sound source. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an employee such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers will be reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs or when a player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set at a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff such as clerks at the game hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or a fraudulent act by a player.

Following step S1032, the peripheral control MPU performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Copy it to the backup area for regular processing and back it up.

Following step S1034, the peripheral control MPU performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

Following step S1036, the peripheral control MPU sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 to indicate that the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1008 to The process of S1038 is performed and the process returns to step S1004 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1008, indicating that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed.In step S1010, a 1ms interrupt timer activation process is started. , performs each process in steps S1014, . Become. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed in response to this event. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control MPU is ready to accept screen data is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU. do. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, as shown in FIG. 129 (step S1045). As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 128 is being executed; They are each set to the value 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination in step S1045, if the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, if it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the peripheral control MPU continues this routine as is. finish. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, the peripheral control MPU sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. is set to the value 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control section steady processing, and when the peripheral control section steady processing is executed, the value is 1; They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control section steady processing is executed. When it is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, the peripheral control unit steady state process currently being executed is assumed to be executed in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 128. Since the processing is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to the value 1, the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing in this routine is informed that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to the value 0 in step S1038 in the process when the peripheral control unit is turned on (peripheral control unit steady processing), the peripheral control unit in this routine By transmitting the information to the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, the peripheral control section steady processing. It is determined whether the execution has been completed or not. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the routine processing of the peripheral control section cannot be completed between the input of the V blank signal and the input of the next V blank signal, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing cannot be completed in approximately 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next It is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, it takes approximately 66.6 ms to execute the current peripheral control section steady processing that has failed. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is normally executed repeatedly each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 128. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process will be executed 64 times. It is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the steady processing of the peripheral control unit fails, the progress state of the effect caused by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the progress state of the effect caused by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably matched.

[10-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 128. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 130 (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 128. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the process is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

In the determination in step S1100, the peripheral control MPU determines that when the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has been started. Sometimes, the routine simply ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1100, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is smaller than 33, it adds a value of 1 to the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN (increments step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data, and updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and updates the pointer every time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed. do. As a result, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the peripheral control MPU (for example, electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and electric drive sources provided in various production units provided in the game board 5) are controlled by the peripheral control MPU. , the electrical drive source is driven according to the schedule data.

Following step S1104, the peripheral control MPU performs a movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU sets the original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various production units provided on the game board 5 based on history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The movable position can be grasped by checking the movable position or obtaining the movable position.

Following step S1106, the peripheral control MPU performs production operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of press operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The rotational direction of the rotary operation section 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation section 303 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the performance operation unit 301, the volume of performance sounds output from various speakers can be adjusted, and multiple decorative boards mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 can be adjusted. The brightness of the various LEDs can be adjusted.

Following step S1108, the peripheral control MPU performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are set to different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the performance from step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 128, various processing related to the effect from step S1014 to step S1032 is executed as the effect progresses within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

Furthermore, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[10-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control MPU starts transmitting various commands as serial data from the main control board 1310, this triggers the peripheral control MPU to send the main serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU in 1 byte (8 bits) format. Information is loaded into the reception buffer, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt is generated using this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet consists of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values and are summed as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 131 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the determination in step S1200, the peripheral control MPU receives 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. If it is determined that it is within the period for obtaining the data, one byte of information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC, step S1204. ). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data is taken out from the reception buffer.When the status, which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the value is 1, which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data, which is the mode. When taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. Note that the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this judgment, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are sequentially read from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination in step S1206, the peripheral control MPU determines that when the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, the mode is still the second byte of the main serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data; When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, the peripheral control MPU determines that when the reception counter SRXC is the value 3, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the peripheral control MPU selects a mode which is the second byte of the main serial data. , and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer in order, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). . In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, which has already been taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, static electricity is discharged and noise is generated, so the pachinko machine 1 is not affected by the noise. It is in a favorable environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are regarded as numerical values. and calculates the sum value (sum value), and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the main circumference serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has changed to main circumference serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise. be able to.

In the determination in step S1214, the peripheral control MPU determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match. When this happens, the received status assigned as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU (step S1216); Exit this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the peripheral control MPU receives 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the period in which data can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the peripheral control MPU receives the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value in step S1212. If it is determined that the sum value calculated in and the sum value do not match, this routine is immediately terminated.

[10-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing that is executed when a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), as shown in FIG. 132, and checks whether or not a power outage warning signal is input. Determination is made (step S1302). If the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1302 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it immediately ends this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when the peripheral control MPU determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has elapsed for 2 microseconds. In the determination in step S1304, if 2 macro seconds have not elapsed, the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1302, determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input. In some cases, this routine is terminated as is, but if it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, the peripheral control MPU performs power saving processing ( Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off the lights of various LEDs. By suppressing this, even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU can operate.

Following step S1306, the peripheral control MPU performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 waits for at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU can receive the commands being sent. It is set to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control section command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

Following step S1308, the peripheral control MPU performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

Following step S1310, the peripheral control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination in step S1312, when the peripheral control MPU determines that a power outage warning signal is input, it performs a WDT clearing process (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1312 and determines whether the power outage warning signal has been input. judge. In other words, it continues to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal is inputted indefinitely. By continuing to make the determination infinitely in this way, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it becomes unable to output a clear signal to the external WDT, and the peripheral control MPU becomes unable to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the MPU is reset, if the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU is not reset. Note that when the peripheral control MPU is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 128 is restarted.

In this way, if the input of the power outage warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314 to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset immediately before a power outage occurs. It has become. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is mistakenly started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than 2 microseconds and passes the determination in step S1302, the step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process in step S1314 is not executed and the peripheral control MPU is reset. It is now possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[11. Main control board control processing]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 will first start the process using the first starting port sensor 2101, as shown in FIG. 133. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S2031), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is stored in the RAM. A first starting opening passage process such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S2032). Further, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (ball has entered the second starting port 2004) (step S2033), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the above random number. A second starting opening passage process is executed, such as acquiring it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol retention storage area of the RAM (step S2034).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled is set (step S2035), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S2039) is executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "15R jackpot A", 15R A sorting piece 2415 that controls the opening and closing of the big prize opening 2005 according to the jackpot game state A and distributes the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008. The drive is controlled and a process is executed to set the game ball B to the valid state in the 15th round when it is possible to distribute the game balls B to the second receiving port 2008. In addition, when the mode suggests "15R jackpot B", the opening/closing control of the big winning hole 2005 is controlled according to the 15R jackpot gaming state B, and the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is transferred to the first receiving hole. The distribution piece 2415 for distributing to either the second receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is driven and controlled, and a process is executed to set it to the valid state in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008.

Here, "valid state" and "invalid state" will be explained. First, in this embodiment, the state when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 is a "valid state". Here, the "valid state" means that in the 15th round, when the game balls B can be distributed to the second reception port 2008, the game ball B is received in the second reception port 2008, and the game ball becomes high after the jackpot game state ends. This is a state in which control to a stochastic state is permitted (enabled). Therefore, by receiving the game ball B in the second receiving port 2008 in the "valid state", the high probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Moreover, in this embodiment, the second receiving port 2008 has an "invalid state" which is different from the "valid state" as a state in which the game ball B is not received. Here, the "invalid state" is a state in which, as a general rule, game balls B are not received at the second reception port 2008, such as in the 1st to 14th rounds when game balls B are distributed to the first reception port 2007. Even if the game ball B is accepted into the second receiving port 2008, the control to the high probability state is not allowed (invalidated) after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, even if the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 in the "invalid state", it will not be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, in the "invalid state", when game balls B are accepted into the second reception entrance 2008 due to an abnormality such as fraudulent activity, it is possible to notify the hall management side of information regarding the occurrence of such an abnormality. Therefore, this is the period during which it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008. In this embodiment, the "valid state" is set in a predetermined round (15th round) in which game balls B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, and the game ball B is not placed in the second receiving port 2008. Whenever the ball B is accepted, the control is made to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, although the predetermined rounds (1st to 14th rounds) in which game balls B are not distributed to the second receiving port 2008 are set to the "invalid state", they may be set to the "valid state". In this way, even if it is set to "valid state" in all rounds during the jackpot gaming state, game balls B will not be accepted into the second receiving port 2008 in the 1st to 14th rounds, so Similar to the case where the ``invalid state'' is set in the 14th round, it is important whether or not the game ball B is accepted into the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round when the ``valid state'' is set.

In the jackpot control process (step S2041), after controlling the opening of the big winning opening 2005, each setting process of the high probability flag, time saving flag, and time saving number counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state. During the execution of the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B), it is possible to distribute the game ball B to the second receiving slot 2008 in the 1st to 15th rounds when the jackpot opening 2005 is opened. If the game ball B is accepted into the second reception port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the high probability flag is set because the control is set to the high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state. However, if the game ball B is not accepted into the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the control is changed to the high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Since this is not the case, the high probability flag is not set. Then, when the high probability flag is set, the next time a jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144, which will be described later, or The high probability flag is reset in a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

In addition, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is in effect, and the time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is in effect, and the time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is in effect. It is set when ending the jackpot game state based on the jackpot. Then, the time saving flag is activated when the next jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time saving number counter reaches "0", the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop (not shown) Reset during processing.

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of variable displays of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time saving state, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving state (high probability When ending the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) controlled in the time saving state (low probability time saving state), the number of times the time saving state continues is set, and the time saving number counter is , until the counter value reaches ``0'', the countdown is performed each time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but if the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches ``0'', then the counter value will be counted down as shown in Figure 144, which will be described later. It is reset by the first special symbol stop processing shown in or the second special symbol stop processing not shown (the counter value is returned to "0").

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, the condition is that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0". (Step S2036), executes the first special symbol process process including the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S2037), and executes the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S2037). On the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S2036), the second special symbol includes a lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S2038). In this way, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S2032).

Now, in the process of step S2031, it is determined that the first starting port sensor 2101 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 134. As the process of step S2041, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first pending storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) "4" or not (step S2042). In the process of step S2042, if it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S2043 to The process of S2045 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2043, the first special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S2044, each random number acquired in step S2041 is stored in a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S2041. whether or not to be a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing a performance preliminary determination process in which preliminary determination information such as the type of variation pattern is determined before starting a variable display according to the starting prize (step S2045), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of step S2042, if it is determined that the first pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S2043 to S2045, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the first hold memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first hold. It is updated to correspond to the number of memories, and in the above storage process (step S20), a command (first reservation number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the first reservation number of memories is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It is supposed to be done. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to display the first pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the first pending number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for the performance advance determination process (step S2045). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the performance pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S2041 above, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 or not. The mode type of game performance is specified (step S2061).

Then, the specified preliminary judgment information (whether or not there will be a jackpot, if it will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it will not be a jackpot, whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the effect display device 1600, (e.g., the type of game performance to be performed), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the pending number counter). Set the prejudgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S2045 of the first starting gate passing process, the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number (the 1 (value of the special reservation number counter) and a first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding to the value is set (step S2062).

Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), a preliminary determination command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that it is stored in correspondence with the first starting port 2002 where the starting prize has occurred. In addition to the number of pending memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of special symbols based on the generated starting winnings is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, it is executed by the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether a reach effect is to be executed as a game effect to be played or prior judgment information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed before starting variable display according to the starting prize. will be able to understand.

Note that when the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reservation storage area that stores advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first pending storage area has storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of pending memories, and the peripheral control MPU stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command in the first (earliest) storage area. Store in order starting from the area. Then, when a preliminary determination command is received when preliminary determination information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the preliminary determination information notified to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the first variable pattern command notifying the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is received, the preset data stored in the first storage area of the first pending storage area is stored in accordance with the received first variation pattern command. Discard the judgment information and move the preliminary judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). (shift the stored pre-judgment information). Thereby, the advance determination information of the first special symbol is stored in such a manner that the order in which the start of variable display is suspended can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest advance determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is ), it will be possible to notify this at a predetermined timing, for example, when a new pending display is output, or when a shifted display of a pending display is displayed in accordance with the expiration of the pending display. .

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S2034).

Now, in the process of step S2033, it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 136. As the process of step S2051, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value). ) is "4" (step S2052). In the process of step S2052, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S2053 to The process of S2054 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2053, the second special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S2054, each random number acquired in step S2051 is stored in a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

On the other hand, in the process of step S2052, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S2053 to S2054, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the second hold memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second hold memory number. It is updated to correspond to the number of memories, and in the above storage process (step S20), a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 1) for instructing the second reservation number of memories is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It is supposed to be done. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to display the second pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the second pending number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S2037). Note that the first special symbol process process executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. This program module differs only in the random numbers and tables used for determination, so only the first special symbol process process executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and based on the read out first special random number, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode of the first special symbol when the fluctuation control is stopped. Symbol normal processing (step S2080)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081 )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in response to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S2082) in which a lottery process for
4. A first special symbol variation process that waits until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S2083)
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. A first special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so that the first special symbol is displayed as follows (step S2084)

The first special symbol process flag is operated in the process of step S40 (see FIG. 118) to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S2080) should be performed.

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S2080).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S2101 As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state, then as a process of step S2102, the storage area is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S2103 and S2104, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a starting prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the above-mentioned first special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

After that, as the process of step S2105, a jackpot determination process, which is a lottery process for winning or losing the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. Thereafter, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S2106) so as to proceed to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081), this process ends.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S2105).

If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S2111), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the high probability state shown in FIG. 140(A). A jackpot determination table is selected (step S2112), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S2111), a jackpot determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 140(A) is selected (step S2113) and selected. The jackpot determination table is compared with the first special random number read out in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S2114).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 140(A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)) The game system includes a jackpot determination table when the probability is low and a jackpot determination table when the probability is high to be used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability time saving state). In the jackpot determination table at low probability, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/319, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/309, when the setting value is 3, it is 1/299, and when the setting value is 4. The first special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won the jackpot with a jackpot probability of 1/289 when the set value is 5, 1/279 when the set value is 6, and 1/269 when the set value is 6. The above-mentioned first special random numbers are respectively associated with each other so that the first special random numbers other than the above-mentioned first special random numbers match the deviation judgment value indicating that the above-mentioned first special random numbers are out-of-order. In addition, in the low probability jackpot determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the first Similar to the low probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with special random numbers, if the setting value is 1, it is 1/319, if the setting value is 2, it is 1/309, and if the setting value is 3. The second special random number won the jackpot with a jackpot probability of 1/299, 1/289 if the setting value was 4, 1/279 if the setting value was 5, and 1/269 if the setting value was 6. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the second special random numbers match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot is a hit, and the other second special random numbers match the loss judgment value that indicates the loss.

In addition, in the jackpot determination table at high probability, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/31.9, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/30.9, when the setting value is 3, it is 1/29.9, The first special random number has a jackpot probability of 1/28.9 when the setting value is 4, 1/27.9 when the setting value is 5, and 1/26.9 when the setting value is 6. Includes the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot judgment table. ) matches the jackpot judgment value, and the other first special random numbers match the loss judgment value. A special random number is associated with each. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability time saving state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won is different from the jackpot judgment value indicating winning the jackpot for each set value in the low probability state (normal state (low probability non time saving state)). and time saving state (low probability time saving state)). In addition, in the high probability jackpot determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the first Similar to the high probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with special random numbers, if the setting value is 1, it will be 1/31.9, if the setting value is 2, it will be 1/30.9, and if the setting value is 3. A jackpot of 1/29.9 if the setting value is 4, 1/28.9 if the setting value is 5, 1/27.9 if the setting value is 6, and 1/26.9 if the setting value is 6. The probability is that the second special random number (including the second special random number that is the same as the second special random number set in the jackpot judgment table at low probability) will match the jackpot judgment value, and the other second special random numbers will be lost. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the determination value.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read out in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process, and when it is determined that the jackpot is achieved (step S2115 ), sets a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a jackpot, and ends the process (step S2116), and sets the selected jackpot determination table and the first special symbol read in step S2102 of the normal processing. As a result of the comparison with the random number, if it is determined that the winning number is out, a reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read out in step S2102 (step S2117). Then, as a result of comparing the reach determination table with the reach random number read out in step S2102, if it is determined that the reach is out of reach (step S2118), a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach is set and processing is performed. The process ends (step S2119).

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S2105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S2121).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S2121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 140(B). (Step S2122), the type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S2123). On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S2121, the winning symbol is determined as the mode when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (step S2124).

As shown in FIG. 140(B), the symbol determination table stores symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) associated with each determination result (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). ing. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the determination result associated with the acquired random symbol number. In addition, in the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

in particular,
1.15R jackpot Opening/closing control of the big winning hole 2005 is performed according to the game state A, and in the 15th round, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time (an opening where it is difficult for the game ball B to enter. For example, 0. 5 seconds) and for a long period of time (opening that allows game ball B to enter (easily); for example, 20 seconds), it will be in a valid state (by receiving game ball B into the second receiving port 2008, a jackpot game state will be activated). When the game ball B is accepted into the second receiving port 2008 during the active state in the 15th round, a special While the variable display of the symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is controlled to be in a high probability time saving state until it is executed 100 times, the game ball B enters the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round. If not accepted, the 15R jackpot A is controlled to a low probability time saving state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot gaming state.
2.15R jackpot Opening/closing of the big winning hole 2005 is controlled according to the game state B, and the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time in the 15th round (an opening where it is difficult for the game ball B to enter. For example, 0. 5 seconds), it is set to the valid state (a state in which control is made to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state by receiving the game ball B in the second receiving port 2008), and it is set to the valid state in the 15th round. If the game ball B is accepted into the second receiving port 2008 during the state, the high-speed display will continue until the variable display of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game state. While controlling to the probability time shortening state, if the game ball B is not accepted into the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) are One of the two types of jackpots is determined: 15R jackpot B, which is controlled to a low probability time saving state until the variable display of the special symbol (2) is executed 100 times.

In the 15R jackpot game state A of this example, the operation schedule of the big winning hole 2005 in the 15th round is to open the big winning hole 2005 for a short time (0.5 seconds) and set the interval time within the round for a predetermined time (4.5 seconds). It is set to open the big prize opening 2005 for a long time (20 seconds) after the time period (seconds) has elapsed. In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in the 15th round, when starting the short-time opening (0.5 seconds) of the big prize opening 2005, the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the distribution piece 2415 is started. However, when starting to open the big prize opening 2005 for a long time (20 seconds), the long-time operation (10 seconds) of the distribution pieces 2415 is started, and during the operation period of the distribution pieces 2415, the second reception opening 2008 is opened. It is set so that game ball B can be accepted. In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, the effective state (a state that is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state by receiving the game ball B in the second receiving port 2008) ) is set.

On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot game state B of this example, the operation schedule of the big winning hole 2005 in the 15th round is set to open the big winning hole 2005 for a short time (0.5 seconds). In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in the 15th round, when starting the short-time opening (0.5 seconds) of the big prize opening 2005, the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the distribution piece 2415 is started. However, it is set so that the game ball B can be received in the second receiving port 2008 during the operation period of the distribution piece 2415. In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, the effective state (a state that is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state by receiving the game ball B in the second receiving port 2008) ) is set.

As mentioned above, both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B are in the active state in the 15th round (by receiving the game ball B into the second receiving port 2008, the jackpot gaming state becomes a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state). However, in the 15R jackpot game state A, when the big winning hole 2005 is opened for the second time in the 15th round, it is opened for a long time (20 seconds), so the big winning hole 2005 is set to It is extremely easy for the game ball B to be accepted, and furthermore, since the distribution piece 2415 is operated for a long time (10 seconds) during the period when the big prize hole 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds), the game ball B is not inserted into the big prize hole 2005. It is extremely easy for the accepted game balls B to be sorted (accepted) to the second reception port 2008. In this way, in the 15R jackpot game state A, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely high, so after the end of the jackpot game state, the control is made to a high probability state. The probability of doing so is also extremely high. On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot game state B, the big winning hole 2005 is only opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) in the 15th round, so it is extremely difficult for the game ball B to be accepted into the big winning hole 2005. Since the sorting piece 2415 is activated only for a short time (0.2 seconds) during the period when the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), the game ball B accepted into the big winning hole 2005 is the second one. It is extremely difficult to be sorted (accepted) to the reception port 2008. In this way, in the 15R jackpot game state B, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely low, so the control is made to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. The probability of doing so is also extremely low.

In addition, the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 is such that the distribution piece 2415 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) has elapsed, the distribution piece 2415 is opened for a long time (10 seconds). 2415), and when starting the 15th round in 15R jackpot gaming state A and 15R jackpot gaming state B, I'm trying to start a schedule. In this way, by setting the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 as a single operation schedule, the amount of data related to the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 is prevented from increasing as much as possible.

In addition, in the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B of this example, the operation schedule of the big win hole 2005 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds is to open the big win hole 2005 for a long time (20 seconds). It is set as follows. In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, the distribution piece 2415 is not operated, and during that period, the game ball B is placed in the first reception port 2007 instead of the second reception port 2008. is set to be accepted. In addition, as a state setting schedule for the second receiving port 2008 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, the state is set to an invalid state (in principle, the game ball B is not accepted into the second receiving port 2008, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, (a state in which control is not performed in a high probability state). In this way, in both the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B, in the 1st to 14th rounds, the game balls B are distributed to the second receiving port 2008 when the big prize opening 2005 is opened, such as in the 15th round. There is no game to see if the game ball B will be accepted (acceptable), but a game to see if the game ball B will be accepted when the big prize opening 2005 is opened is simply played.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. In the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of judgment values is set to be different compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 140(B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, among 15R jackpot A and 15R jackpot B, 15R jackpot A (15 round Distribution of 50 judgment values for jackpots in which there is a high probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the second receiving port 2008 during the active state and a high probability that the jackpot game state will be controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. 15R jackpot B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player (the probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the second receiving port 2008 during the active state in the 15th round is low, and the jackpot gaming state ends) Fifty determination values are set for a jackpot (with a low probability that will later be controlled to a high probability state). On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, distribution of 65 judgment values is set for 15R jackpot A, which is relatively advantageous to the player, among 15R jackpot A and 15R jackpot B. On the other hand, distribution of 35 judgment values is set for 15R jackpot B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. In this way, when a jackpot occurs on the first special symbol side, either 15R jackpot A or 15R jackpot B, which has different degrees of advantage for the player, is determined, so what kind of jackpot is determined at the first jackpot? can draw attention to. In addition, in the time saving state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, the game on the second special symbol side (the game that allows the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004) is performed, but the second special When you hit the jackpot on the symbol side, the 15R jackpot game A is determined with a higher probability than when you hit the jackpot on the first special symbol side, so it is possible to draw attention to how much prize ball you can get during consecutive hits. can. Therefore, since the game quality changes between the first jackpot and the consecutive hits, the game is not monotonous.

Moreover, when the type of jackpot is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when it is determined to be 15R jackpot A, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when it is determined to be 15R jackpot B, the 15R jackpot B symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In addition, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when 15R jackpot A is determined, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

After the process of determining the stop symbols is performed in this way, as the process of step S2125, the lottery results (type of jackpot, reach-to-reach, or miss) are specified (the mode of the stop symbols of the first special symbol is specified). A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the command)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S2126, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082). The peripheral control MPU starts variable display of left, middle, and right decorative patterns based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command, and stops displaying them in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle decorative pattern. Display control of the effect display device 1600 is performed as follows.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU selects 15R of the jackpot related to the first special symbol from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decorative symbol displayed on the production display device 1600 stops changing. When jackpot A is specified, the 15R jackpot A symbol (same decorative pattern combination) is determined, and when 15R jackpot B is identified, the 15R jackpot B symbol (common with the 15R jackpot A symbol) is determined, and the variation When the variable time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the ready-to-win performance), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this way, when the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped fluctuating at either the 15R jackpot A pattern or the 15R jackpot B pattern, it is possible to determine that it is a jackpot from the stopped pattern of the decorative pattern. However, since a common symbol is used as the 15R jackpot A symbol and the 15R jackpot B symbol, it is not possible to distinguish between 15R jackpot A and 15R jackpot B.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU determines, as a state (stop pattern) when the variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped, a missed symbol with a reach when it is specified from the received determination result notification command that the reach is off. (A combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative patterns are the same) and if a miss is determined, a missed pattern without reach (a combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative patterns are the same). are determined to be different (non-identical), and the determined stop symbols are displayed on the performance display device 1600 at the elapse of the variable time specified from the variable pattern command (at the end of the game performance).

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S2082).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S2141), select the jackpot variation pattern table (not shown) according to the type of jackpot determined in step S2123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the current gaming state (step S2142), if the reach flag is set (step S2143), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected according to the current gaming state (step S2144), and both the jackpot flag and the reach flag are set. If it is not set, that is, if it is a normal loss (a loss without executing the reach effect), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S2145).

Then, the fluctuation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected fluctuation pattern table and the fluctuation random number read out in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S2146), and the surroundings for starting the determined fluctuation pattern are determined. A variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S2147). In addition, the main control MPU sets a variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer when determining the variation pattern (step S2148). As a result, the performance control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variable time determined in this way.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of pieces of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in a form that is associated with each fluctuating random number. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the selected fluctuation pattern table from among the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables according to the determination results based on the special random numbers and symbol random numbers, and the fluctuation random numbers read out in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined by comparing the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table. As a result, a lottery process regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. Note that the variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute with the fluctuation random number. . For example, among the reach performances, the super reach performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach performance, and when the super reach performance is executed, the player's expectation level for the jackpot game state increases.

In addition, when the first special symbol fluctuation display control is started, the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol fluctuation processing (step S2083) as the process of step S2149. This process ends when the update is completed.

In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of a miss, the variation time information of the special symbol, which is set to about 1 second when the time is short, is associated with the above-mentioned special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), while The variation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a way that the variation time information of the special symbol, which is set to about 12 seconds when the time is short, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, the variation pattern of the missed time selected in the time saving mode is selected so that the time required to control the variation display of the special symbol is extremely short compared to the variation pattern of the missed time selected in the non-time saving mode. Symbol fluctuation time information is set.

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S2083).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S2171 As the process, a variable timer in which a variable time is set according to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process for the variable pattern (step S2082) is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S2172), the process moves to step S2173. That is, in the process of this step S2173, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S2084).

FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S2084).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S2181, as shown in FIG. As the processing, display control is performed to display the stop symbols determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the display control is performed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern (step S2182).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether the time saving flag is set and the counter value of the time saving number counter where the number of continuations of the time saving state is set is "0". (Step S2183). If this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S2184), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short time number counter is "0" (step S2185). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S2186). Note that if the counter value of the time saving number counter is determined to be "0" in the process of step S2183 above, or if it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S2185 above, , at that point, the process moves to step S2187.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S2187), a jackpot start command indicating that a jackpot gaming state is to be started is set (step S2189), and a jackpot gaming state is started (a jackpot round start command is set). A waiting time (a period during which a display indicating that the jackpot game state is to be started, etc.) is set in an interval timer (step S2190). Next, if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset, and furthermore, the counter value of the time saving number counter is If it is not "0", after resetting the counter value (returning it to "0"), a jackpot execution flag indicating that a jackpot gaming state is being executed is set (step S2191), and the first special symbol process At the time when the flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S2192), this process is ended.

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S2189, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. As a result, an effect according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, etc.

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S2039).

In step S2189, the waiting time until the start of the jackpot gaming state is set in the interval timer, but after the waiting time set in this interval timer has elapsed in the process of step S2401, As shown, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the opening and closing of the jackpot opening 2005, and also enters the active state in the 15th round (by receiving the game ball B into the second receiving opening 2008, the jackpot gaming state). The game ball B received in the grand prize opening 2005 in the 15th round is transferred to the second receiving opening 2008. Opening/closing the second receiving port to control the driving of the sorting piece 2415 so that it can be distributed, and to monitor whether or not the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round. The process (step S2403) is executed in order.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the big winning opening opening/closing process (step S2402).

Now, in the process of step S2411, if it is determined that the grand prize opening 2005 is in an open state, as shown in FIG. 146, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 When a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds when opened for a long time and 0.5 seconds when opened for a short time) has passed since the big prize opening 2005 was opened according to the operation schedule (step S2412), or When the maximum number of game balls B (for example, 9) wins in the open grand prize opening 2005 (step S2413), the open grand prize opening 2005 is controlled to be closed (step S2414). If it is determined that the current round is to be ended by controlling the jackpot 2005 to a closed state (step S2415), the type of jackpot and the current round number are sent as commands to the peripheral control board 1510. A jackpot round end command corresponding to the above is set (step S2416), and the process moves to step S2428.

Further, in the process of step S2411, if it is determined that the grand prize opening 2005 is in a closed state, as shown in FIG. 146, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 According to the operation schedule, when it is determined that a new round is to be started by controlling the big winning hole 2005 to the open state (step S2417), the big winning hole 2005 is opened. (Step S2418) sets a jackpot round start command according to the type of jackpot and the new number of rounds as a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2419). Then, if it is determined that it is the timing to set the valid state flag according to the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008, that is, in the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds in which the big winning port 2005 is opened. If it is the start time (step S2420), a valid state flag is set (step S2421). Note that if the valid state flag is set at the start of the 15th round in step S2420, it is necessary to reset the valid state flag at the end of the 15th round. Then, the closed state grand prize opening 2005 or the said great winning a prize opening 2005 is controlled to an open state (step S2422), and the process moves to step S2428. In addition, if it is determined that a new round will not be started by controlling the big prize opening 2005 to an open state (such as opening for the second time in the same round) (step S2418), or if the valid state flag is If it is determined that it is not the timing to set (not at the start of the 15th round) (step S2420), the closed grand prize opening 2005 is controlled to be opened (step S2422), and step S2428 to move to. Thereby, the performance display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. can perform the performance according to the type of jackpot and the current number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command.

In addition, the valid state flag indicates that it is set to a valid state (a state in which control is made to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state by receiving the game ball B in the second receiving port 2008). This is a flag to indicate. In the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds in which the big prize opening 2005 is opened, the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 in the second receiving opening opening/closing process (step S2403) described later is transferred to the first receiving opening 2007. Alternatively, by driving and controlling the sorting piece 2415 that distributes to any of the second receiving ports 2008, the second receiving port 2008 is made to be able to receive the game ball B and set to the valid state.

In addition, in the process of step S2428, if it is determined that the game ball B has been accepted into the grand prize opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 146, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 A big winning opening entry command is set as a command sent to 1510 (step S2429), and this process is ended. As a result, when the command to enter the big winning hole is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. according to the reception of the game ball B into the big winning hole 2005 can be used. It can be executed by

In addition, in the process of step S2417, if it is determined that it is not the timing to open the big prize opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 146, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 When all the rounds have been completed by repeating the open state and closed state of the winning hole 2005 (step S2423), the jackpot execution flag is reset (step S2424). If it is determined that the second intake port passage flag, which will be described later, is set (step S2425), a high probability flag is set (step S2426), a time saving flag is set, and the counter value of the time saving number counter is set. When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of the time saving state (step S2427), this process ends. Note that if it is determined that the second intake port passage flag is not set (step S2425), the high probability flag is not set, the time saving flag is set, and the time saving state is set in the counter value of the time saving number counter. When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations (step S2427), this process ends. In this way, if it is determined that the second receiving port passing flag is set (the game ball B was received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round), the high probability flag is set. and the time-saving flag are set to control the high-probability time-saving state, but the second reception port passing flag is not set (game ball B is not received at the second reception port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round). If it is determined that this is the case, only the time saving flag is set and control is made to a low probability time saving state.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second intake port opening/closing process (step S2403).

147 in FIG. As shown in , the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds when the second intake port 2008 is opened for a long time) from the open state of the second intake port 2008. , 0.2 seconds when it is opened for a short time) has elapsed (step S2432), or when the current round (15th round) is ended by controlling the big prize opening 2005 to be closed (step S2432). S2433), the second receiving port 2008 in the open state is controlled to a closed state (a state in which the game balls B are distributed to the first receiving port 2007 side by the distribution piece 2415) (step S2434).

Further, in the process of step S2431, if it is determined that the second intake port 2008 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 147, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 2415, when the timing for opening the second intake port 2008 comes (step S2435), the second intake port 2008 in the closed state is controlled to be in the open state (step S2436).

Next, in the process of step S2437, if it is determined that the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 in the open state, as shown in FIG. 147, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the game ball B was received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round while the valid state flag was being set (step S2438). Then, if it is determined that the game ball B is received in the second reception port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round (step S2438), the game ball B is received in the second reception port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round. If the second reception port passage flag indicating that the game ball B has been received at the entrance 2008 is not set (step S2439), the second reception port passage flag is set (step S2440), and the peripheral control board 1510 is set. When the second reception port passing command is set as the command to be transmitted (step S2441), this process ends. In this way, unless the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the second receiving port passage flag is not set, and the high probability flag is set in step S2426. is not set, there is no control to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, when the second reception port passing command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the production display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. It can be executed by

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S2801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S2802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs gate passage processing such as acquiring the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Execute.

Next, in the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing (step S2803) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for the display mode of the normal symbol when the fluctuation control is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S2804) in which a lottery process for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed based on the regular symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variable display of the above-mentioned normal symbols on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S2805)
4. The above-mentioned normal symbol is set so that the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped. Normal symbol stop processing to stop the fluctuating display of symbols (step S2806)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is a mode that suggests "normal symbol hit", the second starting port door 2411 rotates and the game is sent to the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessories release processing (step S2807) that executes processing to enable acceptance of ball B.

The normal symbol process flag is operated in the process of step S40 (see FIG. 118) to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S2803) should be performed.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate passage process (step S2802).

Now, in the process of step S2801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 149, As the process of step S2811, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the normal reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of normal symbols is set to "4", which is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not (step S2812). In the process of step S2812, if it is determined that the number of the normal symbols on hold is not the maximum value, the following steps S2813 to S2814 are performed in order to newly put the fluctuating display control of the normal symbols on hold. Processing will be carried out. That is, first, as the process of step S2813, the normal pending number counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S2814, each random number obtained in step S2811 is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. .

However, in the process of step S2812, if it is determined that the number of pending normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S2813 to S2814, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbols is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S2803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the holding state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state, then as a process of step S2822, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU are displayed. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of symbols (for example, normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) is read out from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S2823 and S2824, the normal holding number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped. Random numbers (normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) related to the display mode are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol retention storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in response to the passage of the game ball B to the gate section 2003 are stored from the first (earliest) area. Memorize in order. When a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, the random number extracted is stored in the n+1st (n=1 to 3) storage area. is stored, and when the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) is stored. The various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the fluctuating display control of the above-mentioned normal symbols occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the fluctuating display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

Next, if the current gaming state is a time-saving state (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state) (step S2826), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a regular game winning determination table (not shown) for time saving. ) (step S2826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state) (step S2825), select a normal figure hit determination table (not shown) in a non-time-saving state (step S2826). S2827), the selected normal symbol hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal symbol normal processing are compared (step S2828).

The normal figure winning determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is used when the gaming state is short time (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is provided with a non-time-saving regular figure hit determination table used when the gaming state is a non-time-saving time (low probability non-time-saving state). Then, in the short-time normal pattern winning judgment table that is referred to for comparison with normal random numbers, all 251 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern winning judgment value indicating that the normal pattern has been won. The above-mentioned normal random numbers are associated with each other so that the normal figure indicating a loss does not coincide with the deviation judgment value. In this way, in the time saving period, when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, the winning is guaranteed on the regular ticket, and the second starting port door 2411 rotates and goes to the second starting port 2004. The game ball B is controlled to be accepted.

In addition, in the non-time-saving normal pattern winning judgment table that is referenced for comparison with normal random numbers, all 251 types of normal random numbers can match the normal pattern winning judgment value indicating that a winning pattern has been won. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to match the ordinary figure deviation judgment value indicating that the ordinary figure is not correct. In this way, in the non-time saving period, even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, there is no chance of winning the normal ticket, so the second starting gate door 2411 rotates and the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003. There is no control to enable reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read out in step S2822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, and when it is determined that the ordinary symbol has hit (step S2829 ), after setting the normal pattern winning flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won per normal pattern (step S2830), the normal pattern winning as the state when the fluctuation control of the normal pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the normal pattern) The symbol is determined (step S2831), and on the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S2822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing is that it is a miss, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol A normal symbol is determined as a state at the time of control stop (stop symbol of a normal symbol) (step S2832). After that, at the time when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated (step S2833) so as to proceed to the normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S2804), this processing is ended.

In this example, in controlling the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, so that the lottery result of the normal symbol always becomes a win, and the time required to control the variable display of the normal symbol is extremely long. This has been shortened to a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, the second starting port 2004 is controlled in an opening/closing pattern in which it is kept open and closed for an extremely long predetermined period of time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . In other words, during the time saving state control, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit is extremely high, the time required to control the variable display of the normal symbol is constant and short, and the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. Due to the long time, etc., it is much easier to land the game ball B into the second starting port 2004, and it is more efficient to aim the game ball B at the second starting port 2004 rather than the first starting port 2002. B can win. In addition, in the control of the above-mentioned non-time-saving state, the winning probability of the above-mentioned normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the above-mentioned normal symbol does not always become a hit, and even if the above-mentioned second starting opening 2004 is aimed at. However, the game ball B cannot be entered into the second starting port 2004.

As described above, during the control in the non-time saving state, even if you aim at the second starting port 2004, you cannot make the game ball B enter the second starting port 2004, so the first starting port 2002 In order for the game ball B to win the prize, the game ball B must be fired aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "left-handed hitting"). In addition, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the front of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B is attached to the obstacle nails. By coming into contact with N, the game ball B is given various movements and flows down. Therefore, even if you aim at the first starting hole 2002 and hit the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500, you will not necessarily win the prize in the first starting hole 2002, but you will win in the first starting hole 2002. The game balls B that have not been played are discharged to the outside from an outlet 1008 provided at the lower end of the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, during the time-saving state control, it is possible to more efficiently win the game ball B by aiming at the second starting port 2004 rather than the first starting port 2002, so the game ball B is placed in the second starting port 2004. In order for the ball B to win, the player must shoot the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "right-handed hit"). Furthermore, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, if the game ball B is hit into the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003 The passing game ball B is designed to win a prize in the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability. Therefore, during the time-saving state control, the game ball B hit into the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (ejected to the outside from the out port 1008), and the non-time-saving state control Compared to the first starting hole 2002 inside, the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2004 extremely efficiently.

In addition, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, when passing through the gate section 2003, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit is extremely high, and the fluctuating display of the normal symbol The time required for control is constant and short, and the second starting port 2004 remains open for a long time, so that the game ball B easily enters the second starting port 2004, and furthermore, the second starting port 2004 enters the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B wins, the time required to control the variable display of the special symbol is about 1 second, which is extremely short compared to the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control in the non-time saving state, so it can be done in a short time. The variable display control of the special symbols (suspension of the variable display control of the special symbols) can be completed. That is, when controlling to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, by hitting the game ball B to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting opening 2004, the jackpot will be hit again in a short time. It is possible to control the game to a jackpot game state and expect to obtain many game balls B. As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls B paid out when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 is one, so the number of game balls B paid out when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 is one. Even if the ball B wins frequently, the burden on the game hall side can be reduced while increasing the interest of the players.

[12. Pachinko machine behavior when power is turned on]
In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a function to change setting values and a function to display confirmation of setting values. Specifically, by executing the setting change process in step S37 described above, the setting value can be changed, and by executing the setting value confirmation display process in step S28, the setting value can be confirmed and displayed. enabling it to be done. In order to change the settings of such setting values, in addition to operating the power switch 630a when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1, the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 and the setting key switch 1311a are also operated. If it is necessary to operate the setting value and display the setting value, in addition to operating the power switch 630a when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, press the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633. It is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without any operation. Note that, as described above, the RWM clear button 633z has the functions of a RAM clear switch, a setting switching button, and an error release switch.

First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be explained with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151(A) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and FIG. 151(B) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power is turned on. FIG. 151(C) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when changing the setting value at a time, and FIG. It is a time chart showing.

As shown in FIG. 151, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10), and then performs a power outage clearing process (step S12). In this power outage clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power outage advance notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e has been input. As mentioned above, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (ms). ) is set.

At timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU determines that the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z, which operates as a RAM clear switch function, is operated. It is determined whether or not there is one (step S14). In the determination of step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). Then, following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on (step S18). In the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and also switches the setting key on the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and/or the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the setting key switch 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S20B). That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and it is also determined whether or not the body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on, and those operations are performed. The determination result is stored as operation information in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Note that since the period from timing t3 to timing tx is extremely short, the person who presses the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z must press the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z while operating the pachinko machine. The person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a needs to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

After the operation information is stored at timing tx, following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time waiting processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls drawing on the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts (boots) the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before timing ty, which is the point in time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. The initialization process has been completed and it is now ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU).

At timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24), and determines whether or not the power outage warning signal is input. When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined which combination of the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is (steps S25 to S27). In the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met. If it is established, a setting change process (step S37) is performed. Further, in the determination in step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, the main control MPU initializes the main control built-in RAM. (Step S38) is performed. In addition, in the determination in step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the main control MPU grants predetermined setting value display permission. When the conditions are met, a set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and it is also determined whether or not the body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on, and those operations are performed. The determination result is stored as operation information in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, but the operation cannot be performed until timing ty, which is the point at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, is reached. It is intended to maintain the memory of information. Then, at timing ty, based on the storage of the operation information, the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the setting value confirmation display process (step It is decided whether to perform step S28).

As shown in FIG. 151(A), when initializing the main control built-in RAM, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, press the RWM clear button 633z. Although it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a be operated, it is not necessary that the setting key switch 1311a be turned on. In this way, when the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is is not turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0 as second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at timing ty, it is decided to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the storage of the operation information, and from timing ty, the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38). Step S38) is to be performed.

Note that when initializing the main control built-in RAM, the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z must be operated at timing tx, but at timing ty, the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z must be operated. There is no need for the press operation section to be operated. In other words, after the operation information is stored at timing tx, the operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty arrives, so even before timing ty arrives, the RWM clear It is possible to switch from a state in which the press operation section of the button 633z is operated to a state in which it is not operated.

Furthermore, in this example, at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 as the first operation information, and at timing ty, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to 0 between timing ty and the completion of initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38).

As shown in FIG. 151(B), when changing the settings of the set values, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. The setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on. In this way, when the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is set to the value 1. is turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as second operation information, and the operation information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at timing ty, it is decided to perform the setting change process (step S37) based on the stored operation information, and from the time ty, the setting change process (step S37) is performed. . Further, after starting the setting change process (step S37) at timing ty, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from an ON operation to an OFF operation state, the setting change process (step S37) is started. It is assumed that the process will be completed (timing t4).

In addition, when changing the settings of the set values, the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z needs to be operated and the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at the time of timing tx. However, at timing ty, there is no need for the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z to be operated, and similarly, there is no need for the setting key switch 1311a to be turned on. In other words, after the operation information is stored at timing tx, the operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty arrives, so even before timing ty arrives, the RWM clear It is possible to switch from a state in which the press operation part of the button 633z is operated to a state in which it is not operated, and similarly, a state in which the setting key switch 1311a is changed from a state in which it is operated to ON to a state in which it is operated to OFF. It is now possible to do so. However, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from being turned ON to being turned OFF before timing ty arrives, after starting the setting change process (step S37) at timing ty, It is necessary to turn the setting key switch 1311a from ON to OFF again, and then from ON to OFF. This is because, in the determination in step S222 of the setting change process, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key, but in this determination, the setting key switch 1311a is in the ON state. This is because when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a.

Furthermore, in this example, at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 as the first operation information, and at timing ty, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 from timing ty until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed after the setting change process (step S37). It is fine as long as it is done. In this example, at timing tx, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 as the second operation information, and at timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 as the second operation information. Although the ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is changed from timing ty after the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed after the setting change processing (step S37). It is sufficient that the value is reset to 0 until the time is reached.

As shown in FIG. 151(C), when displaying the set value for confirmation, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. On the other hand, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a be turned on. In this way, when the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 0 as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is set to the value 0. is turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 as second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at timing ty, it is decided to perform the set value confirmation display process (step S28) based on the stored operation information, and from the time ty, the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. We are planning to do so. Further, after starting the set value confirmation display process (step S28) at timing ty, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation to the OFF operation state, the set value confirmation display process (Step S28) Step S28) is to be completed (timing t4).

Note that in order to display the setting value confirmation, the setting key switch 1311a must be turned on at timing tx, but the setting key switch 1311a must be turned on at timing ty. There's no need. In other words, after the operation information is stored at timing tx, the operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty arrives, so even before timing ty arrives, the setting key The switch 1311a can be changed from an ON state to an OFF state. However, if the setting key switch 1311a changes from being turned ON to being turned OFF before timing ty arrives, the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at timing ty. Afterwards, it is necessary to change the setting key switch 1311a from the ON state to the OFF state again, and also to change the setting key switch 1311a from the ON state to the OFF state. This is because, in the determination in step S358 of the setting value confirmation display process, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key, but in this determination, the setting key switch 1311a is not operated to be ON. This is because when changing the state from the state where the switch is in the OFF state to the state where the OFF operation is performed, an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a.

Further, in this example, at timing tx, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 as the second operation information, and at timing t4, when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed, Although the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG changes between timing ty and timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. Any device that resets the value to 0 may be used.

In addition, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. The condition is to set the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 as the second operation information, and in FIGS. 151(B) and (C), the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. This assumes that the situation continues. In this regard, there are cases where the main body frame 4 is never opened to the outer frame 2 before the timing tx arrives, or the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 between the timing t3 and the timing tx. In a closed situation, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is restricted from being set to the value 1 (to set to the value 0) as the second operation information. There is. This may occur when the settings are changed illegally or when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 (in a situation where it is difficult for the administrator of the game hall to notice), such as during business hours of the game hall. This is to prevent it from being confirmed. On the other hand, in this example, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S14 of the main control side power-on process. The main body frame 4 is never opened to the outer frame 2 before the timing tx arrives, or the outer frame 2 is opened to the outer frame 2 between the timing t3 and the timing tx. On the other hand, even if the body frame 4 is closed, when it is determined that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1. According to this, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame release switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the RAM can be cleared. By making it possible to set the value 1 to the notification flag RCL-FLG, it is possible to prevent the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) from becoming impossible. Even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame release switch 4b, it is possible to at least prevent the start of the game from being hindered.

In this embodiment, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as the first operation information, and the setting key ON flag is set as the second operation information. The value of CS-FLG is set and the operation information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. After the operation information is stored at timing tx, the operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty arrives, and at timing ty, the operation information is not stored. Based on this, it is determined whether to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38), perform setting change processing (step S37), or perform setting value confirmation display processing (step S28), and perform the determined processing. I am trying to do this. In other words, after the operation information is stored at timing tx, until timing ty arrives, even if the operation mode of the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and the operation mode of the setting key switch 1311a are changed. Even if there is, the operation information stored at timing tx is maintained without being changed. As a result, after the operation information is stored at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the hall manager may mistakenly change the operation mode of the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a. By maintaining the operation information stored at timing tx so that it will not be changed even if the operation mode of After the power is turned on in step 1, the hall manager immediately executes the process intended by the hall manager (initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change process (step S37), setting value confirmation display process (step S28)). can do.

In addition, when initializing the main control built-in RAM when powering on the pachinko machine 1, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, you can press the RWM clear button 633z without operating the setting key switch 1311a. When changing the settings of the set values, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, it is also necessary to operate the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a. When performing a confirmation display, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z. Then, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is used as the first operation information, and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is used as the second operation information. , and store the operation information in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, and at timing ty, depending on the combination of the operation information, the hall manager (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), and setting value confirmation display processing (step S28)) is executed. For example, if operation units are provided for each of the cases of initializing the main control built-in RAM, changing settings, and displaying confirmation of setting values, in addition to the power switch 630a, Although it is necessary to provide three operation units for the RWM clear button 633z in addition to the power switch 630a, by changing the process executed after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on depending on the combination of operation information, it is possible to It is only necessary to provide two operation sections, ie, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a, and the number of parts required for the operation section can be reduced.

In addition, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. The condition is to set the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 as the second operation information, and as shown in FIGS. 151(B) and (C), for the period from timing tx to timing ty, The set state of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is held as the second operation information, regardless of whether the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. That is, during the period from timing tx to timing ty, it is possible to repeat opening and closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 any number of times. On the other hand, after the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 as the second operation information at timing tx, and before the arrival of timing ty, the main body frame 4 has changed relative to the outer frame 2. If it is closed, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at timing tx is reset, and at timing ty, setting change processing (step S37) and setting value confirmation display processing are performed. The setting change process (step S37) is performed at timing ty without performing (step S28) or resetting the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at timing tx. Alternatively, it may not be determined that the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. In other words, even if the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 at timing tx, if the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 within the period until timing ty arrives, may be restricted so that settings cannot be changed or displayed for confirmation. According to this, as mentioned above, the settings were changed illegally under the circumstances where the main frame 4 was closed to the outer frame 2 during business hours of the gaming hall (under a situation where it was difficult for the gaming hall manager to notice). It is possible to prevent settings from being changed or unauthorized settings to be confirmed.

In addition, in this example, in step S14 of the main control side power-on processing, the RAM clear notification flag is set as the first operation information on the condition that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated even temporarily. Although the value 1 is set in RCL-FLG, the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), that is, the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed for a long time. It may be provided that the Similarly, in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON even temporarily, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 as the second operation information. However, the condition may be that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). As a result, even if the hall manager accidentally touches the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a temporarily when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, unintended processing by the hall manager will not occur. can be prevented from being executed.

In addition, although details will be described later, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 and fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 are restricted. . That is, during the period from timing t3 to timing ty, the hall manager changes the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z from an operated state to a non-operated state, or when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Although it is possible to change the state from a state in which the device is present to a state in which it is turned off, it is restricted to not monitor fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 or monitor fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005. . As a result, even if the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or applies vibration when operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, it will be detected as a fraudulent act. It is possible to prevent this from happening and to suppress the disruption of normal work.

[12-1. Example of modification of pachinko machine behavior when power is turned on]
In the embodiment described above, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is pressed when initializing the main control built-in RAM, when changing the setting value, and when displaying the setting value confirmation. The timing for determining whether or not the unit is being operated is the same as the timing for determining whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on. The timing for determining whether or not there is a key ON operation may be different from the timing for determining whether or not the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. A modification example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing a modification of the main control side power-on processing. Further, FIG. 153(A) is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and FIG. 153(C) is a time chart showing a modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when changing the setting value when the power of the machine 1 is turned on. FIG. It is a time chart showing a modification example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the case of performing. Note that, as described above, the RWM clear button 633z has the functions of a RAM clear switch, a setting switching button, and an error release switch.

As shown in FIG. 153, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 152. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10), and then performs a power outage clearing process (step S12). In this power outage clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power outage advance notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e has been input. As mentioned above, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (ms). ) is set.

At timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated (step S14). In the determination of step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as first operation information. ing. Note that since the period from timing t3 to timing tx is extremely short, the person who presses the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z must press the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z while operating the pachinko machine. It is necessary to turn on the power in step 1.

After the first operation information is stored at timing tx, the main control MPU performs wait time waiting processing following step S16A or step S16B (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls drawing on the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts (boots) the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before timing ty, which is the point in time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. The initialization process has been completed and it is now ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU).

At timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24), and determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on (step S18). In the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and also switches the setting key on the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and/or the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the setting key switch 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S20B). That is, at timing ty1, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as second operation information. are doing. In this modified example, the first operation information is stored at the timing tx before the main control MPU starts the wait time standby process, whereas the first operation information is stored at the timing ty1 before the main control MPU starts the wait time standby process. The second operation information is stored. Note that since at least 10 seconds (s), which is the wait time (boot timer) until booting in the wait time standby process (step S22), is set as the period from timing t3 to timing ty1, the setting key switch 1311a The person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a may turn on the setting key switch 1311a before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, but after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, The setting key switch 1311a may be turned on until the timing ty1 when the control MPU completes the wait time waiting process arrives.

At timing ty2 after the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU sets the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the setting key ON flag CS. - Determine which combination the FLG values are (steps S25 to S27). In the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met. If it is established, a setting change process (step S37) is performed. Further, in the determination in step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, the main control MPU initializes the main control built-in RAM. (Step S38) is performed. In addition, in the determination in step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the main control MPU grants predetermined setting value display permission. When the conditions are met, a set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as first operation information. However, the storage of the first operation information is maintained until timing ty2, at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, arrives. On the other hand, at timing ty1, it is determined whether or not there is an opening operation of the main body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as second operation information. However, the storage of the second operation information is maintained until timing ty2, at which the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, arrives. Then, at timing ty2, based on the storage of the operation information, the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the setting value confirmation display process ( It is decided whether to perform step S28).

As shown in FIG. 153(A), when initializing the main control built-in RAM, press the RWM clear button 633z at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. must be operated. In this way, when the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when initializing the main control built-in RAM, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process after timing tx. In this way, if the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on at timing ty1, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0 as the second operation information, and the second operation information is used as the main operation. It is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at timing ty2, it is decided to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the stored operation information, and from timing ty2, the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38). Step S38) is to be performed.

Note that when initializing the main control built-in RAM, the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z must be operated at timing tx, but at timing ty1 and timing ty2, the RWM clear button 633z must be operated. There is no need for the press operation section of the button 633z to be operated. In other words, after the first operation information is stored at timing tx, the first operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty2 arrives. Also, it is possible to change from a state in which the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to a state in which it is not operated.

In addition, when initializing the main control built-in RAM, the setting key switch 1311a must not be turned on at timing ty1, but the setting key switch 1311a must not be turned on at timing tx or timing ty2. It may be turned on. In other words, after the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, the second operation information stored at timing ty1 is maintained until timing ty2 arrives; Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the state in which it is turned off during the period from timing tx to timing ty1. There is.

Further, in this example, at timing tx, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and at timing ty2, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to 0 from timing ty2 until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed.

As shown in FIG. 153(B), when changing the settings of the set values, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. Must have been. In this way, when the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when changing the setting value, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process after timing tx. In this way, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at timing ty1, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 as the second operation information, and the second operation information is used as the main operation. It is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at timing ty2, it is decided to perform the setting change process (step S37) based on the stored operation information, and from the time ty2, the setting change process (step S37) is performed. . Further, after starting the setting change process (step S37) at timing ty2, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation to the OFF operation state, the setting change process (step S37) is started. It is assumed that the process will be completed (timing t4).

In addition, when changing the settings of the set values, it is necessary that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the time of timing tx, but at the time of timing ty1 and timing ty2, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. There is no need for the press operation section to be operated. In other words, after the first operation information is stored at timing tx, the first operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty2 arrives. Also, it is possible to change from a state in which the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to a state in which it is not operated.

In addition, when changing the setting value, the setting key switch 1311a must be turned on at timing ty1, but at timing tx or timing ty2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. It doesn't have to be done. In other words, after the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, the second operation information stored at timing ty1 is maintained until timing ty2 arrives; Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the state in which it is turned off during the period from timing tx to timing ty1. There is.

Further, in this example, at timing tx, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and at timing ty2, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to 0 from timing ty2 until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed. In this example, at timing ty1, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value 1 as the second operation information, and at timing t4, when the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 as the second operation information. Although the ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is changed from timing ty2 after the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed after the setting change process (step S37). It is sufficient that the value is reset to 0 until the time is reached.

As shown in FIG. 153(C), when displaying the set value for confirmation, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. Must have not been. In this way, when the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the time of timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 0 as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when displaying the setting value confirmation, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process after timing tx. In this way, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at timing ty1, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 as the second operation information, and the second operation information is used as the main operation. It is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at timing ty2, it is decided to perform the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) based on the stored operation information, and from the time ty2, the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. We are planning to do so. Further, after starting the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) at timing ty2, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation to the OFF operation state, the setting value confirmation display process (Step S28) Step S28) is to be completed (timing t4).

Note that in order to display the setting value confirmation, the setting key switch 1311a must be turned on at timing ty1, but the setting key switch 1311a must be turned on at timing tx or timing ty2. It doesn't have to be done. In other words, after the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, the second operation information stored at timing ty1 is maintained until timing ty2 arrives; Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the state in which it is turned off during the period from timing tx to timing ty1. There is.

Further, in this example, at timing ty1, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 as the second operation information, and at timing t4, when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed, Although the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG becomes 0 from timing ty2 until the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. It is sufficient if it can be reset to .

In addition, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. The condition is to set the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 as the second operation information, and in FIGS. 153(B) and (C), the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. This assumes that the situation continues. In this regard, there are cases where the main body frame 4 is never opened to the outer frame 2 before the timing ty1 arrives, or the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 between the timing t3 and the timing ty1. In a closed situation, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is restricted from being set to the value 1 (to set to the value 0) as the second operation information. There is. This may occur when the settings are changed illegally or when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 (in a situation where it is difficult for the administrator of the game hall to notice), such as during business hours of the game hall. This is to prevent it from being confirmed. On the other hand, in this example, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S14 of the main control side power-on process. The main body frame 4 is never opened to the outer frame 2 before the timing tx arrives, or the outer frame 2 is opened to the outer frame 2 between the timing t3 and the timing tx. On the other hand, even if the body frame 4 is closed, when it is determined that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1. According to this, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame release switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the RAM can be cleared. By making it possible to set the value 1 to the notification flag RCL-FLG, it is possible to prevent the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) from becoming impossible. Even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame release switch 4b, it is possible to at least prevent the start of the game from being hindered.

In this embodiment, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as first operation information, and the first operation information is used for main control. The first operation information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the MPU, and the first operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty2 arrives. Furthermore, at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process after timing tx, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set as second operation information, and the second operation information is transmitted to the main control MPU. The second operation information stored at timing ty1 is maintained until timing ty2 arrives. Then, at timing ty2, based on the storage of the operation information, the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the setting value confirmation display process ( It is determined whether to perform step S28), and the determined process is performed. In other words, during the period after the first operation information is stored at timing tx until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored, the setting key switch 1311a is in an ON state and in an OFF state. It is now possible to freely change the current state and the current state. Then, at timing ty1, the second operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU so as to reflect the operation state of the setting key switch 1311a changed during the period from timing tx to timing ty1. Then, at the subsequent timing ty2, based on the storage of the operation information, the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the setting value is confirmed. It is determined whether or not to perform display processing (step S28), and the determined processing is performed. As a result, when changing the setting value or displaying the setting value confirmation, the hall manager mistakenly turns on the setting key switch 1311a at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. Even if you have forgotten to operate the pachinko machine 1, by changing the setting key switch 1311a to the ON state until the timing ty1 when the second operation information is stored, the pachinko machine 1 There is no need to power on the pachinko machine 1 again, and the processing intended by the hall manager after powering on the pachinko machine 1 (initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing) (Any one of step S28) can be executed promptly. Furthermore, when initializing the main control built-in RAM, even if the hall manager mistakenly turns on the setting key switch 1311a at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, By changing the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF during the period until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored, there is no need to change the settings again, and the pachinko machine 1 After the power is turned on, the hall manager immediately executes the process intended by the hall manager (initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change process (step S37), setting value confirmation display process (step S28)). be able to.

As described above, for the period from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3 until the timing ty1 when the second operation information is stored, after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, The period is configured to be longer than the period until the timing tx at which the first operation information is stored. As a result, when powering on the pachinko machine 1, there is no need to operate the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a at the same time, and it is not necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a after operating the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z. It is possible to turn it on, and it is possible to facilitate the hall manager's operations on the plurality of operation sections.

Note that when powering on the pachinko machine 1, if you want to initialize the main control built-in RAM or change the setting values, it is necessary to operate the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z. The timing for operating the pressing operation section 633z is set at timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and not at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. This is because the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is configured with a push-down switch that does not maintain its operating state, and after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3 until timing ty1 arrives. Even if an attempt is made to continue operating the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z, it is unclear whether timing ty1 has arrived or not, so the hall manager has to continue operating the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z. There is a possibility that it will stop. Therefore, by setting the timing for operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z to the timing tx immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to operate the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z for a long period of time. This eliminates the need for the hall manager to continuously perform the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) and the setting change process (step S37) as intended by the hall manager.

Further, as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) is activated by a system that performs drawing control on the peripheral control board 1510 before timing ty, which is the point in time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. The initialization process for starting (booting) has been completed, and it is now in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). At the time when such initialization processing of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU ), after completing the initialization process of the peripheral control board 1510, until timing ty1 arrives, the setting key switch 1311a is activated by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A setting key operation enable notification is being executed to notify that the setting key can be changed to the ON state. This setting key operation notification includes a voice repeating ``Setting key operation is available!'', a message display saying ``Setting key operation is available!'', and setting value setting key switches 1311a of 1 to 6 turned ON during the selection operation process. The lamp emits light in a color corresponding to whether or not it is being operated.

In addition, although details will be described later, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 and fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 are restricted. . That is, during the period from timing t3 to timing ty2, the hall manager changes the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z from the operated state to the non-operated state, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Although it is possible to change the state from a state where the device is off to a state where it is turned off, or from a state where it is turned off to a state where it is turned on, it is possible to monitor fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 or use the vibration sensor 3005. The use of unauthorized monitoring is restricted. As a result, even if the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or applies vibration when operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, it will be detected as a fraudulent act. It is possible to prevent this from happening and to suppress the disruption of normal work.

[13. Pachinko machine behavior in change permission state and confirmation display state]
Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in a state where setting value change is permitted or setting value confirmation display is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. FIG. 154 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 while changing the setting value, and FIGS. 155 and 156 are time charts showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 while the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. In a state where the setting value is changed or the setting value confirmation display is performed, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is different compared to a state where the setting value is not changed or the setting value confirmation display is not performed. It has become a thing. Furthermore, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 while displaying the setting value confirmation is almost the same as the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 while changing the setting value, but when powering on the pachinko machine 1, the RWM clear button 633z The difference is that even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, various information at the time the power is turned off is retained because the pressing operation part of the pachinko machine 1 is not operated.

As shown in FIG. 154, when changing the settings of the set values, first check whether or not the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on. In some cases, it is necessary to cut off the power to the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). If the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), the outer frame 2, open the main body frame 4 (timing t1), then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a while operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, which operates as a RAM clear switch function, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (timing t3). The value becomes in a state where it is possible to change the setting (change permission state). In such a change permission state, the set values (set values 1 to 6) cannot be changed each time the push operation section of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, which operates as a function of a setting switch button, is pressed. This is possible, and then the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to its original position. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off (timing t4). In other words, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is possible to change the setting value (change permission state), and after timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value can be changed. It becomes impossible to change the settings (unchangeable state). Then, the player can play the game by removing the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5). It becomes a state.

In addition, when changing the settings of the set values, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. The setting change processing in step S37 is not terminated until the setting change processing is performed (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change processing), and during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the The interrupt permission setting in step S52 is prohibited from being performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. Since the main control side timer interrupt processing is not started until the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, the switch input processing in step S104 and the special symbol and special electric accessory control in step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt processing are performed. The process, the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process in step S116, etc. are not executed, and a standby state is entered. In other words, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is possible to change the setting value (change permission state), but the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005 When the game ball B enters various winning openings such as the gate part 2003, the input of the detection signal is not made valid, and the variable display of special symbols, the variable display of normal symbols, and the second starting opening This is a special period in which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the big prize opening door 2413, the distribution operation of the distribution piece 2415, etc. are not performed.

As shown in FIG. 155, when performing a confirmation display of the currently set setting values, first check whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. If so, it is necessary to shut off the power to the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). If the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), the outer frame 2, open the main body frame 4 (timing t1), then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. By turning the setting key switch 1311a ON, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a to power on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (timing t3), a state in which confirmation display of the set value can be performed ( confirmation display state). In such a confirmation display state, the setting display 1310g displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). Then, turn the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to the original position, and then turn it OFF (timing t4). ), the setting display 1310g is switched from displaying the setting value to not displaying the setting value. In other words, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is possible to display the setting value confirmation (confirmation display state), and after timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value is displayed. The state becomes such that it is impossible to display a confirmation display (confirmation impossible state). Then, the player can play the game by removing the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5). It becomes a state.

In addition, when displaying the currently set setting values, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, but the setting values are changed at timing t4. Until the key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value confirmation display process in step S28 is not terminated (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned OFF in step S358 of the setting value confirmation display process), and from timing t3 During the period up to timing t4, the subsequent interrupt permission setting in step S52 is prohibited, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. Since the main control side timer interrupt processing is not started until the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, the switch input processing in step S104 and the special symbol and special electric accessory control in step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt processing are performed. The process, the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process in step S116, etc. are not executed, and a standby state is entered. In other words, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is possible to display the confirmation display of the set value (confirmation display state), but the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005 When the game ball B enters various winning openings such as the gate part 2003, the input of the detection signal is not made valid, and the variable display of special symbols, the variable display of normal symbols, and the second starting opening This is a special period in which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the big prize opening door 2413, the distribution operation of the distribution piece 2415, etc. are not performed.

[13-1. Regarding special symbols, various ball entry detection, and payout devices]
As shown in FIG. 154, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is not started. A state in which it is impossible to perform variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the special symbol display devices (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400 (fluctuating state) The state becomes disabled A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 becomes in a state where the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner (variable state).

In addition, when starting a jackpot game at timing t6 after turning off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4, when the game ball B hits the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the detection signal is Although the input is valid, the special symbol cannot be displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (non-variable state B). In this way, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that it is impossible to display the special symbol in a variable manner on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, but the non-variable state In A, the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, whereas in the non-variable state B, the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The difference is that the input of the detection signal is made valid when the game ball B enters the second starting slot 2004.

Furthermore, when the power is cut off at timing t0, if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, or if the variable display of the special symbol is stored as pending, , when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the setting change process in step S37 of the main control power-on process is completed, and then in step S38, a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is Since the game is cleared except for , information regarding the variable display of special symbols will be lost. For this reason, after the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, ends, the changeable state will become possible, but the changing display of the special symbol that was interrupted when the power was cut off will not be resumed. Further, when the power is turned off, the special symbols stored as pending are not displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in a state where fluctuation is possible, some kind of fraud is committed and a fraud-related error occurs that makes it impossible to play games such as changing the display of special symbols (for example, a severe error when detecting magnetism or vibration). In this case, the peripheral control MPU performs processing to display fraud-related error information to notify that on a predetermined display device (for example, the effect display device 1600), or displays a predetermined light emitting device (for example, multiple LED 121a, multiple LEDs 213a, etc.) performs a fraud-related error mode light emitting process to notify that fact, or a predetermined sound output device (for example, lower speaker 153a, etc.) to notify that fact. Although a fraud-related error output process that outputs a related error sound is performed, the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, is a state in which it is impossible to display the special symbol in a variable manner ( Although it is in the unchangeable state A), the above-mentioned fraud-related error output processing is not performed. This is because it is assumed that in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the hall clerk opens the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 to change the setting value, and This is to place more emphasis on the work efficiency of hall clerks than on the necessity of outputting fraud-related errors, which are intended to provide suggestions to customers, and to suppress the occurrence of events that would impede their work. Regarding the point of not performing fraud-related error output processing, all of the above-mentioned fraud-related error information display processing, fraud-related error mode light emission processing, and fraud-related error sound output processing are not performed. However, in view of suppressing the occurrence of events that would impede the work of the hall clerk, at least part of the fraud-related error output processing may be omitted. For example, an example may be to refrain from outputting a fraud-related error sound that can reduce the work efficiency of the worker due to its loud volume, while continuing to perform other processing as usual.

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, since the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is not started, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004 , when the game ball B enters various winning openings such as the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, and the second receiving opening 2008, or the gate part 2003, the main control unit controls the detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor. There is no input to the MPU, and the detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that the detection of the game ball B by the detection sensor may not be performed, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be inputted but treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the lottery, symbol variation (special symbol variation) Display), the payout of game ball B will no longer be performed, and as a result, game ball B will not be put out due to some reason during the regular work of changing the settings. Even if the ball is entered in 2004, the progress of the game can be suppressed. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the grand prize opening 2005, the first reception opening 2007, and the second reception opening 2008, the payout of the game ball B , high probability status will no longer be given, and as a result, for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the setting values, game ball B will be placed in the grand prize opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, and the first receiving opening 2007. Even if the ball enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of the various prize openings and gates (gates). At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input to the main control MPU, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is disabled, for example, the detection of the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state is measured by the base monitor 1310h described above. It becomes possible to exclude it from the target (target for addition to the number of outs counter), and the game ball B that remained in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) etc. is detected in the change permission state and is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid a situation where the output is counted (added to the out number counter).

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process in step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the first starting port 2002 , when the game ball B enters various winning openings such as the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, and the second receiving opening 2008, or the gate part 2003, the detection sensor corresponding to each The main control MPU inputs the detection signal and treats the detection of the game ball B as valid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the lottery, symbol variation (special symbol variation display) , it is possible to pay out game balls B. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the big prize opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, and the second receiving opening 2008, the payout of the gaming ball B and the high It is possible to assign a probability state (as described above, when the state when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 is set to the "valid state").

In this example, from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, from the end of the change permission state, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, and the first receiving port 2007 are activated. , when the game ball B enters various winning ports such as the second receiving port 2008 or the gate section 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid, but at timing t5, the detection of the game ball B enters the outer frame 2. On the other hand, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as valid at the time when the main body frame 4 is closed or at the time when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at timing t4. This is because before the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to fire the game ball B, and it is practically difficult to start the game. This is because there is.

Further, in this example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, the payout control MPU starts the payout control power-on processing and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580. This makes it possible to pay out game balls B from the payout device 580. That is, during the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is possible for the game ball B to be paid out from the payout device 580. However, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the various prize openings and gates (gates) as described above. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, or the big prize opening 2005 in the change permission state, the game ball B will not be paid out. .

Note that when the power is cut off at timing t0, if game balls B have entered various winning holes and are being paid out from the payout device 580, the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 while operating the RWM clear button 633z operation signal (detection signal) from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633, the payout control built-in RAM is input. Since the entire area is cleared, information regarding the payout of the game ball B will be lost. Therefore, after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, it becomes possible to pay out game balls B from the payout device 580, but it is possible to pay out game balls B that have not been paid out at the time when the power is turned off. It is now impossible to restart.

As shown in FIG. 155, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is performed as in the change permission state. has not started, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400. This results in a state where it is impossible to change (state A where changes cannot be made). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 becomes in a state in which it is possible to perform variable display (variable state).

In addition, when starting a jackpot game at timing t6 after turning off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4, when the game ball B hits the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the detection signal is Although the input is valid, the special symbol cannot be displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (non-variable state B). In this way, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that it is impossible to display the special symbol in a variable manner on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, but the non-variable state In A, the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, whereas in the non-variable state B, the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 does not become valid. The difference is that the input of the detection signal is made valid when the game ball B enters the second starting slot 2004.

Furthermore, when the power is cut off at timing t0, if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, or if the variable display of the special symbol is stored as pending, , when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 while operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (when changing the setting value), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. At this point, the setting change process in step S37 of the main control power-on process is completed, and then in step S38 all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. While the information regarding the display is lost, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 without operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (when displaying the setting value confirmation), the timing When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at t4, the setting value confirmation display process in step S28 of the main control power-on process ends, but the entire area of the main control internal RAM is cleared as after the setting change process in step S37. Since the process of step S38 for clearing except for the specific area is not executed, information regarding the variable display of the special symbols is retained. For this reason, after the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4 ends, the variable display of the special symbol that was interrupted when the power was cut off will be resumed, taking the opportunity to enter the variable state. Also, when the power is turned off, special symbols stored as pending are displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the state where fluctuation is possible, some kind of fraud is committed and it becomes impossible to play games such as fluctuating display of special symbols (for example, a severe error occurs when detecting magnetism or vibration). If an error) occurs, the peripheral control MPU performs processing to display fraud-related error information on a predetermined display device (for example, the effect display device 1600) to notify that fact, or displays a predetermined light emitting device. (for example, multiple LEDs 121a, multiple LEDs 213a, etc.), performs a light emission process in the form of a fraud-related error to notify that fact, and a predetermined sound output device (for example, the lower speaker 153a, etc.) Fraud-related error output processing is performed, which outputs a fraud-related error sound that notifies the user, but in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the same message as in the change permission state is performed. Although the special symbol is in a state in which it is impossible to display it in a variable manner (variable state A), the above-mentioned fraud-related error output process is not performed. This is because it is assumed that in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the hall clerk opens the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 to display the setting value confirmation. This is to place more emphasis on the work efficiency of hall clerks than on the necessity of outputting fraud-related errors, which are intended to provide suggestions to customers, and to suppress the occurrence of events that would impede their work. Regarding the point of not performing fraud-related error output processing, all of the above-mentioned fraud-related error information display processing, fraud-related error mode light emission processing, and fraud-related error sound output processing are not performed. However, in order to suppress the occurrence of events that would hinder the work of the hall clerk, at least part of the fraud-related error output processing may be omitted. For example, it may be possible to refrain from outputting a fraud-related error sound that can reduce the work efficiency of workers due to its loud volume, while continuing to perform other processing as usual. In addition, in order to prevent fraud-related error output processing, processing that is prohibited depending on the difference between the control performed when the change is allowed and the event that obstructs the work of the hall clerk, as described above. The types, numbers, etc. may be made different. For example, in the change permission state, all fraud-related error output processing is not performed when any fraud-related error occurs, while in the confirmation display state, fraud-related error output is performed when any fraud-related error occurs. You can prevent only part of the processing from being performed, or in the change permission state, you can prevent all fraud-related error output processing from being performed in the event that some fraud-related error occurs, while in the confirmation display state. An example of this would be to not perform part of the fraud-related error output process when some fraud-related error occurs.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, since the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) has not started, 2002, when a game ball B enters various winning openings such as the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, and the second receiving opening 2008, or the gate part 2003, a detection sensor corresponding to each of them The main control MPU does not input the detection signal from the game ball B, and treats the detection of the game ball B as invalid. Note that the detection of the game ball B by the detection sensor may not be performed, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be inputted but treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the lottery, symbol variation (special symbol variation) display), and the payout of game ball B will no longer be performed, and as a result, game ball B will not be placed in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port for some reason during the normal work of confirming and displaying the set value. Even if the ball is entered in 2004, the progress of the game can be suppressed. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the grand prize opening 2005, the first reception opening 2007, and the second reception opening 2008, the payout of the game ball B , high probability status will no longer be given, and as a result, for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the setting values, game ball B will be placed in the grand prize opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, and the first receiving opening 2007. Even if the ball enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

In addition, during the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the various prize openings and gates (gates). At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input to the main control MPU, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is disabled, for example, the measurement by the base monitor 1310h described above regarding the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is performed. It is now possible to exclude it from the target (target for addition to the number of outs counter), and the game ball B that remained in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) etc. is detected in a confirmation display state and displayed on the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid a situation where the output is counted (added to the out number counter).

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process in step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the first starting port 2002 , when the game ball B enters various winning openings such as the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, and the second receiving opening 2008, or the gate part 2003, the detection sensor corresponding to each The main control MPU inputs the detection signal and treats the detection of the game ball B as valid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the lottery, symbol variation (special symbol variation display) , it is possible to pay out game balls B. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the big prize opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, and the second receiving opening 2008, the payout of the gaming ball B and the high It is possible to assign a probability state (as described above, when the state when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 is set to the "valid state").

In this example, from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, from the end of the confirmation display state, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, and the first receiving port 2007 are activated. , when the game ball B enters various prize openings such as the second receiving entrance 2008 or the gate section 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid, but at timing t5, the detection of the game ball B enters the outer frame 2. On the other hand, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as valid at the time when the main body frame 4 is closed or at the time when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at timing t4. This is because before the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to fire the game ball B, and it is practically difficult to start the game. This is because there is.

Further, in this example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, the payout control MPU starts the payout control power-on processing and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580. This makes it possible to pay out game balls B from the payout device 580. That is, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is possible to pay out the game balls B from the payout device 580, as in the change permission state. However, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the various prize openings and gates (gates), etc., as described above. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, or the big winning port 2005 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B will not be paid out. .

Note that when the power is cut off at timing t0, if game balls B have entered various winning holes and are being paid out from the payout device 580, the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z If the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 while operating the RWM clear button 633z (when changing the setting value), at that point, the main control board 1310 sends the payout control board 633 to the RWM clear button 633z. Since the signal (detection signal) is input and the entire area of the RAM with built-in payout control is cleared, the information regarding the payout of the game ball B is lost. If the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3 (when displaying the setting value confirmation), the game ball Information regarding the payout of B will be held. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, it becomes possible to pay out game balls B from the payout device 580. Payments have now resumed.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the current setting value (setting value 1 to setting value at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. However, as mentioned above, in the confirmation display state where the unpaid game ball B is being paid out at the time the power was cut off, if the ball is out, etc. When a related error occurs, the payout control MPU notifies a display other than the setting display 1310g (for example, a 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board 633) to that effect. Performs a payout-related error output process that displays error information and performs a light-emission process in a payout-related error mode to notify a predetermined light emitting device (for example, multiple LEDs 121a, multiple LEDs 213a, etc.) of the error. That's what I do. As a result, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to check whether the payout of game ball B, which had not been paid out at the time the power was cut off, has been completed, or whether a payout-related error such as a ball out has occurred and game ball B has been paid out. It is possible to determine whether or not there is a problem, thereby preventing the player from incurring a loss. Regarding the handling of payout-related errors, since this is an important event for the smooth running of games later on, we will place emphasis on payout maintenance, regardless of the work efficiency of the hall staff, and we will take measures such as the above-mentioned fraud-related error handling. There are no prohibitions, and the same processing as normal is performed without any restrictions.

As described above, when the power is cut off at timing t0, if the game ball B has entered the various winning holes and the game ball B is being paid out from the payout device 580, the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. If the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3 without operating the pressing operation part (when displaying the setting value confirmation), at that point, the game balls that have not been paid out at the time when the power is turned off The payout of B can be resumed. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol (first special symbol) on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 , second special symbol) cannot be displayed (non-variable state A), when the power is cut off at timing t0, the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 cannot be displayed. When the display is being performed or when the variable display of the special symbol is stored as pending, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 without operating the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z. (When displaying confirmation of the set value), at that point, the fluctuating display of the special symbol that was suspended at the time the power was cut off may be resumed, or the display may be stored as pending at the time the power was cut off. There is no changing display of special symbols. In other words, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the fluctuating display of special symbols that was interrupted at the time the power was cut off may be resumed, or the display may be stored as being on hold at the time the power was cut off. This is a period in which it is possible to only pay out game balls B that have not been paid out at the time the power is cut off, even though the special symbols are not displayed in fluctuations and the game progress is thereby prevented. . For example, when the hall is closed, if the power is cut off even though the game balls B have entered the various prize openings and the game balls B are being paid out from the payout device 580, the time when the power is cut off The player will incur a loss for the unpaid game balls B, but by turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1 and putting it in the confirmation display state, the game will be prevented from proceeding after the power is turned off. At the same time, only the game balls B that have not been paid out at the time the power is cut off can be paid out, and losses to the player can be prevented.

As a modification of the above, if the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 without operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. Until the setting key is turned OFF, it is impossible to display the special symbols in a fluctuating manner, and while preventing the game from progressing after the power is turned off, the game balls B that have not been paid out at the time the power is turned off are It is also possible to set the period in which only payout is possible, but not to display confirmation of the set value. In addition, an operation section separate from the setting key switch 1311a, RWM clear button 633z, and power switch 630a is provided, and when a hall clerk turns on the other operation section, the operation section is turned on until it is turned off. , while making it impossible to display the special symbols in a variable manner and preventing the game from progressing after the hall clerk turns on the operation, only the game balls B that have not been paid out at the time the hall clerk turns on the operation are paid out. It may also be a period during which it is possible to do this. In such a case, for example, when the hall is closed, the progress of the game during the period when the hall clerk turned on the operation is blocked, and the game ball B that has not been paid out at the time when the hall clerk turned on the operation is paid out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent losses from occurring to the player.

As described above, after the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, ends, the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 becomes a variable state in which the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. , when the power is cut off, the special symbol stored as pending is not displayed in a variable manner, but after the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4 ends, it becomes variable. Taking this as an opportunity, the special symbols stored as pending are displayed in a variable manner at the time the power is turned off. More specifically, if a ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the special random number is stored as a hold in the main control built-in RAM, but the power is turned off at timing t0. If the special random number is stored as pending in the main control built-in RAM at the time of shutting off, the special random number is stored and held as game backup information in the main control side power cut-off process. If the pachinko machine 1 enters the change permission state after powering on at timing t3, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, and when the change permission state ends, the data is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Since the game backup information stored in the game is cleared, the special random numbers stored as pending will also be lost.

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special random number stored as pending before the power is turned off is erased, so in addition to the pending display on the effect display device 1600, the function display unit 1400 The pending display on the pending number display is hidden. In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. A special random number is not stored as a new reservation.

By the way, if the special random number stored as pending is not deleted before the power is turned off at the end of the change permission state, the following problem will occur. In this example, the number of jackpot judgment values set in the jackpot judgment table increases so that the higher the setting value among setting values 1 to 6, the higher the jackpot probability. When changing the settings in the permission state, if you change from a low setting value (for example, setting value 1) to a high setting value (for example, setting value 6), the result of the jackpot determination will be considered a jackpot. Since the special random number increases and the jackpot probability becomes higher, there is a possibility that the special random number, which was an error at the set value before the power was cut off, becomes a jackpot at the set value after the change permission state ends. On the other hand, when changing the setting value in the change permission state, if you change from a high setting value (for example, setting value 6) to a low setting value (for example, setting value 1), the result of the jackpot judgment will be Since the number of special random numbers considered to be a jackpot decreases and the probability of a jackpot becomes lower, there is a possibility that a special random number that was a jackpot with the set value before the power was cut off will not be a jackpot with the set value after the change permission state ends. . In this regard, in this example, by deleting the special random numbers stored as pending at the end of the change permission state, the jackpot determination result is changed between before the power is cut off and after the change permission state ends. It is possible to prevent situations that lack fairness from occurring. In particular, when a person who is not the hall administrator changes the setting value in the change permission state due to fraudulent activity, the user attempts to change the setting value to a higher setting value (for example, setting value 6); For example, even if the setting value is changed to 6), the result of jackpot determination will not be changed to jackpot, and it is possible to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts. In addition, when the hall manager changes the setting value in the change permission state, the special random number stored as pending is deleted before the power is turned off, so that the player is not disadvantaged. It is preferable to turn off the power in a state where there is no reservation, and then change the setting value in a state where the change is permitted.

In addition, when changing the setting value in the change permission state, not only when changing from a low setting value (for example, setting value 1) to a high setting value (for example, setting value 6) before power shutoff, Even if the set value before power-off is maintained, the special random number stored as pending is erased when the change permission state ends. For example, if a person who is not the hall administrator attempts to change the setting value in the change-permitted state due to fraudulent activity, he or she attempts to change it to a higher setting value (for example, setting value 6), but the The setting value is a high setting value, and there is a possibility that there is no need to change the high setting value. Even in this case, by deleting the special random numbers that were stored as pending before the power was shut off when the change permission state ends, the special random numbers that had a high probability of hitting the jackpot with the high set value before the power shut off can be deleted. Since the opportunity to make a jackpot determination based on this is lost, it is possible to prevent anyone other than the hole manager from committing fraudulent acts.

On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 1 enters the confirmation display state after powering on at timing t3, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, and at the time when the confirmation display state ends, the information is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Since the game backup information stored in the game is not cleared, the special random numbers stored as pending before the power is turned off are retained. In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. A special random number is not stored as a new reservation. In such a confirmation display state, only the setting of the set value is confirmed, and unlike the change permission state, the set value is not changed. In other words, even if a person who is not the hall administrator attempts to confirm the setting value in the confirmation display state due to fraudulent activity, the special random numbers stored as pending will be changed between before the power was shut off and in the confirmation display state. The result of the jackpot judgment will not be changed after the end of the game, and no profit will be gained through fraudulent activities, so the special random numbers that were stored as pending before the power was cut off should be retained even when the confirmation display state ends. It is said that

In addition, if a person who is not the hall manager attempts to check the setting values in the confirmation display state due to fraudulent activity, he or she may somehow access the back of the pachinko machine 1 while pretending to be playing normally. If it is predicted that the settings will be confirmed fraudulently, and the settings fraudulently confirmed are unfavorable settings (for example, setting 1 with the lowest jackpot probability), then the settings will be changed to advantageous settings ( For example, it is conceivable to seek the pachinko machine 1 with the setting value 6) with the highest jackpot probability and immediately leave the machine. Regarding this point, in this example, when confirming the settings of the setting value in the confirmation display state, the pending settings are retained without being deleted, so after performing an incorrect setting confirmation, the It is possible to make it difficult for the user to take actions that feel uncomfortable, such as "leaving his/her seat at a certain time," and by monitoring such actions that feel uncomfortable, it is possible to make it easier to catch a person who performs unauthorized setting confirmation. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting confirmation by anyone other than the hall manager.

In addition, in order to further increase deterrence against fraudulent activities, in the confirmation display state, while holding the special random number that was stored as pending before the power was shut off, in addition to displaying the pending display on the effect display device 1600, the function display unit The pending display on the pending number display of 1400 is also temporarily hidden, and similarly to the change permission state, it is displayed as if the special random number stored as pending no longer exists. This makes it possible for the fraudster to misunderstand that the hold has disappeared, and to give up on continuing the game after fraudulently confirming the settings. In addition, in order to effectively exert the effect of deterring fraudulent acts, it is necessary to set a predetermined return timing (for example, when the body frame 4 is closed or at a predetermined time) not only during the confirmation display state but also after the confirmation display state ends. The pending display may be hidden for a period of time until the end of the period (e.g., elapsed time, etc.).

[13-2. Regarding jackpot games and launching devices]
As shown in FIG. 154, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is not started. Operates the grand prize opening door 2413 that can open and close the grand prize opening 2005, and the sorting piece 2415 that distributes the game balls B received in the grand prize opening 2005 to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008. becomes impossible. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , it becomes possible to operate the big prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415. As a result, when starting a jackpot game at timing t6 after turning off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4, it is possible to operate the jackpot door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 as the jackpot game. , the game ball B can be entered into the big prize opening 2005, and the game balls B received in the big prize opening 2005 can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2008.

In addition, if the jackpot game is being executed and the jackpot door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operating when the power is cut off at timing t0, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. , the setting change process in step S37 of the main control power-on process is terminated, and then in step S38 all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, so that during the execution of the jackpot game ( Information regarding the operation of the grand prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415) will be lost. For this reason, after the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4 ends, it becomes possible to operate the big prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415, but it is interrupted when the power is cut off. The jackpot game that has been played is not restarted, and the jackpot door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are not operated.

As described above, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, since the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) has not started, the first starting port 2002, the second When the game ball B enters various winning ports such as the starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, or the gate portion 2003, a detection signal is generated from the corresponding detection sensor. is not input to the main control MPU, and the detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the grand prize opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, and the second receiving opening 2008, the detection of the gaming ball B will be disabled. Neither the payout nor the granting of a high probability state will be performed, and as a result, during the regular work of changing the settings, the game ball B will be placed in the grand prize opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, Even if the ball enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in this example, the grand prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, from the end of the change permission state. The big prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operated when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at timing t4. It may be possible to do so. This is because before the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to fire the game ball B, and it is practically difficult to start the game. This is because there is.

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (firing permission signal setting process in step S113) is not started, but in the change permission state, firing by the handle 182 is not started. In consideration of checking the operation, etc., the logic of the firing permission signal is set to notify the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted during that period, When the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B can be fired. Furthermore, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (firing permission signal setting processing of step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and the change permission state is Even after the end of the game, the state in which the game ball B can be fired when the handle 182 is operated continues. In this way, it is also possible to prepare for launching the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5. You can start playing immediately after closing.

As shown in FIG. 155, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is performed as in the change permission state. has not started, the grand prize opening door 2413 that can open and close the grand prize opening 2005, and the game balls B received in the grand prize opening 2005 are distributed to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008. The distribution piece 2415 becomes unable to operate. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , it becomes possible to operate the big prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415. As a result, when starting a jackpot game at timing t6 after turning off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4, it is possible to operate the jackpot door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 as the jackpot game. , the game ball B can be entered into the big prize opening 2005, and the game balls B received in the big prize opening 2005 can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2008.

In addition, if the jackpot game is being executed and the jackpot door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operating when the power is cut off at timing t0, the timing is When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at t3 (when changing the setting value), when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the setting in step S37 of the main control power-on processing is performed. The changing process is ended, and then in step S38 all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. (middle) is lost, whereas if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 without operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (when displaying the setting value confirmation), When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the setting value confirmation display process in step S28 of the main control power-on process ends, but all of the main control built-in RAM is Since the process of step S38 for clearing the area except for a specific area is not executed, information regarding the execution of the jackpot game (during operation of the jackpot door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415) is retained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 156, after the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4 ends, it is possible to operate the grand prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415. As a trigger, the jackpot game that was interrupted when the power was cut off is restarted, and the jackpot door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operated. In addition, as will be described later, it is possible to prepare for firing the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before restarting the jackpot game that was interrupted when the power was cut off at timing t5, and the jackpot The game ball B can be efficiently entered into the big prize opening 2007 and the second receiving opening 2008 immediately after restarting the game.

As described above, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, since the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) has not started, the first starting port 2002, the second When the game ball B enters various winning ports such as the starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, or the gate portion 2003, a detection signal is generated from the corresponding detection sensor. is not input to the main control MPU, and the detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the grand prize opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, and the second receiving opening 2008, the detection of the gaming ball B will be disabled. Neither the payout nor the granting of a high probability state is performed, and as a result, during the normal work of confirming and displaying the set value, for some reason the game ball B is placed in the grand prize opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, Even if the ball enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in this example, the grand prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, from the end of the confirmation display state. The big prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operated when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at timing t4. It may be possible to do so. This is because before the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to fire the game ball B, and it is practically difficult to start the game. This is because there is. In addition, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, from the end of the confirmation display state, if the jackpot game that was interrupted when the power was cut off is restarted, the jackpot game will be restarted before the jackpot game is restarted. Although it is difficult to operate the handle 182 and prepare to launch the game ball B, by delaying the resumption of the jackpot game that was interrupted at the time the power was cut off, it can be done before restarting the jackpot game. It becomes easy to prepare for launching the game ball B by operating the handle 182, and the game ball B can be efficiently entered into the big prize opening 2007 and the second receiving opening 2008 immediately after restarting the jackpot game. .

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, like the change permission state, the confirmation display is displayed even though the main control side timer interrupt processing (firing permission signal setting processing in step S113) has not started. In consideration of checking the firing operation using the handle 182 during this period, a firing permission signal is sent to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to notify the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 during that period. The logic is set so that the game ball B can be fired when the handle 182 is operated. Furthermore, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (firing permission signal setting processing of step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and the change permission state is Even after the game ends, the state in which the game ball B can be fired when the handle 182 is operated continues. In this way, it is possible to prepare for launching the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 You can start playing immediately after closing.

[13-3. Regarding production equipment and production materials]
As shown in FIG. 154, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and a predetermined image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to display images. Then, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display (decorative pattern display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the effect display device 1600 are changed. , a settings change notification is being executed to notify that settings are being changed. This setting change notification includes a voice repeating "Settings are being changed", a message displaying "Settings are being changed", and a lamp emitting light in a color corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6 during the selection operation process. It is said that In addition, the setting change notification is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the change permission state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame opening notification that is performed when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. . In other words, when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification is normally performed (display or voice saying "Frame is open", etc.), but in the change permission state, the main body frame open notification is not performed. The setting change notification is given top priority without the need for any changes. Note that the main frame opening notification and the setting change notification are executed in parallel, and the setting changing notification is given priority over the main body frame opening notification, and the main body frame opening notification is performed after the setting changing notification is finished. The form can also be exemplified. After the change permission state ends at timing t4, until a predetermined period of time (for example, about 20 seconds) has elapsed, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker will cause symbol fluctuations and jackpot games. A game start notification is executed to notify that it is now possible to start a game such as .

Note that during the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, in addition to the images, lamps, and outputs from the speakers of the effect display device 1600, notifications from the function display unit 1400 are also sent as the above-mentioned setting change notification. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal reservation display, a first special symbol display, a first special reservation number display, and a second special In addition to the symbol display, the second special reservation number display, and the round display, there is a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state). A confirmation display indicator consisting of one LED is provided to indicate that the confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state). In the change permission state, only the LED of the setting change indicator in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the other LEDs are turned off. Thereby, in the change permission state, it is possible to understand through the notification from the function display unit 1400 that the game will not proceed.

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, there are various prize winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008. Even if the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the respective detection sensors when the game ball B enters the mouth or the gate section 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, if such a detection signal is input, various prize openings and gates may be closed due to the images of the effect display device 1600, the lamps, and the output from the speakers, even though it is not the period when the game should be played in the change permission state. A warning effect A is executed to notify that a game ball B has entered the club. This warning effect A is executed with priority over the setting change notification and the body frame opening notification. That is, when executing the warning effect A, the warning effect A is executed with the highest priority without performing setting change notification or body frame opening notification.

In addition, during normal times when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, there is a period in which the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, but when such a setting key is turned on. In this case, warning effects B and C are executed to notify that the setting key has been turned on in an unauthorized manner using images on the effect display device 1600, lamps, and output from the speaker. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON while the symbol is changing normally, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF, Warning effect B is being executed. Similarly, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON in a state where no symbol changes are normally performed, a warning effect will be displayed until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Running C. Further, the warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effects currently being executed. That is, when warning performances B and C are executed, the performance being executed is stopped and the warning performances B and C are executed with the highest priority, regardless of whether symbol variations are being performed or not. Although the warning performances B and C are performed in the same manner, they may be performed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not a symbol variation is being performed.

Further, in this example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and detects the operation of the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161). This makes it possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers and the amount of light output from light emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600 in stages. In other words, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the operation of the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161) is made detectable, and the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, and the production display device 1600 are changed. It is possible to adjust the amount of light output from a light emitting member such as a screen in stages. Specifically, by long-pressing the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161), the production display device 1600 displays an adjustment image (depending on the duration of the press and hold, a volume gauge image representing 5 levels of adjustment status, and a light intensity After displaying any of the gauge images, the volume and light intensity are adjusted step by step (1→2→3→4→5→1→2) each time the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161) is further pressed briefly. ), and the volume and light intensity can be determined by not operating the effect operation section 160 (press operation section 161) for a predetermined period of time. However, during the period when a performance using the performance operation unit 160 is being executed during symbol fluctuation, the performance operation unit 160 is in a standby state for being operated for that performance. Even if you do, it will be a prohibited period during which you will not be able to adjust the volume or light intensity.

In addition, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and Initial operations of (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorations 3210) are being performed. In other words, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main body The initial operation of the performance members (for example, the performance operation section 160 and the plurality of rotating decorations 3210) mounted on the frame 4 and the game board 5 is being performed. Each of these presentation members is a member that can move between an initial position and an operating position, and in the initial operation of the presentation member, the presentation member normally moves from the initial position toward the operation position. We will also perform accurate positioning so that the performance components are on standby at their initial positions. After the change permission state ends at timing t4, it is possible to perform a performance using the performance member. For example, if a variation pattern (variation pattern command) that is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is a variation pattern in which a production using a production member is set during symbol variation, the pattern The performance member is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation.

Note that if you do not turn on the setting key switch 1311a when powering on the pachinko machine 1 and do not change the setting value or display the confirmation display of the setting value, the change permission state or confirmation display state As shown in FIG. 2, the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is not delayed, and the execution of the interrupt permission setting starts the main control side timer interrupt processing. The special symbol display unit 1400 becomes in a state (variable state) in which the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. However, in such a case, the state is shifted to a variable state without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the performance components mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, so for example, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, During the initial operation of the production member, if a variation pattern in which a production using the production member is set is transmitted during symbol variation, the production member is moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern. Therefore, the opportunity to operate the performance member may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is impossible to perform a variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (variable state A ), since the initial operation of the performance members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is being performed, when the state changes to the changeable state after the end of the change permission state, the initial operation of the performance member is completed. There is a high possibility that As a result, even if a variation pattern in which a production using a production member is set is sent during symbol variation after the change permission state ends, the system will not be affected by the initial operation of the production member. The performance member can be moved from the initial position to the operating position based on the variation pattern, so that information obtained from the performance content is not missed.

However, the initial operation of the performance members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 requires a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to complete. Therefore, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 before the initial operation of the presentation member is completed, the initial operation of the presentation member After waiting for the completion of the operation, it becomes possible to perform the performance using the performance member. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned off at timing t4, either before or after the initial operation of the production member is completed; in either case, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned off at timing t4. At the time when 1311a is turned off, it is possible to change the symbols.

As shown in FIG. 155, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and a predetermined image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to display images. Then, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display (decorative symbol display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image and Confirmation display notification is executed to notify that setting value confirmation display is in progress by outputting from lamps and speakers. This confirmation display notification includes a voice repeating "Confirmation display in progress", a message display saying "Confirmation display in progress!", and a lamp emitting light in a color corresponding to the set value of 1 to 6. It is said that In addition, the confirmation display notification is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame open notification that is performed when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. . In other words, when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification is normally performed (display or voice saying "Frame is open", etc.), but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame open notification is not performed. The notification during the confirmation display is given top priority without performing the above. Note that the main body frame opening notification and the notification during confirmation display are executed in parallel, and the confirmation display notification is given priority over the main body frame opening notification, and the main body frame opening notification is performed after the confirmation display notification ends. The form can also be exemplified. After the confirmation display state ends at timing t4, until a predetermined period of time (for example, about 20 seconds) has elapsed, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker will cause symbol fluctuations and jackpot games. A game start notification is executed to notify that it is now possible to start a game such as.

In addition, after the confirmation display state ends at timing t4, the jackpot door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated, and the jackpot that was interrupted when the power was cut off is activated. It is possible to restart the game and operate the jackpot door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415, but as shown in FIG. A jackpot game restart notification is executed by the output from the speaker to notify that the jackpot game interrupted when the power is cut off will be restarted and the jackpot door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 will be operated. In addition, before restarting the jackpot game, the image of the performance display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker indicate that the jackpot game that was suspended when the power was cut off is waiting for execution, that is, the jackpot door 2413 and the shaker. A jackpot game standby notification may be executed to notify that the division piece 2415 is on standby for operation. As a result, it is possible to operate the handle 182 to prepare for launching the game ball B before restarting the jackpot game, and to efficiently enter the jackpot 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 immediately after restarting the jackpot game. Ball B can enter the ball.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, in addition to the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the effect display device 1600 as the above-mentioned confirmation display notification, as in the change permission state, Notification is also performed by the function display unit 1400. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal reservation display, a first special symbol display, a first special reservation number display, and a second special In addition to the symbol display, the second special reservation number display, and the round display, there is a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state). A confirmation display indicator consisting of one LED is provided to indicate that the confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state). In the confirmation display state, only the LED of the confirmation display in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the other LEDs of the display are turned off. Thereby, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to understand through the notification from the function display unit 1400 that the game will not proceed.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, there are various prize winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, and the second receiving opening 2008. Even if the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the respective detection sensors when the game ball B enters the mouth or the gate section 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, if such a detection signal is input, various winning openings and gates will be activated by the images of the performance display device 1600, the lamps, and the output from the speakers, even though it is not the period when the game should be played in the confirmation display state. A warning effect A is executed to notify that a game ball B has entered the club. This warning effect A is executed with priority over the confirmation display notification and the body frame opening notification. That is, when executing the warning effect A, the warning effect A is executed with the highest priority without performing confirmation display notification or body frame opening notification.

Also, during normal times when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, there is a period in which the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, but when such a setting key is turned on. In this case, warning effects B and C are executed to notify that the setting key has been turned on in an unauthorized manner by means of an image on the effect display device 1600, a lamp, and an output from the speaker. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in a state in which symbol fluctuations are normally performed, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF, Warning effect B is being executed. Similarly, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON in a state where no symbol changes are normally performed, a warning effect will be displayed until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Running C. Further, the warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effects currently being executed. That is, when warning performances B and C are executed, the performance being executed is stopped and the warning performances B and C are executed with the highest priority, regardless of whether or not a symbol variation is being performed. Although the warning performances B and C are executed in the same manner, they may be executed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not a symbol variation is being performed.

Further, in this example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and detects the operation of the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161). This makes it possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers and the amount of light output from light emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600 in stages. In other words, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the operation of the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161) can be detected, and the volume output from the speaker and the , it is possible to adjust the amount of light output from light emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600 in stages. Specifically, by long-pressing the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161), the production display device 1600 displays an adjustment image (depending on the duration of the press and hold, a volume gauge image representing 5 levels of adjustment status, and a light intensity After displaying any of the gauge images, the volume and light intensity are adjusted step by step (1→2→3→4→5→1→2) each time the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161) is further pressed briefly. ), and the volume and light intensity can be determined by not operating the effect operation section 160 (press operation section 161) for a predetermined period of time. However, during the period when a performance using the performance operation unit 160 is being executed during symbol fluctuation, the performance operation unit 160 is in a standby state for being operated for that performance. Even if you do, it will be a prohibited period during which you will not be able to adjust the volume or light intensity.

In addition, in this example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 Initial operations of (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorations 3210) are being performed. In other words, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, the special symbol cannot be displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (variable is not possible). While in state A), the initial operation of the performance members (for example, the performance operation section 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is being performed. Each of these presentation members is a member that can move between an initial position and an operation position, and in the initial operation of the presentation member, each of the presentation members is sequentially or simultaneously moved in a predetermined movement pattern. By operating it, it is possible to check whether the presentation member moves normally from the initial position to the operating position, and to perform accurate positioning so that the presentation member is on standby at the initial position. After the confirmation display state ends at timing t4, it is possible to perform a performance using the performance member. For example, if a variation pattern (variation pattern command) is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a variation pattern in which a production using a production member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, The performance member is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation.

Note that when powering on the pachinko machine 1, if the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on and the setting value is not changed or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, the change permission state or confirmation display state Since the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is not delayed and the main control side timer interrupt processing is started by executing the interrupt permission setting as shown in FIG. The special symbol display unit 1400 becomes in a state (variable state) in which the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. However, in such a case, the state is shifted to a variable state without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the performance components mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, so for example, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, During the initial operation of the production member, if a variation pattern in which a production using the production member is set is transmitted during symbol variation, the production member is moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern. Therefore, the opportunity to operate the performance member may be lost. In contrast, in this example, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is impossible to perform a variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (variable state A ), the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is being performed, so when the state shifts to the variable state after the end of the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the effect member is completed. There is a high possibility that As a result, even if a variation pattern in which a production using a production member is set is transmitted during symbol variation after the confirmation display state is finished, the display will not be affected by the initial operation of the production member. Based on the variation pattern, the presentation member can be moved from the initial position to the operating position, so that information obtained from the presentation content is not missed.

However, the initial operation of the performance members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 requires a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to complete. Therefore, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 before the initial operation of the performance member is completed, the initial operation of the performance member After waiting for the completion of the operation, it becomes possible to perform the performance using the performance member. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned off at timing t4, either before or after the initial operation of the production member is completed; in either case, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned off at timing t4. At the time when 1311a is turned off, it is possible to change the symbols.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are each equipped with a performance member, at least the initial operation of the performance member mounted on the game board 5 is executed in advance, and the performance member mounted on the main body frame 4 is The initial operation of the effect member may be delayed until "after the main body frame 4 is closed at timing t5". This is because the body frame 4 is in an open state while changing the setting value or displaying the confirmation of the setting value, and the body frame 4 is closed when the setting value is changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is completed. An impact will be generated on the frame 4. For this reason, when the main body frame 4 is closed, there is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 does not operate normally or the initial position is shifted. By starting the initial operation of the performance member mounted on the main body frame 4 after the main body frame 4 is closed, it becomes possible to deal with such a situation even if it occurs.

In addition, if the initial operation of each of the performance members mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is not completed normally after the initial operation of each of the performance members mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is performed sequentially or simultaneously, Initialization is performed again when there is a performance member that is not detected at the initial position at a predetermined time by the origin detection sensor that detects the initial position of (For example, if there is a performance member that is not detected at the initial position even at a specified time after performing a movement or retry movement), a performance using the performance member that was not successfully completed will be executed during the symbol fluctuation. We are trying to restrict this from happening. Here, as described above, if you do not turn on the setting key switch 1311a to turn on the setting key switch 1311a when powering on the pachinko machine 1, and do not change the setting value or display the setting value confirmation, Immediately after the machine 1 is powered on, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 enters a state in which it is possible to perform a variable display of the special symbol (variable state), and also enters a state in which the initial operation of the production member is performed. . In this example, if the initial operation of the performance member under such circumstances is not completed normally, the player will feel that the performance member remains stopped at a position different from the initial position while the special symbol is being displayed. Therefore, when powering on the pachinko machine 1, the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on to change the setting value or display the setting value confirmation. If not, one of the performance members is detected at the initial position at a predetermined time after the power is turned on of the Pachinko machine 1 (the time when each performance member is expected to finish its initial operation and be located at the initial position). When the initial position error is not performed, the initial position error is notified to the outside by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker.

On the other hand, if the effect member is not detected at the initial position due to the initial operation while changing the setting value (change permission state) or displaying the setting value confirmation (confirmation display state), normal setting changes or confirmation display may occur. In order to avoid hindrance to the work, even if the presentation member remains stopped at a position different from the initial position, the initial position error notification is suppressed from being performed. After the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, the initial position error is notified to the outside by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. In addition, although the initial position error notification is set to start after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, it is designed to start in advance from the time when the effect member is not detected at the initial position due to the initial operation. It's okay. In addition, at the time when the effect member is not detected at the initial position due to the initial operation, among the images, lamps, and outputs from the speakers of the effect display device 1600, notification ( For example, the specification may be such that only the lamp) is executed in advance.

As a modification of the above, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on regardless of whether or not the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a special The state is such that it is impossible to display the symbols in a variable manner, and while preventing the progress of the game, the performance members (for example, the performance operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorations 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are The period may be set as a period during which initial operations are performed, but setting changes or confirmation display of setting values may not be performed. In addition, an operation section separate from the setting key switch 1311a, RWM clear button 633z, and power switch 630a is provided, and when the other operation section is turned on by a hall clerk, the operation section is turned on until it is turned off. , the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is carried out while preventing the progress of the game after the hall clerk turns on the operation by disabling the variable display of special symbols. It may also be a period during which In such a case, even if a variation pattern in which a production using a production member is set is sent during symbol variation after the hall clerk turns the operation OFF, the initial operation of the production member may be affected. The effect member can be moved from the initial position to the operating position based on the variation pattern without being affected, and information obtained from the effect content can be prevented from being missed.

As described above, the change permission state and confirmation display state, which are the period from timing t3 to timing t4, include the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to adjust the More specifically, when changing the setting value or confirming the setting value, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. Before starting the setting change process in step S37 and the setting value confirmation display process in step S28, the wait time waiting process in step S22 is performed. In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls drawing on the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) performs initialization processing for starting (booting) the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before the main control MPU completes the wait time standby processing. This has been completed and the state is now ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). In this way, at the start of the change permission state or confirmation display state, the peripheral control MPU has already completed the initialization process for starting (booting) the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510. , it becomes possible to detect the operation of the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161), and it becomes possible to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the production display device 1600. It has become.

Furthermore, the volume output from the speakers and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600 are changed at the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3. Information regarding the amount of light is not retained, and the device is returned to its initial state (for example, a state in which the volume and amount of light are at their median values). Therefore, the volume and light intensity after the power is turned on will change to a state different from the volume and light intensity that were adjusted before the power was turned off.

Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the change permission state and confirmation display state are ended, and after the change permission state and confirmation display state are ended, the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is It has moved to a variable state in which it is possible to display symbols in a variable manner. In other words, prior to the state in which the player can start playing in the variable state, the volume output from the speaker and the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 are changed. This allows the amount of light to be adjusted. For example, after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, a variation pattern in which a predetermined effect is set during symbol variation is sent as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. If it has been transmitted, sound (game sound) is output from the speaker based on the information set in the effect, or light is emitted from a light emitting member such as a lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 while the symbol is changing. However, if such a performance is started before the light amount and volume are adjusted, the volume and light amount will be output in their initial state, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this example, the player can start playing by making it possible to adjust the volume and light intensity before the player can start playing in the variable state. Until then, the volume and light amount can be changed from the initial state, and after the player starts playing the game, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the initial state of the volume and light amount.

In this example, by long-pressing the effect operation section 160 (press operation section 161), an image for adjustment is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (a volume gauge image representing five levels of adjustment status depending on the duration of the long press), After displaying any of the light intensity gauge images, the volume and light intensity are adjusted step by step (1→2→3→4→5→1→ 2...), and it is possible to determine the volume and light amount by not operating the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161) for a predetermined period of time. In the variable state, when the effect operation section 160 (press operation section 161) is operated, a predetermined change sound is output from the speaker as the volume and light amount are changed. On the other hand, before the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, it is possible to change the volume and light intensity when operating the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161), but the predetermined The change sound is not output. This is because it is assumed that the hall manager is changing the setting value or displaying the confirmation display for the setting value in the change permission state and confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4. This is to place more emphasis on the work efficiency of the hall manager than on the need to output a change sound to notify that the volume or light intensity has been changed, and to suppress the occurrence of events that would impede the work. In addition, when operating the effect operation section 160 (press operation section 161), as the light intensity is changed, light may be outputted from a light emitting member such as a lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 with the changed light intensity. Since this is not an event that obstructs the work of the hall manager, it is not prohibited even if it is in a change permission state or a confirmation display state.

In addition, in this example, in the variable display state, when an operation is performed to change the volume or light intensity using the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161), at that point, the output is output with the adjusted volume or light intensity. It is reflected immediately. On the other hand, before the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, it is possible to perform operations to change the volume and light intensity using the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161), but at that point, It is not reflected to output the adjusted volume and light intensity, but is reflected to output the adjusted volume and light intensity after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends. In other words, in the change permission state and confirmation display state, which are the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as will be described in detail later, a warning alarm is sent to the outside to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts. However, the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600 that is being executed as such a warning alarm cannot be adjusted to the adjusted volume or light intensity, and is set to a fixed volume or light intensity. That's what I do. As a result, even if you perform an operation to change the volume or light intensity using the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161) in the change permission state or confirmation display state, a situation where it becomes difficult to notice the warning alarm being executed is created. can be prevented from occurring, and the fraud monitoring system can be prevented from weakening.

As mentioned above, in the change permission state and confirmation display state, a warning alarm is issued to the outside to prevent anyone other than the hall administrator from committing fraudulent acts. Even after the permission state or confirmation display state ends, the warning notification can be extended and executed. When the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the sound volume or the It is possible to perform an operation to change the light intensity, but at that point, the adjusted volume and light intensity will not be reflected in the output, and after the extended warning alarm ends, the adjusted volume and light intensity will not be output. It is reflected so that it will be output as . In other words, the images, lamps, and outputs from the speakers of the performance display device 1600 that are being executed after extending the warning alarm cannot be adjusted to the adjusted volume and light intensity, but are set to fixed volume and light intensity. . As a result, similarly to the change permission state and confirmation display state, when extending and executing a warning notification after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161) can be used to adjust the volume or Even if an operation is performed to change the amount of light, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which it becomes difficult to notice the warning alarm being executed, and to prevent the fraud monitoring system from weakening.

In addition, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, it is possible to perform operations to change the volume or light intensity using the production operation section 160 (press operation section 161), and after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends. , the output is reflected in the adjusted volume and light intensity, but for some of the multiple lamps, when you perform an operation to change the volume or light intensity, the adjusted volume or light intensity will be output. It may be reflected to output. For example, among multiple lamps, when an operation is performed to change the volume or light intensity of a lamp used for warning alarms, the output is reflected in the adjusted volume and light intensity in order to maintain a fraud monitoring system. For all or part of the lamps that are not used for warning alarms, when an operation to change the volume or light intensity is performed, it may be reflected so that the adjusted volume or light intensity is output.

[13-4. Regarding fraud monitoring]
In this embodiment, various types of fraud are monitored in the fraud detection process in step S112 described above. Specifically, a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, and to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. ) is provided, and the main control MPU determines whether or not there is any fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, and monitors any fraudulent activity using the magnet. , the monitoring results are sent to the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is made to perform fraud-related error processing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, vibrations are applied to the pachinko machine 1, and the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined by the game board 5 is changed and the game ball B is moved to the game board 5. By installing a vibration sensor that detects fraudulent activities such as entering the various prize openings and gates (gates), the main control MPU determines whether there is any fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, Fraudulent acts caused by vibrations are monitored, the monitoring results are sent to the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is made to perform fraud-related error processing. Regarding the monitoring of these fraudulent activities, there are two types of monitoring: normal conditions (state where setting values are not changed or setting value confirmation displays are not being performed) and conditions where setting values are being changed or setting value confirmation display is being performed. The methods of monitoring are different.

In this example, the magnetic sensor 2470 that detects fraudulent activities using magnets is used to detect magnetism at a location where magnetism is generated (around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5). One magnetic sensor is provided that can identify the area in front of the gaming area 5a located on the front side. In normal times, the magnetic sensor 2470 generates magnetism that should not originally occur (magnetism due to unauthorized access) to the area where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. We will monitor whether this has occurred (whether a magnet has approached), and monitor any fraudulent activity such as an attempt by a person other than the person who is responsible for changing the setting value or displaying the confirmation. It monitors whether magnetism that should not have occurred (magnetism due to unauthorized access) has occurred in the area (whether a magnet has approached), and changes the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a to prevent the game board from moving. We are monitoring fraudulent activities such as attempts to enter balls into the various winning slots and gates provided at the 5th floor. In addition, an example of an illegal act against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet is when a metal illicit device is placed inside the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (inside the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed). , a magnet that indirectly manipulates the metal illicit device is installed, and the magnet and metal illicit device is installed through a small gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment or an opening where a part of the pachinko machine 1 is destroyed. A possible act is to operate the equipment and gain unauthorized access to the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

Note that in the fraud detection process in step S112, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input, it is determined that fraud using a magnet is being performed. If it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being carried out, the main control MPU sends a security signal to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. is output so that hall clerks can understand that fraudulent activity is occurring.

Although not shown, the magnetic sensor 2470 of this example is composed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and has a first magnetic detection direction that is highly sensitive in the direction perpendicular to one side surface. It is now possible to perform magnetic detection within the area and magnetic detection within the second magnetic detection area, which has strong directivity with strong sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the other side, which is the opposite side. ing. Note that "high sensitivity in the vertical direction" means that the sensitivity is stronger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. The magnetic sensor 2470 is arranged such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body extend in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, and one magnetic detection area includes the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and the magnetic detection area covers the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the special winning opening 2005, and others on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. The other magnetic detection area includes the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be monitored. It is possible to monitor areas where With this configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the gaming area 5a. .

In this example, the vibration sensor 3005 that detects fraudulent activity due to vibration is a vibration sensor that can detect the occurrence of vibration around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big prize opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. A sensor 3004 is provided. During normal times, the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor fraudulent activities only during jackpot games, and the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor fraudulent activities other than during jackpot games. This is because, in a jackpot game, the game balls B received by the jackpot 2005 and circulating inside are distributed to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 by the distributing piece 2415. When vibration is applied to the sorting piece 2415, it becomes possible to change the course of the game ball B inside the big prize opening 2005 and allow the game ball B to enter the second receiving opening 2008. , in order to prevent such fraudulent acts. In other words, during normal jackpot games, the vibration sensor 3005 applies vibrations that should not originally occur (vibrations due to unauthorized access) to the area around the distribution piece 2415 inside the jackpot 2005. It also monitors fraudulent acts such as changing the course of the game ball B inside the big prize opening 2005 and allowing the game ball B to enter the second receiving opening 2008.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input, it is determined that a fraud is being performed around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big prize opening 2005 by vibration. Deciding. If it is determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out by vibration around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big prize opening 2005, it is installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer that has been tampered with, so that the hall clerk can understand that the fraudulent act is being carried out.

Additionally, the security signal that is output when it is determined that fraudulent activity using vibrations is occurring is the same as the security signal that is output when it is determined that fraudulent activity using magnets is occurring. . However, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using vibrations is being carried out and a security signal is output, and when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being carried out and a security signal is output, there are differences in the surroundings. The notification mode when external notification is performed in fraud-related error processing controlled by the control MPU is different. That is, when it is determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out by vibration and a security signal is output, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker are output in a manner corresponding to the fraudulent act by vibration. In contrast, if it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being carried out and a security signal is output, a presentation will be displayed in a manner corresponding to the fraudulent act using a magnet. By providing notification through images, lamps, and output from the speaker of the device 1600, it is possible to distinguish which fraudulent act is being committed.

Next, monitoring of fraudulent activity during setting change of setting values or confirmation display of setting values will be explained with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. 157 is a time chart showing the state of monitoring for fraudulent activity while changing settings of setting values, and FIG. 158 is a time chart showing the state of monitoring of fraudulent activity while displaying confirmation of setting values.

As shown in FIG. 157, during the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 is not performed. This is because in the change permission state, the authorized worker who changes the setting value is operating the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, which operates as the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switch button, and the setting value is not changed. This is because there is no room for fraudulent activity using magnets by anyone other than the authorized worker who changes the settings. In addition, when changing the setting values, even if the authorized worker who changes the settings has something that can generate magnetism, this will prevent it from being detected as fraudulent activity using a magnet. , it is possible to suppress interference with regular setting change work.

Further, during the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. This is because in the change permission state, the authorized worker who changes the setting value operates the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, which operates as the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switch button, and the setting This is because there is no room for anyone other than the authorized worker who is making the change to commit fraud using vibration. In addition, even if an authorized worker who changes the settings applies vibration when changing settings, this prevents the vibration from being detected as an unauthorized act, and prevents legitimate settings changes from being detected. inhibition can be suppressed.

In addition, in this example, the setting value is set by turning the setting key switch 1311a to ON, and operating the power switch 630a while operating the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z to power on the pachinko machine 1. It becomes a state where changes can be made (change permission state), but when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, that is, when the change permission state starts, the change is made via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. In addition, even when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, the pachinko machine 1 is connected to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558. In contrast, the main control MPU outputs a security signal. That is, when changing the setting value, the security signal is output to the hall computer twice after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. This security signal is generated when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input while the magnetic sensor 2470 is being used to monitor fraudulent activity using a magnet, and it is determined that fraudulent activity using vibrations is occurring. When a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input while the vibration sensor 3005 is being used to monitor fraudulent activities using vibrations, if it is determined that a fraudulent act using vibrations is being carried out, a notification is sent to the hall computer. This is the same signal as the output signal. However, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, there is no monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 or monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005. By outputting a security signal to the hall computer, the pachinko machine 1 is alerted to the surveillance of the pachinko machine 1 through the hall computer, even though such fraudulent activity monitoring is not being carried out, and the setting value is properly set. It is possible to have the hall staff know through the hall computer that the settings have been changed. In other words, the hall clerk can monitor through the hall computer whether the settings have been changed by a person who commits fraudulent acts. Furthermore, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control MPU has output the second security signal, and the setting change of the setting value is completed by this second security signal. This can be made known to the hall clerk through the hall computer.

Note that the security signal only needs to be output to the hall computer for a time that the hall computer can recognize, and the time from timing t3 to timing t3' is short (for example, 1 second or less). It may be a long time (for example, 10 seconds or more). However, if the output time of the security signal is long, the first security signal output when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, that is, when the change permission state starts, There is a possibility that the process has not ended when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends. In other words, there is a possibility that the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 before timing t3' when the output of the first security signal ends. In this way, if the first security signal has not been output yet when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, the first security signal is After the output of the signal is finished, a second security signal is output after a predetermined interval time (for example, 1 second). In other words, the output of the second security signal is delayed until the output of the first security signal is completed. As a result, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, even if the output of the first security signal has not yet been completed, the hall computer The security signal can be reliably output twice.

Note that as another example of not providing the above-described predetermined interval period, the following may be used. That is, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, if the first security signal has not been output yet, a new security signal is output from that point onwards. The first security signal and the second security signal may be continuously output at the same time as the timer for counting the signal output time is set again. In this case, the security signal will be output for a long period of time exceeding the predetermined maximum output time (output time of the first security signal), and the set value will be changed in the same way as when outputting the second security signal. It is possible to let the hall clerk know that the setting change has been completed through the output of a security signal over a long period of time. Depending on the environment of the gaming hall, if it is not necessary for the hall staff to know through the hall computer that the setting change has been completed using the output mode of the security signal, It may also be possible to cancel the second security signal without outputting it.

As shown in FIG. 158, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 is not performed. This is because in the confirmation display state, an authorized worker who displays the setting value confirmation is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and a person other than the authorized worker who displays the setting value confirmation is committing fraud using a magnet. This is because there is no room to do so. In addition, when displaying confirmation of setting values, even if the authorized worker carrying the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, this will prevent it from being detected as fraudulent activity using a magnet. , it is possible to suppress interference with regular confirmation display work.

Further, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. This is because in the confirmation display state, the authorized worker who displays the confirmation display for the set value is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and there is a possibility that someone other than the authorized worker who displays the confirmation display may commit fraudulent acts using vibration. This is because there is no In addition, even if an authorized worker who performs the confirmation display applies vibration when displaying the setting value confirmation, this will prevent it from being detected as a fraudulent act due to vibration, and prevent the legitimate confirmation display work from being detected. inhibition can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, the setting value can be changed by turning the setting key switch 1311a to ON and operating the power switch 630a to power on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z. It becomes possible to perform a confirmation display (confirmation display state), but when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, that is, at the time when the confirmation display state starts, the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is connected. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the hall. On the other hand, at the end of the change permission state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main terminal is connected to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. While the control MPU outputs a security signal, at the end of the confirmation display state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, a signal is sent to the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU is not outputting a security signal to the installed hall computer. In other words, when changing the setting value, the security signal is output to the hall computer twice, whereas when confirming the setting value, the security signal is output to the hall computer once. It will be output only once. As a result, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, there is no monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 or monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005. Even if such fraudulent activity is not being monitored, a security signal is output to the hall computer to alert the hall computer to the monitoring of the pachinko machine 1 and ensure that the pachinko machine 1 is properly set. It is possible to make the hall clerk know through the hall computer that the value confirmation display is being performed. In other words, the hall clerk can monitor through the hall computer whether or not the set value is displayed for confirmation by a person who commits a fraudulent act. Note that when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control MPU does not output the second security signal as in the change permission state, so that the settings of the setting value and the setting value cannot be changed. It is now possible to distinguish between the confirmation display and the confirmation display.

In addition, if it is determined that fraudulent activity using magnets or vibrations is being carried out and a security signal is output to the hall computer, the peripheral control MPU sends the monitoring results from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. External notifications in error-related processing controlled by the MPU are performed using images of the effect display device 1600, lamps, and output from speakers, but when setting values are changed (change permitted state) or when setting values are If a security signal is output to the hall computer during setting confirmation (confirmation display state), no information regarding the monitoring results is sent to the peripheral control MPU, and error-related information controlled by the peripheral control MPU is As an external notification in the process, no notification is made by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker. This also ensures that normal settings changes and confirmation display operations are not obstructed.

As a modification of the above, if the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on regardless of whether or not the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the setting Until the setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned OFF, there is a period in which the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 are not used to monitor fraudulent activities, and the setting values are not changed or displayed for confirmation. You can do it like this. In addition, an operation section separate from the setting key switch 1311a, RWM clear button 633z, and power switch 630a is provided, and when the hall clerk turns on the other operation section, the magnetic sensor 2470 and vibration sensor 3005 This may also be a period during which monitoring of fraudulent activities using In such a case, even if an authorized worker brings a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 or applies vibration when inspecting the pachinko machine 1, it will be detected as a fraudulent act caused by the magnet or vibration. It is possible to prevent this from happening and to suppress the obstruction of regular inspection work. Furthermore, at least at the start of the period in which fraud monitoring is not performed using the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005, a security signal is output to the hall computer as at the start of the change permission state or confirmation display state. This makes it possible to warn the pachinko machine 1 to be monitored through the hall computer, and to let the hall clerk know through the hall computer that the inspection work is being carried out properly.

In this example, the magnetic sensor 2470 that detects fraudulent activities using magnets is used to detect magnetism at locations where magnetism is generated (around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, or around the game board 5). Although one magnetic sensor is provided that can identify the front side of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5, a plurality of magnetic sensors may be provided. Each magnetic sensor may be able to detect the occurrence of magnetism in the front of the gaming area 5a or around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the gaming board 5. In such a configuration, similar to the configuration with one magnetic sensor 2470 described above, fraud monitoring is performed using a plurality of magnetic sensors in normal times, but the change permission state and confirmation display state are However, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, monitoring of fraudulent activities using multiple magnetic sensors may not be performed. Fraudulent activity may be monitored using only a magnetic sensor provided around the board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a.

Similarly, in this example, the vibration sensor 3005 that detects fraudulent activity due to vibration is capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the distribution piece 2415 inside the grand prize opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. Although one vibration sensor is provided, a plurality of vibration sensors may be provided, for example, in addition to the periphery of the distribution piece 2415 inside the grand prize opening 2005, the large winning opening located on the front side of the game board 5 The respective vibration sensors may also be able to detect the occurrence of vibrations around the ball entrance other than 2005, around the setting change board 13111 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. In such a configuration, during normal times, fraudulent activity is monitored using a plurality of vibration sensors (however, regarding the vibration sensor installed around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big prize opening 2005, (Only during a jackpot game) However, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, monitoring for fraudulent activity using multiple vibration sensors may not be performed, but in the change permission state or confirmation display state, Fraudulent activity monitoring may be performed using only some of the plurality of vibration sensors (for example, vibration sensors provided around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a).

In addition, fraud caused by magnets or vibrations may be detected during security signal transmission immediately after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends (immediately after the start of monitoring for fraud). There are concerns that a situation could arise where important security signals based on detected acts could not be output, weakening fraud monitoring systems. In order to prevent such a situation, the following may be done. In other words, the output timing of the security signal based on the detection of fraudulent activity is delayed, such as delaying the output period of the second security signal in the change permission state or the first security signal output period in the confirmation display state. An example of this is to make sure that the output timings of security signals based on detection of fraudulent activity do not overlap. Specifically, although monitoring for fraudulent activity starts immediately after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, the second security signal output period in the change permission state or the first security signal in the confirmation display state If a new security signal is output (detection of fraudulent activity) within the output period, the security signal that was previously output is output without discarding the output of the new security signal. The output information of the new security signal may be stored and held until the output of the new security signal is completed, and the new security signal may be output with a delay from the original output timing. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraudulent act is not discarded and the fraud monitoring system is weakened. In addition, as another example, the start time of fraud monitoring itself may be extended until the output period of the second security signal in the change permission state or the output period of the first security signal in the confirmation display state ends. You can also use it as According to such an embodiment, the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraudulent act is not discarded, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the fraud monitoring system is weakened.

[14. Regarding command sending process]
As mentioned above, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and the payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. Among these, the main control board 1310 controls the gaming operation (progress of the game), while the peripheral control board 1510 controls various performances during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310. Specifically, at a predetermined timing, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sends information related to the control of game effects and information related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM (where commands are stored) as various commands. By sequentially transmitting the set commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 can also transmit information regarding the control of game effects and information regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1. can be grasped. However, when powering on the pachinko machine 1, when changing the setting values or displaying the confirmation of the set values, information regarding the control of game effects and information regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1 is stored in the main control built-in RAM as various commands. , only some commands are immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510 while the change permission state or confirmation display state is being executed, and the remaining commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 while the change permission state or confirmation display state is being executed. After completion, it is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

First, the command transmission timing when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be explained with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159(A) is a time chart showing the command transmission timing when the pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (when setting values are not changed or setting value confirmation display is not performed), and FIG. 159(B) 1 is a time chart showing the timing of transmitting commands when changing the setting value or displaying the setting value confirmation when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In addition, in this example, at the start of the change permission state or confirmation display state, at least the switch input process in step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process is started, and the game ball B is placed in the various prize openings and gate section 2003. It is described that the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the respective detection sensors when the ball enters the ball.

As shown in FIG. 159, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 111. Then, during the period from timing t3 to timing ty, as explained above in [Behavior of Pachinko machine when power is turned on], the processes of steps S10 to S24 of the main control side power-on process are executed, and the timing When ty arrives, it is determined which combination the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is (steps S25 to S27). In the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met. If this is true, the process moves to setting change processing in step S37, and the setting is allowed. Further, in the determination in step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in RAM in step S38. After initializing, make it variable. In addition, in the determination in step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the main control MPU allows the display of the predetermined setting value. When the conditions are satisfied, the process moves to the setting value confirmation display process of step S28, and a confirmation display state is entered. Further, in the determination in step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in RAM in step S38. to a variable state without initializing it. In addition, as mentioned above, the variable state means that the main control side timer interrupt process (the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the function display is This is a state in which it is possible to perform variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display of unit 1400.

As mentioned above, in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU), the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated before timing ty, which is the point in time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. Since the initialization process for booting has been completed, it is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) after timing ty.

As shown in FIG. 159(A), the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on at timing t3, and the setting value is not changed or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, assuming that the power is turned on normally. In this case, if the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing t3, the main control built-in RAM is initialized at step S38 from timing ty and then changed to a variable state. On the other hand, if the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing t3, the main control built-in RAM is set to a variable state from the timing ty without initializing the main control built-in RAM in step S38. In such a variable state, the main control MPU can set information related to control of game production and information related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the command buffer of the built-in RAM of the main control. When set, it is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

For example, if the main body frame 4 is open at timing ty, the main control MPU sets a door opening command that specifies that the main body frame 4 is open in the command buffer, and opens the door. Immediately after setting the time command, it is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, by receiving the door opening command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU), the peripheral control MPU controls the effect display device during the period until timing t5, which is the time point at which the main body frame 4 is closed, arrives. Door open time notification is executed to notify that the main body frame 4 is open using the image 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. This notification when the door is opened includes a voice repeating ``The door is opening!'', a message displaying ``The door is opening!'', and a lamp emitting light at a higher brightness than normal. In this way, while the main body frame 4 is open, by executing the door open notification to the outside, the hall manager can immediately know that the main body frame 4 is open, and the main body frame 4, the monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts.

As shown in FIG. 159(B), the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at timing t3, and when changing the setting value or displaying the setting value confirmation, the RWM When the press operation section of the clear button 633z is operated, the setting value is set to a change permission state in which the setting value can be changed from the time of timing ty, while the press operation of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the time of timing t3. If the unit is not operated, a confirmation display state is set in which a confirmation display of the set value can be performed from the time point ty. Then, in the change permission state, the change permission state ends at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and from that timing t4, the change is made after the main control built-in RAM is initialized in step S38. Make it possible. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, the confirmation display state ends at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and from that timing t4 onwards, the main control built-in RAM is changed without initialization in step S38. Make it possible.

In the above-mentioned change permission state and confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets information related to the control of game production and information related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. , the storage area of the main control built-in RAM to be set differs depending on the type of command. Specifically, at least in the change permission state and confirmation display state, the main control built-in RAM has a first storage area (first command buffer) and a second storage area (second command buffer) as storage areas (command buffers). When a command is set in the first command buffer, the command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510, while when a command is set in the second command buffer, the set command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Without immediately transmitting the command to the peripheral control board 1510, the command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives, and at timing t4, the command is transferred to the second command buffer. The command set in the command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. That is, at least in the change permission state or confirmation display state, the first command buffer is set with a command that needs to be immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510, while the second command buffer is set in the change permission state or confirmation display state. A command that needs to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 after the confirmation display state is finished is set.

Note that, except for the change permission state and confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets information related to control of game production and information related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the first command buffer. When a command is set, the command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, a command is set in either the first command buffer or the second command buffer, but except for the change permission state or confirmation display state, all commands are set in the first command buffer or the second command buffer. The command is set only in the first command buffer so that it is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. However, except in the change permission state and confirmation display state, the first command buffer and the second command buffer are not separated, and if a command is set in the unseparated command buffer, that command is immediately It may also be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

First, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, the commands set in the second command buffer include commands related to fraud monitoring, such as a door opening command that specifies that the body frame 4 is open, and various prize openings. (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004, big prize opening 2005, etc.) or when the game ball B enters the gate section 2003, the detection itself (abnormal entry ball ) is an example of an abnormal ball entry command. Specifically, the door opening command is set in the second command buffer when the main body frame 4 is open at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or confirmation display state, and the second command is When the door opening command is set in the buffer, the door opening command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and at timing t4. , transmits the door opening command set in the second command buffer to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the abnormal ball entry command is set in the second command buffer when game ball B is detected (abnormal ball entry) in the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4. If the abnormal ball entry command is set in the second command buffer, the abnormal ball entry command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives. , at timing t4, the abnormal ball entry command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

Then, by receiving the door opening command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, the peripheral control MPU maintains the door opening command during the period until timing t5, which is the time to close the main body frame 4, arrives. executes a door open time notification that notifies that the main body frame 4 is open using the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. This notification when the door is opened includes a voice repeating ``The door is opening!'', a message displaying ``The door is opening!'', and a lamp emitting light at a higher brightness than normal. Furthermore, by receiving the abnormal ball entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, the peripheral control MPU controls the images, lamps, and speakers of the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period from timing t4. An abnormal ball entry notification is executed to notify various winning openings and the gate section 2003 that there has been an abnormal ball entry by the output from the. This abnormal ball entry notification includes a voice repeating ``abnormal ball entry'', a message display saying ``abnormal ball entry!'', and a lamp that emits light at a higher brightness than normal. In this way, in the change permission state and confirmation display state, it is monitored whether the main body frame 4 is open and whether there is an abnormal ball entering the various prize openings or gate section 2003, and the change permission state and confirmation display state are monitored. After the display state ends, a notification is sent to the outside when the door is open or when a ball enters abnormally, so that it is possible to know that the main body frame 4 is open or that an abnormal ball has entered the various prize openings or the gate section 2003. The hall manager can understand what has happened. Note that after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, it is possible to simultaneously execute notifications when the door is opened and notifications when a ball enters the ball abnormally. notification) may be executed with priority.

As mentioned above, commands related to fraud monitoring, such as door opening commands and abnormal winning commands, are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state or confirmation display state, and the set commands are immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Without transmitting the command, the command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and at timing t4, the command set in the second command buffer is transferred to the surrounding area. The information is sent to the control board 1510. As a result, when changing the setting values or displaying the setting value confirmation, the hall manager can prevent door opening notifications and abnormal ball entry notifications from being executed due to unintended fraud detection, and ensure that normal work is performed. can suppress the inhibition of

On the other hand, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, the commands set in the first command buffer include setting-related commands such as a setting change command that specifies that it is the start of the change permission state, and the start of the confirmation display state. Examples include a settings confirmation command that specifies that it is the current time, a settings change completion command that specifies that it is the end of the change permission state, and a setting value confirmation display completion command that specifies that it is the end of the confirmation display state. . Specifically, the settings change command is set in the first command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state, and the settings confirmation command is set at timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state. , are set in the first command buffer, and any command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 when set. Similarly, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer at timing t4, which is the end of the change permission state, and the setting value confirmation display completion command is set at timing t4, which is the end of the confirmation display state. At this point, the command is set in the first command buffer, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set.

Then, by receiving a setting change command and a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command and a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU), so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned off until timing t4 arrives. During the period, a warning notification corresponding to the type of command is executed using the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. That is, in the change permission state and confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, a warning notification corresponding to the type of command is executed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. . Warning notifications in response to a setting change command include a voice repeating "Settings are being changed", a message saying "Settings are being changed!", and a lamp flashing in the corresponding color while the settings are being changed. It is said that In addition, warning notifications corresponding to the settings confirmation command include a voice saying "Settings are being checked", a message saying "Settings are being checked!", and a lamp flashing in the corresponding color while the settings are being checked. During the setting change, the lamp emits light in the corresponding color in a different light emission mode). In this way, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, the hall manager can notify the outside that it is possible to change the setting value or display the setting value confirmation. This can be immediately recognized, and the monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts in the change permission state or confirmation display state.

As mentioned above, commands related to settings, such as setting change commands and setting confirmation commands, are set in the first command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or confirmation display state, and the set commands are It is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. In the change permission state or confirmation display state, even if the main body frame 4 is open or there is an abnormal entry into the various prize openings or gate section 2003, the door open notification will not be notified until after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends. The situation is not a normal fraud monitoring system because the execution of abnormal ball entry notifications is delayed, but settings change commands, settings confirmation commands, etc. By sending commands related to the settings (specific commands for vigilance) to the peripheral control board 1510, the monitoring system is strengthened to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts even in the change permission state or confirmation display state. be able to.

Furthermore, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command or a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, it executes a warning notification corresponding to the type of command. In the change permission state, it is possible to change the setting values, and compared to the confirmation display state, there is a special monitoring system to prevent unauthorized changes to the setting values by anyone other than the hall administrator. It is necessary to strengthen the monitoring system, but by issuing warning notifications that correspond to the type of command, the hall manager can accurately judge whether or not it is necessary to strengthen the monitoring system.

Furthermore, when the peripheral control MPU receives a door open command or an abnormal ball entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, the peripheral control MPU executes door open time notification or abnormal ball entry time notification. However, in these notifications, not only the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the production display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, but also a warning sound such as "beep beep" is added to the sound from the speaker. It outputs the output (``The door is open, beep beep, the door is open, etc.'') and executes it with a combination of ``message + warning sound''. On the other hand, when a setting change command or a setting confirmation command is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, a warning alarm corresponding to the type of command is executed. In the notification, a predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, but the sound output from the speaker is made to be performed only by voice without outputting a warning sound. ing. As a result, when changing the setting value or displaying the setting value confirmation, even if a warning effect corresponding to the command type is executed, compared to the door opening notification or abnormal ball entry notification, the Appeals can be suppressed, and normal work can be prevented from being obstructed.

[14-1. Regarding transmission timing of game information command]
In the embodiment described above, when the setting value confirmation display is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, after the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28 is performed, the processing of steps S29 to S36 is performed. That is, at the end of the confirmation display state (timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off), in step S34, various information is read from the gaming backup information and gaming information commands corresponding to the various information are stored in the main control. By setting the game information commands in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the RAM and sequentially transmitting the set game information commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 side can also grasp the information regarding the game before the power is cut off. be able to. As a result, after the confirmation display state ends, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the current gaming state, the variable display of special symbols that were suspended at the time the power was turned off, the number of reservations stored at the time the power was turned off, etc. When the peripheral control MPU understands this, the peripheral control MPU restores the effects based on the output from the images, lamps, and speakers of the effect display device 1600, and, for example, changes the decorative pattern that was interrupted when the power was turned off. It is possible to restart the display, or restart the display of the pending number that was stored at the time the power was turned off.

In this regard, regarding the game information command, the second command buffer is stored not at the end of the confirmation display state (at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), but at the start of the confirmation display state (at timing ty). When the game information command is set in the second command buffer, the game information command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives. However, at timing t4, the game information command set in the second command buffer may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The set timing and transmission timing of the game information command when such game backup information is transmitted as the game information command will be explained with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a modification of the main control side power-on process. Further, FIG. 161(A) is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is normally turned on (when the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated). , FIG. 161(B) is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the setting value is displayed for confirmation when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

In addition, in this example, a case is explained in which the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and game backup information is transmitted as a game information command. When operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z at power-on to initialize the main control built-in RAM or change the setting values, in step S38, a specified area of the main control built-in RAM is selected. Since the area is cleared except for the area, the game backup information will be lost, and the game backup information will not be transmitted as a game information command.

As shown in FIG. 160, in the main control power-on process of this example, in the determination in step S26, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is When it is determined that the value is not 0, first, steps S29 to S36 are performed. Among the processes of steps S29 to S36, in step 32, various information is read from the gaming backup information and gaming information commands corresponding to the various information are set in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. There is. Then, following the processing of steps S29 to S36, it is determined whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 (step S27). In the determination in step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, so that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting value is present, a setting value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In other words, before performing the set value confirmation display process in step S28, the process in step S32 is performed, various information is read from the game backup information, and game information commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. (command buffer). In addition, when performing the processing in steps S29 to S36 after performing the setting value confirmation display processing in step S28, the time for calculating the checksum in step S29 and the checksum value (sum value) in step S30 may be changed. The restart of the game will be delayed by the time it takes to determine whether the checksum value (sum value) matches the stored checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). By performing the processing in steps S29 to S36 before performing the setting value confirmation display processing in step S28, the time required until the game is restarted after the setting value confirmation display processing in step S28 is performed. You will be able to do this.

As shown in FIG. 161(A), when the power is turned on normally, that is, when the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated at timing t3, the timing ty is From this point on, the main control built-in RAM is brought into a variable state without being initialized in step S38. At timing ty, which is the start of such a variable state, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and immediately after setting the game information command, It will be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU quickly restores the performance (images, lamps, and output from the speakers of the performance display device 1600) at the time the power was cut off at timing ty, which is the start of the variable state. be able to.

Note that when the peripheral control MPU receives a game information command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the peripheral control MPU controls the effect members (for example, effect operation 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) are undergoing initial operations. In other words, from the timing ty, which is the start of the variable state, the initial operations of the performance members (for example, the performance operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorations 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 start. It is being done. Each of these presentation members is a member that can move between an initial position and an operating position, and in the initial operation of the presentation member, the presentation member normally moves from the initial position toward the operation position. We will also perform accurate positioning so that the performance components are on standby at their initial positions. As a result, even if the presentation member is at a position deviated from the initial position at the timing ty, which is the start of the variable state, the presentation member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial operation. If the presentation member does not return to the initial position with one initial operation, the control for returning the presentation member to the initial position is repeated several times, so that the presentation member waits at a position shifted from the initial position. It can be prevented. After the initial operation of the performance member is completed, a performance using the performance member can be executed. For example, if a variation pattern in which a production using a production member is set during symbol variation is sent as a variation pattern command sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a predetermined variation pattern during symbol variation is sent. At this timing, the presentation member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

As shown in FIG. 161(B), when displaying the setting value confirmation, that is, at timing t3, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated. If not, a confirmation display state is set in which the setting value can be confirmed and displayed from the time point ty. Then, in the confirmation display state, the confirmation display state ends at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and from that timing t4 onwards, the main control built-in RAM is not initialized in step S38 and changes are made. Make it possible. In such a case, at timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in the second command buffer, and stores the game information command in the second command buffer. When set, the set game information command is not immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the game set in the second command buffer is transmitted until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives. The information command is held, and at timing t4, the game information command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU can restore the effects (images, lamps, and outputs from the speakers of the effect display device 1600) that were in effect at the time the power was cut off at timing ty, which is the start of the variable state. can.

As described above, the game information command is set in the second command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, and the set game information command is not immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The gaming information command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and at timing t4, the gaming information command set in the second command buffer is used for peripheral control. The information is transmitted to the board 1510. This prevents the performance (images, lamps, and output from the speakers of the performance display device 1600) from returning when the power was turned off when displaying the setting value confirmation, and prevents disruption of normal work. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the game backup information has already been set in the second command buffer as a game information command at timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4. Even if noise occurs and the game backup information is destroyed, the game information command can be reliably transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the setting confirmation command is set in the first command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, and the set setting confirmation command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the peripheral control MPU controls the production members (for example, production operation 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) are undergoing initial operations. That is, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the initial operation of the performance members (for example, the performance operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorations 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. is being carried out. Each of these presentation members is a member that can move between an initial position and an operating position, and in the initial operation of the presentation member, the presentation member normally moves from the initial position toward the operation position. We will also perform accurate positioning to ensure that the performance components are waiting in their initial positions. As a result, even if the presentation member is at a position deviated from the initial position at timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, the presentation member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial operation. If the presentation member does not return to the initial position with one initial operation, the control for returning the presentation member to the initial position is repeated several times, so that the presentation member waits at a position shifted from the initial position. It can be prevented. After the confirmation display state ends at timing t4, it is possible to perform a performance using the performance member. For example, if a variation pattern in which a production using a production member is set during symbol variation is sent as a variation pattern command sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a predetermined variation pattern during symbol variation is sent. At this timing, the presentation member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

As described above, after the confirmation display state ends at timing t4, it is possible to send the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, while during the period from timing ty to timing t4. In the confirmation display state, the fluctuation pattern is not transmitted. For this reason, during the confirmation display state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4, a variation pattern in which a production using the production member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, so that the production member does not operate. It is not possible to determine whether or not the performance member is not operating due to a failure. In this regard, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the initial state of the performance members (for example, the performance operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorations 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is By performing the operation, it is possible to inform the outside that ``the performance member is normal, but the situation is not related to the game,'' and it can be determined that the performance member is not malfunctioning. In this example, the initial operation of the performance member is performed in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4, but this operation is performed to notify that the performance member is not in trouble. For example, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4, only a temporary operation of the effect member is performed in addition to the initial operation, and after the confirmation display state ends at timing t4. , the initial operation of the presentation member may be performed. Note that the temporary motion of the performance member may be a motion different from the initial motion, or may be the same motion as the initial motion.

Note that when changing the setting value, a setting change command is set in the first command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state, and the set setting change command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. is being sent to. Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the peripheral control MPU is mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 in the same way as when receiving the setting confirmation command. The initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorations 3210) that are being performed is being performed. In this way, even in the change permission state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, as in the confirmation display state, the performance members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the performance operation section 160 and multiple By performing the initial operation of the rotating decorative body 3210), it is possible to notify the outside that ``the performance member is normal but the situation is not related to the game'', and it is possible to inform the outside that the performance member is not malfunctioning. can be determined.

[14-2. Regarding extension of warning notification after change permission status and confirmation display status ends]
In the embodiment described above, in the change permission state and confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, a warning alarm corresponding to the type of command is provided by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. However, the warning notification may be extended and executed even after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends. A case where the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a time chart showing a case where the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state.

As shown in FIG. 162, although the details have been described above, when the change permission state starts at timing ty, a setting change command is set in the first command buffer, and when the confirmation display state ends at timing ty, the first command A setting confirmation command is set in the buffer, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. Then, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command and a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, so that the peripheral control MPU receives the setting change command and the setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives. During this period, warning notifications corresponding to the types of commands are executed using images of the effect display device 1600, lamps, and outputs from the speakers.

Also, when the change permission state ends at timing t4, a setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and when the confirmation display state starts at timing t4, a setting value confirmation display completion command is set in the first command buffer. However, any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command and a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, and thereby receives a predetermined period of time from timing t4 (for example, During the period until timing t4' (30 seconds) has elapsed, the alarm notification that has been in progress from timing ty is continued by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. There is. In other words, in the change permission state and confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, a warning alarm corresponding to the type of command is executed, but even after the change permission state and confirmation display state end, the timing The warning notification is extended and executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) from t4 to timing t4'. This extension of warning notification is completed by setting a condition for ending the extension of warning notification, and when the set extension ending condition is met. Specifically, if the extension period of the warning alarm ends in a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in a specific timer section, and the timer section measures the predetermined time. It starts and ends when the time expires. As another example, if the extended period of warning notification ends with a predetermined number of audio notifications (for example, a loop of message audio 5 times), the predetermined number of times is set in a specific count section, and the The counting unit may start counting a predetermined number of times and end when the number of counts is reached.

As described above, when executing the change permission state or confirmation display state, not only the period from timing ty to timing t4, but also timing t4', which occurs after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from timing t4, arrives. The warning alert has been extended until then. For example, if a warning alarm is to be issued only when the change permission state or confirmation display state is executed, a short period of time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) from the timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or confirmation display state. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the time period from timing ty to timing t4 for executing the warning alarm is shortened, so that anyone other than the hall manager can illegally change the settings or change the settings in a short period of time. If a confirmation display is made, there is a possibility that the hall manager will not notice. In particular, when displaying the setting value confirmation, there is no need to change the setting value, so it is possible for anyone other than the hall manager to fraudulently display the setting value in a short period of time. person may not notice. On the other hand, if the warning notification is to be extended and executed even after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, a short period of time (for example, 1 Even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off within 2 seconds), the period from timing t4 to timing t4' will be secured as the time for executing the warning alarm. Therefore, even if a person other than the hall administrator fraudulently changes the setting values or displays the setting value confirmation in a short period of time, the hall administrator will easily notice and it will be difficult for the person other than the hall administrator to commit the fraudulent act. The monitoring system can be strengthened to ensure that no such incidents occur.

In addition, as described in detail above, in the change permission state and confirmation display state that are the period from timing ty to timing t4, a warning corresponding to the type of command is provided by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Executing notification. Warning notifications in response to a setting change command include a voice repeating "Settings are being changed", a message saying "Settings are being changed!", and a lamp flashing in the corresponding color while the settings are being changed. It is said that In addition, as a warning alarm corresponding to the settings confirmation command, a voice saying "Settings are being checked", a message saying "Settings are being checked!" will be displayed, and a lamp will be emitted in the corresponding color while the settings are being checked. It is said that If the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, the message content of the warning notification during the change permission state or confirmation display state may be maintained; The message content may be different from the status and confirmation display status. For example, in a warning notification after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, the message content is different from the message content during the change permission state or confirmation display state, such as "Settings change completed" or "Settings confirmation completed." It is also possible to have a configuration that outputs a message such as "I have done this" in a loop. As a result, in addition to being a countermeasure against the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, it is also possible to make it easier for the hall manager to notice when the change permission state or confirmation display state has ended properly. In addition, when maintaining the message content of the warning notification in the change permission state or confirmation display state, make sure that the notification is not temporarily interrupted at t4, which is the switching timing from the extension of the warning notification. Good too. For example, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, at least the audio output from the speaker of the warning alarm executed in response to the type of command will continue to be output until the audio is completed so that it does not end prematurely. An example of an example of the sound in the warning notification that is controlled so as to be extended is to be executed again from the beginning after the sound of the warning notification that has been continuously output is completed.

Regarding warning notifications, predetermined message contents are notified by images of the production display device 1600, lamps, and output from speakers, but sounds output from the speakers are used to notify when a door is opened or when a ball enters abnormally. Warning sounds such as "beep beep" are not output, and are executed only with audio. In addition, the change permission state and confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, are in a non-variable state in which it is impossible to display the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. On the other hand, after the end of the change permission state and confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 becomes a variable possible state, For example, by transmitting a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, various effects sounds will be output from the speakers. In this regard, even if the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the warning sound is not output from the speaker as a warning notification, so there is a limited amount of sound output from the speaker. When assigning channels to a limited number of channels to output various production sounds, situations where there are no vacant channels (unused channels) in the limited number of channels. can be avoided as much as possible.

In addition, when extending and executing the warning alarm after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, the peripheral control MPU sends a door opening command or abnormal entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. The time command is received, but the door is opened from timing t4', which is the end of the extended warning notification, without executing the door open time notification or abnormal ball entry notification at timing t4. Executes time alarms and abnormal ball entry alarms. In other words, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the extended warning notification is given priority over the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification. As a result, even if someone other than the hall manager improperly changes the setting value or displays the setting value confirmation in a short period of time, the hall manager can give priority to the extended warning notification. It is easy to notice, and the monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts. Note that for notifications in which serious fraud is suspected (for example, abnormal ball entry notifications), the timing t4', which is the end of the extended warning notification, is not the time when the extended warning notification is being executed. However, it may be executed at timing t4.

In addition, regarding door opening notifications and abnormal ball entry notifications, not only are predetermined message contents notified using images on the production display device 1600, lamps, and output from the speakers, but also warning sounds such as "beep beep" are emitted from the speakers. is output and executed with a combination of "message + warning sound". The door opening notification and abnormal ball entry notification are output continuously while the door opening notification and abnormal ball entry notification are being executed, but the configuration is such that they are output only for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds). You can also use it as However, in this example, since door opening notification and abnormal ball entry notification are executed from timing t4', which is the end of the extended warning notification, for example, the extended warning notification time (timing If the output time (from t4 to timing t4') is longer than or the same as the output time (for example, 10 seconds) of the door opening notification or abnormal ball entry notification, the door opening notification or abnormal ball entry notification The ball entering notification will no longer be output. In view of the problem caused by this decrease in notification frequency, the extension time of the warning notification (period from timing t4 to timing t4') may be longer than or the same as the output time of the warning sound (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the door open time notification or abnormal ball entry time notification may be configured to be output for only the remaining time after the extension time of the warning notification out of the output time of the door open time notification or abnormal ball entry time notification. . Furthermore, the system may be configured to start a new door opening notification or abnormal ball entry notification after the extended time of the warning notification.

In addition, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the door opening notification is executed from timing t4', which is the end of the extended warning notification. When the timing t5 when the main body frame 4 is closed comes before the timing t4', the door opening time notification is not executed. In other words, if the main body frame 4 is closed while the extended warning notification is being executed, the door opening notification is not executed. However, if the body frame 4 is closed while the extended warning notification is being executed and the main body frame 4 is opened again before timing t4', the extended warning notification will be terminated and the door open notification will be activated. Running. Normally, after changing the setting value or displaying the setting value confirmation, the main body frame 4 is simply closed and the main body frame 4 is not opened again. If an inexplicable situation arises in which the main body frame 4 is opened again immediately after changing the setting or displaying the setting value confirmation, the door opening notification consisting of a combination of "message + warning sound" can be changed to a warning notification. By giving priority to execution, it is easier for the hall manager to notice that the main frame 4 is open due to an inexplicable situation where fraud is suspected, and the situation where the main frame 4 is open continues. The monitoring system can be strengthened to ensure that no such incidents occur.

In addition, as described in detail above, in the change permission state and confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, even though fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 and vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. On the other hand, after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, fraud monitoring is performed using the magnetic sensor 2470 and vibration sensor 3005 (however, fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 , only during jackpot games). If it is determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out using a magnet or vibration, external notification is performed using an image on the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or an output from a speaker. At this time, even if the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, the unauthorized notification is executed with priority over the extended warning notification. In this way, for fraudulent alarms that are suspected of being caused by serious fraud, such as magnets or vibrations, by giving priority to extended warning alarms, it is easier for hall managers to notice, and it is possible to prevent fraud by someone other than the hall manager. We can strengthen our monitoring system to prevent this.

In addition, in the warning notification, a predetermined message content is notified by an image of the effect display device 1600, a lamp, and an output from a speaker. For example, a predetermined message content is notified by an output from a lamp and a speaker, The image of the device 1600 may be configured not to be output. In a configuration in which warning notification is performed using some of the plurality of notification members (effect display device 1600, lamp, speaker) in this way, the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends. In this case, the image of the production display device 1600 is not output as a warning warning that is being extended, but if it is determined that fraudulent activity is being carried out using magnets or vibrations, it is not output as a warning warning that is being extended. The fraudulent notification may be executed only by the image of the effect display device 1600 that is not used (by the notification using only the notification member that is not in use among the plurality of notification members). As a result, when a warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, it is possible to make the hall manager aware of a suspected fraudulent notification without canceling the extended warning notification. can. Similarly, for door opening notifications and abnormal prize winning notifications, only the images of the effect display device 1600 that are not output as extended warning notifications (only the unused notification members among the plurality of notification members) are used. (depending on the notification used), the door opening time notification or the abnormal prize winning time notification may be executed.

In addition, in this example, the warning notification is extended and executed even after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, but the warning notification is extended and executed only after the confirmation display state ends. It is also possible to have a configuration in which For example, when changing the setting value, initialize the main control built-in RAM after the change permission state ends (clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in step S38). However, by receiving the setting change completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, the peripheral control MPU determines that a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since timing t4. During the period until the timing t4' arrives, a RAM clear notification is executed to notify that the RAM has been cleared, rather than an extension of the warning notification, using images of the effect display device 1600, lamps, and outputs from the speakers. You can also use it as This allows the hall manager to know that the RAM has been cleared after the change permission state ends.

[14-3. Regarding the case where the initial operation of the production component is performed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends]
In the embodiment described above, the change permission state and confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, include performance members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the performance operation unit 160 and a plurality of Although the initial operation of the rotating decorative body 3210) is being performed, the initial operation of the effect member may be performed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends. A case where the initial operation of the presentation member is performed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a time chart showing a case where the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends.

As shown in FIG. 163, when the change permission state ends at timing t4, a setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and when the confirmation display state ends at timing t4, the setting value is confirmed in the first command buffer. A display completion command is set, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 by receiving a setting change completion command and a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. The initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorations 3210) that are being performed has started. In other words, in the change permission state and confirmation display state that are the period from timing ty to timing t4, without performing the initial operation of the production member, after the change permission state and confirmation display state at timing t4 ends, the production member The initial operation is performed.

The above-mentioned presentation members include the presentation operation section 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, each of which can be operated between an initial position and an operating position. In the initial operation of such a production member, a return process is performed to perform accurate positioning so that the production member waits at the initial position, and a check is performed to confirm whether the production member moves normally from the initial position to the operating position. The confirmation process is executed in order. For example, if the performance member is in operation when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the performance member will stop at a position shifted from the initial position, and even when the power is turned on afterwards, the performance member will remain in the initial position. It is located out of position. In this regard, after turning on the power of the Pachinko machine 1, even if the production member is in a position shifted from the initial position at timing t4, which is the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, the return process is performed. By doing so, the effect member can be returned to the initial position, and if the effect member does not return to the initial position in one return process, the effect member can be returned to the initial position by repeating the return process several times. , it is possible to prevent the presentation member from waiting at a position shifted from the initial position. Further, in the confirmation process, it is possible to check whether the presentation member operates normally by moving the presentation member from the initial position to the operating position and then returning from the operation position to the initial position. In addition, if the performance member does not return to the initial position even after repeating the return process several times, or if the performance member does not move normally to the operating position or initial position during the confirmation process, there is an abnormality in the performance member. It is designed to notify the outside that this is occurring. After the initial operation of the performance member is completed, a performance using the performance member can be executed. For example, if a variation pattern in which a production using a production member is set during symbol variation is sent as a variation pattern command sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a predetermined variation pattern during symbol variation is sent. At this timing, the presentation member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

Further, the presentation member includes a light guide plate 3110 that can decorate the first pattern and the second pattern by emitting light. In such an initial operation of the light guide plate 3110, a confirmation process is executed to confirm whether the light guide plate 3110 is normally decorated with light. In other words, in the confirmation process, a process of irradiating light to decorate the light guide plate 3110 with a first pattern and a process of irradiating light to decorate the light guide plate 3110 with a second pattern are repeated several times. Thus, it can be confirmed whether the light guide plate 3110 is properly decorated with light. Note that the initial operations of the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 and the initial operations of the light guide plate 3110 are executed in parallel from timing t4, which is the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state. I have to. After the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110 is completed, it is possible to perform an effect using the light guide plate 3110. For example, if a variation pattern in which an effect using the light guide plate 3110 is set during symbol variation is sent as a variation pattern command sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, At a predetermined timing, the light guide plate 3110 is decorated with a first pattern and a second pattern.

As described above, in this example, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the change permission state and confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, are set without performing the initial operation of the production member. Only the setting change of the value and the confirmation display of the set value are performed, and after the change permission state and confirmation display state at timing t4 are completed, the initial operation of the production member is performed. For example, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, if the initial operation of the production member is performed, the setting value may be changed or the setting value may be changed during the confirmation work at the factory. At the same time as checking whether the confirmation display is functioning properly, it is also necessary to check whether the presentation parts are working properly based on the initial operation of the production parts, which is difficult for those working in the factory to confirm. . However, by performing the initial operation of the production member after the end of the change permission state and confirmation display state at timing t4, the set value is After the change permission state and confirmation display state at timing t4 are completed, only the initial operation of the performance member can be used to confirm whether the performance member operates normally. The reliability of the confirmation can be increased because the person performing the confirmation work at the factory does not need to confirm at the same time.

In addition, in the above, the peripheral control MPU performs the initial operation of the effect member when receiving the setting change completion command or the setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. However, apart from the setting change completion command and setting value confirmation display completion command, an initial operation command for performing the initial operation of the production member was received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. At this time, an initial movement of the presentation member may be performed. Such an initial operation command is set in the first command buffer at timing t4, which is the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, and is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after setting the initial operation command. shall be. On the other hand, the initial operation command is set in the second command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or confirmation display state, and the set initial operation command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The initial operation command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and at timing t4, the initial operation command set in the second command buffer is may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. In such a case, even if the initial operation command is set at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or confirmation display state, until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives, The initial operation of the presentation member can be delayed and the initial operation of the presentation member can be performed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends.

In addition, when executing the change permission state or confirmation display state, not only the period from timing ty to timing t4, but also the period until timing t4', which is a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) from timing t4, arrives. When the warning notification is extended and executed, the extension time of the warning notification is set so as to be longer than the time during which the initial operation of the presentation member is performed. In other words, the initial operation of the production member that is performed after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state is completed before ending the warning notification that was extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state. . As described above, after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shifts to the variable display state in which the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner, and the player can play the game. Although it is now possible to do so, during the period when the warning notification is extended and executed, notifications are performed using images on the production display device 1600, lamps, and output from the speakers, and the external vigilance is heightened. It is said that For this reason, the period in which the warning notification is extended and executed makes the player hesitate to start playing, and is not actually a period in which the player attempts to start playing. In this regard, by ending the initial operation of the production member during the period in which the extended warning notification is being executed, the extended warning notification will be terminated, and when the player attempts to start the game, , the initial operation of the presentation member has already been completed. Therefore, after the end of the warning notification that was extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, it is possible to execute the performance using the performance member without being affected by the initial operation of the performance member. , it is possible to avoid missing information obtained from the content of the performance. Furthermore, during the period when the extended warning notification is being executed, in order to encourage players not to start playing, the content of the extended warning notification may be changed to ``Please wait a little longer before starting the game.'' The game may be executed in a manner that includes a special message that prompts players to wait for the game.

In addition, when performing the initial operation of the effect member after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, there may be cases where the effect member does not return to the initial position even if the return process is repeated several times, or if the effect member does not return to the initial position during the confirmation process. If it does not move normally to the operating position or the initial position, the abnormality of the accessory is detected by the image of the performance display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker so as to notify the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the performance member. Executing notification. At this time, even if the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the accessory abnormality notification is executed with priority over the extended warning notification. In this way, by giving priority to the accessory abnormality notification over the extended warning notification, it is easy for the hall manager to notice and to easily confirm whether the production member is operating normally.

In addition, in the warning notification, a predetermined message content is notified by an image of the effect display device 1600, a lamp, and an output from a speaker. For example, a predetermined message content is notified by an output from a lamp or a speaker, The image of the device 1600 may be configured not to be output. In a configuration in which warning notification is performed using some of the plurality of notification members (effect display device 1600, lamp, speaker) in this way, the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends. In this case, the image of the effect display device 1600 is not output as a warning alert that is being extended, but if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the effect member, the effect is not output as a warning alert that is being extended. The accessory abnormality notification may be performed using only the image on the display device 1600 (by using only an unused notification member among the plurality of notification members). Thereby, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the hall manager can be made aware of the accessory abnormality notification without canceling the extended warning notification.

In addition, in this example, as an initial operation of the presentation member after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, a return process is performed in which accurate positioning is performed so that the presentation member waits at the initial position, and a return process is performed in which the presentation member moves from the initial position. Although the confirmation process for confirming whether or not the robot operates normally toward the specified position is executed in sequence, the return process may be executed in advance in the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In other words, from the start of the change permission state or confirmation display state at timing ty, only the return process among the initial operations of the production member is executed, and after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends at timing t4, the production member Among the initial operations, a confirmation process may be executed. Here, regarding the return process, if the effect member does not return to the initial position in one return process, the return process for the effect member to return to the initial position is repeated several times, so it takes a long time. It may happen. In this regard, by executing the return process in advance in the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, even if the return process requires a long time, the change This does not affect the time required to complete confirmation processing as an initial operation of a performance member after the permission state or confirmation display state ends. Therefore, after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, the initial operation of the performance member can be completed relatively quickly, and then a performance using the performance member based on the variation pattern can be executed.

In addition, in this example, when transitioning to either the change permission state or confirmation display state at timing ty, the initial operation of the production member is performed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends at timing t4. However, when transitioning to the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the production member may be performed in advance in the confirmation display state. In other words, when transitioning to the change permission state, the initial operation of the production member is performed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends at timing t4, whereas when transitioning to the confirmation display state, the timing The initial operation of the production member may be performed from the start of the confirmation display state at ty. Here, in the confirmation display state, unlike in the change permission state, the setting value is not changed, but only the setting of the setting value is confirmed, so the confirmation display state can be ended in a relatively short time. is possible. In this regard, when transitioning to the confirmation display state, by performing the initial operation of the production member in advance in the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the production member is completed before the confirmation display state ends. can be done. Therefore, after the confirmation display state ends, it is possible to execute a performance using the performance member based on the fluctuation pattern, and even though the confirmation display state ends in a relatively short time, the initial operation of the performance member is completed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is difficult for the player to start playing the game because the player is not playing the game.

[14-4. About modified examples of fraud monitoring]
In the above-described embodiment, the magnetic sensor 2470 that detects fraudulent activities using magnets is configured to detect magnetism at a location where magnetism is generated (around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, or around the game board 5). Although one magnetic sensor is provided that can identify the area in front of the game area 5a located in front of the game board 5, a plurality of magnetic sensors may be provided to determine the area in front of the game board 5. Each magnetic sensor may be able to detect the occurrence of magnetism in the front of the game area 5a or around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the game board 5. In the change permission state or confirmation display state, fraudulent activity using only some of the plurality of magnetic sensors (for example, magnetic sensors installed around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a) It may also be possible to perform monitoring. A modification example of monitoring for fraudulent activities while changing the setting value or displaying the setting value for confirmation will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a time chart illustrating a modified example of the fraudulent activity monitoring state during setting change of setting values or confirmation display of setting values.

In this example, the magnetic sensor 2470 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is used as a setting operation unit that can detect the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. A magnetic sensor 2470a and a gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the gaming area 5a located on the front side of the gaming board 5 are provided. In normal times, a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is monitored for fraudulent activity using the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a. In other words, under normal circumstances, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a generates a magnetic field (due to unauthorized access) that should not originally be generated in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The system monitors whether magnetism (magnetism) has occurred (i.e., whether a magnet has approached), and monitors for fraudulent activity such as attempts by a person other than the person responsible for changing or confirming settings. An example of a fraudulent act against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet is when a metal illicit device is placed inside the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (inside the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed). A magnet that indirectly manipulates a metal illicit device is installed, and the magnet and metal illicit device are inserted through a small gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the inside of the island equipment or an opening made by destroying a part of the pachinko machine 1. It is conceivable that the user may operate the machine to illegally access the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is input, fraud using a magnet is detected in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It is determined that this is being done.

Similarly, during normal times, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for fraudulent activity. In other words, in normal times, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b monitors whether magnetism that should not have occurred (magnetism due to unauthorized access) has occurred in the area in front of the gaming area 5a (whether a magnet has approached). In addition, fraudulent acts such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a and causing the ball to enter various prize openings or gates provided on the game board 5 are monitored. In addition, in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, when a detection signal from the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is input, it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet is being carried out in the area in front of the gaming area 5a. are doing.

In this example, two magnetic sensors are provided as the magnetic sensor 2470 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet: a setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a and a gaming area section magnetic sensor 2470b. Sensors 2470a, 2470b may have the same performance. That is, these two magnetic sensors 2470a and 2470b, although not shown, are composed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and a first magnetic sensor 2470a and 2470b has a highly sensitive directivity in a direction perpendicular to one side surface. It is possible to perform magnetic detection within the magnetic detection area and magnetic detection within a second magnetic detection area having strong directivity with strong sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the side surface on the other side, which is the opposite side. It has become. Note that "high sensitivity in the vertical direction" means that the sensitivity is stronger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction at all. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. The gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is arranged such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body extend in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. , a wide area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a plurality of winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, normal winning opening 2003, big winning opening 2005, and other main parts of the ball flow path) (locations) can be monitored. On the other hand, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is configured such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body described above extend in the front and back direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. One magnetic detection area is arranged to cover the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be monitored.

As shown in FIG. 164, during the change permission state and confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is used to monitor a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 for fraudulent activity. In contrast, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for fraudulent activity. This is because, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, the setting key switch 1311a is operated by an authorized operator who changes the setting values or displays the setting value confirmation on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. , there is no room for non-authorized workers to commit fraudulent acts using magnets, but on the other hand, the surface of the pachinko machine 1 is located in a position that cannot be seen by authorized workers. This is because there is a possibility that non-authorized workers may commit fraudulent acts using magnets. In addition, if a regular worker who changes settings or confirms and displays setting values has something that can generate magnetism, there is a possibility that the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b will detect the generation of magnetism. Although the probability that the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a detects the generation of magnetism is low, there is a high possibility that the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a detects the generation of magnetism as a fraudulent act using a magnet. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized settings changes and confirmation display operations from being obstructed.

Furthermore, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed during the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4. This means that in the change permission state or confirmation display state, if a regular operator who changes the setting value or displays the setting value confirmation is operating the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key switch 1311a is This is because there is a possibility that vibrations may be transmitted to the vibration sensor 3005 provided on the front side of the Pachinko machine 1, although the vibration sensor 3005 is provided on the back side of the Pachinko machine 1. In other words, even if an authorized worker who changes settings or confirms and displays setting values applies vibration, the vibration sensor 3005 will be prevented from detecting the occurrence of vibration as an unauthorized act of vibration. It is possible to suppress interference with setting changes and confirmation display work. In this example, the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor fraudulent activities only during jackpot games during normal times, but similar to the magnetic sensor 2470 that detects fraudulent acts using a magnet, In addition, the vibration sensor 3005 may be used to monitor fraudulent activity even in the variable state. Even if the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor fraudulent activity in the variable state or during a jackpot game, the change permission state or confirmation display state before shifting to the variable state is , the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor fraudulent activities. In other words, in the change permission state and confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, while the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraudulent activities related to magnetism, the vibration sensor 3005 We do not use vibration-related fraud monitoring.

In this example, two magnetic sensors are provided, the setting operation part magnetic sensor 2470a and the game area part magnetic sensor 2470b, but only the game area part magnetic sensor 2470b is provided, and the front side of the game board 5 is It may also be possible to detect only the generation of magnetism in front of the gaming area 5a located at. In such a configuration, similar to the configuration with two magnetic sensors described above, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to detect the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 not only in the normal state but also in the change permission state and confirmation display state. Monitors for fraudulent activities in specified areas. Further, as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b, a plurality of magnetic sensors are provided instead of one magnetic sensor, and the entire area in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 is covered by the plurality of magnetic sensors. You may also monitor it. For example, in the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the big winning opening 2005 on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and other main parts of the ball flow path, On the other hand, each of the plurality of magnetic sensors is made capable of detecting the occurrence of magnetism in a corresponding manner to monitor fraudulent activities. In such a configuration, all of the plurality of magnetic sensors as the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b are used to control the entire area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 not only in the normal state but also in the change permission state and confirmation display state. Monitoring for fraudulent activity. However, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, only some of the plurality of magnetic sensors as the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b are used in important areas on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (e.g. , first starting hole 2002, second starting hole 2004, normal winning hole 2003, big winning hole 2005, etc.) may be monitored.

In addition, if the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or confirmation display state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4, a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is It is determined that fraud is occurring. In addition, if the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or confirmation display state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4, at that point, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the magnetic field. When the magnetism occurrence command is set in the second command buffer, and the magnetism occurrence command is set in the second command buffer, timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives. Until then, the magnetism generation command set in the second command buffer is held, and at timing t4, the magnetism generation command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, by receiving a magnetism generation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, the peripheral control MPU receives the command from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period from timing t4. Based on the output, a magnetism occurrence time notification is executed to notify that the occurrence of magnetism has been detected in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. This notification when magnetism occurs includes a voice repeating ``magnetic detection abnormality'', a message display saying ``magnetic detection abnormality exists!'', and lamp emission at a higher brightness than normal. In this way, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, it is monitored whether or not the generation of magnetism is detected in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, By executing a magnetism detection time notification to the outside, the hall manager can notify that the main body frame 4 is open or that the occurrence of magnetism has been detected in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. can be grasped. Note that after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, it is possible to simultaneously execute the above door open notification and abnormal ball entry notification, but the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism. In this case, serious fraud is suspected, and notification when magnetic field occurs may be given priority.

As mentioned above, commands related to fraud monitoring, such as commands when magnetism occurs, are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state or confirmation display state, similar to the door opening commands and abnormal prize winning commands described above. Without immediately transmitting the set command to the peripheral control board 1510, the set command is held in the second command buffer until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and at timing t4, The command set in the second command buffer is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, even if the magnetic sensor 2470a of the setting operation section detects the occurrence of magnetism as a fraudulent act using a magnet when changing the setting value or displaying the confirmation of the setting value, the notification of the occurrence of magnetism is executed. It is possible to prevent this from happening and to suppress interference with regular work.

In addition, in the above, when the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or confirmation display state, the change permission state or confirmation display state is changed without executing the magnetism occurrence notification at that time. Although the magnetism occurrence notification is executed after completion, it may be executed in advance during the change permission state or confirmation display state, as long as the notification does not interfere with regular work. . For example, if the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or confirmation display state, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU ) side delays the notification by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, whereas the main function is to display only an error display on the 7-segment provided on the payout control board 633 without outputting from the speaker. For example, a simple notification can be executed in advance on the control board 1310 (main control MPU) side without delay.

Furthermore, in this example, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for fraudulent activity, but only in the confirmation display state. The gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b may be used to monitor a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for fraudulent activity. In other words, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to confirm and display the setting value by short-term work, so there is a low possibility that the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b will detect the occurrence of magnetism due to a regular worker. While the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to strengthen the monitoring of fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, in the change permission state, the setting values will be changed due to long-term work. , there is a high possibility that the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism due to the authorized worker, and with emphasis on the workability of the authorized worker, the pachinko machine 1 is A predetermined area on the front side of the computer may not be monitored for fraudulent activity.

[15. About setting value suggestions]
In this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect such as a variable display of decorative symbols based on a variable pattern determined using a predetermined variable pattern table. It is possible to execute a suggestion performance that can suggest a value. Regarding the suggestive effect, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the effect will be generated every 100 times when the special symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display) is performed in subsequent games. It is possible to suggest the current setting value. Specifically, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the specified value is A variation pattern table is used, and a variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestion effect is set is determined from the specific variation pattern table. The transition of the fluctuation pattern table after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 169. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing a modification of the first variation pattern setting process. Further, FIG. 166 is a table showing the transition of the fluctuation pattern table after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, FIG. 167 is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects based on the fluctuation pattern, and FIG. This is a variation pattern table C used when the number of variations of the special symbol after turning on the machine 1 is 500 times, and FIG. 169 is a specific example of the roulette production as the suggestion production A2.

As shown in FIG. 165, in this example, in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (and second fluctuation pattern setting process), the processes of steps S2144 and S2145 are different from the first fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. It's set. Specifically, when selecting the fluctuation pattern table at reach (out of reach) in step S2144, in addition to the current gaming state, the special symbol after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 with operation of the RWM clear button 633z is selected. A table is selected according to the number of changes in . Similarly, when selecting the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss in step S2145, in addition to the current gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z is selected. Selecting a table. Note that "powering on the pachinko machine 1 with operation of the RWM clear button 633z" means that the RWM clear button 633z is operated but the setting key switch 1311a is not operated, and the main control is turned on without changing the settings. When only the built-in RAM is initialized (when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized, the settings before the power is turned off are maintained), the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are This includes a case where the setting value is changed due to the operation.

In addition to the above, when selecting a fluctuation pattern table according to the number of fluctuations of special symbols after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 with operation of the RWM clear button 633z, the settings of the set values can be changed when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The number of changes in the special symbol after turning on the power of Pachinko machine 1 may be 500 or less, depending on whether the initialization of the built-in RAM in the main control was performed without any setting changes. Different variation pattern tables are selected at certain times. In addition, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the number of changes in the special symbol after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 depends on whether the setting value is 1 to 6. The variation pattern tables selected when is 500 times are different.

In addition, after "powering on the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z", using the fluctuation number counter stored in the main control built-in RAM, the fluctuation of the special symbol after the powering on of the pachinko machine 1 is I know the number of times. In other words, after powering on the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, 1 is added (counted up) to the variation counter every time a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, When the machine 1 is powered on, the variation counter is cleared. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without operating the RWM clear button 633z, the fluctuation number counter is not cleared. In addition, after "powering on the Pachinko machine 1 with operation of the RWM clear button 633z", it is possible to check whether the setting value was changed when the Pachinko machine 1 was powered on, or whether the setting value was changed without changing the settings. Information as to whether only RAM initialization has been performed is also stored in the main control built-in RAM.

As shown in FIG. 166, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine When the number of variations of the special symbol after machine 1 is turned on is from 1 to 99 times, the variation pattern table A, when it is 100 times, the variation pattern table B, when it is 101 to 199 times, the variation pattern table A, When it is 200 times, it is variable pattern table B, when it is 201 to 299 times, it is variable pattern table A, when it is 300 times, it is variable pattern table B, when it is 301 to 399 times, it is variable pattern table A, and when it is 400 times. When , the variation pattern table B is selected, when the number is 401 to 499, the variation pattern table A is selected, and when the number is 500, the variation pattern table C corresponding to the set value is selected in this order. In addition, as the fluctuation pattern table C according to the setting value, the fluctuation pattern table C1 when the setting value is 1, the fluctuation pattern table C2 when the setting value is 2, and the fluctuation pattern table C when the setting value is 3. Table C3 is selected, variation pattern table C4 is selected when the set value is 4, variation pattern table C5 is selected when the set value is 5, and variation pattern table C6 is selected when the set value is 6.

A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set in each of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern tables, and each fluctuation pattern includes a special symbol fluctuation time and an effect display device 1600 to be executed within the special symbol fluctuation time. A variable effect such as a variable display of decorative patterns is set. In such a fluctuating performance, a performance to determine whether or not the lottery result will be a hit is performed from the start of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols until the time when the fluctuating display stops. In addition, the fluctuation pattern tables include fluctuation pattern tables A to C when reaching (when the reach is off) and fluctuation pattern tables A to C when the reach is off. Tables A to C are set with variation patterns that form a reach in the variation display of decorative symbols to perform a reach effect, while tables A to C have variation patterns when the decorative symbols change. A variation pattern that does not form a reach is set in the display. In other words, the fluctuation pattern tables A to C at the time of reach (when the reach is off) and the fluctuation pattern tables A to C at the time of miss are used to determine whether or not to form a reach in the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (to execute the reach effect). Different fluctuation patterns are set in terms of whether or not the However, for the variation pattern table C at the time of reach (when the reach is off), a variation pattern table C common to the variation pattern table C at the time of off may be used. The details will be described later, but when selecting the variable pattern table C, whether the lottery result is a hit or not, whether it is a reach (out of the reach) or a miss, the effect (reach effect, etc.) is set. Since the suggestion effect A2 (roulette effect) is executed based on the variation pattern without execution, the common variation pattern table C is used to determine the variation pattern in which the execution of such suggestion effect A2 is set. Can be used.

As shown in FIG. 167(A), in the variation pattern table A, a variation pattern in which execution of a suggestion effect is not set is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. In other words, the variation pattern table A is a "variation pattern table that does not depend on the setting value" that can be used in common for any setting value, and during the gaming period using this variation pattern table A, the suggestion effects A1, A2 is never executed. In addition, the game period using variable pattern table A is set longer than the game period using other variable pattern tables, thereby limiting the frequent appearance of suggestion effects A1, A2, etc. in the game progress process, and limiting the frequency of suggestion effects A1, A2, etc. The rarity of A1 and A2 is increasing. Further, the variation pattern table A is provided as a table that can be used in common for any set value, and thereby it is possible to suppress the pressure on the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 1 due to an increase in the variation pattern table. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167(B), in the variation pattern table B, a variation pattern in which execution of the suggestion effect A1 is set is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. In addition, in the variation pattern table B, compared to the multiple types of variation patterns set in the variation pattern table A, a variation pattern is set in which the variation time of each special symbol is added by 3 seconds, and in the added 3 seconds , the suggestion effect A1 is executed. In the suggestion effect A1, it is suggested whether the current set value is a high setting or a low setting based on the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light (1 to 3 times). However, in the variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestion effect A1 is set, the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light, which is the effect content of the suggestion effect A1, is not set. Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestion effect A1 is set, the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light is set to 1 to 3 based on the current setting value. When determining the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light, the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light increases as the current setting value becomes higher. Note that at the timing when the fluctuation pattern is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as a change pattern command, the current setting value is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command, so the peripheral control board 1510 side also changes the current settings. This makes it possible to determine which of the set values 1 to 6 the value is. Thereby, in the suggestion effect A1, when the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light is large, it can be expected that the current setting value is a high setting.

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B, it starts displaying the variation of the decorative pattern, performs an effect to determine whether or not the lottery result is a hit, and displays the variation of the decorative pattern. Although the display is temporarily stopped and the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is then stopped, the suggestion effect A1 is executed between the time when the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is temporarily stopped and the time it is stopped. In this way, since the suggestion effect A1 is executed after the effect indicating whether the lottery result will be a hit or not, the visual recognition of the effect indicating whether the lottery result will be a success or not is not obstructed. do not have.

Note that, similarly to the variation pattern table A, the variation pattern table B is also a "variation pattern table that does not depend on the setting value" and can be used in common for any set value. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 1 from being compressed due to an increase in the number of variable pattern tables.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167(C), in the variation pattern table C, a variation pattern in which execution of the suggestion effect A2 is set is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. In addition, the variation pattern in which the execution of suggestion effect A2 is set is a variation pattern that is not set in the variation pattern table A or the variation pattern table B, and instead of the effect of whether the lottery result will be a hit or not. It is set to execute suggestion effect A2. In suggestion effect A2, a roulette effect is executed, and the current setting is determined depending on whether the result of the roulette effect is "even number", "odd number", "high setting", "setting value 6", or "?". I'm trying to suggest value.

As shown in FIG. 168, the variation pattern table C includes a variation pattern 1 that stops at an "even number" as a result of the roulette effect, and a variation pattern that stops at an "odd number" as a result of the roulette effect. 2. Variation pattern 3 that stops at "high setting", variation pattern 4 that stops at "setting value 6", and variation pattern 5 that stops at "?" are prepared. Specifically, since the current setting value is 1, a variation pattern 2 is set in the variation pattern table C1 in which the roulette effect is stopped at an "odd number". Furthermore, since the current set value is 2, the variation pattern table C2 has a variation pattern 1 set in which the roulette effect stops at an "even number". Furthermore, since the current setting value is 3, a variation pattern 2 is set in the variation pattern table C3 in which the roulette effect is stopped at an "odd number". In addition, since the current setting value is 4, the fluctuation pattern table C4 includes a fluctuation pattern 1 that stops at an "even number" as a result of the roulette effect, and a fluctuation pattern that stops at a "high setting". 3 is set. Also, in the fluctuation pattern table C5, since the current setting value is 5, there is a fluctuation pattern 2 that stops at an "odd number" as a result of the roulette effect, and a fluctuation pattern that stops at a "high setting". 3 is set. In addition, since the current setting value is 6, the variation pattern table C6 includes a variation pattern 1 that stops at an "even number" as a result of the roulette effect, and a variation pattern that stops at a "high setting". 3. Fluctuation pattern 4 that stops at "setting value 6" is set. In this way, the suggestion effect A2 includes modes that specifically indicate setting values such as "high setting" and "setting value 6" than the suggestion effect A1, so it is better to pay attention to the result of the roulette effect. In the suggestion performance A2, when the roulette performance is stopped at "high setting" or "set value 6" as a result, there is a high probability that the lottery result will be a hit, so the game can be played with anticipation.

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6, it starts the variable display of the decorative pattern, temporarily stops the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then starts the variable display of the decorative pattern. However, between the start of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols and the temporary stop, the fluctuating display of decorative symbols is performed without performing a performance to determine whether the lottery result will be a hit or not. A roulette effect is executed as a suggestive effect A2 while being displayed in a small size at a corner of the display device 1600. In this way, the suggestion effect A2 is executed in a situation where the effect of determining whether the lottery result will be a hit or not is not executed, so it is not possible to display the fluctuating display of decorative symbols or to determine whether the lottery result is a win or not. The visual recognition of the suggestive performance A2 is not obstructed by the performance, and the degree of attention to the suggestive performance A2 can be increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, in the roulette effect, a roulette display divided into five parts, ``even number'', ``odd number'', ``high setting'', ``set value 6'', and ``?'' appears on the effect display device 1600. , the lighting location moves clockwise with the signal "Roulette performance begins!" Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the movement of the lit parts of the roulette display slowly slows down, and the roulette performance results based on the fluctuation pattern ("even number", "odd number", "high setting", "setting value 6", The lighting location will stop at any one of the "?" At this time, if the roulette stops at an "even number" as a result of the roulette effect based on the fluctuation pattern, it will be recognized that the current setting value is 2, 4, or 6, and if it stops at an "odd number" recognizes that the current setting value is one of 1, 3, or 5, and when stopped at "high setting", recognizes that the current setting value is one of 4 to 5. If it stops at "set value 6", it will recognize that the current set value is 6, and if it stops at "?", it will recognize which one is the current set value from 1 to 6. It can be made to recognize that it is. For variation patterns 1 to 5, the variation time of the special symbol is different, and the time until the result stops is different in the roulette performance executed within the variation time of the special symbol.

Note that, unlike the variation pattern table A and the variation pattern table B, the variation pattern table C differs depending on the setting value, and is referred to as a "variation pattern table that depends on the setting value." Thereby, the execution time of the suggestion performance A2 (roulette performance) can be varied according to the setting value, and the degree of freedom in designing the performance that suggests the setting value can be increased.

As mentioned above, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the special symbol will be selected from the variation pattern table B every time the special symbol variation display is performed 100 times in subsequent games. Suggestion effect A1 is executed based on the variation pattern, and when the variation display of the special symbol is performed 500 times, suggestion effect A2 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from variation pattern tables C1 to C6. . In addition, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern tables C1 to C6 according to the setting value will be used when the special symbol is displayed 500 times. Then, the suggestion effect A2 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6 corresponding to the set value. In this way, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, every time the special symbols are displayed 100 times in subsequent games, the current Since the setting value is suggested, the game can be played with anticipation until the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 166, if only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern table for reach (out of reach) and the fluctuation pattern table for out of reach As each of the fluctuation pattern tables, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is from 1 to 99 times, the fluctuation pattern table A is used, and when it is 100 times, the fluctuation pattern table B is used, and from 101 to 199 times. When it is, the variation pattern table A, when it is 200 times, it is variation pattern table B, when it is 201 to 299 times, it is variation pattern table A, when it is 300 times, it is variation pattern table B, and when it is 301 to 399 times. When the number is 400, the variable pattern table B is selected. When the number is 401 to 499, the variable pattern table A is selected. When the number is 500, the variable pattern table C0 is selected in this order. .

As described above, in the variation pattern table B, variation patterns in which execution of the suggestion effect A1 is set are set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. Then, after changing the setting value when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the light guide plate 3110 emits light 1 to 3 times in the suggestion effect A1, the light from the LED 3121 causes the light guide plate 3110 to In contrast to making the pattern emit light, after only initializing the main control built-in RAM without changing the settings when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, in the suggestion effect A1, the light from the LED 3131 is emitted instead of the first pattern. The light causes the light guide plate 3110 to emit the second pattern once. Therefore, when executing the suggestion effect A1, depending on whether the first pattern or the second pattern is emitted on the light guide plate 3110, the setting value may be changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is possible to determine whether only the main control built-in RAM has been initialized without changing the settings. In other words, in the suggestion effect A1, when the second pattern emits light on the light guide plate 3110, although information regarding the current setting value such as the number of times the first pattern emits light (1 to 3 times) cannot be grasped, It can be seen that the set value has not changed since before the power was cut off and the previous set value is maintained.

Further, as described above, in the variation pattern table C, a variation pattern in which execution of the suggestion effect A2 is set is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. Among these, if only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern table C0 is selected, but the fluctuation pattern table C0 is Regardless of whether the current set value is 1 to 6, a variation pattern 5 is set in which the roulette effect stops at "?". In this regard, after changing the setting value when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the suggestion effect A2 does not stop at "?" as a result of the roulette effect, so the result of the roulette effect is "?". By stopping at "?", it is possible to understand that the main control built-in RAM has been initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In other words, in suggestion effect A2, when the roulette effect stops at "?", information about the current setting value is displayed such as "even number", "odd number", "high setting", and "setting value 6". Although it is not possible to ascertain this, it is possible to know that the setting value has not changed since before the power was shut off and the previous setting value is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 166, when the setting value confirmation display is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the power is turned on normally (the power is turned on without operating the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a), carries over the number of variations of the special symbol at the time of power cutoff, and creates a variation pattern table according to the number of variations of the special symbol since the last power-on of the pachinko machine 1 accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z. I am choosing to do so. In other words, when the power is turned off, the fluctuation number counter stored in the main control built-in RAM is retained (backed up), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 without operating the RWM clear button 633z, the fluctuation number counter is is used continuously without being cleared, and 1 is added (counted up) to the variation number counter each time a special symbol is displayed in variation thereafter. In this way, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without operating the RWM clear button 633z, the number of fluctuations counter is not cleared, so the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is Suggestion performance A1 and suggestion performance A2 are not necessarily executed 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times. Therefore, in addition to when the number of changes in the special symbol after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 is 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500, the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 may be executed. You can draw attention to it with anticipation.

In addition, the number of variations counter is incremented (counted up) by 1 each time a special symbol is displayed as a variation, but when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 500 after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, After clearing the variation counter, it is incremented (counted up) by 1 every time a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner again. In other words, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern table A (1st to 99th time) → B (100th time) → A (101st to 199th time) → B (200th time) To repeat (1st time) → A (201st to 299th time) → B (300th time) → A (301st to 399th time) → B (400th time) → A (401st to 499th time) → C1 to C6 (500th time) On the other hand, if the main control RAM is initialized when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern table A (1st to 99th time) → B (100th time) → A (101st to 199th time) → B( 200th time) → A (201st to 299th time) → B (300th time) → A (301st to 399th time) → B (400th time) → A (401st to 499th time) → C0 (500th time). There is.

In addition, even before the number of changes of the special symbol after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 reaches 500, if the lottery result is a hit, the number of changes counter is cleared, and then the special symbol is changed again. 1 is added (counted up) each time a variable display is performed. That is, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestion performance A1 and the suggestion performance A2 are executed when the lottery results are consecutively unsuccessful 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times. As a result, even if the number of changes in the special symbol after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500 times and the lottery result is not a hit, the suggestion effect A1 or It is possible to make the user look forward to the execution of the suggestion effect A2.

In addition, as described above, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, in the suggestion effect A1, the current In contrast, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings, the light guide plate 3110 is notified in the suggestion effect A1. Information regarding the current setting value of what causes the second pattern to emit light is not notified. In addition, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the result of the roulette effect will be "even number", "odd number", "high setting", or "setting value 6" in suggestion effect A2. In contrast, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and only initializes the main control built-in RAM without changing settings, In suggestion effect A2, information regarding the current set value is not notified because the result of the roulette effect stops at one of the "?" signs. Therefore, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and the hall manager does not want to notify the player of information regarding the current setting value, the pachinko machine 1 may be changed again. By turning on the power after turning off the power to Pachinko machine 1, and only initializing the main control built-in RAM without changing settings when turning on the power to Pachinko machine 1, information about the current setting values can be provided to the player. You can choose not to be notified.

In addition, in the normal state (non-time-saving state), variable pattern tables A to C are used in the above order every time a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, whereas the time-saving state starts after the lottery result becomes a hit. In this case, the variation pattern table for the time saving state is used as a table different from the variation pattern tables A to C. In this variation pattern table during the time saving state, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is shorter than that in the normal state is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. Even if the time-saving state occurs after the lottery result becomes a hit, by selecting a specific fluctuation pattern table when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number after the start of the time-saving state, A variation pattern in which execution of a suggestion effect is set is determined from a specific variation pattern table, and the suggestion effect is executed based on the variation pattern. At this time, for example, in the time-saving state, the suggestion effect is performed more frequently than in the normal state, so that the attention is focused not only on whether the lottery result will be a hit, but also on whether the suggestion effect will be executed. be able to. It should be noted that at the end of the time saving state, the variation counter is cleared, and is incremented (counted up) by 1 each time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, if the setting values are changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or if only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings, the When the number of variations of the special symbol is 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500, variation pattern table B or variation pattern table C is used, but other than these, the number of variations of the special symbol Also, a specific variation pattern table may be used. For example, a specific variation pattern table may be used when the special symbols are displayed in variation for the first time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. In this way, by selecting a specific variation pattern table when the special symbol is displayed for the first time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the execution of the suggestion effect is set from that specific variation pattern table. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern of the current fluctuation pattern, and to execute a suggestive performance based on the fluctuation pattern. In this regard, in most cases, changing the setting values or initializing the main control built-in RAM without changing the settings is done when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 when the hall opens. By executing the suggestive performance at the first time of the variable display of the special symbols after the machine 1 is powered on, it is possible to generate the desire to actively start playing the game immediately after the opening of the hall.

In addition, if the setting values are changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or if the main control RAM is initialized without changing the settings, the special symbols after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 will be changed. When the number of fluctuations is 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500, suggestion performance A1 and suggestion performance A2 are executed using fluctuation pattern table B and fluctuation pattern table C. For example, using the effect display device 1600, add the number of variations of the special symbol after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 based on the variation counter (1 variation → 2 variations → 3 variations → etc.) The number of variations in increments of "+1" The remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays until Suggestive Performance A1 or Suggestive Performance A2 is executed is subtracted based on the fluctuation number counter (Remaining 500 fluctuations → 499 The notification may be made in the form of a change → 497 change → ..., in which the display of the number of changes is decreased by "-1". In addition, such a notification may be sent when the execution timing of suggestion production A1 or suggestion production A2 approaches, for example, when the remaining number of times the special symbol is displayed fluctuating until execution of suggestion production A1 or suggestion production A2 is 10. It may be possible to execute the process from the initial stage. As a result, the player can grasp whether or not the execution timing of suggestion performance A1 or suggestion performance A2 is approaching, and information regarding the current setting value can be obtained until execution of suggestion performance A1 or suggestion performance A2. It is possible to continue playing the game with the expectation that the player will be able to continue playing the game.

In addition, when the execution timing of suggestion production A1 or suggestion production A2 approaches, as a production other than notification of the number of changes in the special symbol, the game will notify that the execution of suggestion production A1 or suggestion production A2 is imminent. A special omen performance may be executed to notify the person. For example, when the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays until the suggestion production A1 or suggestion production A2 is executed reaches 10, the production display device 1600 may be used to display a message such as "Suggest setting in 10 times!" By displaying the information to encourage the player to continue playing, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing by giving him or her the expectation that information regarding the current setting values will be obtained. In addition, notification of the number of changes in special symbols can be made when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value. In this case, the notification contents may be reset to the initial state at the same time as the fluctuation counter is initialized. As a result, there is no discrepancy between the number of fluctuations to be notified to the player and the timing of executing the suggestion performance A1 or the suggestion performance A2 using the fluctuation pattern table B or the fluctuation pattern table C. It is possible to increase the reliability of the performance A2.

[15-1. About a modification example of the change of the fluctuation pattern table when the main control RAM is initialized]
In the embodiment described above, if only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (when out of reach) and the fluctuation pattern table at time of out of reach. As each of the fluctuation pattern tables, the fluctuation pattern tables are selected in a different order from the one when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and the fluctuation patterns are selected from the fluctuation pattern table B and the fluctuation pattern table C0. In the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 when the user selects , information regarding the current setting value is not notified. As an embodiment different from this, if only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine Suggestion effect A1 when a variation pattern is selected from variation pattern table B or variation pattern tables C1 to C6 by selecting the variation pattern tables in the same order as when changing the settings of the setting value when power is turned on in step 1. In the suggestion effect A2, information regarding the current setting value may be notified. Below, the transition of the special fluctuation pattern table in the case where only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting values when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a table showing a modification example of the change of the fluctuation pattern table after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 170, if only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the settings that have already been set are referred to, and the referenced settings are Based on the values, a variation pattern table for reach (out of reach) and a variation pattern table for off reach are respectively set. Specifically, in the same way as when the settings are changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 When the number of variations of the special symbol after turning on the power is from 1 to 99 times, variation pattern table A is used, when it is 100 times, variation pattern table B is used, when it is 101 to 199 times, variation pattern table A is used, and when it is 200 times. When it is , the variation pattern table B, when it is 201 to 299 times, it is variation pattern table A, when it is 300 times, it is variation pattern table B, when it is 301 to 399 times, it is variation pattern table A, and when it is 400 times. When the number of times is 401 to 499, the variable pattern table A is selected, and when the number is 500, the variable pattern table C corresponding to the set value is selected in this order. In addition, as the fluctuation pattern table C according to the setting value, the fluctuation pattern table C1 when the setting value is 1, the fluctuation pattern table C2 when the setting value is 2, and the fluctuation pattern table C when the setting value is 3. Table C3 is selected, variation pattern table C4 is selected when the set value is 4, variation pattern table C5 is selected when the set value is 5, and variation pattern table C6 is selected when the set value is 6.

In addition, after only initializing the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting values when turning on the power of Pachinko machine 1, after changing the setting values when turning on the power of Pachinko machine 1, Similarly, in the suggestion effect A1 when the variable pattern table B is selected, when the light guide plate 3110 emits light one to three times, the light from the LED 3121 causes the light guide plate 3110 to emit the first pattern. That is, in the suggestion effect A1, it is suggested whether the current setting value is a high setting or a low setting, depending on the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light (1 to 3 times). Furthermore, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestion effect A1 is set, it determines whether the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 should be 1 to 3 based on the current setting value. However, when determining the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light, it is determined such that the higher the current setting value is, the greater the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light. As a result, even after only initializing the main control built-in RAM without changing the settings when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, in the suggestion effect A1, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, Information regarding the current setting value can be grasped in the same way as after changing the setting value, and when the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light is large, it can be expected that the current setting value is a high setting. .

In addition, after only initializing the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting values when turning on the power of Pachinko machine 1, after changing the setting values when turning on the power of Pachinko machine 1, Similarly, when the number of variations of the special symbol after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is 500, the variation pattern table C corresponding to the set value is selected. In other words, the variation pattern table C according to the setting value is the variation pattern table C1 when the setting value is 1, the variation pattern table C2 when the setting value is 2, and the variation pattern table C2 when the setting value is 3. C3, the variable pattern table C4 is selected when the set value is 4, the variable pattern table C5 is selected when the set value is 5, and the variable pattern table C6 is selected when the set value is 6. Then, in the fluctuation pattern tables C1 to C6, the roulette effect is executed as the suggested effect A2, and the result of the roulette effect is set to stop at any of "even number", "odd number", "high setting", and "setting value 6". Variation patterns 1 to 4 are set, and in the suggestion effect A2, the current set value is suggested by the result of the roulette effect based on the variation pattern. As a result, even after only initializing the main control built-in RAM without changing the settings when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, in the suggestion effect A2, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. You can grasp the information about the current setting value as well as after changing the setting value, and when the roulette effect stops at "high setting" or "setting value 6", the lottery result will be a hit. Since the probability is high, you can play the game with high expectations.

As mentioned above, if only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting values when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the setting values will not be changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. Similarly to the case where the special symbol is displayed 100 times in subsequent games, the suggestion performance A1 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B, and the special symbol is changed. When the display is performed 500 times, the suggestion effect A2 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6, so there is no difference between the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2. Therefore, depending on the execution of suggestion effect A1 or suggestion effect A2, whether or not the settings were changed when the power was turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control built-in RAM was simply initialized without changing the settings. I can't figure out what I did.

In this modification, when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, a setting completion notification is executed by the image of the performance display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, and the setting value is set. Notifying you that changes have been made. Similarly, if only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting values when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the initialization will be performed using the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. When the initialization is complete, a notification is issued to notify that the main control built-in RAM has been initialized. As a result, by executing the setting completion notification or the initialization completion notification, it is possible to check whether the setting values have been changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and to initialize the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting values. It is possible to understand whether only the changes were made. Note that the setting completion notification and the initialization completion notification include, for example, changing the initial display mode of decorative patterns on the effect display device 1600 (initial pattern combination before the start of the first variation, etc.) and changing the settings of the setting values. For example, the display mode may be different from that in the case where only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without any initialization. These notifications are issued when the changing display of special symbols starts after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off and then turned on again (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without operating the RWM clear button 633z). When the power is turned on), the operation ends, and the end of the notification indicates whether the setting values were changed when the power was turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or whether the settings of the main control built-in RAM are changed without changing the setting values. It becomes impossible to determine whether only initialization was performed. This notifies the player whether the setting value was changed when the power was turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or whether only the main control built-in RAM was initialized without changing the setting value. If you do not want to do so, for example, the hall manager can turn off the power to the pachinko machine 1 again and then turn it back on (powering on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the RWM clear button 633z), so that the setting is completed. It is possible to arbitrarily create a state in which the initialization completion notification is not executed.

In addition, in this modification, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, if only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting values, the setting values before the power is turned off are maintained. As for the fluctuation number counter, the value before the power is turned off is reset, so when selecting the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the fluctuation number counter after that, start from the beginning (the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the first fluctuation). It happens. In other words, if the hall manager only initializes the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting values when turning on the power of Pachinko machine 1, the hall manager will maintain the same setting values as before the power was turned off. Then, only the variation counter can be reset, and when the number of variations of the special symbol is 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500 since the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestion effect A1 Information regarding the current setting value can be notified by means of a suggestion effect A2 or a suggestion effect A2. On the other hand, in the embodiment described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting values, the hall manager can set the same settings as before the power was turned off. If the number of changes counter is reset while maintaining the value, but the number of changes of the special symbol is 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500 times since the Pachinko machine 1 was powered on, it is suggested. Information regarding the current set value is not notified by the effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2. Therefore, while maintaining the same set value as before the power was turned off, when the number of changes in the special symbol is 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500 times since the power was turned on to the Pachinko machine 1, the In order to notify information about the current setting values through presentation A1 and suggestion presentation A2, the hall manager must operate to change the setting values when the power is turned on to pachinko machine 1, and the setting values must be changed to the same settings as before the power was turned off. Setting values need to be reset. In this regard, in this modification, there is no need to change the setting values when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and it is only necessary to initialize the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting values. , it is possible to save the trouble of ``resetting the same setting values as before the power was shut off''.

Also, in this modification, as in the above-described embodiment, when the execution timing of suggestion production A1 or suggestion production A2 approaches, suggestion production A1 or suggestion production A2 is A special precursor performance may be executed to inform the player that the execution of the suggestion performance A2 is imminent. For example, when the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation displays until the suggestion production A1 or suggestion production A2 is executed reaches 10, the production display device 1600 may be used to display a message such as "Suggest setting in 10 times!" By displaying the information to encourage the player to continue playing, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing by giving him or her the expectation that information regarding the current setting values will be obtained. In addition, notification of the number of changes in special symbols can be made when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value. In this case, the contents of the notification may be reset to the initial state. As a result, there is no discrepancy between the number of fluctuations to be notified to the player and the timing of executing the suggestion performance A1 or the suggestion performance A2 using the fluctuation pattern table B or the fluctuation pattern table C. It is possible to increase the reliability of the performance A2.

[15-2. Regarding suggestion performance B that is executed at a different timing from suggestion performance A1 and suggestion performance A2]
In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the suggestion production A1 or the suggestion production A2 is executed in a variation production such as a variation display of a decorative symbol in the production display device 1600 according to the elapse of the variation time of the decorative symbol. It is possible to execute suggestion performance B capable of suggesting the current set value, regardless of the elapse of the variation time of the decorative pattern, at a timing different from the execution of suggestion performance A1 and suggestion performance A2. Execution of such suggestion effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 167.

First, regarding the suggestion performance B, when there is no operation instruction for the handle 111 and the handle 111 that is not being operated is operated, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the suggestion performance B with a predetermined probability. ing. Specifically, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the operation of the handle 111 and a detection signal is input to the payout control board 633, a notification that the detection signal has been input is sent via the main control board 1310. The information is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect B at a predetermined probability (in this embodiment, a lottery with a 1/50 chance of winning). This lottery is set to have a higher probability of winning at least than the jackpot lottery, and by making it appear frequently, it is possible to make it easier for multiple players to experience Suggestive Performance B, and to make it easier for multiple players to experience Suggestive Performance B. By letting the player experience Effect B multiple times, the player's desire to continue playing the game is increased. Then, in the lottery to determine whether or not to execute suggestion effect B, if it is decided to execute suggestion effect B (if it is won), one of the multiple types of suggestion patterns will be selected according to the current setting value. A suggestion pattern is determined, and suggestion performance B is executed based on the determined suggestion pattern. Further, in the suggestion effect B, the current set value is suggested by the output from the lamp and speaker provided in the main body frame 4, regardless of which suggestion pattern is used. Note that when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (or when the setting value is changed or the setting value confirmation display is completed, the current setting value is sent as a command to the peripheral control board 1510). The peripheral control board 1510 side holds information regarding the current setting value, making it possible to determine which of setting values 1 to 6 the current setting value is. However, as described in detail above, the current set value is also sent as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing when the fluctuation pattern is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as a change pattern command, and the peripheral control board 1510 side This command also makes it possible to determine which of the settings 1 to 6 the current setting value is. As a result, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, when it is decided to execute suggestion effect B (when it is won), one of the plurality of suggestion patterns is determined according to the current setting value. be able to.

More specifically, in suggestion effect B, the voices from the speakers include "The setting value may be 1," "The setting value may be 2," "The setting value may be 3," "The setting value may be 4," "The setting value may be 5." The current setting value is suggested depending on whether the output is "possibly a setting value of 6". Also, when outputting "Set value 1" as a sound from the speaker, the lamp provided on main body frame 4 is emitted once, and when outputting "Setting value 2", the lamp provided on main body frame 4 is emitted once. When the lamp is emitted twice at a predetermined interval to output "setting value may be 3", the lamp installed in the main body frame 4 is emitted three times at a predetermined interval and when outputting "setting value may be 4", the main body When the lamp provided on the frame 4 is made to emit light four times at predetermined intervals and "the setting value may be 5" is output, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is made to emit light five times at predetermined intervals and the "setting value may be 6" is output. When outputting, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is made to emit light the number of times according to the suggestion of the set value, such as making the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 emit light six times at predetermined intervals. In addition, for example, regarding "The setting value may be 6", it is possible to output it even when the current setting value is not 6, that is, even if it is any of 1 to 5. ” even if the current setting value is not 6, it may be false. In addition, in Suggestion Effect B, in addition to these, it also suggests that the current setting value is an "even number" such as 2, 4, or 6, or that it is an "odd number" such as 1, 3, or 5. Alternatively, it may be possible to suggest a "high setting" of 4 to 6.

In addition, with respect to suggestion performance B, it is possible to execute it regardless of whether or not it is within a variable performance such as a variable display of decorative symbols on the performance display device 1600, except for the execution period of suggestion performance A1 and suggestion performance A2. I have to. As shown in FIG. 167(A), when executing a variation pattern selected from variation pattern table A, since the execution of suggestion effect A1 or suggestion effect A2 is not set, such variation pattern is not executed. It is possible to execute the suggestion performance B within the variation time of the special symbol based on the variation time (the variation time of the decorative symbol). However, in this embodiment, if the suggestive effect B for which the execution condition was satisfied first is still being executed, the execution condition for a new suggestive effect B is not satisfied, and the repeated execution of the suggestive effect B is prohibited ( (restrictions). Specifically, during the execution of suggestion performance B, the handle touch sensor 192 detects the operation of the handle 111 and a detection signal is input to the payout control board 633, and the main control board indicates that the detection signal has been input. Even if the information is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the suggestion effect B is being executed and does not perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect B. It is prohibited (restricted) as follows.

Note that, as described above, the suggestion effect B of this embodiment is executed by combining the sound from the speaker and the light emission of the lamp provided on the main body frame 4, and is executed after the sound from the speaker ends. If the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 continues to emit light at predetermined intervals (for example, even if the voice "The setting value may be 6" has been output, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 continues to emit light at predetermined intervals). (When the processing remains) or when the sound from the speaker continues even after the lamp installed on the main body frame 4 has finished emitting light (for example, when the sound of "The setting value may be 1" has not finished outputting). This may occur when the process of emitting light from the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 has been completed. For this reason, the period for which it is determined that the suggestive effect B is in progress is associated with the longer period of the output period of the audio from the speaker and the light emission period of the lamp provided in the main body frame 4. . Thereby, as the target period for prohibiting the lottery during the suggestive performance B, repeated execution of the suggestive performance B is reliably prohibited (restricted).

Furthermore, even under the above-mentioned prohibition, if the interval between the first and second suggestive performances B is short, the preceding and succeeding suggestive performances B will be continuous, and for example, the body frame There is a concern that the light emitted from the lamps provided at 4 may be mixed and the player may misunderstand the suggested content. In this embodiment, in consideration of these points, a predetermined limited extension period (for example, 5 seconds) is generated after the execution of the suggestion effect B, regardless of which execution pattern the suggestion effect B is executed. It is prohibited (restricted) from holding a lottery as to whether or not to execute the suggestion effect B over a period that is the execution period of the suggestion effect B plus the restriction extension period. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the content of the suggestion due to the suggestion performance B executed earlier and the suggestion performance B executed later being executed in a mixed manner.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 167(B), when executing the variation pattern selected from variation pattern table B, the suggested Since execution of presentation A1 is set, suggestion presentation B is executed during the execution period of suggestion presentation A1 within the special symbol variation time (decorative pattern variation time) based on such a variation pattern. However, it is possible to execute suggestion effect B except during the execution period of suggestion effect A1.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 167(C), when executing the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table C, almost all of the variation time of the special symbol (the variation time of the decorative symbol) is used as the suggestion effect A2. Since the execution of the roulette effect is set, it is prohibited to execute the suggestion effect B within the variation time of the special symbol (the variation time of the decorative symbol) based on such a variation pattern.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 167(D), when the special symbol variation display based on the variation pattern (the variation display of the decorative symbol) is not performed, the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute suggestion performance B during a period in which such a variable display of special symbols (variable display of decorative symbols) is not performed.

As mentioned above, unlike suggestion presentation A1 and suggestion presentation A2, suggestion presentation B provides surprise to the player because the current set value is suddenly suggested when the handle 111 is operated. I can do it. In addition, during the execution period of suggestion performance A1 and suggestion performance A2, execution of suggestion performance B is prohibited, and by giving priority to the execution of suggestion performance A1 and suggestion performance A2 over suggestion performance B, suggestion performance A1 and It is possible to prevent the visual recognition of the suggestive performance A2 from being obstructed and to actively attract attention to the suggestive performance A1 and the suggestive performance A2. In this regard, it is preferable that the suggestion performance A1 and the suggestion performance A2 have higher reliability of suggestion than the suggestion performance B, such as by eliminating falsehoods like the suggestion performance B.

Furthermore, as described above, the suggestion effect B may not be executed even during a variable effect such as a variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600, except during the execution period of the suggestion effect A1 or A2. It makes it possible. In this regard, regarding suggestion effect B, since the current set value is suggested by the output from the lamp and speaker provided on the main body frame 4, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition of the variable effect from being obstructed. can. In addition, outside of the variable display such as the variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600, the variable display of special symbols (variable display of decorative symbols) is not performed, making it a boring time, but the handle 111 When the player operates the handle 111, there is a possibility that the suggestion performance B is suddenly executed and the current set value is suggested, so that the user can be motivated to operate the handle 111 and start the game.

In addition, in this example, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the handle 111 is operated after a predetermined condition such as closing the main body frame 4 is satisfied, , it is possible to execute suggestion effect B. However, if the operation of the handle 111 is continued before the predetermined condition is met and after the predetermined condition is met, the suggestion effect B may not be executed even after the predetermined condition is met. do not have. Therefore, in a case where the operation of the handle 111 is continued from before the predetermined condition is satisfied to after the predetermined condition is satisfied, in order to execute the suggestion effect B, it is necessary to first press the handle 111 after the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is necessary to take your hand off the handle 111 and operate the handle 111 again. In addition, when turning on the power of the Pachinko machine 1, not only when setting values are changed, but also when a confirmation display of the setting values is displayed, when the main control RAM is initialized, when the power is turned on normally (RWM The same applies to the case where the power is turned on without operating the clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a.

In addition, in this example, although it is possible to execute suggestion effect B when the handle 111 is operated, the suggestion of the current setting value is notified when executing suggestion effect B according to the player's arbitrary selection. It makes it possible not to. In other words, if the player selects not to notify the suggestion of the current setting value, then at the timing when suggestion effect B is executed, the current setting value will be notified by the output from the lamp and speaker provided in the main body frame 4. I try not to suggest settings. As a result, for players who do not need suggestions about the current setting values, by choosing not to be notified of such suggestions, players will not be misled by the suggestions about the current setting values, and will be able to win the lottery result. You can concentrate on directing what will happen or not. Note that, depending on the player's arbitrary selection, it may be configured such that only some of the outputs from the lamps and speakers provided on the main body frame 4 in the suggestion performance B are not notified. The notification may be made depending on the output from the lamp, but not depending on the output from the speaker. In addition, regarding the suggestion performance A1 and suggestion performance A2 that are executed during the fluctuating performance such as the fluctuating display of decorative symbols on the performance display device 1600, the current set value is suggested when executing the suggestion performance A1 and the suggestion performance A2. The player cannot optionally choose not to be notified.

Further, as described in detail above, after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, the warning notification can be extended and executed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. During the extended execution period of such a warning notification, when executing the suggestion effect B triggered by operating the handle 111, the output from the lamp and speaker provided on the main body frame 4 is The period may be configured to be different from other periods (after the end of the extended warning notification). For example, it may be configured such that only some of the outputs from the lamps and speakers provided on the main body frame 4 in suggestion effect B are not notified; for example, depending on the output from the lamps provided on the main body frame 4, However, the configuration may be such that the notification is not made depending on the output from the speaker. In this way, during the period when the warning notification is extended and executed, giving priority to the warning notification over Suggestion Performance B prevents the awareness of the warning notification from being hindered and prevents anyone other than the hall manager from engaging in fraudulent activity. It is possible to maintain a strengthened monitoring system to prevent such incidents.

In addition, in this example, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect B when the handle 111 is operated, but after changing the setting value when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the handle 111 is first operated. The suggestion effect B executed when the handle 111 is operated is configured to be different from the suggestion effect B executed when the handle 111 is operated for the second time or later. For example, for the suggestion performance B that is executed when the handle 111 is operated for the first time after changing the setting value when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the suggestion performance B that is executed when the handle 111 is operated for the first time may be made more suggestive than from the second time onwards, such as by reducing the falseness. The system is configured to increase reliability. Further, when the handle 111 is operated, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect B with a predetermined probability, but the more time passes (the more the number of fluctuations of the special symbol increases), the more it may be possible. , the probability of executing the suggestion effect B is made low, so that it becomes difficult to execute the suggestion effect B even if the handle 111 is operated. In this regard, setting values are often changed by the hall manager when turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1 before the hall opens, so it is best to start playing by operating the handle 111 immediately after the hall opens. It is possible to create a desire to do so. In addition, when turning on the power of the Pachinko machine 1, not only when setting values are changed, but also when a confirmation display of the setting values is displayed, when the main control RAM is initialized, when the power is turned on normally (RWM The same applies to the case where the power is turned on without operating the clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a.

Further, in this example, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect B when the handle 111 is operated, but instead of operating the handle 111, the suggestion effect B is executed when the production operation section 160 is operated. It may also be configured to allow this. Furthermore, when the performance operation section 160 is used as a trigger for executing the suggestion performance B, for example, the performance operation section 160 is also used as a trigger for executing the suggestion performance A1 or the suggestion performance A2, and the performance operation section 160 is operated. In some cases, the system may be configured to start the execution of the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 while allowing the suggestion effect B to be executed. In addition, instead of operating the handle 111, the trigger for executing the suggestion effect B is to change the setting value when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after displaying a confirmation display of the setting value, and then After initializing the RAM and turning on the power normally, the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (the entry port that is involved in the lottery to determine whether or not the ball is a hit) is first entered. When a ball enters a ball, when a ball enters a ball entry hole that does not participate in the lottery to determine whether or not it is a hit, such as the general winning hole 2001, or when a specific date and time is reached using a real-time clock IC, etc. It's okay. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to generate a desire to obtain information regarding the set value by the suggestion effect B at a timing when the suggestion effect B may be executed.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 111 has the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 of FIG. A control board 1310 is provided. This main control board 1310 has a test connector 1310k shown in FIG. 115 that can be electrically connected to a test harness as wiring for extracting an output signal from the main control MPU 1310a and transmitting it to a test device that tests the pachinko machine 1. Now you can prepare.

When the pachinko machine 1 is tested by a test device, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, whereas the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y, which is the back surface side of the main control board 1310.

In this way, since the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing institution, and when the pachinko machine 1 is Even when the main control board 1310 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped, the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted will not be formed as an empty area on the front side of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of the main control board 1310 can be increased.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310' in FIG. 113(a) as a game control board that can control the progress of the game. . These multiple electronic components include a ZIP type main control MPU (denoted as part number "MIC1" in the figure) included in the lead type in Figure 113(a) as a lead type electronic component, and a surface mount type electronic component. The electronic components include an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 shown in FIG. 113(a), and are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'.

The main control board 1310' includes a parts list area 1310xb' shown in FIG. 113(a) as an information area. This parts list area 1310xb' can display information corresponding to identifiers of surface-mounted electronic parts. Information written in the parts list area 1310xb' may include the name of a manufacturer of surface-mounted electronic components (including abbreviations and symbols), the product number of surface-mounted electronic components, and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113(a), the parts list area 1310xb' contains a parts list of electronic components in which part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are arranged. is printed in white (or black) using silk screen printing. The size of the part number and product number is larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the component placement area 1310xa'. printed in white (or black). A delimiter ":" is placed between the part number and the product number (number published in the catalog), so that the part number and product number (number published in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . This delimiter allows the part number and the product number (number published in the catalog) to be distinguished and identified. In addition, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (number published in the catalog).

In this way, even if the display form of the identifier attached to the surface mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310' is difficult to visually recognize, the information corresponding to this identifier (manufacturer name, product number, etc.) ) is displayed in a parts list area 1310xb' provided in the main control board 1310'. Therefore, the identifier of the surface-mounted electronic component can be reliably visually recognized.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 in FIG. 111 as a game control board that can control the progress of the game, and The control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 in FIG. 115 as a sealed board box having sealing means.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z formed in the transparent cover body 1301 in FIG. It is being

As described above, since the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z having a smaller shape than the surface mount type electronic components, the surface mount type electronic components may be removed by some unauthorized means. Even if an attempt is made to remove the electronic component from the main control board 1310 and replace it with an unauthorized electronic component, the surface mount type electronic component cannot be taken out from the ventilation hole 1301z, which is a plurality of holes provided in the main control board box 1320. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a surface mount type electronic component from being replaced with an unauthorized electronic component.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71 is provided as a winning probability control circuit, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 is provided as a setting device. ing. The main control MPU 1310a can set multiple types of winning probabilities, and the setting key switch 1311a can set multiple types of winning probabilities by external operation.

Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a uses various tables used in various lottery determinations that are associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the proportion of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot symbol A jackpot symbol determination table that specifies the percentage of the decision value for determination, a small hit determination table that specifies the percentage of the small win decision value that indicates winning the small hit, and a percentage of the decision value for the determination of the small win symbol. (such as a small winning symbol determination table, a normal time transition determination table that defines the ratio of determination values for transition from probability change to normal time, etc.), and is used in various distribution rates that are associated with set values. Various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. The setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, and is capable of switching setting values of the pachinko machine 1. The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF as the initial position at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion hole formed in the (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion hole is along the vertical direction). The setting key switch 1311a can now be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. ing.

The main control MPU 1310a and the setting key switch 1311a are mounted on different boards and electrically connected to each other.

In this way, by mounting the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 on different boards, the force associated with external operation on the setting key switch 1311a is applied to the setting key switch 1311a. 1311a is mounted, to the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted. This can contribute to preventing the main control board 1310 from being bent. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing deflection of the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 on which the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 71 is mounted as a winning probability control circuit is a surface-mounted component that is an SMD type electronic component. The setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 is a lead-type electronic component, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 is mounted as a setting device. This is an insertion component mounting board on which only insertion components can be mounted. In this way, the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted is a surface mount component mounting board on which surface mount components (SMD type) can be mounted, and the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the main control board 1310. The board 1311 can be an insertion component mounting board on which only insertion components (SMD type) can be mounted. As a result, the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern at the solder part where the insertion mounted component (lead type) is soldered to the solder surface of the board can be reduced compared to surface mount components (SMD type). This makes it possible to make the solder part more resistant to peeling.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 71 as a board on which surface mount components can be mounted and the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 as an insertion mounting component mounting board are transparent boards. Each is housed in a transparent main control board box 1320 in FIG. 115 as a case. The transparent main control board box 1320 is sealed by a caulking portion 1303 in FIG. 115 using its exterior as a sealing device. The connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71 is provided as a connector electrically connected to the main control MPU 1310a in FIG. 71 as a winning probability control circuit on the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71 as a board on which surface mount components can be mounted. In addition, a connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 is provided as a connector electrically connected to the setting key switch 1311a in FIG. 71 as a setting device on the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 as an insertion mounting component mounting board. . Connector MSCN of main control board 1310 and connector SMCN of setting change board 1311 are electrically connected. In this way, the main control board 1310, which is a board on which surface-mounted components can be mounted, and the setting change board 1311, which is an insertion-mounted component-mounted board, can be housed in the transparent main control board box 1320 sealed by the caulking part 1303. Therefore, it is possible to increase the deterrent power against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310, which is a board on which surface-mounted components can be mounted, and the setting change board 1311, which is an insertion-mounted component-mounted board.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 is provided as a connector on the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as a board on which surface mount components can be mounted, and the insertion mounting component The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 as a connector provided on the setting change board 1311 in FIG. has been done. Specifically, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 are electrically connected by a special connector having a floating mechanism. A special connector equipped with this floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug, and when the socket is inserted into the plug and pushed in, the socket and the plug fit together. By moving within a predetermined distance range in a direction perpendicular to the direction of insertion and pushing (for example, up and down), it is possible to absorb errors that occur when pushing in (misalignment of the fitting axis).

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 71 is provided as a game control board, and the setting change board 1311 shown in FIG. 71 is provided as a setting change board. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. The setting change board 1311 is provided separately from the main control board 1310, is electrically connected to the main control board 1310, and is capable of changing setting values that set a probability that is advantageous to the player. A setting key switch 1311a shown in FIG. 71 is provided as a lead type electronic component.

The lead-type setting key switch 1311a is used to insert or remove a setting key that allows setting values to be changed. As the setting key is inserted into and removed from the lead-type setting key switch 1311a, the setting change board 1311 may flex, but the main control board 1310 is prevented from flexing.

In this way, the lead-type setting key switch 1311a is provided on the setting change board 1311 that is separate from the main control board 1310, so that the setting key switch 1311a that can change the setting value can be inserted or removed ( Even if the setting change board 1311 is bent due to operation), the main control board 1310 is not bent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being bent due to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 of FIG. 2 so as to be freely openable and closable, and the game board 5 of FIG. It has a front frame composed of This pachinko machine 1 further includes a setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 70 as a setting device. The setting key switch 1311a allows setting of multiple types of winning probabilities by external operation. Specifically, the setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, and can switch setting values of the pachinko machine 1, etc. At a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port is along the vertical direction), the setting key switch is set as the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. is now possible.

The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5.

Specifically, the outer frame 2 has an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 that connect the main body frame upper hinge part 510 and the main body frame lower hinge part 520 of the main body frame 4 that constitute the front frame. is rotatably supported on the same axis so that the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward centering on the left side in front view. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction on which the assembly 52 is arranged is the shaft support side (closing side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 opposite to this in the vertical direction as seen from the front is the main body. This is the open side of frame 4. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame.

In this way, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 on the rear surface of the game board 5. If an attempt is made to make any unauthorized modification to the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300, the front frame must be opened, and the unauthorized act will be carried out in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Become a conspicuous presence. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing fraudulent acts.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the rear side of the game board 5 is a cover body that is pivotably supported on the open side opposite to the pivot side of the front frame, as shown in FIG. A setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is covered by the back cover 640 and is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5. The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated unless the back cover 640 is opened after opening the main control unit 1300. In this way, the rear side of the game board 5 is covered by the back cover 640 that is pivotably supported on the open side opposite to the pivot side of the front frame so as to be openable and closable. The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5 and is covered by the back cover 640. It is possible to make it impossible to operate the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 unless it is opened.

Specifically, the outer frame 2 is configured such that the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 connect the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame 4 that constitute the front frame. is rotatably supported on the same axis so that the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward centering on the left side in front view. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction on which the assembly 52 is arranged is the pivot side (closing side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction opposite to this is the main body. This is the open side of frame 4. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 forming the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4 forming the front frame. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. Further, a back cover 640 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame so as to be openable and closable covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4. It is something. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640. The right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the vertically extending rear end of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side Since it is attached to the back cover attachment part 551i of the base 551 and the back cover attachment part 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600, the right side in front view is the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640. , the left side in front view, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the back cover 640. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the open side of the back cover. Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion port for inserting a setting key, and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder is covered by the back cover 640. In order to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to open the back cover 640. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 by a wide angle (approximately 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2.

As a result, the back cover 640 must be opened so that the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated. The frame must be opened. Therefore, if any unauthorized modification is attempted to the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300, the front frame must be opened so that the back cover 640 can be opened. The fraudulent act can be made conspicuous in the game hall where the machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 112(a) is provided as a game control board for controlling the progress of the game. On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, there is a capacitor MC30 shown in FIG. 112(a) as an inserted mounting component (lead type electronic component), and a capacitor MC30 shown in FIG. The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 of a) can be mounted, and the area where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted is set as a non-circuit forming area. It is configured so that no wiring patterns or through holes for transmitting control signals are arranged in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the electronic component (type of electronic component).

In this way, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC30, which is an insertion mounting component, and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface mount component, can be mounted together. The area where the component Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted can be configured as a circuit-free area where no circuits such as wiring patterns or through holes are formed. As a result, even if the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface-mounted component, is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the circuit to the Schmitt-trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface-mounted component, is connected to the surface-mounted component except for the area where no circuit is formed. Since it is formed as a surface-mounted component, the circuit to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface-mounted component, can be visually observed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts against surface mount components.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, games can be played, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. After the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 71 is provided as a setting change means that can change the setting value for setting a probability that is advantageous to the player. The RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is provided separately from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. This pachinko machine 1 further includes a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z as a guide means for guiding information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633.

In this way, information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is guided, so the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are separated. Even if it is provided on the body, the person who operates the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 does not have to be confused about the operation procedure. By separately providing the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, security can be improved. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played using a game ball as a game medium, and a setting control section related to preparation settings for starting a game, A main control board 1310 in FIG. 71, a setting change board 1311, and a payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 are provided as game control means having a progress control unit related to progress control. The setting control unit includes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3, and the main control side power supply in FIG. The process includes the determination in step S14 and the process in step S16A in the input process. The progress control unit is composed of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 71, the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 120, etc. . As game control means, the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311, and the payout control board 633 include the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 in FIGS. It consists of a plurality of electronic components such as the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. Electronic components related to setting control such as the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are provided separately on a plurality of boards such as the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 and the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3.

In this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z, which are electronic components related to setting control, are provided separately on multiple boards such as the setting change board 1311 and the payout control board 633, so crime prevention is improved. can be increased. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, games can be played using game balls as game media, and the game control section shown in FIG. 71 main control boards 1310 are provided. The control of the game is comprised of the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 118, the main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. 120, and the like. Game preparation control includes the determination in step S14 and the processing in step S16A in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 118 as a first game preparation control, and step S216 in the setting change process in FIG. 121 as a second game preparation control. and the processing of step S218. The first game preparation control is performed using the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 shown in FIG. When the power is restored, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder is inserted into the setting key cylinder. As a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the setting key switch 1311a clockwise by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation, the RWM clear button is also pressed. If the condition is that the push operation section 633z is operated and an operation signal is input, then the player's operation is further performed based on the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3. It is possible to create a setting change state in which a setting value that is set with a probability that is advantageous to the user can be changed. The second game preparation control is to switch to any one of a plurality of set values based on the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 as a second operation section following the first game preparation control. It is something that can be done. The RWM clear button 633z is arranged on a payout control board 633 that is a different board from the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged.

In this way, crime prevention can be improved by arranging the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 on different boards. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged and the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged are separate board cases. 115 and the payout control board box 632 in FIG. Security can be further improved by separating the payout control board box 632 in which the payout control board 633 in which the button 633z is arranged is housed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 115 and the payout control board box 632 in FIG. In order to modify the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 housed in the board box 1320, and the payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632, it is necessary to destroy this caulked part, and there is no trace of the modification. can be left behind.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the back side of the game board 5 in FIG. 70 and controls the progress of the game, and the setting key switch 1311a is The setting change board 1311 to be arranged is housed in the main control board box 1320 as a caulked case together with the main control board 1310, and the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z of FIG. 3 is arranged is to which the game board 5 is attached. It is placed on the main body frame 4 in FIG. 4 as the frame side and controls the payout, and is housed in the payout control board box 632 as a crimped case, so the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged is The payout control board 633, on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged, can be used as a crimping case to control payout. Since it is possible to arrange the setting key switch 1311a on the game board 5 side and the RWM clear button 633z on the main body frame 4 side as a frame side, the setting key switch 1311a can be placed on the main body frame 4 side as a frame side while housed in the board box 632. This allows the security of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z to be further improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 4 is provided on the front side as an openable/closeable door, and is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 70 as a board on which electronic components are mounted. The first operation (when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2) is performed by operating the main control board 1310 that is displayed and the first key (a regular metal key owned by an employee such as a clerk at a game hall). , when opening the door frame 3 from the main body frame 3), the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 in FIG. 1 and the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 of the main body frame 4 in FIG. And, by operating a second key (setting key) that is different from the first key, a second operation (when changing a setting value, when checking the current setting value) can be performed. A setting key mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 in FIG. A switch 1311a is provided. The setting key switch 1311a is a switch that allows setting of multiple types of winning probabilities (when changing the setting value), and a switch that allows checking of the current setting value (when changing the setting value). (when checking the current setting values). The cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is provided on the front side of the door frame 3, and the housing of the cylinder lock 127 is electrically connected to the ground side. The setting key switch 1311a is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3, and the casing of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground side and is insulated.

Specifically, the metal cylindrical cylinder body, which is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3, is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side or the ground side, which is N (neutral) of 24 VAC. has been done. In addition, by forming the foil-cut areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 in the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311, the metal cylindrical shape ( a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 having a long elongated hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 into which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of a rectangular (or rectangular) housing can be inserted; The SLH2 can be electrically insulated from the solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311. Therefore, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a is connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311. It is electrically isolated from ground (ground).

In this way, the metal cylindrical cylinder body, which is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 provided on the front side of the door frame 3, is electrically connected to the ground side. Even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) enters the circuit, this noise (electromagnetic wave noise) can be released to the ground side to prevent fluctuations in the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, and , the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the rear side of the door frame 3 is not electrically connected to the ground side and is insulated. Even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invades a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is attenuated by the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself. This makes it possible to prevent fluctuations in the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

In addition, the metal cylindrical cylinder body that is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or the N (neutral) voltage of AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1. While electrically connected to the ground side, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing that is the casing of the setting key switch 1311a supplies the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. It is insulated and not electrically connected to the ground side, which is N (neutral) of 24 VAC. As a result, the metal cylindrical cylinder body is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or the ground side which is N (neutral) of the AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing is connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and the ground side which is N (neutral) of the AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1. It can be in a state where it is not electrically connected and is insulated.

In addition, after the door frame 3 is opened by the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 (that is, the front frame composed of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is ), it is now possible to set multiple types of winning probabilities using the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 housed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. (when changing the setting value), and it is now possible to check the current setting value (when checking the current setting value). As a result, after the door frame 3 is opened by the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 (that is, the front frame composed of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is 2), if the setting key switch 1311a is accessed to operate the setting key switch 1311a, the setting value can be set (when changing the setting value) or the setting value can be confirmed (if the setting value is not set). (when checking the current setting values), it is possible to improve the security of the setting key switch 1311a.

[16. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 630 included in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 36 will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 175. FIG. 171 is a circuit diagram illustrating the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 172 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 173 is a view taken in the direction of arrow B in FIG. 172, and FIG. 174 is a circuit diagram of the power supply board. FIG. 175 is a silk-screen printing (part 1) of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board, and FIG. 175 is a silk-screen printing (part 2) of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board. Here, we will first explain the circuit configuration of the power supply board, and then explain how to identify electronic components of the same shape and how to check for fuse blowouts.

As mentioned above, the island equipment of the gaming hall has a transformer (not shown) that steps down the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100V to the gaming machine power supply voltage of AC 24V. When a plug of a power supply wiring (not shown) is inserted into a power outlet of 24V AC, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island equipment of the game hall, 24V AC is supplied to the power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as +35V DC, +12V DC, and +5V DC) from AC24V supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and supplies them to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 from the power supply board 630. are doing.

[16-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 171, the circuit of the power supply board 630 mainly includes a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply generation circuit 630f, and a power supply breakdown circuit 630g. has been done.

AC 24V from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via power wiring (not shown). When AC24V from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, transparent glass tubes with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm) are connected. (The support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and the power is input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via a Class B fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). Specifically, a 24V AC line 1 (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V1") is input to the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630a, and a 24V AC line 2 is input to the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V2") is input. Output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b.

When an employee such as a clerk at the game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically connected, and AC24V1 is sent to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise suppression circuit 630b. When the supply starts, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 become electrically connected, and the AC 24V2 starts being supplied to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when an employee such as a clerk in the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically disconnected, and the AC24V1 is applied to various circuits on the power supply board 630. The supply is cut off, and the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically disconnected, and the supply of AC 24V2 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 is cut off. Thereby, the power to the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off by turning off the power switch 630a.

Please note that the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall remains in the ON state, and the staff such as the game hall clerk turns on the breaker of the game hall to turn on the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. There are cases where the power is turned on all at once, and there are cases where the power to the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breakers of the game hall.

[16-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is a circuit for countermeasures against common mode noise, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, which is a circuit for countermeasures against normal mode noise, and a choke coil L1. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and a choke coil L1.

The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacity and are used to remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers), and have the same varistor voltage. Varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by capacitors C1 and C2.

One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. electrically connected. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the earth connection terminal DCN5 as a frame ground FG2. This earth connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the earth terminal ECN5 of the frame earth board 559 via a power supply earth wire (not shown).

The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. Capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. Varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorption element (surge absorber) that removes noise that cannot be removed by capacitor C3.

One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a.

AC24V1 outputted from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also inputted as AC24VA to the power line connector DCN2, The AC 24V2 outputted from the output terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input as AC24V to the power line connector DCN2. . The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise disturbances. The power line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via a power line for an interface board (not shown), an interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 37, and a power line for a CR unit (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown), and supplies 24VAC and 24V to the CR unit (not shown).

The AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[16-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as "FETs") Q1 and Q2, and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and Zener diodes.

The AC24V1 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is input directly to the drain terminal of FETQ2 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The AC 24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is input directly to the drain terminal of FETQ1 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of FETQ1 and Q2 are respectively input to the CAI terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

The AC24V1 and AC24V2, whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are rectified into direct current by switching by FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and are then connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2. 2 and are output respectively. The types of packages of FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1, and Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type, and are fixed to heat sink fin HS1 (see FIG. 172). ing. The heat dissipation fin HS1 is soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630, thereby being grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630.

As described above, the AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c, and are also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and are input to the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. are outputted from the respective terminals and inputted to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

The rectified direct currents output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[16-1-3. Power factor correction circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630d includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as "FETs") Q3 and Q4, and a peripheral circuit 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and inductors.

The DC whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and is also directly input to the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 without going through the peripheral circuit 630da. are input respectively. A gate signal for the power factor correction circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit is input to the gate terminals of FETQ3 and Q4 via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminal and drain terminal of FETQ3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of power supply board 630 via peripheral circuit 630da.

The DC whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is suppressed from the generation of harmonics by switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da, and the power factor is improved, and the DC current is sent to the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10. are output from each. The package types of FETQ3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D9, D10 are the same as the package types of FETQ1, Q2 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 (TO-220F mentioned above), and the heat dissipation is It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 172). The radiation fin HS2 is arranged parallel to and spaced apart from the radiation fin HS1 by a predetermined distance, and is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630. There is.

The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[16-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e includes a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminals of these plurality of electrolytic capacitors are respectively grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and the positive terminals are respectively inputted with direct current whose power factor has been improved by a power factor correction circuit 630d. The smoothing circuit 630e smoothes (smoothes) the pulsating current from the DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. In terms of form, it has the same shape as fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and is connected through a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (the support terminals at both ends are made of metal, Class B fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Act). Then, it is supplied as DC +35V from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[16-1-5. Power supply generation circuit]
When the DC from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power generation circuit 630f generates +12V DC and +5V DC from the input DC, respectively. The power supply generation circuit 630f outputs the created DC +12V from the +12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the created DC +5V from the +5V terminal to supply the created DC +5V from the power supply board 630 to the pachinko machine. 1 to each board inside.

The power supply generation circuit 630f controls switching by FETQ3, Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da in the power factor correction circuit 630d by controlling output of a power factor correction gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor correction circuit 630d. to suppress the generation of harmonics.

In the power generation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are inputted to the AC-DET terminal via diodes D5 and D6. The power generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, and determines whether or not to output a power failure circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power failure circuit 630g.

The plug of the power supply wiring (not shown) was not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island equipment of the gaming hall, and was mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. When inserted, a power supply voltage higher than DC +35V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

The power supply generation circuit 630f is configured to set the magnitude of the power supply voltage to a predetermined value (threshold value: in this embodiment) based on the power supply voltage whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 that is input to the AC-DET terminal. (in this case, it is set to about 50V), a power supply breakdown circuit gate signal can be output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g.

When the power generation circuit 630f outputs a power supply destruction circuit gate signal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the power supply destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters the short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g enters the short mode, when the power switch 630a is in the ON state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the power supply is destroyed. By flowing all at once toward the CGND terminal of the creation circuit 630f, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, causing one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to melt.

A GND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630.

[16-1-6. Power supply breakdown circuit]
The power supply breakdown circuit 630g includes an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of FETQ5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 2 of Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of FETQ5 is electrically connected to one end of resistor 25, and the other end of resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of power generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of resistor R24, one end of capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of power generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor R25, one end of which is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5, and the other end of the resistor R25, which is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of resistor R25, the other end of resistor R24 and the other end of capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of.

In the power supply breakdown circuit 630g, when a gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of FETQ5 via the resistor R25, FETQ5 is activated and the source terminal is connected from the drain terminal of FETQ5. A large current flows toward the FETQ5 (overcurrent flows between the drain and source terminals of FETQ5), which destroys the FETQ5 and maintains the short mode state in which the drain and source terminals of the FETQ5 are electrically connected. be done. Although the package type of FETQ5 is the same as that of FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 (TO-220F mentioned above), FETQ1 , Q2, Q3, Q4, and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, they are arranged at positions where they are not in contact with the radiation fins HS1, HS2. Specifically, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are fixed to radiation fins HS1, HS2, which are arranged in parallel with a predetermined distance apart, respectively. , whereas the back sides of the packages of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 fixed to the radiation fins HS1, HS2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are parallel to each other, The FETQ5 is arranged between the radiation fins HS1 and HS2, and the back side of the package of the FETQ5 includes the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2, and the Schottky barrier diode D1, The packages D2, D9, and D10 have a mutually perpendicular positional relationship with respect to the back surface, and are not fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 at all (see FIGS. 172 and 173). The purpose of this is to absorb the heat and cool it through the radiation fins HS1, HS2 so that the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are not destroyed due to heat generation. On the other hand, FETQ5 is short-circuited due to heat generation when FETQ5 is activated and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of FETQ5 (overcurrent occurs between the drain terminal and source terminal of FETQ5). This is because it contributes to being destroyed in time.

In other words, the power wiring plug was not inserted into a 24V AC power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island equipment of the game hall, and was mistakenly inserted into a 100V AC power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the 24V AC power supply voltage for gaming machines. When inserted, the power supply generation circuit 630f determines that the magnitude of this power supply voltage is a predetermined value (threshold value) based on the power supply voltage whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 that is input to the AC-DET terminal. : In this embodiment, it is set to about 50V.), a gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit is output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g, and the FET Q5 is controlled to self-destruct. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and source terminal of FET Q5 are electrically connected is maintained, and since the source terminal of FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f, the power switch 630a is When the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are in the ON state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 flows through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETQ5 in the short mode state in the power supply destruction circuit 630g to the power generation circuit 630f. By flowing all at once toward the CGND terminal, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, causing one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to melt, destroying only the power supply board 630, and causing the power wiring plug to become unusable. Even if the machine is mistakenly plugged into a power outlet with a power supply voltage of AC100V, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply board 630 can be reliably prevented from being destroyed.

Furthermore, the plug of the power cord was not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island equipment of the gaming hall, and was mistakenly inserted into an AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. When it was inserted and the power supply destruction circuit 630g FET Q5 was destroyed, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 were replaced and the power cord plug was inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machines in the island equipment of the game hall. However, since FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, power switch 630a, noise suppression circuit 630b, rectifier circuit 630c, and power supply destruction circuit 630g are A large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f through FETQ5, which is in the short mode state, and a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, causing one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to close. It will melt again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is not destroyed, the plug of the power cord cannot be connected to the gaming machine of the pachinko island facility. Even if the player is plugged into a power outlet with AC 24V, which is the standard power supply voltage, the game cannot be started.

[16-2. Method for identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 include FETs Q1, Q2 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, and FETs Q3, Q4 and Schottky of the power factor correction circuit 630d. The package types of the barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FET Q5 of the power supply breakdown circuit 630g are the same type (TO-220F), and the shapes of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are also the same (diameter: 5 mm, length). It is a 20 mm transparent glass tube (the support terminals at both ends are made of metal).

Although FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different types of electronic components, FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic components that will not be destroyed, and FETQ5 is the only electronic component that will be destroyed. Therefore, in this embodiment, among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630, only one of the electronic components to be destroyed is In order to easily identify the components, silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has different characteristics from other types.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 174(a), FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, which are electronic components that cannot be destroyed, have white outlines. Lines and thick white lines indicating the orientation of electronic components are silk-printed for Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, and for FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4. TSLK5 to TSLK8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. The thick white line is the side fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 172, it is necessary to arrange FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 adjacent to each other in order to fix them to the heat sinks HS1, HS2. It is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 so that the silk-printed white outline on which HS2 is arranged and the white thick line portions of the silk-printed TSLK1 to TSLK8 are connected to each other.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 174(b), FETQ5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, has a white outline and multiple white diagonal lines arranged at equal intervals within this outline ad1 and a thick white line indicating the direction in which the electronic components are arranged are printed as silk-screen printing, and silk-screen printing TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. In other words, the white diagonal line ad1 is displayed as a characteristic pattern.

In this way, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape, the silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 By visually observing the white diagonal line ad1, which is expressed as a characteristic pattern, among TSLK1 to TSLK9, it is possible to determine which electronic component among different types of electronic components having the same shape is focused compared to other electronic components. It is now possible to identify which electronic components are used. With this, it is possible to extremely easily identify which electronic component is the only electronic component to be destroyed among different types of electronic components having the same shape.

In addition, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member such as a clerk at a game hall to use FETQ5 over the phone, silk-printed TSLK9 having a white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern is used. By instructing to search for FETQ5, the staff such as the clerk at the game hall can accurately grasp the location of FETQ5, which facilitates communication between the person in charge at the service center and the staff such as the clerk at the game hall. Become.

As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member such as a clerk at a game hall to use FETQ5 over the phone, the person in charge, such as a staff member at the game hall, follows the instructions of the person in charge at the service center. Furthermore, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, the FETQ5 of interest can be specified. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the noteworthy FET Q5 can be identified from the other electronic components FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10.

In the above example, FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape, and FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape. Among barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, a characteristic pattern is silk-printed only within the outline of FETQ5, and the outlines of FETQ1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are printed. The inside is shown without silk printing, but the only electronic component that will be destroyed, FETQ5, is shown by the way it is placed. In other words, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are fixed to the radiation fins HS1, HS2, which are arranged in parallel with a predetermined distance apart, so the radiation fins The back side of the package is positioned parallel to HS1 and HS2. On the other hand, the back side of the package of FETQ5 is mutually connected to the back side of the package of FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 fixed to radiation fins HS1, HS2 and the package of Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10. The positional relationship is perpendicular to . In this way, even if FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape, FETQ5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, is different from FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are arranged at right angles to each other, which is the only arrangement method that is perpendicular to them. It is possible to identify whether it is an electronic component that requires attention by comparing it with other components. This makes it possible to extremely easily identify which electronic component is the only electronic component to be destroyed among different types of electronic components having the same shape. In addition, FETQ5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, is arranged at right angles to FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10. Even if Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape, the person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 may ask an attendant such as a clerk at the game hall. When instructing FET Q5 over the phone, by instructing to look for the only package that is placed at right angles, staff such as game hall clerks can accurately grasp the location of FET Q5, so the service center This makes it easier to communicate between the person in charge at the game hall and the clerk at the game hall. As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member such as a clerk at a game hall to use FETQ5 over the phone, the person in charge, such as a staff member at the game hall, follows the instructions of the person in charge at the service center. Furthermore, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, the FETQ5 of interest can be specified. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the noteworthy FET Q5 can be identified from the other electronic components FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10.

In the above example, among FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5, which are electronic components having the same shape, a characteristic pattern is silk-printed only within the outline of FETQ5, and FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky Barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are shown without silk printing inside their outlines, but FETQ5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, is shown due to the placement method. Therefore, for example, another method of indicating a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components having the same shape by a placement method will be described. FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating the arrangement method of a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components having the same shape. For example, as shown in FIG. 176, a specific method for arranging electronic components is as follows: , TQ1 is arranged with respect to the power supply board 630 having a rectangular shape so that the heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (the rear surface of TQ1) is parallel to the top and bottom direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, TQ2 is placed on the right side of this TQ1 so that the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ2) of TQ2 is parallel to the top and bottom direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and on the right side of this TQ2, TQ3 is placed. Rotate the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ3) by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) counterclockwise with respect to the left-right straight line of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and then rotate TQ3. Place diagonally. The heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (the rear surface of TQ1) and the heat sink mounting surface of TQ2 (the rear surface of TQ2) are arranged parallel to each other. In addition, when the part numbers of FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are silk-printed, they are printed along the respective heat sink mounting surfaces of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 (the rear surface of TQ1, the rear surface of TQ2, and the rear surface of TQ3). The part number for TQ1 may be placed near each of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 (for example, the part number for TQ1 may be placed by rotating the part number for TQ1 by 90 degrees counterclockwise along the heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (the rear surface of TQ1). The part number of TQ2 is arranged near TQ1 in the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and the part number of TQ2 is reversed along the heat sink mounting surface of TQ2 (the rear surface of TQ2). It is rotated 90 degrees clockwise and placed near TQ2 facing up and down on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and the part number of TQ3 is placed along the heat sink mounting surface of TQ3 (the rear surface of TQ3). Rotate the part number of TQ3 counterclockwise by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees), and rotate the part number counterclockwise at a predetermined angle with respect to the straight line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. (TQ1, TQ2, TQ3 may be arranged near each of TQ1, TQ2, TQ3 in the same direction (TQ1, TQ2, TQ3). The part numbers of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are all in the same direction, without rotating them counterclockwise at all. Alternatively, the part numbers TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 may be rotated counterclockwise by 90, and TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 may be placed in the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. ). In this way, even if the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are electronic components having the same shape, since TQ3 is arranged diagonally with respect to TQ1 and TQ2, it is difficult to By selecting electronic components, it is possible to identify which electronic component is the electronic component that should be watched more closely than other electronic components among the same type of electronic components having the same shape. This makes it possible to extremely easily identify which electronic component is a specific electronic component among electronic components of the same type having the same shape. In addition, since TQ3 is arranged diagonally with respect to TQ1 and TQ2, by making this diagonally arranged TQ3 a specific electronic component, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can When instructing a hall clerk or other staff to locate the FET TQ3 over the phone, you can instruct them to look for an FET that is placed diagonally, so that the game hall clerk or other staff member can easily find the position of the FET TQ3. Since the information can be accurately grasped, communication between the person in charge at the service center and the staff such as the clerk at the game hall becomes easier. As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a person in charge of the FET, such as TQ3, to a person in charge, such as a clerk at a game hall, over the phone, the person in charge, such as a person in charge of the game hall, calls the person in charge at the service center. According to the instructions, it is possible to specify TQ3, which is a noteworthy FET, among a plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, TQ3, which is a noteworthy FET, can be identified from TQ1 and TQ2, which are FETs of other electronic components. Note that for FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, the white outline and thick white line shown in FIG. 174(a) are printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 as silk printing. For TQ1 and TQ2, which are FETs, the white outline shown in FIG. For TQ3, there is a white outline line shown in FIG. The thick line may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 as silk printing.

Furthermore, for TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, which are FETs, the white outline shown in FIG. A thick white line indicating the placement direction may be printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 as silk printing. The white diagonal line ad1 shown in FIG. 174(b) is a straight line tilted downward at 45 degrees to the right, so that the heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (the rear surface of TQ1) is the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 at 630x. TQ1 is arranged so that it is parallel to the vertical direction of Arrange TQ2 so that the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ3) of TQ3 is on the right side of TQ2, facing counterclockwise with respect to the left-right straight line of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. When TQ3 is placed diagonally by rotating it by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees), the white diagonal line ad1 silk-printed with respect to TQ1 becomes a straight line tilted upward to the right by 45 degrees, and with respect to TQ2. The white diagonal line ad1 silk-printed on TQ3 becomes a straight line tilted upward at 45 degrees to the right, and the white diagonal line ad1 silk-printed on TQ3 becomes a straight line (horizontal line) in the left-right direction. As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member such as a clerk at a game hall to use the FET TQ3 over the phone, the staff member such as a game hall clerk will Please find the electronic component whose white diagonal line is a straight line (horizontal line) in the left and right direction.''As instructed by the service center staff, we found the most notable FET among the multiple electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. It is now possible to specify a certain TQ3. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, TQ3, which is a noteworthy FET, can be identified from TQ1 and TQ2, which are FETs of other electronic components.

Furthermore, for TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, which are FETs, the white outline shown in FIG. If the thick white line indicating the placement direction is printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 as a silk screen, if the heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (the rear surface of TQ1) is TQ1 is arranged parallel to the top and bottom of the surface (mounting surface) 630x, and the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ2) of TQ2 is on the right side of this TQ1. TQ2 is arranged parallel to the vertical direction, and the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ3) of TQ3 is placed on the right side of TQ2 parallel to the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 along the vertical direction. In other words, when FETs TQ1, TQ2, and Tq3 are arranged parallel to each other along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, Make sure that the white diagonal lines ad1 that are silk-printed are both straight lines tilted upward to the right by 45 degrees, and that the white diagonal lines ad1 that are silk-printed for TQ3 are straight lines (horizontal lines) in the left-right direction. It's fine. Even if electronic components of the same type and having the same shape are arranged parallel to each other, a person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can contact an employee such as a clerk at the game hall over the phone to find out the FET. When instructing a certain TQ3, a staff member such as a clerk at an amusement hall should ask the person in charge at the service center, ``Please find an electronic component whose silk-printed white diagonal line is a straight line (horizontal line) in the left and right direction.'' According to the instructions, it is now possible to specify TQ3, which is the FET of interest, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. Therefore, even if electronic components of the same type and having the same shape are arranged in parallel to each other, among the plurality of electronic components, TQ3, which is a noteworthy FET, is replaced with TQ1, which is an FET of another electronic component. It can be identified from TQ2.

In addition to the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 as a plurality of electronic components having the same shape, for example, a plurality of ICs having the same shape in which circuits such as an AND circuit, an OR circuit, and a Schmitt trigger inverter circuit are integrated. When IC1, IC2, and IC3 are arranged on a board, the longitudinal direction of IC1 and IC2 are arranged along the vertical direction of the board and parallel to each other, while the longitudinal direction of IC3 is arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction of the board. By rotating the electronic components counterclockwise by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) and arranging them diagonally, it is possible to determine which electronic components are the specific electronic components among the same types of electronic components having the same shape. It is very easy to determine if there is one. In addition, since IC3 is arranged diagonally with respect to IC1 and IC2, by making this diagonally arranged IC3 a specific electronic component, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of pachinko machine 1 can When instructing a hall clerk or other staff member to locate the IC3 over the phone, instructing them to look for an IC that is placed diagonally will allow the game hall clerk or other staff member to accurately grasp the location of the IC3. This facilitates communication between the person in charge at the service center and the clerk at the game hall. As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member such as a clerk at a game hall to use the IC3 over the phone, the person in charge, such as a staff member at the game hall, follows the instructions of the person in charge at the service center. Furthermore, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the board, IC3, which is a noteworthy IC, can be specified. Accordingly, among the plurality of electronic components, IC3, which is a noteworthy IC, can be identified from IC1 and IC2, which are ICs of other electronic components. Note that for the ICs IC1, IC2, and IC3, white outline lines may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board as silk printing; On the other hand, for IC3, which is an IC, a white outline and a white diagonal line formed along the outer periphery of this outline are printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board as silk printing. It may be possible to notify that the electronic component is a specific electronic component. Further, the longitudinal direction of IC1 and IC2 are arranged along the vertical direction of the board and parallel to each other, while the longitudinal direction of IC3 is oriented counterclockwise with respect to the straight line in the horizontal direction of the board at a predetermined angle α ( Here, the IC 3 is rotated by 45 degrees and arranged diagonally, but the longitudinal direction of the IC 3 may be arranged along the vertical direction of the substrate. In this case, the longitudinal direction of IC3 is perpendicular to the longitudinal directions of IC1 and IC2.

As mentioned above, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different electronic components, whereas fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a type of electronic component, the plug of the power cord was not inserted into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island equipment of the game hall, and the power supply voltage was AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. If it is accidentally plugged into a power outlet, as mentioned above, FET Q5 of the power supply breakdown circuit 630g will self-destruct and the short mode will be maintained, causing a large current to flow through fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, causing one or both of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to fail. melts. In other words, as a result of the power cord plug being accidentally inserted into an AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, and then one or both of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, become electronic components that are destroyed. There is. Therefore, in this embodiment, printing is performed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 so that it is easy to identify which electronic component will be destroyed among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630. We use a type of silk printing that has different characteristics from other types of silk printing.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 175(a), fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that will not be destroyed even if the power cord plug is accidentally inserted into an AC 100V power outlet (commercial power supply voltage), has a white color as shown in Figure 175(a). A silk-screen printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as the outline of the screen.

On the other hand, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components that are destroyed as a result of the power cord's plug being mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, are shown in Figure 175(b). As shown, the white outline and the area ad2 filled with white inside the outline are printed as silk printing on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 using silk printing FSLK2 and FSLK3. In other words, the area ad2 painted solidly in white is displayed as a characteristic pattern. Although support metal fittings (not shown) are soldered to the power supply board 630 at both ends of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the areas inside the white outline and around the support metal fittings are painted solid white. Area ad2 can be seen visually, and area ad2, which is inside the white outline and is painted solid white and corresponds to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, is transparent. It is designed so that it can be reliably viewed visually through a clear glass tube.

In this way, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, among the silk-printed FSLK1 to FSLK3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, the white color represented as a characteristic pattern By visually observing the solid-painted area ad2, it is possible to identify which electronic component should be watched more closely than other electronic components among the same type of electronic components having the same shape. It has become. This makes it extremely easy to determine which electronic components, among the same types of electronic components with the same shape, show signs that the power cord plug was mistakenly inserted into an AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage. It is now possible to specify

In addition, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member such as a clerk at an amusement hall to use fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 over the phone, an area painted solid white, which is represented as a characteristic pattern, is displayed. By instructing to search for the silk-printed FSLK2 and FSLK3 with ad2, the staff at the game hall can accurately locate the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. It becomes easier to communicate with staff such as store clerks.

As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member such as a clerk at a game hall to set fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 over the phone, the person in charge at the service center, such as a clerk at the game hall, According to the instructions, it is possible to specify the noteworthy fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the noteworthy fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be identified from the fuse FUSE3, which is another electronic component.

Furthermore, as described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are removably attached to a support fitting (also referred to as a fuse holder) that is soldered to the power supply board 630, and if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 blow out, It can be exchanged. In addition, in the above example, the white diagonal line ad1, which is represented as a characteristic pattern, and the solid white area ad2 are silk-printed in the area inside the white outline and around the support metal fittings. However, as another example 1, at least the inner area of the white outline and the area corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding the area around the support fittings may be silk-printed with a characteristic pattern. If possible, the characteristic pattern may not be silk-printed in the area inside the white outline around the support fitting, or the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, etc. may be printed without silk-screening the outline of the support fitting. Only the outline of the area corresponding to the glass tube of the FUSE 3 (not limited to the area that matches the shape of the glass tube, but may be an area that overlaps with a part of the glass tube) may be silk-printed. For example, silk printing is applied to areas corresponding to the glass tubes of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, with an oval outline that is different from the normal outline, and the inside area of this outline is painted solid white. Silk printing may be performed to fill the corresponding area with a normal rectangular outline and the inner area of this outline in solid white. In this case, depending on the outline shape of the silk printing, one of the electronic components may be selected. The noteworthy fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be identified from the fuse FUSE3, which is another electronic component.

Furthermore, in the above example, silk printing with a characteristic pattern is performed only within the outline of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 among fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, and silk printing is not performed within the outline of fuse FUSE3. However, as another example 2, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630, if it is easy to identify the electronic component to be destroyed, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, Silk printing may be performed within the entire outline of FUSE3. In this case, the shape of the outline of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 as electronic components to be destroyed should be made different from the shape of the outline of the fuse FUSE3, and silk printing should be performed to fill the inside of these outlines solid white. It's okay.

Furthermore, in the above example, silk printing with a characteristic pattern is performed only within the outline of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, and silk printing is not performed within the outline of fuse FUSE3. However, we silk-printed only the outline lines for arranging the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, and printed the transparent glass of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 among fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3. Silk printing may be used instead of using a fusing confirmation area formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the tube. Figure 177 shows examples (a) and (b) where it is difficult to use the fusing confirmation area, and examples (1) (c) and (d) where the fusing confirmation area can be used. Examples (Part 2) are (e) and (f).

As described above, if the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 will blow, but the fuse FUSE3 will not blow. Therefore, for the fuse FUSE3, which does not blow out if the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet with a commercial power voltage of 100 VAC, the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630 has As shown in 177(a), each of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuse FUSE3 has one fixed terminal and one connecting terminal, so a total of four terminals are inserted into the land pattern and soldered. Four through holes 630xs with A foil-cut area is formed. Further, a board ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "solid ground") is formed on the copper foil surface 630xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630. A region on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is a blowout confirmation region 630xc. Of the four through-holes 630xs, two through-holes 630xs into which connection terminals are inserted are connected to each other by forming wiring patterns (not shown) on the copper foil surface on the back side (solder side) of the power supply board 630. There is. When a dark-colored (for example, green or black) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630, this dark-colored resist liquid is applied as shown in FIG. 177(b). On the top, a white rectangular outline indicating the placement position of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 is printed as silk printing FSLK1'. The reason why this dark-colored resist solution is used is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of a fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because colors with different contrasts make it easier to confirm that the fuse has blown. The silk printing FSLK1', which is a rectangular outline, may surround the outer shape of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, or may surround the outer shape of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. It may surround a part of the outer shape, or it may not show the outer shape of the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 at all and may not be silk-printed at all. In this way, for fuse FUSE3 that does not blow if the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet with AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, A wiring pattern 630xn can be routed to a fusing confirmation area 630xc in an area of 630x. Note that this wiring pattern 630xn is not limited to one wiring pattern, but may be a plurality of wiring patterns. Further, even if a bright color (for example, white) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630 instead of a dark color (for example, green or black), You can also confirm that the fuse has blown by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, on this light-colored resist, a dark-colored (for example, green or black) rectangular outline indicating the placement position of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 is silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLK1' is printed. (This silk printing FSLK1' may surround the outer shape of the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, or it may surround a part of the outer shape of the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. Alternatively, the outer shape of the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 may not be shown at all and no silk-screen printing may be performed). Further, after a resist liquid of a predetermined color (for example, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630, a bright color (for example, white) is applied to cover the entire resist. May be printed. Even with this configuration, blowing of the fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the brightly colored silk print and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, a rectangular outline represented by a brightly colored (for example, white) chain line indicating the placement position of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 is silk-printed on the back side (solder side) of the power supply board 630. (This silk printing FSLK1' may surround the outer shape of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, or may surround the outer shape of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. It may be something that partially surrounds the fuse FUSE3, or it may be something that does not show any outline of the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 and is not silk-printed at all).

On the other hand, the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630 is As shown in FIG. 177(c), the 630xp has one fixed terminal and one connection terminal on the support fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, so the Among the support fittings (fuse holders), there are two through holes 630xs1 having land patterns through which two terminals are inserted and soldered to the support fittings (fuse holders) at one end, and two through holes 630xs1 to the support fittings (fuse holders) at the other end. Two through holes 630xs2 having a land pattern into which two terminals are inserted and soldered are formed, and a foil cutout area 630xa1 having a rectangular shape surrounding the two through holes 630xs1; A foil-cutting area 630xa2 having a rectangular shape is formed to surround the hole 630xs2. Further, a solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 630x on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630. The area on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is a blowout confirmation area 630xc, and the blowout confirmation area is between the foil cutout area 630xa1 and the foil cutout area 630xa2. 630xc is formed, and a solid ground is formed. Note that the through hole 630xs1 through which the connection terminal is inserted out of the two through holes 630xs1 and the through hole 630xs2 through which the connection terminal is inserted out of the two through holes 630xs2 are connected to the copper on the back side (solder side) of the power supply board 630. Wiring patterns (not shown) are formed and connected to each other on the foil surface. When a dark-colored (for example, green or black) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630, as shown in FIG. 177(d), this dark-colored resist Silk prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' are printed thereon with white rectangular outlines indicating the placement positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively. The reason why this dark-colored resist solution is used is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of a fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because colors with different contrasts make it easier to confirm that the fuse has blown. Note that the silk printing FSLK2' and FSLK3' as silk printing having an outline having a rectangular shape may have the same size as the silk printing FSLK1' described above, or may have a different size. Good too. Furthermore, these silk-printed sheets FSLK2' and FSLK3' may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or may surround the outer shapes of the supporting fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. It may be possible to surround a part of each of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, or it may be silk-printed without showing the external shapes of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 at all. In this way, for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 that melt when the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet with AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, the power supply board 630 that corresponds to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE1 and FUSE2 is Since the wiring pattern is not routed at all in the fusing confirmation area 630xc on the surface (mounting surface) 630x, there is no unevenness caused by the wiring pattern and the foil-cutting area around the wiring pattern in this fusing confirmation area 630xc. A flat surface can be formed without forming. Thereby, the fuse wires (metallic elements) accommodated in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be easily recognized with the flat surface of the blowout confirmation area 630xc as the background. Therefore, it is possible to easily check whether or not the fuse wires (metal elements) housed in the transparent glass tubes of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are broken. (May be written as "Modification (1)"). Further, even if a bright color (for example, white) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630 instead of a dark color (for example, green or black), You can also confirm that the fuse has blown by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, on this light-colored resist, dark-colored rectangular outlines indicating the placement positions of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are printed as silk-screen printing, respectively. (These silk prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' may surround the outer shape of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holder) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or may surround the outer shape of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holder) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. It may be possible to enclose a part of each of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, or it may be silk-printed without showing the outline of each of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 at all. (May be described as "Modification (2) in which the wiring pattern is not included in the fusing confirmation area.") Further, after a resist liquid of a predetermined color (for example, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630, a bright color (for example, white) is applied to cover the entire resist. May be printed. Even with this configuration, blowing of the fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the brightly colored silk print and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, the outline lines having a rectangular shape represented by bright colored (for example, white) chain lines indicating the placement positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLK2' and FSLK3' are (The silk printing FSLK2', FSLK3' may surround the outer shape of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, respectively, or may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2. It may enclose a part of the outer shape of each fuse, or it may not show the outer shape of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 at all and is not silk-printed. "Modification (3) in which the wiring pattern is not included in the fusing confirmation area of the board").

In addition, the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 is , as shown in Figure 177(e), each of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 has one fixed terminal and one connecting terminal, so a total of four terminals are inserted and soldered. Four through-holes 630xs having a land pattern, and a foil-cutting area 630xa having a rectangular shape are formed to surround the four through-holes 630xs. Further, a solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 630x on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630. Of the foil removal area 630xa, an area on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is a blowout confirmation area 630xc. Of the four through-holes 630xs, two through-holes 630xs into which connection terminals are inserted are connected to each other by forming wiring patterns (not shown) on the copper foil surface on the back side (solder side) of the power supply board 630. There is. When a dark-colored (for example, green or black) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630, this dark-colored resist solution is applied as shown in FIG. 177(f). Silk prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' are printed on the resist as white rectangular outlines indicating the placement positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively. The reason why this dark-colored resist solution is used is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of a fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because colors with different contrasts make it easier to confirm that the fuse has blown. Note that the silk printing FSLK2' and FSLK3' as silk printing having an outline having a rectangular shape may have the same size as the silk printing FSLK1' described above, or may have a different size. Good too. Furthermore, these silk-printed sheets FSLK2' and FSLK3' may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or may surround the outer shapes of the supporting fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. It may be possible to surround a part of each of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, or it may be silk-printed without showing the external shapes of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 at all. In this way, the foil-cut area 630xa is formed and the recess is formed for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which will melt if the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet with AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage. Of this foil removal area 630xa, no wiring pattern is routed to the fusing confirmation area 630xc on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. 630xc, a flat surface can be formed without forming any unevenness due to the wiring pattern and the foil-cut area around the wiring pattern. Thereby, the fuse wires (metallic elements) accommodated in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be easily recognized with the flat surface of the blowout confirmation area 630xc as the background. Therefore, it is possible to easily check whether or not the fuse wires (metal elements) housed in the transparent glass tubes of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are broken. (May be written as "Modification (4)"). Further, even if a bright color (for example, white) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630 instead of a dark color (for example, green or black), You can also confirm that the fuse has blown by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, on this light-colored resist, dark-colored rectangular outlines indicating the placement positions of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are printed as silk-screen printing, respectively. (These silk prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' may surround the outer shape of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holder) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or may surround the outer shape of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holder) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. It may be possible to enclose a part of each of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, or it may be silk-printed without showing the outline of each of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 at all. (May be described as "Modification (5) in which the wiring pattern is not included in the fusing confirmation area"). Further, after a resist liquid of a predetermined color (for example, green or yellow) is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630, a bright color (for example, white) is applied so as to cover the entire resist. May be silk-printed. Even with this configuration, blowing of the fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the brightly colored silk print and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, the outline lines having a rectangular shape represented by bright colored (for example, white) chain lines indicating the placement positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLK2' and FSLK3' are (The silk printing FSLK2', FSLK3' may surround the outer shape of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, respectively, or may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2. It may enclose a part of the outer shape of each fuse, or it may not show the outer shape of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 at all and is not silk-printed. Modification example (6) in which there is no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area of the board)"

Furthermore, in the above example, silk printing with a characteristic pattern is performed only within the outline of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 among fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, and silk printing is not performed within the outline of fuse FUSE3. However, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuse that is most likely to blow out may be indicated by the arrangement method. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing the arrangement method of the fuse that is most likely to blow out among the three fuses. For example, as shown in FIG. 179, when arranging fuses F1, F2, and F3 that are most likely to blow out, when arranging fuses F1, F2, and F3 on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of a power supply board 630, a power supply board 630 having a rectangular shape is used. , the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is aligned along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is directed in the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. ) Fuse F1 is arranged, and the longitudinal direction of fuse F2 is aligned along the left and right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of power supply board 630 (in other words, the longitudinal direction of fuse F2 is arranged along the horizontal direction of surface (mounting surface) 630x of power supply board 630. The longitudinal direction of the fuse F3 is set at a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degree) to place fuse F3 diagonally. Fuse F1 and fuse F2 are arranged at right angles to each other. In addition, when the part numbers of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 are silk-printed, they may be placed near each of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 along the longitudinal direction of each of the fuses F1, F2, and F3. (For example, the part number of fuse F1 is determined by rotating the part number of fuse F1 by 90 degrees counterclockwise along the longitudinal direction of fuse F1, and then turning the part number of fuse F1 in the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of power supply board 630. The part number of fuse F2 is placed near F1, and the part number of fuse F2 is placed in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of power supply board 630 without rotating the part number of fuse F2 counterclockwise at all along the longitudinal direction of fuse F2. The part number of fuse F3 is set by rotating the part number of fuse F3 counterclockwise by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) along the longitudinal direction of fuse F3. The surface (mounting surface) of 630 (mounting surface) 630x is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle α (45 degrees here) with respect to the horizontal line of 630x and placed near fuse F3), or fuse F1 , F2, and F3, all facing in the same direction (the part numbers for fuses F1, F2, and F3 all point in the same direction; The fuses F1, F2, and F3 may be placed near the fuses F1, F2, and F3 in the horizontal direction on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 without being rotated in any direction, or the part numbers of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 may be (The fuses may be rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees and placed near each of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 in the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630). In this way, even if the fuses F1, F2, and F3 are electronic components having the same shape, since the fuse F3 is arranged diagonally with respect to the fuses F1 and F2, the fuse F3 arranged diagonally By setting the fuse to be the fuse that is most likely to blow, it is possible to identify which electronic component should be watched more closely than other electronic components among the same type of electronic components having the same shape. This makes it extremely easy to determine which electronic components, among the same types of electronic components with the same shape, show signs that the power cord plug was mistakenly inserted into an AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage. can be specified. In addition, since the fuse F3 is arranged diagonally with respect to the fuse F1 and the fuse F2, by making the fuse F3 arranged diagonally the fuse that is most likely to blow, the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can When a person in charge instructs a game hall clerk or other staff member to locate fuse F3 over the phone, the person in charge of the game hall store staff or other staff member can easily locate the fuse F3 by instructing them to look for a fuse that is placed diagonally. This makes it easier to communicate between the person in charge at the service center and the clerk at the game hall. As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a person in charge of the game hall, such as a clerk, to set the fuse F3 over the phone, the person in charge, such as a game hall clerk, Accordingly, it is possible to specify the noteworthy fuse F3 among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the noteworthy fuse F3 can be identified from the fuses F1 and F2, which are other electronic components. Note that for the fuses F1 and F2, the white outline shown in FIG. (Alternative example 1 or alternative example 2 may be adopted.) Alternatively, the wiring pattern 630xn may be routed without forming any of the fusing confirmation areas shown in FIGS. 177(a) and 177(b). For fuse F3, the white outline shown in FIG. 175(b) and the area ad2 filled with white inside this outline are silk printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. It may be printed, or the fusing confirmation area 630xc, which is a flat surface shown in FIGS. may be done.

Furthermore, for the fuses F1, F2, and F3, the white outline shown in FIG. (Mounting surface) May be printed at 630x. The fuse F1 is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (that is, with the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 directed in the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630). , and the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is aligned along the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is oriented in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. ) Place the fuse F2, and rotate the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3 by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) counterclockwise with respect to the horizontal line of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. When the fuse F3 is arranged diagonally, the area ad2 printed in solid white on the screen for the fuse F1 is oriented 90 degrees in the vertical direction, and the area ad2 printed on the screen for the fuse F1 is oriented 90 degrees vertically The area ad2 painted solidly in white is oriented toward 0 degrees (zero degrees) in the left-right direction, and the area ad2 printed solidly in white is oriented 45 degrees with respect to the fuse F3. As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member such as a clerk at a game hall to use the FET TQ3 over the phone, the staff member such as a game hall clerk will Please find the electronic component whose solid white area is oriented at 45 degrees.'' According to the instructions of the service center personnel, we selected the noteworthy fuse F3 among the multiple electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. It is now possible to identify. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the noteworthy fuse F3 can be identified from the fuses F1 and F2, which are other electronic components.

Furthermore, for the fuses F1, F2, and F3, the white outline shown in FIG. (Mounting surface) 630x, if the fuse F1 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is parallel to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, then this fuse F1 The fuse F2 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is parallel to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3 is arranged on the right side of the power supply board 630. When the fuse F3 is arranged parallel to the top and bottom of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, that is, the fuses F1, F2, and F3 are arranged vertically parallel to the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. If they are arranged parallel to each other, all of the solid white areas ad2 will be oriented 90 degrees in the vertical direction, making it difficult to identify electronic components using only the white solid area ad2. . Therefore, in such a case, instead of the solid white area ad2, a plurality of white diagonal lines ad1' arranged at equal intervals within the outline may be silk-printed. In this case, for example, the silk-printed white diagonal line ad1' for fuses F1 and F2 should both be a straight line tilted upward at 45 degrees to the right, while the silk-printed white diagonal line ad1' for fuse F3 ad1' may be a straight line (horizontal line) in the left-right direction. Even if electronic components of the same type and having the same shape are arranged parallel to each other, a person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can call a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall to check the fuse F3. When giving instructions, the staff such as the clerk at the game hall should follow the instructions given by the service center personnel, ``Find the electronic component whose silk-printed white diagonal line is a straight line (horizontal line) in the left and right direction.'' Furthermore, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, the noteworthy fuse F3 can be specified. Therefore, even if electronic components of the same type and having the same shape are arranged in parallel to each other, the noteworthy fuse F3 among the plurality of electronic components can be distinguished from the fuses F1 and F2, which are other electronic components. can do.

[16-3. Check fuse blowout]
Next, a description will be given of checking the blowout of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 of the same type and having the same shape and mounted on the power supply board 630. As mentioned above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (the support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and when they melt, the fuse wire (metal element) housed in the transparent glass tube is disconnected. Soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube. Of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show signs that the power cord plug was mistakenly inserted into a power outlet with AC100V, which is the commercial power voltage. If the power cord's plug is accidentally inserted into a 100V AC power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, it will melt. Therefore, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned silk printing FSLK2 and FSLK3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as silk printing for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 so that it is easy to check the state of the blown fuse wire (metal element). ing. As described above, the silk printing FSLK2 and FSLK3 have the solid white area ad2 expressed as a characteristic pattern, so they correspond to the transparent glass tubes excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. By visually observing the solid white area ad2 through the transparent glass tube, it is easy to check whether the fuse wires (metal elements) housed in the transparent glass tubes of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are disconnected. be able to.

As a result, an attendant such as a clerk at the game hall or a worker installing the pachinko machine 1 (replacing the game board 5) can connect the plug of the power cord that supplies the power supply voltage to the pachinko machine 1 to AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. If you accidentally plug it into an AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, instead of the AC power outlet, and turn on the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630 to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1, as a trace, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 will appear. When the fuse wire (metal element) housed in one or both of the transparent glass tubes breaks, soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube, so staff such as game hall clerks and workers Even if you claim that ``even if you plug the power cord plug into the power outlet, the power cannot be turned on, so it must be an initial defect,'' you cannot cover up (or make excuses for) your own work mistakes (wiring mistakes). It has become.

On the other hand, as the silk printing for the fuse FUSE3, the silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, as described above. In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the power supply board 630. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a green resist is solidly applied to the region of the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the silk-screen printing FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3. No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the solid green resistor that corresponds to the transparent glass tube of fuse FUSE3 (that is, the area of the solid green resistor that corresponds to the transparent glass tube of fuse FUSE3 Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the area, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This can be determined by visually observing the area of the solid green resistor that corresponds to the transparent glass tube of fuse FUSE3 through the transparent glass tube. By improving the visibility of the state of the fuse wire (metal element), it is now possible to check whether the fuse wire (metal element) is broken.

Note that, as described above, the power line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630 is connected to the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 37, and the CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1, and supplies 24VAC and 24V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 not only functions as a means for relaying various signals, but also functions as a means for supplying power to a CR unit (not shown). As a sign that the plug of the power cord was mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power voltage, there is a fuse (not shown) on the interface board 635 (in this embodiment, a transparent fuse with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm). Only one glass tube (the support terminals at both ends are made of metal), type B fusing specified in the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law) is provided, and the silk shown in FIG. Printing is printed on its mounting surface. A green resist is solidly applied to a region of the mounting surface of the interface board 635 corresponding to the silk-screen printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown). No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the solid green resistor that corresponds to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the green register area, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE by visually observing the area of the solid green register corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) through the transparent glass tube. The visibility of the state of the fuse wire (metal element) is improved, and it is now possible to confirm whether or not the fuse wire (metal element) is broken. A fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 is provided on one of the AC 24VA and AC 24V supplied from the power line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630.

Note that the surface (mounting surface) of the interface board 635 corresponds to a transparent glass tube of a fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635, which will melt if the power cord plug is accidentally inserted into a power outlet with AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage. Silk printing may be used instead of using the fusing confirmation area formed in the area. FIG. 178 shows an example (Part 1) (a), (b) in which the blowout confirmation area can be used, and an example (Part 2) (c), (d) in which the blowout check area can be used.

For a fuse (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "fuse not shown") provided on the interface board 635 that melts if the power cord plug is accidentally inserted into a power outlet with AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage. As shown in FIG. 178(a), on the copper foil surface 635xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635, one fixed terminal and one fixed terminal are attached to support fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of a fuse (not shown). Since there are two connection terminals, there are two through holes with land patterns into which two terminals are inserted and soldered to the support metal fittings (fuse holders) at one end of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuse (not shown). A hole 635xs1 and two through holes 635xs2 having a land pattern through which two terminals are inserted and soldered to a support fitting (fuse holder) at the other end are formed and surround the two through holes 635xs1. A foil-cutting region 635xa1 having a rectangular shape and a foil-cutting region 635xa2 having a rectangular shape are formed so as to surround the two through holes 635xs2. Further, a solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 635x on the front surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635. A region on the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635 corresponding to a transparent glass tube of a fuse (not shown) is a blowout confirmation area 635xc, and a blowout confirmation area 635xc is provided between the foil cutout area 635xa1 and the foil cutout area 635xa2. is formed, and a solid ground is formed. The through hole 635xs1 through which the connection terminal is inserted out of the two through holes 635xs1 and the through hole 635xs2 through which the connection terminal is inserted out of the two through holes 635xs2 are connected to the copper on the back side (solder side) of the interface board 635. Wiring patterns (not shown) are formed and connected to each other on the foil surface. When a dark-colored (for example, green or black) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635, this dark-colored resist liquid is applied as shown in FIG. 178(b). Silk printing IFSLK is printed as a white rectangular outline indicating the arrangement position of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown above. The reason why this dark-colored resist solution is used is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of a fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because colors with different contrasts make it easier to confirm that the fuse has blown. Note that the silk printing IFSLK, which is a rectangular outline, may have the same size as the silk printing FSLK1' of the power supply board 630, or may have a different size. Good too. Further, this silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or it may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown. Alternatively, the outer shape of the fuse support fitting (fuse holder), which is not shown, may not be shown at all and no silk-screen printing may be performed. In this way, for the fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635, which will melt if the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet with AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, the transparent glass tube of this fuse (not shown) and Since the wiring pattern is not routed at all in the fusing confirmation area 635xc on the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the corresponding interface board 635, the wiring pattern and the foil-cutting area around this wiring pattern are routed to the fusing confirmation area 635xc. A flat surface can be formed without any unevenness caused by . As a result, it is possible to easily check whether there is a break in the fuse wire (metal element) housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) with the flat surface of the blowout confirmation area 635xc as the background. This aspect may be described as "Modification (1) in which the wiring pattern is not provided in the fusing confirmation area of the interface board"). Furthermore, even if a bright color (for example, white) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635 instead of a dark color (for example, green or black), You can also confirm that the fuse has blown by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, the silk-printed IFSLK is printed on the light-colored resist as a dark-colored rectangular outline indicating the placement position of the fuse support (fuse holder) (not shown). may surround the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown. (The fuse holder may not show any outline of the fuse support fitting (fuse holder) and may not be silk-printed at all.) ). Further, after a resist liquid of a predetermined color (for example, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635, a bright color (for example, white) is applied to cover the entire resist. May be printed. Even with this configuration, blowing of the fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the brightly colored silk printing and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, the outline line having a rectangular shape represented by a chain line of a bright color (for example, white) indicating the placement position of the fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) is printed as a silk-screen print (IFSLK). The silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown. However, the fuse holder (not shown) may not show the outline of the fuse holder at all and may not be silk-printed. )”).

Additionally, a fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 that melts if the power cord plug is accidentally inserted into a power outlet with a commercial power supply voltage of 100 V AC (hereinafter may simply be referred to as "fuse not shown"). On the other hand, on the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635, as shown in FIG. and one connection terminal, so there are four through-holes 635xs having a land pattern into which a total of four terminals are inserted and soldered, and a foil-cutting area having a rectangular shape surrounding the four through-holes 635xs. 635xa is formed. Further, a solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 635x on the front surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635. Of the foil removal area 635xa, an area on the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635 corresponding to a transparent glass tube of a fuse (not shown) is a blowout confirmation area 635xc. Of the four through holes 635xs, two through holes 635xs into which the connection terminals are inserted are connected to each other by forming wiring patterns (not shown) on the copper foil surface on the back (solder side) side of the interface board 635. There is. When a dark-colored (for example, green or black) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635, this dark-colored resist solution is applied as shown in FIG. 178(d). Silk printing IFSLK is printed on the resist as a white rectangular outline indicating the placement position of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown. The reason why this dark-colored resist solution is used is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of a fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because colors with different contrasts make it easier to confirm that the fuse has blown. Note that the silk printing IFSLK, which is a rectangular outline, may have the same size as the silk printing FSLK1' of the power supply board 630, or may have a different size. Good too. Further, this silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or it may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown. Alternatively, the outer shape of the fuse support fitting (fuse holder), which is not shown, may not be shown at all and no silk-screen printing may be performed. In this way, a foil-cut area 635xa is formed and a recess is formed for a fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 that will blow if the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet with a commercial power supply voltage of 100 V AC. Although it is formed, no wiring pattern is routed in the fusing confirmation area 635xc of the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) in the foil removal area 635xa. A flat surface can be formed in this fusing confirmation area 635xc without forming any unevenness due to the wiring pattern and the foil-cutting area around the wiring pattern. As a result, it is possible to easily check whether there is a break in the fuse wire (metal element) housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) with the flat surface of the blowout confirmation area 635xc as the background. This aspect may be described as "Modification (4) in which the wiring pattern is not provided in the fusing confirmation area of the interface board"). Furthermore, even if a bright color (for example, white) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635 instead of a dark color (for example, green or black), You can also confirm that the fuse has blown by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, the silk-printed IFSLK is printed on the light-colored resist as a dark-colored rectangular outline indicating the placement position of the fuse support (fuse holder) (not shown). may surround the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown. (The fuse holder may not show any outline of the fuse support fitting (fuse holder) and may not be silk-printed at all.) ). Further, after a resist liquid of a predetermined color (for example, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635, a bright color (for example, white) is applied to cover the entire resist. May be printed. Even with this configuration, blowing of the fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the brightly colored silk print and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, the outline line having a rectangular shape represented by a brightly colored (for example, white) chain line indicating the placement position of the fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) is printed as a silkscreen IFSLK (this The silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown. However, the fuse holder (not shown) may not show the outline of the fuse holder at all and may not be silk-printed.) )”).

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creation circuit 630f, and a power supply destruction circuit 630g are provided on one board called the power supply board 630. , various electronic components, etc. were provided, but it can also be configured to be provided separately on two boards. For example, the power supply board 630 includes a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, and the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly includes power line connectors DCN1, DCN2, ground connection terminal DCN5, fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, power switch 630a, noise suppression circuit 630b, and wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B includes diodes D5 and D6, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply generation circuit 630f, a power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a choke coil L2, as shown in FIG. , L3, L4, fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B. Wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. The AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A are transmitted to the wiring on the second power supply board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When inputted to connector B, in addition to being inputted to the rectifier circuit 630c, it is also inputted to the anode terminals of diodes D5 and D6, and outputted from the cathode terminals of diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and inputted to the power generation circuit 630f. It happens. In addition, various DC voltages such as DC +35V, DC +12V, DC +5V, etc. created in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A. Ru.

Incidentally, gaming machines that are equipped with a board such as a power supply board that can create various power supplies necessary for the gaming machine based on external power supplied from outside the gaming machine have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014 -008221 (Figure 2)). By the way, when a person in charge of the service center of a gaming machine manufacturer instructs a clerk or other person in charge of a game hall over the phone to specify a specific electronic component on the board, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the gaming machine may instruct the person in charge of a specific electronic component on the board as instructed by the person in charge of the service center. There is a problem in that it is difficult to identify the electronic component of interest among the multiple electronic components.

Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed that are equipped with a board such as a power supply board that can generate various power supplies necessary for the gaming machine based on an external power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine (for example, -008221 (Figure 2)). By the way, even if the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the gaming machine instructs the staff such as the clerk of the gaming hall to check whether the fuse wire of the fuse installed on the circuit board has blown out or not. However, it has been difficult to easily check whether the fuse wire is disconnected or not.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

For example, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a game machine, but it is also applicable to other game machines such as a mahjong ball machine and an arrangement ball machine. It is also applicable to slot machines that rotate rotating drums or reels. Here, the slot machine will be explained with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 180, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body portion (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body portion (box) 6004 are interconnected via a hinge (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, insert the key into the keyhole 6005 of the metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turn it clockwise to lock the front door (front frame) 6002 into the main body. Part (box) 6004 can be opened.

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to lock the main body part (box) 6004. It is used to open and close the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device includes a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending back and forth, a metal keyhole 6005 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body, and a metal keyhole 6005 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body. It includes a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates when a regular metal key is rotated. The cylinder body of the metal locking device passes through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed into a cylindrical shape with an open rear end (more specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member is configured such that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder 654 of a metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. By inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) is transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated. I can do it. If the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit are in contact with each other when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004, the metal The locking device and the locking unit are now electrically connected.

In addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide rigidity, the door frame reinforcing unit also functions as a door frame metal ground, and connects the main body ( It is electrically connected to the ground board provided inside the box (box) 6004. In other words, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This grounding board (not shown) is capable of consolidating electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding it to the island equipment of the game hall. Electrically connected to equipment ground.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body part (box body) 6004 is arranged on the main body part (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. There is. This open switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal due to the opening/closing operation of the metal locking device. Rather, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004 is detected independently of the opening/closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch should not be placed near the metal locking device, and should be located below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. An open switch is arranged on the part (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. In this way, even if electromagnetic noise were to enter the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch would not be affected by this electromagnetic noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative parts have no decorative plating applied at all, while others have decorative plating applied to the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating, such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity, so electromagnetic noise may penetrate. Among the various decorative parts, those whose entire front and back surfaces are decorated with decorative plating are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit through wiring (not shown), while others have electrically conductive members attached directly to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. (Some are connected electrically). This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the various decorative sections from entering the board ground of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative sections by transmitting it to the metal door frame reinforcing unit. In addition, electromagnetic noise that penetrates into various decorative parts that have decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground wire is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. It is transmitted to the ground board provided inside the main body part (box) 6004, and from the ground board to the ground of the island equipment of the gaming hall via the island equipment ground wire, and removed from the slot machine 6000. In other words, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side, as described above.

Note that a static eliminator pad may be provided as a static eliminator at a predetermined location on the front of the front door (front frame) 6002, and when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body portion (box) 6004, A static eliminator pad may be provided as a static eliminator on the open side opposite to the side where the hinge is arranged (closed side). The static electricity removal pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic wave noise) caused by electrostatic discharge.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front of the slot machine 6000 and includes various decorative parts. Some have decorative plating applied to the entire surface, and among various decorative parts, those with decorative plating applied to the entire front and back are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring not shown. The ground board provided inside the main body part (box) 6004 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire The metal door frame reinforcement unit and the power supply board are connected electrically to the terminals of the power supply board of the power supply unit 620c provided inside the main body part (box) 6004 without being electrically connected to the ground board. It may also be electrically connected. The power supply board is supplied with 24V AC from the island equipment of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (line) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that transiently protects against excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and hardly allows current to flow through it, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value instantly decreases and current flows, and when the overvoltage disappears, the surge protection element (surge absorber) , which has the ability to return to its original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the N terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) by the surge protection element (surge absorber) from the terminal of the power supply board, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. .

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a protrusion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002. A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this protrusion. Further, a storage payment button 6022 and a decorative board 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative board 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, storage settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004.

The main control board box 1320 accommodates the main control board 1310 as well as a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a that can change setting values is mounted. That is, as described above, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. Therefore, a setting key switch 1311a is arranged inside the main body portion (box) 6004. Note that the setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and may be attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004, or It may be attached and fixed to the housing of the power supply unit 620c provided inside the portion (box body) 6004. In addition to the above-mentioned setting key switch 1311a, the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 also includes a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values, and a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot). A setting display 1310g configured as a single device, the above-mentioned setting change permission lamp 1310z, etc. may be implemented.

The setting key switch 1311a has substantially the same configuration as that provided in the pachinko machine 1 described above, and a setting key is inserted into the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing and rotated. Contains a setting key cylinder. The surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. The front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing is arranged approximately on the same plane as the front surface of the setting key cylinder in which the insertion port for inserting the setting key is provided, and the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) The surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the casing (or rectangular shape) is disposed substantially on the same plane as the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. When the setting key cylinder is housed in the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) case, the setting key cylinder is electrically connected to the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) case. It becomes.

The configurations (including other configurations (modified examples)) of the main control board 1310, setting change board 1311, setting key switch 1311a, main control board box 1320, etc. are approximately the same as those provided in the pachinko machine 1 described above. Although the explanation will be omitted because it has the same structure and the same effect, an example will be explained by electromagnetic waves caused by electrostatic discharge caused by charging the person accessing the setting key switch 1311a himself/herself. Even if noise enters from the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 or the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or setting key cylinder, as described above, the surface of the setting change board 1311 ( The rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a is formed by forming the foil-cut areas SINSx, SINSy of the setting change board 1311 in the copper planes on the mounting surface) and the back surface (soldering surface). A pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long elongated hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 into which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the setting change board 1311 can be inserted are located on the surface of the setting change board 1311. Since it is electrically insulated from the solid earth (board ground) formed on the mounting surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (soldering surface), the person accessing the setting key switch 1311a may be charged with static electricity and discharged. It is possible to attenuate electromagnetic wave noise caused by the setting key switch 1311a by the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or the setting key cylinder. This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge caused by a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311. , there is no influence on the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, and there is no change in the ground line that transmits the board ground (ground). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

Note that by filling the space between the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder with non-conductive resin (insulating resin), the setting key cylinder can be replaced with a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) ), the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing and the setting key cylinder are not electrically connected and are insulated. good. Even with this configuration, even if electromagnetic noise enters from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, this electromagnetic noise will be transmitted to the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. metal It is damped by the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself. In other words, electromagnetic noise from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing can be prevented from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311 by the foil-cut areas SINSx, SINSy. This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the setting change board 1311 from entering the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing. The main control board 1310, which is an important control board that controls the progress of the main control board 1310, can be reliably stopped from advancing to the board ground, and the ground line that transmits the board ground (ground) will not be affected. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the gaming panel 6006, and through this display window, three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000, performance devices (not shown), etc. can be viewed. It is now possible to see through. The three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side attachment member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. On the other hand, a presentation device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

For these variable rotating bodies, a translucent pattern band with multiple types of patterns (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) printed as pattern information is attached to each cylindrical frame. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotary body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and each variable rotary body is connected to an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown). These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed in the display window that changes continuously from top to bottom. It looks like this.

The performance device includes a plurality of movable performance bodies (not shown), the above-mentioned performance display device 1600, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of a plurality of movable presentation objects, the drawing control of the presentation display device 1600, the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates, etc. based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The progress of the performance is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

The main control board 1310 starts displaying symbol information in a variable manner based on the operation of the start lever 6014 when a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal slot 6008 as game media, and the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6018, and the right The variable display of symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) and pays out a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026 on the condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode.

According to this slot machine 6000, a front door 6002 is provided on the front side as an openable/closable door, a main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 as a board on which electronic components are mounted, and a first key (game hall The first operation (when opening the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body part (box) 6004) can be performed by operating a regular metal key held by an employee such as a store clerk. The first device is a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002, and the second operation (setting value is controlled by operating a second key (setting key) different from the first key). The main control board box serves as a second device where the signal line can be electrically connected to the electronic components by operating the second key. 1320 includes a setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a is a switch that allows setting of multiple types of winning probabilities (when changing the setting value), and a switch that allows checking of the current setting value (when changing the setting value). (when checking the current setting values). A metal locking device provided on the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided on the front side of the front door (front frame) 6002, and the casing of the metal locking device is electrically connected to the ground side. ing. The setting key switch 1311a is provided behind the front door (front frame) 6002, and the casing of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground side and is insulated.

Specifically, the metal cylindrical cylinder body which is the housing of the metal locking device of the front door 6002 is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side or the ground side which is N (neutral) of 24 VAC. connected to. In addition, by forming the foil-cut areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 in the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311, the metal cylindrical shape ( a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 having a long elongated hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 into which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of a rectangular (or rectangular) housing can be inserted; The SLH2 can be electrically insulated from the solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311. Therefore, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a is connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311. It is electrically isolated from ground (ground).

In this way, the casing of the metal locking device provided on the front side of the front door (front frame) 6002 is electrically connected to the ground side, so if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated in the metal locking device, Even if the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) escapes to the ground side, the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is the board on which electronic components are mounted, will not fluctuate, and the front door (front frame) Since the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the rear side of the setting key switch 6002 is not electrically connected to the ground side and is insulated, it is assumed that the metal cylindrical Even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) intrudes into a shaped (or rectangular) casing, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is attenuated by the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing itself. It is possible to prevent fluctuations in the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which components are mounted. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

In addition, the metal cylindrical cylinder body which is the housing of the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 is connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the AC 24V supplied to the slot machine 6000. While electrically connected to the ground side which is N (neutral), the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a is connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000. It is not electrically connected to the ground side, which is N (neutral) of the AC 24V supplied to the slot machine 6000, and is insulated. As a result, the metal cylindrical cylinder body is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the ground side which is N (neutral) of the AC 24V supplied to the slot machine 6000. On the other hand, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing connects to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 and the ground side which is N (neutral) of the AC 24V supplied to the slot machine 6000. It can be in a state where it is not electrically connected and is insulated.

In addition, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and the locking unit (not shown) (that is, the front door (front frame) 6002 is ), it is now possible to set multiple types of winning probabilities using the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 housed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. (when changing the setting value), and it is now possible to check the current setting value (when checking the current setting value). As a result, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and the locking unit (not shown) (in other words, the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed to the main body part (box)). 6004), the setting key switch 1311a is accessed to operate the setting key switch 1311a and the setting value can be set (when changing the setting value) or the setting value can be confirmed (if the setting value is not set). (when checking the current setting values), it is possible to improve the security of the setting key switch 1311a.

In addition, in the integrated gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 controls when a predetermined number of game balls as game media are inserted into the ball slot 6008', and when the starting lever 6014 is operated. Based on this, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) on the condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount to the game ball receptacle 6026 as a game medium.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame lower unit 120 Swelling part 123 Device placement part 130 Upper tray (storage tray)
131 Storage area 131a Front area 131b Side area 132 Bottom wall 133 Rear peripheral wall (peripheral wall)
134 Front circumferential wall 135 Supply port 136 Outlet port 137 Aligning section 138 Storage light emitting decoration section (light emitting decoration section)
138a LED
150 Door frame production device (production device)
1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1120 Panel holder 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board (effect control means)
1511 Peripheral control unit (performance control means)
1512 Effect display control unit (effect control means)
1600 Effect display device (effect display means)
3000 Back unit 3200 Back second production unit (front decoration body)
3210 Rotating decorative body (front decorative body)
3228 Back second outer decoration (front decoration)
3229 Back second inner decoration (front decoration)
3230 Back second inner peripheral decoration (front decoration)
3300 Back third production unit 3310 Upper unit 3311 Upper vertical ring decoration (movable decoration)
3312 First decorative body 3313 Second decorative body 3320 Back third upper drive motor (drive motor)
3330 Lower unit 3331 Lower vertical ring decoration body (movable decoration body)
3332 First decorative body 3333 Second decorative body 3340 Back third lower drive motor (drive motor)
3350 Left unit 3351 Left horizontal ring decoration (movable decoration)
3352 First decorative body 3353 Second decorative body 3360 Back third left drive motor (drive motor)
3370 Right unit 3371 Right horizontal ring decoration (movable decoration)
3372 First decorative body 3373 Second decorative body 3380 Back third right drive motor (drive motor)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with a board on which multiple electronic components including fuses are mounted,
On the mounting surface of the board,
A dark resist film of green or black color is formed over substantially the entire area, and position specifying information for specifying the mounting area of the fuse is printed on the resist film,
The position specifying information is a bright color compared to the color of the resist film,
A specific mounting area facing the glass tube of the fuse among the mounting areas of the fuse specified by the position specifying information is configured such that the resist film is formed and the specific mounting area is visually recognized in the dark color;
Wired so that AC power is input to a first terminal part of the fuse, and AC power is output from a second terminal part of the fuse,
The signal wiring pattern of the board is formed without passing through the specific mounting area,
Furthermore, the gaming machine is equipped with a special electronic component that is activated when the voltage of the power supply input to the gaming machine exceeds a preset voltage, and the fuse is connected to the power supply input to the gaming machine and the electricity. connected to
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images